Independent English edition

Algebraic Curves — Units 1–30

Thirty lectures and worksheets, independent English edition

Holger Brenner (source work)

Contents

About this edition

This is an independent English edition of the complete classical 30-unit sequence of Holger Brenner’s Algebraische Kurven. Its scope is thirty lectures and thirty worksheets, together with every public solution available at the frozen source boundary. The source material comes from two distinct course boundaries. Units 1–23 follow the frozen revisions of Algebraische Kurven (Osnabrück 2025–2026). At the frozen boundary, that course has no Unit 24 or later units. Units 24–30 therefore follow the official lectures and worksheets of the earlier complete course, Algebraische Kurven (Osnabrück 2012). They are not an official continuation of the 2025–2026 edition, and the two courses are not treated as one source edition.

Translation, checking and edition production are assisted by OpenAI Codex gpt-5.6-sol, Ultra. The work is carried out on the user’s instructions. This is not an official publication of the University of Osnabrück, Holger Brenner, Wikiversity, OpenAI or the Wikimedia Foundation, and does not imply their endorsement.

The source lecture text was written by Holger Brenner (Wikiversity username: Bocardodarapti). The source material for Units 1–23 is declared to be under Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 4.0 International. Units 24–30 retain the recorded rights chain for the 2012 source components, including the earlier Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 2.0 Germany notice and the CC BY-SA 4.0 declaration applicable to the frozen semantic components. The translated text of this edition is shared under CC BY-SA 4.0, with its attribution and ShareAlike obligations; this does not replace or erase the licences of the source components.

The edition translates and reformats the source material. Language changes, layout changes, disclosed corrections and editorial bridges were made in 2026. The accompanying control files and backend record the source revisions, hashes, relationship of each unit to its source, mathematical corrections and connective additions. The model identification above is a tool-provenance record, not a replacement for the source author’s credit or human-contributor credits.

Images from Wikimedia Commons and Wikiversity, and the official upstream PDFs, are not all covered by the translated text’s licence declaration. Each component retains its own creator, source and licence, as recorded in authority/RIGHTS.csv, the applicable per-unit rights and asset-closure files, and the media credits at the end of the reader. Unit 30 adds one public-domain image. This reader is a collection with mixed component licences, not a blanket licensing claim over every component.

The controlling text for each unit is the Wikiversity revision identified in that unit’s authority freeze. Unit 24 binds Lecture 24 revision 933672 and Worksheet 24 revision 793492 from the 2012 course. Unit 25 binds Lecture 25 revision 793525 and Worksheet 25 revision 793493. Unit 26 binds Lecture 26 revision 793526 and Worksheet 26 revision 793494. Unit 27 binds Lecture 27 page 50733 revision 1052572 and Worksheet 27 page 50762 revision 793496. Unit 28 binds Lecture 28 page 50734 revision 1052516 and Worksheet 28 page 50763 revision 793497. Unit 29 binds Lecture 29 page 51996 revision 1069408 and Worksheet 29 page 50924 revision 1052757. Unit 30 binds Lecture 30 page 51997 revision 1112650 and Worksheet 30 page 50925 revision 1112597. The Unit 30 authority manifest is authority/wikiversity/unit-30/UNIT_AUTHORITY_MANIFEST.json, with SHA-256 b990783fda97e721cc415740671e75c749400c408481ab88f4afd68f286d8b8a.

The official PDF metadata for each unit is frozen as visual/build evidence, not as a substitute textual authority. The PDF bytes for Units 1–29 are also held locally. For Unit 30, the two 2012 PDFs (7 and 2 pages) remain bound only by their official metadata: a bounded retrieval on 1 September 2026 again received HTTP 429 from both canonical binary endpoints, so no local bytes or SHA-256 are claimed. The controlling semantic pages for Unit 30 were updated in 2026; the edition records that difference and does not claim that the two surfaces have identical revisions.

How to use this edition

Read each lecture, then work through the worksheet with the same number. Units 1–30 contain 693 exercises. Stars follow the source and do not by themselves mean that all starred exercises have the same solution coverage. The translation scope includes all 122 public solutions available at the frozen source boundary. Unit 30 has public solutions only for Exercises 30.3 and 30.4; missing source solutions are not invented. Formulae, numbering, point values, hints, stars and unit order are preserved so that the edition can be checked against the respective source revisions.

Edition notes openly identify corrections to source errors or omissions that would otherwise mislead the reader. Necessary additions bridging a proof step or prerequisite are labelled Editorial bridge; these additions are not part of the source text and are not attributed to the source author.

English Markdown source · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0 for translated course text; source and media components retain recorded licences · Rights record: RIGHTS.csv

Lecture 1: Plane Algebraic Curves

Plane algebraic curves

What is an algebraic curve? For example, the objects shown in the following beautiful pictures.

Graph of a linear function
Graph of a polynomial of degree four
Graph of a rational function
Unit circle
Ellipse
Curve with a cusp
Example of an elliptic curve
Tschirnhausen cubic
Kampyle of Eudoxus
Conchoid of Pascal
Bifolium
Limaçon
Quadrifolium
Lemniscate of Bernoulli

Of course, we can draw all sorts of things. The following curves are beautiful too, but they are not algebraic curves.

Cycloid
Logarithmic spiral
Sine graph
Quadratic Koch curve

The word “algebraic” in algebraic curve comes from the requirement that only algebraic operations may be used in its definition: addition and multiplication, but not analytic processes such as taking limits, infinite sums, approximation, differentiation or integration. The maps allowed in our context are given by polynomials in several variables. The pictures above show plane algebraic curves defined by a polynomial in two variables. The first two pictures are graphs of a polynomial function in one variable; they are described by

Y=P(X). Y=P(X).

In the first picture, P(X)=XP(X)=X (so the polynomial is linear), whereas in the second the polynomial has a form such as

P(X)=a4X4+a3X3+a2X2+a1X+a0, P(X)=a_4X^4+a_3X^3+a_2X^2+a_1X+a_0,

with coefficients aia_i in a field KK. In algebraic geometry we fix a base field KK. Important fields for us are the real numbers (the pictures are primarily to be understood in this sense) and the complex numbers \mathbb C. Such a graph is a simple object in that each value of XX has exactly one corresponding value of YY, namely the function value, which is also easy to calculate if we can calculate in the given field. In a certain sense, the graph is a “curved” copy of the base line, the XX-axis.

Now consider the third picture. It is the graph of a rational function: we take two polynomials P,QP,Q in the variable XX and consider their quotient P(X)/Q(X)P(X)/Q(X). This expression makes sense only where the denominator is nonzero. The rational function is undefined at the zeros of the denominator polynomial. If numerator and denominator vanish at the same point, cancellation sometimes gives the quotient a meaning there as well. If the denominator vanishes but the numerator does not, the undefined point is a pole: the real graph tends to ++\infty or -\infty. It is tempting to say that the rational function takes the value “infinity” at these points; in projective geometry this idea really does make sense, as we shall see later.

Because of these undefined points, however, the “graph equation” Y=P(X)/Q(X)Y=P(X)/Q(X) is not an ideal description of the curve. Multiplying by the denominator instead gives the condition, or equation,

YQ(X)=P(X),or, more precisely,{(x,y)K2yQ(x)=P(x)}, YQ(X)=P(X), \qquad\text{or, more precisely,}\qquad \{(x,y)\in K^2\mid yQ(x)=P(x)\},

whose two sides are well-defined polynomials. The set satisfying the equation (or solution set) is uniquely defined. For an xx with Q(x)=0Q(x)=0, the left-hand side is zero. If P(x)0P(x)\ne0, there is no solution at this xx, as in the picture; if P(x)=0P(x)=0, every value of YY is allowed. In the latter case, the object therefore contains the line through (x,0)(x,0) perpendicular to the XX-axis.

Example: the hyperbola

A typical and important example of a rational function is Y=1/XY=1/X. Its graph is called a hyperbola HH. Written without a denominator, the equation becomes

XY=1,orH={(x,y)xy=1}. XY=1, \qquad\text{or}\qquad H=\{(x,y)\mid xy=1\}.

On K×=K\{0}K^\times=K\setminus\{0\} this rational function is an ordinary function, with graph HH, and it gives a “natural” bijection

K×H,x(x,1x). K^\times\longrightarrow H, \qquad x\longmapsto\left(x,\frac1x\right).

Thus K×K^\times and HH are “equivalent” or “isomorphic” in a sense that will be made precise later.

Both descriptions have advantages. The description as K×KK^\times\subset K takes place on a line (if we think of K=K=\mathbb R), but the point 00, which is a limit point of K×K^\times, does not belong to K×K^\times. In other words, K×K^\times is not closed. The hyperbola, by contrast, is closed in 2\mathbb R^2; realising the object as a closed set therefore requires moving to a higher dimension. The question of what constitutes a good description of an algebraic-geometric object will recur throughout the course.

Rectangular hyperbola

In the real case, K=K=\mathbb R, the set ×\mathbb R^\times (and likewise HH_{\mathbb R}) consists of two disjoint “branches”, so it is not connected. In the complex case, K=K=\mathbb C, the set ×\mathbb C^\times (and likewise HH_{\mathbb C}) is a punctured real plane and is therefore connected. This is a typical phenomenon in algebraic geometry: important properties may depend on the base field. Nevertheless, properties that depend only on the defining equations and hold for their solution sets over every field have particular significance.

The fourth picture shows a circle, with equation

K={(x,y)x2+y2=r2}, K=\{(x,y)\mid x^2+y^2=r^2\},

where rr denotes its radius. The picture already shows that this object cannot be the graph of a function, since on a graph each xx-value is paired with exactly one yy-value. There is no function y=φ(x)y=\varphi(x) satisfying

K={(x,φ(x))x}. K=\{(x,\varphi(x))\mid x\in\mathbb R\}.

The question of whether an algebraic solution set can be realised as a graph is equivalent to asking whether its defining equation can be “solved” for yy. In this example we can write

y2=r2x2,y=r2x2=(rx)(r+x). y^2=r^2-x^2, \qquad y=\sqrt{r^2-x^2}=\sqrt{(r-x)(r+x)}.

Is the circle a graph after all? There are two interpretations.

  1. If we restrict ourselves to real numbers and positive square roots, the last step is not an equivalent transformation: we have “added” information that was not in the original equation. Taking the positive square root means restricting to the upper semicircle. Adding information or conditions makes the solution set smaller.

  2. If instead x\sqrt{\phantom{x}} is understood to include all solutions—in the real case, both the positive and the negative square root, often written ±x\pm\sqrt{\phantom{x}}—we have added no information, but we have not solved for a function either; we have only obtained what is sometimes called a “multivalued function”.

Both viewpoints are useful. The attempt to describe part of a geometric object, such as the upper arc, simply as a graph reappears in the implicit function theorem, power-series methods, parametrisations and local theory.

Equations of the form Y2=G(X)Y^2=G(X)

Cubic curves studied by Newton
Isaac Newton (1643–1727)

A circle equation can be viewed as an equation of the form

Y2=G(X), Y^2=G(X),

where GG is a polynomial in the single variable XX; for the circle, G=X2+1G=-X^2+1. This is not a graph, but the “square root” of a graph. More generally, allow G(X)G(X) to be more complicated. The zero set (or zero locus) represents the square root G(X)\sqrt{G(X)}. For any chosen value xx of XX, there are three possibilities for the corresponding real solutions yy.

  1. If G(x)<0G(x)<0, there is no solution.
  2. If G(x)=0G(x)=0, there is exactly one solution, y=0y=0.
  3. If G(x)>0G(x)>0, there are two solutions, y=±G(x)y=\pm\sqrt{G(x)}.

This also suggests how to visualise the real picture: for each xx, calculate G(x)G(x) and, if the radicand is nonnegative, mark the points (x,±G(x))(x,\pm\sqrt{G(x)}).

Over the complex numbers, we need distinguish only G(x)=0G(x)=0 from G(x)0G(x)\ne0. If GG has degree two, the resulting curve is a conic section, a subject studied since antiquity (see Lecture 7).

Isaac Newton studied intensively the case in which G(X)G(X) is a real cubic polynomial, that is, a polynomial of degree three. Even this collection of examples is already very rich.

Examples of real elliptic curves

Consider the case G(X)=X3G(X)=X^3, the object described by

{(x,y)y2=x3}. \{(x,y)\mid y^2=x^3\}.

This object is called Neil’s parabola. A new phenomenon appears here: the origin is different from all the other points. We call it a singularity; the other points, by contrast, are called smooth or nonsingular. Giving a precise definition is part of this course. As a first, imprecise formulation, a curve near a smooth point looks, in suitable coordinates, like the possibly rotated graph of a differentiable function. The singularity of Neil’s parabola is called a cusp—the source uses the German words Spitze and Kuspe, both meaning a pointed tip. By contrast, the singularity in the eighth picture is a crossing point or double point.

In the seventh picture at the beginning, and in the picture above, we also see zero loci of the form Y2=G(X)Y^2=G(X) with G(X)G(X) of degree three. What must G(X)G(X) look like to produce such a curve? The last examples also show that the presence of a singularity depends on the precise form of G(X)G(X).

Let us stay with Neil’s parabola CC. If tt is any real or complex number, the point with coordinates

(x,y)=(t2,t3) (x,y)=(t^2,t^3)

always lies on Neil’s parabola, since (t2)3=t6=(t3)2(t^2)^3=t^6=(t^3)^2. Conversely, one can show (see Exercise 1.6) that every point of Neil’s parabola has this form: for each (x,y)(x,y) satisfying y2=x3y^2=x^3, there is exactly one tt with (x,y)=(t2,t3)(x,y)=(t^2,t^3). The map

C,t(t2,t3), \mathbb R\longrightarrow C, \qquad t\longmapsto(t^2,t^3),

is called a (bijective polynomial) parametrisation of Neil’s parabola. Determining which algebraic curves admit a polynomial parametrisation is a nontrivial question. A smooth curve of the form Y2=G(X)Y^2=G(X) with degG=3\deg G=3 has no such parametrisation. In elementary number theory, we learn that all Pythagorean triples can be written in a simple uniform form; see Theorem 10.6 (Number Theory, Osnabrück 2025). An equivalent statement is the existence of a rational parametrisation of the rational unit circle; see Theorem 10.4. We shall discuss this in greater generality in Theorem 7.6.

We now come to the first general definition.

Definition: affine plane algebraic curve

Let KK be a field. An affine plane algebraic curve over KK is the zero locus V(F)K2V(F)\subseteq K^2 of a nonconstant polynomial FF in two variables, that is,

F=0i,jmaijXiYj(aijK). F=\sum_{0\le i,j\le m}a_{ij}X^iY^j \qquad (a_{ij}\in K).

In other words,

V(F)={(x,y)K2|F(x,y)=0i,jmaijxiyj=0}. V(F)=\left\{(x,y)\in K^2\;\middle|\; F(x,y)=\sum_{0\le i,j\le m}a_{ij}x^iy^j=0\right\}.

The following favourite polynomials in the variables XX and YY were suggested in class:

  1. X2Y2X^2-Y^2;
  2. 2X+4Y+32X+4Y+3;
  3. X2+Y23X^2+Y^2-3;
  4. X2+Y2X^2+Y^2;
  5. 5X2+12Y2265X^2+12Y^2-26;
  6. 3X215Y233X^2-15Y^2-3;
  7. X3+Y3+XYX^3+Y^3+XY;
  8. X34Y2XYX^3-4Y^2-XY;
  9. X4X^4;
  10. X2Y2X2X^2Y^2-X^2.

The corresponding zero loci V(F)V(F) vary in how difficult they are to understand. By the difference-of-squares identity,

X2Y2=(X+Y)(XY), X^2-Y^2=(X+Y)(X-Y),

and a product of two field elements is zero exactly when one factor is zero. This zero locus is therefore simply the union of the two diagonals: a union of two affine lines. The zero locus of 2X+4Y+32X+4Y+3 is the solution set of this linear equation, an affine line. The real zero locus of X2+Y23X^2+Y^2-3 is a circle centred at the origin with radius 3\sqrt3. By contrast, the real zero locus of X2+Y2X^2+Y^2 consists only of the origin (0,0)(0,0); over \mathbb C the situation is different. The zero locus of 5X2+12Y2265X^2+12Y^2-26 is an ellipse with axes parallel to the coordinate axes, whereas the zero locus of 3X215Y233X^2-15Y^2-3 is a compressed hyperbola.

We shall discuss and classify the zero loci of quadratic polynomials in detail in Lecture 7. The two polynomials X3+Y3+XYX^3+Y^3+XY and X34Y2XYX^3-4Y^2-XY have degree 33 and are much harder to understand. The first question is whether their curves are smooth or have singularities. The zero locus V(X4)V(X^4) equals V(X)V(X) and is therefore the yy-axis. The last polynomial factors as

X2Y2X2=X2(Y21)=X2(Y1)(Y+1), X^2Y^2-X^2=X^2(Y^2-1)=X^2(Y-1)(Y+1),

so it is easy to understand. Its zero locus is the union of three lines: the yy-axis and two lines parallel to the xx-axis.

We shall prove a lemma that immediately shows why the four nonalgebraic curves pictured above are not algebraic.

Lemma: intersection with a line

Let CC be an affine plane algebraic curve and LL a line in K2K^2.

Then CLC\cap L is either the whole line LL or a finite set of points.

Proof

By definition, a plane algebraic curve C=V(F)C=V(F) is always the zero locus of a polynomial FF in two variables. Suppose the line LL is given by

aX+bY+c=0. aX+bY+c=0.

Without loss of generality, assume a0a\ne0. Solving for XX gives X=αY+βX=\alpha Y+\beta. An intersection point PCLP\in C\cap L must satisfy both F(P)=0F(P)=0 and the line equation. Using the line equation, replace XX in FF by αY+β\alpha Y+\beta. This turns FF into a polynomial in the single variable YY, which we call F̃\widetilde F.

Now PCLP\in C\cap L is equivalent to PLP\in L and F̃(P)=0\widetilde F(P)=0. Thus the intersection is described by F̃\widetilde F. If F̃=0\widetilde F=0, the whole line is the intersection. If F̃0\widetilde F\ne0, Corollary 19.9 (Linear Algebra, Osnabrück 2024–2025) says that it has only finitely many zeros. \square

For the four nonalgebraic examples above, there are lines meeting the curves in infinitely many points. The curves are therefore not algebraic.

Polynomial rings

After these introductory examples, we fix some terminology that is probably already familiar.

Definition: polynomial ring in one variable

The polynomial ring over a commutative ring RR consists of all polynomials

P=a0+a1X+a2X2++anXn, P=a_0+a_1X+a_2X^2+\cdots+a_nX^n,

with aiRa_i\in R for i=0,,ni=0,\ldots,n and nn\in\mathbb N, equipped with componentwise addition and multiplication defined by extending the following rule distributively:

XnXm:=Xn+m. X^n\cdot X^m:=X^{n+m}. From this definition we can also define polynomial rings in several variables. Set

K[X,Y]:=(K[X])[Y],K[X,Y,Z]:=(K[X,Y])[Z], K[X,Y]:=(K[X])[Y], \qquad K[X,Y,Z]:=(K[X,Y])[Z],

and so on. A polynomial in nn variables has the form

F=(ν1,,νn)a(ν1,,νn)X1ν1Xnνn. F=\sum_{(\nu_1,\ldots,\nu_n)} a_{(\nu_1,\ldots,\nu_n)}X_1^{\nu_1}\cdots X_n^{\nu_n}.

The sum runs over a finite family of exponent tuples (ν1,,νn)(\nu_1,\ldots,\nu_n). Expressions of the form X1ν1XnνnX_1^{\nu_1}\cdots X_n^{\nu_n} are also called monomials. A polynomial is usually abbreviated as F=νaνXνF=\sum_\nu a_\nu X^\nu. Multiplying two monomials means adding their exponent tuples:

(X1ν1Xnνn)(X1μ1Xnμn):=X1ν1+μ1Xnνn+μn. \left(X_1^{\nu_1}\cdots X_n^{\nu_n}\right) \left(X_1^{\mu_1}\cdots X_n^{\mu_n}\right) :=X_1^{\nu_1+\mu_1}\cdots X_n^{\nu_n+\mu_n}.

In algebraic geometry, the case of greatest interest to us is when the base ring RR is a field. Algebraic geometry studies the shape of zero loci of polynomials in several variables. We shall see later that the relationship between algebraic and geometric properties is particularly strong when the base field is algebraically closed.

Definition: algebraically closed field

A field KK is called algebraically closed if every nonconstant polynomial FK[X]F\in K[X] has a zero in KK.

Carl Friedrich Gauss (1777–1855)

The fundamental theorem of algebra was first proved by Gauss.

Theorem: fundamental theorem of algebra

The field of complex numbers \mathbb C is algebraically closed.

Proof

We shall not prove this theorem here. Its proofs use topological or analytic methods. \square


Source navigation: course · Lecture 2 · worksheet for this lecture

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0 for translated course text; media retain component licences in authority/RIGHTS.csv · Rights record: RIGHTS.csv

Worksheet 1

Practice exercises

Exercise 1.1

Linear algebra often deals with systems of linear equations. What nonlinear equations or systems of equations arise in linear algebra?

Exercise 1.2

Sketch the solution sets in 2\mathbb R^2 of the following equations.

  1. x2y21=0x^2-y^2-1=0;
  2. x2+xy+y2=0x^2+xy+y^2=0;
  3. x2+y2+1=0x^2+y^2+1=0;
  4. x2+y2=0x^2+y^2=0;
  5. x2+y3=0x^2+y^3=0;
  6. x3y5=0x^3-y^5=0;
  7. x2x3=0x^2-x^3=0;
  8. x3+y3=1x^3+y^3=1;
  9. x4+y4=1x^4+y^4=1;
  10. 5+3x+4x2+x3y2=1-5+3x+4x^2+x^3-y^2=1.

Exercise 1.3

Calculate the intersection of each curve in Exercise 1.2 with each of the following lines.

  1. x=0x=0;
  2. y=0y=0;
  3. x=1x=1;
  4. y=2y=-2;
  5. x=yx=y;
  6. x=yx=-y;
  7. 2x3y+4=02x-3y+4=0.

Exercise 1.4 ★

  1. Find an integer solution (x,y)×(x,y)\in\mathbb Z\times\mathbb Z of

    x2y3+2=0. x^2-y^3+2=0.

  2. Show that

    (3831000,129100) \left(\frac{383}{1000},\frac{129}{100}\right)

    is a solution of

    x2y3+2=0. x^2-y^3+2=0.

Exercise 1.5 ★

Find a point on the plane algebraic curve

V(X3Y3+4X22XY+Y+3)2. V(X^3-Y^3+4X^2-2XY+Y+3)\subset\mathbb C^2.

Exercise 1.6

Let KK be a field. The image of the curve defined by

KK2,t(t2,t3), K\longrightarrow K^2, \qquad t\longmapsto(t^2,t^3),

is called Neil’s parabola. Show that a point (x,y)K2(x,y)\in K^2 belongs to this image if and only if it satisfies x3=y2x^3=y^2.

Exercise 1.7

Let C2C\subseteq\mathbb R^2 be the image of the polynomial map

2,t(t2t+2,t23). \mathbb R\longrightarrow\mathbb R^2, \qquad t\longmapsto(t^2-t+2,t^2-3).

Find a nonzero polynomial FF in two variables such that CC lies in the zero locus of FF.

Exercise 1.8

Let C2C\subseteq\mathbb R^2 be the image of the polynomial map

2,t(t31,t21). \mathbb R\longrightarrow\mathbb R^2, \qquad t\longmapsto(t^3-1,t^2-1).

Find a nonzero polynomial FF in two variables such that CC lies in the zero locus of FF.

Exercise 1.9

Consider the curve

2,t(t21,t3t). \mathbb R\longrightarrow\mathbb R^2, \qquad t\longmapsto(t^2-1,t^3-t).

  1. Show that the image points (x,y)(x,y) of this curve satisfy

    y2=x2+x3. y^2=x^2+x^3.

  2. Show that every point (x,y)2(x,y)\in\mathbb R^2 satisfying y2=x2+x3y^2=x^2+x^3 belongs to the image of the curve.

  3. Show that there are exactly two parameter values t1t_1 and t2t_2 with the same image point, and that the map is otherwise injective.

Exercise 1.10

Discuss the relationship between plane algebraic curves and the implicit function theorem.

Exercise 1.11

Let K=/(7)K=\mathbb Z/(7). Find all points in K2=K×KK^2=K\times K lying on the curve defined by

X2Y+2Y3+3Y2=0. X^2Y+2Y^3+3Y^2=0.

How many solutions are there?

Exercise 1.12 ★

Find a line G𝔸2G\subseteq\mathbb A_{\mathbb C}^2 meeting the curve

C=V(X3+Y3+1)𝔸2 C=V(X^3+Y^3+1)\subseteq\mathbb A_{\mathbb C}^2

in exactly one point.

Exercise 1.13 ★

Show that Neil’s parabola

C=V(Y2X3)𝔸2 C=V(Y^2-X^3)\subseteq\mathbb A_{\mathbb C}^2

meets every line through P=(1,1)CP=(1,1)\in C in at least one further point.

Exercise 1.14 ★

Give an analytic argument showing that the unit circle V(x2+y21)V(x^2+y^2-1) and Neil’s parabola V(y2x3)V(y^2-x^3) have a real intersection point. Determine numerically the real xx-coordinate of such a point with error 0.1\le 0.1.

Exercise 1.15

Consider equations of the form

y2=G(x),G(x)=x3+ax2+bx+c, y^2=G(x), \qquad G(x)=x^3+ax^2+bx+c,

over \mathbb R. Sketch the different solution sets for coefficients a,b,c{1,1,0}a,b,c\in\{1,-1,0\}.

The statement in the next exercise also follows from Theorem 6.1 using Lemma 1.3.

Exercise 1.16

Let KK be a field and let

KK2,t(P(t),Q(t)) K\longrightarrow K^2, \qquad t\longmapsto(P(t),Q(t))

be a map given by two polynomials P(t),Q(t)K[t]P(t),Q(t)\in K[t]. Let BB be its image and GK2G\subseteq K^2 a line. Show that either BGB\subseteq G or the intersection BGB\cap G is finite.

Exercise 1.17

Multiply the following two polynomials in [x,y,z]\mathbb Z[x,y,z]:

x5+3x2y2xyz3and2x3yz+z2+5xy2zx2y. x^5+3x^2y^2-xyz^3 \qquad\text{and}\qquad 2x^3yz+z^2+5xy^2z-x^2y.

Exercise 1.18

Multiply the following two polynomials in (/(5))[x,y](\mathbb Z/(5))[x,y]:

x4+2x2y2xy3+2y3andx4y+4x2y+3xy2x2y2+2y2. x^4+2x^2y^2-xy^3+2y^3 \qquad\text{and}\qquad x^4y+4x^2y+3xy^2-x^2y^2+2y^2.

Exercise 1.19

Let RR be an integral domain. Show that the polynomial ring R[X]R[X] is also an integral domain.

Exercise 1.20 ★

Let RR be an integral domain and R[X]R[X] the polynomial ring over RR. Show that the units of R[X]R[X] are precisely the units of RR.

Exercise 1.21 ★

Let KK be a field. Show that the following two properties are equivalent.

  1. KK is algebraically closed.
  2. Every nonconstant polynomial FK[X]F\in K[X] factors into linear factors.

Exercise 1.22

Let KK be an algebraically closed field. Determine all irreducible polynomials in K[X]K[X].

Exercise 1.23

Let KK be an algebraically closed field. Show that KK cannot be finite.

Exercises to hand in

Exercise 1.24 — 2 points

Carry out the following polynomial division in (/(7))[X](\mathbb Z/(7))[X]:

X4+5X2+3divided by2X2+X+6. X^4+5X^2+3 \qquad\text{divided by}\qquad 2X^2+X+6.

Exercise 1.25 — 5 points

Find all monic irreducible polynomials of degree 44 in the polynomial ring 𝔽3[X]\mathbb F_3[X].

Exercise 1.26 — 3 points

Find all solutions of the circle equation

x2+y2=1 x^2+y^2=1

for the fields K=/(2)K=\mathbb Z/(2), /(5)\mathbb Z/(5) and /(11)\mathbb Z/(11).

Exercise 1.27 — 5 points

Let C2C\subseteq\mathbb C^2 be the image of the polynomial map

2,t(t3t2+4t+3,t2+5t1). \mathbb C\longrightarrow\mathbb C^2, \qquad t\longmapsto(t^3-t^2+4t+3,-t^2+5t-1).

Find a nonzero polynomial FF in two variables such that CC lies in the zero locus of FF.

Exercise 1.28 — 4 points

Consider the map

f:S12 f:\mathbb R\longrightarrow S^1\subseteq\mathbb R^2

assigning to each tt\in\mathbb R the unique intersection point other than (0,1)(0,-1) of the line GtG_t through (t,1)(t,1) and (0,1)(0,-1) with the unit circle

S1={(x,y)2x2+y2=1}. S^1=\{(x,y)\in\mathbb R^2\mid x^2+y^2=1\}.

Show that this map is well defined and find the formulas describing it. Show that ff is differentiable. Is ff injective? Is ff surjective?


Source navigation: course · Worksheet 2 · Lecture 1

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Solutions to Worksheet 1

This section translates the seven public solutions linked from Worksheet 1. Their numbering and order follow the source exercises. No additional solutions are supplied for exercises without a public solution at the frozen source revision.

Solution to Exercise 1.4

  1. (5,3)(5,3) is an integer solution.

  2. We have

    (3831000)2(129100)3+2=146689100000021466891000000+2=14668921466891000000+2=20000001000000+2=2+2=0. \begin{aligned} \left(\frac{383}{1000}\right)^2 -\left(\frac{129}{100}\right)^3+2 &=\frac{146\,689}{1\,000\,000} -\frac{2\,146\,689}{1\,000\,000}+2\\ &=\frac{146\,689-2\,146\,689}{1\,000\,000}+2\\ &=\frac{-2\,000\,000}{1\,000\,000}+2\\ &=-2+2\\ &=0. \end{aligned}

Back to Exercise 1.4.

Solution to Exercise 1.5

Consider the intersection of the curve with the line V(XY)V(X-Y), imposing the additional condition X=YX=Y. Substituting Y=XY=X into the curve equation gives

X3X3+4X22X2+X+3=2X2+X+3=0. X^3-X^3+4X^2-2X^2+X+3=2X^2+X+3=0.

The quadratic formula gives

X=14±2316=14±234i. X=-\frac14\pm\sqrt{-\frac{23}{16}} =-\frac14\pm\frac{\sqrt{23}}4i.

Therefore

(1+23i4,1+23i4) \left(\frac{-1+\sqrt{23}\,i}{4}, \frac{-1+\sqrt{23}\,i}{4}\right)

is a point on the curve.

Back to Exercise 1.5.

Solution to Exercise 1.12

Choose the line

G=V(Y+1). G=V(Y+1).

To calculate CGC\cap G, substitute the equation Y=1Y=-1, which holds on GG, into the curve equation. This gives

0=X3+(1)3+1=X3. 0=X^3+(-1)^3+1=X^3.

The only solution is X=0X=0, so (0,1)(0,-1) is the unique intersection point of GG and CC.

Back to Exercise 1.12.

Solution to Exercise 1.13

Every line in the plane has an equation

ax+by=c, ax+by=c,

where aa and bb are not both zero. If the line passes through (1,1)(1,1), then a+b=ca+b=c.

If b=0b=0, the line is x=1x=1 and has the further intersection point (1,1)(1,-1) with the curve. Hence assume b0b\ne0. Solving the line equation for yy gives

y=rx+s,s=1r. y=rx+s, \qquad s=1-r.

On this line, the curve equation becomes

0=y2x3=(rx+(1r))2x3=x3+r2x2+2r(1r)x+(1r)2. \begin{aligned} 0 &=y^2-x^3\\ &=(rx+(1-r))^2-x^3\\ &=-x^3+r^2x^2+2r(1-r)x+(1-r)^2. \end{aligned}

Since x=1x=1 is a zero, we can factor out x1x-1:

x3+r2x2+2r(1r)x+(1r)2=(x1)(x2(1r2)x(1r)2). -x^3+r^2x^2+2r(1-r)x+(1-r)^2 =(x-1)\bigl(-x^2-(1-r^2)x-(1-r)^2\bigr).

After multiplication by 1-1, the quadratic factor on the right is monic of degree 22, so it has roots in \mathbb C. We must show that at least one additional root differs from 11. Evaluating the displayed quadratic factor at x=1x=1 gives

1(1r2)(1r)2=3+r2+2rr2=2r3. -1-(1-r^2)-(1-r)^2=-3+r^2+2r-r^2=2r-3.

If r32r\ne\frac32, then 11 is not a root of that quadratic factor. It remains to consider r=32r=\frac32. In this case,

x2+(1r2)x+(1r)2=x254x+14=(x1)(x14), x^2+(1-r^2)x+(1-r)^2 =x^2-\frac54x+\frac14 =(x-1)\left(x-\frac14\right),

so there is another root, x=14x=\frac14. Thus every line through (1,1)(1,1) meets Neil’s parabola in at least one further point.

Edition note: The source calls the displayed quadratic factor monic, although its leading coefficient is 1-1. The clarification above makes the multiplication by 1-1 explicit; its roots are unchanged.

Back to Exercise 1.13.

Solution to Exercise 1.14

Substitute y2=x3y^2=x^3 into the circle equation to obtain

x3+x21=0. x^3+x^2-1=0.

At x=1x=1 the polynomial has value 11, whereas at x=0.5x=0.5 it has a negative value. By the intermediate value theorem it has a root x0x_0 in [0.5,1][0.5,1]. Since x03x_0^3 is positive, its real square root

y0=x03 y_0=\sqrt{x_0^3}

exists, and (x0,y0)(x_0,y_0) is a real intersection point.

To approximate x0x_0 numerically, calculate

(0.7)3+(0.7)21<0.49+0.491<0 (0.7)^3+(0.7)^2-1 <0.49+0.49-1<0

and

(0.8)3+(0.8)21=0.640.8+0.641>0.48+0.641>0. \begin{aligned} (0.8)^3+(0.8)^2-1 &=0.64\cdot0.8+0.64-1\\ &>0.48+0.64-1>0. \end{aligned}

Thus an intersection point exists whose xx-coordinate lies in [0.7,0.8][0.7,0.8].

Edition note: The source ends the second estimate with 0.48+0.641=00.48+0.64-1=0. This edition uses the correct inequality 0.48+0.641>00.48+0.64-1>0.

Back to Exercise 1.14.

Solution to Exercise 1.20

Let aRa\in R be a unit. There is a bRb\in R with ab=1ab=1, and the same identity holds in the polynomial ring. Hence

R×R[X]×. R^\times\subseteq R[X]^\times.

Conversely, let

P=i=0daiXi,ad0, P=\sum_{i=0}^d a_iX^i, \qquad a_d\ne0,

be a unit in R[X]R[X]. Then there is a polynomial

Q=j=0ebjXj,be0, Q=\sum_{j=0}^e b_jX^j, \qquad b_e\ne0,

with PQ=1PQ=1. Since RR is an integral domain, adbe0a_db_e\ne0, and the product has the form

adbeXd+e+terms of lower degree. a_db_eX^{d+e}+\text{terms of lower degree}.

Because PQ=1PQ=1, we must have d+e=0d+e=0 and adbe=1a_db_e=1. Thus PP is a constant unit. Consequently the units of R[X]R[X] are precisely the units of RR.

Back to Exercise 1.20.

Solution to Exercise 1.21

Suppose KK is algebraically closed and FK[X]F\in K[X] is nonconstant. We prove by induction on n=degFn=\deg F that FF factors into linear factors.

For n=1n=1, we have F=a1X+a0F=a_1X+a_0, so FF is already a single linear factor. Assume every polynomial GK[X]G\in K[X] of degree n1n-1 factors into linear factors. Since KK is algebraically closed, FF has a root x0x_0. We can therefore write

F=G(Xx0) F=G\cdot(X-x_0)

for a polynomial GK[X]G\in K[X] of degree n1n-1. This degree assertion follows directly from the fact that a field is also an integral domain and a slight adaptation of the proof in Exercise 8. By the induction hypothesis, GG factors into linear factors, so G(Xx0)G\cdot(X-x_0) does too. Hence every nonconstant polynomial FK[X]F\in K[X] factors into linear factors.

Conversely, if every nonconstant polynomial factors into linear factors, each has a root represented by one of its linear factors. Thus KK is algebraically closed.

Edition note: “Exercise 8” is an unlinked reference in the frozen source and does not identify Exercise 1.8 of this worksheet. The degree assertion used here is deg(G(X)(Xx0))=degG+1\deg(G(X)(X-x_0))=\deg G+1 over a field; no renumbered source reference is inferred.

Back to Exercise 1.21.

English Markdown source · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Lecture 2: Affine Algebraic Sets

Affine algebraic sets

Definition: affine space

Let KK be a field. The space

𝔸Kn=Kn \mathbb A_K^n=K^n

is called affine space of dimension nn over KK.

Thus, to begin with, affine space is simply a set of points. A point in affine space is an nn-tuple (a1,,an)(a_1,\ldots,a_n) with coordinates in KK. Why, then, introduce a new term? The term “affine space” indicates that we wish to regard KnK^n as an object of algebraic geometry. In other words, we regard nn-dimensional affine space as the natural geometric object on which polynomials in nn variables act as functions. We shall gradually equip affine space with further structures—the Zariski topology and the structure sheaf—which make it clear that it is “more” than “just” KnK^n. For n=1n=1 we speak of the affine line, and for n=2n=2 of the affine plane.

A polynomial FK[X1,,Xn]F\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] can naturally be regarded as a function on affine space. To a point

P=(a1,,an)𝔸Kn, P=(a_1,\ldots,a_n)\in\mathbb A_K^n,

we assign the value

F(P)=F(a1,,an) F(P)=F(a_1,\ldots,a_n)

by replacing each variable XiX_i by aia_i and carrying out all the operations in KK. Given a polynomial FK[X1,,Xn]F\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n], we can ask whether F(P)=0F(P)=0. One object of particular interest associated with FF is therefore the zero locus it defines,

V(F)={P𝔸KnF(P)=0}. V(F)=\{P\in\mathbb A_K^n\mid F(P)=0\}.

We encountered several examples in the first lecture. It is also useful, however, to study the common, or simultaneous, zero locus of several polynomials. This is the intersection of their individual zero loci—for example, in the case of conic sections, where a cone in three-dimensional space is intersected with various planes.

Conic sections

We therefore make the following general definition.

Definition: the zero locus of a family of polynomials

Let KK be a field, and let

FjK[X1,,Xn],jJ, F_j\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n],\qquad j\in J,

be a family of polynomials in nn variables. The set

{P𝔸KnFj(P)=0 for every jJ} \{P\in\mathbb A_K^n\mid F_j(P)=0\text{ for every }j\in J\}

is called the zero locus (or zero set) defined by the family. It is denoted by V(Fj,jJ)V(F_j,j\in J).

Those subsets of affine space that arise as zero sets deserve a name of their own.

Definition: affine algebraic set

Let KK be a field and K[X1,,Xn]K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] the polynomial ring in nn variables. A subset V𝔸KnV\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n is called an affine algebraic set if it is the zero set of a family of polynomials FjF_j, jJj\in J, with FjK[X1,,Xn]F_j\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]; that is, if

V=V(Fj,jJ). V=V(F_j,j\in J).

The simplest examples are finite sets of points on the affine line 𝔸K1\mathbb A_K^1, each given by a single polynomial, and affine linear subspaces of 𝔸Kn\mathbb A_K^n, which are the solution sets of inhomogeneous systems of linear equations over KK.

Example: the axes and the origin

Consider the affine plane 𝔸K2\mathbb A_K^2 and some affine algebraic subsets defined by the variables XX and YY.

Points in affine space or on an affine algebraic set are often interpreted as representing more complicated mathematical objects. Properties of those objects are then reflected in whether their representing points satisfy certain algebraic equations or, equivalently, lie on certain affine algebraic sets. The following example illustrates this idea.

Example: matrices as points of affine space

A 2×22\times2 matrix

(a11a21a12a22) \begin{pmatrix} a_{11}&a_{21}\\ a_{12}&a_{22} \end{pmatrix}

is uniquely determined by the four numbers a11,a21,a12,a22Ka_{11},a_{21},a_{12},a_{22}\in K. It can therefore be identified with a point of 𝔸K4\mathbb A_K^4. In this interpretation, it is natural to denote the variables by X11,X21,X12,X22X_{11},X_{21},X_{12},X_{22}. We can now ask which properties of matrices can be described by algebraic equations. We discuss several typical properties.

A matrix is upper triangular precisely when a12=0a_{12}=0. Thus the set of upper triangular matrices is the zero locus of X12X_{12}.

A matrix is invertible when

a11a22a12a210. a_{11}a_{22}-a_{12}a_{21}\ne0.

Consequently, the set of non-invertible matrices is described by the algebraic determinant condition

X11X22X12X21=0. X_{11}X_{22}-X_{12}X_{21}=0.

A matrix describes multiplication by a scalar if it is diagonal with equal diagonal entries. This set is described by the three equations

X12=0,X21=0,X11X22=0. X_{12}=0,\qquad X_{21}=0,\qquad X_{11}-X_{22}=0.

An element λK\lambda\in K is an eigenvalue of a matrix precisely when it is a root of its characteristic polynomial (Theorem 23.2 of Linear Algebra, Osnabrück 2024–2025), that is, when

det(λa11a21a12λa22)=λ2λ(a11+a22)+a11a22a12a21=0. \det\begin{pmatrix} \lambda-a_{11}&-a_{21}\\ -a_{12}&\lambda-a_{22} \end{pmatrix} =\lambda^2-\lambda(a_{11}+a_{22})+a_{11}a_{22}-a_{12}a_{21}=0.

In linear algebra, the matrix is usually given and we seek roots λ\lambda of this polynomial in one variable. We can also reverse the viewpoint: fix λ\lambda and study the zero locus

λ2λ(X11+X22)+X11X22X12X21=0 \lambda^2-\lambda(X_{11}+X_{22}) +X_{11}X_{22}-X_{12}X_{21}=0

in four variables. This equation describes all matrices having λ\lambda as an eigenvalue.

Similarly, a matrix has the two distinct eigenvalues λδ\lambda\ne\delta precisely when

λ2λ(X11+X22)+X11X22X12X21=0 \lambda^2-\lambda(X_{11}+X_{22}) +X_{11}X_{22}-X_{12}X_{21}=0

and

δ2δ(X11+X22)+X11X22X12X21=0. \delta^2-\delta(X_{11}+X_{22}) +X_{11}X_{22}-X_{12}X_{21}=0.

Subtracting the two equations gives

λ2δ2(λδ)(X11+X22)=0, \lambda^2-\delta^2-(\lambda-\delta)(X_{11}+X_{22})=0,

which such a matrix must also satisfy. Since λδ\lambda\ne\delta, we can write this as

X11+X22=λ+δ. X_{11}+X_{22}=\lambda+\delta.

The sum of a matrix’s diagonal entries is called its trace. The last equation therefore says that the trace of a matrix with eigenvalues λδ\lambda\ne\delta must equal their sum.

The characteristic polynomial of a matrix can also be written as

λ2λTrace(M)+det(M), \lambda^2-\lambda\operatorname{Trace}(M)+\det(M),

where

Trace(M)=X11+X22,det(M)=X11X22X12X21. \operatorname{Trace}(M)=X_{11}+X_{22},\qquad \det(M)=X_{11}X_{22}-X_{12}X_{21}.

Thus two matrices have the same characteristic polynomial precisely when they have the same trace and determinant. The set of matrices with a prescribed characteristic polynomial can therefore be regarded as a fibre of the map

𝔸K4𝔸K2,M(Trace(M),det(M)). \mathbb A_K^4\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^2, \qquad M\longmapsto(\operatorname{Trace}(M),\det(M)).

This map is given by simple polynomial expressions. Is it surjective? Do its fibres always look alike—that is, does the set of matrices with a prescribed trace and determinant always have the same structure—or are there differences?

Fix ss and dd. We must study the solution set of the system

X11+X22=s,X11X22X12X21=d. X_{11}+X_{22}=s, \qquad X_{11}X_{22}-X_{12}X_{21}=d.

The variable X11X_{11} is uniquely determined by X22X_{22}, and conversely. We can therefore eliminate one variable by putting X22=sX11X_{22}=s-X_{11}. This gives an “equivalent” system in the three variables X11,X12,X21X_{11},X_{12},X_{21} with the single equation

X11(sX11)X12X21=d, X_{11}(s-X_{11})-X_{12}X_{21}=d,

or

X112sX11+X12X21+d=0. X_{11}^2-sX_{11}+X_{12}X_{21}+d=0.

Here “equivalent” means that the two solution sets are in bijection through maps given by polynomials. The last form shows that a solution always exists: we may choose any value of X11X_{11} and obtain an equation of the form X12X21=aX_{12}X_{21}=a, which has solutions.

A linear change of variables simplifies the equation further. Suppose that 22 is invertible in KK, so the characteristic of KK is not 22. With

X=X11s2,Y=X12,Z=X21, X=X_{11}-\frac{s}{2},\qquad Y=X_{12},\qquad Z=X_{21},

we obtain

X2+YZ+c=0,c=s24+d. X^2+YZ+c=0, \qquad c=-\frac{s^2}{4}+d.

Thus the shape of the set of matrices with a prescribed trace and determinant depends only on s2/4+d-s^2/4+d. Indeed, the zero locus differs according to whether this expression is zero or nonzero. In the first case it has a singularity; in the second it does not, as we shall see later.

Ideals and zero loci

Since for now we allow arbitrary families of polynomials to define zero loci and hence affine algebraic sets, these objects initially seem difficult to get a handle on. Three important statements nevertheless hold, which we shall prove in stages.

  1. The zero locus of a family of polynomials equals the zero locus of the ideal generated by that family.
  2. Every ideal has a finite set of generators. Thus every zero locus can be described by finitely many polynomials (Hilbert’s basis theorem).
  3. Over an algebraically closed field, zero loci correspond bijectively to radical ideals, a special class of ideals (Hilbert’s Nullstellensatz).

We can prove the first statement immediately. The other two require some algebraic preparation, which we shall develop in the following lectures.

Lemma: a family of polynomials and the ideal it generates

Let KK be a field and FjK[X1,,Xn]F_j\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n], jJj\in J, a family of polynomials in nn variables. Let 𝔞\mathfrak a be the ideal of K[X1,,Xn]K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] generated by all the FjF_j. Then

V(Fj,jJ)=V(𝔞). V(F_j,j\in J)=V(\mathfrak a).

Proof

The ideal 𝔞\mathfrak a consists of all finite linear combinations of the polynomials FjF_j and in particular contains every FjF_j. The inclusion

V(Fj,jJ)V(𝔞) V(F_j,j\in J)\supseteq V(\mathfrak a)

is therefore clear. For the reverse inclusion, take PV(Fj,jJ)P\in V(F_j,j\in J) and H𝔞H\in\mathfrak a. There are polynomials AiK[X1,,Xn]A_i\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] and indices j1,,jkj_1,\ldots,j_k such that

H=i=1kAiFji. H=\sum_{i=1}^k A_iF_{j_i}.

Then

H(P)=i=1kAi(P)Fji(P)=0. H(P)=\sum_{i=1}^k A_i(P)F_{j_i}(P)=0.

Thus every element of the ideal vanishes at PP, so PV(𝔞)P\in V(\mathfrak a). \square

Henceforth, then, we may assume that every zero set is given by an ideal.

Lemma: inclusion of ideals reverses inclusion of zero loci

For ideals 𝔞𝔟\mathfrak a\subseteq\mathfrak b in K[X1,,Xn]K[X_1,\ldots,X_n], the corresponding zero loci satisfy

V(𝔞)V(𝔟). V(\mathfrak a)\supseteq V(\mathfrak b).

Proof

Take PV(𝔟)P\in V(\mathfrak b). This means that F(P)=0F(P)=0 for every F𝔟F\in\mathfrak b. Since 𝔞𝔟\mathfrak a\subseteq\mathfrak b, it follows in particular that F(P)=0F(P)=0 for every F𝔞F\in\mathfrak a. Thus PV(𝔞)P\in V(\mathfrak a). \square

Affine algebraic subsets of affine space have the following important structural properties.

Proposition: unions and intersections of affine algebraic sets

Let KK be a field, K[X1,,Xn]K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] the polynomial ring in nn variables, and 𝔸Kn\mathbb A_K^n the corresponding affine space. The following properties hold.

  1. V(0)=𝔸KnV(0)=\mathbb A_K^n: the whole affine space is an affine algebraic set.

  2. V(1)=V(1)=\varnothing: the empty set is an affine algebraic set.

  3. If V1,,VkV_1,\ldots,V_k are affine algebraic sets with Vi=V(𝔞i)V_i=V(\mathfrak a_i), then

    V1V2Vk=V(𝔞1𝔞2𝔞k). V_1\cup V_2\cup\cdots\cup V_k =V(\mathfrak a_1\mathfrak a_2\cdots\mathfrak a_k).

    In particular, a finite union of affine algebraic sets is again an affine algebraic set.

  4. If ViV_i, iIi\in I, are affine algebraic sets with Vi=V(𝔞i)V_i=V(\mathfrak a_i), then

    iIVi=V(iI𝔞i). \bigcap_{i\in I}V_i=V\left(\sum_{i\in I}\mathfrak a_i\right).

    In particular, an arbitrary intersection of affine algebraic sets is again an affine algebraic set.

Proof

Statements (1) and (2) are clear: the constant polynomial 00 vanishes everywhere, whereas the constant polynomial 11 vanishes nowhere.

For (3), take a point in the union, say PV(𝔞1)P\in V(\mathfrak a_1). Then f(P)=0f(P)=0 for every f𝔞1f\in\mathfrak a_1. Every element of the product ideal 𝔞1𝔞k\mathfrak a_1\cdots\mathfrak a_k has the form

h=j=1mrjf1jf2jfkj, h=\sum_{j=1}^m r_j f_{1j}f_{2j}\cdots f_{kj},

with fij𝔞if_{ij}\in\mathfrak a_i. Since f1j(P)=0f_{1j}(P)=0 in every term, we get h(P)=0h(P)=0. Thus PP belongs to the zero locus on the right.

Conversely, suppose that PP does not belong to the union on the left. Then PV(𝔞i)P\notin V(\mathfrak a_i) for every i=1,,ki=1,\ldots,k. For each ii there is an fi𝔞if_i\in\mathfrak a_i with fi(P)0f_i(P)\ne0. Since KK is a field,

(f1f2fk)(P)0, (f_1f_2\cdots f_k)(P)\ne0,

while f1f2fk𝔞1𝔞kf_1f_2\cdots f_k\in\mathfrak a_1\cdots\mathfrak a_k. Therefore PP cannot belong to the zero locus on the right.

For (4), take P𝔸KnP\in\mathbb A_K^n. The point PP belongs to V(𝔞i)V(\mathfrak a_i) for every iIi\in I precisely when f(P)=0f(P)=0 for every f𝔞if\in\mathfrak a_i and every iIi\in I. This holds precisely when f(P)=0f(P)=0 for every ff in the sum of these ideals. \square

Examples of algebraic sets

Source navigation: course · Lecture 1 · Lecture 3 (source) · Worksheet 2

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0 for translated course text; media retain component licences in authority/RIGHTS-unit-02.csv · Rights record: RIGHTS-unit-02.csv

Worksheet 2

Practice exercises

Exercise 2.1

Consider the two planes in 𝔸K3\mathbb A_K^3,

E1=V(3x+4y+5z)andE2=V(2xy+3z). E_1=V(3x+4y+5z) \qquad\text{and}\qquad E_2=V(2x-y+3z).

Find a parametrisation of the intersection E1E2E_1\cap E_2.

Exercise 2.2 ★

Find the intersection points of the unit circle and the line through the points (1,1)(-1,1) and (4,2)(4,-2).

Exercise 2.3

Find the coordinates of the two intersection points of the line GG and the circle KK, where GG is given by the equation

3y4x+2=0, 3y-4x+2=0,

and KK has centre (2,5)(2,5) and radius 77.

Exercise 2.4

Calculate the intersection points of the two curves

C=V(x2+2y2+3xy+x2)andL=V(4x+3y5). C=V(x^2+2y^2+3xy+x-2) \qquad\text{and}\qquad L=V(4x+3y-5).

Exercise 2.5

Prove that the intersection of two distinct circles in the affine plane is the intersection of one of the circles with a line.

Exercise 2.6 ★

Find the intersection points of the unit circle EE and the circle KK with centre (1,0)(1,0) and radius 22.

Exercise 2.7 ★

Find the intersection points of the two ellipses

{(x,y)2x2+xy+3y2=3} \{(x,y)\in\mathbb R^2\mid x^2+xy+3y^2=3\}

and

{(x,y)22x2xy+y2=4}. \{(x,y)\in\mathbb R^2\mid 2x^2-xy+y^2=4\}.

Exercise 2.8 ★

Find the intersection points of the unit circle and the standard parabola.

Exercise 2.9 ★

Let

P={(x,y)2y=x2} P=\{(x,y)\in\mathbb R^2\mid y=x^2\}

be the standard parabola, and let KK be the circle with centre (0,1)(0,1) and radius 11.

  1. Sketch PP and KK.
  2. Write down an equation for KK.
  3. Determine the intersection PKP\cap K.
  4. Describe the lower semicircle as the graph of a function from [1,1][-1,1] to \mathbb R.
  5. Describe the position of the parabola relative to the lower semicircle.

Exercise 2.10

Find all simultaneous solutions of the two equations

x3+y2=2and2xy=3 x^3+y^2=2 \qquad\text{and}\qquad 2xy=3

over the fields K=/(3)K=\mathbb Z/(3), /(5)\mathbb Z/(5), and /(7)\mathbb Z/(7).

Exercise 2.11 ★

Consider the variety of commuting 2×22\times2 matrices, that is, the set of pairs of matrices

V={(A,B)A,BMat2(K),AB=BA}Mat2(K)×Mat2(K)𝔸K8. V=\{(A,B)\mid A,B\in\operatorname{Mat}_2(K),\ AB=BA\} \subseteq\operatorname{Mat}_2(K)\times\operatorname{Mat}_2(K) \cong\mathbb A_K^8.

  1. Prove that VV is an affine variety, and find equations describing it that are as simple as possible.

  2. Prove that the map

    π:VMat2(K),(A,B)A, \pi:V\longrightarrow\operatorname{Mat}_2(K), \qquad(A,B)\longmapsto A,

    is surjective.

  3. Determine the inverse image of

    (1100) \begin{pmatrix}1&1\\0&0\end{pmatrix}

    under π\pi.

Exercise 2.12

Prove that, for a point

P=(a1,,an)𝔸Kn, P=(a_1,\ldots,a_n)\in\mathbb A_K^n,

the corresponding ideal

(X1a1,X2a2,,Xnan) (X_1-a_1,X_2-a_2,\ldots,X_n-a_n)

is maximal.

Exercise 2.13

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and n2n\ge2. Prove that a point P𝔸KnP\in\mathbb A_K^n cannot be the zero set of a single polynomial.

Exercise 2.14

Let KK be a finite field, and let

M={P1,P2,,Pm}𝔸Kn M=\{P_1,P_2,\ldots,P_m\}\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n

be a finite set of points. Prove that MM is the zero set of a single polynomial.

Exercise 2.15 ★

Let KK be a field. Prove that the following three ideals in K[X,Y,Z,W]K[X,Y,Z,W] are equal:

𝔞=(Z2+W21,X2Z2+1,Y2ZW), \mathfrak a=(Z^2+W^2-1,\ X-2Z^2+1,\ Y-2ZW),

𝔟=(Z2+W21,X2+Y21,(1X)ZYW,YZ(1+X)W), \mathfrak b=(Z^2+W^2-1,\ X^2+Y^2-1,\ (1-X)Z-YW,\ YZ-(1+X)W),

and

𝔠=(Z2+W21,(1X)ZYW,YZ(1+X)W). \mathfrak c=(Z^2+W^2-1,\ (1-X)Z-YW,\ YZ-(1+X)W).

Exercise 2.16 ★

Consider the polynomial

F=X4Y2+X2Y43X2Y2+1. F=X^4Y^2+X^2Y^4-3X^2Y^2+1.

  1. Find a real zero of FF.

  2. Verify the identity

    F(X2+Y2+1)=(X2YY)2+(XY2X)2+(X2Y21)2+14(XY3X3Y)2+34(XY3+X3Y2XY)2. \begin{aligned} F\cdot(X^2+Y^2+1) ={}&(X^2Y-Y)^2+(XY^2-X)^2+(X^2Y^2-1)^2\\ &+\frac14(XY^3-X^3Y)^2 +\frac34(XY^3+X^3Y-2XY)^2. \end{aligned}

  3. Let K=K=\mathbb R. Deduce that

    F(x,y)0 F(x,y)\ge0

    for every point (x,y)𝔸2(x,y)\in\mathbb A_{\mathbb R}^2.

Source note. By a theorem of Artin—the solution to Hilbert’s seventeenth problem—every real polynomial that is nowhere negative can be written as a sum of squares of rational functions. The Motzkin polynomial FF above gives a concrete example showing that such a polynomial cannot in general be written as a sum of squares of polynomials. Here, however, we prove only its non-negativity.

Exercise 2.17

Find generators for an ideal 𝔞[X,Y,Z]\mathfrak a\subseteq\mathbb R[X,Y,Z] whose zero set consists of exactly the four points

(2,3,4),(1,1/5,0),(0,0,1),(1,2,3)𝔸3. (2,3,4),\quad(1,1/5,0),\quad(0,0,1),\quad(-1,-2,\sqrt3) \in\mathbb A_{\mathbb R}^3.

Exercise 2.18

Let 𝔞,𝔟R\mathfrak a,\mathfrak b\subseteq R be ideals in a commutative ring RR. Prove the inclusion

𝔞𝔟𝔞𝔟. \mathfrak a\mathfrak b\subseteq\mathfrak a\cap\mathfrak b.

Exercise 2.19

Prove that a product of principal ideals is again a principal ideal.

Exercise 2.20 ★

Let II and JJ be ideals in a commutative ring RR, and let nn\in\mathbb N. Prove the equality

(I+J)n=In+In1J+In2J2++I2Jn2+IJn1+Jn. (I+J)^n=I^n+I^{n-1}J+I^{n-2}J^2+\cdots+I^2J^{n-2}+IJ^{n-1}+J^n.

Exercise 2.21

Let RR be a commutative ring with ideals 𝔞,𝔟R\mathfrak a,\mathfrak b\subseteq R. Let

S=R/𝔟 S=R/\mathfrak b

and let 𝔞̃=𝔞S\widetilde{\mathfrak a}=\mathfrak aS be the image ideal. Prove that

𝔞nS=𝔞̃n. \mathfrak a^nS=\widetilde{\mathfrak a}^{\,n}.

Exercise 2.22

Let KK be a field. In K[X,Y]K[X,Y], consider the two prime ideals

𝔭=(X)(X,Y)=𝔪. \mathfrak p=(X)\subset(X,Y)=\mathfrak m.

Prove that there is no ideal 𝔞\mathfrak a with

𝔭=𝔞𝔪. \mathfrak p=\mathfrak a\mathfrak m.

Exercises to hand in

Exercise 2.23 — 3 points

Find all solutions of the equation

x2+y2+xy=1 x^2+y^2+xy=1

over the fields K=𝔽2K=\mathbb F_2, 𝔽4\mathbb F_4, and 𝔽8\mathbb F_8. You may use these representations of the fields.

Exercise 2.24 — 3 points

Let

M={P1,P2,,Pm}𝔸n M=\{P_1,P_2,\ldots,P_m\}\subseteq\mathbb A_{\mathbb R}^n

be a finite set of points. Prove that MM is the zero set of a single polynomial.

Exercise 2.25 — 3 points

Prove that the set of real triangularisable 2×22\times2 matrices, regarded as a subset of 𝔸4\mathbb A_{\mathbb R}^4, is not an affine algebraic set.

Exercise 2.26 — 4 points

Find the intersection points of the two ellipses

{(x,y)24x23xy+2y2=7} \{(x,y)\in\mathbb R^2\mid4x^2-3xy+2y^2=7\}

and

{(x,y)23x2+4xy+5y2=8}. \{(x,y)\in\mathbb R^2\mid3x^2+4xy+5y^2=8\}.

Exercise 2.27 — 4 points

Let SS be the zero locus in 𝔸K3\mathbb A_K^3 given by the equation

x2+y2=z2. x^2+y^2=z^2.

The intersection of SS with a plane EE is a curve, described in EE by an equation in two suitable variables. Find such an equation for each of the planes

E1=V(x),E2=V(z1),E3=V(x+2y+3z),E4=V(3x2z). E_1=V(x),\qquad E_2=V(z-1),\qquad E_3=V(x+2y+3z),\qquad E_4=V(3x-2z).


Source navigation: Lecture 2 · Worksheet 3 (source) · Lecture 1

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Solutions to Worksheet 2

This section translates all nine public solutions linked from Worksheet 2 at the source freeze. Their numbering and order follow the source exercises. No additional solutions are supplied for exercises without a public solution at that boundary.

Solution to Exercise 2.2

A direction vector of the line is

(53). \begin{pmatrix}5\\-3\end{pmatrix}.

Its equation therefore has the form

3x+5y=c. 3x+5y=c.

Substituting either point gives c=2c=2. Thus

y=23x5. y=\frac{2-3x}{5}.

Substituting this into the circle equation

x2+y2=1 x^2+y^2=1

gives

x2+(23x5)2=1, x^2+\left(\frac{2-3x}{5}\right)^2=1,

or

x2+412x+9x2251=3425x21225x2125=0. x^2+\frac{4-12x+9x^2}{25}-1 =\frac{34}{25}x^2-\frac{12}{25}x-\frac{21}{25}=0.

Normalising the equation gives

x2617x2134=0. x^2-\frac6{17}x-\frac{21}{34}=0.

Consequently,

x1,2=617±(617)2+421342=617±(617)2+42172=6±62+71434=6±75034=6±53034, \begin{aligned} x_{1,2} &=\frac{\frac6{17}\pm \sqrt{\left(\frac6{17}\right)^2+4\cdot\frac{21}{34}}}{2}\\ &=\frac{\frac6{17}\pm \sqrt{\left(\frac6{17}\right)^2+\frac{42}{17}}}{2}\\ &=\frac{6\pm\sqrt{6^2+714}}{34}\\ &=\frac{6\pm\sqrt{750}}{34}\\ &=\frac{6\pm5\sqrt{30}}{34}, \end{aligned}

and

y1,2=23x1,25=23(6±53034)5=683(6±530)170=501530170=1033034. \begin{aligned} y_{1,2} &=\frac{2-3x_{1,2}}5\\ &=\frac{2-3\left(\frac{6\pm5\sqrt{30}}{34}\right)}5\\ &=\frac{68-3(6\pm5\sqrt{30})}{170}\\ &=\frac{50\mp15\sqrt{30}}{170}\\ &=\frac{10\mp3\sqrt{30}}{34}. \end{aligned}

The intersection points are therefore

(6+53034,1033034)and(653034,10+33034). \left(\frac{6+5\sqrt{30}}{34},\frac{10-3\sqrt{30}}{34}\right) \quad\text{and}\quad \left(\frac{6-5\sqrt{30}}{34},\frac{10+3\sqrt{30}}{34}\right).

Back to Exercise 2.2.

Solution to Exercise 2.6

The unit circle is the solution set of

x2+y2=1, x^2+y^2=1,

while KK is the solution set of

(x1)2+y2=x22x+1+y2=4. (x-1)^2+y^2=x^2-2x+1+y^2=4.

Subtracting the first equation from the second gives

2x+1=3, -2x+1=3,

so x=1x=-1. The unit circle equation then gives y=0y=0. The only intersection point is therefore (1,0)(-1,0), which indeed satisfies both equations.

Back to Exercise 2.6.

Solution to Exercise 2.7

We seek the solutions of the system

x2+xy+3y2=3 x^2+xy+3y^2=3

and

2x2xy+y2=4. 2x^2-xy+y^2=4.

Adding the two equations gives

3x2+4y2=7, 3x^2+4y^2=7,

while twice the first equation minus the second gives

3xy+5y2=2. 3xy+5y^2=2.

From the latter equation,

x=25y23y; x=\frac{2-5y^2}{3y};

there is certainly no solution with y=0y=0. Substituting this expression for xx into the preceding equation gives

3(25y23y)2+4y2=7. 3\left(\frac{2-5y^2}{3y}\right)^2+4y^2=7.

Multiplication by 3y23y^2 yields

0=(25y2)2+12y421y2=420y2+25y4+12y421y2=37y441y2+4. \begin{aligned} 0 &=(2-5y^2)^2+12y^4-21y^2\\ &=4-20y^2+25y^4+12y^4-21y^2\\ &=37y^4-41y^2+4. \end{aligned}

This is a biquadratic equation.

Edition note: The frozen public solution stops here, without giving the intersection coordinates.

Back to Exercise 2.7.

Solution to Exercise 2.8

The standard parabola is given by

y=x2, y=x^2,

and the unit circle by

x2+y2=1. x^2+y^2=1.

The intersection points must satisfy both equations simultaneously. Using the first equation to replace x2x^2 in the second, we obtain

y2+y1=0. y^2+y-1=0.

Thus

y=1±1+42=1±52. y=\frac{-1\pm\sqrt{1+4}}2=\frac{-1\pm\sqrt5}{2}.

The negative sign gives no real value of xx, so

y=1+52,x=±1+52. y=\frac{-1+\sqrt5}{2}, \qquad x=\pm\sqrt{\frac{-1+\sqrt5}{2}}.

The two intersection points are

(1+52,1+52) \left(-\sqrt{\frac{-1+\sqrt5}{2}},\frac{-1+\sqrt5}{2}\right)

and

(1+52,1+52). \left(\sqrt{\frac{-1+\sqrt5}{2}},\frac{-1+\sqrt5}{2}\right).

Back to Exercise 2.8.

Solution to Exercise 2.9

  1. Edition note: The frozen source leaves the sketch item blank.

  2. We have

    K={(x,y)2(y1)2+x2=1}={(x,y)2y22y+1+x2=1}={(x,y)2y22y+x2=0}. \begin{aligned} K &=\{(x,y)\in\mathbb R^2\mid(y-1)^2+x^2=1\}\\ &=\{(x,y)\in\mathbb R^2\mid y^2-2y+1+x^2=1\}\\ &=\{(x,y)\in\mathbb R^2\mid y^2-2y+x^2=0\}. \end{aligned}

  3. We seek the common solution set of the two equations

    y=x2 y=x^2

    and

    y22y+x2=0. y^2-2y+x^2=0.

    Replacing x2x^2 by yy in the second equation gives

    0=y22y+y=y2y=y(y1). 0=y^2-2y+y=y^2-y=y(y-1).

    Thus y=0y=0 or y=1y=1. This gives the three intersection points (0,0)(0,0), (1,1)(1,1), and (1,1)(-1,1).

  4. The circle equation

    y22y+x2=0 y^2-2y+x^2=0

    is equivalent to

    y22y=x2, y^2-2y=-x^2,

    and hence to

    (y1)2=1x2. (y-1)^2=1-x^2.

    Therefore

    y=1±1x2. y=1\pm\sqrt{1-x^2}.

    The lower semicircle is the graph of the function

    [1,1],x11x2. [-1,1]\longrightarrow\mathbb R, \qquad x\longmapsto1-\sqrt{1-x^2}.

  5. We claim that on [1,1][-1,1] the parabola lies above the lower semicircle. We must show that

    x211x2. x^2\ge1-\sqrt{1-x^2}.

    This is equivalent to

    1x21x2. \sqrt{1-x^2}\ge1-x^2.

    Since both sides are non-negative on this interval, this is equivalent to

    1x2(1x2)2=1+x42x2. 1-x^2\ge(1-x^2)^2=1+x^4-2x^2.

    The last inequality is equivalent to x4x20x^4-x^2\le0, and then to x210x^2-1\le0, which holds because x[1,1]x\in[-1,1].

Edition note: The source calls both sides positive on [1,1][-1,1]. They are non-negative and vanish at the endpoints; non-negativity is the condition needed for squaring.

Back to Exercise 2.9.

Solution to Exercise 2.11

  1. Let

    A=(X1X2X3X4)andB=(Y1Y2Y3Y4). A=\begin{pmatrix}X_1&X_2\\X_3&X_4\end{pmatrix} \qquad\text{and}\qquad B=\begin{pmatrix}Y_1&Y_2\\Y_3&Y_4\end{pmatrix}.

    Then

    AB=(X1X2X3X4)(Y1Y2Y3Y4)=(X1Y1+X2Y3X1Y2+X2Y4X3Y1+X4Y3X3Y2+X4Y4) AB= \begin{pmatrix}X_1&X_2\\X_3&X_4\end{pmatrix} \begin{pmatrix}Y_1&Y_2\\Y_3&Y_4\end{pmatrix} =\begin{pmatrix} X_1Y_1+X_2Y_3&X_1Y_2+X_2Y_4\\ X_3Y_1+X_4Y_3&X_3Y_2+X_4Y_4 \end{pmatrix}

    and

    BA=(Y1Y2Y3Y4)(X1X2X3X4)=(X1Y1+X3Y2X2Y1+X4Y2X1Y3+X3Y4X2Y3+X4Y4). BA= \begin{pmatrix}Y_1&Y_2\\Y_3&Y_4\end{pmatrix} \begin{pmatrix}X_1&X_2\\X_3&X_4\end{pmatrix} =\begin{pmatrix} X_1Y_1+X_3Y_2&X_2Y_1+X_4Y_2\\ X_1Y_3+X_3Y_4&X_2Y_3+X_4Y_4 \end{pmatrix}.

    These product matrices are equal precisely when all four corresponding entries agree, that is, when

    X1Y1+X2Y3=X1Y1+X3Y2, X_1Y_1+X_2Y_3=X_1Y_1+X_3Y_2,

    X1Y2+X2Y4=X2Y1+X4Y2, X_1Y_2+X_2Y_4=X_2Y_1+X_4Y_2,

    X3Y1+X4Y3=X1Y3+X3Y4, X_3Y_1+X_4Y_3=X_1Y_3+X_3Y_4,

    and

    X3Y2+X4Y4=X2Y3+X4Y4. X_3Y_2+X_4Y_4=X_2Y_3+X_4Y_4.

    Thus the set is an affine variety. The first and fourth equations are equivalent to each other and to

    X2Y3=X3Y2. X_2Y_3=X_3Y_2.

    The commuting matrices are therefore described by the system

    X2Y3=X3Y2, X_2Y_3=X_3Y_2,

    X1Y2+X2Y4=X2Y1+X4Y2, X_1Y_2+X_2Y_4=X_2Y_1+X_4Y_2,

    X3Y1+X4Y3=X1Y3+X3Y4. X_3Y_1+X_4Y_3=X_1Y_3+X_3Y_4.

  2. The identity matrix E2E_2 commutes with every matrix. Hence (A,E2)(A,E_2) is a preimage of AA.

  3. We seek the matrices

    B=(Y1Y2Y3Y4) B=\begin{pmatrix}Y_1&Y_2\\Y_3&Y_4\end{pmatrix}

    that satisfy the preceding system for

    A=(X1X2X3X4)=(1100). A=\begin{pmatrix}X_1&X_2\\X_3&X_4\end{pmatrix} =\begin{pmatrix}1&1\\0&0\end{pmatrix}.

    The conditions become

    Y3=0,Y2+Y4=Y1,0=Y3, Y_3=0, \qquad Y_2+Y_4=Y_1, \qquad 0=Y_3,

    and the third condition can be omitted. The inverse image of the given matrix is

    {((1100),(Y2+Y4Y20Y4))|Y2,Y4K}. \left\{ \left( \begin{pmatrix}1&1\\0&0\end{pmatrix}, \begin{pmatrix}Y_2+Y_4&Y_2\\0&Y_4\end{pmatrix} \right) \;\middle|\;Y_2,Y_4\in K \right\}.

Back to Exercise 2.11.

Solution to Exercise 2.15

First we prove 𝔟𝔞\mathfrak b\subseteq\mathfrak a by showing that every generator of 𝔟\mathfrak b is 00 in the quotient ring modulo 𝔞\mathfrak a. In that ring,

X2+Y2=(2Z21)2+4Z2W2=(2Z21)2+4Z2(1Z2)=4Z44Z2+1+4Z24Z4=1. \begin{aligned} X^2+Y^2 &=(2Z^2-1)^2+4Z^2W^2\\ &=(2Z^2-1)^2+4Z^2(1-Z^2)\\ &=4Z^4-4Z^2+1+4Z^2-4Z^4\\ &=1. \end{aligned}

Moreover,

YW=2ZW2=2Z(1Z2)=Z(22Z2)=Z(12Z2+1)=Z(1X), \begin{aligned} YW &=2ZW^2\\ &=2Z(1-Z^2)\\ &=Z(2-2Z^2)\\ &=Z(1-2Z^2+1)\\ &=Z(1-X), \end{aligned}

and

W(1+X)=W(2Z2)=2WZ2=ZY. \begin{aligned} W(1+X) &=W(2Z^2)\\ &=2WZ^2\\ &=ZY. \end{aligned}

The inclusion 𝔠𝔟\mathfrak c\subseteq\mathfrak b is clear, since one generator has been omitted.

Finally, we prove 𝔞𝔠\mathfrak a\subseteq\mathfrak c by showing that the generators of 𝔞\mathfrak a are 00 in the quotient ring modulo 𝔠\mathfrak c. In this ring,

ZX=ZYWandWX=YZW. ZX=Z-YW \qquad\text{and}\qquad WX=YZ-W.

Consequently,

X=X1=X(Z2+W2)=Z2ZYW+YZWW2=Z2W2=2Z21, \begin{aligned} X &=X\cdot1\\ &=X(Z^2+W^2)\\ &=Z^2-ZYW+YZW-W^2\\ &=Z^2-W^2\\ &=2Z^2-1, \end{aligned}

and

Y=Y1=Y(Z2+W2)=WXZ+WZ+ZWZXW=2ZW. \begin{aligned} Y &=Y\cdot1\\ &=Y(Z^2+W^2)\\ &=WXZ+WZ+ZW-ZXW\\ &=2ZW. \end{aligned}

Back to Exercise 2.15.

Solution to Exercise 2.16

  1. Clearly (1,1)(1,1) is a zero of FF.

  2. We have

    F(X2+Y2+1)=(X4Y2+X2Y43X2Y2+1)(X2+Y2+1)=X6Y2+X4Y43X4Y2+X2+X4Y4+X2Y63X2Y4+Y2+X4Y2+X2Y43X2Y2+1=2X4Y4+X6Y2+X2Y62X4Y22X2Y43X2Y2+X2+Y2+1. \begin{aligned} F\cdot(X^2+Y^2+1) ={}&(X^4Y^2+X^2Y^4-3X^2Y^2+1)(X^2+Y^2+1)\\ ={}&X^6Y^2+X^4Y^4-3X^4Y^2+X^2 +X^4Y^4+X^2Y^6-3X^2Y^4+Y^2\\ &+X^4Y^2+X^2Y^4-3X^2Y^2+1\\ ={}&2X^4Y^4+X^6Y^2+X^2Y^6-2X^4Y^2-2X^2Y^4 -3X^2Y^2+X^2+Y^2+1. \end{aligned}

    For the other side,

    (X2YY)2+(XY2X)2+(X2Y21)2+14(XY3X3Y)2+34(XY3+X3Y2XY)2, (X^2Y-Y)^2+(XY^2-X)^2+(X^2Y^2-1)^2 +\frac14(XY^3-X^3Y)^2 +\frac34(XY^3+X^3Y-2XY)^2,

    we calculate the coefficient of each monomial. Only even degrees occur, and the highest degree is 88. Only the last three summands contribute at that degree, and the only monomials are X6Y2X^6Y^2, X4Y4X^4Y^4, and X2Y6X^2Y^6:

    X6Y2:14+34=1, X^6Y^2:\quad\frac14+\frac34=1,

    X4Y4:1+14(2)+34(2)=2, X^4Y^4:\quad1+\frac14(-2)+\frac34(2)=2,

    X2Y6:14+34=1. X^2Y^6:\quad\frac14+\frac34=1.

    In degree 66, only X4Y2X^4Y^2 and X2Y4X^2Y^4 occur:

    X4Y2:1+34(4)=2, X^4Y^2:\quad1+\frac34(-4)=-2,

    X2Y4:1+34(4)=2. X^2Y^4:\quad1+\frac34(-4)=-2.

    In degree 44, only X2Y2X^2Y^2 occurs:

    X2Y2:222+34(4)=3. X^2Y^2:\quad-2-2-2+\frac34(4)=-3.

    In degree 22, the coefficients of X2X^2 and Y2Y^2 are both 11. In degree 00, the coefficient of 11 is also 11. Thus the two sides agree.

  3. Dividing the identity in part (2) by X2+Y2+1X^2+Y^2+1 in the field of fractions of K[X,Y]K[X,Y], we obtain

    F=1X2+Y2+1((X2YY)2+(XY2X)2+(X2Y21)2+14(XY3X3Y)2+34(XY3+X3Y2XY)2). \begin{aligned} F=\frac{1}{X^2+Y^2+1}\Big(& (X^2Y-Y)^2+(XY^2-X)^2 +(X^2Y^2-1)^2\\ &+\frac14(XY^3-X^3Y)^2 +\frac34(XY^3+X^3Y-2XY)^2\Big). \end{aligned}

    Since X2+Y2+1X^2+Y^2+1 has no real zero, this identity also holds as an identity of functions 2\mathbb R^2\to\mathbb R. Squares are never negative, and all coefficients of the squares involved are positive. Hence the function is non-negative at every point.

Edition note: The source’s introductory sentence for degree 22 mentions only X2X^2, but its coefficient list includes both X2X^2 and Y2Y^2. The wording above follows that list and the displayed expansion.

Back to Exercise 2.16.

Solution to Exercise 2.20

To prove the inclusion \subseteq, take f(I+J)nf\in(I+J)^n. Since a product of ideals consists of all sums of products, we can write

f=f1+f2++fk, f=f_1+f_2+\cdots+f_k,

where

f=c1c2cn, f_\ell=c_{\ell1}c_{\ell2}\cdots c_{\ell n},

with crI+Jc_{\ell r}\in I+J. In turn,

cr=ar+br c_{\ell r}=a_{\ell r}+b_{\ell r}

with arIa_{\ell r}\in I and brJb_{\ell r}\in J. Thus

f=(a1+b1)(a2+b2)(an+bn). f_\ell=(a_{\ell1}+b_{\ell1})(a_{\ell2}+b_{\ell2}) \cdots(a_{\ell n}+b_{\ell n}).

Expanding this product by distributivity gives a sum of products with nn factors each: ss factors belong to II and nsn-s to JJ. Each summand therefore belongs to the right-hand side, as do each ff_\ell and finally ff.

To prove the inclusion \supseteq, it suffices to show

IsJns(I+J)n I^sJ^{n-s}\subseteq(I+J)^n

for every ss. Since I,JI+JI,J\subseteq I+J, we immediately have

IsJns(I+J)s(I+J)ns=(I+J)n. I^sJ^{n-s} \subseteq(I+J)^s(I+J)^{n-s} =(I+J)^n.

Back to Exercise 2.20.

English Markdown source · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Lecture 3: The Zariski Topology, Vanishing Ideals, and Radicals

The Zariski topology

Oscar Zariski (1899-1986)

In Proposition 2.8 we showed that the affine algebraic subsets of an affine space satisfy the axioms for the closed sets of a topology. This topology is called the Zariski topology.

Definition: the Zariski topology

On affine space 𝔸Kn\mathbb A_K^n, the Zariski topology is the topology in which the affine algebraic sets are declared to be closed.

Thus the open sets of the Zariski topology are the complements of affine algebraic sets. For an ideal 𝔞\mathfrak a, this complement is denoted by

D(𝔞)=𝔸Kn\V(𝔞). D(\mathfrak a)=\mathbb A_K^n\setminus V(\mathfrak a).

The Zariski topology differs greatly from other topologies, especially those given by a metric. In particular, the Zariski topology is not Hausdorff. Generally speaking, nonempty open sets in the Zariski topology are very large (see Exercise 3.20), while the closed sets—the affine algebraic sets—are very thin, apart from the whole space itself.

Edition note: The source’s non-Hausdorff assertion requires KK to be infinite and n1n\ge1. Over a finite field, affine space is a finite discrete space and is Hausdorff; 𝔸K0\mathbb A_K^0 is also Hausdorff.

Example: the Zariski topology on the affine line

The Zariski topology on the affine line 𝔸K1\mathbb A_K^1 over a field KK is easy to describe. The whole affine line is a closed set, given by V(0)V(0). All other closed subsets are given by V(𝔞)V(\mathfrak a) with 𝔞0\mathfrak a\ne0. Since K[X]K[X] is a principal ideal domain, we can even write

𝔞=(f),f0. \mathfrak a=(f),\qquad f\ne0.

The corresponding zero locus consists of only finitely many points. Conversely, each individual point PP with coordinate aa is the unique zero of the linear polynomial XaX-a, so

{P}=V(Xa) \{P\}=V(X-a)

is Zariski closed. A finite collection of points P1,,PkP_1,\ldots,P_k with coordinates a1,,aka_1,\ldots,a_k is the zero locus of the polynomial

(Xa1)(Xak). (X-a_1)\cdots(X-a_k).

The Zariski closed sets of the affine line are therefore all finite subsets, including the empty set, together with the whole affine line.

A line in the plane

Example: points are closed

Every point

P=(a1,,an)𝔸Kn P=(a_1,\ldots,a_n)\in\mathbb A_K^n

is Zariski closed; more precisely,

P=V(X1a1,X2a2,,Xnan). P=V(X_1-a_1,X_2-a_2,\ldots,X_n-a_n).

Apart from the empty set and the whole space, points are the simplest affine algebraic sets. The ideal

(X1a1,X2a2,,Xnan), (X_1-a_1,X_2-a_2,\ldots,X_n-a_n),

called the point ideal, is maximal; see Exercise 2.12.

Intersection of two planes
Intersection of three planes

By Proposition 2.8(3), every finite subset of affine space is Zariski closed. Thus, if EE is a finite set of points, its complement

𝔸Kn\E \mathbb A_K^n\setminus E

is Zariski open. Likewise, for a rational function P/QP/Q with

P,QK[X1,,Xn],Q0, P,Q\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n],\qquad Q\ne0,

its domain of definition, namely D(Q)D(Q), is open.

Vanishing ideals

Definition: vanishing ideal

Let T𝔸KnT\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n be a subset. The set

Id(T)={FK[X1,,Xn]F(P)=0 for every PT} \operatorname{Id}(T) =\{F\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]\mid F(P)=0 \text{ for every }P\in T\}

is called the vanishing ideal of TT.

This set is indeed an ideal. If F(P)=0F(P)=0 and G(P)=0G(P)=0 for every PTP\in T, the same holds for the sum F+GF+G and every multiple HFHF.

We therefore have two assignments in opposite directions: a subset of affine space is assigned its vanishing ideal, while an ideal in the polynomial ring is assigned its zero locus. We wish to understand to what extent ideals and zero loci correspond to one another.

Example: the empty set and the whole space

The vanishing ideal of the empty set is the unit ideal, since there is no point at which the vanishing condition needs to be checked.

The vanishing ideal of the whole space 𝔸Kn\mathbb A_K^n depends on the field. If KK is infinite, only the zero polynomial vanishes everywhere, so the vanishing ideal is the zero ideal. This follows from Exercise 3.18.

If, on the other hand, KK is a finite field with qq elements, then

xqx=0 x^q-x=0

for every xKx\in K. Thus the polynomial XqXX^q-X vanishes at every point of the affine line and belongs to its vanishing ideal. In higher dimensions,

Id(𝔸Kn)=(X1qX1,X2qX2,,XnqXn). \operatorname{Id}(\mathbb A_K^n) =(X_1^q-X_1,X_2^q-X_2,\ldots,X_n^q-X_n).

Example: the vanishing ideal of a point

Let

P=(a1,,an)𝔸Kn. P=(a_1,\ldots,a_n)\in\mathbb A_K^n.

Then

Id(P)=(X1a1,,Xnan). \operatorname{Id}(P)=(X_1-a_1,\ldots,X_n-a_n).

First, the linear polynomials XiaiX_i-a_i clearly vanish at PP, since (Xiai)(P)=aiai=0(X_i-a_i)(P)=a_i-a_i=0. Hence the ideal they generate is contained in the vanishing ideal.

Conversely, let FF be a polynomial with F(P)=0F(P)=0. Express FF in the “new variables”

X̃1=X1a1,,X̃n=Xnan \widetilde X_1=X_1-a_1,\ldots, \widetilde X_n=X_n-a_n

by replacing XiX_i with Xiai+aiX_i-a_i+a_i. In these new variables, write

F=νbνX̃ν. F=\sum_\nu b_\nu\widetilde X^\nu.

This polynomial has a constant term b0b_0, while every other monomial contains at least one variable. Thus, for suitable polynomials FiF_i, we can write

F=F1X̃1++FnX̃n+c. F=F_1\widetilde X_1+\cdots+F_n\widetilde X_n+c.

Since F(P)=c=0F(P)=c=0, we obtain

F(X̃1,,X̃n)=(X1a1,,Xnan). F\in(\widetilde X_1,\ldots,\widetilde X_n) =(X_1-a_1,\ldots,X_n-a_n).

Lemma: inclusion of subsets reverses inclusion of vanishing ideals

Let VW𝔸KnV\subseteq W\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n. Then

Id(W)Id(V). \operatorname{Id}(W)\subseteq\operatorname{Id}(V).

Proof

Take FId(W)F\in\operatorname{Id}(W). In other words, F(P)=0F(P)=0 for every PWP\in W. Since VWV\subseteq W, in particular F(P)=0F(P)=0 for every PVP\in V. Thus FId(V)F\in\operatorname{Id}(V). \square

Lemma: relations between zero loci and vanishing ideals

Let IK[X1,,Xn]I\subseteq K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] be an ideal and T𝔸KnT\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n a subset. The following statements hold.

  1. TV(Id(T))T\subseteq V(\operatorname{Id}(T)).
  2. IId(V(I))I\subseteq\operatorname{Id}(V(I)).
  3. V(I)=V(Id(V(I)))V(I)=V(\operatorname{Id}(V(I))).
  4. Id(T)=Id(V(Id(T)))\operatorname{Id}(T)=\operatorname{Id}(V(\operatorname{Id}(T))).

Proof

For (1), take PTP\in T. By definition, every polynomial FId(T)F\in\operatorname{Id}(T) vanishes on TT, so PV(Id(T))P\in V(\operatorname{Id}(T)).

For (2), take FIF\in I. The polynomial FF vanishes throughout V(I)V(I), so FId(V(I))F\in\operatorname{Id}(V(I)).

For (3), apply (1) to T=V(I)T=V(I) to obtain V(I)V(Id(V(I)))V(I)\subseteq V(\operatorname{Id}(V(I))). By (2), IId(V(I))I\subseteq\operatorname{Id}(V(I)); applying V()V(-) and Lemma 2.7 gives the reverse inclusion.

Statement (4) is proved in the same way. \square

Example: strict inclusions

Both inclusions in Lemma 3.8(1) and (2) can be strict. For example, let T𝔸K1T\subsetneq\mathbb A_K^1 be an infinite proper subset; this requires KK to be infinite. Then

Id(T)=0, \operatorname{Id}(T)=0,

so V(0)=𝔸K1V(0)=\mathbb A_K^1 is strictly larger than TT.

For the inclusion in (2), take R=K[X]R=K[X] and I=(X2)I=(X^2). Then

V(I)={0},Id({0})=(X), V(I)=\{0\},\qquad \operatorname{Id}(\{0\})=(X),

but X(X2)X\notin(X^2). A more extreme example in R=[X,Y]R=\mathbb R[X,Y] is I=(X2+Y2)I=(X^2+Y^2), with V(I)={(0,0)}V(I)=\{(0,0)\}. The vanishing ideal of that point is (X,Y)(X,Y).

Lemma: Zariski closure

Let T𝔸KnT\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n. The Zariski closure of TT is

T¯=V(Id(T)). \overline T=V(\operatorname{Id}(T)).

Proof

The inclusion TV(Id(T))T\subseteq V(\operatorname{Id}(T)) was proved in Lemma 3.8(1). Since V(Id(T))V(\operatorname{Id}(T)) is closed by definition, we obtain

T¯V(Id(T)). \overline T\subseteq V(\operatorname{Id}(T)).

Conversely, take PV(Id(T))P\in V(\operatorname{Id}(T)) and suppose that PT¯P\notin\overline T. Then there is a Zariski open set UU such that

PU,UT=. P\in U, \qquad U\cap T=\varnothing.

Write U=D(𝔞)U=D(\mathfrak a). The condition PUP\in U means that some G𝔞G\in\mathfrak a satisfies G(P)0G(P)\ne0. Then

PD(G)U, P\in D(G)\subseteq U,

so TD(G)=T\cap D(G)=\varnothing. Hence TV(G)T\subseteq V(G) and GId(T)G\in\operatorname{Id}(T). But G(P)0G(P)\ne0 contradicts PV(Id(T))P\in V(\operatorname{Id}(T)). \square

Radicals

Definition: radical ideal

An ideal 𝔞\mathfrak a in a commutative ring RR is called a radical ideal if the following holds: whenever fn𝔞f^n\in\mathfrak a for some nn\in\mathbb N, we already have f𝔞f\in\mathfrak a.

Definition: the radical of an ideal

Let RR be a commutative ring and 𝔞R\mathfrak a\subseteq R an ideal. The set

rad(𝔞)={fRthere is an r with fr𝔞} \operatorname{rad}(\mathfrak a) =\{f\in R\mid\text{there is an }r\text{ with }f^r\in\mathfrak a\}

is called the radical of 𝔞\mathfrak a.

The radical of an ideal is itself a radical ideal.

Lemma: the radical of an ideal is a radical ideal

Let RR be a commutative ring and 𝔞R\mathfrak a\subseteq R an ideal. Then rad(𝔞)\operatorname{rad}(\mathfrak a) is a radical ideal.

Proof

First we show that the set is an ideal. Clearly 00 belongs to the radical. If frad(𝔞)f\in\operatorname{rad}(\mathfrak a), say fr𝔞f^r\in\mathfrak a, then

(af)r=arfr𝔞, (af)^r=a^rf^r\in\mathfrak a,

so afaf belongs to the radical. For closure under addition, let f,grad(𝔞)f,g\in\operatorname{rad}(\mathfrak a) with fr𝔞f^r\in\mathfrak a and gs𝔞g^s\in\mathfrak a. Then

(f+g)r+s=i+j=r+s(r+si)figj=i+j=r+si<r(r+si)figj+i+j=r+sir(r+si)figj𝔞. \begin{aligned} (f+g)^{r+s} &=\sum_{i+j=r+s}\binom{r+s}{i}f^ig^j\\ &=\sum_{\substack{i+j=r+s\\i<r}}\binom{r+s}{i}f^ig^j +\sum_{\substack{i+j=r+s\\i\ge r}}\binom{r+s}{i}f^ig^j \in\mathfrak a. \end{aligned}

Now suppose that fkrad(𝔞)f^k\in\operatorname{rad}(\mathfrak a). For some rr we have

(fk)r=fkr𝔞, (f^k)^r=f^{kr}\in\mathfrak a,

so frad(𝔞)f\in\operatorname{rad}(\mathfrak a). \square

Lemma: vanishing ideals are radical ideals

Let T𝔸KnT\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n. Then the vanishing ideal Id(T)\operatorname{Id}(T) is a radical ideal.

Proof

Let FK[X1,,Xn]F\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] and FsId(T)F^s\in\operatorname{Id}(T). Then

Fs(P)=0 F^s(P)=0

for every PTP\in T. Consequently F(P)=0F(P)=0 for every PTP\in T, so FId(T)F\in\operatorname{Id}(T). \square

Later we shall see that over an algebraically closed field, radical ideals and algebraic zero loci correspond to one another. This is the content of Hilbert’s Nullstellensatz.


Source navigation: course · Lecture 2 · Lecture 4 (source) · Worksheet 3

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0 for translated course text; media retain component licences in authority/RIGHTS-unit-03.csv · Rights record: RIGHTS-unit-03.csv

Worksheet 3

Practice exercises

Exercise 3.1

Prove that the nonempty Zariski open subsets of the affine line 𝔸K1\mathbb A_K^1 are precisely the maximal domains of definition of rational functions.

Edition note: Assume KK is infinite. The source omits this hypothesis: over a finite field with qq elements, the rational expression 1/(XqX)1/(X^q-X) has empty domain on KK.

Exercise 3.2

Let KK be an infinite field and PK[X]P\in K[X] a nonconstant polynomial. Prove that the function

P:KK P:K\longrightarrow K

defined by PP takes infinitely many values.

Exercise 3.3

  1. Sketch the real zero loci of YnXnY^n-X^n.
  2. Determine the vanishing ideals of the affine algebraic sets Vn𝔸2V_n\subseteq\mathbb A_{\mathbb R}^2 consisting of the union of all lines through the origin and a vertex of a regular nn-gon with (1,0)(1,0) as one vertex.

Exercise 3.4

Describe a map

φ:𝔸K1𝔸K1 \varphi:\mathbb A_K^1\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^1

that is continuous in the Zariski topology but is not given by a polynomial.

Edition note: The source omits the necessary assumption that KK is infinite. Over a finite field, every map KKK\to K is represented by a polynomial, so no such example exists.

Exercise 3.5

Let

V𝔸n=n V\subseteq\mathbb A_{\mathbb C}^n=\mathbb C^n

be an affine algebraic set. Prove that under the identification

n=2n, \mathbb C^n=\mathbb R^{2n},

the subset VV is also an affine algebraic set in 𝔸2n\mathbb A_{\mathbb R}^{2n}. Prove that the converse does not hold.

Exercise 3.6

Let (M,d)(M,d) be a metric space and TMT\subseteq M a nonempty subset. Prove that

dT(x):=inf{d(x,y)yT} d_T(x):=\inf\{d(x,y)\mid y\in T\}

defines a well-defined continuous function MM\to\mathbb R.

Exercise 3.7

Let (M,d)(M,d) be a metric space and TMT\subseteq M a subset. Prove that TT is closed if and only if there is a continuous function

f:M f:M\longrightarrow\mathbb R

with

f1(0)=T. f^{-1}(0)=T.

Exercise 3.8

Prove that, for r>0r>0, the open ball U(P,r)U(P,r) in n\mathbb R^n is not Zariski open, and the closed ball B(P,r)B(P,r) is not Zariski closed.

Exercise 3.9

Characterise the radical ideals in \mathbb Z using prime factorisation.

Preliminary definition: nilpotent element

An element aa of a commutative ring RR is called nilpotent if

an=0 a^n=0

for some natural number nn.

Exercise 3.10

Let RR be a commutative ring and f,gRf,g\in R nilpotent elements. Prove that their sum f+gf+g is also nilpotent.

Exercise 3.11 ★

Let RR be a commutative ring and fRf\in R a nilpotent element. Prove that 1+f1+f is a unit.

Exercise 3.12

Let RR be a commutative ring and rRr\in R a nilpotent element. Construct a linear polynomial in R[X]R[X] that is a unit, and give its inverse.

Edition note: If “linear” means degree exactly 11, assume r0r\ne0. The source allows r=0r=0; in that case a polynomial of degree at most 11 is the appropriate formulation, and the construction may be constant.

Preliminary definition: reduced ring

A commutative ring RR is called reduced if 00 is its only nilpotent element.

Exercise 3.13 ★

Prove that an ideal 𝔞\mathfrak a in a commutative ring RR is radical if and only if the quotient ring R/𝔞R/\mathfrak a is reduced.

Exercise 3.14

Let 𝔞R\mathfrak a\subseteq R be an ideal in a commutative ring RR. Prove that all the powers

𝔞n,n+, \mathfrak a^n,\qquad n\in\mathbb N_+,

have the same radical.

Exercise 3.15

Prove that every prime ideal is a radical ideal.

Exercise 3.16

Let RR and SS be commutative rings, φ:RS\varphi:R\to S a ring homomorphism, and 𝔞\mathfrak a a radical ideal in SS. Prove that the inverse image φ1(𝔞)\varphi^{-1}(\mathfrak a) is a radical ideal in RR.

Exercise 3.17

Let 𝔞\mathfrak a and 𝔟\mathfrak b be ideals in K[X1,,Xn]K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] with the same radical. Prove that their zero loci are also equal. Give an example showing that the converse does not hold.

Exercise 3.18

Let KK be an infinite field, FK[X1,,Xn]F\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] a polynomial, and U𝔸KnU\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n a nonempty Zariski open subset. Suppose that F|U=0F|_U=0 as a function. Prove that FF is the zero polynomial.

Exercises to hand in

Exercise 3.19 — 3 points

Let

φ:𝔸Kn𝔸Km \varphi:\mathbb A_K^n\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^m

be a map given by mm polynomials in nn variables. Prove that φ\varphi is continuous in the Zariski topology.

Exercise 3.20 — 4 points

Let KK be an infinite field. Prove that every nonempty Zariski open subset

U𝔸Kn U\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n

is dense.

Source hint: Reduce to the case n=1n=1. Do not use Exercise 3.18.

Exercise 3.21 — 5 points

Determine the Zariski closure of each of the following subsets of the affine plane 𝔸K2\mathbb A_K^2.

  1. {(x,sinx)x}\{(x,\sin x)\mid x\in\mathbb R\}.
  2. {(cosx,sinx)x}\{(\cos x,\sin x)\mid x\in\mathbb R\}.
  3. {(x,x3)0x1,x}\{(x,x^3)\mid 0\le x\le1,\ x\in\mathbb R\}.
  4. {(x,x3)0x1,x}\{(x,x^3)\mid 0\le x\le1,\ x\in\mathbb Q\}.
  5. {(x,x3)x/(5)}\{(x,x^3)\mid x\in\mathbb Z/(5)\}.

The next exercise uses some more advanced topological concepts.

Exercise 3.22 — 4 points

Let KK be a field.

  1. Prove that for both K=K=\mathbb R and K=K=\mathbb C, the standard topology (the metric or Euclidean topology) is finer than the Zariski topology on 𝔸K1\mathbb A_K^1.
  2. Prove that the Zariski topology on 𝔸K1\mathbb A_K^1 equals the cofinite topology. Does this also hold on 𝔸Kn\mathbb A_K^n for n2n\ge2?
  3. When does the Zariski topology on 𝔸Kn\mathbb A_K^n satisfy T1T_1? When is it Hausdorff?
  4. What does the Zariski topology on 𝔸Kn\mathbb A_K^n look like when KK is a finite field?

Source navigation: Lecture 3 · public solutions for Unit 3 · Worksheet 2 · Worksheet 4 (source)

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Public Solutions to Worksheet 3

The source provides public solutions only to Exercises 3.11 and 3.13 at the frozen revision boundary. No additional solutions have been created for this edition.

Solution to Exercise 3.11

Suppose that fk=0f^k=0. Then

(1+f)(1f+f2f3+f4±±fk1)=1f+f2f3+f4±±fk1+ff2+f3f4fk1=1. \begin{aligned} &(1+f)(1-f+f^2-f^3+f^4\pm\cdots\pm f^{k-1})\\ &=1-f+f^2-f^3+f^4\pm\cdots\pm f^{k-1} +f-f^2+f^3-f^4\mp\cdots\mp f^{k-1}\\ &=1. \end{aligned}

Thus the element

1f+f2f3+f4±±fk1 1-f+f^2-f^3+f^4\pm\cdots\pm f^{k-1}

is the inverse of 1+f1+f, so 1+f1+f is a unit.

Back to Exercise 3.11.

Solution to Exercise 3.13

Let 𝔞\mathfrak a be a radical ideal and fR/𝔞f\in R/\mathfrak a nilpotent. Then

fr=0 f^r=0

in R/𝔞R/\mathfrak a for some rr. Interpreted back in RR, this means fr𝔞f^r\in\mathfrak a, using the same letter for a representative. Since 𝔞\mathfrak a is radical, f𝔞f\in\mathfrak a, so f=0f=0 in the quotient ring. Thus the quotient ring is reduced.

Conversely, suppose that an ideal

𝔞R \mathfrak a\subseteq R

has reduced quotient ring R/𝔞R/\mathfrak a. Suppose that fr𝔞f^r\in\mathfrak a. Then the residue class of frf^r is 00. Since the quotient ring is reduced, the residue class of ff itself is already 00. This means that f𝔞f\in\mathfrak a, so the ideal is radical.

Back to Exercise 3.13.

English Markdown source · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Lecture 4: Irreducibility, Components, and Intersections of Curves

Irreducible affine algebraic sets

Definition: irreducible set

An affine algebraic set

V𝔸Kn V\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n

is called irreducible if VV\ne\varnothing and there is no decomposition

V=YZ V=Y\cup Z

with affine algebraic sets Y,ZVY,Z\subsetneq V.

Thus a Zariski closed set VV is irreducible precisely when VV\ne\varnothing and every decomposition V=YZV=Y\cup Z forces V=YV=Y or V=ZV=Z. The same immediately follows for every finite expression as a union of closed sets.

Irreducibility is a purely topological property. In a general topological space, the preceding definition is formulated using closed sets in place of affine algebraic sets, which are the closed sets of the Zariski topology.

The following pictures show some irreducible and some reducible affine algebraic subsets. What are their irreducible components (see the definition below)?

Points for a Delaunay triangulation
A line
Several straight lines
A linear space

Example: affine space

Consider affine space 𝔸Kn\mathbb A_K^n. If KK is finite, this space consists of only finitely many points, and only its one-point subsets are irreducible. In particular, except when n=0n=0, affine space is not irreducible.

If KK is infinite, on the other hand, affine space 𝔸Kn\mathbb A_K^n is irreducible. Suppose that

𝔸Kn=YZ \mathbb A_K^n=Y\cup Z

with YY and ZZ both proper affine algebraic subsets. Their open complements,

U=𝔸Kn\Y,W=𝔸Kn\Z, U=\mathbb A_K^n\setminus Y, \qquad W=\mathbb A_K^n\setminus Z,

satisfy U,WU,W\ne\varnothing, but UW=U\cap W=\varnothing. This contradicts Exercise 3.20.

Lemma: irreducibility and prime ideals

Let V𝔸KnV\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n be an affine algebraic set with vanishing ideal Id(V)\operatorname{Id}(V). Then VV is irreducible if and only if Id(V)\operatorname{Id}(V) is a prime ideal.

Proof

First suppose that Id(V)\operatorname{Id}(V) is not prime. If

Id(V)=K[X1,,Xn], \operatorname{Id}(V)=K[X_1,\ldots,X_n],

then V=V=\varnothing, so VV is not irreducible by definition. Otherwise there are polynomials

F,GK[X1,,Xn] F,G\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]

with

FGId(V),F,GId(V). FG\in\operatorname{Id}(V), \qquad F,G\notin\operatorname{Id}(V).

Hence there are P,QVP,Q\in V with F(P)0F(P)\ne0 and G(Q)0G(Q)\ne0. Form the two ideals

𝔞1=Id(V)+(F),𝔞2=Id(V)+(G). \mathfrak a_1=\operatorname{Id}(V)+(F), \qquad \mathfrak a_2=\operatorname{Id}(V)+(G).

By Lemma 3.8(3),

V(𝔞1),V(𝔞2)V(Id(V))=V. V(\mathfrak a_1),V(\mathfrak a_2) \subseteq V(\operatorname{Id}(V))=V.

Both inclusions are proper because PV(𝔞1)P\notin V(\mathfrak a_1) and QV(𝔞2)Q\notin V(\mathfrak a_2). On the other hand,

V(𝔞1)V(𝔞2)=V(𝔞1𝔞2)=V(Id(V))=V. V(\mathfrak a_1)\cup V(\mathfrak a_2) =V(\mathfrak a_1\mathfrak a_2) =V(\operatorname{Id}(V)) =V.

Thus VV has a nontrivial decomposition and is not irreducible.

Now suppose that VV is not irreducible. If V=V=\varnothing, then Id(V)\operatorname{Id}(V) is the whole ring and is not prime. Suppose, then, that VV\ne\varnothing and

V=YZ V=Y\cup Z

is a nontrivial decomposition. Write

Y=V(𝔞1),Z=V(𝔞2). Y=V(\mathfrak a_1), \qquad Z=V(\mathfrak a_2).

Since YVY\subsetneq V, there is a point

PV=V(Id(V)),PV(𝔞1). P\in V=V(\operatorname{Id}(V)), \qquad P\notin V(\mathfrak a_1).

There is therefore an F𝔞1F\in\mathfrak a_1 with F(P)0F(P)\ne0, so FId(V)F\notin\operatorname{Id}(V). Similarly, there is a G𝔞2G\in\mathfrak a_2 with GId(V)G\notin\operatorname{Id}(V). For every QV=YZQ\in V=Y\cup Z, we have (FG)(Q)=0(FG)(Q)=0, since FF vanishes on YY and GG on ZZ. Thus

FGId(V), FG\in\operatorname{Id}(V),

although neither factor belongs to the ideal. Consequently Id(V)\operatorname{Id}(V) is not prime. \square

Definition: irreducible component

Let VV be an affine algebraic set. An affine algebraic subset WVW\subseteq V is called an irreducible component of VV if WW is irreducible and there is no irreducible subset WW' with

WWV. W\subsetneq W'\subseteq V.

If VV is irreducible, then VV itself is its only irreducible component. In Theorem 9.11 we shall prove that every affine algebraic set can be written as a finite union of irreducible components.

Example: behaviour over the real and complex numbers

Consider the equation

F=Y2+X2(X+1)2=0. F=Y^2+X^2(X+1)^2=0.

Over the real numbers, this equation has two solutions. Since a real square is never negative, FF can be zero only when both summands are zero. Hence Y=0Y=0 and either X=0X=0 or X=1X=-1. In particular, the real solution set is neither connected nor irreducible; its vanishing ideal in the real setting is also very large.

Over the complex numbers, there is a factorisation

F=(Y+iX(X+1))(YiX(X+1)) F=(Y+iX(X+1))(Y-iX(X+1))

into irreducible polynomials. This also shows that FF, as a polynomial in [X,Y]\mathbb R[X,Y], is irreducible, even though its real zero locus is not irreducible. Its complex zero locus consists of the two graphs

Y=±iX(X+1), Y=\pm iX(X+1),

which intersect at (0,0)(0,0) and (1,0)(-1,0).

For the equation

Y2+Z2+X2(X+1)2=0 Y^2+Z^2+X^2(X+1)^2=0

there are again only two real solution points, whereas the polynomial is irreducible over both the real and the complex numbers.

Hydrant on the island of Krk, Croatia

Example: the intersection of two congruent cylinders

In affine space 𝔸K3\mathbb A_K^3 with K=K=\mathbb R, consider the two cylinders

S1={(x,y,z)x2+y2=1},S2={(x,y,z)y2+z2=1}. S_1=\{(x,y,z)\mid x^2+y^2=1\}, \qquad S_2=\{(x,y,z)\mid y^2+z^2=1\}.

Both are irreducible sets, as we shall see later for infinite KK. What does their intersection look like? It is described by the ideal 𝔞\mathfrak a generated by X2+Y21X^2+Y^2-1 and Y2+Z21Y^2+Z^2-1. Subtracting one equation from the other gives

X2Z2=(XZ)(X+Z)𝔞. X^2-Z^2=(X-Z)(X+Z)\in\mathfrak a.

Neither factor itself belongs to 𝔞\mathfrak a. For example, (1,0,1)(1,0,-1) is a point of the intersection at which XZX-Z does not vanish (in characteristic 2\ne2), while (1,0,1)(1,0,1) is a point at which X+ZX+Z does not vanish. The components of the intersection are instead described by

𝔟1=𝔞+(XZ),𝔟2=𝔞+(X+Z). \mathfrak b_1=\mathfrak a+(X-Z), \qquad \mathfrak b_2=\mathfrak a+(X+Z).

Both are prime ideals, and the first quotient ring is

K[X,Y,Z]/𝔟1=K[X,Y,Z]/(𝔞+(XZ))K[X,Y]/(X2+Y21). \begin{aligned} K[X,Y,Z]/\mathfrak b_1 &=K[X,Y,Z]/(\mathfrak a+(X-Z))\\ &\cong K[X,Y]/(X^2+Y^2-1). \end{aligned}

To see the last isomorphism, eliminate ZZ using XZ=0X-Z=0; the two cylinder equations then become identical. The argument for the other ideal is the same. Geometrically, every point of S1S2S_1\cap S_2 lies in the plane

E1=V(ZX)orE2=V(Z+X). E_1=V(Z-X) \qquad\text{or}\qquad E_2=V(Z+X).

Moreover,

E1S1=E1S1S2=E1S2, E_1\cap S_1=E_1\cap S_1\cap S_2=E_1\cap S_2,

and likewise for E2E_2, since on each of these planes the two cylinder equations become identical.

Edition note: At this point the source repeats E1E_1; the second plane is E2=V(Z+X)E_2=V(Z+X), as used here.

What do these intersections look like within their planes? On E1E_1, use the coordinates YY and U=Z+XU=Z+X. Since

X=12((Z+X)(ZX)), X=\frac12((Z+X)-(Z-X)),

the first cylinder equation can be written as

(12((Z+X)(ZX)))2+Y2=1. \left(\frac12((Z+X)-(Z-X))\right)^2+Y^2=1.

On the plane E1E_1, where Z=XZ=X, this becomes

(12U)2+Y2=1, \left(\frac12U\right)^2+Y^2=1,

or

14U2+Y2=1. \frac14U^2+Y^2=1.

This is the equation of an ellipse, as is also geometrically apparent. The earlier calculation of K[X,Y,Z]/𝔟1K[X,Y,Z]/\mathfrak b_1, however, gave a circle equation. There is no contradiction: a circle and an ellipse can be transformed into each other by a linear change of variables, so their quotient rings are isomorphic. As metric objects they are different, and the intersection of these two cylinders consists of two ellipses. An orthonormal change of variables preserves the metric structure, but the variables YY, X+ZX+Z, and XZX-Z do not define an orthonormal transformation.

Thus

S1S2=V(𝔟1)V(𝔟2), S_1\cap S_2=V(\mathfrak b_1)\cup V(\mathfrak b_2),

where

𝔟1=(X2+Y21,XZ),𝔟2=(X2+Y21,X+Z), \mathfrak b_1=(X^2+Y^2-1,X-Z), \qquad \mathfrak b_2=(X^2+Y^2-1,X+Z),

describe two ellipses. To determine how the ellipses intersect, calculate the sum of their ideals:

𝔟1+𝔟2=(X2+Y21,XZ,X+Z)=(Y21,X,Z). \begin{aligned} \mathfrak b_1+\mathfrak b_2 &=(X^2+Y^2-1,X-Z,X+Z)\\ &=(Y^2-1,X,Z). \end{aligned}

Its zero locus consists of the two points (0,1,0)(0,1,0) and (0,1,0)(0,-1,0).

Principal directions on a cylinder

The number of points on curves

We have already seen that the intersection of a curve and a line consists of only finitely many points, unless the line itself is a component of the curve; see Lemma 1.3. We shall now generalise this to the intersection of two arbitrary plane curves. We need the following definition.

Definition: rational function field

Let KK be a field and K[X]K[X] the polynomial ring in one variable over KK. The field of fractions Q(K[X])Q(K[X]) is called the rational function field (or field of rational functions) over KK and is denoted by

K(X). K(X).

Theorem: intersection of curves without a common component

Let KK be a field, and let

F,GK[X,Y] F,G\in K[X,Y]

be two polynomials without a common nonconstant factor. Then V(F,G)V(F,G) contains only finitely many points P1,,PnP_1,\ldots,P_n.

Proof

Regard F,GK[X,Y]F,G\in K[X,Y] as elements of K(X)[Y]K(X)[Y], where K(X)K(X) is the field of rational functions in XX. By Exercise 4.27, FF and GG also have no common nonconstant factor in K(X)[Y]K(X)[Y]. Since this ring is a principal ideal domain, they generate the unit ideal. Thus there are

A,BK(X)[Y] A,B\in K(X)[Y]

with

AF+BG=1. AF+BG=1.

Multiplying by a common denominator of AA and BB gives, in K[X,Y]K[X,Y],

ÃF+B̃G=H,0HK[X]. \widetilde A F+\widetilde B G=H, \qquad 0\ne H\in K[X].

Every common zero of FF and GG in 𝔸K2\mathbb A_K^2 must be a zero of HH. Thus only finitely many XX-values can occur at common zeros. Interchanging XX and YY shows that only finitely many YY-values can occur as well. Consequently, there are only finitely many common zeros altogether. \square

Two cubic curves

Corollary: a prime curve with infinitely many points

Let KK be a field and FK[X,Y]F\in K[X,Y] a prime polynomial. Suppose that the curve V(F)V(F) has infinitely many points. Then its vanishing ideal is the principal ideal (F)(F), and V(F)V(F) is irreducible.

Proof

Clearly

(F)Id(V(F)). (F)\subseteq\operatorname{Id}(V(F)).

Take GId(V(F))G\in\operatorname{Id}(V(F)). By Lemma 3.8(3),

V(F)=V(Id(V(F)))V(F,G). V(F)=V(\operatorname{Id}(V(F)))\subseteq V(F,G).

If GG were not a multiple of FF, Theorem 4.8 would immediately contradict the assumption that V(F)V(F) has infinitely many points. Hence

Id(V(F))=(F). \operatorname{Id}(V(F))=(F).

This ideal is prime, and by Lemma 4.3, V(F)V(F) is irreducible. \square


Source navigation: course - Lecture 3 - Lecture 5 (source) - Worksheet 4

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0 for translated course text; media retain component licences in authority/RIGHTS-unit-04.csv · Rights record: RIGHTS-unit-04.csv

Worksheet 4

Practice exercises

Exercise 4.1

A surface and a vertical line

Find an ideal whose zero locus is the object shown above.

Exercise 4.2

Let V𝔸KnV\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n be a subset consisting of finitely many points. Prove that VV is irreducible if and only if it consists of a single point.

Exercise 4.3

Sketch an example of an affine algebraic subset that is connected but not irreducible.

Exercise 4.4

Rectangular hyperbola

Determine the irreducible components of the real hyperbola.

Exercise 4.5

Let KK be a field of characteristic 2\ne2 and aKa\in K nonzero. Prove that the polynomial

X2+Y2+aK[X,Y] X^2+Y^2+a\in K[X,Y]

is irreducible.

Exercise 4.6

Let KK be a field and

𝔭=(p)K[X] \mathfrak p=(p)\subseteq K[X]

a prime ideal. Prove that the zero locus V(𝔭)𝔸K1V(\mathfrak p)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^1 is either the whole of 𝔸K1\mathbb A_K^1 (whose irreducibility depends on the field) or a single point (and hence irreducible).

Edition note: As written, the source statement omits the case V(𝔭)=V(\mathfrak p)=\varnothing, for example K=K=\mathbb R and 𝔭=(X2+1)\mathfrak p=(X^2+1). This note does not alter the source exercise.

Exercise 4.7

Let KK be a finite field and 𝔭K[X1,,Xn]\mathfrak p\subset K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] a prime ideal. Prove that its zero locus

V(𝔭)𝔸Kn V(\mathfrak p)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n

can be irreducible only if it consists of a single point.

Exercise 4.8

Prove that the real polynomial

P=X2(X1)2+Y2(X2+(X1)2)[X,Y] P=X^2(X-1)^2+Y^2\bigl(X^2+(X-1)^2\bigr) \in\mathbb R[X,Y]

is a prime polynomial, whereas its zero locus

V(P)2 V(P)\subseteq\mathbb R^2

is nonempty but reducible.

Exercise 4.9

In 𝔸3\mathbb A_{\mathbb R}^3, calculate the intersection of the cylinder

V(x2+y21) V(x^2+y^2-1)

with the sphere of centre P=(0,0,0)P=(0,0,0) and radius rr, as a function of rr. When is the intersection empty, and when is it irreducible?

You may use the fact that the real circle is irreducible.

The next exercise says that the intersection of the graphs of two one-variable polynomials agrees, not only pointwise but also algebraically, with the intersection of the graph of their difference and the xx-axis. See also Exercise 26.3.

Exercise 4.10 ★

Let F,GK[X]F,G\in K[X] be polynomials in one variable over a field KK. Prove that there is a KK-algebra isomorphism

K[X,Y]/(YF,YG)K[X]/(FG). K[X,Y]/(Y-F,Y-G)\cong K[X]/(F-G).

Exercise 4.11 ★

Let two distinct circles in the plane be given by circle equations FF and GG.

  1. Prove that the quotient ring K[X,Y]/(F,G)K[X,Y]/(F,G) is isomorphic to K[X,Y]/(F,H)K[X,Y]/(F,H), where HH has degree at most 11.
  2. Prove that K[X,Y]/(F,G)K[X,Y]/(F,G) is isomorphic to a ring of the form K[U]/(Q)K[U]/(Q), where QK[U]Q\in K[U] has degree at most 22.

Exercise 4.12 ★

Let RR be a commutative ring and R[X]R[X] the polynomial ring over RR. Let 𝔞R[X]\mathfrak a\subseteq R[X] be an ideal with generators

𝔞=(F0,F1,,Fn), \mathfrak a=(F_0,F_1,\ldots,F_n),

where F0=XrF_0=X-r for some rRr\in R. For i1i\ge1, let GiRG_i\in R be obtained from FiF_i by replacing XX with rr. Prove the isomorphism of quotient rings

R[X]/𝔞R/(G1,,Gn). R[X]/\mathfrak a\cong R/(G_1,\ldots,G_n).

Exercise 4.13

Consider the real numbers \mathbb R with the metric topology. Is \mathbb R irreducible?

Exercise 4.14 ★

Let pp be a prime number and /(p)\mathbb Z/(p) the corresponding residue field. Prove that every quadratic equation of the form

F=aX2+bY2+c=0,a,b0, F=aX^2+bY^2+c=0, \qquad a,b\ne0,

has at least one solution in /(p)\mathbb Z/(p).

Exercise 4.15 ★

Let 𝔞\mathfrak a be an ideal in a commutative ring RR. Prove that 𝔞\mathfrak a is prime if and only if it is the kernel of a ring homomorphism

φ:RK \varphi:R\longrightarrow K

to a field KK.

Exercise 4.16

Prove that every maximal ideal 𝔪\mathfrak m in a commutative ring RR is prime.

Exercise 4.17 ★

Let RR be a commutative ring and 𝔭\mathfrak p an ideal. Prove that 𝔭\mathfrak p is prime if and only if the quotient ring R/𝔭R/\mathfrak p is an integral domain.

Exercise 4.18

Let 𝔭R\mathfrak p\subseteq R be a prime ideal in a commutative ring RR. Prove that

𝔞𝔟𝔭 \mathfrak a\cap\mathfrak b\subseteq\mathfrak p

implies 𝔞𝔭\mathfrak a\subseteq\mathfrak p or 𝔟𝔭\mathfrak b\subseteq\mathfrak p.

Exercise 4.19

Let RR and SS be commutative rings, φ:RS\varphi:R\to S a ring homomorphism, and 𝔭\mathfrak p a prime ideal in SS. Prove that the inverse image φ1(𝔭)\varphi^{-1}(\mathfrak p) is a prime ideal in RR.

Give an example showing that the inverse image of a maximal ideal need not be maximal.

Exercise 4.20

Let KK be a field and L=K(X)L=K(X) the field of fractions of the polynomial ring K[X]K[X]. Prove that there are infinitely many intermediate fields between KK and LL.

Exercise 4.21

Explain where the proof of Theorem 4.8 breaks down if one tries to extend it to more than two variables.

Exercise 4.22

Let P(X)P(X) and Q(Y)Q(Y) be nonconstant polynomials in the indicated variables. Give a bound (under what condition?) for the number of intersection points of the two curves

V(YP(X))andV(XQ(Y)). V(Y-P(X)) \qquad\text{and}\qquad V(X-Q(Y)).

The following exercises use the terms closed map and open map. A continuous map f:XYf:X\to Y between topological spaces is called closed if the image of every closed set is closed. It is called open if the image of every open set is open.

Exercise 4.23

Prove that the projection

𝔸K2𝔸K1,(x,y)x, \mathbb A_K^2\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^1, \qquad (x,y)\longmapsto x,

is not a closed map in the Zariski topology.

Edition note: Assume KK is infinite. The source omits this hypothesis; over a finite field, both spaces are discrete and every map between them is closed.

Exercise 4.24

Prove that a plane algebraic curve over the complex numbers \mathbb C is not compact in the metric topology.

Exercises to hand in

Exercise 4.25 - 6 points

Let p3p\ge3 be a prime number and K=/(p)K=\mathbb Z/(p) the corresponding residue field. Consider the polynomial

F=αX2+βXY+γY2+δX+ϵY+η/(p)[X,Y]. F=\alpha X^2+\beta XY+\gamma Y^2+\delta X+\epsilon Y+\eta \in\mathbb Z/(p)[X,Y].

If α,β,γ\alpha,\beta,\gamma are not all zero, this is a quadratic polynomial. Prove that exactly one of the following three alternatives holds for its zero locus V(F)𝔸K2V(F)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^2.

  1. V(F)V(F) has at least one point.
  2. F=cF=c for a constant c0c\ne0.
  3. There is a change of variables such that, in the new coordinates, the polynomial has the form Z2uZ^2-u with u/(p)u\in\mathbb Z/(p) a nonsquare.

Edition note: In alternative (3), one must also allow multiplication of the polynomial by a nonzero scalar, which does not change its zero locus. The source omits this normalisation: for example, 2X2+22X^2+2 over 𝔽3\mathbb F_3 has no zero, but an invertible linear or affine change of variables alone cannot turn its nonsquare leading coefficient into 11.

Source hint: Exercise 9.20 in Number Theory (Osnabrück 2025) is useful for one important case.

Exercise 4.26 - 3 points

Let VV be an irreducible affine algebraic set with at least two points, and let P1,,PmVP_1,\ldots,P_m\in V be finitely many points. Prove that

V\{P1,,Pm} V\setminus\{P_1,\ldots,P_m\}

is also irreducible in the induced topology.

Exercise 4.27 - 4 points

Let RR be a unique factorisation domain with field of fractions Q(R)Q(R). Prove that if F,GR[X]F,G\in R[X] have no common nonconstant factor, then they also have no common nonconstant factor when regarded as elements of Q(R)[X]Q(R)[X].

Source note: You may restrict attention to the case where RR is a principal ideal domain.

Exercise 4.28 - 3 points

Let K=K=\mathbb Q be the field of rational numbers. Determine, with justification, whether

V(X2+Y21)𝔸2 V(X^2+Y^2-1)\subseteq\mathbb A_{\mathbb Q}^2

is irreducible.

Source hint: Use Exercise 1.28 on the rational parametrisation of the unit circle and Corollary 4.9.

Exercise 4.29 - 4 points

Prove that the projection

𝔸K2𝔸K1,(x,y)x, \mathbb A_K^2\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^1, \qquad (x,y)\longmapsto x,

is an open map in the Zariski topology.

Exercise 4.30 - 4 points

Prove that the affine plane 𝔸K2\mathbb A_K^2 with the Zariski topology is compact.

Terminology note: Here “compact” means that every open cover has a finite subcover; no Hausdorff condition is included (this is also called quasi-compact).


Source navigation: Lecture 4 - public solutions for Unit 4 - Worksheet 3 - Worksheet 5 (source)

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Public Solutions to Worksheet 4

The source provides public solutions only to Exercises 4.10, 4.11, 4.12, 4.14, 4.15, and 4.17 at the frozen revision boundary. No additional solutions have been created for this edition.

Solution to Exercise 4.10

We prove the isomorphism

K[X,Y]/(YF,YG)K[X]/(FG). K[X,Y]/(Y-F,Y-G)\cong K[X]/(F-G).

Consider the KK-algebra homomorphism

φ:K[X,Y]K[X]/(FG) \varphi:K[X,Y]\longrightarrow K[X]/(F-G)

that sends XXX\mapsto X and YFY\mapsto F. We have

φ(YF)=FF=0 \varphi(Y-F)=F-F=0

and

φ(YG)=FG=0. \varphi(Y-G)=F-G=0.

The homomorphism theorem for rings gives an induced KK-algebra homomorphism

φ¯:K[X,Y]/(YF,YG)K[X]/(FG). \overline\varphi: K[X,Y]/(Y-F,Y-G)\longrightarrow K[X]/(F-G).

Now consider the KK-algebra homomorphism

ψ:K[X]K[X,Y]/(YF,YG) \psi:K[X]\longrightarrow K[X,Y]/(Y-F,Y-G)

with XXX\mapsto X. In the target ring,

ψ(FG)=FG=(YG)(YF)=0. \psi(F-G)=F-G=(Y-G)-(Y-F)=0.

This therefore induces a homomorphism

ψ¯:K[X]/(FG)K[X,Y]/(YF,YG). \overline\psi: K[X]/(F-G)\longrightarrow K[X,Y]/(Y-F,Y-G).

Both compositions ψ¯φ¯\overline\psi\circ\overline\varphi and φ¯ψ¯\overline\varphi\circ\overline\psi are the respective identity maps.

Back to Exercise 4.10.

Solution to Exercise 4.11

  1. A circle equation has the form

    (Xa)2+(Yb)2c=0. (X-a)^2+(Y-b)^2-c=0.

    Expanding, write

    F=X2+Y2+rX+sY+t F=X^2+Y^2+rX+sY+t

    and similarly

    G=X2+Y2+r̃X+s̃Y+t̃. G=X^2+Y^2+\widetilde rX+\widetilde sY+\widetilde t.

    Then

    H=FG=(rr̃)X+(ss̃)Y+(tt̃). H=F-G=(r-\widetilde r)X+(s-\widetilde s)Y +(t-\widetilde t).

    Since the circles are distinct, HH has degree 11 or 00. Moreover,

    (F,G)=(F,H), (F,G)=(F,H),

    so their quotient rings are isomorphic.

  2. Use the description from the first part:

    R=K[X,Y]/(F,H). R=K[X,Y]/(F,H).

    If HH is a nonzero constant, RR is the zero ring. Otherwise HH is linear, so one variable can be expressed in terms of the other; say

    Y=αX+β. Y=\alpha X+\beta.

    Hence

    K[X,Y]/(F,H)K[X,Y]/(X2+Y2+rX+sY+t,YαXβ)K[X]/(X2+(αX+β)2+rX+s(αX+β)+t)K[X]/(uX2+vX+w). \begin{aligned} K[X,Y]/(F,H) &\cong K[X,Y]/(X^2+Y^2+rX+sY+t,\,Y-\alpha X-\beta)\\ &\cong K[X]/\bigl(X^2+(\alpha X+\beta)^2+rX +s(\alpha X+\beta)+t\bigr)\\ &\cong K[X]/(uX^2+vX+w). \end{aligned}

Back to Exercise 4.11.

Solution to Exercise 4.12

Consider the surjective evaluation homomorphism

R[X]R/(G1,,Gn),X[r]. R[X]\longrightarrow R/(G_1,\ldots,G_n), \qquad X\longmapsto[r].

The generator F0=XrF_0=X-r maps to 00, and for i1i\ge1, the generator FiF_i maps to Gi=0G_i=0. The homomorphism theorem gives a surjective ring homomorphism

φ:R[X]/𝔞R/(G1,,Gn). \varphi:R[X]/\mathfrak a\longrightarrow R/(G_1,\ldots,G_n).

It remains to prove injectivity. Suppose that

P=a0+a1X++amXmR[X] P=a_0+a_1X+\cdots+a_mX^m\in R[X]

maps to 00 under φ\varphi. This means that

P(r)=a0+a1r++amrm(G1,,Gn) P(r)=a_0+a_1r+\cdots+a_mr^m \in(G_1,\ldots,G_n)

in RR. Furthermore,

PP(r)=i=0maiXii=0mairi=i=0mai(Xiri)=i=1mai(Xiri)=i=1m(Xr)Hi, \begin{aligned} P-P(r) &=\sum_{i=0}^m a_iX^i-\sum_{i=0}^m a_ir^i\\ &=\sum_{i=0}^m a_i(X^i-r^i)\\ &=\sum_{i=1}^m a_i(X^i-r^i)\\ &=\sum_{i=1}^m (X-r)H_i, \end{aligned}

since XiriX^i-r^i is always divisible by XrX-r. Thus

PP(r)(Xr), P-P(r)\in(X-r),

and altogether

P(Xr,G1,,Gn). P\in(X-r,G_1,\ldots,G_n).

For suitable elements BiB_i, we also have

FiGi=FiFi(r)=(Xr)Bi. F_i-G_i=F_i-F_i(r)=(X-r)B_i.

Consequently,

P(Xr,G1,,Gn)=(Xr,F1,,Fn)=𝔞. \begin{aligned} P&\in(X-r,G_1,\ldots,G_n)\\ &=(X-r,F_1,\ldots,F_n)\\ &=\mathfrak a. \end{aligned}

Thus φ\varphi is injective and is the required isomorphism.

Back to Exercise 4.12.

Solution to Exercise 4.14

For p=2p=2, the statement can be checked directly. Suppose that p3p\ge3. Write the equation as

aX2=bY2c. aX^2=-bY^2-c.

Since aa and bb are units, the theorem on the number of quadratic residues shows that the sets of values on the left and on the right each contain (p+1)/2(p+1)/2 elements. The field /(p)\mathbb Z/(p) has only pp elements, so the two sets cannot be disjoint. Thus there is a d/(p)d\in\mathbb Z/(p) that can be written as

d=aX2=bY2c d=aX^2=-bY^2-c

for suitable X,Y/(p)X,Y\in\mathbb Z/(p). This pair solves the original equation.

Back to Exercise 4.14.

Solution to Exercise 4.15

First let 𝔞\mathfrak a be a prime ideal. By the characterisation of prime ideals by quotient rings, R/𝔞R/\mathfrak a is an integral domain and therefore has a field of fractions Q(R/𝔞)Q(R/\mathfrak a). The composition of the canonical projection with the inclusion into this field,

φ:RQ(R/𝔞),x[x], \varphi:R\longrightarrow Q(R/\mathfrak a), \qquad x\longmapsto[x],

is a ring homomorphism to a field with

kerφ=𝔞. \ker\varphi=\mathfrak a.

Conversely, the kernel of a ring homomorphism

φ:RK \varphi:R\longrightarrow K

is always an ideal, by the kernel-ideal theorem. If abkerφab\in\ker\varphi, then

0=φ(ab)=φ(a)φ(b). 0=\varphi(ab)=\varphi(a)\varphi(b).

Since a field is an integral domain, KK has no zero divisors, so either φ(a)=0\varphi(a)=0 or φ(b)=0\varphi(b)=0. Equivalently, akerφa\in\ker\varphi or bkerφb\in\ker\varphi. Thus kerφ\ker\varphi is a prime ideal.

Edition note: The source calls the map to Q(R/𝔞)Q(R/\mathfrak a) the canonical projection. More precisely, it is the quotient projection followed by the inclusion into the field of fractions, as stated above.

Back to Exercise 4.15.

Solution to Exercise 4.17

First let 𝔭\mathfrak p be a prime ideal. In particular, 𝔭R\mathfrak p\subsetneq R, so R/𝔭R/\mathfrak p is not the zero ring. Suppose that fg=0fg=0 in R/𝔭R/\mathfrak p, with ff and gg represented by elements of RR. Then fg𝔭fg\in\mathfrak p, so f𝔭f\in\mathfrak p or g𝔭g\in\mathfrak p. In R/𝔭R/\mathfrak p, this means exactly that f=0f=0 or g=0g=0. Thus R/𝔭R/\mathfrak p is an integral domain.

Conversely, suppose that R/𝔭R/\mathfrak p is an integral domain. This quotient is not the zero ring, so 𝔭R\mathfrak p\ne R. If f,g𝔭f,g\notin\mathfrak p, their classes are both nonzero in R/𝔭R/\mathfrak p. Since the ring is an integral domain, their product is nonzero. Hence

fg𝔭. fg\notin\mathfrak p.

Taking the contrapositive, fg𝔭fg\in\mathfrak p forces f𝔭f\in\mathfrak p or g𝔭g\in\mathfrak p. Thus 𝔭\mathfrak p is prime.

Back to Exercise 4.17.

English Markdown source · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Lecture 5: Homogeneous Components, Noether Normalisation, and Polynomial Maps

Homogeneous components

We discuss the degree of a polynomial in several variables and its decomposition into homogeneous components.

Definition: degree

Let SS be a commutative ring and

R=S[X1,,Xn] R=S[X_1,\ldots,X_n]

the polynomial ring in nn variables over SS. For a monomial

G=Xν=X1ν1Xnνn, G=X^\nu=X_1^{\nu_1}\cdots X_n^{\nu_n},

the number

|ν|=j=1nνj |\nu|=\sum_{j=1}^n\nu_j

is called the degree of GG. For a nonzero polynomial

F=νaνXν, F=\sum_\nu a_\nu X^\nu,

the number

max{|ν|:aν0} \max\{|\nu|:a_\nu\ne0\}

is called the degree of FF.

Definition: homogeneous decomposition

Let SS and R=S[X1,,Xn]R=S[X_1,\ldots,X_n] be as above. For a polynomial

F=νaνXνR, F=\sum_\nu a_\nu X^\nu\in R,

the decomposition

F=i=0dFi, F=\sum_{i=0}^d F_i,

where

Fi=ν|ν|=iaνXν, F_i=\sum_{\substack{\nu\\|\nu|=i}}a_\nu X^\nu,

is called the homogeneous decomposition of FF. The polynomial FiF_i is called the homogeneous component of FF of degree ii. The polynomial FF itself is called homogeneous if its homogeneous decomposition has only one nonzero component.

A cone: the zero set of a homogeneous polynomial

The zero set of a homogeneous polynomial FF is a cone of lines through the origin: if a point PP belongs to V(F)V(F), the entire line through PP and 00 also belongs to V(F)V(F).

Example: total degree and degree in one variable

The polynomial

F=4X3YZ2+2X2Y5+5XYZ73X4YZ4+X8Y7+2Y6Z3+X+5 F=4X^3YZ^2+2X^2Y^5+5XYZ^7-3X^4YZ^4+X^8-Y^7+2Y^6Z^3+X+5

has degree 99, with homogeneous components

F9=5XYZ73X4YZ4+2Y6Z3, F_9=5XYZ^7-3X^4YZ^4+2Y^6Z^3,

F8=X8, F_8=X^8,

F7=2X2Y5Y7, F_7=2X^2Y^5-Y^7,

F6=4X3YZ2, F_6=4X^3YZ^2,

F5=F4=F3=F2=0, F_5=F_4=F_3=F_2=0,

and

F1=X,F0=5. F_1=X, \qquad F_0=5.

If we regard FF as a polynomial in (K[Y,Z])[X](K[Y,Z])[X] and consider only the powers of XX, we speak of its XX-degree. The XX-degree of FF is 88. There is also a homogeneous decomposition with respect to the XX-grading: the component of XX-degree zero is

Y7+2Y6Z3+5, -Y^7+2Y^6Z^3+5,

while the component of XX-degree one is

5XYZ7+X. 5XYZ^7+X.

The number of points on curves II

Emmy Noether (1882-1935)

The following theorem is called Noether normalisation in the case of plane curves.

Theorem: Noether normalisation for plane curves

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and FK[X,Y]F\in K[X,Y] a nonconstant polynomial of degree dd defining the algebraic curve

C=V(F). C=V(F).

There is a linear change of coordinates such that, in the new coordinates X̃,Ỹ\widetilde X,\widetilde Y, the transformed polynomial has the form

F̃=X̃d+terms of lower degree in X̃. \widetilde F=\widetilde X^d+\text{terms of lower degree in }\widetilde X.

Proof

Write the homogeneous decomposition

F=Fd+Fd1++F1+F0, F=F_d+F_{d-1}+\cdots+F_1+F_0,

with

Fi=a+b=ica,bXaYb. F_i=\sum_{a+b=i}c_{a,b}X^aY^b.

A homogeneous polynomial in two variables has the same factorisation properties as a polynomial in one variable. Since KK is algebraically closed, there is a factorisation

Fd=c(Ye1X)(YekX)Xdk. F_d=c(Y-e_1X)\cdots(Y-e_kX)X^{d-k}.

Since cc has a ddth root, scaling the variables allows us to assume c=1c=1. In particular, KK is infinite, so we can choose eKe\in K distinct from all the eje_j. Use the new coordinates

Ỹ=YeX,X̃=X. \widetilde Y=Y-eX, \qquad \widetilde X=X.

In these coordinates, each linear factor becomes

YejX=YeX+eXejX=Ỹ(eje)X=Ỹ(eje)X̃, \begin{aligned} Y-e_jX &=Y-eX+eX-e_jX\\ &=\widetilde Y-(e_j-e)X\\ &=\widetilde Y-(e_j-e)\widetilde X, \end{aligned}

with eje0e_j-e\ne0, while the factor XX becomes X̃\widetilde X. On expanding, X̃d\widetilde X^d occurs with a nonzero coefficient in KK, which can again be made 11 by scaling. The top homogeneous component consequently has the form X̃d\widetilde X^d plus terms of X̃\widetilde X-degree at most d1d-1. Since the lower-degree homogeneous components retain their degrees, all other monomials also have X̃\widetilde X-degree at most d1d-1. \square

Corollary: plane curves have infinitely many points

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and FK[X,Y]F\in K[X,Y] a nonconstant polynomial defining the algebraic curve C=V(F)C=V(F). Then CC has infinitely many elements.

Proof

By Noether normalisation, we may assume that

F=Xd+Pd1(Y)Xd1++P1(Y)X+P0(Y), F=X^d+P_{d-1}(Y)X^{d-1}+\cdots+P_1(Y)X+P_0(Y),

with Pi(Y)K[Y]P_i(Y)\in K[Y]. For every prescribed value aKa\in K of YY, substituting Y=aY=a gives a monic polynomial of degree dd in XX. Since KK is algebraically closed, this polynomial has at least one root bKb\in K. Thus the point with coordinates X=bX=b and Y=aY=a lies on CC. Since KK is infinite, the curve has infinitely many points. \square

Edition note: After setting Y=aY=a and choosing a root X=bX=b, the source writes the point as (a,b)(a,b). This edition specifies both coordinates explicitly to retain the order X=bX=b, Y=aY=a.

Polynomial maps between affine spaces

Consider the map

φ:𝔸Kr𝔸Kn,(t1,,tr)(φ1(t1,,tr),,φn(t1,,tr))=(x1,,xn), \begin{aligned} \varphi:\mathbb A_K^r&\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^n,\\ (t_1,\ldots,t_r)&\longmapsto (\varphi_1(t_1,\ldots,t_r),\ldots,\varphi_n(t_1,\ldots,t_r)) =(x_1,\ldots,x_n), \end{aligned}

where each component function φiK[T1,,Tr]\varphi_i\in K[T_1,\ldots,T_r] is a polynomial. Thus each component of the map is given by a polynomial in rr variables. The case n=1n=1 is a polynomial in rr variables; the case r=1r=1 and n=2n=2 is a parametrisation of an algebraic curve. Later we shall define morphisms between affine algebraic sets in greater generality.

Edition note: The source prints the ring of component functions as K[X1,,Xr]K[X_1,\ldots,X_r], although the map’s parameters and the target ring of its substitution homomorphism use T1,,TrT_1,\ldots,T_r. This edition consistently uses K[T1,,Tr]K[T_1,\ldots,T_r].

An important accompanying feature of a polynomial map φ:𝔸Kr𝔸Kn\varphi:\mathbb A_K^r\to\mathbb A_K^n is that it induces a KK-algebra homomorphism between the polynomial rings in the opposite direction. This substitution homomorphism is determined by XiφiX_i\mapsto\varphi_i and is denoted by

φ̃:K[X1,,Xn]K[T1,,Tr],FFφ=F(φi/Xi). \begin{aligned} \widetilde\varphi: K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]&\longrightarrow K[T_1,\ldots,T_r],\\ F&\longmapsto F\circ\varphi =F(\varphi_i/X_i). \end{aligned}

The notation φi/Xi\varphi_i/X_i means replacing the variable XiX_i with φi\varphi_i. As a function, FφF\circ\varphi is the composite map

𝔸Krφ𝔸KnF𝔸K1. \mathbb A_K^r\xrightarrow{\varphi}\mathbb A_K^n \xrightarrow{F}\mathbb A_K^1.

For the zero locus V(F)𝔸KnV(F)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n, we have

φ1(V(F))=V(φ̃(F)). \varphi^{-1}(V(F))=V(\widetilde\varphi(F)).

Apart from constant maps, the simplest polynomial maps are affine-linear maps, whose component functions are affine-linear polynomials:

φi=ai1T1++airTr+ci. \varphi_i=a_{i1}T_1+\cdots+a_{ir}T_r+c_i.

These maps need not be linear, since the origin need not map to the origin: translations are allowed. An affine-linear map is the composition of a linear map and a translation. For r=nr=n, a bijective affine-linear map is regarded as a coordinate transformation, or change of variables.

Definition: affine-linear change of variables

Let KK be a field. A map φ:𝔸Kn𝔸Kn\varphi:\mathbb A_K^n\to\mathbb A_K^n of the form

φ(x1,,xn)=M(x1xn)+(v1,,vn), \varphi(x_1,\ldots,x_n) =M \begin{pmatrix} x_1\\ \vdots\\ x_n \end{pmatrix} +(v_1,\ldots,v_n),

where MM is an invertible matrix, is called an affine-linear change of variables.

One can debate whether a linear change of variables actually moves anything in space or merely changes the coordinates. In either case, such transformations are important tools for putting a polynomial, a system of algebraic equations, or an affine algebraic set into a simpler form. Under a change of variables, the set

V=V(F1,,Fm) V=V(F_1,\ldots,F_m)

becomes

Ṽ=V(F̃1,,F̃m),F̃i=φ̃(Fi), \widetilde V=V(\widetilde F_1,\ldots,\widetilde F_m), \qquad \widetilde F_i=\widetilde\varphi(F_i),

and Ṽ\widetilde V is the inverse image of VV under φ\varphi.

Definition: affine-linear equivalence

Two affine algebraic sets

V,Ṽ𝔸Kn V,\widetilde V\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n

are called affine-linearly equivalent if there is an affine-linear change of variables φ:𝔸Kn𝔸Kn\varphi:\mathbb A_K^n\to\mathbb A_K^n such that

φ1(V)=Ṽ. \varphi^{-1}(V)=\widetilde V.

This notion depends on how the objects are embedded. Later we shall see that a parabola and a line in the plane are isomorphic, since both are isomorphic to the affine line, but they are not affine-linearly equivalent.

The essential algebraic and topological properties of an affine algebraic set are preserved under an affine-linear change of variables: irreducibility, singularities, intersections, connectedness, and compactness. By contrast, properties typical of real metric geometry may change: angles, lengths and ratios of lengths, volumes, and shapes. These latter notions are not relevant to algebraic geometry. Henceforth we shall transform a situation into a desired form without special emphasis whenever such a transformation is available.

Theorem: quotient rings under affine-linear equivalence

Let KK be a field and V,Ṽ𝔸KnV,\widetilde V\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n two affine-linearly equivalent affine algebraic sets. Let Id(V)\operatorname{Id}(V) and Id(Ṽ)\operatorname{Id}(\widetilde V) be their vanishing ideals. Then there is a KK-algebra isomorphism

K[X1,,Xn]/Id(V)K[X1,,Xn]/Id(Ṽ). K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]/\operatorname{Id}(V) \cong K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]/\operatorname{Id}(\widetilde V).

Proof

By definition, there is an affine-linear change of variables

𝔸Kn𝔸Kn,Pφ(P), \mathbb A_K^n\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^n, \qquad P\longmapsto\varphi(P),

with φ1(V)=Ṽ\varphi^{-1}(V)=\widetilde V. Let φ̃\widetilde\varphi be the corresponding automorphism of K[X1,,Xn]K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]. Then

φ̃1(Id(Ṽ))=Id(V). \widetilde\varphi^{-1}\bigl(\operatorname{Id}(\widetilde V)\bigr) =\operatorname{Id}(V).

The isomorphism theorem gives the isomorphism of the two quotient rings. \square

Remark: the coordinate ring as an intrinsic invariant

The preceding theorem expresses an important principle of algebraic geometry: the algebraic object attached to a zero locus is the quotient of the polynomial ring by its vanishing ideal. This is an intrinsic invariant of the zero locus, independent of its embedding.

From this perspective, Noether normalisation for plane curves takes on new meaning. We may assume that the curve equation has the form

F=Xd+Pd1(Y)Xd1++P1(Y)X+P0(Y). F=X^d+P_{d-1}(Y)X^{d-1}+\cdots+P_1(Y)X+P_0(Y).

The equation F=0F=0 is an equation of integral dependence for the residue class of XX. More precisely, the residue class of XX in K[X,Y]/(F)K[X,Y]/(F) is integral over K[Y]K[Y]. These notions may be familiar from elementary number theory and will again play an important role here. Since XX generates the ring as an algebra over K[Y]K[Y], there is an integral, indeed finite, ring extension

K[Y]K[X,Y]/(Xd+Pd1(Y)Xd1++P1(Y)X+P0(Y)). K[Y]\longrightarrow K[X,Y]/\bigl(X^d+P_{d-1}(Y)X^{d-1}+\cdots+P_1(Y)X+P_0(Y)\bigr).

Thus Noether normalisation also says that, for every algebraic curve over an algebraically closed field, its coordinate ring can be realised as a finite extension of the principal ideal domain K[Y]K[Y]. This is a direct analogy with rings of integers in number theory, which are likewise finite extensions of the principal ideal domain \mathbb Z.

Under general polynomial maps between affine spaces, unlike affine-linear transformations, many algebraic properties may change: dimension may change, singularities may arise, and so on. Irreducibility, however, passes to the Zariski closure of the image.

Theorem: the closure of the image of a polynomial map is irreducible

Let KK be an infinite field and

φ:𝔸Kr𝔸Kn \varphi:\mathbb A_K^r\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^n

a map given by nn polynomials in rr variables. Then the Zariski closure of the image of φ\varphi is irreducible.

Proof

Let

B=φ(𝔸Kr) B=\varphi(\mathbb A_K^r)

be the image of the map. By Lemma 3.10,

B¯=V(Id(B)). \overline B=V(\operatorname{Id}(B)).

For P=φ(Q)P=\varphi(Q) with Q𝔸KrQ\in\mathbb A_K^r and FK[X1,,Xn]F\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n], we have

F(P)=F(φ(Q))=(Fφ)(Q), F(P)=F(\varphi(Q))=(F\circ\varphi)(Q),

where FφK[T1,,Tr]F\circ\varphi\in K[T_1,\ldots,T_r] is obtained by replacing XiX_i with the iith component function φiK[T1,,Tr]\varphi_i\in K[T_1,\ldots,T_r]. Consequently, FF vanishes throughout BB precisely when FφF\circ\varphi vanishes throughout 𝔸Kr\mathbb A_K^r. Since KK is infinite, the latter condition means that FφF\circ\varphi is the zero polynomial.

Thus

FId(B) F\in\operatorname{Id}(B)

precisely when FF maps to zero under the homomorphism

φ̃:K[X1,,Xn]K[T1,,Tr]. \widetilde\varphi: K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]\longrightarrow K[T_1,\ldots,T_r].

Hence Id(B)\operatorname{Id}(B) is the inverse image of a prime ideal, namely the zero ideal in K[T1,,Tr]K[T_1,\ldots,T_r], and so is itself prime by Exercise 4.19. Lemma 4.3 then shows that V(Id(B))V(\operatorname{Id}(B)) is irreducible. \square

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0 for translated course text; media retain component rights in authority/RIGHTS-unit-05.csv · Rights record: RIGHTS-unit-05.csv

Worksheet 5

Practice exercises

Exercise 5.1

Let FK[X1,,Xn]F\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] be a homogeneous polynomial with zero locus V(F)V(F). Prove that for every point PV(F)P\in V(F) and every scalar λK\lambda\in K, we also have λPV(F)\lambda P\in V(F).

Exercise 5.2

Determine the factorisation of the polynomial

XnYn[X,Y] X^n-Y^n\in\mathbb C[X,Y]

for n+n\in\mathbb N_+.

Exercise 5.3 ★

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and FK[X,Y]F\in K[X,Y] a homogeneous polynomial. Prove that FF splits into linear factors.

Exercise 5.4

Let KK be a field, FK[X1,,Xn]F\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] a homogeneous polynomial, and F=GHF=GH a factorisation. Prove that GG and HH are also homogeneous.

Exercise 5.5

Let RR be a commutative ring and

P=R[X1,,Xm] P=R[X_1,\ldots,X_m]

the polynomial ring in mm variables over RR. Let

𝔪=(X1,,Xm) \mathfrak m=(X_1,\ldots,X_m)

be the ideal generated by the variables. Prove that

𝔪n=Pn, \mathfrak m^n=P_{\ge n},

where PnP_{\ge n} denotes the ideal of PP generated by all homogeneous polynomials of degree n\ge n.

Exercise 5.6

Prove that a homogeneous polynomial remains homogeneous of the same degree under a linear change of variables, whereas this need not hold under an affine-linear change of variables.

Exercise 5.7

Prove that affine-linear equivalence is an equivalence relation on the affine algebraic sets V,V𝔸KnV,V'\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n.

Exercise 5.8

Let P=(a,b)P=(a,b) be a point in the affine plane, and L,LL,L' two distinct lines through PP. Let C=V(F)C=V(F), with FK[X,Y]F\in K[X,Y], be a plane algebraic curve. Explicitly describe a change of variables (a change of coordinates) such that, in the new coordinates, PP is the origin and the two lines are the coordinate axes. What is the curve equation in the new coordinates?

Exercise 5.9

Let CC and DD each be a plane affine algebraic curve consisting of the union of three distinct lines, with the three lines of each curve meeting at one point. Prove that an affine-linear change of coordinates takes CC to DD.

Exercise 5.10

Let CC and DD each be a plane affine algebraic curve consisting of the union of four distinct lines, with the four lines of each curve meeting at one point. Prove that in general no affine-linear change of coordinates takes CC to DD.

The next two exercises are intended to aid understanding of Theorem 5.4 and Corollary 5.5.

Exercise 5.11

Apply the proof of Theorem 5.4 to the polynomial YY.

Exercise 5.12

Apply the proof of Theorem 5.4 to the hyperbola XY1XY-1.

Exercise 5.13

Apply the proof of Theorem 5.4 to the polynomial

X2Y3+5X3Y2X2Y2+3Y+7[X,Y]. X^2Y^3+5X^3Y^2-X^2Y^2+3Y+7\in\mathbb C[X,Y].

Exercise 5.14

Let F[X,Y]F\in\mathbb C[X,Y] be a nonconstant polynomial. Prove that the corresponding algebraic curve C=V(F)C=V(F) has uncountably many elements.

Exercise 5.15 ★

Let

M={P1,,Pn}K2 M=\{P_1,\ldots,P_n\}\subseteq K^2

be a finite set of points in the plane over an infinite field KK.

  1. Prove that MM can be obtained as the intersection of two algebraic curves.
  2. Prove that MM can be obtained as the intersection of two irreducible algebraic curves.

Exercise 5.16

Calculate the image F̃\widetilde F of the polynomial

F=X2Y+3XYY3 F=X^2Y+3XY-Y^3

under the substitution homomorphism

K[X,Y]K[S,T] K[X,Y]\longrightarrow K[S,T]

determined by

XT2+S3,Y3TS+S2T. X\longmapsto T^2+S-3, \qquad Y\longmapsto 3TS+S^2-T.

Exercise 5.17

Let KK be an infinite field and FK[X1,,Xn]F\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] a polynomial with associated map

F:𝔸Kn𝔸K1. F:\mathbb A_K^n\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^1.

Prove, both with and without Theorem 5.10, that the image of FF consists of one point or infinitely many points.

Exercise 5.18

Let KK be a finite field with qq elements, and let

P1,,Pn𝔸K2 P_1,\ldots,P_n\in\mathbb A_K^2

be nn distinct points in the affine plane. Prove that there is a polynomial map

φ:𝔸K1𝔸K2 \varphi:\mathbb A_K^1\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^2

with

bildφ={P1,,Pn} \operatorname{bild}\varphi=\{P_1,\ldots,P_n\}

if and only if 1nq1\le n\le q.

Edition note. The source’s count is understood to be a count of distinct points; otherwise repetitions would make the criterion in terms of nn false. Its notation bild\operatorname{bild} is retained here.

Exercise 5.19 ★

Give an example of a polynomial map

𝔸K2𝔸K1 \mathbb A_K^2\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^1

such that the inverse image of one point is reducible, while the inverse image of every other point is irreducible.

Exercise 5.20 ★

Let KK be a field. For each n+n\in\mathbb N_+, consider the map

φ:KnKn,(λ1,λ2,,λn)(c0,c1,,cn1), \begin{aligned} \varphi:K^n&\longrightarrow K^n,\\ (\lambda_1,\lambda_2,\ldots,\lambda_n) &\longmapsto(c_0,c_1,\ldots,c_{n-1}), \end{aligned}

which sends a tuple of roots (λ1,,λn)(\lambda_1,\ldots,\lambda_n) to the tuple of coefficients (c0,,cn1)(c_0,\ldots,c_{n-1}), omitting the coefficient 11, of the monic polynomial

(Xλ1)(Xλ2)(Xλn)=P=c0+c1X++cn1Xn1+Xn. (X-\lambda_1)(X-\lambda_2)\cdots(X-\lambda_n) =P=c_0+c_1X+\cdots+c_{n-1}X^{n-1}+X^n.

  1. Describe φ\varphi explicitly for n=2n=2.
  2. Describe φ\varphi explicitly for n=3n=3.
  3. Explain why these maps φ\varphi are polynomial.
  4. Prove that the fibres of φ\varphi are finite.
  5. When is the fibre over a tuple (c0,c1,,cn1)(c_0,c_1,\ldots,c_{n-1}) empty?
  6. What is the maximum number of elements in a fibre? Give examples showing that this maximum is attained for K=K=\mathbb R.
  7. Now let KK be algebraically closed. Prove that φ\varphi is surjective.

Exercise 5.21

Let

φ:𝔸Kr𝔸Kn \varphi:\mathbb A_K^r\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^n

be a polynomial map and T𝔸KrT\subseteq\mathbb A_K^r a subset. Prove that

φ(T)¯=φ(T¯)¯. \overline{\varphi(T)}=\overline{\varphi(\overline T)}.

Exercise 5.22

Prove that the statement of Exercise 5.21 does not hold without the assumption that the map is polynomial.

Exercises to hand in

Exercise 5.23 - 3 points

How many monomials of degree dd are there in the polynomial ring in one, two, and three variables?

Exercise 5.24 - 3 points

Apply the proof of Theorem 5.4 to the algebraic curve corresponding to the rational function

Y=X22XX21. Y=\frac{X^2-2X}{X^2-1}.

Exercise 5.25 - 3 points

Consider the map

𝔸K2𝔸K2,(x,y)(x,xy). \mathbb A_K^2\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^2, \qquad (x,y)\longmapsto(x,xy).

Determine the image and the fibres of this map.

Exercise 5.26 - 3 points

Consider the ellipsoid

E=V(2x2+3y2+4z25)={(x,y,z):2x2+3y2+4z2=5}. E=V(2x^2+3y^2+4z^2-5) =\{(x,y,z):2x^2+3y^2+4z^2=5\}.

Find an affine-linear change of variables over \mathbb R such that the image of EE under the map is the standard unit sphere

V(x2+y2+z21). V(x^2+y^2+z^2-1).

An ellipsoid; in algebraic geometry this means its surface

Exercise 5.27 - 4 points

Let VV and Ṽ\widetilde V be affine algebraic sets in 𝔸K2\mathbb A_K^2 for K=/(2)K=\mathbb Z/(2). Prove that they are affine-linearly equivalent if and only if they have the same cardinality.

Also prove that this statement fails for K=/(p)K=\mathbb Z/(p) with p3p\ge3, and in 𝔸/(2)n\mathbb A_{\mathbb Z/(2)}^n for n3n\ge3.


Source navigation: Lecture 5 - public solutions for Unit 5 - Worksheet 4 - Worksheet 6 (source)

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Public Solutions to Worksheet 5

The source provides public solutions only to Exercises 5.3, 5.15, 5.19, and 5.20 at the frozen source revisions. No additional solutions have been created for this edition.

Solution to Exercise 5.3

Let

F=i=0naiXiYni. F=\sum_{i=0}^n a_iX^iY^{n-i}.

Its dehomogenisation is the one-variable polynomial

F̃=i=0naiXi. \widetilde F=\sum_{i=0}^n a_iX^i.

Write m=degF̃m=\deg\widetilde F and suppose F̃0\widetilde F\ne0. Since the field is algebraically closed, this polynomial has a factorisation

F̃=ami=1m(Xci). \widetilde F=a_m\prod_{i=1}^m(X-c_i).

Homogenising again gives the factorisation

F=amYnmi=1m(XciY). F=a_mY^{n-m}\prod_{i=1}^m(X-c_iY).

If F̃=0\widetilde F=0, then F=0F=0, so the statement is immediate.

Edition note: The source formula places ana_n inside the product, which would produce a factor anna_n^n, and also tacitly assumes that degF̃=n\deg\widetilde F=n. The formula above places the leading coefficient ama_m once outside the product and includes the factor YnmY^{n-m} required when m<nm<n.

Back to Exercise 5.3.

Solution to Exercise 5.15

  1. Choose a sufficiently general linear form taking distinct values at the given points. We may therefore assume that coordinates have been chosen so that, for

    Pi=(ai,bi), P_i=(a_i,b_i),

    all the first coordinates aia_i are distinct. Let

    F=(Xa1)(Xan). F=(X-a_1)\cdots(X-a_n).

    By the interpolation theorem, choose a polynomial HH in the one variable XX with

    H(ai)=bi H(a_i)=b_i

    for i=1,,ni=1,\ldots,n. With G=YHG=Y-H, we obtain

    M=V(F)V(G), M=V(F)\cap V(G),

    expressing MM as the intersection of two curves.

  2. Replace FF by

    F=YH+F. F'=Y-H+F.

    Then

    V(G)V(F)=V(G)V(F)=M. V(G)\cap V(F')=V(G)\cap V(F)=M.

    Both curves are graphs and are therefore irreducible.

Back to Exercise 5.15.

Solution to Exercise 5.19

Let KK be an algebraically closed field. Consider the map

𝔸K2𝔸K1,(x,y)xy. \mathbb A_K^2\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^1, \qquad (x,y)\longmapsto xy.

The fibre over zero is the union of the coordinate axes,

V(xy)=V(x)V(y), V(xy)=V(x)\cup V(y),

which is reducible. The fibre over a point λK\lambda\in K with λ0\lambda\ne0 is V(xyλ)V(xy-\lambda). It suffices to show that xyλxy-\lambda is a prime polynomial. This follows from the isomorphism

K[x,y]/(xyλ)K[u]u,xu,yλu1, K[x,y]/(xy-\lambda)\longrightarrow K[u]_u, \qquad x\longmapsto u, \qquad y\longmapsto\lambda u^{-1},

with inverse uxu\mapsto x. The universal properties of quotient rings and localisation ensure that these maps really are inverse to one another.

Back to Exercise 5.19.

Solution to Exercise 5.20

  1. For n=2n=2, since

    (Xλ1)(Xλ2)=X2(λ1+λ2)X+λ1λ2, (X-\lambda_1)(X-\lambda_2) =X^2-(\lambda_1+\lambda_2)X+\lambda_1\lambda_2,

    the map is

    φ:K2K2,(λ1,λ2)(λ1λ2,(λ1+λ2)). \begin{aligned} \varphi:K^2&\longrightarrow K^2,\\ (\lambda_1,\lambda_2) &\longmapsto(\lambda_1\lambda_2,-(\lambda_1+\lambda_2)). \end{aligned}

  2. For n=3n=3, since

    (Xλ1)(Xλ2)(Xλ3)=X3(λ1+λ2+λ3)X2+(λ1λ2+λ1λ3+λ2λ3)Xλ1λ2λ3, \begin{aligned} &(X-\lambda_1)(X-\lambda_2)(X-\lambda_3)\\ &\quad=X^3-(\lambda_1+\lambda_2+\lambda_3)X^2 +(\lambda_1\lambda_2+\lambda_1\lambda_3 +\lambda_2\lambda_3)X-\lambda_1\lambda_2\lambda_3, \end{aligned}

    the map is

    φ:K3K3,(λ1,λ2,λ3)(λ1λ2λ3,λ1λ2+λ1λ3+λ2λ3,(λ1+λ2+λ3)). \begin{aligned} \varphi:K^3&\longrightarrow K^3,\\ (\lambda_1,\lambda_2,\lambda_3) &\longmapsto\bigl(-\lambda_1\lambda_2\lambda_3, \lambda_1\lambda_2+\lambda_1\lambda_3+\lambda_2\lambda_3, -(\lambda_1+\lambda_2+\lambda_3)\bigr). \end{aligned}

  3. Fix n+n\in\mathbb N_+ and 0kn10\le k\le n-1. By distributivity, the coefficient ckc_k of i=1n(Xλi)\prod_{i=1}^n(X-\lambda_i) is

    ±1i1<i2<<inknλi1λi2λink, \mathord{\pm} \sum_{1\le i_1<i_2<\cdots<i_{n-k}\le n} \lambda_{i_1}\lambda_{i_2}\cdots\lambda_{i_{n-k}},

    with sign determined by the parity of nkn-k. Thus every component function is polynomial.

  4. A tuple (λ1,,λn)(\lambda_1,\ldots,\lambda_n) belongs to the fibre over the coefficient tuple (c0,,cn1)(c_0,\ldots,c_{n-1}) precisely when

    i=1n(Xλi)=j=0n1cjXj+Xn=P. \prod_{i=1}^n(X-\lambda_i) =\sum_{j=0}^{n-1}c_jX^j+X^n=P.

    In particular, all the λi\lambda_i must be roots of PP. Since a polynomial has only finitely many roots, there are only finitely many possible permutations.

  5. The fibre over a tuple (c0,,cn1)(c_0,\ldots,c_{n-1}) is empty precisely when the polynomial

    j=0n1cjXj+Xn \sum_{j=0}^{n-1}c_jX^j+X^n

    does not split completely into linear factors.

  6. Every fibre has at most n!n! elements. If the polynomial given by the coefficient tuple splits completely and its distinct roots have multiplicities m1,,mrm_1,\ldots,m_r, the fibre consists of all orderings of those roots with those multiplicities, and hence has cardinality

    n!m1!mr!. \frac{n!}{m_1!\cdots m_r!}.

    If the polynomial does not split completely, the fibre is empty. Thus the bound n!n! is attained when KK contains nn distinct elements and the polynomial has nn distinct roots. In particular, for K=K=\mathbb R, the root tuple

    (1,2,3,,n) (1,2,3,\ldots,n)

    maps to a coefficient tuple whose fibre consists of all permutations of that root tuple.

    Edition note: The source calls n!n! the maximum without restricting the field KK. The multiplicity count above is an editorial clarification: in general, n!n! is an upper bound, while equality requires at least nn distinct elements in KK. The example requested in the exercise is specifically for K=K=\mathbb R.

  7. If KK is algebraically closed, every monic polynomial splits into monic linear factors. By part 5, each corresponding fibre is nonempty. Thus φ\varphi is surjective.

Back to Exercise 5.20.

English Markdown source · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Lecture 6: Polynomial and Rational Parametrisations

Polynomial parametrisations in the plane

A parametrised curve can be thought of as a trajectory of motion

We now consider maps

φ:𝔸K1𝔸K2 \varphi:\mathbb A_K^1\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^2

given by two polynomials in one variable

P,QK[T]. P,Q\in K[T].

The image of such a map lies in an affine algebraic curve, as the following theorem shows. We also speak of parametrised curves, or more precisely polynomially parametrised curves.

Here two ways of describing an algebraic curve compete. The points of a curve given by a curve equation are specified only implicitly. For each point of the plane, it is easy to check whether it lies on the curve, but in general it is difficult to find or explicitly specify points on the curve. A parametrised curve, by contrast, is given explicitly: for each point of the affine line, its image point can easily be calculated, giving the points of the curve explicitly. However, not every algebraic curve can be parametrised by polynomials.

Theorem: an equation for a polynomially parametrised curve

Let KK be a field and let P,QK[T]P,Q\in K[T] be polynomials. Then there is a polynomial

FK[X,Y],F0, F\in K[X,Y],\qquad F\ne0,

such that

F(P,Q)=0. F(P,Q)=0.

In other words, the image of a polynomially parametrised curve lies in a plane algebraic curve

C=V(F). C=V(F).

If KK is infinite and P,QP,Q are not both constant, the Zariski closure of the image is an irreducible curve CC.

Proof

Edition note. The source’s degree argument below treats nonzero P,QP,Q. If P=0P=0, take F=XF=X; if Q=0Q=0, take F=YF=Y. Thus the zero-polynomial cases of the theorem are covered as well.

Let dd and ee be the degrees of PP and QQ, respectively. Consider the monomials

PiQj. P^iQ^j.

These are polynomials in TT of degree di+ejdi+ej. For ini\le n and jmj\le m, there are (n+1)(m+1)(n+1)(m+1) such monomials. They all lie in the (dn+em+1)(dn+em+1)-dimensional KK-vector space spanned by

1=T0,T1,T2,,Tdn+em. 1=T^0,T^1,T^2,\ldots,T^{dn+em}.

If

(n+1)(m+1)>dn+em+1, (n+1)(m+1)>dn+em+1,

there must be a nontrivial linear dependence among the PiQjP^iQ^j. This gives a polynomial F(X,Y)0F(X,Y)\ne0 with F(P,Q)=0F(P,Q)=0. The numerical condition above can be met by choosing n,mn,m sufficiently large.

From now on, let KK be infinite. By Lemma 3.10, the Zariski closure of the image

B=φ(𝔸K1) B=\varphi(\mathbb A_K^1)

is V(Id(B))V(\operatorname{Id}(B)), and by Theorem 5.10 this set is irreducible. Since KK is infinite and the map is nonconstant, irreducibility also forces V(Id(B))V(\operatorname{Id}(B)) to contain infinitely many points. By Lemma 4.3, Id(B)\operatorname{Id}(B) is a prime ideal; by the first part it contains an element

FId(B),F0. F\in\operatorname{Id}(B),\qquad F\ne0.

Since K[X,Y]K[X,Y] is a unique factorisation domain, a prime factor of FF also belongs to this ideal. We may therefore assume that FF is a prime polynomial. We have the inclusions

BB¯=V(Id(B))V(F). B\subseteq\overline B =V(\operatorname{Id}(B)) \subseteq V(F).

For HId(B)H\in\operatorname{Id}(B), the set

V(Id(B))V(H)V(F) V(\operatorname{Id}(B))\subseteq V(H)\cap V(F)

is infinite. By Theorem 4.8, HH and FF must have a common nonconstant factor. Since FF is prime, HH must be a multiple of FF. Thus

Id(B)=(F). \operatorname{Id}(B)=(F).

\square

Example: eliminating the parameter

Consider the curve given by the parametrisation

x=t2+t+1,y=2t2+3t1. x=t^2+t+1, \qquad y=2t^2+3t-1.

We have

x1=t2+t,y+1=2t2+3t. x-1=t^2+t, \qquad y+1=2t^2+3t.

A simple subtraction gives

(y+1)2(x1)=3t2t=t. (y+1)-2(x-1)=3t-2t=t.

Thus

x1=t2+t=(y2x+3)2+(y2x+3). x-1=t^2+t=(y-2x+3)^2+(y-2x+3).

Expanding gives the curve equation

y2+4x24xy15x+7y+13=0. y^2+4x^2-4xy-15x+7y+13=0.

Example: a curve with one self-intersection

A cubic curve with a double point

Consider the map 𝔸K1𝔸K2\mathbb A_K^1\to\mathbb A_K^2 given by

P=t21,Q=t3t=t(t21). P=t^2-1, \qquad Q=t^3-t=t(t^2-1).

Edition note. The source’s two-branch description assumes charK2\operatorname{char}K\ne2. In characteristic 22, 1=11=-1, so there is only one parameter value over (0,0)(0,0) and the self-intersection conclusion below does not apply; the displayed algebraic identities remain valid.

Both parameter values t=±1t=\pm1 give the point (0,0)(0,0). For every other value t±1t\ne\pm1, we can write

t=t3tt21=Q(t)P(t). t=\frac{t^3-t}{t^2-1}=\frac{Q(t)}{P(t)}.

Thus the parameter tt can be reconstructed from its image, which means that the map is injective away from those two values. The image curve therefore intersects itself at exactly one point.

To determine the curve equation, write x=t21x=t^2-1 and y=t3ty=t^3-t. Then

t2=x+1 t^2=x+1

and

y2=t2(t21)2=t2x2=(x+1)x2=x3+x2. \begin{aligned} y^2 &=t^2(t^2-1)^2\\ &=t^2x^2\\ &=(x+1)x^2\\ &=x^3+x^2. \end{aligned}

The polynomial describing the curve is therefore

Y2X3X2. Y^2-X^3-X^2.

Rational parametrisations

Consider a rational function

Y=PQ,P,QK[T]. Y=\frac{P}{Q}, \qquad P,Q\in K[T].

This immediately gives a new form of parametrisation through the map

𝔸K1D(Q)𝔸K2,t(t,P(t)Q(t)). \begin{aligned} \mathbb A_K^1\supseteq D(Q)&\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^2,\\ t&\longmapsto\left(t,\frac{P(t)}{Q(t)}\right). \end{aligned}

Here D(Q)D(Q) is the domain of definition of the map, namely

D(Q)=𝔸K1\V(Q), D(Q)=\mathbb A_K^1\setminus V(Q),

consisting of all points where the denominator polynomial QQ is nonzero. This map clearly reaches every point of the graph of the rational function, so, like a polynomial parametrisation, it provides an explicit description of the curve. To describe curves, it is therefore natural to allow parametrisations whose component functions are rational as well.

Definition: rational parametrisation

Two rational functions

φ1=P1Q1,φ2=P2Q2, \varphi_1=\frac{P_1}{Q_1}, \qquad \varphi_2=\frac{P_2}{Q_2},

with

P1,P2,Q1,Q2K[T],Q1,Q20, P_1,P_2,Q_1,Q_2\in K[T], \qquad Q_1,Q_2\ne0,

are called a rational parametrisation of the algebraic curve

C=V(F),FK[X,Y] nonconstant, C=V(F), \qquad F\in K[X,Y]\text{ nonconstant},

if

F(φ1(T),φ2(T))=0 F(\varphi_1(T),\varphi_2(T))=0

and the pair (φ1,φ2)(\varphi_1,\varphi_2) is nonconstant.

The equality in this definition is understood in the rational function field K(T)K(T). If KK is infinite, this is equivalent to the equality holding for every tKt\in K where the denominators allow the functions to be defined.

Definition: rational curve

A plane algebraic curve

C=V(F) C=V(F)

is called rational if it is irreducible and has a rational parametrisation.

The following simple example shows that rational functions can parametrise more curves than polynomials can. However, we should already mention that this difference disappears again in the context of projective geometry.

Example: the hyperbola

Consider the hyperbola

H=V(XY1). H=V(XY-1).

We claim that it has no polynomial parametrisation. For two polynomials P(t)P(t) and Q(t)Q(t), the condition that their image always lie on HH is

P(t)Q(t)=1for every t𝔸K1, P(t)Q(t)=1 \quad\text{for every }t\in\mathbb A_K^1,

or that P(t)Q(t)=1P(t)Q(t)=1 in the polynomial ring K[t]K[t]. These conditions are equivalent over an infinite field; over a finite field, the second identity is the appropriate condition. This identity means that PP and QQ are inverses of one another, so both are units. The only units in a polynomial ring are the nonzero constants. Thus both polynomials are constant, the map they define is constant, and there is no polynomial parametrisation.

By contrast,

𝔸K1\{0}𝔸K2,t(t,1t) \begin{aligned} \mathbb A_K^1\setminus\{0\}&\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^2,\\ t&\longmapsto\left(t,\frac1t\right) \end{aligned}

is a rational parametrisation of the hyperbola.

We want to show that the image of a nonconstant rational map always satisfies an algebraic equation, and thus always gives a rational parametrisation of an algebraic curve. In the polynomial case, an algebraic equation followed from a counting argument: the number of monomials in two variables grows faster with the degree than the number of monomials in one variable. We will use a similar argument together with an additional trick, homogenisation. This makes an inhomogeneous situation homogeneous by adding another variable (that is the price we have to pay). Here we use this process purely algebraically, but behind it lies the interplay between affine and projective geometry.

Definition: homogenisation

Let

FK[X1,,Xn],F0, F\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n], \qquad F\ne0,

be a polynomial with homogeneous decomposition

F=i=0dFi, F=\sum_{i=0}^dF_i,

and let ZZ be an additional variable. The homogeneous polynomial of degree dd

F̂=i=0dFiZdiK[X1,,Xn,Z] \widehat F =\sum_{i=0}^dF_iZ^{d-i} \in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n,Z]

is called the homogenisation of FF.

The original polynomial can be recovered from its homogenisation by setting the additional variable Z=1Z=1. This process is called dehomogenisation.

Lemma: a homogeneous relation for three homogeneous polynomials

Let

P1,P2,P3K[S,T] P_1,P_2,P_3\in K[S,T]

be three homogeneous polynomials of the same degree. Then there is a homogeneous polynomial

FK[X,Y,Z],F0, F\in K[X,Y,Z], \qquad F\ne0,

such that

F(P1,P2,P3)=0. F(P_1,P_2,P_3)=0.

Proof

This follows from a counting argument similar to the proof of Theorem 6.1; see Exercise 6.7. \square

Example: a monomial relation

Consider the map

(S,T)(S2,T2,ST)=(X,Y,Z), (S,T)\longmapsto(S^2,T^2,ST)=(X,Y,Z),

given by homogeneous polynomials, indeed by monomials. An algebraic relation for its image is easy to find:

Z2=(ST)2=S2T2=XY. Z^2=(ST)^2=S^2T^2=XY.

Thus the image lies in V(Z2XY)V(Z^2-XY). See also Exercise 6.29.

Theorem: the image of a rational map satisfies an algebraic equation

Suppose two rational functions

φ1=P1Q1,φ2=P2Q2, \varphi_1=\frac{P_1}{Q_1}, \qquad \varphi_2=\frac{P_2}{Q_2},

with P1,P2,Q1,Q2K[T]P_1,P_2,Q_1,Q_2\in K[T], Q1,Q20Q_1,Q_2\ne0, are given and are not both constant. Then there is a nonconstant polynomial FK[X,Y]F\in K[X,Y] such that

F(φ1(T),φ2(T))=0. F(\varphi_1(T),\varphi_2(T))=0.

Thus φ1\varphi_1 and φ2\varphi_2 define a rational parametrisation.

Proof

By passing to a common denominator, we may assume that the rational map is given by

φ1=P1Q,φ2=P2Q, \varphi_1=\frac{P_1}{Q}, \qquad \varphi_2=\frac{P_2}{Q},

with P1,P2,QK[T]P_1,P_2,Q\in K[T] and Q0Q\ne0. Let

H1,H2,H3K[T,S] H'_1,H'_2,H'_3\in K[T,S]

be the homogenisations of these three polynomials with the new variable SS, and let ee be their largest degree. Edition note: if a numerator is zero, set its HiH'_i and HiH_i to zero and take ee over the nonzero polynomials; the degree formula below is applied only to nonzero HiH'_i. The zero polynomial is homogeneous of the required degree. Set

Hi=Sedeg(Hi)Hi. H_i=S^{e-\deg(H'_i)}H'_i.

The polynomials H1,H2,H3H_1,H_2,H_3 all have degree ee, while their dehomogenisations at S=1S=1 remain P1,P2,QP_1,P_2,Q. By Lemma 6.8, there is a homogeneous polynomial

FK[U,V,W],F0, F\in K[U,V,W], \qquad F\ne0,

of degree dd in U,V,WU,V,W, such that

F(H1,H2,H3)=0. F(H_1,H_2,H_3)=0.

Now consider

1WdF(U,V,W)=F(UW,VW,WW), \frac1{W^d}F(U,V,W) =F\left(\frac UW,\frac VW,\frac WW\right),

which is a polynomial in the two rational functions U/WU/W and V/WV/W. The homogeneity of FF is crucial for this step. Substituting the three homogeneous polynomials gives

0=F(H1H3,H2H3,1). 0=F\left(\frac{H_1}{H_3},\frac{H_2}{H_3},1\right).

This is an equality in the fraction field of K[S,T]K[S,T]. Setting S=1S=1, that is, dehomogenising, and writing

G(X,Y)=F(X,Y,1), G(X,Y)=F(X,Y,1),

we obtain a nonzero polynomial GK[X,Y]G\in K[X,Y] such that

0=G(P1Q,P2Q), 0=G\left(\frac{P_1}{Q},\frac{P_2}{Q}\right),

which is an equation for the two original rational functions. \square

The cissoid of Diocles (black in the image) can be parametrised rationally

Remark: local differentiable parametrisations

We can go a step further and ask whether there are other ways to describe an algebraic curve

C=V(F) C=V(F)

by a map φ:KK2\varphi:K\to K^2, allowing φ\varphi to belong to a larger class of functions. An important result here is the implicit function theorem. For K=K=\mathbb R or K=K=\mathbb C, it says that if the two partial derivatives of FF do not both vanish at a point of the curve, then there is an infinitely differentiable, indeed analytic, map describing the curve in a small open neighbourhood of that point. An algebraic version of the implicit function theorem reappears in the power-series approach that we will discuss later.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0 for translated course text; media retain component rights in authority/RIGHTS-unit-06.csv · Rights record: RIGHTS-unit-06.csv

Worksheet 6

Practice exercises

Exercise 6.1

Let F(x)K[x]F(x)\in K[x] be a polynomial in one variable over a field KK. Parametrise the graph of FF by polynomials.

Exercise 6.2

Determine a curve equation for the parametrised curve

x=3t2+4t2,y=2t2+5t3. x=-3t^2+4t-2, \qquad y=2t^2+5t-3.

Exercise 6.3 ★

Let KK be a field. Consider the parametrisation

𝔸K1𝔸K2,t(t+t2,t3)=(x,y). \begin{aligned} \mathbb A_K^1&\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^2,\\ t&\longmapsto(t+t^2,t^3)=(x,y). \end{aligned}

Determine a nontrivial algebraic equation satisfied by every image point of this map. Also give a point in the affine plane that does not lie on the image curve.

Exercise 6.4 ★

Let KK be a field. Consider the polynomial map

𝔸K1𝔸K2,t(t2+1,t3t). \begin{aligned} \mathbb A_K^1&\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^2,\\ t&\longmapsto(t^2+1,t^3-t). \end{aligned}

Determine a nontrivial algebraic equation satisfied by every image point of this map.

The phenomenon described in the following exercise cannot occur over an algebraically closed field.

Exercise 6.5

Give an example of a polynomial parametrisation

φ:𝔸1C𝔸2, \varphi:\mathbb A_{\mathbb R}^1\longrightarrow C\subset\mathbb A_{\mathbb R}^2,

where CC is the Zariski closure of the image, such that infinitely many points of CC are not in the image.

Exercise 6.6

Show that, in the situation of Example 6.3, the given parametrisation of the curve is surjective for K=K=\mathbb R.

Exercise 6.7

Let

P1,P2,P3K[S,T] P_1,P_2,P_3\in K[S,T]

be three homogeneous polynomials of the same degree. Show that there is a homogeneous polynomial

FK[X,Y,Z],F0, F\in K[X,Y,Z], \qquad F\ne0,

such that

F(P1,P2,P3)=0. F(P_1,P_2,P_3)=0.

Exercise 6.8 ★

Is there a homogeneous polynomial FK[X,Y,Z]F\in K[X,Y,Z], F0F\ne0, such that

F(S,T,ST)=0? F(S,T,ST)=0?

Exercise 6.9 ★

Determine an algebraic equation for the image curve of the map

𝔸K1\{0}𝔸K2,t(t2+1t,t+1t). \begin{aligned} \mathbb A_K^1\setminus\{0\}&\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^2,\\ t&\longmapsto\left(\frac{t^2+1}{t},\frac{t+1}{t}\right). \end{aligned}

Check the resulting equation directly.

Exercise 6.10

Determine a nontrivial algebraic equation for the image of the map

𝔸K1\{1,0,1}𝔸K2,t(tt21,1t). \begin{aligned} \mathbb A_K^1\setminus\{-1,0,1\}&\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^2,\\ t&\longmapsto\left(\frac{t}{t^2-1},\frac1t\right). \end{aligned}

The following exercises use the notion of a differentiable curve as discussed in Analysis 2.

Exercise 6.11

Give an example of a non-algebraic (non-polynomial) differentiable curve in 2\mathbb R^2 whose image nevertheless coincides with an algebraic curve.

Exercise 6.12

Show that the trajectory of the Archimedean spiral

f:02,t(tcost,tsint) \begin{aligned} f:\mathbb R_{\ge0}&\longrightarrow\mathbb R^2,\\ t&\longmapsto(t\cos t,t\sin t) \end{aligned}

is not algebraic.

Exercise 6.13

Let

C=V(F)𝔸2 C=V(F)\subseteq\mathbb A_{\mathbb R}^2

be a rationally parametrised curve. Show that the curve also has a non-algebraic differentiable parametrisation.

Exercise 6.14

Give a differentiable curve f:2f:\mathbb R\to\mathbb R^2 whose image is exactly the union of the two coordinate axes.

Exercise 6.15

Let φ:𝔸K2𝔸K2\varphi:\mathbb A_K^2\to\mathbb A_K^2 be a polynomial map and let CC be a plane rational curve. Suppose that φ\varphi does not map CC to a single point. Show that

φ(C)¯ \overline{\varphi(C)}

is also a rational curve.

Exercise 6.16

Let KK be an algebraically closed field of characteristic zero, and suppose a polynomial map

φ:𝔸K1𝔸K2,t(t2,ψ(t)), \begin{aligned} \varphi:\mathbb A_K^1&\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^2,\\ t&\longmapsto(t^2,\psi(t)), \end{aligned}

with ψ(t)K[t]\psi(t)\in K[t] is given. Show that φ\varphi is injective if and only if ψ\psi has the form

ψ(t)=atn+θ(t), \psi(t)=at^n+\theta(t),

where a0a\ne0, nn is odd, and θ(t)\theta(t) is a polynomial containing only even powers.

Exercise 6.17 ★

Let p[0,1]p\in[0,1] be the probability that a certain event AA occurs in an experiment, so that 1p1-p is the probability that it does not occur (¬A\neg A). The experiment is performed twice independently. The combined events

(A,A),(A,¬A),(¬A,A),(¬A,¬A) (A,A),\ (A,\neg A),\ (\neg A,A),\ (\neg A,\neg A)

have probabilities depending on pp. Regard this dependence as the polynomial map

φ:𝔸K1𝔸K4,p(p2,p(1p),(1p)p,(1p)2)=(x,y,z,w). \begin{aligned} \varphi:\mathbb A_K^1&\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^4,\\ p&\longmapsto \bigl(p^2,p(1-p),(1-p)p,(1-p)^2\bigr)=(x,y,z,w). \end{aligned}

  1. Show that this map is injective.
  2. Describe its image completely by polynomial equations.

Exercise 6.18 ★

Let p[0,1]p\in[0,1] be the probability that event AA occurs in a first experiment, and let q[0,1]q\in[0,1] be the probability that event BB occurs in a second experiment. The two experiments are performed independently. The combined events

(A,B),(A,¬B),(¬A,B),(¬A,¬B) (A,B),\ (A,\neg B),\ (\neg A,B),\ (\neg A,\neg B)

have probabilities depending on pp and qq. Regard this dependence as the polynomial map

φ:𝔸K2𝔸K4,(p,q)(pq,p(1q),(1p)q,(1p)(1q))=(x,y,z,w). \begin{aligned} \varphi:\mathbb A_K^2&\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^4,\\ (p,q)&\longmapsto \bigl(pq,p(1-q),(1-p)q,(1-p)(1-q)\bigr)=(x,y,z,w). \end{aligned}

  1. Show that this map is injective.
  2. Describe its image completely by polynomial equations.

Exercise 6.19

Consider the map

𝔸K2D(s)𝔸K3,(s,t)(s,t2s,t)=(x,y,z). \begin{aligned} \mathbb A_K^2\supseteq D(s)&\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^3,\\ (s,t)&\longmapsto\left(s,\frac{t^2}{s},t\right)=(x,y,z). \end{aligned}

Determine an algebraic equation FF for its image. Investigate the injectivity and surjectivity of this map as a map to V(F)V(F). Compare it with the maps discussed in Exercise 6.29.

Exercise 6.20

Let KK be a field, K[X1,,Xn]K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] the polynomial ring over KK in nn variables, and K[X1,,Xn,Z]K[X_1,\ldots,X_n,Z] the polynomial ring in n+1n+1 variables. For FK[X1,,Xn]F\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n], let F̂K[X1,,Xn,Z]\widehat F\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n,Z] be its homogenisation with respect to ZZ. For GK[X1,,Xn,Z]G\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n,Z], let G̃\widetilde G be its dehomogenisation given by Z1Z\mapsto1. Show that

F̂̃=F, \widetilde{\widehat F}=F,

but that it need not be the case that

G̃̂=G. \widehat{\widetilde G}=G.

Exercise 6.21 ★

Let KK be a field and K[X1,,Xn,Z]K[X_1,\ldots,X_n,Z] the polynomial ring over KK in n+1n+1 variables. Let

G,HK[X1,,Xn,Z] G,H\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n,Z]

be homogeneous polynomials of the same degree. If their dehomogenisations with respect to ZZ satisfy

G̃=H̃, \widetilde G=\widetilde H,

show that G=HG=H.

Exercise 6.22 ★

Let KK be a field, K[X1,,Xn]K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] the polynomial ring over KK in nn variables, and K[X1,,Xn,Z]K[X_1,\ldots,X_n,Z] the polynomial ring in n+1n+1 variables. Show that homogenisation with respect to ZZ is compatible with multiplication.

Exercise 6.23

Let KK be a field, K[X1,,Xn]K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] the polynomial ring over KK in nn variables, and K[X1,,Xn,Z]K[X_1,\ldots,X_n,Z] the polynomial ring in n+1n+1 variables. Describe dehomogenisation with respect to ZZ as a substitution homomorphism.

Exercise 6.24

Formulate and prove a division-with-remainder statement for homogeneous polynomials in two variables over a field.

Exercise 6.25 ★

Let

F=X4+9X3Y+7X2Y2+XY3+8Y4 F=X^4+9X^3Y+7X^2Y^2+XY^3+8Y^4

and

G=X3+5X2Y. G=X^3+5X^2Y.

Find homogeneous polynomials Q,R[X,Y]Q,R\in\mathbb Q[X,Y], with Q0Q\ne0, such that

F=GQ+R. F=GQ+R.

Exercises for submission

Exercise 6.26 - 3 points

Determine the area enclosed by the loop of the real curve

V(y2x3x2)𝔸2. V(y^2-x^3-x^2)\subseteq\mathbb A_{\mathbb R}^2.

The following exercises may require the use of a computer.

Exercise 6.27 - 6 points

Determine an algebraic equation for the image curve of the map

𝔸K1𝔸K2,t(t2+t3,2t2t4). \begin{aligned} \mathbb A_K^1&\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^2,\\ t&\longmapsto(t^2+t^3,2t^2-t^4). \end{aligned}

Exercise 6.28 - 5 points

Determine an algebraic equation for the image curve of the map

𝔸K1\{0}𝔸K2,t(t21t,t+3t). \begin{aligned} \mathbb A_K^1\setminus\{0\}&\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^2,\\ t&\longmapsto\left(\frac{t^2-1}{t},\frac{t+3}{t}\right). \end{aligned}

Check the resulting equation directly.

Exercise 6.29 - 5 points

Consider the two maps

(s,t)(s2,t2,st)=(x,y,z) (s,t)\longmapsto(s^2,t^2,st)=(x,y,z)

and

(s,t)(s,st2,st)=(x,y,z). (s,t)\longmapsto(s,st^2,st)=(x,y,z).

Show that the images of both maps satisfy the same algebraic equation FF. Investigate the injectivity and surjectivity of the two maps as maps to V(F)V(F). Which map gives a “better” description of V(F)V(F)?

Exercise 6.30 - 4 points

Let KK be a field and FK[X,Y]F\in K[X,Y] an irreducible polynomial. If the zero locus V(F)V(F) is infinite, show that V(F)V(F) is an irreducible affine algebraic set.

Also give an example showing that this statement is false in three variables.


Source navigation: Lecture 6 - public solutions for Unit 6 - Worksheet 5 - Worksheet 7 (source)

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Public Solutions to Worksheet 6

At the frozen revision boundary, the source provides public solutions only for Exercises 6.3, 6.4, 6.8, 6.9, 6.17, 6.18, 6.21, 6.22, and 6.25. No additional solutions have been created for this edition.

Solution to Exercise 6.3

We calculate the first few monomials in XX and YY:

X0Y0=1, X^0Y^0=1,

X=t2+t, X=t^2+t,

Y=t3, Y=t^3,

XY=t5+t4, XY=t^5+t^4,

X2=t4+2t3+t2, X^2=t^4+2t^3+t^2,

Y2=t6, Y^2=t^6,

and

X3=t6+3t5+3t4+t3. X^3=t^6+3t^5+3t^4+t^3.

We seek a nontrivial relation among these polynomials in K[t]K[t]. Since

X3Y2Y=3t5+3t4=3XY, X^3-Y^2-Y=3t^5+3t^4=3XY,

an algebraic relation for the image curve is

X3Y2Y3XY=0. X^3-Y^2-Y-3XY=0.

For example, the point (1,0)(1,0) in the affine plane does not lie on the image curve, since

13020310=10. 1^3-0^2-0-3\cdot1\cdot0=1\ne0.

Back to Exercise 6.3.

Solution to Exercise 6.4

We calculate some monomials in XX and YY:

X0Y0=1, X^0Y^0=1,

X=t2+1, X=t^2+1,

X2=t4+2t2+1, X^2=t^4+2t^2+1,

X3=t6+3t4+3t2+1, X^3=t^6+3t^4+3t^2+1,

and

Y2=t62t4+t2. Y^2=t^6-2t^4+t^2.

These are five polynomials containing only the powers t0,t2,t4,t6t^0,t^2,t^4,t^6, so they must be linearly dependent. One linear relation is

Y2+X35X2+8X4=0. -Y^2+X^3-5X^2+8X-4=0.

Back to Exercise 6.4.

Solution to Exercise 6.8

No such polynomial exists. Suppose

F=α+β+γ=da(α,β,γ)XαYβZγ F=\sum_{\alpha+\beta+\gamma=d} a_{(\alpha,\beta,\gamma)}X^\alpha Y^\beta Z^\gamma

is a homogeneous polynomial of degree dd. The required equation would be

F(S,T,ST)=α+β+γ=da(α,β,γ)Sα+γTβ+γ=0. F(S,T,ST) =\sum_{\alpha+\beta+\gamma=d} a_{(\alpha,\beta,\gamma)} S^{\alpha+\gamma}T^{\beta+\gamma} =0.

Suppose two monomials in this sum are equal:

Sα1+γ1Tβ1+γ1=Sα2+γ2Tβ2+γ2. S^{\alpha_1+\gamma_1}T^{\beta_1+\gamma_1} =S^{\alpha_2+\gamma_2}T^{\beta_2+\gamma_2}.

Then

α1+γ1=α2+γ2 \alpha_1+\gamma_1=\alpha_2+\gamma_2

and

β1+γ1=β2+γ2. \beta_1+\gamma_1=\beta_2+\gamma_2.

Adding the equations gives

α1+β1+2γ1=α2+β2+2γ2. \alpha_1+\beta_1+2\gamma_1 =\alpha_2+\beta_2+2\gamma_2.

Since

α1+β1+γ1=α2+β2+γ2=d, \alpha_1+\beta_1+\gamma_1 =\alpha_2+\beta_2+\gamma_2=d,

we obtain γ1=γ2\gamma_1=\gamma_2, and then α1=α2\alpha_1=\alpha_2 and β1=β2\beta_1=\beta_2. Thus all the monomials Sα+γTβ+γS^{\alpha+\gamma}T^{\beta+\gamma} in the sum above are pairwise distinct. For F(S,T,ST)=0F(S,T,ST)=0, every coefficient a(α,β,γ)a_{(\alpha,\beta,\gamma)} must be zero. Hence F=0F=0, contrary to the requirement of the exercise.

Back to Exercise 6.8.

Solution to Exercise 6.9

We use the homogenisations of equal degree

H1=T2+S2,H2=S(T+S)=ST+S2,H3=ST. H_1=T^2+S^2, \qquad H_2=S(T+S)=ST+S^2, \qquad H_3=ST.

These give six monomials of degree 44 in S,TS,T. Since there are only five monomials of degree 44 in two variables, a linear dependence must exist. Explicitly,

F1=H12=T4+2S2T2+S4, F_1=H_1^2=T^4+2S^2T^2+S^4,

F2=H22=S2T2+2S3T+S4, F_2=H_2^2=S^2T^2+2S^3T+S^4,

F3=H32=S2T2, F_3=H_3^2=S^2T^2,

F4=H1H2=ST3+S2T2+S3T+S4, F_4=H_1H_2=ST^3+S^2T^2+S^3T+S^4,

F5=H1H3=ST3+S3T, F_5=H_1H_3=ST^3+S^3T,

and

F6=H2H3=S2T2+S3T. F_6=H_2H_3=S^2T^2+S^3T.

Since T4T^4 occurs only in F1F_1, we can seek a linear relation among F2,F3,F4,F5,F6F_2,F_3,F_4,F_5,F_6. Since F3F_3 is a monomial, we focus on the relevant monomials ST3,S3T,S4ST^3,S^3T,S^4 and on F2,F4,F5,F6F_2,F_4,F_5,F_6. We have

F2F4+F52F6=2S2T2. F_2-F_4+F_5-2F_6=-2S^2T^2.

Thus

F2+2F3F4+F52F6=0. F_2+2F_3-F_4+F_5-2F_6=0.

Consequently,

F(U,V,W)=V2+2W2UV+UW2VW F(U,V,W)=V^2+2W^2-UV+UW-2VW

is a homogeneous polynomial of degree 22 that vanishes when U,V,WU,V,W are replaced by H1,H2,H3H_1,H_2,H_3, respectively. The corresponding equation, obtained by dividing F(U,V,W)=0F(U,V,W)=0 by W2W^2, is

(VW)2+2UWVW+UW2VW=0. \left(\frac VW\right)^2+2 -\frac UW\frac VW+\frac UW-2\frac VW=0.

After substituting H1,H2,H3H_1,H_2,H_3 and then setting S=1S=1, the ratios U/WU/W and V/WV/W become the original rational functions. An annihilating polynomial is therefore

Y2XY+X2Y+2. Y^2-XY+X-2Y+2.

As a direct check,

(t+1t)2t2+1tt+1t+t2+1t2t+1t+2=t2+2t+1(t3+t2+t+1)+t3+t2t22t+2t2t2=0. \begin{aligned} &\left(\frac{t+1}{t}\right)^2 -\frac{t^2+1}{t}\frac{t+1}{t} +\frac{t^2+1}{t} -2\frac{t+1}{t}+2\\ &=\frac{t^2+2t+1-(t^3+t^2+t+1) +t^3+t-2t^2-2t+2t^2}{t^2}\\ &=0. \end{aligned}

Back to Exercise 6.9.

Solution to Exercise 6.17

  1. From

    (x,y,z,w)=(p2,p(1p),(1p)p,(1p)2)=(p2,pp2,pp2,p22p+1), (x,y,z,w) =\bigl(p^2,p(1-p),(1-p)p,(1-p)^2\bigr) =\bigl(p^2,p-p^2,p-p^2,p^2-2p+1\bigr),

    we immediately obtain

    p=p2+(pp2)=x+y. p=p^2+(p-p^2)=x+y.

    Thus the input variable can be reconstructed from the component polynomials, proving injectivity.

  2. Clearly y=zy=z, which gives a first equation and allows zz to be eliminated. Using

    u=p=x+y, u=p=x+y,

    we obtain

    y=uu2 y=u-u^2

    and

    w=u22u+1. w=u^2-2u+1.

    Thus yy and ww can also be eliminated, and the image is described completely by the three equations

    yz=0, y-z=0,

    y(x+y)+(x+y)2=0, y-(x+y)+(x+y)^2=0,

    and

    w(x+y)2+2(x+y)1=0. w-(x+y)^2+2(x+y)-1=0.

Back to Exercise 6.17.

Solution to Exercise 6.18

  1. From

    (x,y,z,w)=(pq,p(1q),(1p)q,(1p)(1q))=(pq,ppq,qpq,pqpq+1), (x,y,z,w) =\bigl(pq,p(1-q),(1-p)q,(1-p)(1-q)\bigr) =\bigl(pq,p-pq,q-pq,pq-p-q+1\bigr),

    we immediately obtain

    p=pq+(ppq)=x+y p=pq+(p-pq)=x+y

    and

    q=pq+(qpq)=x+z. q=pq+(q-pq)=x+z.

    Thus both input variables can be reconstructed, proving injectivity.

  2. Using

    u=p=x+y,v=q=x+z, u=p=x+y, \qquad v=q=x+z,

    we obtain

    x=uv x=uv

    and

    w=uvuv+1. w=uv-u-v+1.

    Thus xx and ww can be eliminated, and the image is described completely by the two equations

    x(x+y)(x+z)=0 x-(x+y)(x+z)=0

    and

    w(x+y)(x+z)+(x+y)+(x+z)1=0. w-(x+y)(x+z)+(x+y)+(x+z)-1=0.

Back to Exercise 6.18.

Solution to Exercise 6.21

Let dd be the common degree of GG and HH, and write

G=νnaνXνZd|ν| G=\sum_{\nu\in\mathbb N^n} a_\nu X^\nu Z^{d-|\nu|}

and

H=νnbνXνZd|ν|. H=\sum_{\nu\in\mathbb N^n} b_\nu X^\nu Z^{d-|\nu|}.

Their dehomogenisations are

νnaνXνandνnbνXν, \sum_{\nu\in\mathbb N^n}a_\nu X^\nu \qquad\text{and}\qquad \sum_{\nu\in\mathbb N^n}b_\nu X^\nu,

which are equal by assumption. Hence aν=bνa_\nu=b_\nu for every ν\nu, and therefore the original polynomials are also equal.

Back to Exercise 6.21.

Solution to Exercise 6.22

Let

F=Fd+Fd1++F1+F0 F=F_d+F_{d-1}+\cdots+F_1+F_0

and

G=Ge+Ge1++G1+G0 G=G_e+G_{e-1}+\cdots+G_1+G_0

be polynomials of degrees dd and ee, written in their homogeneous decompositions. Their homogenisations are

F̂=Fd+Fd1Z++F1Zd1+F0Zd \widehat F =F_d+F_{d-1}Z+\cdots+F_1Z^{d-1}+F_0Z^d

and

Ĝ=Ge+Ge1Z++G1Ze1+G0Ze. \widehat G =G_e+G_{e-1}Z+\cdots+G_1Z^{e-1}+G_0Z^e.

Their product has the form

F̂Ĝ=k=0d+ePkZd+ek, \widehat F\,\widehat G =\sum_{k=0}^{d+e}P_kZ^{d+e-k},

where

Pk=i=0dFiGki, P_k=\sum_{i=0}^dF_iG_{k-i},

with components whose indices lie outside the range understood to be zero. On the other hand,

FG=k=0d+eHk FG=\sum_{k=0}^{d+e}H_k

has homogeneous components

Hk=i=0dFiGki. H_k=\sum_{i=0}^dF_iG_{k-i}.

Therefore,

FĜ=k=0d+eHkZd+ek=k=0d+e(i=0dFiGki)Zd+ek=k=0d+ePkZd+ek=F̂Ĝ. \begin{aligned} \widehat{FG} &=\sum_{k=0}^{d+e}H_kZ^{d+e-k}\\ &=\sum_{k=0}^{d+e} \left(\sum_{i=0}^dF_iG_{k-i}\right)Z^{d+e-k}\\ &=\sum_{k=0}^{d+e}P_kZ^{d+e-k}\\ &=\widehat F\,\widehat G. \end{aligned}

Back to Exercise 6.22.

Solution to Exercise 6.25

Division with remainder in the homogeneous case gives

X4+9X3Y+7X2Y2+XY3+8Y4=(X3+5X2Y)(X+4Y)13X2Y2+XY3+8Y4. \begin{aligned} &X^4+9X^3Y+7X^2Y^2+XY^3+8Y^4\\ &\quad=(X^3+5X^2Y)(X+4Y) -13X^2Y^2+XY^3+8Y^4. \end{aligned}

Thus

Q=X+4Y Q=X+4Y

and

R=13X2Y2+XY3+8Y4. R=-13X^2Y^2+XY^3+8Y^4.

Back to Exercise 6.25.

English Markdown source · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Lecture 7: Conic Sections and Quadrics

Conic sections and quadrics

The standard cone

The standard cone in three-dimensional affine space is given by the homogeneous equation

Z2=X2+Y2. Z^2=X^2+Y^2.

One can picture this by thinking of zz as specifying the radius of a circle (edition clarification: over \mathbb R, the radius is |z|\lvert z\rvert, not a negative zz) in the plane parallel to the xx-yy plane through the point (0,0,z)(0,0,z). Every intersection of this cone with an affine plane EE is called a conic section.

Sections of the standard cone by affine planes

Definition: conic section

A conic section CC is the intersection of the standard cone V(Z2X2Y2)V(Z^2-X^2-Y^2) with an affine plane V(aX+bY+cZ+d)V(aX+bY+cZ+d), where a,b,ca,b,c are not all zero; thus

C=V(Z2X2Y2)V(aX+bY+cZ+d). C=V(Z^2-X^2-Y^2)\cap V(aX+bY+cZ+d).

The theory of conic sections is a classical subject, on which Apollonius of Perga already wrote a treatise. Since the plane is given by an equation

aX+bY+cZ+d=0, aX+bY+cZ+d=0,

we can solve linearly for one variable and obtain a new equation in two variables for the conic section. This is an affine-linear substitution of variables, so the new equation also has degree two.

We therefore consider affine quadrics in two variables in general.

Definition: a quadric in two variables

A polynomial of the form

F=αX2+βXY+γY2+δX+ϵY+η,α,β,γ,δ,ϵ,ηK, F=\alpha X^2+\beta XY+\gamma Y^2+\delta X+\epsilon Y+\eta, \qquad \alpha,\beta,\gamma,\delta,\epsilon,\eta\in K,

where at least one of the coefficients α,β,γ\alpha,\beta,\gamma is nonzero, is called a quadratic form in two variables (over KK), or a quadric in two variables. The corresponding zero locus

V(F)𝔸K2 V(F)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^2

is also called a quadric.

Terminology note. Here the source uses “quadratic form” for a possibly inhomogeneous degree-two polynomial. In the usual homogeneous sense, the quadratic form is only αX2+βXY+γY2\alpha X^2+\beta XY+\gamma Y^2.

We want to know how many different types of quadrics there are. The answer depends on the ground field. We must also specify which notion of equivalence we wish to use. For two quadrics

F,GK[X,Y], F,G\in K[X,Y],

the following notions of equivalence are worth investigating.

  1. FF and GG are affinely equivalent as polynomials: there is a (bijective) affine-linear change of variables

    φ:K[X,Y]K[X,Y],XrX+sY+t,Yr̃X+s̃Y+t̃, \begin{aligned} \varphi:K[X,Y]&\longrightarrow K[X,Y],\\ X&\longmapsto rX+sY+t,\\ Y&\longmapsto \widetilde rX+\widetilde sY+\widetilde t, \end{aligned}

    such that G=φ(F)G=\varphi(F).

  2. The principal ideals (F)(F) and (G)(G) are affinely equivalent: there is a (bijective) affine-linear change of variables φ\varphi such that

    (G)=(φ(F)). (G)=(\varphi(F)).

  3. The quotient rings

    K[X,Y]/(F)andK[X,Y]/(G) K[X,Y]/(F)\qquad\text{and}\qquad K[X,Y]/(G)

    are isomorphic as KK-algebras.

  4. The zero loci V(F)V(F) and V(G)V(G) are affine-linearly equivalent.

The first notion is stronger than the second, and the second is stronger than the last two. An essential difference between (1) and (2) is that in (2) we may always multiply by a unit (which does not change the zero locus either). Over a field that is not algebraically closed, equivalence in (4) can be very coarse, since all FF with an empty zero locus are equivalent in the sense of (4).

For K=K=\mathbb R and K=K=\mathbb C, we are also interested in whether the corresponding zero loci have the same topological properties. Here we will consider the different notions of equivalence for two quadrics FF and GG in parallel, but our main interest is in (2).

Lemma: first reduction of affine quadrics

Let KK be a field of characteristic 2\ne2, and let

F=αX2+βXY+γY2+δX+ϵY+η F=\alpha X^2+\beta XY+\gamma Y^2+\delta X+\epsilon Y+\eta

be a quadric. Then there is a change of variables in the affine plane such that, in the new variables, the transformed polynomial has the form

G=γY2+H(X),H(X)=aX2+bX+c, G=\gamma Y^2+H(X), \qquad H(X)=aX^2+bX+c,

with γ0\gamma\ne0. If a0a\ne0, we can arrange that b=0b=0.

Over an algebraically closed field, we can arrange that γ=1\gamma=1 by a change of variables.

If we are interested in the generated ideal or the zero locus, we can also arrange that γ=1\gamma=1 by division.

Proof

First we reduce to the case γ0\gamma\ne0. If γ=0\gamma=0 and α0\alpha\ne0, we may interchange XX and YY. If α=γ=0\alpha=\gamma=0, then β0\beta\ne0. In this case, the change

XX+Y,YY, X\longmapsto X+Y, \qquad Y\longmapsto Y,

makes the coefficient of Y2Y^2 nonzero. Henceforth we therefore assume that γ0\gamma\ne0.

We write the polynomial as

γY2+(βX+ϵ)Y+H̃(X), \gamma Y^2+(\beta X+\epsilon)Y+\widetilde H(X),

where H̃\widetilde H is a polynomial in XX of degree 2\le2. Completing the square gives

γ(Y+βX+ϵ2γ)2+H̃(X)(βX+ϵ)24γ. \gamma\left(Y+\frac{\beta X+\epsilon}{2\gamma}\right)^2 +\widetilde H(X)-\frac{(\beta X+\epsilon)^2}{4\gamma}.

In the new variables

Y+βX+ϵ2γandX, Y+\frac{\beta X+\epsilon}{2\gamma} \qquad\text{and}\qquad X,

the equation has the form

G=γY2+H(X),H(X)=aX2+bX+c. G=\gamma Y^2+H(X), \qquad H(X)=aX^2+bX+c.

If KK is algebraically closed, γ\gamma has a square root, so YY/γY\mapsto Y/\sqrt\gamma makes the coefficient equal to 11. The other additional assertion is clear. \square

Classification of real and complex quadrics

Example: classification of real quadrics

Let K=K=\mathbb R. We want to classify real quadrics, mainly with respect to affine-linear equivalence of their generated principal ideals. In other words, we may make affine changes of variables and divide by 1-1. By Lemma 7.3, we may assume that the defining equation has the form

Y2=aX2+bX+c. Y^2=aX^2+bX+c.

If a=b=0a=b=0, the change YcYY\mapsto\sqrt cY for c>0c>0, or YcYY\mapsto\sqrt{-c}Y for c<0c<0, followed by division by ±c\pm c, lets us make the right-hand side equal to 11, 1-1, or 00.

If a=0a=0 and b0b\ne0, we may take bX+cbX+c as a new variable and obtain the equation

Y2=X. Y^2=X.

Now let a0a\ne0. The change XX/aX\mapsto X/\sqrt a or XX/aX\mapsto X/\sqrt{-a} lets us arrange that a=±1a=\pm1. Completing the square makes b=0b=0. If c=0c=0, we can transform the equation into

Y2=±X2. Y^2=\pm X^2.

So let c0c\ne0. By the simultaneous change

XuX,YuY,u=±c, X\longmapsto uX, \qquad Y\longmapsto uY, \qquad u=\sqrt{\pm c},

followed by division, we can arrange that c=±1c=\pm1. The remaining possibilities to consider are therefore

Y2=±X2±1, Y^2=\pm X^2\pm1,

where the two equations

Y2X2=±1 Y^2-X^2=\pm1

are equivalent to one another.

We now know that every real quadric can be brought into one of the following nine forms.

I. Y2=0Y^2=0. This is a double line.

  1. Y2=1Y^2=1. This means Y=±1Y=\pm1, giving two parallel lines.

  2. Y2=1Y^2=-1. This locus is empty.

  3. Y2=XY^2=X. This is a parabola.

V. Y2=X2Y^2=X^2. This means (YX)(Y+X)=0(Y-X)(Y+X)=0, giving two intersecting lines.

  1. Y2=X2Y^2=-X^2. The only solution is the point (0,0)(0,0).

  2. Y2=X2+1Y^2=X^2+1. This means (YX)(Y+X)=1(Y-X)(Y+X)=1, giving a hyperbola.

  3. Y2=X2+1Y^2=-X^2+1. This is a unit circle.

  4. Y2=X21Y^2=-X^2-1. This locus is again empty.

Are these nine types all different from one another? That depends on the notion of equivalence used. Types III and IX are both empty, and thus have identical zero loci. On the other hand, the corresponding quotient rings

[X,Y]/(Y2+1)and[X,Y]/(X2+Y2+1) \mathbb R[X,Y]/(Y^2+1) \qquad\text{and}\qquad \mathbb R[X,Y]/(X^2+Y^2+1)

are not isomorphic, and over the complex numbers their zero loci are not the same. We therefore regard them as different here too. Apart from this exception, the zero loci are usually already different for topological reasons. For example, the unit circle is compact, the hyperbola is noncompact with two connected components, and the parabola is noncompact with one connected component, and so on.

However, the double line and the parabola are the same in the real topology, as are the hyperbola and the two parallel lines. In each pair, the quotient rings differ; in the second pair, the complex versions also differ. For example, K[X,Y]/(Y2)K[X,Y]/(Y^2) is not reduced, whereas

K[X,Y]/(Y2X)K[Y] K[X,Y]/(Y^2-X)\cong K[Y]

is an integral domain. The complex hyperbola is connected because it is isomorphic to

×=\{0}, \mathbb C^\times=\mathbb C\setminus\{0\},

that is, to the punctured complex line 𝔸1\{0}\mathbb A_{\mathbb C}^1\setminus\{0\}.

The following images show the rotation and translation of a quadric.

First stage of a principal-axis transformation of a quadric
Second stage of a principal-axis transformation of a quadric
Third stage of a principal-axis transformation of a quadric

Example: classification of complex quadrics

Let K=K=\mathbb C. We want to classify complex quadrics. By Lemma 7.3, we may assume that the defining equation has the form

Y2=aX2+bX+c. Y^2=aX^2+bX+c.

If a=b=0a=b=0 and c=0c=0, we retain the equation Y2=0Y^2=0. If a=b=0a=b=0 and c0c\ne0, scaling the variable YY and dividing by a nonzero constant lets us make the equation Y2=1Y^2=1.

If a=0a=0 and b0b\ne0, we may take bX+cbX+c as a new variable and obtain the equation

Y2=X. Y^2=X.

Now let a0a\ne0. The change XX/aX\mapsto X/\sqrt a lets us arrange that a=1a=1. Completing the square makes b=0b=0. Finally, a simultaneous change XuXX\mapsto uX, YuYY\mapsto uY, followed by division, lets us arrange that c=1c=1 if c0c\ne0; if c=0c=0, the form Y2=X2Y^2=X^2 is retained.

Edition note: In both normalisation steps above, the source uses scaling or division requiring c0c\ne0 without separating the case c=0c=0. This edition makes the distinction explicit: c=0c=0 gives form I when a=b=0a=b=0, and form IV, Y2=X2Y^2=X^2, when a0a\ne0.

We now know that every complex quadric can be brought into one of the following five forms.

I. Y2=0Y^2=0. This is a double line.

  1. Y2=1Y^2=1. This means Y=±1Y=\pm1, giving two parallel complex lines.

  2. Y2=XY^2=X. This is a complex parabola.

  3. Y2=X2Y^2=X^2. This means (YX)(Y+X)=0(Y-X)(Y+X)=0, giving two complex lines intersecting at one point.

V. Y2=X2+1Y^2=X^2+1. This means (YX)(Y+X)=1(Y-X)(Y+X)=1, giving a complex hyperbola.

In the complex topology, Types I and III are a complex affine line, hence a real plane, and therefore topologically the same. Speaking of a “complex plane” is dangerous in algebraic geometry, since it may mean \mathbb C or 2\mathbb C^2. Their quotient rings differ, however, so they are listed as distinct types. Apart from that pair, all types differ in the complex topology. Besides the real plane, we have the punctured complex affine line (the hyperbola, topologically a punctured real plane), two disjoint lines, and two lines intersecting at a point.

The classification of complex quadrics in the last example holds over every algebraically closed field of characteristic 2\ne2.

Parametrisation of quadrics

In elementary number theory, we learn how to obtain all Pythagorean triples systematically. The reason is that the unit circle has a parametrisation by rational functions. Generalising Exercise 1.28, we now show that every irreducible quadric can be parametrised rationally.

Theorem: rational parametrisation of quadrics

Let

C=V(F) C=V(F)

be a quadric in two variables, that is,

F=αX2+βXY+γY2+δX+ϵY+η, F=\alpha X^2+\beta XY+\gamma Y^2+\delta X+\epsilon Y+\eta,

with α,β,γ\alpha,\beta,\gamma not all zero. Suppose that there is at least one point on the quadric. Then there are polynomials

P1,P2,QK[T],Q0, P_1,P_2,Q\in K[T], \qquad Q\ne0,

such that the image of the rational map

𝔸K1D(Q)𝔸K2,t(P1(t)Q(t),P2(t)Q(t)) \begin{aligned} \mathbb A_K^1\supseteq D(Q)&\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^2,\\ t&\longmapsto \left(\frac{P_1(t)}{Q(t)},\frac{P_2(t)}{Q(t)}\right) \end{aligned}

lies in CC.

If CC has at least two points, the map is nonconstant and injective apart from finitely many exceptions.

Edition note. Over a finite field, “nonconstant” here refers to the pair of rational functions in K(T)K(T), not necessarily to the induced function on the finite set D(Q)(K)D(Q)(K). As the source’s final remark explains, that set can even be empty.

If CC is also irreducible, the map is surjective apart from finitely many exceptions. In particular, an irreducible quadric with at least two points is a rational curve.

Proof

By a change of variables, we can arrange that α0\alpha\ne0. We can then divide by α\alpha and assume that α=1\alpha=1. By translation, we may assume that the origin 0=(0,0)0=(0,0) lies on the curve. Then η=0\eta=0. If the quadric consists of two intersecting lines, we can translate so that the origin is not their intersection point (but still lies on one of the lines).

The idea is, for a point

H=(t,1), H=(t,1),

to consider the line through 00 and HH and its intersection with CC. This intersection consists of at most two points (unless it is the whole line). Since 00 is one of those points, the other point that must exist is uniquely determined.

So let H=(t,1)H=(t,1) be given. The line through HH and 00 consists of all points

(at,a),aK. (at,a), \qquad a\in K.

Its intersection points with CC are obtained by substituting (x,y)=(at,a)(x,y)=(at,a) into FF and solving for aa. Substitution gives the condition

F(at,a)=(at)2+β(ata)+γa2+δat+ϵa. F(at,a)=(at)^2+\beta(at\,a)+\gamma a^2+\delta at+\epsilon a.

The solution a=0a=0 corresponds to the origin, which we already know. The second solution is

a2=δtϵt2+βt+γ. a_2=\frac{-\delta t-\epsilon}{t^2+\beta t+\gamma}.

This expression is defined if

Q(t)=t2+βt+γ0, Q(t)=t^2+\beta t+\gamma\ne0,

which excludes at most two values of tt. The point on CC corresponding to a2a_2 is

a2(t,1)=(a2t,a2)=(tδtϵt2+βt+γ,δtϵt2+βt+γ). \begin{aligned} a_2(t,1) &=(a_2t,a_2)\\ &=\left( t\frac{-\delta t-\epsilon}{t^2+\beta t+\gamma}, \frac{-\delta t-\epsilon}{t^2+\beta t+\gamma} \right). \end{aligned}

We must therefore set

P1=t(δt+ϵ),P2=δtϵ. P_1=-t(\delta t+\epsilon), \qquad P_2=-\delta t-\epsilon.

This map is well-defined on the Zariski-open set D(Q)D(Q) (and that set is nonempty as soon as the field has at least three elements).

From now on, suppose that CC has at least two points. If δ=ϵ=0\delta=\epsilon=0, then FF has the form

F=X2+βXY+γY2. F=X^2+\beta XY+\gamma Y^2.

Since we assumed that CC has at least two points, FF is a product of two homogeneous linear forms (monic in XX). If FF is the square of a linear form, geometrically we simply have a “double line”, which can be parametrised bijectively directly. Otherwise, FF is the product of two distinct homogeneous linear forms, and both corresponding lines pass through the origin, which we have excluded. Thus in this case δ\delta and ϵ\epsilon cannot both be 00.

We therefore need only consider the situation in which δt+ϵ\delta t+\epsilon is not the zero polynomial. It follows that the map on its domain of definition is injective apart from finitely many exceptions, since if δt+ϵ0\delta t+\epsilon\ne0, the preimage tt can be reconstructed from the image using

t=P1QQP2. t=\frac{P_1}{Q}\cdot\frac{Q}{P_2}.

To show that the map is surjective apart from finitely many exceptions, we need the assumption that CC is irreducible. In particular, this means that CC is not the union of two lines. Let PCP\in C have nonzero yy-coordinate (there are at most two points with zero yy-coordinate). Then the line through PP and 00 intersects the parametrising line V(Y1)V(Y-1) at a point

H=(t,1). H=(t,1).

Apart from finitely many values of tt, the map is defined at this point HH, and PP is then its image point. By irreducibility, only finitely many points of CC lie on the exceptional lines; thus almost all points are reached. \square

Portrait of an unidentified man, formerly misidentified as Johannes Kepler

Translator’s note: The frozen source displays the file Johannes Kepler 1610.jpg with a caption identifying the sitter as Kepler. The available Commons file is now titled Portrait Confused With Johannes Kepler 1610.jpg and identifies the sitter as an unidentified man formerly misidentified as Kepler. The local asset name and caption have been adjusted transparently.

The nonsingular conic sections are also the trajectories of celestial bodies. The possible celestial trajectories were first described by Johannes Kepler. The underlying law states that at each instant, acceleration is proportional to the gravitational force between the central point mass (the star, the Sun) and the moving point mass (the planet, the comet). The attractive force itself depends on the two masses and the square of their distance. There are “bound” orbits (ellipses) and “unbound” orbits (parabolas, hyperbolas).

A circle and an ellipse can be transformed into one another by a linear change of variables. Note that rational parametrisations are not “physical parametrisations”. The latter truly describe the motion: the parameter is time, and the derivative at a given time is the instantaneous velocity. Rational parametrisations “only” describe the trajectory. As is well known, the circle is traversed uniformly (at constant speed) by

(x,y)=(cost,sint). (x,y)=(\cos t,\sin t).

Elliptic orbit
Parabolic orbit
Hyperbolic orbit

Remark: the domain of a quadric parametrisation

The parametrisation of a quadric does not depend on the ground field, since the expressions defining the map are always the same. Over a finite field, however, the domain of definition of a rational map can be empty. Passing to a larger finite field 𝔽q\mathbb F_q always gives the map a nonempty domain of definition.

Geometrically, the gaps in the domain of the parametrisation arise because the connecting lines constructed in the proof of Theorem 7.6 have no other intersection with the quadric besides the origin; or, conversely, the entire line lies on the quadric (which can happen only in the reducible case or for a double line). The exceptional points of the quadric that do not lie in the image are the points on the xx-axis (in particular the origin) and, in the reducible case, the points on the line lying entirely on the quadric and passing through the origin.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0 for translated course text; media retain component rights in authority/RIGHTS-unit-07.csv · Rights record: RIGHTS-unit-07.csv

Worksheet 7

Practice exercises

Exercise 7.1

Determine the plane sections of a sphere. Which of them are conic sections?

Exercise 7.2

Determine the plane sections of a cylinder. Which of them are conic sections?

Exercise 7.3

Determine the conic sections obtained by intersecting with a plane through the origin.

Exercise 7.4

Show that parallel planes, neither of which passes through the origin, define the same type of conic section.

Exercise 7.5

Consider the standard cone

V(Z2X2Y2)𝔸3 V\left(Z^2-X^2-Y^2\right)\subset\mathbb A_{\mathbb R}^3

and the planes through the axis of rotation V(X,Z)V(X,Z). Determine, as a function of the rotation angle α\alpha (measured anticlockwise in the xx-zz plane), the type of conic section given by the plane EαE_\alpha.

Exercise 7.6

Consider the standard cone

V(Z2X2Y2)𝔸3 V\left(Z^2-X^2-Y^2\right)\subset\mathbb A_{\mathbb R}^3

and the planes through the axis of rotation V(X1,Z)V(X-1,Z). Determine, as a function of the rotation angle α\alpha (measured anticlockwise in the xx-zz plane), the type of conic section given by the plane EαE_\alpha.

Exercise 7.7

Consider the standard cone

V(Z2X2Y2)𝔸3 V\left(Z^2-X^2-Y^2\right)\subset\mathbb A_{\mathbb R}^3

and the planes through the axis of rotation V(X1,Z1)V(X-1,Z-1). Determine, as a function of the rotation angle α\alpha (measured anticlockwise in the xx-zz plane), the type of conic section given by the plane EαE_\alpha.

Exercise 7.8

Determine the quadrics associated with homogeneous quadratic polynomials in two variables.

Exercise 7.9

Transform the quadric

2x2+xy3y2+5xy+3 2x^2+xy-3y^2+5x-y+3

into a real standard form.

Exercise 7.10 ★

Consider the two quadrics

X2+Y2=1and4X2+3Y2=9. X^2+Y^2=1 \qquad\text{and}\qquad 4X^2+3Y^2=9.

Show that they are affine-linearly equivalent over \mathbb R, but not over \mathbb Q.

Hint. One possible argument follows from Theorem 7.2 (Measure and Integration Theory, Osnabrück 2022-2023).

Edition note: The source calls both loci “circles”, but 4X2+3Y2=94X^2+3Y^2=9 is an ellipse, not a circle. The requested equivalence statement is unchanged; the wording of the question has been corrected to “quadrics”.

Exercise 7.11 ★

Let

F=(0,0) F=(0,0)

be the origin in the real plane, and let

G=V(X1). G=V(X-1).

Let e>0e>0 be a real number. Determine an algebraic equation for the set of points P=(x,y)P=(x,y) such that the distance d(P,F)d(P,F) is proportional, with proportionality factor e\sqrt e, to the perpendicular distance d(P,G)d(P,G).

By transforming the equation appropriately, show that it gives an ellipse for e<1e<1, a parabola for e=1e=1, and a hyperbola for e>1e>1.

Exercise 7.12

Parametrise the quadric defined by

F=2x2xy+3y2+x5y F=2x^2-xy+3y^2+x-5y

using the origin and the line V(y1)V(y-1).

Exercise 7.13

Consider the algebraic curve

C=V(Xd+1Yd),d1. C=V\left(X^{d+1}-Y^d\right), \qquad d\geq1.

Show that the origin and the line V(X1)V(X-1) give a parametrisation of CC by the method described in the proof of Theorem 7.6.

In the following exercises, we discuss a notion of automorphism that goes beyond affine-linear changes of coordinates.

Let KK be a field. A polynomial map

φ:𝔸Kn𝔸Kn \varphi:\mathbb A_K^n\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^n

is called a (polynomial) automorphism of affine space if it has a polynomial inverse.

An automorphism of affine space is the same as a KK-algebra automorphism of the polynomial ring K[X1,,Xn]K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] to itself. It is given by nn polynomials in nn variables.

Edition note. For the stated equivalence with polynomial-ring automorphisms, the polynomial inverse must satisfy the composition identities as polynomial identities. Over a finite field, pointwise identities on KnK^n alone do not suffice.

Exercise 7.14

Show that a KK-algebra automorphism

φ:K[X]K[X] \varphi:K[X]\longrightarrow K[X]

is given by

XaX+b,a0, X\longmapsto aX+b, \qquad a\ne0,

that is, by an affine-linear change of variables.

Exercise 7.15

Give an example of a bijective polynomial map

𝔸K1𝔸K1 \mathbb A_K^1\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^1

whose inverse is not polynomial.

Edition note: The existence of such an example depends on KK. For example, for K=K=\mathbb R, the map xx3x\mapsto x^3 is bijective, while its inverse xx3x\mapsto\sqrt[3]{x} is not polynomial. Over \mathbb C, every bijective polynomial map of the affine line has degree one.

Exercise 7.16

Let FK[X]F\in K[X] be a polynomial. Show that the map

𝔸K2𝔸K2,(x,y)(x,y+F(x)) \begin{aligned} \mathbb A_K^2&\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^2,\\ (x,y)&\longmapsto(x,y+F(x)) \end{aligned}

is an automorphism of affine space. Determine an inverse explicitly.

Exercise 7.17

Determine the inverse of the map

22,(x,y)(x+y2,y42xy2x2+y2+x+y). \begin{aligned} \mathbb R^2&\longrightarrow\mathbb R^2,\\ (x,y)&\longmapsto \left(x+y^2,-y^4-2xy^2-x^2+y^2+x+y\right). \end{aligned}

Exercise 7.18

Let

φ:𝔸n𝔸n \varphi:\mathbb A_{\mathbb C}^n\longrightarrow\mathbb A_{\mathbb C}^n

be an automorphism of affine space. Show that the Jacobian determinant of φ\varphi is constant and equal to some c0c\ne0.

The Jacobian problem asks whether a polynomial map

φ:𝔸n𝔸n, \varphi:\mathbb A_{\mathbb C}^n\longrightarrow\mathbb A_{\mathbb C}^n,

whose Jacobian determinant is constantly equal to 11, has a polynomial inverse, that is, is an automorphism of affine space. This problem is open even for n=2n=2. By the inverse function theorem, under the given assumption there is a local differentiable inverse at every point.

Two affine algebraic sets

V,Ṽ𝔸Kn V,\widetilde V\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n

are called affine-algebraically equivalent if there is an automorphism of affine space

φ:𝔸Kn𝔸Kn \varphi:\mathbb A_K^n\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^n

such that

φ1(V)=Ṽ. \varphi^{-1}(V)=\widetilde V.

Exercise 7.19

Let FK[X]F\in K[X] be a polynomial and let

C=V(YF(X))𝔸K2 C=V(Y-F(X))\subset\mathbb A_K^2

be its graph. Show that CC is affine-algebraically equivalent to the xx-axis

V(Y)𝔸K2, V(Y)\subset\mathbb A_K^2,

but in general is not affine-linearly equivalent to it.

Exercise 7.20

Let

V,Ṽ𝔸Kn V,\widetilde V\subset\mathbb A_K^n

be two affine-algebraically equivalent affine algebraic sets, with vanishing ideals Id(V)\operatorname{Id}(V) and Id(Ṽ)\operatorname{Id}(\widetilde V). Show that the quotient rings

K[X1,,Xn]/Id(V) K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]/\operatorname{Id}(V)

and

K[X1,,Xn]/Id(Ṽ) K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]/\operatorname{Id}(\widetilde V)

are isomorphic.

Exercise 7.21

Which quadrics in 2\mathbb R^2 (in 2\mathbb C^2) are affine-algebraically equivalent to one another?

Exercise 7.22 ★

For the rational quadric

C=V(X2+Y25)𝔸2, C=V\left(X^2+Y^2-5\right)\subset\mathbb A_{\mathbb Q}^2,

carry out a rational parametrisation in the sense of Theorem 7.6, using the auxiliary point (1,2)(1,2) and a suitable line.

Exercise 7.23

Let pp be a prime number with

pmod4=3. p\bmod4=3.

Referring to Theorem 9.10 (Number Theory, Osnabrück 2025), explain why the rational quadric

C=V(X2+Y2p)𝔸2 C=V\left(X^2+Y^2-p\right)\subset\mathbb A_{\mathbb Q}^2

is empty.

Exercise 7.24

Let RR be an integral domain and rRr\in R an element with no square root in RR. Show that the polynomial

X2rR[X] X^2-r\in R[X]

is irreducible.

Exercise 7.25

Let RR be an integral domain with 202\ne0, and let rRr\in R have no square root in RR. Consider the quadratic ring extension

RR[X]/(X2r)=:S. R\subset R[X]/\left(X^2-r\right)=:S.

Show that the elements fRf\in R having a square root in SS have the form

f=y2 f=y^2

with yRy\in R, or the form

f=rz2 f=rz^2

with zRz\in R.

Exercise 7.26

Let pp and qq be distinct prime numbers. Show that the quadrics defined over \mathbb Q,

C=V(X2+Y2p),D=V(X2+Y2q)𝔸2, C=V\left(X^2+Y^2-p\right), \qquad D=V\left(X^2+Y^2-q\right) \subset\mathbb A_{\mathbb Q}^2,

are not affine-linearly equivalent.

Edition note: The universal claim in the source is false as written. For p=2p=2 and q=5q=5, the invertible rational transformation (x,y)(3xy2,x+3y2) (x,y)\longmapsto\left(\frac{3x-y}{2},\frac{x+3y}{2}\right) multiplies x2+y2x^2+y^2 by 5/25/2 and therefore maps CC to DD. Thus this proof exercise requires additional hypotheses.

Source hint, with corrected ring notation. Apply Exercise 7.25 to

R=[Y] R=\mathbb Q[Y]

and

S=([Y])[X]/(X2+Y2p). S=(\mathbb Q[Y])[X]/\left(X^2+Y^2-p\right).

Edition note: The frozen hint replaces \mathbb Q by KK without explanation and writes X2Y2+pX^2-Y^2+p, which is not the coordinate equation of CC. The notation corrected above identifies SS with the coordinate ring of CC; it does not remove the counterexample to the universal claim.

Exercises for submission

Exercise 7.27 - 6 points

For the various real quadrics, find a realisation as a conic section, that is, as the intersection of a plane with the cone

V(x2+y2z2), V(x^2+y^2-z^2),

or prove that no such realisation exists.

Exercise 7.28 - 9 points

Consider the map

𝔸K2𝔸K2,(u,v)(u2+uv,vu2)=(x,y). \begin{aligned} \mathbb A_K^2&\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^2,\\ (u,v)&\longmapsto(u^2+uv,v-u^2)=(x,y). \end{aligned}

For each of the following three families of parallel lines, determine the image curve of every line under this map; give both a parametrisation and a curve equation.

  1. Lines parallel to the uu-axis.
  2. Lines parallel to the vv-axis.
  3. Lines parallel to the antidiagonal.

Also sketch typical image curves for K=K=\mathbb R. For each family, determine whether its image curves intersect one another.

Exercise 7.29 - 4 points

Let

F,GK[X1,,Xn] F,G\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]

be polynomials and KLK\subseteq L a field extension. Discuss how the different notions of equivalence from Lecture 7 for FF and GG (and for V(F)V(F) and V(G)V(G)) behave under this field extension.

Exercise 7.30 - 6 points

Consider the two quotient rings

R=[X,Y]/(X2+Y21)andS=[X,Y]/(XY1). R=\mathbb R[X,Y]/(X^2+Y^2-1) \qquad\text{and}\qquad S=\mathbb R[X,Y]/(XY-1).

Show that SS is a principal ideal domain, whereas RR is not.

(These are the rings associated with the real circle and the real hyperbola.)

Hint. For RR, consider the ideal (X1,Y)(X-1,Y).

Exercise 7.31 - 4 points

Parametrise the quadric

C=V(F),F=x2+2xyy2+x3y+4, C=V(F), \qquad F=x^2+2xy-y^2+x-3y+4,

using the point (1,2)C(1,2)\in C and the yy-axis. Do not make a change of variables.

Exercise 7.32 - 6 points

Consider the two zero loci in 𝔸2\mathbb A_{\mathbb R}^2

K=V(X2+Y21)andC=V(X4+Y41). K=V\left(X^2+Y^2-1\right) \qquad\text{and}\qquad C=V\left(X^4+Y^4-1\right).

Show that there is a polynomial map in two variables mapping one of these zero loci surjectively onto the other. Show that this map is already defined over \mathbb Q, but is not surjective there. Show further that over \mathbb Q there is no surjective polynomial map at all from CC to KK, and that the only polynomial maps from KK to CC are constant.

Exercise 7.33 - 6 points

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and FK[X,Y]F\in K[X,Y] an irreducible polynomial. Show that the curve V(F)V(F) is rational if and only if there is an injective KK-algebra homomorphism

Q(K[X,Y]/(F))K(T). Q(K[X,Y]/(F))\longrightarrow K(T).

Here the left-hand side is the fraction field and the right-hand side is the rational function field.


Source navigation: Lecture 7 - public solutions for Unit 7 - Worksheet 6 - Worksheet 8 (source)

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Public Solutions to Worksheet 7

At the frozen revision boundary, the source provides public solutions only for Exercises 7.10, 7.11, and 7.22. No additional solutions have been created for this edition.

Solution to Exercise 7.10

The equation

4X2+3Y2=9 4X^2+3Y^2=9

is equivalent to

(23X)2+(13Y)2=1=X̃2+Ỹ2. \left(\frac{2}{3}X\right)^2 +\left(\frac{1}{\sqrt{3}}Y\right)^2 =1 =\widetilde X^2+\widetilde Y^2.

Thus, over \mathbb R,

X̃=23X,Ỹ=13Y \widetilde X=\frac{2}{3}X, \qquad \widetilde Y=\frac{1}{\sqrt{3}}Y

is an affine-linear transformation.

For the case \mathbb Q, we set

X̃=aX+bY+c \widetilde X=aX+bY+c

and

Ỹ=dX+eY+f \widetilde Y=dX+eY+f

with coefficients a,b,c,d,e,fa,b,c,d,e,f\in\mathbb Q. We obtain

X̃2+Ỹ2=(aX+bY+c)2+(dX+eY+f)2=(a2+d2)X2+(b2+e2)Y2+2(ab+de)XY+H(X,Y), \begin{aligned} \widetilde X^2+\widetilde Y^2 &=(aX+bY+c)^2+(dX+eY+f)^2\\ &=(a^2+d^2)X^2+(b^2+e^2)Y^2 +2(ab+de)XY+H(X,Y), \end{aligned}

where H[X,Y]H\in\mathbb Q[X,Y] and degH1\deg H\le 1.

Edition note: The source immediately compares coefficients at this step. The justification is that an affine equivalence maps the unique centre of either quadric to the unique centre of the other, so c=f=0c=f=0. After normalising the pullback equation to have constant term 1-1, the two quadratic polynomials defining the same locus coincide; comparing the coefficients of Y2Y^2 then gives the following equation.

With this justification, we must have

b2+e2=133(b2+e2)=1. b^2+e^2=\frac{1}{3} \quad\Longleftrightarrow\quad 3(b^2+e^2)=1.

Clearing denominators puts the equation in the form

3(r2+s2)=t2, 3(r^2+s^2)=t^2,

with r,s,tr,s,t\in\mathbb Z. We will show that this equation has no nontrivial integer solution. Since the left-hand side is a multiple of 33, we obtain 3t3\mid t, so 9t29\mid t^2. Consequently, 3(r2+s2)3\mid(r^2+s^2). In /(3)\mathbb Z/(3), the equation r2+s2=0r^2+s^2=0 holds exactly when r=0r=0 and s=0s=0. Hence 9(r2+s2)9\mid(r^2+s^2), and both sides of the equation can be divided by 99. Now set

r=r3,s=s3,t=t3. r'=\frac r3, \qquad s'=\frac s3, \qquad t'=\frac t3.

An infinite descent completes the proof.

Back to Exercise 7.10.

Solution to Exercise 7.11

The distance from P=(x,y)P=(x,y) to the origin is x2+y2\sqrt{x^2+y^2}, while the perpendicular distance to the line x=1x=1 is |x1|\lvert x-1\rvert. The proportionality is expressed by

d(P,F)d(P,G)=e. \frac{d(P,F)}{d(P,G)}=\sqrt e.

Thus

x2+y2=e|x1|or, equivalently,x2+y2=e(x1)2. \sqrt{x^2+y^2} =\sqrt e\,\lvert x-1\rvert \quad\text{or, equivalently,}\quad x^2+y^2=e(x-1)^2.

Consequently,

(1e)x2+y2+2exe=0 (1-e)x^2+y^2+2ex-e=0

is an algebraic equation for a curve containing every point satisfying the condition. If e=1e=1, the equation becomes

y2+2exe=0orx=12ey2+12, y^2+2ex-e=0 \quad\text{or}\quad x=-\frac{1}{2e}y^2+\frac{1}{2},

so the curve is a parabola in this case. Henceforth let e1e\ne1. The general equation can be rewritten as

x2+11ey2+2e1exe1e=0 x^2+\frac{1}{1-e}y^2+\frac{2e}{1-e}x-\frac{e}{1-e}=0

and, by completing the square, brought into the form

(x+e1e)2+11ey2e2(1e)2e1e=0. \left(x+\frac{e}{1-e}\right)^2 +\frac{1}{1-e}y^2 -\frac{e^2}{(1-e)^2} -\frac{e}{1-e} =0.

We write this as

(x+e1e)2+11ey2=e2(1e)2+e1e=e2e2+e(1e)2=:c>0. \begin{aligned} \left(x+\frac{e}{1-e}\right)^2+\frac{1}{1-e}y^2 &=\frac{e^2}{(1-e)^2}+\frac{e}{1-e}\\ &=\frac{e^2-e^2+e}{(1-e)^2}\\ &=:c>0. \end{aligned}

The factor 11e\frac{1}{1-e} is positive for e<1e<1 and negative for e>1e>1. In the first case, a change of coordinates gives an equation of the form

x̃2+ỹ2=c, \widetilde x^2+\widetilde y^2=c,

that is, an ellipse. In the second case, we obtain

x̃2ỹ2=c, \widetilde x^2-\widetilde y^2=c,

that is, a hyperbola.

Back to Exercise 7.11.

Solution to Exercise 7.22

We translate the point (1,2)(1,2) to the origin by introducing new variables

U=X1 U=X-1

and

V=Y2. V=Y-2.

The equation then becomes

X2+Y25=(U+1)2+(V+2)25=U2+V2+2U+4V. \begin{aligned} X^2+Y^2-5 &=(U+1)^2+(V+2)^2-5\\ &=U^2+V^2+2U+4V. \end{aligned}

Write the translated curve as

C̃=V(U2+V2+2U+4V). \widetilde C=V\left(U^2+V^2+2U+4V\right).

The parametrisation formulas using the line V=1V=1 give

P1=t(2t+4), P_1=-t(2t+4),

P2=(2t+4), P_2=-(2t+4),

and

Q=t2+1. Q=t^2+1.

The parametrisation is therefore given by

C̃𝔸2,t(t(2t+4)t2+1,(2t+4)t2+1). \mathbb Q\longrightarrow \widetilde C\subset\mathbb A^2_{\mathbb Q}, \qquad t\longmapsto \left( \frac{-t(2t+4)}{t^2+1}, \frac{-(2t+4)}{t^2+1} \right).

Edition note: The source denotes the intermediate curve in coordinates (U,V)(U,V) by the same symbol CC as the original curve. The symbol C̃\widetilde C is used here to distinguish the translation step from the formulas after translating back.

This gives a parametrisation for the original equation:

X=t2t+4t2+1+1=t24t+1t2+1 X =-t\frac{2t+4}{t^2+1}+1 =\frac{-t^2-4t+1}{t^2+1}

and

Y=(2t+4)t2+1+2=2t22t2t2+1. Y =\frac{-(2t+4)}{t^2+1}+2 =\frac{2t^2-2t-2}{t^2+1}.

Back to Exercise 7.22.

English Markdown source · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Lecture 8: Mechanically Defined Algebraic Curves

Mechanically defined algebraic curves

Construction of a lemniscate

Let SS be a rigid rod (think of a mechanical machine component) with two fixed points

P1,P2S P_1,P_2\in S

(think of joints). This rod can move in the plane (that is, 2\mathbb R^2), subject to the condition that the two points remain on prescribed paths B1B_1 and B2B_2, respectively (think of rails). These paths can be quite simple, for example lines or circles. In a steam engine, a rotating wheel and a straight rail are coupled by a rod. How do we describe the resulting motion? What are the allowed configurations of the system? Since a configuration is determined by the positions of the two points, each specified by two plane coordinates, this is altogether a four-dimensional situation.

If we fix a point PP on the rod (for example, by marking it in colour), what does the path of motion (or trajectory) of that point in the plane look like?

In the extreme cases

P=P1andP=P2, P=P_1 \qquad\text{and}\qquad P=P_2,

the trajectories are (usually proper) subsets of B1B_1 and B2B_2. For points between them, we expect a continuous deformation of one path into the other.

Situation: a mechanical rod linkage

Let B1B_1 and B2B_2 be two plane algebraic curves described by the equations F1=0F_1=0 and F2=0F_2=0, with

F1,F2K[X,Y]. F_1,F_2\in K[X,Y].

Let SS be a “moving line” (a rod) with two points

P1,P2S,P1P2, P_1,P_2\in S, \qquad P_1\ne P_2,

at distance dd from one another. The mechanical system given by all positions of SS in the plane satisfying both

P1B1andP2B2 P_1\in B_1 \qquad\text{and}\qquad P_2\in B_2

is described as follows.

A position of the rod in the plane is uniquely determined once the positions of its two points are specified (this does not yet account for the distance condition), hence by four variables

(P1,P2)=(x1,y1,x2,y2). (P_1,P_2)=(x_1,y_1,x_2,y_2).

An allowed configuration must satisfy the following three algebraic conditions.

  1. F1(x1,y1)=0F_1(x_1,y_1)=0.

  2. F2(x2,y2)=0F_2(x_2,y_2)=0.

  3. (x2x1)2+(y2y1)2=d2(x_2-x_1)^2+(y_2-y_1)^2=d^2 (the distance condition).

Thus we have three algebraic equations in four variables, so we expect the solution set to be a curve in 𝔸K4\mathbb A_K^4. A point

PS P\in S

is described by its distance from P1P_1 or P2P_2. Since these points move in the mechanical system, we specify the co-moving point PP by

P=P1+u(P2P1) P=P_1+u(P_2-P_1)

(so the distance of PP from P1P_1 is u(P2P1)=|ud|\lVert u(P_2-P_1)\rVert=\lvert ud\rvert), and write its coordinates as

(x,y)=(x1,y1)+u(x2x1,y2y1)=(ux2+(1u)x1,uy2+(1u)y1). \begin{aligned} (x,y) &=(x_1,y_1)+u(x_2-x_1,y_2-y_1)\\ &=(ux_2+(1-u)x_1,uy_2+(1-u)y_1). \end{aligned}

The entire mechanical system can then be expressed (by a linear transformation) in the four variables x1,y1,x,yx_1,y_1,x,y. For u0u\ne0, substitute

x2=x(1u)x1uandy2=y(1u)y1u x_2=\frac{x-(1-u)x_1}{u} \qquad\text{and}\qquad y_2=\frac{y-(1-u)y_1}{u}

into the equations. In the new variables, we obtain the three equations

F1(x1,y1)=0,F2(x(1u)x1u,y(1u)y1u)=0,(xx1)2+(yy1)2=u2d2. \begin{aligned} F_1(x_1,y_1)&=0,\\ F_2\left( \frac{x-(1-u)x_1}{u}, \frac{y-(1-u)y_1}{u} \right)&=0,\\ (x-x_1)^2+(y-y_1)^2&=u^2d^2. \end{aligned}

In principle, the trajectory corresponding to PP can be obtained by “eliminating” the variables x1x_1 and y1y_1 from this system, yielding an algebraic equation for xx and yy. This is easier said than done, however; it is often more useful to simplify the system by skilful manipulation.

Edition clarification. Elimination gives polynomial equations satisfied by the trajectory, not necessarily an exact description of its real points. Real projections can require inequalities; the line-segment trajectories in the two-line example below illustrate this distinction.

Remark: a co-moving plane

Sometimes we are also interested in the situation where an entire plane moves with the rod, and in the trajectories of points in that plane. This happens, for example, when further machine components are mounted on the rod. In that case, any point of the plane can be expressed relative to P1P_1 and P2P_2 as

(x,y)=(x1,y1)+u(x2x1,y2y1)+v(y2y1,x2+x1). (x,y) =(x_1,y_1) +u(x_2-x_1,y_2-y_1) +v(y_2-y_1,-x_2+x_1).

Thus P1P_1 is taken as the origin of the moving plane, the line connecting it to P2P_2 as the first coordinate axis, and the perpendicular axis as the second coordinate axis.

The whole mechanical rod system is therefore described by four variables with three equations. Its visible operation, however—the motion of a fixed point PP on SS—gives a trajectory in the affine plane.

We consider some examples.

Two lines as paths

Example: two lines as paths

Let L1L_1 and L2L_2 be two lines in the real plane 2\mathbb R^2, and let SS be a moving line (a rod) with two points P1,P2P_1,P_2 at distance dd from one another. The allowed configurations of the system are the positions of SS satisfying both

P1L1andP2L2. P_1\in L_1 \qquad\text{and}\qquad P_2\in L_2.

Let the lines be specified by

L1={(x,y)a1x+b1y=c1} L_1=\{(x,y)\mid a_1x+b_1y=c_1\}

and

L2={(x,y)a2x+b2y=c2}. L_2=\{(x,y)\mid a_2x+b_2y=c_2\}.

By Situation 8.1, the allowed configurations are specified by three conditions

a1x1+b1y1=c1,a2x2+b2y2=c2,(x2x1)2+(y2y1)2=d2. \begin{aligned} a_1x_1+b_1y_1&=c_1,\\ a_2x_2+b_2y_2&=c_2,\\ (x_2-x_1)^2+(y_2-y_1)^2&=d^2. \end{aligned}

The solution set of each linear equation is a three-dimensional affine subspace. The solution set of the third equation can be viewed as the product of a circle (in the variables x2x1x_2-x_1 and y2y1y_2-y_1) with an affine plane. This is a kind of cylinder, although its fibres are two-dimensional. How can we describe their common zero locus, and what trajectory does the mechanical system produce for a point

PS? P\in S?

By a change of variables, we may assume that the first line is the xx-axis, defined by

y=0, y=0,

while the other line is defined by

ax+by=c. ax+by=c.

For the system, this gives the condition y1=0y_1=0, so y1y_1 can be eliminated. We then obtain a system with three variables x1,x2,y2x_1,x_2,y_2 and two conditions

(x2x1)2+y22=d2,ax2+by2=c. \begin{aligned} (x_2-x_1)^2+y_2^2&=d^2,\\ ax_2+by_2&=c. \end{aligned}

Parallel lines.

Parallel lines

If the second line is parallel to the first, then a=0a=0, and the second equation can be solved for y2y_2, giving

y2=cb=e y_2=\frac cb=e

(with b0b\ne0, since otherwise the equation does not define a line). The number ee is the distance between the parallel lines.

Edition note. This source wording and the comparisons below assume e0e\ge0, which can be arranged by reflecting the yy-axis coordinate if necessary. Without that convention, the distance is |e|\lvert e\rvert and the three cases compare |e|\lvert e\rvert with dd. We can now eliminate y2y_2 as well, leaving the single equation

(x2x1)2+e2=d2, (x_2-x_1)^2+e^2=d^2,

or

(x2x1)2=d2e2=(de)(d+e). (x_2-x_1)^2=d^2-e^2=(d-e)(d+e).

If e>de>d, this has no solution (the constant distance between the parallel lines exceeds the coupling distance on the rod).

If e=de=d, we obtain the condition

x1=x2. x_1=x_2.

This corresponds to the situation in which the distance between the parallel lines equals the coupling distance. The only allowed configurations are those in which the rod is perpendicular to both lines. The solution set is therefore a line. For each point on the rod, the trajectory is simply another parallel line.

Now let e<de<d. Then

x2x1=±(de)(d+e). x_2-x_1=\pm\sqrt{(d-e)(d+e)}.

The solution set consists of two disjoint lines. These correspond to the two different ways of attaching the rod, which cannot be transformed into one another. The mechanical system therefore has two connected components. For a point on the rod, however, both attachments give the same trajectory: a parallel line that is, in a sense, traversed twice. Thus the solution set of the complete mechanical system consists of two parallel affine lines in four-dimensional affine space, whereas their trajectories for a fixed point form just one line.

Nonparallel lines.

Now consider the case where the two lines are not parallel. They then intersect, and the solution set cannot be empty. By a further translation (called a linear transformation in the source), we may assume that their intersection is the origin (0,0)(0,0). The second equation is then described by

x2=ey2. x_2=ey_2.

We can therefore eliminate x2x_2, obtaining in the two variables x1,y2x_1,y_2 the single equation

(ey2x1)2+y22=d2. (ey_2-x_1)^2+y_2^2=d^2.

Thus the configuration space of the mechanical system lies in a plane (defined by y1=0y_1=0 and x2=ey2x_2=ey_2) and is described by a quadric. Taking ey2x1ey_2-x_1 as a new variable shows that this is an ellipse (in coordinates x1,y2x_1,y_2; in coordinates ey2x1,y2ey_2-x_1,y_2, it is a circle).

An ellipse

What do the trajectories look like? Let PP be the point on the rod given by

P1+t(P2P1). P_1+t(P_2-P_1).

By the description in Situation 8.1, PP has coordinates

((1t)x1+tey2,ty2), ((1-t)x_1+tey_2,ty_2),

subject to

(ey2x1)2+y22=d2. (ey_2-x_1)^2+y_2^2=d^2.

In the extreme cases t=0t=0 and t=1t=1, the resulting solution sets are respectively (x1,0)(x_1,0) (with arbitrary x1x_1) and (ey2,y2)(ey_2,y_2) (with arbitrary y2y_2). The condition

(ey2x1)2+y22=d2 (ey_2-x_1)^2+y_2^2=d^2

must still be satisfied: for a given x1x_1 (or y2y_2), the equation must have a solution in the other variable. Such a solution exists when x1x_1 (or y2y_2) is sufficiently small. Altogether, we obtain certain segments on the original lines. The points P1P_1 and P2P_2 must stay on their paths and cannot move arbitrarily far from the other line.

Edition note: “Sufficiently small” in the source means small in absolute value. For t=0t=0, minimising the left-hand side over y2y_2 gives the exact condition |x1|d1+e2|x_1|\le d\sqrt{1+e^2}; for t=1t=1, minimising over x1x_1 gives the exact condition |y2|d|y_2|\le d.

So let

t0,1. t\ne0,1.

The ansatz

(x,y)=((1t)x1+tey2,ty2) (x,y)=((1-t)x_1+tey_2,ty_2)

gives

y2=yt y_2=\frac yt

and

x1=xtey21t=xey1t x_1=\frac{x-tey_2}{1-t}=\frac{x-ey}{1-t}

(so the preimage is uniquely determined). The equation then becomes

(eytxey1t)2+y2t2=d2, \left(\frac{ey}{t}-\frac{x-ey}{1-t}\right)^2+\frac{y^2}{t^2}=d^2,

which is again the equation of an ellipse.

A line and a circle as paths

We now consider a mechanical curve for which one path is a line and the second is a circle. This is the situation in a steam engine (in particular when the line passes through the centre of the circle).

A steam engine in action

Without loss of generality, we may assume that the line is given by

y=0. y=0.

The coordinates of the point on the line are then

P1=(x1,y1)=(x1,0). P_1=(x_1,y_1)=(x_1,0).

We may assume that the circle has centre (0,b)(0,b) and radius rr. The point on the circular path

P2=(x2,y2) P_2=(x_2,y_2)

satisfies

x22+(y2b)2=r2. x_2^2+(y_2-b)^2=r^2.

Thus the entire mechanical system is described by the two conditions

x22+(y2b)2=r2,(x2x1)2+y22=d2, \begin{aligned} x_2^2+(y_2-b)^2&=r^2,\\ (x_2-x_1)^2+y_2^2&=d^2, \end{aligned}

where dd again denotes the coupling distance. Looking at these equations in the coordinates x2,y2x_2,y_2 and x2x1x_2-x_1 shows that they describe the intersection of two cylinders, as in Example 4.6. Thus, in three suitable coordinates, the allowed rod configurations can be interpreted as the intersection of two cylinders. However, their radii need not agree, nor need their central axes intersect. Such an intersection and its associated trajectories can be quite complicated.

For the following examples, we need a lemma describing a simple elimination situation.

Lemma: elimination of two quadratic equations

Let RR be an integral domain, and let

F1=a1X2+b1X+c1andF2=a2X2+b2X+c2 F_1=a_1X^2+b_1X+c_1 \qquad\text{and}\qquad F_2=a_2X^2+b_2X+c_2

be two quadratic polynomials in one variable over RR, with

a10, a_1\ne0,

and with (a1,b1)(a_1,b_1) and (a2,b2)(a_2,b_2) linearly independent. Then the ideal

(F1,F2)R (F_1,F_2)\cap R

contains the element

(a2c1a1c2)2b1(a2c1b2c2a2b1+a1b2c2)+c1(a1b222a2b1b2). \begin{aligned} &(a_2c_1-a_1c_2)^2\\ &\quad-b_1(-a_2c_1b_2-c_2a_2b_1+a_1b_2c_2)\\ &\quad+c_1(a_1b_2^2-2a_2b_1b_2). \end{aligned}

Proof

First we have

a2F1a1F2=(a2b1a1b2)X+a2c1a1c2. a_2F_1-a_1F_2 =(a_2b_1-a_1b_2)X+a_2c_1-a_1c_2.

Edition supplement. The source’s substitution argument below does not by itself justify division inside an ideal. A direct identity supplies the justification. Put A=a2b1a1b2A=a_2b_1-a_1b_2, B=a2c1a1c2B=a_2c_1-a_1c_2, and let ERE\in R denote the element displayed in the lemma. Expanding gives

E=(a2Bb2Aa2AX)F1+(a1AX+b1Aa1B)F2. E=(a_2B-b_2A-a_2AX)F_1+(a_1AX+b_1A-a_1B)F_2.

Thus E(F1,F2)RE\in(F_1,F_2)\cap R without any division. The following is the source’s original calculation.

This gives the expression (this argument is not entirely correct, but can also be carried out more rigorously)

X=a2c1a1c2a2b1a1b2. X=-\frac{a_2c_1-a_1c_2}{a_2b_1-a_1b_2}.

Substituting into F1F_1 and multiplying by the square of the denominator gives

a1(a2c1a1c2)2b1(a2c1a1c2)(a2b1a1b2)+c1(a2b1a1b2)2. \begin{aligned} &a_1(a_2c_1-a_1c_2)^2\\ &\quad-b_1(a_2c_1-a_1c_2)(a_2b_1-a_1b_2)\\ &\quad+c_1(a_2b_1-a_1b_2)^2. \end{aligned}

The second summand contains b1a2c1a2b1-b_1a_2c_1a_2b_1, and the third contains c1a22b12c_1a_2^2b_1^2; these two terms cancel. Every remaining monomial contains a1a_1. We can therefore cancel a1a_1, leaving

(a2c1a1c2)2b1(a2c1b2c2a2b1+a1b2c2)+c1(a1b222a2b1b2). \begin{aligned} &(a_2c_1-a_1c_2)^2\\ &\quad-b_1(-a_2c_1b_2-c_2a_2b_1+a_1b_2c_2)\\ &\quad+c_1(a_1b_2^2-2a_2b_1b_2). \end{aligned}

\square

Example: the unit circle and a tangent line

Consider the mechanical linkage defined by the unit circle and its tangent line at (0,1)(0,1), with coupling distance

d=2. d=2.

Thus the point on the straight path and the point on the circular path are

P1=(x1,1)andP2=(x2,y2), P_1=(x_1,1) \qquad\text{and}\qquad P_2=(x_2,y_2),

with the two conditions

x22+y22=1,(x2x1)2+(y21)2=4. \begin{aligned} x_2^2+y_2^2&=1,\\ (x_2-x_1)^2+(y_2-1)^2&=4. \end{aligned}

This is therefore the intersection of two cylinders, but with different radii and nonintersecting central axes. The difference of the equations is

x122x1x22y22=0, x_1^2-2x_1x_2-2y_2-2=0,

which can replace one of them. This also shows that we can eliminate y2y_2, obtaining a system with one equation in two variables; see Exercise 8.9. The system is irreducible; see Exercise 8.10.

The following two lines are of interest:

G1=V(x2,y2+1) G_1=V(x_2,y_2+1)

and

G2=V(x2x1,y2+1). G_2=V(x_2-x_1,y_2+1).

They intersect at the point

P=(0,0,1). P=(0,0,-1).

The line G1G_1 lies on one cylinder and is tangent to the other, and conversely. Geometrically, the smaller cylinder punches a “bent figure eight” out of the larger cylinder, with PP as the crossing point of the figure eight.

Intersection of two cylinders

The allowed rod configurations can be obtained as follows. For each point of the circle, the rod has two possible positions, except at the circular-path point (0,1)(0,-1), where the straight-path point must be (0,1)(0,1).

Start with (0,1)(0,1) as the circular-path point and (2,1)(-2,1) as the straight-path point (so the rod lies to the left along the line), and let the circular-path point move clockwise around the circle. It pulls the straight-path point behind it until it reaches the bottom at (0,1)(0,-1). The rod is then the vertical diameter of the circle (the straight-path point is at (0,1)(0,1) and the circular-path point is at the bottom). The circular-path point then moves upwards along the left-hand arc, pushing the rod further to the right until the straight-path point reaches (2,1)(2,1).

The other possibility with (0,1)(0,1) as the circular-path point has the rod lying to the right along the line (with (2,1)(2,1) as the straight-path point). The circular-path point again moves clockwise. At first it pushes the straight-path point to the right until an extreme position is reached, where the rod is perpendicular to the circle at the circular-path point. It then pulls the straight-path point back to the left as the rod rises, until the rod occupies the vertical diameter of the circle. The circular-path point next moves upwards along the left-hand arc again, pushing the straight-path point leftwards to an extreme position, and finally pulling it back to (2,1)(-2,1).

In particular, the rod occupies the vertical diameter twice; this rod configuration therefore corresponds to the crossing point of the figure eight.

We now want to calculate the trajectory of the midpoint of the rod, namely

P=P1+12(P2P1)=(x1,1)+12(x2x1,y21)=(12x1+12x2,12y2+12):=(x,y). \begin{aligned} P &=P_1+\frac12(P_2-P_1)\\ &=(x_1,1)+\frac12(x_2-x_1,y_2-1)\\ &=\left(\frac12x_1+\frac12x_2,\frac12y_2+\frac12\right)\\ &\mathrel{:=}(x,y). \end{aligned}

We seek an equation for xx and yy, and introduce the variable

z=12x112x2. z=\frac12x_1-\frac12x_2.

Then

x1=x+z,x2=xz,y2=2y1, x_1=x+z,\qquad x_2=x-z,\qquad y_2=2y-1,

and the system in the new variables becomes

(xz)2+(2y1)2=1and(2z)2+(2y2)2=4. (x-z)^2+(2y-1)^2=1 \qquad\text{and}\qquad (-2z)^2+(2y-2)^2=4.

The second equation can be written as

z2+(y1)2=1, z^2+(y-1)^2=1,

or as

z2+y22y=0. z^2+y^2-2y=0.

Expanding the first equation gives

z22zx+x2+4y24y=0. z^2-2zx+x^2+4y^2-4y=0.

By Lemma 8.4, with

R=[x,y] R=\mathbb R[x,y]

and the additional variable zz (so a1=a2=1a_1=a_2=1 and b1=0b_1=0), we obtain the equation

(c1c2)2+c1b22=(y22yx24y2+4y)2+(y22y)(2x)2=(3y2+2yx2)2+(y22y)(2x)2=9y4+x4+4y212y3+6x2y24x2y+4x2y28x2y=9y4+10x2y2+x412y312x2y+4y2. \begin{aligned} (c_1-c_2)^2+c_1b_2^2 &=(y^2-2y-x^2-4y^2+4y)^2+(y^2-2y)(2x)^2\\ &=(-3y^2+2y-x^2)^2+(y^2-2y)(2x)^2\\ &=9y^4+x^4+4y^2-12y^3+6x^2y^2-4x^2y\\ &\qquad+4x^2y^2-8x^2y\\ &=9y^4+10x^2y^2+x^4-12y^3-12x^2y+4y^2. \end{aligned}

This is a quartic (a curve of degree four) with two singularities.

Figure for the exercise

Example: radius equal to the coupling distance

Consider the mechanical system consisting of the unit circle and the xx-axis, with coupling distance

d=1. d=1.

The mechanical system is described by the two equations

x22+y22=1,(x2x1)2+y22=1. \begin{aligned} x_2^2+y_2^2&=1,\\ (x_2-x_1)^2+y_2^2&=1. \end{aligned}

This is the intersection of two cylinders with equal radii and intersecting central axes, so we may use the results of Example 4.6. There we showed that the intersection consists of two ellipses meeting at two points. This description must also reappear in the context of the mechanical system. Which rod configurations correspond to the first ellipse, which to the second, and which lie on both?

Let us survey the allowed configurations. If the line point (the point on the straight path) is the centre of the circle, every point of the circle is allowed as the circular-path point. The radial rays of the circle therefore form a family of allowed rod configurations, together making up one ellipse. The other ellipse corresponds to the configurations in which the straight-path point moves from 2-2 to +2+2, pushing the circular-path point ahead of it or pulling it behind on the upper or lower arc. Two rod configurations belong to both families: those with the circle’s centre as the straight-path point and (0,1)(0,1) or (0,1)(0,-1) as the circular-path point. In such a configuration, the mechanical system can not only move forwards and backwards but also change direction in an essential way.

What do the trajectories of a point on the moving rod look like? The total trajectory is the union of the two trajectories corresponding to the two irreducible components of the system. How many self-intersection points are there?

For a point

P=P1+u(P2P1) P=P_1+u(P_2-P_1)

on the coupling rod, its coordinates are

(z1,z2)=(x1+u(x2x1),uy2). (z_1,z_2)=(x_1+u(x_2-x_1),uy_2).

For u=0u=0, the trajectory is the real interval [2,2][-2,2], and for u=1u=1, it is the unit circle. So now let

u0,1. u\ne0,1.

The projection of the radial components of the system is simply a circle of radius uu. The projection of the other ellipse is again an ellipse, which can intersect the circle in different ways.

Edition note. The radius is |u|\lvert u\rvert if negative uu is allowed. There is also a degenerate case omitted in the source: on the second component, x1=2x2x_1=2x_2, so (z1,z2)=((2u)x2,uy2)(z_1,z_2)=((2-u)x_2,uy_2) with x22+y22=1x_2^2+y_2^2=1. For u=2u=2, its image is the segment {0}×[2,2]\{0\}\times[-2,2], not an ellipse. For u0,2u\ne0,2, that component projects to a nondegenerate ellipse. See also Exercise 8.23.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0 for translated course text; media retain component rights in authority/RIGHTS-unit-08.csv · Rights record: RIGHTS-unit-08.csv

Worksheet 8

Practice exercises

Exercise 8.1

Determine the possible intersections of two perpendicular cylinders.

Exercise 8.2

Find an equation as simple as possible for the mechanical system given by the XX-axis, the translated parabola

Y=X2+1, Y=X^2+1,

and distance 22.

Exercise 8.3

Let

H1,H2K[X] H_1,H_2\in K[X]

be polynomials in one variable, and let

C1=V(YH1),C2=V(YH2) C_1=V(Y-H_1), \qquad C_2=V(Y-H_2)

be their corresponding graphs in 𝔸K2\mathbb A_K^2. Show that the associated mechanical system, for a specified distance dd, can be described using two variables.

Exercise 8.4

Determine equations for the mechanical system given by the unit circle, the xx-axis, and distance 11. What are its irreducible components?

Exercise 8.5

Let

M𝔸4 M\subseteq\mathbb A_{\mathbb R}^4

be the mechanical system given by two paths B1B_1 and B2B_2 and distance dd. Show that there is a natural injective map

MB1×B2. M\longrightarrow B_1\times B_2.

Exercise 8.6

Let

B=V(G)𝔸2 B=V(G)\subseteq\mathbb A_{\mathbb R}^2

be a path. Regard it as a mechanical system MM in the sense that the two points at distance dd must lie on this one path. Show that there is a natural fixed-point-free bijection

MM. M\longrightarrow M.

Exercise 8.7

Determine equations for the mechanical system given by the xx-axis as the common path and distance 11.

Exercise 8.8

Determine equations for the mechanical system given by the unit circle as the common path and distance 22.

Exercise 8.9 ★

Consider the mechanical system defined by the unit circle and its tangent line through (0,1)(0,1), with coupling distance

d=2. d=2.

Show that this system can be described using two variables.

Exercise 8.10

Consider the mechanical system defined by the unit circle and its tangent line through (0,1)(0,1), with coupling distance d=2d=2; see Example 8.5. Show that this system is irreducible. To do so, apply Exercise 7.24 to the ring extension

R=[X2,Y2]/(X22+Y221)R[X1]/(X122X1X22Y22). R=\mathbb R[X_2,Y_2]/(X_2^2+Y_2^2-1) \subseteq R[X_1]/(X_1^2-2X_1X_2-2Y_2-2).

Exercise 8.11

Determine equations for the mechanical system given by the xx-axis, the yy-axis, and distance 11.

Exercise 8.12

Determine equations for the mechanical system given by the union of the coordinate axes as the common path and distance 11.

Exercise 8.13

Let

B1=V(F1),B2=V(F2)𝔸2 B_1=V(F_1),\quad B_2=V(F_2) \subseteq\mathbb A_{\mathbb R}^2

be two paths, and fix a distance dd. Compare the mechanical system MM for these paths with the system NN associated with the single path B1B2B_1\cup B_2. Show that there are two natural injective maps

MN. M\longrightarrow N.

Let LiL_i be the mechanical system associated with BiB_i as the sole path. Show that there is a natural surjective map

L1L2MMN. L_1\uplus L_2\uplus M\uplus M\longrightarrow N.

Exercise 8.14

Let

M𝔸4 M\subseteq\mathbb A_{\mathbb R}^4

be a mechanical system. Show that the rule

MS1(d),(P1,P2)P1P2 \begin{aligned} M&\longrightarrow S^1(d),\\ (P_1,P_2)&\longmapsto P_1-P_2 \end{aligned}

defines a map from the system to the circle with centre (0,0)(0,0) and radius dd. What does surjectivity of this map mean? Can its image consist of only finitely many points?

Exercise 8.15

Consider the mechanical system

M𝔸4 M\subseteq\mathbb A_{\mathbb R}^4

for two intersecting lines. Show that the map in Exercise 8.14 is bijective.

Exercise 8.16

Consider the mechanical system

M𝔸4 M\subseteq\mathbb A_{\mathbb R}^4

for the unit circle, the circle with centre (0,2)(0,2) and radius 44, and coupling distance 55. Show that the map in Exercise 8.14 is not surjective. What is its image?

Preparation for regularity

In the following exercises, we consider the zero locus

V=V(f1,,fk)𝔸n V=V(f_1,\ldots,f_k)\subseteq\mathbb A_{\mathbb R}^n

from the viewpoint of differential geometry. Recall the definition of a regular point of a differentiable map from Analysis 2. In the present context, this notion is applied to the map

φ=(f1,,fk):𝔸n𝔸k \varphi=(f_1,\ldots,f_k): \mathbb A_{\mathbb R}^n\longrightarrow\mathbb A_{\mathbb R}^k

at a point PVP\in V.

Let V0V_0 and WW be finite-dimensional real vector spaces, let GV0G\subseteq V_0 be open, let PGP\in G, and let

φ:GW \varphi:G\longrightarrow W

be differentiable at PP. The point PP is called a regular point of φ\varphi if

rank(Dφ)P=min(dimV0,dimW). \operatorname{rank}(D\varphi)_P =\min\bigl(\dim V_0,\dim W\bigr).

Otherwise, PP is called a critical point or a singular point.

Exercise 8.17 ★

Consider the mechanical system given by the xx-axis and the circle with centre (0,2)(0,2) and radius 11. Let the coupling distance be d>0d>0.

  1. Set up equations describing this system.
  2. Determine for which values of dd the system is regular at every point.
  3. Determine the critical points as a function of dd. How can these points be explained as a property of the mechanical system?

Exercise 8.18

Consider the mechanical system given by the xx-axis and the circle with centre (0,2)(0,2) and radius 11. Let the coupling distance be d>0d>0.

  1. Give a geometric explanation, then prove, that for d>3d>3 this mechanical system is not path-connected in the real topology.
  2. Give a geometric explanation, then prove, that for 1d31\le d\le 3 this mechanical system is path-connected.

Exercises for submission

Exercise 8.19 - 6 points (2+2+2)

Consider the mechanical system given by the xx-axis, the parabola V(YX2)V(Y-X^2), and coupling distance 11.

  1. Determine equations for this mechanical system using as few variables as possible.
  2. Does the system have critical points?
  3. Determine an equation for the trajectory of the midpoint of the connecting rod.

Exercise 8.20 - 2 points

Determine equations for the mechanical system given by the unit circle as the common path and distance 11.

Exercise 8.21 - 6 points (2+2+2)

Consider the mechanical system given by the parabola V(YX2)V(Y-X^2), the circle with centre (0,2)(0,2) and radius 11, and coupling distance 11.

  1. Determine equations for this mechanical system using as few variables as possible.
  2. Determine its connected components in the metric topology.
  3. Determine its connected components in the Zariski topology.

Exercise 8.22 - 6 points (2+4)

Consider the mechanical system given by the xx-axis and the circle with centre (0,2)(0,2) and radius 11. Let the coupling distance be d>0d>0. Continue Exercise 8.17.

  1. Eliminate y1y_1 from the system’s equations.
  2. Using the single equation in x1x_1 and x2x_2 describing the system, determine for which values of dd the system is regular at every point.

Exercise 8.23 - 6 points

Let

C𝔸3 C\subseteq\mathbb A_{\mathbb R}^3

be the intersection of two cylinders of radius 11, about the xx-axis and the yy-axis respectively; thus CC is the union of two ellipses. Consider the perpendicular projection

pv:𝔸3𝔸2 p_v:\mathbb A_{\mathbb R}^3\longrightarrow\mathbb A_{\mathbb R}^2

specified by a vector

v=(a,b,c)0. v=(a,b,c)\ne 0.

Characterise the possible images under these projections as a function of a,b,ca,b,c.

Exercise 8.24 - 3 points

Consider the map

𝔸K2𝔸K2,(x,y)(x2,y2)=(u,v). \begin{aligned} \mathbb A_K^2&\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^2,\\ (x,y)&\longmapsto(x^2,y^2)=(u,v). \end{aligned}

What are the images of the plane and the unit circle under this map for K=K=\mathbb R, and what are they for K=K=\mathbb C? In the real case, if the circle is traversed once, how many times is its image traversed?


Source navigation: Lecture 8 - public solutions for Unit 8 - Worksheet 7 - Worksheet 9 (source)

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Public Solutions to Worksheet 8

At the frozen revision boundary, the source provides public solutions only for Exercises 8.9 and 8.17. No additional solutions have been created for this edition.

Solution to Exercise 8.9

With

P1=(x1,1)andP2=(x2,y2), P_1=(x_1,1) \qquad\text{and}\qquad P_2=(x_2,y_2),

we obtain the two conditions

x22+y22=1 x_2^2+y_2^2=1

and

(x2x1)2+(y21)2=4. (x_2-x_1)^2+(y_2-1)^2=4.

Subtracting the first equation from the second gives

0=(x2x1)2+(y21)24(x22+y221)=x22+x122x1x2+y222y2+14x22y22+1=x122x1x22y22. \begin{aligned} 0 &=(x_2-x_1)^2+(y_2-1)^2-4-(x_2^2+y_2^2-1)\\ &=x_2^2+x_1^2-2x_1x_2+y_2^2-2y_2+1-4-x_2^2-y_2^2+1\\ &=x_1^2-2x_1x_2-2y_2-2. \end{aligned}

Together with the unit-circle equation, this equation is equivalent to the original system. From the new second equation, we can eliminate y2y_2 using

y2=12x12x1x21. y_2=\frac12x_1^2-x_1x_2-1.

Thus the system can be described in x1x_1 and x2x_2 alone, as the zero locus of the polynomial

x22+y221=x22+(12x12x1x21)21=x22+14x14+x12x22+1x13x2x12+2x1x21=14x14x13x2+x12x22x12+2x1x2+x22. \begin{aligned} x_2^2+y_2^2-1 &=x_2^2+\left(\frac12x_1^2-x_1x_2-1\right)^2-1\\ &=x_2^2+\frac14x_1^4+x_1^2x_2^2+1-x_1^3x_2-x_1^2+2x_1x_2-1\\ &=\frac14x_1^4-x_1^3x_2+x_1^2x_2^2-x_1^2+2x_1x_2+x_2^2. \end{aligned}

Back to Exercise 8.9.

Solution to Exercise 8.17

  1. Let

    P1=(x1,y1) P_1=(x_1,y_1)

    be the point on the circle and

    P2=(x2,0) P_2=(x_2,0)

    the point on the xx-axis. The equations are

    x12+(y12)2=1 x_1^2+(y_1-2)^2=1

    and

    (x1x2)2+y12=d2. (x_1-x_2)^2+y_1^2=d^2.

  2. Write

    f1=x12+(y12)21=x12+y124y1+3 f_1=x_1^2+(y_1-2)^2-1 =x_1^2+y_1^2-4y_1+3

    and

    f2=(x1x2)2+y12d2=x12+x222x1x2+y12d2. f_2=(x_1-x_2)^2+y_1^2-d^2 =x_1^2+x_2^2-2x_1x_2+y_1^2-d^2.

    The Jacobian matrix with respect to (x1,x2,y1)(x_1,x_2,y_1) is

    (2x102y142x12x22x22x12y1). \begin{pmatrix} 2x_1 & 0 & 2y_1-4\\ 2x_1-2x_2 & 2x_2-2x_1 & 2y_1 \end{pmatrix}.

    Depending on dd, we must determine at which points the linear map 32\mathbb R^3\to\mathbb R^2 given by this matrix is surjective, that is, has rank 22. Its rank is not 22 exactly when every pair of columns is linearly dependent, or equivalently when all 2×22\times2 minors vanish. After removing the common factor 44, the three polynomials are

    x1(x2x1),(y12)(x2x1),x1y1(x1x2)(y12). x_1(x_2-x_1), \qquad (y_1-2)(x_2-x_1), \qquad x_1y_1-(x_1-x_2)(y_1-2).

    If x10x_1\ne0, we must have x1=x2x_1=x_2 and y1=0y_1=0. But this is not a point of the system. Thus x1=0x_1=0. If x20x_2\ne0, we must have y1=2y_1=2, which does not satisfy the first equation of the system. Hence x2=0x_2=0. The system’s equations then give

    (y12)2=1andy12=d2. (y_1-2)^2=1 \qquad\text{and}\qquad y_1^2=d^2.

    The first equation forces y1=1y_1=1 or y1=3y_1=3, so d=1d=1 or d=3d=3. Thus the system is regular at every point exactly when d1,3d\ne1,3.

  3. For d=1d=1, the calculation above shows that (0,0,1)(0,0,1) is the only critical point; indeed it is the only point of the system, which explains the singularity.

    For d=3d=3, the point (0,0,3)(0,0,3) is the only critical point of the system. It is a crossing point, since the rod can move in four directions there: both coordinates (x1,x2)(x_1,x_2) in the positive direction, both in the negative direction, or in either of the two mixed directions.

Back to Exercise 8.17.


Source navigation: Worksheet 8 - Lecture 8

English Markdown source · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Lecture 9: Noetherian Rings, Hilbert’s Basis Theorem, and Modules

Noetherian rings

In the next few lectures, we will further develop the algebraic side of algebraic geometry. Our first aim is to show that if RR is a Noetherian ring, then the polynomial ring R[X]R[X] is also Noetherian (Hilbert’s basis theorem). This also holds when adjoining several (finitely many) variables, in particular for polynomial rings in finitely many variables over a field. We recall the notion of a Noetherian ring.

Definition: Noetherian ring

A commutative ring RR is called Noetherian if every ideal in it is finitely generated.

Proposition: characterisation of Noetherian rings

For a commutative ring RR, the following statements are equivalent.

  1. RR is Noetherian.

  2. Every ascending chain of ideals

    𝔞1𝔞2𝔞3 \mathfrak a_1\subseteq\mathfrak a_2\subseteq\mathfrak a_3\subseteq\cdots

    becomes stationary; that is, there is an nn such that

    𝔞n=𝔞n+1=. \mathfrak a_n=\mathfrak a_{n+1}=\cdots.

Proof

(1) \Rightarrow (2). Let

𝔞1𝔞2𝔞3 \mathfrak a_1\subseteq\mathfrak a_2\subseteq\mathfrak a_3\subseteq\cdots

be an ascending chain of ideals in RR. Consider its union

𝔞=n𝔞n, \mathfrak a=\bigcup_{n\in\mathbb N}\mathfrak a_n,

which is again an ideal in RR. Since RR is Noetherian, 𝔞\mathfrak a is finitely generated, say

𝔞=(f1,,fk). \mathfrak a=(f_1,\ldots,f_k).

All the fif_i lie in the union of the ideals 𝔞n\mathfrak a_n. Since these ideals form an ascending chain, there is an nn such that

f1,,fk𝔞n. f_1,\ldots,f_k\in\mathfrak a_n.

Then, for every m0m\geq0,

(f1,,fk)𝔞n𝔞n+mn𝔞n(f1,,fk). (f_1,\ldots,f_k)\subseteq\mathfrak a_n \subseteq\mathfrak a_{n+m} \subseteq\bigcup_{n\in\mathbb N}\mathfrak a_n \subseteq(f_1,\ldots,f_k).

All these inclusions must be equalities, so the chain is stationary from nn onwards.

(2) \Rightarrow (1). Let 𝔞\mathfrak a be an ideal in RR. Suppose 𝔞\mathfrak a is not finitely generated. We can successively construct an infinite strictly ascending chain of ideals

𝔞1𝔞2𝔞, \mathfrak a_1\subset\mathfrak a_2\subset\cdots\subseteq\mathfrak a,

where each 𝔞n\mathfrak a_n is finitely generated. Suppose we have already constructed

𝔞1𝔞2𝔞n𝔞. \mathfrak a_1\subset\mathfrak a_2\subset\cdots\subset\mathfrak a_n \subseteq\mathfrak a.

Since 𝔞n\mathfrak a_n is finitely generated but 𝔞\mathfrak a is not, the inclusion 𝔞n𝔞\mathfrak a_n\subseteq\mathfrak a is strict. Thus there is an element

fn+1𝔞,fn+1𝔞n. f_{n+1}\in\mathfrak a,\qquad f_{n+1}\notin\mathfrak a_n.

The ideal

𝔞n+1:=𝔞n+(fn+1) \mathfrak a_{n+1}:=\mathfrak a_n+(f_{n+1})

strictly extends the chain. This contradicts (2).

Lemma: quotients of Noetherian rings

If RR is Noetherian, every quotient ring R/𝔟R/\mathfrak b is also Noetherian.

Proof

Let 𝔞R/𝔟\mathfrak a\subseteq R/\mathfrak b be an ideal and let 𝔞̃R\widetilde{\mathfrak a}\subseteq R be its preimage ideal. By assumption this is finitely generated, say

𝔞̃=(f1,,fn). \widetilde{\mathfrak a}=(f_1,\ldots,f_n).

The residue classes of these generators, f1,,fn\bar f_1,\ldots,\bar f_n, form a generating set for the ideal 𝔞\mathfrak a. Indeed, for g𝔞\bar g\in\mathfrak a, we have in RR

g=i=1nrifi, g=\sum_{i=1}^n r_i f_i,

and hence in R/𝔟R/\mathfrak b

g=i=1nrifi. \bar g=\sum_{i=1}^n\bar r_i\,\bar f_i.

Hilbert’s basis theorem

Like many fundamental results in commutative algebra, Hilbert’s basis theorem, to which we now turn, goes back to David Hilbert, specifically his 1890 paper Ueber die Theorie der algebraischen Formen (“On the Theory of Algebraic Forms”).

David Hilbert (1862–1943)

David Hilbert (1862–1943); unknown creator (1886), Commons, public domain.

Hilbert’s basis theorem

If RR is Noetherian, the polynomial ring R[X]R[X] is also Noetherian.

Proof

Let 𝔟\mathfrak b be an ideal in the polynomial ring R[X]R[X]. For nn\in\mathbb N, define an ideal 𝔞n\mathfrak a_n in RR by

𝔞n={cRthere is F𝔟 with F=cXn+cn1Xn1++c1X+c0}. \mathfrak a_n=\left\{c\in R\mid\text{there is }F\in\mathfrak b\text{ with } F=cX^n+c_{n-1}X^{n-1}+\cdots+c_1X+c_0\right\}.

Thus 𝔞n\mathfrak a_n consists of all leading coefficients of degree-nn polynomials in 𝔟\mathfrak b. Clearly 𝔞n\mathfrak a_n is an ideal in RR (here we allow 00 as a leading coefficient). Moreover,

𝔞n𝔞n+1, \mathfrak a_n\subseteq\mathfrak a_{n+1},

since a polynomial FF of degree nn with leading coefficient cc can be multiplied by XX to give a polynomial of degree n+1n+1 with the same leading coefficient. Since RR is Noetherian, this ascending chain of ideals becomes stationary; choose nn such that

𝔞n=𝔞n+1=. \mathfrak a_n=\mathfrak a_{n+1}=\cdots.

For each ini\leq n, choose a finite generating set

𝔞i=(ci1,,ciki), \mathfrak a_i=(c_{i1},\ldots,c_{ik_i}),

and choose corresponding polynomials

Fij=cijXi+ terms of lower degree F_{ij}=c_{ij}X^i+\text{ terms of lower degree}

in 𝔟\mathfrak b (which exist by the definition of 𝔞i\mathfrak a_i).

We claim that 𝔟\mathfrak b is generated by all the polynomials

{Fij0in,1jki}. \left\{F_{ij}\mid 0\leq i\leq n,\ 1\leq j\leq k_i\right\}.

For each G𝔟G\in\mathfrak b, we prove by induction on its degree that it can be written as an R[X]R[X]-linear combination of these FijF_{ij}.

Edition note. The source says “RR-linear combination” here. The factors XdiX^{d-i} in the final induction step show that R[X]R[X] is intended; the assertion is finite ideal generation, not finite generation as an RR-module.

If GG is constant, that is, GRG\in R, this is clear. Let GG have degree dd, and suppose the statement has been proved for smaller degrees. Write

G=cXd+cd1Xd1++c1X+c0. G=cX^d+c_{d-1}X^{d-1}+\cdots+c_1X+c_0.

We have c𝔞dc\in\mathfrak a_d, so cc is an RR-linear combination of the cijc_{ij} with 0in0\leq i\leq n and 1jki1\leq j\leq k_i. If dnd\leq n, then cc can be written as an RR-linear combination of the cdjc_{dj}, say

c=j=1kdrjcdj. c=\sum_{j=1}^{k_d}r_jc_{dj}.

Thus

Gj=1kdrjFdj𝔟 G-\sum_{j=1}^{k_d}r_jF_{dj}\in\mathfrak b

has smaller degree, so the induction hypothesis applies. If d>nd>n, then

c=i=0,,n,j=1,,kirijcij. c=\sum_{i=0,\ldots,n,\,j=1,\ldots,k_i}r_{ij}c_{ij}.

Therefore

Gi=0,,n,j=1,,kirijXdiFij G-\sum_{i=0,\ldots,n,\,j=1,\ldots,k_i}r_{ij}X^{d-i}F_{ij}

also belongs to 𝔟\mathfrak b and has smaller degree. This completes the induction, so 𝔟\mathfrak b is finitely generated.

Corollary: finitely many variables

If RR is Noetherian, then

R[X1,,Xn] R[X_1,\ldots,X_n]

is also Noetherian.

Proof

Apply Hilbert’s basis theorem inductively along the chain

RR[X1](R[X1])[X2]=R[X1,X2](R[X1,X2])[X3]=R[X1,X2,X3]R[X1,,Xn]. R\subset R[X_1]\subset (R[X_1])[X_2]=R[X_1,X_2] \subset (R[X_1,X_2])[X_3]=R[X_1,X_2,X_3] \subset\cdots\subset R[X_1,\ldots,X_n].

Corollary: polynomial rings over fields

If KK is a field, then K[X1,,Xn]K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] is Noetherian.

Proof

This is a special case of Corollary 9.5.

In particular, Hilbert’s basis theorem means that every closed subvariety

V𝔸Kn V\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n

of affine space can be described by finitely many polynomials. Thus every algebraic zero locus is already the zero locus of finitely many polynomials.

Corollary: a fibre over the origin

Let V𝔸KnV\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n be an affine algebraic set. Then there is a map

φ:𝔸Kn𝔸Km \varphi:\mathbb A_K^n\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^m

whose components are given by polynomials

FiK[X1,,Xn],φ=(F1,,Fm), F_i\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n],\qquad \varphi=(F_1,\ldots,F_m),

such that VV is the preimage of the origin

0𝔸Km. 0\in\mathbb A_K^m.

Proof

Let 𝔞\mathfrak a be an ideal describing VV, so

V=V(𝔞). V=V(\mathfrak a).

By Hilbert’s basis theorem, there are

F1,,FmK[X1,,Xn] F_1,\ldots,F_m\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]

with 𝔞=(F1,,Fm)\mathfrak a=(F_1,\ldots,F_m). Then

V=V(𝔞)=V(F1)V(Fm). V=V(\mathfrak a)=V(F_1)\cap\cdots\cap V(F_m).

Combine these polynomials into a map

φ=(F1,,Fm):𝔸Kn𝔸Km. \varphi=(F_1,\ldots,F_m):\mathbb A_K^n\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^m.

We have φ(P)=0\varphi(P)=0 exactly when all its component functions vanish, which happens exactly when PV(Fi)P\in V(F_i) for every ii; thus V=φ1(0)V=\varphi^{-1}(0).

Definition: algebra of finite type

Let RR be a commutative ring. An RR-algebra AA is called of finite type (or finitely generated) if it has the form

A=R[X1,,Xn]/𝔞. A=R[X_1,\ldots,X_n]/\mathfrak a.

Thus a finitely generated RR-algebra has a presentation as a quotient ring of a polynomial algebra over RR in finitely many variables. Such a presentation is by no means unique.

Corollary: finite-type algebras over a Noetherian ring

If RR is Noetherian, every RR-algebra of finite type is also Noetherian. In particular, for a field KK, every KK-algebra of finite type is Noetherian.

Proof

This follows from Corollary 9.5 and Lemma 9.3.

Decomposition into irreducible components

Hilbert’s basis theorem implies that every ascending chain of ideals

𝔞1𝔞2𝔞3 \mathfrak a_1\subseteq\mathfrak a_2\subseteq\mathfrak a_3\subseteq\cdots

in K[X1,,Xn]K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] becomes stationary. For descending chains of affine algebraic subsets of affine space, this has the following consequence.

Theorem: the Zariski topology is Noetherian

In affine space 𝔸Kn\mathbb A_K^n, every descending sequence of closed sets

V1V2 V_1\supseteq V_2\supseteq\cdots

becomes stationary.

Proof

Let

V1V2 V_1\supseteq V_2\supseteq\cdots

be a descending chain of affine algebraic subsets of 𝔸Kn\mathbb A_K^n. By Lemma 3.7, their corresponding vanishing ideals satisfy

Id(Vi)Id(Vi+1). \operatorname{Id}(V_i)\subseteq\operatorname{Id}(V_{i+1}).

By Corollary 9.6, this chain of ideals becomes stationary, say for ii0i\geq i_0. By Lemma 3.8(3),

Vi=V(Id(Vi)). V_i=V(\operatorname{Id}(V_i)).

Hence, for ii0i\geq i_0,

Vi=V(Id(Vi))=V(Id(Vi+1))=Vi+1, V_i=V(\operatorname{Id}(V_i)) =V(\operatorname{Id}(V_{i+1}))=V_{i+1},

so the descending chain becomes stationary.

Taking complements, it follows that every ascending chain of Zariski-open sets in affine space also becomes stationary. Such a topology is called Noetherian (more generally, a partial order in which every ascending chain becomes stationary is called Noetherian). In a Noetherian space, every nonempty collection of open sets (or closed sets) has a maximal (or minimal) element. This is useful as a proof principle called Noetherian induction: to prove that a property EE holds for all closed subsets, consider the collection of closed subsets that do not satisfy EE. We want to show that this collection is empty; if it were nonempty, it would have a minimal element, which we then lead to a contradiction. The validity of the principle rests on the fact that a nonempty set with no minimal element allows an infinite descending chain to be constructed. A typical example of this principle is the following theorem.

Theorem: decomposition into irreducible components

Every affine algebraic set V𝔸KnV\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n has a unique decomposition

V=V1Vk V=V_1\cup\cdots\cup V_k

into irreducible sets ViV_i such that

ViVjfor ij. V_i\not\subseteq V_j\qquad\text{for }i\ne j.

Edition clarification. The components in this statement are closed affine algebraic subsets, as required by the source’s proof using closed decompositions. Uniqueness is up to reordering. For the empty set, the decomposition is the empty union.

Proof of existence (Noetherian induction)

Suppose not every affine algebraic set has such a decomposition. Then there is a minimal set, say VV, without such a decomposition. The set VV cannot be irreducible, so it has a nontrivial decomposition

V=V1V2. V=V_1\cup V_2.

Since V1V_1 and V2V_2 are proper subsets of VV, each has a finite expression as a union of irreducible sets. Combining these expressions gives a finite expression for VV, a contradiction.

Proof of uniqueness

Let

V=V1Vk=W1Wm V=V_1\cup\cdots\cup V_k=W_1\cup\cdots\cup W_m

be two decompositions into irreducible sets (with no inclusions within either decomposition). We have

V1=V1V=V1(W1Wm)=(V1W1)(V1Wm). V_1=V_1\cap V =V_1\cap(W_1\cup\cdots\cup W_m) =(V_1\cap W_1)\cup\cdots\cup(V_1\cap W_m).

Since V1V_1 is irreducible, V1WjV_1\subseteq W_j for some jj. By the same argument, WjViW_j\subseteq V_i for some ii, whence i=1i=1 and V1=WjV_1=W_j. Similarly, V2V_2 and so on reappear in the decomposition on the right, so the decomposition is unique.

The sets V1,,VkV_1,\ldots,V_k in this theorem are called the irreducible components of VV.

Modules

Definition: module

Let RR be a commutative ring and

M=(M,+,0) M=(M,+,0)

an additively written commutative group. We call MM an RR-module if an operation

R×MM,(r,v)rv=rv, R\times M\longrightarrow M,\qquad(r,v)\longmapsto rv=r\cdot v,

called scalar multiplication, is specified and satisfies the following axioms (for arbitrary r,sRr,s\in R and u,vMu,v\in M):

r(su)=(rs)u,r(u+v)=(ru)+(rv),(r+s)u=(ru)+(su),1u=u. \begin{aligned} r(su)&=(rs)u,\\ r(u+v)&=(ru)+(rv),\\ (r+s)u&=(ru)+(su),\\ 1u&=u. \end{aligned}

Definition: submodule

Let RR be a commutative ring and MM an RR-module. A subset

UM U\subseteq M

is called an RR-submodule if it is a subgroup of (M,0,+)(M,0,+) and ruUru\in U for every uUu\in U and rRr\in R.

Definition: a generating set for a module

Let RR be a commutative ring and MM an RR-module. A family

viM(iI) v_i\in M\qquad(i\in I)

is called a generating set for MM if every vMv\in M has an expression

v=iJrivi, v=\sum_{i\in J}r_iv_i,

where JIJ\subseteq I is finite and riRr_i\in R.

Definition: finitely generated module

Let RR be a commutative ring and MM an RR-module. The module MM is called finitely generated (or finite) if it has a finite generating set viv_i (iIi\in I), that is, one with a finite index set.

A commutative ring RR itself is naturally an RR-module if ring multiplication is interpreted as scalar multiplication. Its ideals are exactly the RR-submodules of RR. For ideals, the notions of an ideal generating set and a module generating set coincide. A vector space is simply a module over a field.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0 for translated course text; media retain component rights in authority/RIGHTS-unit-09.csv · Rights record: RIGHTS-unit-09.csv

Worksheet 9

Practice exercises

Exercise 9.1

Explain why the ring

[X,Y,Z,W]/(XYZW,5X8YZ3+2WXY) \mathbb Z[X,Y,Z,W]/\left(XY-ZW,\,5X^8-YZ^3+2WXY\right)

is Noetherian.

Exercise 9.2

Let RR be a commutative ring and

𝔞1𝔞2𝔞3 \mathfrak a_1\subseteq\mathfrak a_2\subseteq\mathfrak a_3\subseteq\cdots

an ascending chain of ideals. Show that the union

n𝔞n \bigcup_{n\in\mathbb N}\mathfrak a_n

is also an ideal. Give a simple example showing that a union of ideals need not be an ideal in general.

Exercise 9.3

Show that the product R×SR\times S of Noetherian rings RR and SS is again Noetherian.

Exercise 9.4

Let KK be a field. Show that in K[X,Y]K[X,Y] there is no upper bound on the number of generators in a minimal generating set of an ideal.

Hint: Consider the powers (X,Y)m(X,Y)^m.

Exercise 9.5

Let KK be a field and

K[Xn,n] K[X_n,\,n\in\mathbb N]

the polynomial ring over KK in infinitely many variables. Describe an ideal that is not finitely generated and an infinite strictly ascending chain of ideals in it.

Exercise 9.6 ★

Show that a subring

RS R\subseteq S

of a Noetherian ring need not be Noetherian.

Exercise 9.7

Give an example of a non-Noetherian ring whose reduction is a field.

Exercise 9.8

Let RR be a commutative ring and 𝔞R\mathfrak a\subset R a proper ideal with quotient ring R/𝔞R/\mathfrak a. Give an example showing that 𝔞\mathfrak a can be finitely generated and R/𝔞R/\mathfrak a Noetherian even though RR itself is not Noetherian.

Exercise 9.9

Let RR be a commutative ring and 𝔟R[X]\mathfrak b\subseteq R[X] an ideal containing at least one monic polynomial. What does this imply for the chain of ideals in RR constructed in the proof of Hilbert’s basis theorem?

Exercise 9.10

Let RR be a commutative ring. Characterise the ideals

𝔟R[X] \mathfrak b\subseteq R[X]

for which the chain of ideals in RR constructed in the proof of Hilbert’s basis theorem is constant.

Exercise 9.11

Let KK be a field and R=K[X]R=K[X] the polynomial ring over KK. For the ideals

𝔟m=(X,Y)mR[Y]=K[X,Y], \mathfrak b_m=(X,Y)^m\subseteq R[Y]=K[X,Y],

determine the chain of ideals in RR constructed in the proof of Hilbert’s basis theorem. When does it become stationary?

Exercise 9.12

For the ideal

I=(6,6x2+2x+3,3x3+5,2x5+x4,4x73x) I=\left(6,\,6x^2+2x+3,\,3x^3+5,\,2x^5+x-4,\,4x^7-3x\right)

in [x]\mathbb Z[x], determine the chain of ideals constructed in the proof of Hilbert’s basis theorem and the corresponding generating set for II. Write the generators above as linear combinations of the constructed generating set.

Exercise 9.13 ★

Let RR be a commutative ring and AA a commutative RR-algebra. Suppose AA is generated over RR by the family aiAa_i\in A (iIi\in I). Prove that if AA is finitely generated, then it is also generated by a finite subfamily of the aia_i.

Exercise 9.14

Consider ascending and descending chains of affine algebraic sets in 𝔸Kn\mathbb A_K^n and of ideals in K[X1,,Xn]K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]. Show the following.

  1. For a finite field, every ascending chain

    V0V1V2 V_0\subseteq V_1\subseteq V_2\subseteq\cdots

    of affine algebraic sets becomes stationary.

  2. For an infinite field and n1n\geq1, not every ascending chain of affine algebraic sets

    V0V1V2 V_0\subseteq V_1\subseteq V_2\subseteq\cdots

    becomes stationary.

  3. For any field and n1n\geq1, not every descending chain of ideals

    𝔞0𝔞1𝔞2 \mathfrak a_0\supseteq\mathfrak a_1\supseteq\mathfrak a_2\supseteq\cdots

    becomes stationary.

  4. For an infinite field and n1n\geq1, there are strictly descending chains of affine algebraic sets of arbitrary length.

Exercise 9.15

Show that the set \mathbb R of real numbers with its metric topology is not a Noetherian topological space.

Exercise 9.16

Let GG be a commutative group. Show that there is exactly one way to give GG the structure of a \mathbb Z-module. Thus commutative groups and \mathbb Z-modules are equivalent objects.

Exercise 9.17

Let RR and AA be commutative rings. Show that AA is an RR-algebra if and only if AA is an RR-module additionally satisfying

r(ab)=(ra)bfor all rR,a,bA. r(ab)=(ra)b\qquad\text{for all }r\in R,\ a,b\in A.

Exercise 9.18 ★

Let VV be a module over the commutative ring RR. Let

s1,,skRandv1,,vnV. s_1,\ldots,s_k\in R\qquad\text{and}\qquad v_1,\ldots,v_n\in V.

Prove that

(i=1ksi)(j=1nvj)=1ik,1jnsivj. \left(\sum_{i=1}^k s_i\right)\!\cdot \left(\sum_{j=1}^n v_j\right) =\sum_{1\leq i\leq k,\,1\leq j\leq n}s_i\cdot v_j.

Exercise 9.19

Let RR be a commutative ring, MM and NN two RR-modules, and φ:MN\varphi:M\to N a module homomorphism. Prove the following statements.

  1. If SMS\subseteq M is an RR-submodule, then its image φ(S)\varphi(S) is a submodule of NN.

  2. In particular, the image of the map

    bildφ=φ(M) \operatorname{bild}\varphi=\varphi(M)

    is a submodule of NN.

  3. If TNT\subseteq N is a submodule, then the preimage

    φ1(T) \varphi^{-1}(T)

    is a submodule of MM.

  4. In particular, the kernel

    φ1(0) \varphi^{-1}(0)

    is a submodule of MM.

Exercises for submission

Exercise 9.20 (3 points)

Let RR be a commutative ring and 𝔞\mathfrak a an ideal with quotient ring

S=R/𝔞. S=R/\mathfrak a.

Show that the ideals of SS correspond uniquely to the ideals of RR containing 𝔞\mathfrak a. Show that the same holds for prime ideals, radical ideals, and maximal ideals.

Exercise 9.21 (4 points)

Let RR be a Noetherian integral domain. Show that every nonzero nonunit of RR can be written as a product of irreducible elements.

Edition note. The source says “every element”. Zero and units must be excluded from that formulation; equivalently, every nonzero element is a unit times a finite product of irreducibles, with the empty product allowed.

Exercise 9.22 (4 points)

Show that \mathbb Q is not an algebra of finite type over \mathbb Z.

Exercise 9.23 (4 points)

Let KK be a field and A=K[X,Y]A=K[X,Y]. Find a KK-subalgebra of AA that is not finitely generated.

Exercise 9.24 (4 points)

For the ideal

I=(10,6x2+8,4x312) I=\left(10,\,6x^2+8,\,4x^3-12\right)

in [x]\mathbb Z[x], determine the chain of ideals constructed in the proof of Hilbert’s basis theorem and the corresponding generating set for II. Write the original generators as linear combinations of the constructed generating set.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Public Solutions to Worksheet 9

At the frozen revision boundary, the source provides public solutions only for Exercises 9.6, 9.13, and 9.18. No additional solutions have been created for this edition.

Solution to Exercise 9.6

Consider

S=K[X,Y] S=K[X,Y]

as the polynomial ring in two variables over a field KK. By Corollary 9.6, this ring is Noetherian. Within it, consider the subring

R={Xg(X,Y)+cgK[X,Y],cK} R=\{Xg(X,Y)+c\mid g\in K[X,Y],\ c\in K\}

and the chain of ideals in that subring

𝔞n=(X,XY,,XYn). \mathfrak a_n=(X,XY,\ldots,XY^n).

For every nn\in\mathbb N, we have

XYn+1𝔞n+1\𝔞n, XY^{n+1}\in\mathfrak a_{n+1}\setminus\mathfrak a_n,

so the chain does not become stationary. By Proposition 9.2, RR is therefore not Noetherian.

Back to Exercise 9.6.

Solution to Exercise 9.13

We have

A=R[f1,,fn]R[ai,iI]. A=R[f_1,\ldots,f_n]\subseteq R[a_i,\ i\in I].

Each fjf_j can be written as a polynomial expression in the elements of the family aia_i, with coefficients in RR. For each jj, only finitely many aia_i occur. Hence all the generators fjf_j belong to

R[ai,iI] R[a_i,\ i\in I']

for some finite subfamily III'\subseteq I. Thus

A=R[f1,,fn]R[ai,iI]A, A=R[f_1,\ldots,f_n]\subseteq R[a_i,\ i\in I'] \subseteq A,

and therefore A=R[ai,iI]A=R[a_i,\ i\in I'].

Back to Exercise 9.13.

Solution to Exercise 9.18

We prove the statement by double induction on k,n1k,n\geq1. The cases

(k,n)=(1,1),(1,2),(2,1) (k,n)=(1,1),\qquad(1,2),\qquad(2,1)

are immediately clear or follow directly from the module axioms.

For k=1k=1 and arbitrary nn, we prove the statement by induction on nn, with the base case supplied by the preceding observation. Suppose the statement has been proved for some nn, and let n+1n+1 vectors v1,,vn,vn+1Vv_1,\ldots,v_n,v_{n+1}\in V be given. Using the case (1,2)(1,2) and the induction hypothesis, we obtain

s(j=1n+1vj)=s(j=1nvj+vn+1)=s(j=1nvj)+svn+1=1jnsvj+svn+1=1jn+1svj. \begin{aligned} s\cdot\left(\sum_{j=1}^{n+1}v_j\right) &=s\cdot\left(\sum_{j=1}^{n}v_j+v_{n+1}\right)\\ &=s\cdot\left(\sum_{j=1}^{n}v_j\right)+sv_{n+1}\\ &=\sum_{1\leq j\leq n}s\cdot v_j+sv_{n+1}\\ &=\sum_{1\leq j\leq n+1}s\cdot v_j. \end{aligned}

Now consider the statement for fixed kk and arbitrary nn. For k=1k=1, it has already been proved. Suppose it has been proved for some fixed kk. Let scalars

s1,,sk,sk+1R s_1,\ldots,s_k,s_{k+1}\in R

and vectors

v1,,vnV v_1,\ldots,v_n\in V

be given. Using the cases (2,1)(2,1) and (1,n)(1,n) and the induction hypothesis, we obtain

(i=1k+1si)(j=1nvj)=(i=1ksi+sk+1)(j=1nvj)=(i=1ksi)(j=1nvj)+sk+1(j=1nvj)=1ik,1jnsivj+j=1nsk+1vj=1ik+1,1jnsivj. \begin{aligned} \left(\sum_{i=1}^{k+1}s_i\right)\!\cdot \left(\sum_{j=1}^{n}v_j\right) &=\left(\sum_{i=1}^{k}s_i+s_{k+1}\right)\!\cdot \left(\sum_{j=1}^{n}v_j\right)\\ &=\left(\sum_{i=1}^{k}s_i\right)\!\cdot \left(\sum_{j=1}^{n}v_j\right) +s_{k+1}\cdot\left(\sum_{j=1}^{n}v_j\right)\\ &=\sum_{1\leq i\leq k,\,1\leq j\leq n}s_i\cdot v_j +\sum_{j=1}^{n}s_{k+1}\cdot v_j\\ &=\sum_{1\leq i\leq k+1,\,1\leq j\leq n}s_i\cdot v_j. \end{aligned}

Back to Exercise 9.18.

English Markdown source · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Lecture 10: Noetherian modules and Hilbert’s Nullstellensatz

Noetherian modules

We want to show that, for a Noetherian ring RR and a finitely generated RR-module, every RR-submodule is again finitely generated. Modules with this property are called Noetherian.

Definition: Noetherian module

Let RR be a commutative ring and MM an RR-module. The module MM is called Noetherian if every RR-submodule of MM is finitely generated.

For M=RM=R, this agrees with the definition of a Noetherian ring, since the RR-submodules of RR are precisely its ideals.

In the following statements we use the following terminology and notation.

Definition: short exact sequence

Let RR be a commutative ring and let M1,M2,M3M_1,M_2,M_3 be RR-modules. A diagram of the form

0M1M2M30 0\longrightarrow M_1\longrightarrow M_2\longrightarrow M_3\longrightarrow0

is called a short exact sequence of RR-modules if M1M_1 is an RR-submodule of M2M_2 and M3M_3 is a quotient module of M2M_2 isomorphic to M2/M1M_2/M_1.

Exactness means that at every position we have

kernφi+1=bildφi, \operatorname{kern}\varphi_{i+1}=\operatorname{bild}\varphi_i,

where the φi\varphi_i denote the RR-module homomorphisms in the sequence.

Lemma: the Noetherian property in a short exact sequence

Let RR be a commutative ring and let

0M1MM30 0\longrightarrow M_1\longrightarrow M\longrightarrow M_3\longrightarrow0

be a short exact sequence of RR-modules. Then MM is Noetherian if and only if both M1M_1 and M3M_3 are Noetherian.

Proof

First suppose that MM is Noetherian, and let UM1U\subseteq M_1 be a submodule. Then UU is also a submodule of MM, so it is finitely generated by assumption. Now let VM3V\subseteq M_3 be a submodule of the quotient module. Let Ṽ\widetilde V be the inverse image of VV in MM under the quotient map. By assumption, Ṽ\widetilde V is finitely generated, and the images of a generating set also generate the image module VV.

Conversely, suppose that the two outer modules M1M_1 and M3M_3 are Noetherian, and let UMU\subseteq M be a submodule. Let U3M3U_3\subseteq M_3 be its image submodule. The module U3U_3 is generated by finitely many elements s1,,sns_1,\ldots,s_n, and we may assume that

si=r¯i s_i=\overline r_i

are the images of elements riUr_i\in U. Consider UM1U\cap M_1. This is a submodule of M1M_1, and hence finitely generated, say by t1,,tkt_1,\ldots,t_k, which we regard as elements of UU. We claim that

r1,,rn,t1,,tk r_1,\ldots,r_n,t_1,\ldots,t_k

form a generating set for UU. To see this, take an arbitrary mUm\in U. Then

m¯=i=1naisi. \overline m=\sum_{i=1}^n a_i s_i.

Thus the element mi=1nairim-\sum_{i=1}^n a_i r_i maps to 00 on the right. It belongs to the kernel of the quotient map, and hence to M1M_1. On the other hand, this element also belongs to UU, and therefore to the intersection M1UM_1\cap U, which is generated by t1,,tkt_1,\ldots,t_k. We can therefore write

mi=1nairi=j=1kbjtj, m-\sum_{i=1}^n a_i r_i=\sum_{j=1}^k b_jt_j,

or, equivalently,

m=i=1nairi+j=1kbjtj. m=\sum_{i=1}^n a_i r_i+\sum_{j=1}^k b_jt_j.

Theorem: finite modules over a Noetherian ring

Let RR be a Noetherian commutative ring and MM a finitely generated RR-module. Then MM is a Noetherian module.

Proof

We prove the statement by induction on the number nn of module generators of MM. For n=0n=0, we have the zero module. Let n=1n=1. Then there is a surjective map

RMR/𝔞. R\longrightarrow M\cong R/\mathfrak a.

By Lemma 10.3, a quotient module of a Noetherian module is again Noetherian. Since the ring RR itself is Noetherian by assumption, MM is also Noetherian.

Now let n2n\geq2 and suppose the statement has been proved for smaller values. Let m1,,mnm_1,\ldots,m_n be a generating set for MM. Denote by M1M_1 the RR-submodule generated by m1,,mn1m_1,\ldots,m_{n-1}. This submodule gives rise to a short exact sequence

0M1MM/M1=:M30. 0\longrightarrow M_1\longrightarrow M \longrightarrow M/M_1=:M_3\longrightarrow0.

The module on the left is generated by n1n-1 elements and is Noetherian by the induction hypothesis. The module on the right is generated by the residue class of mnm_n, hence by one element, and is therefore also Noetherian. By Lemma 10.3, MM is Noetherian as well.

Hilbert’s Nullstellensatz — algebraic version

For an RR-algebra AA, both terms finite and finitely generated will be important. The former means that AA, regarded as an RR-module, is finitely generated; the latter means that AA is finitely generated as an algebra. The polynomial ring R[X1,,Xn]R[X_1,\ldots,X_n] is finitely generated in the second sense: the variables form a finite set of algebra generators. However, the polynomial ring is not finitely generated as a module; the simplest set of module generators consists of all monomials.

We want to prove the algebraic version of Hilbert’s Nullstellensatz. For this we need the following two lemmas.

Lemma: subalgebras beneath a finite extension

Let RR be a Noetherian commutative ring and AA a finitely generated RR-algebra. Let BAB\subseteq A be an RR-subalgebra over which AA is finite (as a BB-module). Then BB is also a finitely generated RR-algebra.

Proof

We write

A=R[x1,,xn] A=R[x_1,\ldots,x_n]

and

A=Ba1++Bam, A=Ba_1+\cdots+Ba_m,

with aiAa_i\in A. Edition supplement: adjoin 11 to this finite module-generating family if necessary and take a1=1a_1=1. This ensures that the module Ã\widetilde A constructed below contains 11; the source’s claim that it is an SS-algebra requires this step. Set

xi=j=1mbijajandaiaj=k=1mbijkak, x_i=\sum_{j=1}^m b_{ij}a_j \qquad\text{and}\qquad a_i a_j=\sum_{k=1}^m b_{ijk}a_k,

with coefficients bij,bijkBb_{ij},b_{ijk}\in B. Consider the RR-subalgebra SS of BB generated by these coefficients and the SS-submodule

Ã=Sa1++SamA. \widetilde A=Sa_1+\cdots+Sa_m\subseteq A.

The products aiaja_i a_j again belong to this module, so Ã\widetilde A is even an SS-algebra. Since all the xix_i also belong to Ã\widetilde A, we obtain A=ÃA=\widetilde A. This means that AA is a finite SS-module. By Corollary 9.9, SS is a Noetherian ring; by Theorem 10.4, the SS-submodule

BA B\subseteq A

is also a finite SS-module. Finally, the chain

RSB R\subseteq S\subseteq B

shows that BB is a finitely generated RR-algebra.

Lemma: the rational function field is not finitely generated

Let KK be a field and R=K(X)R=K(X) the associated rational function field. Then RR is not a finitely generated KK-algebra.

Proof

Suppose that the rational functions

Fi=PiQi,i=1,,n, F_i=\frac{P_i}{Q_i},\qquad i=1,\ldots,n,

with Pi,QiK[X]P_i,Q_i\in K[X] and Qi0Q_i\ne0, form a finite generating set for K(X)K(X). By passing to a common denominator, we may assume that all the denominators agree, namely Qi=QQ_i=Q. In particular, the assumption says that the rational function field could be obtained by localising at just one element. Since QQ is not constant (otherwise K[X]=K(X)K[X]=K(X), which is false), we have Q10Q-1\ne0, and hence

1Q1K(X). \frac1{Q-1}\in K(X).

There is therefore a representation

1Q1=PQs \frac1{Q-1}=\frac{P}{Q^s}

for a suitable ss. Consequently,

Qs=(Q1)P. Q^s=(Q-1)P.

Since QsQ^s and Q1Q-1 generate the unit ideal in K[X]K[X], this equality implies that Q1Q-1 alone already generates the unit ideal, so Q1Q-1 is a unit. But this would mean that QQ is constant, a contradiction.

The following statement is the algebraic version of Hilbert’s Nullstellensatz.

Theorem: Hilbert’s Nullstellensatz, algebraic version

Let KK be a field and KLK\subseteq L a field extension that is finitely generated as a KK-algebra. Then LL is finite over KK.

Proof

Set

L=K[x1,,xn]. L=K[x_1,\ldots,x_n].

Let KiK_i be the field of fractions of K[x1,,xi]K[x_1,\ldots,x_i] inside LL. Thus we have a chain of fields

K=K0K1Kn=L. K=K_0\subseteq K_1\subseteq\cdots\subseteq K_n=L.

We want to show that LL is finite over KK. By Theorem 2.8 of the course Field and Galois Theory (Osnabrück 2018–2019), it suffices to show that each step in this chain of fields is finite. Suppose that KiKi+1K_i\subseteq K_{i+1} is not finite, but all subsequent steps are finite. Apply Lemma 10.5 to

KKi+1L. K\subseteq K_{i+1}\subset L.

We obtain that Ki+1K_{i+1} is finitely generated over KK. In particular, Ki+1K_{i+1} is also finitely generated over KiK_i. On the other hand, Ki+1K_{i+1} is the field of fractions of Ki[xi+1]K_i[x_{i+1}]. Thus we have a chain

KiKi[xi+1]Q(Ki[xi+1])=Ki+1, K_i\subseteq K_i[x_{i+1}] \subseteq Q\bigl(K_i[x_{i+1}]\bigr)=K_{i+1},

where Ki+1K_{i+1} is finitely generated over KiK_i, but not finite. If xi+1x_{i+1} were algebraic over KiK_i, it would also be finite, and by Exercise 10.1, Ki[xi+1]K_i[x_{i+1}] would already be a field. The whole of the last chain would then be finite, contrary to the choice of ii. Thus xi+1x_{i+1} is transcendental over KiK_i. But then Ki[xi+1]K_i[x_{i+1}] is isomorphic to a polynomial ring in one variable, and Q(Ki[xi+1])Q(K_i[x_{i+1}]) is isomorphic to the rational function field over KiK_i. By Lemma 10.6, this field is not finitely generated, again a contradiction.

Theorem: inverse images of maximal ideals

Let KK be a field and A,BA,B two KK-algebras of finite type. Let

φ:AB \varphi:A\longrightarrow B

be a KK-algebra homomorphism. Then, for every maximal ideal 𝔪\mathfrak m of BB, its inverse image φ1(𝔪)\varphi^{-1}(\mathfrak m) is also a maximal ideal.

Proof

Let 𝔪\mathfrak m be a maximal ideal of BB. From Exercise 4.19 we know that the inverse image of a prime ideal under any ring homomorphism is again prime. Thus φ1(𝔪)\varphi^{-1}(\mathfrak m) is initially a prime ideal; call it 𝔭\mathfrak p. We obtain induced ring homomorphisms

KA/𝔭B/𝔪=L, K\longrightarrow A/\mathfrak p\longrightarrow B/\mathfrak m=L,

where LL is a field and both homomorphisms are injective and of finite type. Since the composite map is of finite type and K,LK,L are both fields, Theorem 10.7 says that this map is finite. We want to show that the intermediate ring A/𝔭A/\mathfrak p is a field. This follows from Exercise 10.2.

Theorem: radicals as intersections of maximal ideals

Let KK be a field and AA a KK-algebra of finite type. Then every radical ideal in AA is an intersection of maximal ideals.

Proof

By Exercise 10.17, every radical ideal is an intersection of prime ideals. It therefore suffices to show that every prime ideal in a finitely generated algebra is an intersection of maximal ideals. Let 𝔭\mathfrak p be a prime ideal and f𝔭f\notin\mathfrak p. The ideal 𝔭\mathfrak p remains a prime ideal in the localisation

B:=Af. B:=A_f.

In AfA_f there is a maximal ideal 𝔪Af\mathfrak m\subset A_f containing 𝔭Af\mathfrak pA_f. Regard AfA_f as a finitely generated KK-algebra and consider

φ:AAf. \varphi:A\longrightarrow A_f.

We have

𝔭φ1(𝔪)andfφ1(𝔪). \mathfrak p\subseteq\varphi^{-1}(\mathfrak m) \qquad\text{and}\qquad f\notin\varphi^{-1}(\mathfrak m).

By Theorem 10.8, φ1(𝔪)\varphi^{-1}(\mathfrak m) is maximal.

Theorem: maximal ideals are point ideals

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and AA a finitely generated KK-algebra. Then every quotient of AA by a maximal ideal is isomorphic to KK. In other words, every maximal ideal of AA is a point ideal.

Proof

Let 𝔪\mathfrak m be a maximal ideal of the finitely generated KK-algebra AA, and consider

KAA/𝔪=:L. K\longrightarrow A\longrightarrow A/\mathfrak m=:L.

Here LL is both a field and a finitely generated KK-algebra. By Theorem 10.7, LL must be a finite KK-algebra. Since KK is algebraically closed, we must have K=LK=L.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Worksheet 10

Practice exercises

Exercise 10.1 ★

Let KK be a field and AA a commutative KK-algebra that is finite as a KK-module. Show that an element fAf\in A is a unit if and only if it is a non-zero-divisor.

Exercise 10.2

Let KK and LL be fields, let KLK\subseteq L be a finite field extension, and let AA be an intermediate ring,

KAL. K\subseteq A\subseteq L.

Show that AA is also a field.

Exercise 10.3

Let RSR\subseteq S be a finite ring extension and fRf\in R. Show that if ff, regarded as an element of SS, is a unit, then ff is a unit in RR.

Exercise 10.4

Let RR be a commutative ring and MM an RR-module. Show that MM is Noetherian if and only if every ascending chain of RR-submodules

M0M1M2 M_0\subseteq M_1\subseteq M_2\subseteq\cdots

becomes stationary.

Exercise 10.5

Let fRf\in R be a non-zero-divisor in a commutative ring RR. Show that this gives a short exact sequence of RR-modules

0RfRR/(f)0. 0\longrightarrow R\xrightarrow{\cdot f}R \longrightarrow R/(f)\longrightarrow0.

Exercise 10.6 ★

Let RR be a commutative ring and I,JRI,J\subseteq R ideals. Show that the sequence

0R/(IJ)R/I×R/JR/(I+J)0 0\longrightarrow R/(I\cap J)\longrightarrow R/I\times R/J \longrightarrow R/(I+J)\longrightarrow0

with maps r(r,r)r\mapsto(r,r) and (s,t)st(s,t)\mapsto s-t is exact.

Exercise 10.7

Let RR be a commutative ring and NN an RR-module with RR-submodules

LMN. L\subseteq M\subseteq N.

Show that the quotient modules are related by the short exact sequence

0M/LN/LN/M0. 0\longrightarrow M/L\longrightarrow N/L \longrightarrow N/M\longrightarrow0.

Exercise 10.8

Let RR be a commutative ring and

φ:MN \varphi:M\longrightarrow N

an RR-module homomorphism between RR-modules MM and NN. Show that this gives a short exact sequence

0kernφMbildφ0. 0\longrightarrow\operatorname{kern}\varphi\longrightarrow M \longrightarrow\operatorname{bild}\varphi\longrightarrow0.

Let RR be a commutative ring and MM an RR-module. The RR-module

M*=HomR(M,R) M^*=\operatorname{Hom}_R(M,R)

is called the dual module of MM.

Exercise 10.9 ★

Let RR be a commutative ring and let

0LMN0 0\longrightarrow L\longrightarrow M\longrightarrow N\longrightarrow0

be a short exact sequence of RR-modules L,M,NL,M,N. Show that this gives an exact sequence of dual modules

0N*M*L*. 0\longrightarrow N^*\longrightarrow M^*\longrightarrow L^*.

Exercise 10.10

Let KK be a field and let

0LMN0 0\longrightarrow L\longrightarrow M\longrightarrow N\longrightarrow0

be a short exact sequence of KK-vector spaces L,M,NL,M,N. Show that this gives a short exact sequence of dual spaces

0N*M*L*0. 0\longrightarrow N^*\longrightarrow M^*\longrightarrow L^* \longrightarrow0.

Exercise 10.11

Let a0a\ne0 be an integer. We consider the short exact sequence of \mathbb Z-modules

0a/(a)0. 0\longrightarrow\mathbb Z\xrightarrow{\cdot a}\mathbb Z \longrightarrow\mathbb Z/(a)\longrightarrow0.

Show that, for a2a\geq2, the sequence that is exact by Exercise 10.9,

0(/(a))***, 0\longrightarrow(\mathbb Z/(a))^*\longrightarrow\mathbb Z^* \longrightarrow\mathbb Z^*,

cannot be extended exactly to the right by 0\longrightarrow0.

Exercise 10.12

Let RR be a commutative ring and let

0LMN0 0\longrightarrow L\longrightarrow M\longrightarrow N\longrightarrow0

be a short exact sequence of RR-modules. Suppose that LL has a set of RR-module generators with kk elements and NN has a set of RR-module generators with nn elements. Show that MM has a set of RR-module generators with k+nk+n elements.

Exercise 10.13

Let RR be a commutative ring, AA a commutative finite RR-algebra, and MM a finite AA-module. Show that MM is also a finite RR-module.

The following exercises use the notion of an Artinian module, which is “dual” to the notion of a Noetherian module.

Let RR be a commutative ring. An RR-module MM is called Artinian if every descending chain of RR-submodules

M1M2M3 M_1\supseteq M_2\supseteq M_3\supseteq\cdots

becomes stationary. A commutative ring RR is called Artinian if it is Artinian as an RR-module.

Exercise 10.14

Let AA be an Artinian integral domain. Show that AA is a field. Give an example of an Artinian commutative ring that is not a field.

Exercise 10.15

Let RR be a commutative ring and MM an RR-module. Show that if MM is Artinian and

ϕ:MM \phi:M\longrightarrow M

is RR-linear and injective, then ϕ\phi is an isomorphism. Also formulate and prove an analogous statement for the case where MM is Noetherian.

Exercise 10.16 ★

Let RR be a commutative ring and let fRf\in R be non-nilpotent. Show that there is a prime ideal 𝔭\mathfrak p with f𝔭f\notin\mathfrak p.

Exercise 10.17 ★

Let 𝔞\mathfrak a be a radical ideal in a commutative ring. Show that 𝔞\mathfrak a is an intersection of prime ideals.

One approach follows from the preceding exercise; another follows from Exercise 13.5 below.

Exercise 10.18

Let KK be a field and PK[X]P\in K[X] a nonconstant polynomial. Show that PP is not algebraic over KK.

Exercise 10.19

Let KK be a field and L=K(X)L=K(X) the field of fractions of the polynomial ring K[X]K[X]. Let MM be an intermediate field with

KML,MK. K\subseteq M\subseteq L, \qquad M\ne K.

Show that MLM\subseteq L is a finite field extension.

Exercise 10.20 ★

Let AA be a finitely generated \mathbb Z-algebra and 𝔪A\mathfrak m\subseteq A a maximal ideal. Show that the quotient ring A/𝔪A/\mathfrak m is a finite field.

Let KK be a field and AA a commutative KK-algebra. Elements f1,,fnAf_1,\ldots,f_n\in A are called algebraically dependent if there is a nonzero polynomial PK[X1,,Xn]P\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] such that

P(f1,,fn)=0. P(f_1,\ldots,f_n)=0.

Exercise 10.21

Let K[X1,,Xn]K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] be the polynomial ring over a field KK. Show that the variables X1,,XnX_1,\ldots,X_n are algebraically independent.

Exercise 10.22

Let K[X1,,Xn]K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] be the polynomial ring over a field KK, and let n+1n+1 polynomials

f1,,fn+1K[X1,,Xn] f_1,\ldots,f_{n+1}\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]

be given. Show that these polynomials are algebraically dependent.

Exercise 10.23

Let

φ:𝔸Km𝔸Kn \varphi:\mathbb A_K^m\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^n

be a polynomial map between affine spaces with m<nm<n. Show that φ\varphi is not surjective.

Exercise 10.24

Let AA be a commutative KK-algebra over a field KK, and let nn elements f1,,fnAf_1,\ldots,f_n\in A be given. Show that these elements are algebraically independent if and only if the KK-algebra they generate, K[f1,,fn]K[f_1,\ldots,f_n], is isomorphic to the polynomial ring K[X1,,Xn]K[X_1,\ldots,X_n].

Exercises for submission

Exercise 10.25 - 3 points

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and FK[X,Y]F\in K[X,Y] a nonconstant polynomial. Show that the quotient ring

K[X,Y]/(F) K[X,Y]/(F)

can be regarded as a finite K[T]K[T]-algebra.

Exercise 10.26 - 3 points

Let R,S,TR,S,T be commutative rings, and let φ:RS\varphi:R\to S and ψ:ST\psi:S\to T be ring homomorphisms such that SS is finite over RR and TT is finite over SS. Show that TT is also finite over RR.

Exercise 10.27 - 5 points

Let AA be a commutative ring and let

0MNP0 0\longrightarrow M\longrightarrow N\longrightarrow P\longrightarrow0

be a short exact sequence of AA-modules. Show that NN is Artinian if and only if both MM and PP are Artinian.

Exercise 10.28 - 4 points (1+3)

Let RR be a commutative ring, and let MiM_i, ii\in\mathbb N, be RR-modules with fixed RR-module homomorphisms

φi:MiMi+1. \varphi_i:M_i\longrightarrow M_{i+1}.

The sequence

MiMi+1Mi+2Mi+3 \cdots\longrightarrow M_i\longrightarrow M_{i+1} \longrightarrow M_{i+2}\longrightarrow M_{i+3}\longrightarrow\cdots

is called exact if, for every ii,

Kern(φi)=Bild(φi1). \operatorname{Kern}(\varphi_i)=\operatorname{Bild}(\varphi_{i-1}).

  1. Show that, in the case of a short exact sequence, this definition agrees with Definition 10.2 in the lecture.

  2. Now suppose that the sequence is exact, R=KR=K is a field, all the MiM_i are finitely generated, M0=0M_0=0, and Mi=0M_i=0 for all ini\geq n for some nn. Show that

    i=0n(1)idimKMi=0. \sum_{i=0}^{n}(-1)^i\operatorname{dim}_K M_i=0.

Edition note. Part 2 requires the sequence to be exact. The source defines this property immediately beforehand but does not repeat it as a hypothesis; it is made explicit here.

Exercise 10.29 - 3 points

Let KK be a field and AA a finite KK-algebra. Show that AA is Artinian.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Public Solutions to Worksheet 10

At the frozen revision boundary, the source provides public solutions only to Exercises 10.1, 10.6, 10.9, 10.16, 10.17, and 10.20. No additional solutions have been created for this edition.

Solution to Exercise 10.1

If ff is a unit, there is a gAg\in A with gf=1gf=1. From fh=0fh=0 we immediately obtain

h=gfh=g0=0. h=gfh=g0=0.

Thus ff is a non-zero-divisor.

Conversely, if ff is a non-zero-divisor, consider the KK-linear multiplication map

μf:AA,hfh. \mu_f:A\longrightarrow A, \qquad h\longmapsto fh.

This map is injective. Since AA is finite as a module over the field KK, it is a finite-dimensional KK-vector space. An injective endomorphism of a finite-dimensional vector space is also surjective. In particular, there is a gAg\in A with fg=1fg=1. This means that ff is a unit.

Back to Exercise 10.1.

Solution to Exercise 10.6

Choose a representative rRr\in R of a class in R/(IJ)R/(I\cap J) that maps to (r,r)=0(r,r)=0 in R/I×R/JR/I\times R/J. Both components are 00, so rIr\in I and rJr\in J. Thus rIJr\in I\cap J, and hence the class of rr on the left is 00. The map on the left is therefore injective.

The composite map is given by

r(r,r)rr, r\longmapsto(r,r)\longmapsto r-r,

so it is the zero map. Conversely, if (s,t)(s,t) maps to 00 on the right, then stI+Js-t\in I+J. Say

st=a+b,aI,bJ. s-t=a+b, \qquad a\in I,\quad b\in J.

Then

sa=t+b s-a=t+b

in RR. This element also represents (s,t)(s,t), so (s,t)(s,t) comes from the left. Surjectivity of the last map follows immediately by choosing t=0t=0.

Back to Exercise 10.6.

Solution to Exercise 10.9

Surjectivity of the map MNM\to N immediately implies that the map

N*M* N^*\longrightarrow M^*

is injective: an RR-linear map NRN\to R whose composite with MNM\to N is the zero map must itself be the zero map.

Since the composite LMNL\to M\to N is the zero map, the same holds for the corresponding dual map.

It remains to show that a linear form fM*f\in M^* that maps to 00 in L*L^* comes from a dual form in N*N^*. This condition says that the restriction of ff to the submodule LML\subseteq M is the zero map. In other words, LL is contained in the kernel of ff. By the homomorphism theorem, there is an induced homomorphism

f̃:M/LR \widetilde f:M/L\longrightarrow R

whose composite with MM/LM\to M/L equals ff. Since M/LNM/L\cong N, this is the desired statement.

Back to Exercise 10.9.

Solution to Exercise 10.16

Consider the set of ideals

={𝔞 an idealfr𝔞 for every r}. \mathcal M= \left\{\mathfrak a\text{ an ideal}\mid f^r\notin\mathfrak a\text{ for every }r\right\}.

This set is nonempty because it contains the zero ideal. Moreover, \mathcal M is inductively ordered by inclusion. Indeed, if the 𝔞i\mathfrak a_i, iIi\in I, form a totally ordered subset of \mathcal M, then their union is also an ideal containing no power of ff. By Zorn’s lemma, \mathcal M therefore has a maximal element.

We claim that every such maximal element, say 𝔭\mathfrak p, is a prime ideal. Take g,hRg,h\in R with gh𝔭gh\in\mathfrak p, and suppose that g,h𝔭g,h\notin\mathfrak p. Then there are strict inclusions

𝔭𝔭+(g),𝔭𝔭+(h). \mathfrak p\subsetneq\mathfrak p+(g), \qquad \mathfrak p\subsetneq\mathfrak p+(h).

Since 𝔭\mathfrak p is maximal in \mathcal M, neither ideal on the right belongs to \mathcal M. Thus there are r,sr,s\in\mathbb N such that

fr𝔭+(g)andfs𝔭+(h). f^r\in\mathfrak p+(g) \qquad\text{and}\qquad f^s\in\mathfrak p+(h).

But multiplying these two relations gives the contradiction

fr+s𝔭+(gh)𝔭. f^{r+s}\in\mathfrak p+(gh)\subseteq\mathfrak p.

Thus 𝔭\mathfrak p is prime and, by the definition of \mathcal M, f𝔭f\notin\mathfrak p.

Back to Exercise 10.16.

Solution to Exercise 10.17

Edition note. The source directly equates ideals in RR with ideals in R/𝔞R/\mathfrak a. The argument below makes the required inverse-image correspondence explicit.

Let 𝔞R\mathfrak a\subseteq R be a radical ideal. Then 𝔞=𝔞\mathfrak a=\sqrt{\mathfrak a}. The nilradical of R/𝔞R/\mathfrak a is the intersection of all prime ideals in this quotient ring. Under the correspondence between ideals of R/𝔞R/\mathfrak a and ideals of RR containing 𝔞\mathfrak a, this gives

𝔞=𝔭𝔞𝔭 prime𝔭. \sqrt{\mathfrak a} =\bigcap_{\substack{\mathfrak p\supseteq\mathfrak a\\ \mathfrak p\text{ prime}}}\mathfrak p.

Since 𝔞=𝔞\mathfrak a=\sqrt{\mathfrak a}, we obtain

𝔞=𝔭𝔞𝔭 prime𝔭. \mathfrak a =\bigcap_{\substack{\mathfrak p\supseteq\mathfrak a\\ \mathfrak p\text{ prime}}}\mathfrak p.

Back to Exercise 10.17.

Solution to Exercise 10.20

Consider the composite map

φAA/𝔪=L, \mathbb Z\xrightarrow{\varphi}A\longrightarrow A/\mathfrak m=L,

which is also of finite type. The inverse image φ1(𝔪)\varphi^{-1}(\mathfrak m) is a prime ideal in \mathbb Z, so it is either (0)(0) or (p)(p) for a prime number pp.

In the first case there is a factorisation

L. \mathbb Z\longrightarrow\mathbb Q\longrightarrow L.

By Hilbert’s Nullstellensatz, LL is finite over \mathbb Q, and by Lemma 10.5, \mathbb Q would then have to be finitely generated over \mathbb Z, which is not the case. Thus the first case is impossible.

Consequently, the second case holds and there is a factorisation

/(p)L. \mathbb Z\longrightarrow\mathbb Z/(p)\longrightarrow L.

By Hilbert’s Nullstellensatz, LL is finite over the finite field /(p)\mathbb Z/(p), so LL itself is finite.

Back to Exercise 10.20.

English Markdown source · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Lecture 11: Hilbert’s Nullstellensatz and coordinate rings

Hilbert’s Nullstellensatz - geometric version

We now prove the geometric version of Hilbert’s Nullstellensatz. For an algebraically closed field, this theorem establishes a one-to-one relationship between affine algebraic sets in affine space 𝔸Kn\mathbb A_K^n and radical ideals in the polynomial ring.

Theorem: the geometric Hilbert Nullstellensatz

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and let

V=V(𝔞)𝔸Kn V=V(\mathfrak a)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n

be an affine algebraic set described by the ideal 𝔞\mathfrak a. Let

FK[X1,,Xn] F\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]

be a polynomial vanishing on VV. Then FF belongs to the radical of 𝔞\mathfrak a; that is, there is an rr\in\mathbb N with

Fr𝔞. F^r\in\mathfrak a.

Proof

Suppose that FF does not belong to the radical of 𝔞\mathfrak a. By Theorem 10.9, there is a maximal ideal

𝔪K[X1,,Xn] \mathfrak m\subset K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]

with 𝔞𝔪\mathfrak a\subseteq\mathfrak m and F𝔪F\notin\mathfrak m. By Theorem 10.10,

K[X1,,Xn]/𝔪=K, K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]/\mathfrak m=K,

and hence

𝔪=(X1a1,,Xnan) \mathfrak m=(X_1-a_1,\ldots,X_n-a_n)

for some a1,,anKa_1,\ldots,a_n\in K. The property F𝔪F\notin\mathfrak m means that FF is nonzero in the corresponding residue field, namely

F(a1,,an)0. F(a_1,\ldots,a_n)\ne0.

But since 𝔞𝔪\mathfrak a\subseteq\mathfrak m, the point (a1,,an)(a_1,\ldots,a_n) belongs to VV. By assumption, FF must vanish at that point. This is a contradiction.

Theorem: correspondence between algebraic sets and radical ideals

Let KK be an algebraically closed field, with polynomial ring K[X1,,Xn]K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] and affine space 𝔸Kn\mathbb A_K^n. There is a natural correspondence between affine algebraic sets in 𝔸Kn\mathbb A_K^n and radical ideals in K[X1,,Xn]K[X_1,\ldots,X_n].

In this correspondence, a radical ideal is sent to its zero locus, and an affine algebraic set is sent to its vanishing ideal.

Proof

Let V𝔸KnV\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n be affine algebraic. By part (3) of Lemma 3.8,

V=V(Id(V)). V=V(\operatorname{Id}(V)).

For a radical ideal IK[X1,,Xn]I\subseteq K[X_1,\ldots,X_n], part (2) of the same lemma gives the inclusion

IId(V(I)). I\subseteq\operatorname{Id}(V(I)).

The reverse inclusion,

Id(V(I))I, \operatorname{Id}(V(I))\subseteq I,

is the content of Hilbert’s Nullstellensatz.

Corollary: covers by principal open sets

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and let

FiK[X1,,Xn],iI, F_i\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n],\qquad i\in I,

be polynomials such that

𝔸Kn=iID(Fi). \mathbb A_K^n=\bigcup_{i\in I}D(F_i).

Then the FiF_i generate the unit ideal in K[X1,,Xn]K[X_1,\ldots,X_n].

Proof

Let 𝔟\mathfrak b be the ideal generated by all the FiF_i. The assumption says that

iIV(Fi)=V(𝔟) \bigcap_{i\in I}V(F_i)=V(\mathfrak b)

is empty. Thus V(𝔟)V(1)V(\mathfrak b)\subseteq V(1). By Hilbert’s Nullstellensatz, a power of 11, hence 11 itself, belongs to 𝔟\mathfrak b. Therefore 𝔟\mathfrak b is the unit ideal.

Corollary: the vanishing ideal of an intersection

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and V1,V2V_1,V_2 two affine algebraic sets in 𝔸Kn\mathbb A_K^n. Then

Id(V1V2)=rad(Id(V1)+Id(V2)). \operatorname{Id}(V_1\cap V_2) =\operatorname{rad}\!\left(\operatorname{Id}(V_1)+ \operatorname{Id}(V_2)\right).

Proof

Let

𝔞1=Id(V1),𝔞2=Id(V2). \mathfrak a_1=\operatorname{Id}(V_1),\qquad \mathfrak a_2=\operatorname{Id}(V_2).

The statement follows from

rad(𝔞1+𝔞2)=Id(V(rad(𝔞1+𝔞2)))=Id(V(𝔞1+𝔞2))=Id(V(𝔞1)V(𝔞2)), \begin{aligned} \operatorname{rad}(\mathfrak a_1+\mathfrak a_2) &=\operatorname{Id}\!\left(V(\operatorname{rad}(\mathfrak a_1+ \mathfrak a_2))\right)\\ &=\operatorname{Id}(V(\mathfrak a_1+\mathfrak a_2))\\ &=\operatorname{Id}(V(\mathfrak a_1)\cap V(\mathfrak a_2)), \end{aligned}

where the first equality comes from Theorem 11.1.

These properties also fail without the assumption that the field is algebraically closed, as the following example shows.

Two disjoint ellipses

Two disjoint ellipses; Pmidden, created with Mathematica; public domain.

Example: two disjoint real quadrics

We consider the two algebraic curves

V1=V(X2+Y22),V2=V(X2+2Y21)𝔸K2. V_1=V(X^2+Y^2-2),\qquad V_2=V(X^2+2Y^2-1)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^2.

For K=K=\mathbb R, both are irreducible quadrics. Their intersection is described by the ideal

(X2+Y22,X2+2Y21)=(Y2+1,X23). (X^2+Y^2-2,X^2+2Y^2-1)=(Y^2+1,X^2-3).

Since the polynomial Y2+1Y^2+1 has no real zero,

V1V2=. V_1\cap V_2=\varnothing.

The vanishing ideal of the empty intersection is of course the unit ideal, whereas the sum of the two vanishing ideals is not the unit ideal.

The coordinate ring of an affine algebraic set

Let V𝔸KnV\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n be an affine algebraic set with vanishing ideal Id(V)\operatorname{Id}(V). Every polynomial

FK[X1,,Xn] F\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]

defines a function on affine space and thus induces a function on the subset VV:

𝔸KnFKV \begin{matrix} \mathbb A_K^n&\xrightarrow{F}&K\\ \uparrow&\nearrow&\\ V&& \end{matrix}

By Definition 3.4, an element of the vanishing ideal induces the zero function on VV. Two polynomials G,HK[X1,,Xn]G,H\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] whose difference belongs to the vanishing ideal induce the same function on VV. It is therefore natural to regard the quotient ring

K[X1,,Xn]/Id(V) K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]/\operatorname{Id}(V)

as the ring of polynomial (or algebraic) functions on VV.

Definition: coordinate ring

For an affine algebraic set

V𝔸Kn V\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n

with vanishing ideal Id(V)\operatorname{Id}(V), the ring

R(V)=K[X1,,Xn]/Id(V) R(V)=K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]/\operatorname{Id}(V)

is called the coordinate ring of VV.

This notion is not entirely unproblematic, especially when KK is not algebraically closed; see the examples below. We first record some elementary properties.

Proposition: basic properties of coordinate rings

Let V𝔸KnV\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n be an affine algebraic set and

R=K[X1,,Xn]/Id(V) R=K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]/\operatorname{Id}(V)

its coordinate ring. Then the following statements hold.

  1. RR is reduced.

  2. V=V=\varnothing if and only if RR is the zero ring.

  3. VV is irreducible if and only if RR is an integral domain.

  4. VV consists of a single point if and only if R=KR=K.

  5. If KK is algebraically closed and V=V(𝔞)V=V(\mathfrak a), then

    R=K[X1,,Xn]/rad(𝔞). R=K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]/\operatorname{rad}(\mathfrak a).

Proof

Let I=Id(V)I=\operatorname{Id}(V) be the vanishing ideal of VV.

  1. This follows from Lemma 3.14 and Exercise 3.13.

  2. The equality V=V=\varnothing is equivalent to 1I1\in I, which in turn is equivalent to R=0R=0.

  3. This follows from Lemma 4.3 and Exercise 4.17.

  4. Let V={P}V=\{P\} with P=(a1,,an)P=(a_1,\ldots,a_n). Then

    I=(X1a1,,Xnan) I=(X_1-a_1,\ldots,X_n-a_n)

    and its coordinate ring is

    K[X1,,Xn]/(X1a1,,Xnan)K. K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]/(X_1-a_1,\ldots,X_n-a_n)\cong K.

    Conversely, if the coordinate ring is KK, the corresponding quotient homomorphism must be an evaluation homomorphism XiaiX_i\mapsto a_i. The vanishing ideal of VV must be a point ideal, and P=(a1,,an)VP=(a_1,\ldots,a_n)\in V. If there were another point QVQ\in V, QPQ\ne P, we would obtain a contradiction, because not all the XiaiX_i-a_i vanish at QQ.

  5. If KK is algebraically closed, Hilbert’s Nullstellensatz gives

    Id(V)=rad(𝔞). \operatorname{Id}(V)=\operatorname{rad}(\mathfrak a).

Theorem: the coordinate ring of affine space over an infinite field

Let KK be an infinite field. The vanishing ideal of affine space 𝔸Kn\mathbb A_K^n is the zero ideal, and its coordinate ring is the polynomial ring K[X1,,Xn]K[X_1,\ldots,X_n].

Proof

We prove the statement by induction on the number of variables. For n=1n=1, it follows from the fact that a polynomial of degree dd has at most dd roots.

For the induction step, let

FK[X1,,Xn] F\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]

be a polynomial vanishing at every point of 𝔸Kn=Kn\mathbb A_K^n=K^n. Write FF as

F=PdXnd+Pd1Xnd1++P1Xn+P0, F=P_dX_n^d+P_{d-1}X_n^{d-1}+\cdots+P_1X_n+P_0,

with

Pd,,P0K[X1,,Xn1]. P_d,\ldots,P_0\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_{n-1}].

We must show that F=0F=0, which is equivalent to Pi=0P_i=0 for every i=0,,di=0,\ldots,d. Suppose, without loss of generality, that PdP_d is not the zero polynomial. By the induction hypothesis, PdP_d is not the zero function either. Thus there is a point (a1,,an1)(a_1,\ldots,a_{n-1}) with

Pd(a1,,an1)0. P_d(a_1,\ldots,a_{n-1})\ne0.

Consequently, F(a1,,an1)F(a_1,\ldots,a_{n-1}) is a nonzero polynomial of degree dd in the single variable XnX_n. By the one-variable case, it cannot be the zero function, a contradiction.

Edition note: The source TeX witness writes the linear term as P1X0P_1X_0. The context of expansion in the variable XnX_n requires P1XnP_1X_n; this edition uses the consistent index and preserves the source misprint in this note.

Example: finite fields

Theorem 11.8 is false for finite fields. Over a finite field, affine space consists of only finitely many points, and many polynomials vanish at all these points. Typical examples are the polynomials

XiqXi, X_i^q-X_i,

where qq is the number of elements of the field.

Example: quotient rings and coordinate rings can differ

Let

R=[X,Y]/(X2+Y2). R=\mathbb R[X,Y]/(X^2+Y^2).

Since squares of real numbers are never negative, the zero locus of X2+Y2X^2+Y^2 consists only of the origin:

V(X2+Y2)={(0,0)}. V(X^2+Y^2)=\{(0,0)\}.

Its vanishing ideal is the maximal ideal (X,Y)(X,Y), so the corresponding coordinate ring is

[X,Y]/(X,Y). \mathbb R[X,Y]/(X,Y)\cong\mathbb R.

Thus the coordinate ring can be very different from the initial quotient ring whose ideal was used to define the zero locus.

Hilbert’s Nullstellensatz for affine algebraic sets

Hilbert’s Nullstellensatz, as formulated for affine space and the polynomial ring, holds correspondingly for every V(𝔞)V(\mathfrak a) and the quotient ring K[X1,,Xn]/𝔞K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]/\mathfrak a.

Corollary: the Nullstellensatz on an affine algebraic set

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and let

R=K[X1,,Xn]/𝔞 R=K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]/\mathfrak a

be a KK-algebra of finite type with zero locus

V=V(𝔞)𝔸Kn. V=V(\mathfrak a)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n.

Let 𝔟\mathfrak b be an ideal in RR, and FRF\in R an element vanishing on V(𝔟)VV(\mathfrak b)\subseteq V. Then there is an rr\in\mathbb N with

Fr𝔟 F^r\in\mathfrak b

in RR.

Proof

The vanishing condition V(𝔟)V(F)V(\mathfrak b)\subseteq V(F) inside V=V(𝔞)V=V(\mathfrak a), translated back into affine space, says that

V(𝔞+𝔟)=V(𝔞)V(𝔟)V(F), V(\mathfrak a+\mathfrak b) =V(\mathfrak a)\cap V(\mathfrak b) \subseteq V(F),

where FF is now a representative polynomial in K[X1,,Xn]K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] and 𝔟\mathfrak b is the inverse-image ideal in that ring. By Hilbert’s Nullstellensatz for affine space, there is an rr\in\mathbb N with

Fr𝔞+𝔟. F^r\in\mathfrak a+\mathfrak b.

Modulo 𝔞\mathfrak a, this says precisely that Fr𝔟F^r\in\mathfrak b in RR.

Corollary: principal open covers of an affine algebraic set

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and V=V(𝔞)𝔸KnV=V(\mathfrak a)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n an affine algebraic set described by the ideal 𝔞\mathfrak a. Let

FiK[X1,,Xn],iI, F_i\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n],\qquad i\in I,

be such that

V=iID(Fi). V=\bigcup_{i\in I}D(F_i).

Then the classes of all the FiF_i generate the unit ideal in K[X1,,Xn]/𝔞K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]/\mathfrak a.

Proof

Let 𝔟\mathfrak b be the ideal in K[X1,,Xn]/𝔞K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]/\mathfrak a generated by all the FiF_i, iIi\in I. The assumption says that

V(𝔟)=iIV(Fi) V(\mathfrak b)=\bigcap_{i\in I}V(F_i)

is empty on VV. Since V(1)V(1) is also empty, V(1)V(𝔟)V(1)\subseteq V(\mathfrak b). By Hilbert’s Nullstellensatz, a power of 11, hence 11 itself, belongs to 𝔟\mathfrak b.

Corollary: a polynomial with no zeros is a unit

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and V=V(𝔞)𝔸KnV=V(\mathfrak a)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n an affine algebraic set described by the ideal 𝔞\mathfrak a. If FK[X1,,Xn]F\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] has no zero on VV, then its class is a unit in the quotient ring

K[X1,,Xn]/𝔞. K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]/\mathfrak a.

Proof

This is a special case of Corollary 11.12.

In Example 11.5, the function X2+2Y21X^2+2Y^2-1 has no zero on the real zero locus V(X2+Y22)V(X^2+Y^2-2), so its value is a unit at every point of that locus. However, it is not a unit in the coordinate ring

[X,Y]/(X2+Y22). \mathbb R[X,Y]/(X^2+Y^2-2).

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0 for translated course text; media retain component rights in authority/RIGHTS-unit-11.csv · Rights record: RIGHTS-unit-11.csv

Worksheet 11

Practice exercises

Exercise 11.1

Let KK be an algebraically closed field. Prove Hilbert’s Nullstellensatz directly for the polynomial ring in one variable.

Exercise 11.2

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and

f,gK[X1,,Xn]. f,g\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n].

Show that

V(f)V(g) V(f)\subseteq V(g)

holds if and only if there are a natural number rr and hK[X1,,Xn]h\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] with

fh=gr. fh=g^r.

Also consider the special cases where ff, or where gg, is a constant polynomial.

Exercise 11.3

Show that, in the correspondence given by Hilbert’s Nullstellensatz, points correspond to maximal ideals.

Exercise 11.4

Show that, in the correspondence given by Hilbert’s Nullstellensatz, irreducible varieties correspond to prime ideals.

Exercise 11.5

Let KK be an algebraically closed field. Prove directly the following special case of Hilbert’s Nullstellensatz: if

fK[X1,,Xn] f\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]

has no zero in KnK^n, then ff is a nonzero constant polynomial.

Exercise 11.6 ★

Consider the two polynomials X2+Y2X^2+Y^2 and X2Y3X^2-Y^3 and the corresponding algebraic curves over the fields \mathbb R and \mathbb C.

  1. Does

    V(X2+Y2)V(X2Y3) V(X^2+Y^2)\subseteq V(X^2-Y^3)

    hold in 𝔸2\mathbb A_{\mathbb R}^2?

  2. Does the same inclusion hold in 𝔸2\mathbb A_{\mathbb C}^2?

  3. Does X2Y3X^2-Y^3 belong to the radical of (X2+Y2)(X^2+Y^2) in [X,Y]\mathbb R[X,Y]?

  4. Does X2Y3X^2-Y^3 belong to the radical of (X2+Y2)(X^2+Y^2) in [X,Y]\mathbb C[X,Y]?

Exercise 11.7 ★

Let polynomials

f1,,fk[X1,,Xn] f_1,\ldots,f_k\in\mathbb C[X_1,\ldots,X_n]

be given, regarded as functions

fi:n. f_i:\mathbb C^n\longrightarrow\mathbb C.

Let f[X1,,Xn]f\in\mathbb C[X_1,\ldots,X_n] be another polynomial, and let

g1,,gk:n g_1,\ldots,g_k:\mathbb C^n\longrightarrow\mathbb C

be functions that need not be polynomial. Suppose that the following equality of functions holds:

f=g1f1++gkfk. f=g_1f_1+\cdots+g_kf_k.

Show that ff belongs to the radical of (f1,,fk)(f_1,\ldots,f_k).

Exercise 11.8

Let KK be a field and n+n\in\mathbb N_+. Show that all functions φ:KnK\varphi:K^n\to K of the form

φ=PQ, \varphi=\frac{P}{Q},

where P,QK[X1,,Xn]P,Q\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] and QQ has no zero on KnK^n, form a commutative ring. Show that if KK is algebraically closed, this ring coincides with the polynomial ring.

Exercise 11.9

Let KK be a finite field. Show that there are only finitely many zero loci in 𝔸Kn\mathbb A_K^n, but infinitely many radical ideals in K[X1,,Xn]K[X_1,\ldots,X_n].

Exercise 11.10

Let RR be a commutative ring and let fjf_j, jJj\in J, be a family of elements of RR. Suppose that the fjf_j together generate the unit ideal. Show that there is a finite subfamily

fj,jJ0J, f_j,\qquad j\in J_0\subseteq J,

that also generates the unit ideal.

Exercise 11.11

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and

𝔞,𝔟K[X1,,Xn] \mathfrak a,\mathfrak b\subseteq K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]

radical ideals. Show that the zero loci V(𝔞)V(\mathfrak a) and V(𝔟)V(\mathfrak b) are affine-linearly equivalent if and only if there is an affine-linear change of variables taking one ideal to the other.

Aside: extension ideals

Let

φ:AB \varphi:A\longrightarrow B

be a ring homomorphism between commutative rings AA and BB. For an ideal 𝔞A\mathfrak a\subseteq A, the ideal in BB generated by φ(𝔞)\varphi(\mathfrak a) is called the extension ideal of 𝔞\mathfrak a under φ\varphi. It is denoted by 𝔞B\mathfrak aB. If φ\varphi is surjective, this is simply the image ideal.

Exercise 11.12

Let

𝔞[X1,,Xn] \mathfrak a\subseteq\mathbb R[X_1,\ldots,X_n]

be an ideal and f[X1,,Xn]f\in\mathbb R[X_1,\ldots,X_n]. Show that f𝔞f\in\mathfrak a if and only if

f𝔞[X1,,Xn] f\in\mathfrak a\mathbb C[X_1,\ldots,X_n]

for this extension ideal.

Exercise 11.13

Sketch the graphs of the functions xx and yy on V(xy)V(xy). Convince yourself that the product xyxy is the zero function.

Exercise 11.14

Determine the coordinate ring of an affine algebraic set V𝔸KnV\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n consisting of dd points.

Exercise 11.15

Determine the coordinate ring of the affine algebraic set

V=V(5X8Y+3)𝔸K2. V=V(5X-8Y+3)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^2.

Exercise 11.16

Consider the hyperbola V(xy1)V(xy-1) over the field K=/(11)K=\mathbb Z/(11). Determine the inverse of 4x34x^3 in the corresponding coordinate ring.

Exercise 11.17

Let KK be a field and

V,W𝔸Kn V,W\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n

affine algebraic sets with VWV\subseteq W. Define a KK-algebra homomorphism between the two coordinate rings R(V)R(V) and R(W)R(W), and describe its main properties. Give an example of two affine algebraic sets neither of which contains the other, but whose coordinate rings are isomorphic.

Exercise 11.18

Let KK be a field and

𝔞,𝔟K[X1,,Xn] \mathfrak a,\mathfrak b\subseteq K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]

ideals with the same radical. Show that there is a natural bijection between the radical ideals of the quotient rings

K[X1,,Xn]/𝔞andK[X1,,Xn]/𝔟. K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]/\mathfrak a \qquad\text{and}\qquad K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]/\mathfrak b.

Exercise 11.19

Let KK be a field with qq elements and V=V(𝔞)𝔸KnV=V(\mathfrak a)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n an affine algebraic set. Show that the coordinate ring of VV need not equal

K[x1,,xn]/((x1qx1,,xnqxn)+𝔞). K[x_1,\ldots,x_n]\big/ \big((x_1^q-x_1,\ldots,x_n^q-x_n)+\mathfrak a\big).

Edition note: The source typographically places +𝔞+\mathfrak a outside the denominator of the quotient ring. The parentheses above make the intended mathematical reading explicit. With this reading, however, the source assertion is false: the displayed quotient always is the coordinate ring of VV. Indeed, the quotient by the Frobenius equations is the ring of all functions KnKK^n\to K, a finite product of copies of KK; imposing 𝔞\mathfrak a leaves precisely the factors indexed by V(𝔞)V(\mathfrak a). This is an editorial correction, not a public source solution.

Exercise 11.20

Let KK be a field of characteristic 00. Consider the intersection of a cylinder and a sphere,

C=V(X2+Y21)V((X3)2+Y2+Z27)𝔸K3. C=V(X^2+Y^2-1)\cap V((X-3)^2+Y^2+Z^2-7)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^3.

Show that the coordinate ring of CC can be written as a quotient ring of a polynomial ring in two variables.

Exercises for submission

Exercise 11.21 (4 points)

Let F[X1,,Xn]F\in\mathbb C[X_1,\ldots,X_n] and let U𝔸nU\subseteq\mathbb A_{\mathbb C}^n be a nonempty subset open in the metric topology. If F|U=0F|_U=0 is the zero function, show that FF is the zero polynomial.

Exercise 11.22 (3 points)

Prove Corollary 11.3 directly from Theorem 10.10.

Exercise 11.23 (7 points)

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and RR the polynomial ring in nn variables over KK. We want to understand an alternative proof, based on Corollary 11.3, that

Id(V(J))=rad(J) \operatorname{Id}(V(J))=\operatorname{rad}(J)

for every ideal JJ in RR. Let fId(V(J))f\in\operatorname{Id}(V(J)). Consider the ring R[T]R[T] and show that the ideal

J=(J,1fT) J'=(J,1-f\cdot T)

is the unit ideal. Deduce that ff belongs to the radical of JJ.

Exercise 11.24 (3 points)

Let FK[X1,,Xn]F\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] and consider the polynomial map

φ:𝔸Kn𝔸Kn+1,(x1,,xn)(x1,,xn,F(x1,,xn)), \begin{aligned} \varphi:\mathbb A_K^n&\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^{n+1},\\ (x_1,\ldots,x_n)&\longmapsto (x_1,\ldots,x_n,F(x_1,\ldots,x_n)), \end{aligned}

which defines a bijection between affine space and the graph of FF. For an affine algebraic set V(𝔞)𝔸KnV(\mathfrak a)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n, consider the image V=φ(V)V'=\varphi(V). Show that VV' is also affine algebraic and give an ideal describing it. Show that VV is irreducible if and only if VV' is irreducible.

Exercise 11.25 (5 points)

Consider the two algebraic curves

V(x2+y22)andV(x2+2y21) V(x^2+y^2-2) \qquad\text{and}\qquad V(x^2+2y^2-1)

over the field /(7)\mathbb Z/(7). Show that their intersection is empty, then find an extension field K/(7)K\supseteq\mathbb Z/(7) over which it is nonempty. Calculate all intersection points over KK and over every other extension field. Also describe the coordinate ring of the intersection.

Exercise 11.26 (4 points)

Let KK be a field, and P1,,PnP_1,\ldots,P_n finitely many points in the affine plane 𝔸K2\mathbb A_K^2. Let a1,,anKa_1,\ldots,a_n\in K be arbitrarily prescribed values. Show that there is a polynomial FK[X,Y]F\in K[X,Y] with

F(Pi)=aifor every i=1,,n. F(P_i)=a_i\qquad\text{for every }i=1,\ldots,n.

Edition note: The points must be pairwise distinct, as is implicit in the source’s reference to finitely many points. If repetitions are allowed, the prescribed values must agree whenever Pi=PjP_i=P_j.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Public Solutions to Worksheet 11

At the frozen revision boundary, the source provides public solutions only to Exercises 11.6 and 11.7. No additional solutions have been created for this edition.

Solution to Exercise 11.6

  1. The only real point of V(X2+Y2)V(X^2+Y^2) is the origin (0,0)(0,0), and this point lies on V(X2Y3)V(X^2-Y^3). Thus

    V(X2+Y2)V(X2Y3)𝔸2. V(X^2+Y^2)\subseteq V(X^2-Y^3) \subseteq\mathbb A_{\mathbb R}^2.

  2. The corresponding inclusion does not hold over the complex numbers. For example,

    (1,i)V(X2+Y2), (1,\mathrm i)\in V(X^2+Y^2),

    but since 1i31\ne\mathrm i^3, this point does not lie on V(X2Y3)V(X^2-Y^3).

  3. Suppose that X2Y3X^2-Y^3 belonged to the radical of (X2+Y2)(X^2+Y^2) in [X,Y]\mathbb R[X,Y]. After extending scalars, the same would immediately hold in [X,Y]\mathbb C[X,Y]. But the next part shows that this is not the case.

  4. From part (2) and the easy direction of Hilbert’s Nullstellensatz, it follows that X2Y3X^2-Y^3 does not belong to the radical of (X2+Y2)(X^2+Y^2) in [X,Y]\mathbb C[X,Y].

Back to Exercise 11.6.

Solution to Exercise 11.7

We claim that

V(f1,,fk)V(f). V(f_1,\ldots,f_k)\subseteq V(f).

Once this claim is proved, Hilbert’s Nullstellensatz says that ff belongs to the radical of (f1,,fk)(f_1,\ldots,f_k).

Let

P=(x1,,xn)n P=(x_1,\ldots,x_n)\in\mathbb C^n

and suppose that PV(f1,,fk)P\in V(f_1,\ldots,f_k). This means that fi(P)=0f_i(P)=0 for every ii. Then

f(P)=(g1f1++gkfk)(P)=g1(P)f1(P)++gk(P)fk(P)=0. \begin{aligned} f(P) &=(g_1f_1+\cdots+g_kf_k)(P)\\ &=g_1(P)f_1(P)+\cdots+g_k(P)f_k(P)\\ &=0. \end{aligned}

Thus PV(f)P\in V(f), proving the claim.

Back to Exercise 11.7.

English Markdown source · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Lecture 12: The KK-spectrum and its functoriality

“Born to see, appointed to behold.”

— Johann Wolfgang von Goethe

The KK-spectrum

Black-and-white portrait of Alexander Grothendieck seated

Alexander Grothendieck (1928–2014); photograph: Konrad Jacobs, Oberwolfach Photo Collection/MFO; CC BY-SA 2.0 de.

How are affine algebraic sets and their coordinate rings related? Meaningful answers can be expected only for infinite ground fields, because in the finite case there are too few points. A satisfactory theory even requires us to restrict ourselves to algebraically closed fields, or else—and this is the viewpoint of scheme theory developed by Alexander Grothendieck—to consider not only KK-points, but also maximal ideals and prime ideals as points.

A first important question is the following. A KK-algebra RR of finite type has several representations, generally on an equal footing, as a quotient ring of a polynomial algebra; say,

K[X1,,Xn]/𝔞RK[X1,,Xm]/𝔟. K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]/\mathfrak a \cong R \cong K[X_1,\ldots,X_m]/\mathfrak b.

These two representations give the zero loci

V(𝔞)𝔸KnandV(𝔟)𝔸Km. V(\mathfrak a)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n \qquad\text{and}\qquad V(\mathfrak b)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^m.

How are these two zero loci related?

Example: three representations of the affine line

Consider the polynomial ring in one variable

R=K[T]. R=K[T].

The first object corresponding to it is the affine line 𝔸K1\mathbb A_K^1. But RR can also be obtained in quite different ways as a quotient ring of a polynomial algebra in several variables. For example, let

aK,a0, a\in K,\qquad a\ne0,

and consider the quotient ring K[X,Y]/(aY+bX)K[X,Y]/(aY+bX). As a KK-algebra, this ring is isomorphic to RR, as shown by the map

K[X,Y]/(aY+bX)K[T],XT,YbaT. \begin{aligned} K[X,Y]/(aY+bX)&\longrightarrow K[T],\\ X&\longmapsto T,\\ Y&\longmapsto-\frac baT. \end{aligned}

The corresponding zero locus,

V(aY+bX)𝔸K2, V(aY+bX)\subset\mathbb A_K^2,

is simply the line in the affine plane described by the equation

Y=baX. Y=-\frac baX.

Another way to represent the polynomial ring in one variable as a quotient ring is

K[X,Y]/(YP(X)), K[X,Y]/(Y-P(X)),

where P(X)P(X) is an arbitrary polynomial in the single variable XX. The ring homomorphism

K[X,Y]/(YP(X))K[T],XT,YP(T) \begin{aligned} K[X,Y]/(Y-P(X))&\longrightarrow K[T],\\ X&\longmapsto T,\\ Y&\longmapsto P(T) \end{aligned}

again shows that there is an isomorphism with the polynomial ring in one variable. The corresponding zero locus is simply the graph of P(X)P(X).

Black horizontal line

Horizontal line; Astur1, public domain.

Graph of a red straight line in a Cartesian coordinate system

Graph of a linear function in Cartesian coordinates; MADe, CC BY-SA 3.0.

Red graph of a polynomial of degree five

Graph of a polynomial of degree five; Derbeth, CC BY-SA 3.0.

The point of this example is that all three geometric objects are zero loci for different quotient-ring presentations of K[T]K[T]. From the viewpoint of algebraic geometry, they are three equally valid representations of the affine line, even though they “look” different. In algebraic geometry we must look at them in a way that makes them look the same. What we see are merely different embeddings of the “actual, true” geometric object intrinsically associated with a KK-algebra: the KK-spectrum.

Definition: the KK-spectrum

For a commutative KK-algebra RR of finite type, the set of all KK-algebra homomorphisms

HomK(R,K) \operatorname{Hom}_K(R,K)

is called the KK-spectrum of RR and is denoted by

KSpek(R). K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R).

We regard the elements of the KK-spectrum KSpek(R)K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R) as points and usually denote them by PP, although by definition they are maps, namely KK-algebra homomorphisms from RR to KK. For a ring element fRf\in R, we then write f(P)f(P) rather than P(f)P(f) for the value of ff under the ring homomorphism denoted by PP. Indeed, it is not unusual to regard a point as an evaluation of functions defined in some neighbourhood of that point.

The KK-spectrum is again equipped with a Zariski topology. For an ideal 𝔞R\mathfrak a\subseteq R—or even an arbitrary subset of RR—we declare the subset

V(𝔞)={PKSpek(R)f(P)=0for all f𝔞} V(\mathfrak a) =\left\{P\in K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R) \mid f(P)=0\ \text{for all }f\in\mathfrak a\right\}

to be closed. This does indeed define a topology; see Exercise 12.8. Its open complement is denoted by D(𝔞)D(\mathfrak a).

Lemma: points of affine space as homomorphisms

Let KK be a field and K[X1,,Xn]K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] the polynomial ring in nn variables. The KK-algebra homomorphisms from K[X1,,Xn]K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] to KK are naturally in bijection with the points of affine space

𝔸Kn=Kn. \mathbb A_K^n=K^n.

The point (a1,,an)(a_1,\ldots,a_n) corresponds to the substitution homomorphism XiaiX_i\mapsto a_i. In other words,

KSpek(K[X1,,Xn])=𝔸Kn. K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}\bigl(K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]\bigr) =\mathbb A_K^n.

Proof

A KK-algebra homomorphism is always determined by a set of KK-algebra generators. Thus the values on the variables XiX_i determine a KK-algebra homomorphism from K[X1,,Xn]K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] to KK. Such a substitution homomorphism is defined by XiaiX_i\mapsto a_i, and every choice of values (a1,,an)(a_1,\ldots,a_n) is allowed here.

Example: the KK-spectrum of KK

The KK-spectrum of the KK-algebra KK consists of a single point: the identity

id:KK \operatorname{id}:K\longrightarrow K

is the only KK-algebra homomorphism from KK to KK. In general there may be other field automorphisms of KK, but these are not KK-algebra homomorphisms.

The following theorem is crucial: it establishes a bijective relationship between the KK-spectrum of RR and the zero locus arising from a quotient-ring presentation of RR.

Theorem: the KK-spectrum and zero loci

Let KK be a field and RR a finitely generated commutative KK-algebra with KK-spectrum KSpek(R)K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R). Let

R=K[X1,,Xn]/𝔞 R=K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]/\mathfrak a

be a quotient-ring presentation of RR, with quotient homomorphism

φ:K[X1,,Xn]R \varphi:K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]\longrightarrow R

and corresponding zero locus V(𝔞)𝔸KnV(\mathfrak a)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n. The map

KSpek(R)𝔸Kn,PPφ \begin{aligned} K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R)&\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^n,\\ P&\longmapsto P\circ\varphi \end{aligned}

gives a bijection between KSpek(R)K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R) and V(𝔞)V(\mathfrak a), and this bijection is a homeomorphism for the Zariski topology.

Proof

First, the map above is well-defined because the composite

Pφ:K[X1,,Xn]φK[X1,,Xn]/𝔞RPK P\circ\varphi: K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] \xrightarrow{\varphi}K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]/\mathfrak a \cong R\xrightarrow{P}K

defines a KK-algebra homomorphism from the polynomial ring to KK. By Lemma 12.3, this is the substitution homomorphism at some (a1,,an)(a_1,\ldots,a_n) and can be identified with the corresponding point of affine space; explicitly,

ai=P(φ(Xi)). a_i=P\bigl(\varphi(X_i)\bigr).

Since PφP\circ\varphi factors through RR, the ideal 𝔞\mathfrak a maps to 00. Thus the image point

Pφ=(a1,,an) P\circ\varphi=(a_1,\ldots,a_n)

lies in V(𝔞)V(\mathfrak a). We therefore obtain a map

KSpek(R)V(𝔞)𝔸Kn,PPφ, \begin{aligned} K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R)&\longrightarrow V(\mathfrak a)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n,\\ P&\longmapsto P\circ\varphi, \end{aligned}

which remains to be proved bijective.

Let P1,P2KSpek(R)P_1,P_2\in K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R) be two distinct points. They are distinct KK-algebra homomorphisms. Since a KK-algebra homomorphism is determined by its values on a set of KK-algebra generators, they must differ on at least one image of a variable. The corresponding coordinate values therefore also differ, so P1φP2φP_1\circ\varphi\ne P_2\circ\varphi. Thus the map is injective.

For surjectivity, let (a1,,an)V(𝔞)(a_1,\ldots,a_n)\in V(\mathfrak a). The corresponding KK-algebra homomorphism,

K[X1,,Xn]K,Xiai, \begin{aligned} K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]&\longrightarrow K,\\ X_i&\longmapsto a_i, \end{aligned}

annihilates every F𝔞F\in\mathfrak a. Hence this ring homomorphism factors through K[X1,,Xn]/𝔞K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]/\mathfrak a. The resulting homomorphism is the required preimage in KSpek(R)K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R).

For the topological assertion, take GRG\in R, a preimage G̃K[X1,,Xn]\widetilde G\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n], and a point PKSpek(R)P\in K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R) with image point P̃=PφV(𝔞)\widetilde P=P\circ\varphi\in V(\mathfrak a). Then

G(P)=P(G)=P(φ(G̃))=(Pφ)(G̃)=G̃(P̃), G(P)=P(G)=P\bigl(\varphi(\widetilde G)\bigr) =(P\circ\varphi)(\widetilde G) =\widetilde G(\widetilde P),

so zero loci on the two sides also correspond. The bijection is therefore a homeomorphism.

This theorem says that every KK-spectrum of a KK-algebra RR of finite type can be identified with a Zariski-closed subset of some 𝔸Kn\mathbb A_K^n. Such an identification is called a closed embedding.

Corollary: topological independence of the presentation

Let KK be a field and RR a finitely generated commutative KK-algebra with two quotient-ring presentations

RK[X1,,Xn]/𝔞andRK[X1,,Xm]/𝔟, R\cong K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]/\mathfrak a \qquad\text{and}\qquad R\cong K[X_1,\ldots,X_m]/\mathfrak b,

and corresponding zero loci

V(𝔞)𝔸KnandV(𝔟)𝔸Km. V(\mathfrak a)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n \qquad\text{and}\qquad V(\mathfrak b)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^m.

With their induced Zariski topologies, these two zero loci are homeomorphic.

Proof

By Theorem 12.5, both zero loci are homeomorphic to KSpek(R)K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R), and hence also to each other.

If RR is the zero ring, its KK-spectrum is empty. If KK is not algebraically closed, the spectrum of other rings can also be empty. However, if KK is algebraically closed and R0R\ne0, the spectrum is nonempty. Under this assumption there is again a Hilbert Nullstellensatz; see Exercise 12.10.

The KK-spectrum as a functor

Theorem: the spectrum map

Let KK be a field, let RR and SS be commutative KK-algebras of finite type, and let

φ:RS \varphi:R\longrightarrow S

be a KK-algebra homomorphism. It induces a map

φ*:KSpek(S)KSpek(R),PPφ. \begin{aligned} \varphi^*:K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(S)&\longrightarrow K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R),\\ P&\longmapsto P\circ\varphi. \end{aligned}

This map is continuous for the Zariski topology.

Proof

The existence of the map is clear: to the KK-algebra homomorphism P:SKP:S\to K we assign the composite

RφSPK. R\xrightarrow{\varphi}S\xrightarrow{P}K.

The inverse image of the open set D(f)KSpek(R)D(f)\subseteq K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R) is

(φ*)1(D(f))={PKSpek(S)φ*(P)D(f)}={PKSpek(S)PφD(f)}={PKSpek(S)(Pφ)(f)0}={PKSpek(S)P(φ(f))0}=D(φ(f)). \begin{aligned} (\varphi^*)^{-1}(D(f)) &=\{P\in K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(S) \mid\varphi^*(P)\in D(f)\}\\ &=\{P\in K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(S) \mid P\circ\varphi\in D(f)\}\\ &=\{P\in K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(S) \mid(P\circ\varphi)(f)\ne0\}\\ &=\{P\in K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(S) \mid P(\varphi(f))\ne0\}\\ &=D(\varphi(f)). \end{aligned}

Thus inverse images of open sets are again open, and the map is continuous.

The map φ*\varphi^* introduced in Theorem 12.7 is called the spectrum map associated with φ\varphi.

Proposition: some forms of spectrum maps

Let KK be a field and φ:RS\varphi:R\to S a KK-algebra homomorphism between KK-algebras of finite type, with associated spectrum map φ*\varphi^*. The following statements hold.

  1. For a KK-algebra homomorphism P:RKP:R\to K, the induced spectrum map P*P^* is the map taking the unique point

    {id}=KSpek(K) \{\operatorname{id}\}=K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(K)

    to the point PKSpek(R)P\in K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R).

  2. The substitution homomorphism defined by FRF\in R,

    φ:K[T]R,TF, \begin{aligned} \varphi:K[T]&\longrightarrow R,\\ T&\longmapsto F, \end{aligned}

    induces the spectrum map

    φ*:KSpek(R)KSpek(K[T])=𝔸K1,PF(P). \begin{aligned} \varphi^*:K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R)&\longrightarrow K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(K[T])=\mathbb A_K^1,\\ P&\longmapsto F(P). \end{aligned}

  3. If φ:RS\varphi:R\to S is surjective, then the spectrum map

    φ*:KSpek(S)KSpek(R) \varphi^*:K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(S)\longrightarrow K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R)

    is a closed embedding with image V(kerφ)V(\ker\varphi).

  4. The spectrum map associated with a surjective map

    K[X1,,Xn]S K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]\longrightarrow S

    agrees with the map

    φ*:KSpek(S)KSpek(K[X1,,Xn])𝔸Kn \varphi^*:K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(S)\longrightarrow K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]) \cong\mathbb A_K^n

    defined in Theorem 12.5.

  5. Let FiK[X1,,Xn]F_i\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] for i=1,,mi=1,\ldots,m, and let

    φ:K[Y1,,Ym]K[X1,,Xn],YiFi \begin{aligned} \varphi:K[Y_1,\ldots,Y_m]&\longrightarrow K[X_1,\ldots,X_n],\\ Y_i&\longmapsto F_i \end{aligned}

    be the associated substitution homomorphism. Under the identification in Lemma 12.3, the spectrum map

    φ*:𝔸Kn=KSpek(K[X1,,Xn])𝔸Km=KSpek(K[Y1,,Ym]) \varphi^*:\mathbb A_K^n =K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]) \longrightarrow \mathbb A_K^m =K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(K[Y_1,\ldots,Y_m])

    agrees with the direct polynomial map

    (x1,,xn)(F1(x1,,xn),,Fm(x1,,xn)). (x_1,\ldots,x_n)\longmapsto \bigl(F_1(x_1,\ldots,x_n),\ldots,F_m(x_1,\ldots,x_n)\bigr).

Proof

  1. follows from idP=P\operatorname{id}\circ P=P.

For (2), under the composite

K[T]φRPK, K[T]\xrightarrow{\varphi}R\xrightarrow{P}K,

TT is sent to P(F)=F(P)P(F)=F(P).

  1. rests on considerations similar to those in the proof of Theorem 12.5; these also prove (4). For (5), see Exercise 12.18.

Statement (2) says in particular that the elements of the ring RR can be regarded as functions from the KK-spectrum KSpek(R)K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R) to 𝔸K1\mathbb A_K^1. Thus we have introduced a geometric object that realises ring elements as functions.

Further properties of the KK-spectrum

Lemma: adjoining one variable

Let KK be a field and RR a finitely generated commutative KK-algebra. Then there is a natural bijection

KSpek(R[X])KSpek(R)×𝔸K1. K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R[X]) \cong K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R)\times\mathbb A_K^1.

Proof

A KK-algebra homomorphism R[T]KR[T]\to K induces a KK-algebra homomorphism RKR\to K, while TT maps to a particular element aKa\in K. Conversely, these two data uniquely determine a KK-algebra homomorphism R[T]KR[T]\to K.

Warning: the statement above gives only a natural bijection at the level of points. If the product set on the right is equipped with the product topology, this bijection need not be a homeomorphism with the Zariski topology on the left. In particular, for an infinite field KK,

𝔸K2=𝔸K1×𝔸K1, \mathbb A_K^2=\mathbb A_K^1\times\mathbb A_K^1,

but the Zariski topology on the affine plane is not the product of the Zariski topology on the affine line with itself.

Edition note: The source states the failure of homeomorphism without qualification. The general statement is “need not”: for example, when R=KR=K the bijection is a homeomorphism. The affine-plane counterexample requires KK infinite; over a finite field all these finite KK-spectra are discrete.

Remark: products via tensor products

If

X=KSpek(R)andY=KSpek(S), X=K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R) \qquad\text{and}\qquad Y=K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(S),

then the product set X×YX\times Y can also be represented as the KK-spectrum of a KK-algebra, namely

X×YKSpek(RKS), X\times Y\cong K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R\otimes_K S),

where \otimes denotes the tensor product. We shall not discuss this in detail. To give some intuition, however, take

R=K[X1,,Xn]/𝔞andS=K[Y1,,Ym]/𝔟. R=K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]/\mathfrak a \qquad\text{and}\qquad S=K[Y_1,\ldots,Y_m]/\mathfrak b.

Then

RKSK[X1,,Xn,Y1,,Ym]/(𝔞+𝔟). R\otimes_K S \cong K[X_1,\ldots,X_n,Y_1,\ldots,Y_m]/(\mathfrak a+\mathfrak b).

With this ad hoc definition, it is not yet clear that the result is independent of the chosen quotient-ring presentations.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0 for translated course text; media retain component rights in authority/RIGHTS-unit-12.csv · Rights record: RIGHTS-unit-12.csv

Worksheet 12

Practice exercises

Exercise 12.1

Explain the concept of a point in Euclidean (coordinate-free) geometry and in Cartesian geometry. In which situations is it useful to introduce coordinates?

Exercise 12.2

What is a point in algebraic geometry? Which notions of a point have you encountered in the course on algebraic curves, and how are they related?

Exercise 12.3

Determine the KK-spectrum of KdK^d.

Exercise 12.4

Determine the \mathbb R-spectrum of the \mathbb R-algebra \mathbb C.

Exercise 12.5

Determine the \mathbb R-spectrum of

[X,Y]/(X2+Y21). \mathbb R[X,Y]/(X^2+Y^2-1).

Exercise 12.6 ★

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and RR a commutative KK-algebra of finite type. Show that the points of

KSpek(R) K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R)

correspond to the maximal ideals of RR.

Exercise 12.7

Let RR be a commutative KK-algebra of finite type. Show that, for every ideal 𝔞R\mathfrak a\subseteq R, we have

V(𝔞)=V(rad(𝔞)) V(\mathfrak a)=V\bigl(\operatorname{rad}(\mathfrak a)\bigr)

inside KSpek(R)K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R).

Exercise 12.8

Show that the Zariski topology on the KK-spectrum of a commutative KK-algebra RR of finite type is indeed a topology.

Exercise 12.9

Let KK be a field and

V𝔸Kn V\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n

an affine algebraic set with vanishing ideal Id(V)\operatorname{Id}(V) and coordinate ring

R:=K[X1,,Xn]/Id(V). R:=K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]/\operatorname{Id}(V).

Show that the KK-spectrum of RR is homeomorphic to VV.

All versions of Hilbert’s Nullstellensatz, such as Corollary 11.11, carry over to the KK-spectrum of a KK-algebra of finite type over an algebraically closed field KK.

Exercise 12.10

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and RR a KK-algebra of finite type. Prove that there is a bijective correspondence between the closed subsets of the KK-spectrum

KSpek(R) K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R)

and the radical ideals of RR.

Exercise 12.11

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and RR a reduced KK-algebra of finite type. Prove the identity theorem in the following form: if f,gRf,g\in R satisfy

f(P)=g(P) f(P)=g(P)

for all PKSpek(R)P\in K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R), then f=gf=g.

Exercise 12.12 ★

Let KK be a field, RR a finitely generated KK-algebra, 𝔞R\mathfrak a\subseteq R an ideal, and

X=KSpek(R). X=K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R).

What is the relationship between the two statements

V(𝔞)=and𝔞 is the unit ideal, V(\mathfrak a)=\varnothing \qquad\text{and}\qquad \mathfrak a\text{ is the unit ideal},

and between the two statements

V(𝔞)=Xand𝔞 is nilpotent? V(\mathfrak a)=X \qquad\text{and}\qquad \mathfrak a\text{ is nilpotent}?

Show that the answer depends on whether KK is algebraically closed.

Exercise 12.13

For a commutative KK-algebra RR of finite type, describe the spectrum map associated with the algebra structure homomorphism

KR. K\longrightarrow R.

Exercise 12.14

Let R,S,TR,S,T be commutative KK-algebras of finite type, and let

φ:RSandψ:ST \varphi:R\longrightarrow S \qquad\text{and}\qquad \psi:S\longrightarrow T

be KK-algebra homomorphisms. Show that the corresponding spectrum maps satisfy

(ψφ)*=φ*ψ*. (\psi\circ\varphi)^*=\varphi^*\circ\psi^*.

Also show that the map Id*\operatorname{Id}^* associated with the identity Id:RR\operatorname{Id}:R\to R is itself the identity.

Exercise 12.15

Give an example of two commutative KK-algebras R,SR,S of finite type and a continuous map between their KK-spectra that cannot arise from a KK-algebra homomorphism.

Exercise 12.16

Let KK be a field, RR a commutative KK-algebra of finite type, and FRF\in R. Let

φ*:KSpek(R)𝔸K1 \varphi^*:K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R)\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^1

be the spectrum map associated with the substitution homomorphism. Show that

(φ*)1(0)=V(F). (\varphi^*)^{-1}(0)=V(F).

Exercise 12.17

Let KK be a field and RR a commutative KK-algebra of finite type, with reduction

S=Rred. S=R_{\mathrm{red}}.

Show that there is a natural homeomorphism

KSpek(R)KSpek(S). K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R) \cong K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(S).

Exercise 12.18

Let KK be a field and let

FiK[X1,,Xn],i=1,,m, F_i\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n], \qquad i=1,\ldots,m,

be polynomials. Let

φ:K[Y1,,Ym]K[X1,,Xn],YiFi \begin{aligned} \varphi:K[Y_1,\ldots,Y_m]&\longrightarrow K[X_1,\ldots,X_n],\\ Y_i&\longmapsto F_i \end{aligned}

be the corresponding substitution homomorphism. Show that, under the identification in Lemma 12.3, the spectrum map

φ*:𝔸Kn=KSpek(K[X1,,Xn])𝔸Km=KSpek(K[Y1,,Ym]) \varphi^*:\mathbb A_K^n =K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]) \longrightarrow \mathbb A_K^m =K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(K[Y_1,\ldots,Y_m])

agrees with the direct polynomial map

(x1,,xn)(F1(x1,,xn),,Fm(x1,,xn)). (x_1,\ldots,x_n)\longmapsto \bigl(F_1(x_1,\ldots,x_n),\ldots,F_m(x_1,\ldots,x_n)\bigr).

Exercise 12.19

Which “functors” in mathematics do you know?

In the following exercises, for an arbitrary topological space—for example a manifold, a subset of n\mathbb R^n, or a real interval—we consider the ring of continuous real-valued functions on it. The spaces should be viewed as analogous to KK-spectra, and their function rings as analogous to coordinate rings.

Exercise 12.20

Let XX be a topological space and

R=C(X,)={f:Xf is continuous}. R=C(X,\mathbb R) =\{f:X\longrightarrow\mathbb R\mid f\text{ is continuous}\}.

Show that RR is a commutative ring.

Exercise 12.21

Consider the ring of continuous functions

R=C(,) R=C(\mathbb R,\mathbb R)

from \mathbb R to \mathbb R. Is this ring an integral domain?

Exercise 12.22

Let TT\subseteq\mathbb R be a subset. Show that, in the ring of continuous functions

R=C(,), R=C(\mathbb R,\mathbb R),

the subset

I={fRf(x)=0 for all xT} I=\{f\in R\mid f(x)=0\text{ for all }x\in T\}

is an ideal of RR.

Exercise 12.23

Consider the ideal associated with

T={0} T=\{0\}\subseteq\mathbb R

in the sense of Exercise 12.22. Is it a principal ideal?

Exercise 12.24

Let XX be a topological space and

R=C0(X,) R=C^0(X,\mathbb R)

the ring of continuous functions on XX. For a subset TXT\subseteq X, show that

I={fRf|T=0} I=\{f\in R\mid f|_T=0\}

is an ideal of RR. Define a ring homomorphism

R/IC0(T,). R/I\longrightarrow C^0(T,\mathbb R).

Is this homomorphism always injective? Is it always surjective?

Exercise 12.25

Let XX and YY be topological spaces and

φ:XY \varphi:X\longrightarrow Y

a continuous map. Show that it induces a ring homomorphism

C(Y,)C(X,),ffφ. \begin{aligned} C(Y,\mathbb R)&\longrightarrow C(X,\mathbb R),\\ f&\longmapsto f\circ\varphi. \end{aligned}

Exercise 12.26

Let XX\subseteq\mathbb R and let C(X,)C(X,\mathbb R) be the ring of continuous functions from XX to \mathbb R. Restriction of functions gives a ring homomorphism

φ:C(,)C(X,),ff|X. \begin{aligned} \varphi:C(\mathbb R,\mathbb R)&\longrightarrow C(X,\mathbb R),\\ f&\longmapsto f|_X. \end{aligned}

  1. Show that φ\varphi is surjective if and only if XX is closed.
  2. For which sets XX is φ\varphi injective?

Exercises for submission

Exercise 12.27 (4 points: 2+2)

Let KK be an infinite field, RR a commutative KK-algebra of finite type, and FRF\in R. Let

φ*:KSpek(R)𝔸K1 \varphi^*:K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R)\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^1

be the spectrum map associated with the substitution homomorphism.

  1. Show that FF is constant if and only if φ*\varphi^* is constant.
  2. Show that this statement need not hold for a finite field.

Hint: Also note the different meanings of “constant” in these two contexts.

Edition note: Part (1), as stated in the source, needs an additional hypothesis: infinitude of KK alone is insufficient. For example, in R=K[ε]/(ε2)R=K[\varepsilon]/(\varepsilon^2) the nonconstant element F=εF=\varepsilon induces the constant zero function, even when KK is infinite. A sufficient correction is to assume that KK is algebraically closed and RR is reduced, as in Exercise 12.11. More generally, it suffices that evaluation on KK-points separates elements of RR. This is an editorial clarification of the hypothesis, not a public source solution.

Exercise 12.28 (4 points)

Give an example of two \mathbb C-algebras RR and SS of finite type that are integral domains, and a \mathbb C-algebra homomorphism

φ:RS, \varphi:R\longrightarrow S,

which is not a ring isomorphism, but whose induced spectrum map

φ*:Spek(S)Spek(R) \varphi^*: \mathbb C\!\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(S) \longrightarrow \mathbb C\!\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R)

is a homeomorphism.

Exercise 12.29 (3 points)

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and RR a KK-algebra of finite type. Consider the finite extension

φ:RS=R[X]/(Xn+rn1Xn1++r2X2+r1X+r0). \varphi:R\longrightarrow S=R[X]/\left( X^n+r_{n-1}X^{n-1}+\cdots+r_2X^2+r_1X+r_0 \right).

Show that

φ*:KSpek(S)KSpek(R) \varphi^*:K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(S) \longrightarrow K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R)

is surjective.

Exercise 12.30 (5 points)

Consider the ideal

𝔞=(U5V3,U11W3,V11W5)K[U,V,W] \mathfrak a= \left(U^5-V^3,\,U^{11}-W^3,\,V^{11}-W^5\right) \subseteq K[U,V,W]

and its zero locus

Z=V(𝔞)𝔸K3. Z=V(\mathfrak a)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^3.

Show that WU2VW-U^2V belongs to the radical of 𝔞\mathfrak a. Use this to show that ZZ is isomorphic to a plane algebraic curve.

Hint: Use the fact that a radical is the intersection of all prime ideals containing it, or reduce to the case where KK is algebraically closed.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Public Solutions to Worksheet 12

At the frozen revision boundary, the source provides public solutions only to Exercises 12.6 and 12.12. No additional solutions have been created for this edition.

Solution to Exercise 12.6

A KK-point is a KK-algebra homomorphism

φ:AK. \varphi:A\longrightarrow K.

Since AA is a KK-algebra, this homomorphism is surjective. Its kernel is a maximal ideal of AA. Since AA is of finite type over an algebraically closed field, the theorem that maximal ideals in an algebra of finite type over an algebraically closed field are point ideals applies. Thus the residue field at every maximal ideal equals KK.

Edition note: The exercise names the algebra RR, whereas the source solution uses AA. The source solution’s notation AA is retained here.

Back to Exercise 12.6.

Solution to Exercise 12.12

If 𝔞\mathfrak a is the unit ideal, then V(𝔞)=V(\mathfrak a)=\varnothing, because 11 vanishes at no point. The converse holds if KK is algebraically closed. Indeed, from

V(1)V(𝔞) V(1)\subseteq V(\mathfrak a)

—since both sets are empty—Hilbert’s Nullstellensatz immediately gives

1=1n𝔞. 1=1^n\in\mathfrak a.

For K=K=\mathbb R, the converse fails. The polynomial

F=X2+1 F=X^2+1

is not a unit, but its zero locus is empty.

If 𝔞\mathfrak a is nilpotent, then every element of it is nilpotent and therefore vanishes under every ring homomorphism to a field, since fields are reduced. For an algebraically closed ground field, the converse again holds. If V(𝔞)=XV(\mathfrak a)=X, then for each f𝔞f\in\mathfrak a we have

V(𝔞)V(f)=X=V(0). V(\mathfrak a)\subseteq V(f)=X=V(0).

By Hilbert’s Nullstellensatz, this implies

fn=0, f^n=0,

so ff is nilpotent. In a Noetherian ring, this also implies that the ideal 𝔞\mathfrak a itself is nilpotent.

Over a finite field, this converse fails. For K=𝔽2K=\mathbb F_2, the polynomial

X2XK[X] X^2-X\in K[X]

is not nilpotent, but vanishes at both points—that is, at all points—of KK.

Back to Exercise 12.12.

English Markdown source · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Lecture 13: The open sets D(f)D(f), connectedness, and idempotent elements

The open sets D(f)D(f)

We shall show that the Zariski-open subsets

D(f)KSpek(R) D(f)\subseteq K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R)

are themselves homeomorphic to the KK-spectrum of a KK-algebra of finite type. For this we need the notions of a multiplicative system and localisation.

Definition: multiplicative system

Let RR be a commutative ring. A subset SRS\subseteq R is called a multiplicative system if it satisfies the following two properties:

  1. 1S1\in S;
  2. if f,gSf,g\in S, then fgSfg\in S.

Example: powers of an element

Let RR be a commutative ring and fRf\in R. The powers

{fnn} \{f^n\mid n\in\mathbb N\}

form a multiplicative system.

Definition: localisation inside the field of fractions

Let RR be an integral domain and SRS\subseteq R a multiplicative system with 0S0\notin S. The subring

RS:={fg|fR,gS}Q(R) R_S:=\left\{\frac fg\mathrel{\Big|} f\in R,\ g\in S\right\} \subseteq Q(R)

is called the localisation of RR at SS.

For localisation at a single element ff, we simply write RfR_f instead of R{fnn}R_{\{f^n\mid n\in\mathbb N\}}. For the definition of localisation for arbitrary commutative rings, see Exercise 13.1.

Theorem: D(f)D(f) as the KK-spectrum of RfR_f

Let KK be a field, RR a KK-algebra of finite type, and fRf\in R. The Zariski-open set

D(f)KSpek(R) D(f)\subseteq K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R)

is naturally homeomorphic to KSpek(Rf)K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R_f).

Proof

Consider the canonical KK-algebra homomorphism

φ:RRf \varphi:R\longrightarrow R_f

and its spectrum map

φ*:KSpek(Rf)KSpek(R),PPφ. \begin{aligned} \varphi^*:K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R_f)&\longrightarrow K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R),\\ P&\longmapsto P\circ\varphi. \end{aligned}

By Theorem 12.7 this map is continuous. Since ff becomes a unit in RfR_f, for every PP we have

f(Pφ)=P(φ(f))0. f(P\circ\varphi)=P(\varphi(f))\ne0.

Thus the image of φ*\varphi^* lies in D(f)D(f).

Conversely, take QD(f)Q\in D(f). Thus Q:RKQ:R\to K is a KK-algebra homomorphism with Q(f)0Q(f)\ne0. The element Q(f)Q(f) is a unit in KK. By the universal property of localisation (see Exercise 13.6), QQ extends to a homomorphism RfKR_f\to K. This extension is the required preimage, so φ*\varphi^* is surjective as a map to D(f)D(f).

To prove injectivity, let P1,P2:RfKP_1,P_2:R_f\to K be two KK-algebra homomorphisms whose composites with RRfR\to R_f agree. For rRr\in R and ss\in\mathbb N we have

P1(rfs)=P1(rfs)=P1(r)P1(fs)1, P_1\!\left(\frac r{f^s}\right) =P_1(rf^{-s}) =P_1(r)P_1(f^s)^{-1},

and the same formula holds for P2P_2. Since their values on RR agree, we obtain P1=P2P_1=P_2.

Finally, the Zariski-open sets of KSpek(Rf)K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R_f) are covered by sets D(g)D(g) with gRfg\in R_f. Since ff is a unit in RfR_f, we may take gRg\in R. This set D(g)D(g) equals

(φ*)1(D(gf)), (\varphi^*)^{-1}(D(gf)),

where D(gf)D(gf) on the right is an open set in KSpek(R)K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R). Thus the bijection above is a homeomorphism.

Remark: a closed realisation of D(f)D(f)

Theorem 13.4 says in particular that the open set

D(f)KSpek(R) D(f)\subseteq K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R)

is itself the KK-spectrum of a KK-algebra of finite type, namely RfR_f, which is generated over RR by 1/f1/f. Since

RfR[T]/(Tf1) R_f\cong R[T]/(Tf-1)

(see Exercise 13.4), it can be realised as a closed set in an affine space. If

R=K[X1,,Xn]/𝔞, R=K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]/\mathfrak a,

then the surjective ring homomorphism

K[X1,,Xn,T](K[X1,,Xn]/𝔞)[T](K[X1,,Xn]/𝔞)[T](Tf1)Rf K[X_1,\ldots,X_n,T] \longrightarrow \bigl(K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]/\mathfrak a\bigr)[T] \longrightarrow \frac{\bigl(K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]/\mathfrak a\bigr)[T]}{(Tf-1)} \cong R_f

gives a closed embedding of D(f)D(f) into 𝔸Kn+1\mathbb A_K^{n+1} by Proposition 12.8(3). If ψ\psi is the composite inclusion

D(f)KSpek(R)𝔸Kn, D(f)\subseteq K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n,

this closed embedding can also be viewed as

ψ×1f:D(f)𝔸Kn×𝔸K1. \psi\times\frac1f: D(f)\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^n\times\mathbb A_K^1.

Here the product of varieties appears again.

Example: the punctured affine line as a hyperbola

Continuing Remark 13.5, consider the open set

D(X)={P𝔸K1P0}𝔸K1. D(X)=\{P\in\mathbb A_K^1\mid P\ne0\}\subset\mathbb A_K^1.

This set is called the punctured affine line. On it, XX is invertible, so the rational function 1/X1/X is defined. Together with the open inclusion D(X)𝔸K1D(X)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^1, this function gives a closed inclusion

D(X)V(XY1)𝔸K2,x(x,1x). \begin{aligned} D(X)&\longrightarrow V(XY-1)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^2,\\ x&\longmapsto\left(x,\frac1x\right). \end{aligned}

Its image is a hyperbola closed in the affine plane. Thus the punctured affine line and this hyperbola are homeomorphic; the corresponding rings,

K[X]X=K[X,X1]andK[X,Y]/(XY1), K[X]_X=K[X,X^{-1}] \qquad\text{and}\qquad K[X,Y]/(XY-1),

are also isomorphic.

Two branches of the hyperbola y equals one over x in the coordinate plane

Graph of the hyperbola y=1/xy=1/x; Ktims, CC BY-SA 3.0.

Connectedness and idempotent elements

We want to understand how connectedness of an affine algebraic set is reflected in its coordinate ring, and how its connected components can be characterised. The following example shows that a satisfactory theory cannot be expected over a field that is not algebraically closed.

Example: connectedness can change after a field extension

As in Example 11.5, consider the two algebraic curves

V1=V(X2+Y22)andV2=V(X2+2Y21)𝔸K2. V_1=V(X^2+Y^2-2) \quad\text{and}\quad V_2=V(X^2+2Y^2-1)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^2.

Their intersection is described by the ideal

(X2+Y22,X2+2Y21)=(Y2+1,X23). (X^2+Y^2-2,\,X^2+2Y^2-1) =(Y^2+1,\,X^2-3).

For K=K=\mathbb R we have V1V2=V_1\cap V_2=\varnothing. Consequently,

V=V1V2 V=V_1\cup V_2

is disconnected; V1V_1 and V2V_2 are both its irreducible components and its connected components. The coordinate ring of VV is

[X,Y]/((X2+Y22)(X2+2Y21)). \mathbb R[X,Y]/\bigl((X^2+Y^2-2)(X^2+2Y^2-1)\bigr).

One might expect the function on VV that is constantly 11 on V1V_1 and constantly 00 on V2V_2 to occur in the coordinate ring. This is not so. The reason is that, after extending scalars to the complex numbers, VV_{\mathbb C} is connected. Hence the complex coordinate ring has only trivial idempotents, and this property passes to the real coordinate ring.

Definition: idempotent element

An element ee of a commutative ring is called idempotent if

e2=e. e^2=e.

The elements 00 and 11 are idempotent.

Definition: product ring

Let R1,,RnR_1,\ldots,R_n be commutative rings. The product

R1××Rn, R_1\times\cdots\times R_n,

with componentwise addition and multiplication, is called the product ring of the RiR_i, i=1,,ni=1,\ldots,n.

A product ring has many idempotents, namely elements each of whose components is either 00 or 11.

Definition: connected ring

A commutative ring RR is called connected if it has exactly two idempotent elements, namely 010\ne1.

One unbroken red shape and two separate green shapes

A connected topological space (red) and a disconnected space (green); Dbc334, public domain.

Definition: connected topological space

A topological space XX is called connected if exactly two subsets of XX—namely \varnothing and the whole space XX\ne\varnothing—are both open and closed.

The empty set and the whole space are always both open and closed. Such sets are also called boundaryless or clopen. The empty topological space is not considered connected, since it has only one subset that is both open and closed.

Lemma: the KK-spectrum of a product ring

Let KK be a field and R1,R2R_1,R_2 KK-algebras of finite type. For R=R1×R2R=R_1\times R_2 there is a natural homeomorphism

KSpek(R1×R2)KSpek(R1)KSpek(R2). K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R_1\times R_2) \cong K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R_1) \mathbin{\uplus} K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R_2).

The embeddings from right to left are induced by the projections RRiR\to R_i, i=1,2i=1,2.

Proof

The projection R1×R2R1R_1\times R_2\to R_1 is a KK-algebra homomorphism and, by Proposition 12.8(3), induces a continuous map—indeed, a closed embedding—

KSpek(R1)KSpek(R1×R2). K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R_1) \longrightarrow K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R_1\times R_2).

The same holds for R2R_2. Together, the two maps give a continuous map from the disjoint union on the right to the left-hand side.

Take PKSpek(R1×R2)P\in K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R_1\times R_2), that is, a KK-algebra homomorphism P:R1×R2KP:R_1\times R_2\to K. Let

e1=(1,0),e2=(0,1). e_1=(1,0),\qquad e_2=(0,1).

Since e1+e2=1e_1+e_2=1 and e1e2=0e_1e_2=0, exactly one of these elements maps under PP to 00, and the other to 11. If, say, e1e_1 maps to 00, then R1×0R_1\times0 maps to 00 as well. Thus PP factors through one of the projections. This proves surjectivity.

For injectivity, take two distinct points in the disjoint union. If they lie in the same component, their images remain distinct because the map on that component is a closed embedding. If they lie in different components, their values on e1e_1 are 00 and 11, respectively, so they are also distinct as points of the spectrum of the product.

This bijective map is a homeomorphism because the two closed embeddings combine to form a closed map.

Theorem: idempotent elements and clopen subsets

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and RR a reduced commutative KK-algebra of finite type. The map

eD(e) e\longmapsto D(e)

gives a bijection between the idempotent elements of RR and the subsets of KSpek(R)K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R) that are both open and closed.

Proof

First,

D(e)=V(1e) D(e)=V(1-e)

is both open and closed. This follows from

D(e)D(1e)=D(1)=KSpek(R) D(e)\cup D(1-e)=D(1)=K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R)

and

D(e)D(1e)=D(e(1e))=D(ee2)=D(0)=. D(e)\cap D(1-e)=D(e(1-e))=D(e-e^2)=D(0)=\varnothing.

Thus the map is well-defined.

Let e1,e2e_1,e_2 be idempotents with

U=D(e1)=D(e2). U=D(e_1)=D(e_2).

An idempotent in a field can take only the values 00 and 11. Thus both e1e_1 and e2e_2 take the value 11 on UU and 00 outside UU. They have the same value at every point. The identity theorem for reduced algebras over an algebraically closed field gives e1=e2e_1=e_2. This proves injectivity.

Now let U=D(𝔞)U=D(\mathfrak a) be both open and closed. There is another ideal 𝔟\mathfrak b with

D(𝔞)D(𝔟)=KSpek(R),D(𝔞)D(𝔟)=. D(\mathfrak a)\cup D(\mathfrak b) =K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R), \qquad D(\mathfrak a)\cap D(\mathfrak b)=\varnothing.

By Corollary 11.12, 𝔞\mathfrak a and 𝔟\mathfrak b together generate the unit ideal. Thus there are a𝔞a\in\mathfrak a and b𝔟b\in\mathfrak b with a+b=1a+b=1. Since

D(a)D(b)=D(ab)=, D(a)\cap D(b)=D(ab)=\varnothing,

Exercise 12.11 says that abab is nilpotent. The ring RR is reduced, so ab=0ab=0. Consequently,

a=a1=a(a+b)=a2+ab=a2, a=a\cdot1=a(a+b)=a^2+ab=a^2,

so aa is idempotent. Since D(a)D(𝔞)D(a)\subseteq D(\mathfrak a), D(b)D(𝔟)D(b)\subseteq D(\mathfrak b), and D(a)D(b)=KSpek(R)D(a)\cup D(b)=K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R), we obtain

U=D(𝔞)=D(a). U=D(\mathfrak a)=D(a).

This proves surjectivity.

It follows that, over an algebraically closed field, a reduced KK-algebra RR of finite type is connected if and only if KSpek(R)K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R) is connected.

The last statement also holds without the reducedness assumption, since idempotent elements correspond bijectively after passing to the reduction; see Exercises 13.27 and 13.30.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0 for translated course text; media retain component rights in authority/RIGHTS-unit-13.csv · Rights record: RIGHTS-unit-13.csv

Worksheet 13

Practice exercises

Exercise 13.1

Let RR be a commutative ring and SRS\subseteq R a multiplicative system. The localisation RSR_S is defined step by step as follows. First, let MM be the set of formal fractions with denominator in SS, namely

M={rs|rR,sS}. M=\left\{\frac rs\mathrel{\Big|}r\in R,\ s\in S\right\}.

Show that

rsrsthere is tS with trs=trs \frac rs\sim\frac{r'}{s'} \quad\Longleftrightarrow\quad \text{there is }t\in S\text{ with }trs'=tr's

defines an equivalence relation on MM. Denote its set of equivalence classes by RSR_S. Define a ring structure on RSR_S and a ring homomorphism RRSR\to R_S.

Exercise 13.2

Let RR be an integral domain and SRS\subseteq R a multiplicative system with 0S0\notin S.

  1. Show that the localisation

    RS:={fg|fR,gS}Q(R) R_S:=\left\{\frac fg\mathrel{\Big|}f\in R,\ g\in S\right\} \subseteq Q(R)

    is a subring of Q(R)Q(R).

  2. Show that not every subring of Q(R)Q(R) is a localisation.

Exercise 13.3 ★

Show that the field of rational numbers \mathbb Q has uncountably many subrings.

Exercise 13.4

Let RR be a commutative ring and fRf\in R, with localisation RfR_f. Prove the RR-algebra isomorphism

RfR[T]/(Tf1). R_f\cong R[T]/(Tf-1).

Exercise 13.5

Let RR be a commutative ring, fRf\in R, and RfR_f the corresponding localisation. Show that ff is nilpotent if and only if RfR_f is the zero ring.

In the following exercises on localisation, you may assume, if you wish, that the rings involved are integral domains.

Exercise 13.6 ★

Let R,AR,A be commutative rings, SRS\subseteq R a multiplicative system, and

φ:RA \varphi:R\longrightarrow A

a ring homomorphism such that φ(s)\varphi(s) is a unit in AA for every sSs\in S. Show that there is a unique ring homomorphism

φ̃:RSA \widetilde\varphi:R_S\longrightarrow A

extending φ\varphi.

Exercise 13.7

Let RR be a commutative ring and SRS\subseteq R a multiplicative system. Show that the prime ideals of RSR_S correspond precisely to the prime ideals of RR disjoint from SS.

Exercise 13.8 ★

Let KK be a field, R=K[X,Y]R=K[X,Y], SRS\subseteq R a multiplicative system, and FRF\in R. Show that there is a unique RR-algebra isomorphism

(R/(F))S(RS)/(F), (R/(F))_S\cong (R_S)/(F),

where the localisation on the left is taken at the image of SS in R/(F)R/(F).

Exercise 13.9 ★

Let RR be a commutative ring, 𝔞R\mathfrak a\subseteq R an ideal, and SRS\subseteq R a multiplicative system. Show that there is a natural ring isomorphism

(R/𝔞)SRS/𝔞RS, (R/\mathfrak a)_S\cong R_S/\mathfrak aR_S,

where the localisation on the left is taken at the image of SS in R/𝔞R/\mathfrak a.

Exercise 13.10

Let KK be an algebraically closed field, R,SR,S commutative KK-algebras of finite type, fRf\in R, and

φ:RS \varphi:R\longrightarrow S

a KK-algebra homomorphism. Show that the spectrum map φ*\varphi^* factors through D(f)D(f) if and only if φ(f)\varphi(f) is a unit in SS.

Exercise 13.11 ★

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and RR a KK-algebra of finite type that is an integral domain. For f,gRf,g\in R, show that the following statements are equivalent:

  1. D(f)D(g)D(f)\subseteq D(g);
  2. there is an RR-algebra homomorphism RgRfR_g\to R_f.

Also show that this equivalence fails for K=K=\mathbb R.

The following exercise uses the notion of a saturated multiplicative system. A multiplicative system SS in a commutative ring RR is called saturated if the following holds: whenever gRg\in R divides some fSf\in S, we also have gSg\in S.

Exercise 13.12

Let A,BA,B be commutative rings and φ:AB\varphi:A\to B a ring homomorphism. Show that the inverse image

φ1(B×) \varphi^{-1}(B^\times)

of the unit group is a saturated multiplicative system in AA.

Exercise 13.13

Let RR be a commutative ring. Show that the set of all non-zero-divisors in RR forms a saturated multiplicative system.

Exercise 13.14 ★

Give an example of a \mathbb C-algebra RR of finite type that is an integral domain, and a multiplicative system SRS\subseteq R, 0S0\notin S, such that RSR_S is not a field, but every maximal ideal of RR becomes the unit ideal in RSR_S.

Exercise 13.15 ★

Show that every integral domain is a connected ring.

Exercise 13.16

Let RR be a commutative ring and fRf\in R. If ff is both nilpotent and idempotent, show that f=0f=0.

Exercise 13.17 ★

For every n2n\ge2, give a commutative ring RR and an element xRx\in R, x0x\ne0, satisfying

nx=0andxn=0. nx=0 \qquad\text{and}\qquad x^n=0.

Exercise 13.18

Let RR be a commutative ring and eRe\in R an idempotent element. Show that there is a natural ring isomorphism

ReR/(1e). R_e\cong R/(1-e).

This shows once again that D(e)D(e) is both open and closed.

Exercise 13.19

Let R,SR,S be commutative rings. Show that the subset R×0R\times0 of the product ring R×SR\times S is a principal ideal.

Exercise 13.20 ★

Let pp\in\mathbb Z be a prime number and nn\in\mathbb N. Show that the residue class ring /(pn)\mathbb Z/(p^n) has only the two trivial idempotents, 00 and 11.

Edition note: To have two distinct idempotents one needs n1n\ge1. The source allows nn\in\mathbb N; at n=0n=0 the quotient is the zero ring, in which 0=10=1 is its only element.

Exercise 13.21 ★

Write the residue class ring

[X]/(X41) \mathbb Q[X]/(X^4-1)

as a product of fields involving only \mathbb Q and [i]\mathbb Q[\mathrm i]. Write the residue class of X3+XX^3+X as a tuple in this product decomposition.

Exercise 13.22

Let KK be a field, a1,,anKa_1,\ldots,a_n\in K distinct elements, and

F=(Xa1)(Xan)K[X]. F=(X-a_1)\cdots(X-a_n)\in K[X].

Show that the residue class ring K[X]/(F)K[X]/(F) is isomorphic to the product ring KnK^n.

Exercise 13.23

Let KK be an algebraically closed field. Show that, for every nonzero polynomial FK[X]F\in K[X], its residue class ring has the structure

K[X]/(F)K[T]/(Tn1)××K[T]/(Tnr). K[X]/(F) \cong K[T]/(T^{n_1})\times\cdots\times K[T]/(T^{n_r}).

Also show that

deg(F)=n1++nr. \deg(F)=n_1+\cdots+n_r.

Exercise 13.24 ★

Let KK be a field and

A=K[X1,,Xm]/𝔞,B=K[Y1,,Yn]/𝔟 A=K[X_1,\ldots,X_m]/\mathfrak a, \qquad B=K[Y_1,\ldots,Y_n]/\mathfrak b

KK-algebras of finite type. Set

=max(m,n). \ell=\max(m,n).

Show that the KK-spectrum of the product ring A×BA\times B can be realised as a closed subset of 𝔸K+1\mathbb A_K^{\ell+1}.

Exercise 13.25

Let XX be a nonempty disconnected topological space. Show that there is a continuous function

f:X,f0,1, f:X\longrightarrow\mathbb R, \qquad f\ne0,1,

where \mathbb R has the metric topology, that is idempotent in the ring of continuous functions on XX.

Exercise 13.26

Let XX be a topological space with a disjoint decomposition

X=UV X=U\mathbin{\uplus}V

into open subsets U,VXU,V\subseteq X. Show that the natural map

C(X,)C(U,)×C(V,),f(f|U,f|V) \begin{aligned} C(X,\mathbb R)&\longrightarrow C(U,\mathbb R)\times C(V,\mathbb R),\\ f&\longmapsto(f|_U,f|_V) \end{aligned}

is bijective.

Exercise 13.27 ★

Let RR be a commutative ring with reduction SS. Show that the map sending each idempotent of RR to its residue class in SS is injective.

Exercise 13.28 ★

Let RR be a commutative ring with an element nRn\in R such that n2=0n^2=0, and let

S=R/(n). S=R/(n).

Show that every idempotent element ee of SS has an idempotent preimage in RR.

Exercise 13.29

Let RR be a Noetherian commutative ring with reduction SS. Show that there is a sequence of commutative rings RiR_i, 1in1\le i\le n, and surjective ring homomorphisms

φi:RiRi+1 \varphi_i:R_i\longrightarrow R_{i+1}

such that the composite map

R=R0R1Rn1Rn=S R=R_0\longrightarrow R_1\longrightarrow\cdots \longrightarrow R_{n-1}\longrightarrow R_n=S

is the reduction map, and each φi\varphi_i is the quotient homomorphism RiRi/(xi)R_i\to R_i/(x_i) for some xiRix_i\in R_i with xi2=0x_i^2=0.

Edition note: The source writes the domain and codomain of the last quotient homomorphism as RR/(xi)R\to R/(x_i); the notation RiRi/(xi)R_i\to R_i/(x_i) above follows the context of the sequence and the element xiRix_i\in R_i.

Exercise 13.30

Let RR be a commutative ring with reduction SS. Show that the map sending each idempotent of RR to its residue class in SS is surjective.

The following statement is a version of the Chinese remainder theorem.

Exercise 13.31 ★

Let RR be a commutative ring and let 𝔞j\mathfrak a_j, j=1,,nj=1,\ldots,n, be ideals satisfying

𝔞i+𝔞j=R \mathfrak a_i+\mathfrak a_j=R

for all iji\ne j. Show that

R/(𝔞1𝔞n)R/𝔞1××R/𝔞n. R/(\mathfrak a_1\cdots\mathfrak a_n) \cong R/\mathfrak a_1\times\cdots\times R/\mathfrak a_n.

Exercises for submission

Exercise 13.32 (4 points)

Let RR be a principal ideal domain with field of fractions Q=Q(R)Q=Q(R). Show that every intermediate ring

RSQ R\subseteq S\subseteq Q

is a localisation.

Exercise 13.33 (5 points: 1+2+1+1)

Consider the curve CC given by

Y2=X3+X2 Y^2=X^3+X^2

(see Example 6.3) and the open set U=D(X)CU=D(X)\subseteq C.

  1. Find a closed realisation of UU in 𝔸K3\mathbb A_K^3.

  2. Show that there is also a closed realisation in 𝔸K2\mathbb A_K^2.

  3. Is UU isomorphic to an open subset of the affine line?

  4. Sketch the image curve under the map

    U𝔸2,(x,y)(1x,y). \begin{aligned} U&\longrightarrow\mathbb A_{\mathbb R}^2,\\ (x,y)&\longmapsto\left(\frac1x,y\right). \end{aligned}

Exercise 13.34 (4 points)

Consider the union VV of two parallel lines and the union WW of the coordinate axes. Describe a surjective map between VV and WW that is as natural as possible—decide in which direction—both geometrically and algebraically. Is there also a surjective polynomial map in the opposite direction?

Exercise 13.35 (3 points)

Determine all nilpotent elements and all idempotent elements of /(175)\mathbb Z/(175).

Exercise 13.36 (4 points)

Let KK be an algebraically closed field. Consider the intersection of the two algebraic curves

V(X2+Y21)andV(YX2). V(X^2+Y^2-1) \qquad\text{and}\qquad V(Y-X^2).

Identify the residue class ring

R=K[X,Y]/(X2+Y21,YX2) R=K[X,Y]/(X^2+Y^2-1,\,Y-X^2)

with a product ring, and describe the quotient map K[X,Y]RK[X,Y]\to R using this identification. Determine preimages in K[X,Y]K[X,Y] for all the idempotents of that product ring.

Exercise 13.37 (6 points)

Let KK be a field and AA a finite-dimensional reduced KK-algebra. Show that AA is a finite direct product of finite field extensions of KK.

Hint. You may use without proof that AA has only finitely many prime ideals.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Public Solutions to Worksheet 13

At the frozen revision boundary, the source provides public solutions only to Exercises 13.3, 13.6, 13.8, 13.9, 13.11, 13.14, 13.15, 13.17, 13.20, 13.21, 13.24, 13.27, 13.28, and 13.31. No additional solutions have been created for this edition.

Solution to Exercise 13.3

Let TT be a subset of the set of prime numbers. Since there are infinitely many prime numbers, there are uncountably many choices of TT. Associate with TT the multiplicative system M(T)M(T) consisting of all integers whose prime factorisations contain only primes from TT. The localisation

M(T) \mathbb Z_{M(T)}\subseteq\mathbb Q

consists of all rational numbers that can be written with a denominator whose prime factorisation uses only primes from TT. Uniqueness of prime factorisation in \mathbb Z shows that these subrings are distinct for distinct choices of TT.

Back to Exercise 13.3.

Solution to Exercise 13.6

For the diagram of ring homomorphisms to commute, we must have

φ̃(1/s)=φ(s)1 \widetilde\varphi(1/s)=\varphi(s)^{-1}

for sSs\in S, and hence

φ̃(a/s)=φ(a)φ(s)1. \widetilde\varphi(a/s)=\varphi(a)\varphi(s)^{-1}.

Thus there is at most one such ring homomorphism, and it must be given by the last formula.

We need to show that this formula is well-defined. Let a/s=b/ta/s=b/t with s,tSs,t\in S. This means that there is an rSr\in S such that rta=rsbrta=rsb. Then

φ(r)φ(t)φ(a)=φ(r)φ(s)φ(b). \varphi(r)\varphi(t)\varphi(a) =\varphi(r)\varphi(s)\varphi(b).

Multiplying both sides by the unit φ(r)1φ(t)1φ(s)1\varphi(r)^{-1}\varphi(t)^{-1}\varphi(s)^{-1} gives

φ(a)φ(s)1=φ(b)φ(t)1. \varphi(a)\varphi(s)^{-1} =\varphi(b)\varphi(t)^{-1}.

As an example of verifying the homomorphism properties, for addition we obtain

φ̃(as+bt)=φ̃(at+bsst)=φ(at+bs)φ(st)1=(φ(a)φ(t)+φ(s)φ(b))φ(s)1φ(t)1=φ(a)φ(s)1+φ(b)φ(t)1=φ̃(as)+φ̃(bt). \begin{aligned} \widetilde\varphi\!\left(\frac as+\frac bt\right) &=\widetilde\varphi\!\left(\frac{at+bs}{st}\right)\\ &=\varphi(at+bs)\varphi(st)^{-1}\\ &=(\varphi(a)\varphi(t)+\varphi(s)\varphi(b)) \varphi(s)^{-1}\varphi(t)^{-1}\\ &=\varphi(a)\varphi(s)^{-1}+\varphi(b)\varphi(t)^{-1}\\ &=\widetilde\varphi\!\left(\frac as\right) +\widetilde\varphi\!\left(\frac bt\right). \end{aligned}

Back to Exercise 13.6.

Solution to Exercise 13.8

All homomorphisms below are RR-algebra homomorphisms and are uniquely determined by the stated properties. The homomorphism RRSR\to R_S first induces

R/(F)RS/(F). R/(F)\longrightarrow R_S/(F).

Since the image of SS in R/(F)R/(F) becomes units in RS/(F)R_S/(F), the universal property of localisation gives a homomorphism

(R/(F))SRS/(F),rs(rs)¯. (R/(F))_S\longrightarrow R_S/(F), \qquad \frac{\bar r}{\bar s}\longmapsto\overline{\left(\frac rs\right)}.

This map is surjective: every element on the right is represented by r/sr/s with sSs\in S and comes from r/s\bar r/\bar s.

For injectivity, suppose that r/s\bar r/\bar s maps to 00. Then r/s(F)RSr/s\in(F)R_S, so r/s=Fa/tr/s=Fa/t for some aRa\in R and tSt\in S. Translating this equality back into RR gives

tr=sFa. tr=sFa.

Thus tr=0tr=0 in R/(F)R/(F). Since tSt\in S, this gives r/s=0\bar r/\bar s=0 in (R/(F))S(R/(F))_S.

Edition note: The source’s cancellation in R=K[X,Y]R=K[X,Y] assumes 0S0\notin S. If 0S0\in S, both localised rings are zero and the asserted isomorphism is immediate; the displayed cross-multiplication argument is used only in the other case.

Back to Exercise 13.8.

Solution to Exercise 13.9

The ring homomorphism

RRS/𝔞RS R\longrightarrow R_S/\mathfrak aR_S

sends 𝔞\mathfrak a to 00 and therefore induces a homomorphism

R/𝔞RS/𝔞RS. R/\mathfrak a\longrightarrow R_S/\mathfrak aR_S.

The universal property of localisation then induces

(R/𝔞)SRS/𝔞RS,[r]s[rs]. (R/\mathfrak a)_S\longrightarrow R_S/\mathfrak aR_S, \qquad \frac{[r]}s\longmapsto\left[\frac rs\right].

This formula immediately shows surjectivity. If the image [r/s][r/s] is zero, then r/s𝔞RSr/s\in\mathfrak aR_S, and hence r𝔞RSr\in\mathfrak aR_S. Thus there is a tSt\in S with tr𝔞tr\in\mathfrak a. Hence [tr]=0[tr]=0 in R/𝔞R/\mathfrak a, and consequently [r]/s=0[r]/s=0 in (R/𝔞)S(R/\mathfrak a)_S. The map is therefore also injective.

Edition note: The source writes [r/s]𝔞RS[r/s]\in\mathfrak aR_S in the kernel argument. The ideal-membership statement concerns the representative r/sr/s in RSR_S, as made explicit above.

Back to Exercise 13.9.

Solution to Exercise 13.11

If (2) holds, we can in particular write

1g=rfn,or equivalentlyfn=rg. \frac1g=\frac r{f^n}, \qquad\text{or equivalently}\qquad f^n=rg.

Thus gg divides a power of ff, that is, frad(g)f\in\operatorname{rad}(g). Conversely, if frad(g)f\in\operatorname{rad}(g), then gg is a unit in RfR_f, and the universal property of localisation gives an RR-algebra homomorphism RgRfR_g\to R_f.

From frad(g)f\in\operatorname{rad}(g) it follows immediately that ff vanishes on V(g)V(g), so V(g)V(f)V(g)\subseteq V(f). If KK is algebraically closed, the reverse implication follows from Hilbert’s Nullstellensatz. Since D(f)D(g)D(f)\subseteq D(g) is equivalent to V(g)V(f)V(g)\subseteq V(f), the two statements in the exercise are equivalent.

Edition note: The source’s fraction argument applies directly when f,g0f,g\ne0. If f=0f=0, both conditions hold because D(0)=D(0)=\varnothing and R0R_0 is the zero ring. If f0f\ne0 and g=0g=0, neither holds: D(f)D(f)\ne\varnothing by the Nullstellensatz, and there is no unital homomorphism from the zero ring to the nonzero ring RfR_f.

For K=K=\mathbb R, take R=K[X]R=K[X], f=1f=1, and g=X2+1g=X^2+1. The polynomial gg has no real zero, so

V(g)==V(1) V(g)=\varnothing=V(1)

and D(f)D(g)D(f)\subseteq D(g), but gg is not a unit in Rf=RR_f=R.

Edition note: In the last example, the source displays V(g)=𝔸1=V(1)V(g)=\mathbb A_{\mathbb R}^1=V(1). Both zero loci in question are empty; the relation between the open sets remains as stated above.

Back to Exercise 13.11.

Solution to Exercise 13.14

Take

R=[X,Y] R=\mathbb C[X,Y]

and let SS be the multiplicative system consisting of all products of elements of the form XaX-a, aa\in\mathbb C. The maximal ideals of RR have the form

(Xa,Yb). (X-a,Y-b).

Thus every maximal ideal contains an element of SS and becomes the unit ideal in RSR_S. However, RSR_S is not a field: precisely the prime elements XaX-a are made into units, whereas other prime elements, such as YY, are not.

Back to Exercise 13.14.

Solution to Exercise 13.15

An idempotent element ee satisfies

e(1e)=ee2=ee=0. e(1-e)=e-e^2=e-e=0.

In a ring without zero divisors, this implies e=1e=1 or e=0e=0.

Back to Exercise 13.15.

Solution to Exercise 13.17

Consider the residue class ring

R=(/n)[X]/(Xn) R=(\mathbb Z/n\mathbb Z)[X]/(X^n)

and write xx for the residue class of XX. The element xx is nonzero: in the polynomial ring, XX cannot be a multiple of XnX^n when n2n\ge2 for degree reasons. In RR we have n=0n=0, so ny=0ny=0 for every yRy\in R, in particular nx=0nx=0. Moreover, xn=0x^n=0 because the entire ideal (Xn)(X^n) is made zero when forming the quotient ring.

Back to Exercise 13.17.

Solution to Exercise 13.20

Let e/(pn)e\in\mathbb Z/(p^n) be idempotent. Choosing an integer representative, the equation e2=ee^2=e means that

pne(e1). p^n\mid e(e-1).

The integers ee and e1e-1 are coprime, so they cannot both be divisible by pp. Since pnp^n divides their product, the whole factor pnp^n must divide either ee or e1e-1. Thus

e=0ore=1 e=0\quad\text{or}\quad e=1

in /(pn)\mathbb Z/(p^n).

Edition note: The source writes factorisations e=bpie=bp^i and e1=cpje-1=cp^j with i+j=ni+j=n. These exponents may be chosen as divisibility exponents; they need not be the exact pp-adic valuations. The coprimality argument above expresses the same step directly. For n=0n=0, the conclusion still holds, but 0=10=1; see the note to Exercise 13.20.

Back to Exercise 13.20.

Solution to Exercise 13.21

We have

X41=(X21)(X2+1)=(X+1)(X1)(X2+1). X^4-1=(X^2-1)(X^2+1)=(X+1)(X-1)(X^2+1).

The polynomial X2+1[X]X^2+1\in\mathbb Q[X] is irreducible because it has no rational root. Thus this is the prime factorisation, and the monic factors above are pairwise nonassociate. The Chinese remainder theorem for principal ideal domains gives

[X]/(X41)[X]/(X+1)×[X]/(X1)×[X]/(X2+1)××[i]. \begin{aligned} \mathbb Q[X]/(X^4-1) &\cong \mathbb Q[X]/(X+1) \times\mathbb Q[X]/(X-1) \times\mathbb Q[X]/(X^2+1)\\ &\cong\mathbb Q\times\mathbb Q\times\mathbb Q[\mathrm i]. \end{aligned}

The last isomorphism uses the substitutions X1X\mapsto-1, X1X\mapsto1, and [X]/(X2+1)[i]\mathbb Q[X]/(X^2+1)\cong\mathbb Q[\mathrm i]. The element X3+X=X(X2+1)X^3+X=X(X^2+1) maps under the three projections to 2-2, 22, and 00. Its tuple is therefore

(2,2,0). (-2,2,0).

Back to Exercise 13.21.

Solution to Exercise 13.24

Without loss of generality, suppose mnm\ge n. We can write

BK[X1,,Xn]/𝔟K[X1,,Xm]/(𝔟+(Xn+1,,Xm)). B\cong K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]/\mathfrak b \cong K[X_1,\ldots,X_m]/ \bigl(\mathfrak b+(X_{n+1},\ldots,X_m)\bigr).

Denote this extended ideal by 𝔟\mathfrak b'. The two KK-spectra have thus been realised as closed subsets of the same affine space. Use one additional variable ZZ to separate them, and consider

C=K[X1,,Xm,Z]/(Z(Z1),Z𝔞,(Z1)𝔟). C= K[X_1,\ldots,X_m,Z]/ \bigl(Z(Z-1),\,Z\mathfrak a,\,(Z-1)\mathfrak b'\bigr).

The KK-spectrum of CC is the disjoint union of the two given spectra. Indeed, the set

V=V(Z(Z1),Z𝔞,(Z1)𝔟)𝔸Km+1 V=V\bigl(Z(Z-1),\,Z\mathfrak a,\,(Z-1)\mathfrak b'\bigr) \subseteq\mathbb A_K^{m+1}

satisfies Z=0Z=0 or Z=1Z=1. The part with Z=0Z=0 is

V0=V(Z,Z(Z1),Z𝔞,(Z1)𝔟)=V(Z,𝔟)KSpek(K[X1,,Xm,Z]/(Z,𝔟))KSpek(K[X1,,Xn]/𝔟)=KSpek(B), \begin{aligned} V_0 &=V\bigl(Z,Z(Z-1),Z\mathfrak a,(Z-1)\mathfrak b'\bigr)\\ &=V\bigl(Z,-\mathfrak b'\bigr)\\ &\cong K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek} \left(K[X_1,\ldots,X_m,Z]/(Z,\mathfrak b')\right)\\ &\cong K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek} \left(K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]/\mathfrak b\right)\\ &=K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(B), \end{aligned}

whereas the part with Z=1Z=1 is

V1=V(Z1,Z(Z1),Z𝔞,(Z1)𝔟)=V(Z1,Z𝔞)KSpek(K[X1,,Xm,Z]/(Z1,𝔞))KSpek(K[X1,,Xm]/𝔞)=KSpek(A). \begin{aligned} V_1 &=V\bigl(Z-1,Z(Z-1),Z\mathfrak a,(Z-1)\mathfrak b'\bigr)\\ &=V\bigl(Z-1,Z\mathfrak a\bigr)\\ &\cong K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek} \left(K[X_1,\ldots,X_m,Z]/(Z-1,\mathfrak a)\right)\\ &\cong K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek} \left(K[X_1,\ldots,X_m]/\mathfrak a\right)\\ &=K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(A). \end{aligned}

Back to Exercise 13.24.

Solution to Exercise 13.27

Let e,fRe,f\in R be idempotent and suppose their images in the reduction are equal. Then efe-f is nilpotent in RR. Thus there is an nn\in\mathbb N with

(ef)n=0. (e-f)^n=0.

We may take nn to be odd. By the binomial theorem, symmetry of binomial coefficients, and idempotence, we obtain

0=(ef)n=k=0n(1)nk(nk)ekfnk=enfn+k=1n1(1)nk(nk)ekfnk=ef+k=1n1(1)nk(nk)ekfnk=ef+k=1(n1)/2(1)nk(nk)(ekfnkenkfk)=ef+k=1(n1)/2(1)nk(nk)(efef)=ef. \begin{aligned} 0=(e-f)^n &=\sum_{k=0}^{n}(-1)^{n-k}\binom nk e^kf^{n-k}\\ &=e^n-f^n+ \sum_{k=1}^{n-1}(-1)^{n-k}\binom nk e^kf^{n-k}\\ &=e-f+ \sum_{k=1}^{n-1}(-1)^{n-k}\binom nk e^kf^{n-k}\\ &=e-f+ \sum_{k=1}^{(n-1)/2}(-1)^{n-k}\binom nk \left(e^kf^{n-k}-e^{n-k}f^k\right)\\ &=e-f+ \sum_{k=1}^{(n-1)/2}(-1)^{n-k}\binom nk(ef-ef)\\ &=e-f. \end{aligned}

Hence e=fe=f.

Edition note: The source omits the alternating signs in its binomial sums. The factors (1)nk(-1)^{n-k} above correct that omission. Since nn is odd, the terms with indices kk and nkn-k have opposite signs, which justifies the displayed pairing and cancellation.

Back to Exercise 13.27.

Solution to Exercise 13.28

Take a preimage fRf\in R of ee. Since ee is idempotent, the element

c=f2f c=f^2-f

lies in (n)(n), so c2=0c^2=0. Consider

g=f+c2cf. g=f+c-2cf.

This element also maps to ee. Moreover,

g2=(f+c2cf)2=f2+c2+4c2f2+2cf4cf24c2f=f2+2cf4cf2=f+c+2cf4c(f+c)=f+c+2cf4cf=f+c2cf=g. \begin{aligned} g^2 &=(f+c-2cf)^2\\ &=f^2+c^2+4c^2f^2+2cf-4cf^2-4c^2f\\ &=f^2+2cf-4cf^2\\ &=f+c+2cf-4c(f+c)\\ &=f+c+2cf-4cf\\ &=f+c-2cf\\ &=g. \end{aligned}

Thus gg is an idempotent preimage of ee.

Back to Exercise 13.28.

Solution to Exercise 13.31

The general case follows from the case n=2n=2, so it suffices to consider two ideals 𝔞\mathfrak a and 𝔟\mathfrak b. The natural map

RR/𝔞×R/𝔟 R\longrightarrow R/\mathfrak a\times R/\mathfrak b

has kernel 𝔞𝔟\mathfrak a\cap\mathfrak b. For comaximal ideals this intersection equals the product 𝔞𝔟\mathfrak a\mathfrak b. We therefore obtain an injective ring homomorphism

R/(𝔞𝔟)R/𝔞×R/𝔟. R/(\mathfrak a\mathfrak b) \longrightarrow R/\mathfrak a\times R/\mathfrak b.

To prove surjectivity, take (r,s)(r,s) on the right. Choose a𝔞a\in\mathfrak a and b𝔟b\in\mathfrak b with a+b=1a+b=1. The element

rar+ssb r-ar+s-sb

is a preimage of (r,s)(r,s). Modulo 𝔞\mathfrak a, it becomes

rar+ssb=r+ss(1a)=r+ss=r, r-ar+s-sb=r+s-s(1-a)=r+s-s=r,

and similarly modulo 𝔟\mathfrak b it becomes ss.

Back to Exercise 13.31.

English Markdown source · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Lecture 14: Algebraic Functions on Varieties

Algebraic functions

What is a morphism between two affine algebraic sets VV and WW? We first consider the case in which

W=𝔸K1 W=\mathbb A_K^1

is the affine line. Suppose that

V=V(𝔞)𝔸Kn V=V(\mathfrak a)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n

is given as a closed subset of an affine space. Every polynomial

FK[X1,,Xn] F\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]

then gives a map

F:𝔸Kn𝔸K1=K F:\mathbb A_K^n\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^1=K

and hence, by restriction, a map on VV. We already considered this when defining the coordinate ring. Likewise, an element FF of a finitely generated KK-algebra RR gives a function

KSpek(R)𝔸K1,PF(P). \begin{aligned} K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R)&\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^1,\\ P&\longmapsto F(P). \end{aligned}

This is also the map of spectra that, by Proposition 12.8(2), corresponds to the substitution homomorphism

K[T]R,TF. K[T]\longrightarrow R, \qquad T\longmapsto F.

On the open set

D(F)KSpek(RF), D(F)\cong K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R_F),

the function 1/F1/F is well defined by Theorem 13.4. We shall now explain what an algebraic function on an arbitrary Zariski-open set UVU\subseteq V is. The following definition is arranged so that being “algebraic” is a local property.

Definition: algebraic functions on an open set

Let KK be an algebraically closed field, let RR be a KK-algebra of finite type, and let

V=KSpek(R). V=K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R).

Let PVP\in V, let UVU\subseteq V be a Zariski-open set with PUP\in U, and let

f:U𝔸K1=K f:U\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^1=K

be a function. We call ff algebraic (also regular or polynomial) at PP if there are elements G,HRG,H\in R such that

PD(H)U P\in D(H)\subseteq U

and

f(Q)=G(Q)H(Q)for every QD(H). f(Q)=\frac{G(Q)}{H(Q)} \qquad\text{for every }Q\in D(H).

We call ff algebraic on UU if it is algebraic at every point of UU.

Of course, every element fRf\in R defines an algebraic function on every open subset of the KK-spectrum. In general, however, it is rather difficult to give a concise description of all algebraic functions.

Remark: locality and fractional representations

In Definition 14.1, the condition D(H)UD(H)\subseteq U is not essential. If there is a representation f=G/Hf=G/H on D(H)D(H) with PD(H)P\in D(H), choose HH' such that

PD(H)U. P\in D(H')\subseteq U.

On

D(H)D(H)=D(HH) D(H)\cap D(H')=D(HH')

we may use the representation

f=GHHH. f=\frac{GH'}{HH'}.

If f=G/Hf=G/H is a fractional representation at PP, the same representation works for every point of D(H)D(H). Thus ff is algebraic on the whole open set D(H)D(H). In particular, we need not work with infinitely many different representations: finitely many fractions Gi/HiG_i/H_i for a cover

U=iID(Hi) U=\bigcup_{i\in I}D(H_i)

suffice.

For K=K=\mathbb C, an algebraic function is also continuous in the metric topology; when R=[X1,,Xn]R=\mathbb C[X_1,\ldots,X_n], it is holomorphic.

Example: a function glued from two fractions

Let

V=V(WXZY)𝔸K4 V=V(WX-ZY)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^4

and let

U=D(X,Y)=D(X)D(Y)V U=D(X,Y)=D(X)\cup D(Y)\subset V

be the Zariski-open set defined by XX and YY. The function on UU defined by

f=ZX=WY f=\frac ZX=\frac WY

is algebraic. The two fractions clearly give algebraic functions on D(X)D(X) and D(Y)D(Y) respectively. To define a single function on UU, their values must agree on the intersection D(X)D(Y)=D(XY)D(X)\cap D(Y)=D(XY). Take

Q=(w,x,y,z)D(XY)V. Q=(w,x,y,z)\in D(XY)\cap V.

We have x,y0x,y\ne0 and wx=zywx=zy, so

ZX(Q)=zx=wy=WY(Q). \frac ZX(Q)=\frac zx=\frac wy=\frac WY(Q).

Lemma: algebraic functions form an algebra

Let KK be an algebraically closed field, let RR be a KK-algebra of finite type, let V=KSpek(R)V=K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R), and let UVU\subseteq V be Zariski-open. The algebraic functions on UU form a subring—in fact, a KK-subalgebra—of the ring of all functions UKU\to K, with operations performed in KK.

Proof

We must check that the constant zero and one functions, the negative of an algebraic function, and the sum and product of two algebraic functions are again algebraic. We restrict ourselves to the sum. Let f1,f2f_1,f_2 be algebraic and let PUP\in U. There are G1,H1,G2,H2RG_1,H_1,G_2,H_2\in R such that

f1(Q)=G1(Q)H1(Q)(QD(H1)U),PD(H1), f_1(Q)=\frac{G_1(Q)}{H_1(Q)} \quad(Q\in D(H_1)\subseteq U), \qquad P\in D(H_1),

and

f2(Q)=G2(Q)H2(Q)(QD(H2)U),PD(H2). f_2(Q)=\frac{G_2(Q)}{H_2(Q)} \quad(Q\in D(H_2)\subseteq U), \qquad P\in D(H_2).

Set H=H1H2H=H_1H_2. Then

PD(H)=D(H1)D(H2)U. P\in D(H)=D(H_1)\cap D(H_2)\subseteq U.

For QD(H)Q\in D(H) we have

(f1+f2)(Q)=f1(Q)+f2(Q)=G1(Q)H1(Q)+G2(Q)H2(Q)=G1(Q)H2(Q)+G2(Q)H1(Q)H1(Q)H2(Q)=(G1H2+G2H1)(Q)(H1H2)(Q). \begin{aligned} (f_1+f_2)(Q) &=f_1(Q)+f_2(Q)\\ &=\frac{G_1(Q)}{H_1(Q)}+\frac{G_2(Q)}{H_2(Q)}\\ &=\frac{G_1(Q)H_2(Q)+G_2(Q)H_1(Q)}{H_1(Q)H_2(Q)}\\ &=\frac{(G_1H_2+G_2H_1)(Q)}{(H_1H_2)(Q)}. \end{aligned}

Thus the sum has a fractional representation on the Zariski-open neighbourhood D(H)D(H) of PP. The other cases are similar.

Definition: the ring of algebraic sections

In the situation above, the ring

Γ(U,𝒪)={f:UKf is algebraic} \Gamma(U,\mathcal O) =\{f:U\longrightarrow K\mid f\text{ is algebraic}\}

is called the ring of algebraic functions on UU. It is also called the structure ring or ring of sections on UU. By Lemma 14.4 this set is indeed a ring. The symbol 𝒪\mathcal O (pronounced “O”) denotes the so-called structure sheaf.

Lemma: restriction maps

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and RR a KK-algebra of finite type. Let U1U2U_1\subseteq U_2 be open subsets of V=KSpek(R)V=K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R). There is a natural KK-algebra homomorphism

Γ(U2,𝒪)Γ(U1,𝒪). \Gamma(U_2,\mathcal O)\longrightarrow\Gamma(U_1,\mathcal O).

Proof

A function f:U2Kf:U_2\to K immediately gives a function on U1U_1 by restriction. The local algebraic description of ff at each point PU2P\in U_2 also applies on the smaller subset U1U_1.

The map in this lemma is called the restriction map.

Lemma: independence of a principal open ambient space

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and RR a KK-algebra of finite type. Let FRF\in R and let

UD(F)V=KSpek(R) U\subseteq D(F)\subseteq V=K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R)

be open. The definition of Γ(U,𝒪)\Gamma(U,\mathcal O) gives the same ring whether we take the ambient space to be VV or

D(F)=KSpek(RF). D(F)=K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R_F).

Proof

Functions on UU clearly depend only on UU, not on an ambient space. It remains to show that the local algebraic condition also depends only on UU.

Take PUP\in U. A representation

φ=GH on D(H),PD(H),G,HR, \varphi=\frac GH\text{ on }D(H), \qquad P\in D(H),\quad G,H\in R,

immediately gives a fractional representation on D(HF)D(HF) by regarding G,HG,H as elements of RFR_F.

Conversely, suppose that there is a representation over RFR_F

φ=G̃H̃ on D(H̃),PD(H̃), \varphi=\frac{\widetilde G}{\widetilde H} \text{ on }D(\widetilde H), \qquad P\in D(\widetilde H),

where

G̃=GFr,H̃=HFs. \widetilde G=\frac G{F^r}, \qquad \widetilde H=\frac H{F^s}.

For QD(HF)Q\in D(HF) we have

φ(Q)=G̃(Q)H̃(Q)=G(Q)/Fr(Q)H(Q)/Fs(Q)=G(Q)Fs(Q)H(Q)Fr(Q). \varphi(Q) =\frac{\widetilde G(Q)}{\widetilde H(Q)} =\frac{G(Q)/F^r(Q)}{H(Q)/F^s(Q)} =\frac{G(Q)F^s(Q)}{H(Q)F^r(Q)}.

In the last step we multiplied numerator and denominator by Fr+sF^{r+s}. The final numerator and denominator lie in RR, and HFr(P)0HF^r(P)\ne0. Thus D(HFr)D(HF^r) is an open neighbourhood of PP giving a representation relative to VV.

Edition note: In the source’s last neighbourhood argument, take r1r\ge1, which is always possible by multiplying the numerator and denominator of G̃=G/Fr\widetilde G=G/F^r by FF. Then D(HFr)=D(HF)UD(HF^r)=D(HF)\subseteq U. If r=0r=0 were retained, D(HFr)=D(H)D(HF^r)=D(H) could extend outside the original domain.

Lemma: the relation between two rational representations

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and RR a KK-algebra of finite type. Let f:UKf:U\to K be an algebraic function on a Zariski-open set UV=KSpek(R)U\subseteq V=K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R). Suppose that near PUP\in U it has two representations

G1H1andG2H2, \frac{G_1}{H_1} \qquad\text{and}\qquad \frac{G_2}{H_2},

with G1,H1,G2,H2RG_1,H_1,G_2,H_2\in R and PD(H1),D(H2)UP\in D(H_1),D(H_2)\subseteq U. Then there is an rr\in\mathbb N such that

H1rH2r(G1H2G2H1)r=0in R. H_1^rH_2^r(G_1H_2-G_2H_1)^r=0 \quad\text{in }R.

If RR is reduced, we even have

H1H2(G1H2G2H1)=0. H_1H_2(G_1H_2-G_2H_1)=0.

Proof

Consider the element

F=H1H2(G1H2G2H1) F=H_1H_2(G_1H_2-G_2H_1)

on VV. We show that it induces the zero function. Take QVQ\in V. If H1(Q)=0H_1(Q)=0 or H2(Q)=0H_2(Q)=0, then F(Q)=0F(Q)=0 immediately. If neither is zero, then QD(H1)D(H2)Q\in D(H_1)\cap D(H_2) and

G1(Q)H1(Q)=f(Q)=G2(Q)H2(Q). \frac{G_1(Q)}{H_1(Q)}=f(Q)=\frac{G_2(Q)}{H_2(Q)}.

Hence G1(Q)H2(Q)=G2(Q)H1(Q)G_1(Q)H_2(Q)=G_2(Q)H_1(Q) and again F(Q)=0F(Q)=0. By Hilbert’s Nullstellensatz there is an rr such that Fr=0F^r=0 in RR. If RR is reduced, F=0F=0.

Copper-coloured monkey saddle surface with three valleys and three ridges

The graph of a global function on two-dimensional affine space; Inductiveload, public domain. Source details are given in the Unit 14 media credits.

Theorem: global sections on an affine spectrum

Let KK be an algebraically closed field, let RR be a reduced KK-algebra of finite type, and let V=KSpek(R)V=K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R). Then

Γ(V,𝒪)=R. \Gamma(V,\mathcal O)=R.

Proof

Every FRF\in R directly gives an algebraic function on all of VV, so there is a KK-algebra homomorphism

RΓ(V,𝒪). R\longrightarrow\Gamma(V,\mathcal O).

If FF induces the zero function at every point, Theorem 11.1 and the reducedness of RR imply F=0F=0. Thus the map is injective.

Now let f:VKf:V\to K be an algebraic function. For every PVP\in V there are GP,HPRG_P,H_P\in R with PD(HP)P\in D(H_P) and

f=GPHPon D(HP). f=\frac{G_P}{H_P}\quad\text{on }D(H_P).

The sets D(HP)D(H_P) cover VV. By Corollary 11.12, the elements HPH_P generate the unit ideal, so finitely many of them already generate the unit ideal. Denote them by

Hi=HPi,i=1,,m. H_i=H_{P_i},\qquad i=1,\ldots,m.

Then the D(Hi)D(H_i) cover all of VV. On each intersection D(HiHj)=D(Hi)D(Hj)D(H_iH_j)=D(H_i)\cap D(H_j) we have

f(Q)=Gi(Q)Hi(Q)=Gj(Q)Hj(Q). f(Q)=\frac{G_i(Q)}{H_i(Q)}=\frac{G_j(Q)}{H_j(Q)}.

By Lemma 14.8 and reducedness,

HiHjGiHj=HiHjGjHi H_iH_jG_iH_j=H_iH_jG_jH_i

in RR. Replace HiH_i by Hi2H_i^2 and GiG_i by GiHiG_iH_i. The representation Gi/HiG_i/H_i remains unchanged, while the last relation simplifies to

HiGj=HjGi. H_iG_j=H_jG_i.

Since the HiH_i generate the unit ideal, there are AiRA_i\in R with

i=1mAiHi=1. \sum_{i=1}^m A_iH_i=1.

Set

F=i=1mAiGi. F=\sum_{i=1}^m A_iG_i.

We claim that FF induces ff on all of VV. Take QVQ\in V; without loss of generality, suppose QD(H1)Q\in D(H_1). Then

f(Q)=G1(Q)H1(Q)=G1(Q)H1(Q)(i=1mAiHi)(Q)=i=1mAi(Q)G1(Q)Hi(Q)H1(Q)=i=1mAi(Q)Gi(Q)=F(Q). \begin{aligned} f(Q) &=\frac{G_1(Q)}{H_1(Q)}\\ &=\frac{G_1(Q)}{H_1(Q)} \left(\sum_{i=1}^m A_iH_i\right)(Q)\\ &=\sum_{i=1}^m A_i(Q)\frac{G_1(Q)H_i(Q)}{H_1(Q)}\\ &=\sum_{i=1}^m A_i(Q)G_i(Q)\\ &=F(Q). \end{aligned}

The homomorphism above is therefore also surjective.

Corollary: sections on a principal open set

Let FRF\in R in the situation of the preceding theorem. Then

Γ(D(F),𝒪)=RF. \Gamma(D(F),\mathcal O)=R_F.

Proof

This follows directly from Lemma 14.7 and Theorem 14.9.

Remark: Hilbert’s fourteenth problem

One variant of Hilbert’s fourteenth problem asks whether the ring of algebraic functions Γ(U,𝒪)\Gamma(U,\mathcal O) is finitely generated for every open set UU. This is true for open sets of the form U=D(f)U=D(f), also when RR is regular or factorial, and in small dimensions. In general, however, it is false.

Edition note: “Small dimensions” is the source’s informal wording; it specifies no dimension bound or additional hypotheses. No precise low-dimensional theorem is being asserted by that phrase here.


Edition provenance. Translation and reader production: OpenAI Codex gpt-5.6-sol, Ultra. Sources, authors, and component licences are retained as stated in the metadata and the edition’s rights files.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0 for translated course text; media retain component rights in authority/RIGHTS-unit-14.csv · Rights record: RIGHTS-unit-14.csv

Worksheet 14

Practice exercises

Exercise 14.1

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and let R=K[X]R=K[X] be the polynomial ring over KK. Show that every algebraic function ff on an open set

U=D(F)KSpek(R)=𝔸K1 U=D(F)\subseteq K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R)=\mathbb A_K^1

has the form

f=GH, f=\frac GH,

where G,HRG,H\in R have no common nonunit factor and D(F)D(H)D(F)\subseteq D(H).

Exercise 14.2 ★

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and let RR be a KK-algebra of finite type that is a unique factorisation domain. Show that every algebraic function ff on an open set

UKSpek(R) U\subseteq K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R)

has the form f=G/Hf=G/H, where G,HRG,H\in R have no common nonunit factor and UD(H)U\subseteq D(H).

Exercise 14.3

Complete the proof of Lemma 14.4.

Exercise 14.4

Let UKSpek(R)U\subseteq K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R) be an open subset of the KK-spectrum of a KK-algebra RR over an algebraically closed field KK, and let

fΓ(U,𝒪) f\in\Gamma(U,\mathcal O)

be an algebraic function. Show that ff defines a continuous map to KK.

Exercise 14.5

Show that the ring Γ(U,𝒪)\Gamma(U,\mathcal O) is reduced.

Exercise 14.6

Let KK be an algebraically closed field. Consider the point

P=(0,1)V(X3Y3+1)=C𝔸K2 P=(0,1)\in V(X^3-Y^3+1)=C\subseteq\mathbb A_K^2

and set U=C\{P}U=C\setminus\{P\}. Describe an algebraic function on UU that cannot be extended to an algebraic function on all of CC.

Exercise 14.7 ★

Consider Neil’s parabola

C=V(Y2X3)𝔸K2 C=V(Y^2-X^3)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^2

and the point P=(1,1)CP=(1,1)\in C. Find an algebraic function defined on C\{P}C\setminus\{P\} but not on all of CC.

Hint. Find two different factorisations of X3X2X^3-X^2.

Edition note: This exercise uses the standing assumption of this lecture that KK is algebraically closed. The source does not repeat it here; the notion of algebraic function used in Definition 14.1 is stated under that assumption.

Exercise 14.8

Let KK be an algebraically closed field, let RR be a KK-algebra of finite type that is an integral domain, and let

U=D(𝔞)KSpek(R),𝔞=(f1,,fn). U=D(\mathfrak a)\subseteq K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R), \qquad \mathfrak a=(f_1,\ldots,f_n).

Show that

Γ(U,𝒪)=i=1nRfi, \Gamma(U,\mathcal O)=\bigcap_{i=1}^n R_{f_i},

where the intersection is taken inside the fraction field Q(R)Q(R).

Edition note: For this fraction-field interpretation, assume UU\ne\varnothing and omit any zero generators fif_i. The source does not state these qualifications. Localisation at zero is the zero ring and cannot be viewed as a subring of Q(R)Q(R); for U=U=\varnothing the ring of functions is the zero ring instead.

Exercise 14.9

Let RR be a commutative KK-algebra of finite type over an algebraically closed field, let UKSpek(R)U\subseteq K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R) be open, and let f:UKf:U\to K be a function. Suppose that

U=iIUi U=\bigcup_{i\in I}U_i

is an open cover and that every restriction fi=f|Uif_i=f|_{U_i} is an algebraic function. Show that ff itself is algebraic.

Exercise 14.10

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and let RR be a KK-algebra of finite type that is an integral domain. Show that for open sets UVU\subseteq V, the restriction map

Γ(V,𝒪)Γ(U,𝒪) \Gamma(V,\mathcal O)\longrightarrow\Gamma(U,\mathcal O)

is injective.

Edition note: The source needs the hypothesis UU\ne\varnothing (unless VV is also empty). Restriction from a nonempty VV to the empty set sends all functions to the sole element of the zero ring and is not injective.

Exercise 14.11

Consider

V=V(XWYZ)𝔸K4. V=V(XW-YZ)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^4.

Describe an open set U𝔸K4U\subseteq\mathbb A_K^4 such that the ring homomorphism corresponding to UVUU\cap V\subseteq U,

Γ(U,𝒪)Γ(UV,𝒪), \Gamma(U,\mathcal O)\longrightarrow\Gamma(U\cap V,\mathcal O),

is not surjective.

The next exercise uses the concept of the limit of a map. Exercise 1.9 may be helpful.

Exercise 14.12

Consider the curve

C=V(Y2X2X3)𝔸2, C=V(Y^2-X^2-X^3)\subseteq\mathbb A_{\mathbb C}^2,

the point P=(0,0)CP=(0,0)\in C, and the open complement U=C\{P}U=C\setminus\{P\}.

  1. Show that Y/XY/X is an algebraic function on UU that cannot be extended algebraically to all of CC.
  2. Show that the limit at PP of the map φ=Y/X:U\varphi=Y/X:U\to\mathbb C does not exist.
  3. Show that there are sequences (wn)n(w_n)_{n\in\mathbb N} and (zn)n(z_n)_{n\in\mathbb N} in UU, both converging to PP, whose image sequences under φ\varphi converge to different values.

The following concepts are important in many areas of mathematics and concisely capture essential properties of the structure sheaf on a KK-spectrum.

Supporting definition: presheaves

Let XX be a topological space. A presheaf \mathcal F on XX is an assignment associating:

such that

ρU,U=Id(U) \rho_{U,U}=\operatorname{Id}_{\mathcal F(U)}

and, for UVWU\subseteq V\subseteq W,

ρW,U=ρV,UρW,V. \rho_{W,U}=\rho_{V,U}\circ\rho_{W,V}.

The maps ρV,U\rho_{V,U} are called restriction maps. The presheaf is a presheaf of groups if every (U)\mathcal F(U) is a group and every restriction map is a group homomorphism. It is a presheaf of commutative rings if every (U)\mathcal F(U) is a commutative ring and every restriction map is a ring homomorphism.

Exercise 14.13

Show that the assignment associating to every open set

UKSpek(R) U\subseteq K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R)

the ring of algebraic functions Γ(U,𝒪)\Gamma(U,\mathcal O), and to every inclusion U1U2U_1\subseteq U_2 the restriction map (see Lemma 14.6)

Γ(U2,𝒪)Γ(U1,𝒪), \Gamma(U_2,\mathcal O)\longrightarrow\Gamma(U_1,\mathcal O),

is a presheaf of KK-algebras.

Supporting definition: sheaves

A sheaf \mathcal F on a topological space XX is a presheaf satisfying the following two properties.

  1. Local uniqueness. For every open cover U=iIUiU=\bigcup_{i\in I}U_i and s,t(U)s,t\in\mathcal F(U), if

    ρU,Ui(s)=ρU,Ui(t)for all iI, \rho_{U,U_i}(s)=\rho_{U,U_i}(t) \qquad\text{for all }i\in I,

    then s=ts=t.

  2. Gluing. For every open cover U=iIUiU=\bigcup_{i\in I}U_i and sections si(Ui)s_i\in\mathcal F(U_i) that are compatible on each intersection, meaning

    ρUi,UiUj(si)=ρUj,UiUj(sj)(i,jI), \rho_{U_i,U_i\cap U_j}(s_i) =\rho_{U_j,U_i\cap U_j}(s_j) \qquad(i,j\in I),

    there is an s(U)s\in\mathcal F(U) with si=ρU,Ui(s)s_i=\rho_{U,U_i}(s) for all iIi\in I.

Exercise 14.14

Let X,YX,Y be topological spaces. For every open set UXU\subseteq X, set

𝒞(U)=C0(U,Y)={φ:UYφ is continuous}. \mathcal C(U)=C^0(U,Y) =\{\varphi:U\to Y\mid\varphi\text{ is continuous}\}.

Show that this assignment is a sheaf on XX.

Exercise 14.15

Let XX be a topological space. For every open set UXU\subseteq X, set

𝒞(U)=C0(U,)={φ:Uφ is continuous}. \mathcal C(U)=C^0(U,\mathbb R) =\{\varphi:U\to\mathbb R\mid\varphi\text{ is continuous}\}.

Show that this assignment is a sheaf of commutative \mathbb R-algebras on XX.

Exercise 14.16

Let MM be a differentiable manifold. For every open set UMU\subseteq M, consider the set C1(U,)C^1(U,\mathbb R) of differentiable functions on UU. Let

M=iIUi M=\bigcup_{i\in I}U_i

be an open cover.

  1. Show that if VUV\subseteq U is open and fC1(U,)f\in C^1(U,\mathbb R), then f|VC1(V,)f|_V\in C^1(V,\mathbb R).

  2. Let fC1(M,)f\in C^1(M,\mathbb R). Show that f=0f=0 if and only if f|Ui=0f|_{U_i}=0 for every ii.

  3. Suppose that functions fiC1(Ui,)f_i\in C^1(U_i,\mathbb R) are given satisfying the compatibility condition

    fi|UiUj=fj|UiUj f_i|_{U_i\cap U_j}=f_j|_{U_i\cap U_j}

    for all i,ji,j. Show that there is an fC1(M,)f\in C^1(M,\mathbb R) with f|Ui=fif|_{U_i}=f_i for all ii.

Exercise 14.17

Show that the assignment associating to every open set UKSpek(R)U\subseteq K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R) the ring of algebraic functions Γ(U,𝒪)\Gamma(U,\mathcal O), and to every inclusion U1U2U_1\subseteq U_2 the restriction map (see Lemma 14.6)

Γ(U2,𝒪)Γ(U1,𝒪), \Gamma(U_2,\mathcal O)\longrightarrow\Gamma(U_1,\mathcal O),

is a sheaf of KK-algebras.

The following exercises concern ultrafilters and minimal prime ideals. We give the definitions.

A prime ideal 𝔭\mathfrak p in a commutative ring is called a minimal prime ideal if there is no prime ideal 𝔮\mathfrak q with 𝔮𝔭\mathfrak q\subsetneq\mathfrak p.

Let RR be a commutative ring. A multiplicative system FRF\subseteq R is called an ultrafilter if 0F0\notin F and FF is maximal among the multiplicative systems not containing 00.

Exercise 14.18

Let RR be a commutative ring and let FRF\subseteq R be a multiplicative system with 0F0\notin F. Show that FF is an ultrafilter if and only if for every gRg\in R with gFg\notin F there are fFf\in F and nn\in\mathbb N such that

fgn=0. fg^n=0.

Exercise 14.19

Let RR be a commutative ring and let FRF\subseteq R be an ultrafilter. Show that the complement R\FR\setminus F is a minimal prime ideal in RR.

Exercise 14.20

Let RR be a commutative ring and let SS be a multiplicative system with 0S0\notin S. Show that SS is contained in an ultrafilter.

Hint. Use Zorn’s lemma.

Exercise 14.21

Let RR be a reduced commutative ring. Show that every zero divisor is contained in a minimal prime ideal.

Exercise 14.22

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and let 𝔞K[X1,,Xn]\mathfrak a\subseteq K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] be a radical ideal. Set

R=K[X1,,Xn]/𝔞,V=V(𝔞). R=K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]/\mathfrak a, \qquad V=V(\mathfrak a).

Show that the irreducible components of VV correspond to the minimal prime ideals of its coordinate ring RR.

Exercise 14.23

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and let RR be a commutative KK-algebra of finite type. Show that the minimal prime ideals of RR correspond to the irreducible components of KSpek(R)K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R).

Exercises for submission

Exercise 14.24 (3 points)

Let KK be an algebraically closed field, let P𝔸K2P\in\mathbb A_K^2, and let

U=𝔸K2\{P}. U=\mathbb A_K^2\setminus\{P\}.

Show that

Γ(U,𝒪)=K[X,Y]. \Gamma(U,\mathcal O)=K[X,Y].

In other words, every algebraic function defined away from a single point of the affine plane extends to that point.

Exercise 14.25 (5 points: 1+2+2)

Consider Neil’s parabola

C=V(X2Y3)𝔸2. C=V(X^2-Y^3)\subseteq\mathbb A_{\mathbb C}^2.

  1. Show that D(X)=D(Y)D(X)=D(Y) on CC.
  2. Show that on U=D(Y)CU=D(Y)\subseteq C, the fraction X/YX/Y defines an algebraic function that cannot be extended algebraically to all of CC.
  3. Show that the continuous function X/Y:D(Y)X/Y:D(Y)\to\mathbb C has a continuous extension to all of CC.

Exercise 14.26 (4 points)

Let RR be a KK-algebra of finite type that is an integral domain over an algebraically closed field KK, and let

qQ=Q(R) q\in Q=Q(R)

be an element of the fraction field of RR. Show that

𝔞={fR|there is n with fnqR} \mathfrak a =\left\{f\in R\mathrel{\Big|} \text{there is }n\in\mathbb N\text{ with }f^nq\in R\right\}

is an ideal in RR. Show also that

D(𝔞)KSpek(R) D(\mathfrak a)\subseteq K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R)

is the maximal domain of definition of the algebraic function qq.

Exercise 14.27 (4 points)

Let RR be a commutative ring and let f1,,fnRf_1,\ldots,f_n\in R generate the unit ideal. Suppose that every localisation RfiR_{f_i}, i=1,,ni=1,\ldots,n, is Noetherian. Show that RR is also Noetherian.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Public Solutions to Worksheet 14

At the frozen revision boundary, the source provides public solutions only for Exercises 14.2 and 14.7. No additional solutions have been created for this edition.

Solution to Exercise 14.2

Edition note: If U=U=\varnothing, the fraction 0/10/1 represents its unique function. The source’s cover-combining argument below concerns the nonempty case.

Let

U=iID(Hi) U=\bigcup_{i\in I}D(H_i)

with II finite, and suppose that on each D(Hi)D(H_i) the function ff has a representation

f=FiHi, f=\frac{F_i}{H_i},

meaning that

f(Q)=Fi(Q)Hi(Q)for every QD(Hi). f(Q)=\frac{F_i(Q)}{H_i(Q)} \qquad\text{for every }Q\in D(H_i).

On the intersection D(Hi)D(Hj)D(H_i)\cap D(H_j) we have

Fi(Q)Hi(Q)=f(Q)=Fj(Q)Hj(Q). \frac{F_i(Q)}{H_i(Q)} =f(Q) =\frac{F_j(Q)}{H_j(Q)}.

Thus

Hj(Q)Fi(Q)Hi(Q)Fj(Q)=0 H_j(Q)F_i(Q)-H_i(Q)F_j(Q)=0

for every QD(Hi)D(Hj)Q\in D(H_i)\cap D(H_j). Consequently the element

HiHj(HjFiHiFj) H_iH_j(H_jF_i-H_iF_j)

induces the zero function on all of KSpek(R)K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R). Since RR is an integral domain and KK is algebraically closed, the identity theorem gives

HiHj(HjFiHiFj)=0 H_iH_j(H_jF_i-H_iF_j)=0

in RR. After discarding empty members of the cover, HiH_i and HjH_j are nonzero; since RR is an integral domain, it follows that

HjFiHiFj=0, H_jF_i-H_iF_j=0,

and hence

HjFi=HiFj. H_jF_i=H_iF_j.

By unique prime factorisation, there are elements A,B,C,DA,B,C,D and a unit uu such that

HjFi=(AB)(CD)=(u1AD)(uBC)=HiFj. H_jF_i=(AB)(CD)=(u^{-1}AD)(uBC)=H_iF_j.

Hence

FiHi=uCDAD=uCA=uBCAB=FjHj. \frac{F_i}{H_i} =\frac{uCD}{AD} =\frac{uC}{A} =\frac{uBC}{AB} =\frac{F_j}{H_j}.

The fractional representation uC/AuC/A holds on D(Hi)D(Hj)D(H_i)\cup D(H_j). In this way we can combine two members of the cover and reduce the index set II. Since II is finite, repetition eventually produces a single fraction G/HG/H valid on all of UU. By cancelling common factors, we may choose GG and HH with no common nonunit factor, and of course UD(H)U\subseteq D(H).

Back to Exercise 14.2.

Solution to Exercise 14.7

The maximal ideal corresponding to PP is (X1,Y1)(X-1,Y-1). In the coordinate ring

R=K[X,Y]/(Y2X3) R=K[X,Y]/(Y^2-X^3)

we have

X2(X1)=X3X2=Y2X2=(YX)(Y+X). X^2(X-1)=X^3-X^2=Y^2-X^2=(Y-X)(Y+X).

We may therefore set, in the fraction field,

f:=X2YX=X+YX1. f:=\frac{X^2}{Y-X}=\frac{X+Y}{X-1}.

These representations define an algebraic function on

D(YX,X1)=D(Y1,X1)=C\{P}. D(Y-X,X-1)=D(Y-1,X-1)=C\setminus\{P\}.

To show that this function is not defined on all of CC, consider the map

φ:𝔸K1C,t(t2,t3). \begin{aligned} \varphi:\mathbb A_K^1&\longrightarrow C,\\ t&\longmapsto(t^2,t^3). \end{aligned}

We have

φ1(C\{P})=𝔸K1\{1}. \varphi^{-1}(C\setminus\{P\})=\mathbb A_K^1\setminus\{1\}.

The pullback of ff under this map is

t2+t3t21=t2(1+t)(t+1)(t1)=t2t1. \frac{t^2+t^3}{t^2-1} =\frac{t^2(1+t)}{(t+1)(t-1)} =\frac{t^2}{t-1}.

This function has a pole at t=1t=1 and cannot be extended to an algebraic function on the whole affine line. Hence ff cannot be extended algebraically to all of CC either.

Edition note: in the final cancellation step, the source displays t2/(t1)-t^2/(t-1). The factorisation on the preceding line gives t2/(t1)t^2/(t-1) without a minus sign. The pole at t=1t=1 and the conclusion of the proof are unchanged.

Back to Exercise 14.7.

English Markdown source · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Lecture 15: Affine and Quasi-affine Varieties, Local Rings, and Stalks

Affine and quasi-affine varieties

Definition: affine varieties

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and let RR be a KK-algebra of finite type. The KK-spectrum

V=KSpek(R), V=K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R),

with every Zariski-open set UVU\subseteq V equipped with the ring of algebraic functions Γ(U,𝒪)\Gamma(U,\mathcal O), is called an affine variety.

An open subset of an affine variety, again with every open set equipped with its structure ring, is called a quasi-affine variety. A quasi-affine variety is covered by finitely many open sets of the form D(f)D(f), each of which is itself an affine variety. Some authors reserve the term variety for irreducible KK-spectra.

When RR is reduced, Theorem 14.9 ensures that no information is lost in

V=KSpek(R), V=K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R),

since the ring RR can be recovered as Γ(V,𝒪)\Gamma(V,\mathcal O). For arbitrary RR, the pointwise algebraic functions instead recover the reduction RredR_{\mathrm{red}}; nilpotents are invisible on KK-points. This is not possible from the topological space alone.

Edition note. The source states the recovery claim without reducedness. The qualification above records the hypothesis needed for the pointwise definition used here.

Local rings

For a given point PP in a KK-spectrum, we are interested in all algebraic functions defined at PP and admitting a rational representation on some neighbourhood of PP. These functions are defined on different neighbourhoods, and in general there is no smallest neighbourhood on which all algebraic functions defined at PP are simultaneously defined. We have a system of rings

(Γ(U,𝒪))PU \bigl(\Gamma(U,\mathcal O)\bigr)_{P\in U}

that we want to understand geometrically and algebraically. It turns out that this system has a meaningful limit—called a direct limit or colimit—and that it agrees with the localisation R𝔪R_{\mathfrak m} at the maximal ideal 𝔪\mathfrak m corresponding to PP. We begin with the algebraic terminology.

Edition note. The source says unconditionally that there is no smallest neighbourhood. The qualification “in general” allows for isolated points, for which {P}\{P\} is a smallest neighbourhood of PP.

Definition: local rings

A commutative ring RR is called local if it has exactly one maximal ideal.

For a nonzero commutative ring, equivalently, the complement of the group of units of RR is closed under addition. The simplest local rings are fields. Every local ring RR with maximal ideal 𝔪\mathfrak m has a quotient R/𝔪R/\mathfrak m that is a field, called its residue field. We shall soon see that every point of a KK-spectrum has an associated local ring describing the “local appearance” of the variety at that point algebraically.

Edition note. The source omits the nonzero-ring qualification in the additive characterisation. For the zero ring the nonunit set is empty and hence additively closed, although there is no maximal ideal.

Definition: localisation at a prime ideal

Let RR be a commutative ring and let 𝔭\mathfrak p be a prime ideal. The localisation at the multiplicative system

S=R\𝔭 S=R\setminus\mathfrak p

is called the localisation of RR at 𝔭\mathfrak p and is denoted by R𝔭R_{\mathfrak p}. Thus

R𝔭={fg|fR,g𝔭}. R_{\mathfrak p} =\left\{\frac fg\mathrel{\Big|}f\in R,\ g\notin\mathfrak p\right\}.

The following theorem explains this terminology.

Theorem: localisation at a prime ideal is local

Let RR be a commutative ring and let 𝔭\mathfrak p be a prime ideal in RR. Then R𝔭R_{\mathfrak p} is a local ring with maximal ideal

𝔭R𝔭={fg|f𝔭,g𝔭}. \mathfrak pR_{\mathfrak p} =\left\{\frac fg\mathrel{\Big|}f\in\mathfrak p,\ g\notin\mathfrak p\right\}.

Proof

The displayed set is indeed an ideal in

R𝔭={fg|fR,g𝔭}. R_{\mathfrak p} =\left\{\frac fg\mathrel{\Big|}f\in R,\ g\notin\mathfrak p\right\}.

We show that the complement of 𝔭R𝔭\mathfrak pR_{\mathfrak p} consists only of units, so this ideal must be maximal. Let

q=fgR𝔭 q=\frac fg\in R_{\mathfrak p}

but suppose q𝔭R𝔭q\notin\mathfrak pR_{\mathfrak p}. Then f,g𝔭f,g\notin\mathfrak p, so the reciprocal fraction g/fg/f also belongs to the localisation.

Fraction fields and function fields

If RR is an integral domain, its fraction field is the localisation at the zero prime ideal. We now show that for the associated irreducible affine variety KSpek(R)K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R), every algebraic function naturally belongs to the fraction field.

Lemma: algebraic functions as elements of the fraction field

Let KK be an algebraically closed field, let RR be a KK-algebra of finite type that is an integral domain, and let

UKSpek(R) \varnothing\ne U\subseteq K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R)

be an open subset. There is a uniquely determined injective RR-algebra homomorphism

Γ(U,𝒪)Q(R). \Gamma(U,\mathcal O)\longrightarrow Q(R).

In particular, every algebraic function defined on a nonempty open set UU is an element of the fraction field Q(R)Q(R).

Proof

Take PUP\in U and suppose that the algebraic function ff is given on a neighbourhood of PP by

f=G/H,G,HR,H0. f=G/H, \qquad G,H\in R, \qquad H\ne0.

The fraction G/HG/H can immediately be regarded as an element of the fraction field. Let QUQ\in U be another point with a representation

f=G/H. f=G'/H'.

By Lemma 14.8, since RR is an integral domain,

GH=GH GH'=G'H

in RR. Thus the element of the fraction field is well defined. The resulting map is clearly a ring homomorphism and makes the diagram

RΓ(U,𝒪)Q(R) \begin{matrix} R &&\\ \downarrow & \searrow &\\ \Gamma(U,\mathcal O)&\longrightarrow&Q(R) \end{matrix}

commute. These properties also determine the map uniquely: algebraic functions arising from elements of RR must map to those same elements in the fraction field, so the image of every fraction is determined.

For injectivity, if G/H=0G/H=0 in the fraction field, then G=0G=0, and the corresponding function is zero on D(H)D(H). For another representation G/HG'/H' of the same function, the relation above again gives G=0G'=0; the function is therefore zero on all of UU.

Uniqueness also immediately shows that for two open sets UUU\subseteq U' the diagram

Γ(U,𝒪)Γ(U,𝒪)Q(R) \begin{matrix} \Gamma(U',\mathcal O)&&\\ \downarrow&\searrow&\\ \Gamma(U,\mathcal O)&\longrightarrow&Q(R) \end{matrix}

commutes, with the restriction homomorphism on the left. From now on, in the integral-domain case we identify an algebraic function with its corresponding element of the fraction field.

Topological filters and their stalks

The result of the preceding section says that the fraction field can be obtained as an ordered union of all rings of sections Γ(U,𝒪)\Gamma(U,\mathcal O) as UU ranges over the nonempty open sets. A similar construction can be made for suitably structured systems of open sets in general. For this we need the concept of a filter.

Definition: topological filters

Let XX be a topological space. A system FF of open subsets of XX is called a topological filter if, for open sets U,VU,V, the following hold:

  1. XFX\in F;
  2. if UFU\in F and UVU\subseteq V, then VFV\in F;
  3. if U,VFU,V\in F, then UVFU\cap V\in F.
Four concentric grey circles on a transparent background

Schematic depiction of a neighbourhood filter; Andreas Pietzowski, CC BY-SA 4.0. Source details are given in the Unit 15 media credits.

Definition: neighbourhood filters

Let XX be a topological space and let MXM\subseteq X. The system

𝒰(M)={UXU is open and MU} \mathcal U(M) =\{U\subseteq X\mid U\text{ is open and }M\subseteq U\}

is called the neighbourhood filter of MM.

This is clearly a topological filter. In particular, a point PXP\in X has a neighbourhood filter 𝒰(P)\mathcal U(P) consisting of all its open neighbourhoods.

Suppose that two open neighbourhoods U1,U2U_1,U_2 of PP and two algebraic functions

f1Γ(U1,𝒪),f2Γ(U2,𝒪) f_1\in\Gamma(U_1,\mathcal O), \qquad f_2\in\Gamma(U_2,\mathcal O)

are given. Initially their sum f1+f2f_1+f_2—and likewise their product—makes no sense because their domains differ. In the integral-domain case we can regard both as elements of the fraction field and add them there. Alternatively, we can pass to the intersection U1U2U_1\cap U_2, which is also an open neighbourhood of PP, and add the restrictions of the two functions there. The important property of a filter is that together with any two of its open sets it contains their intersection, with the inclusions

U1U2U1,U2 U_1\cap U_2\subseteq U_1,U_2

and the corresponding restriction maps

Γ(U1,𝒪),Γ(U2,𝒪)Γ(U1U2,𝒪). \Gamma(U_1,\mathcal O),\Gamma(U_2,\mathcal O) \longrightarrow\Gamma(U_1\cap U_2,\mathcal O).

This observation is made precise by the concepts of a directed set and a directed system.

Definition: directed sets

A nonempty ordered set (I,)(I,\preccurlyeq) is called directedly ordered, or simply directed, if for every i,jIi,j\in I there is a kIk\in I such that

i,jk. i,j\preccurlyeq k.

Edition note. The source does not require II to be nonempty. The standard convention is used here; it is also needed below for a colimit of groups to carry a group structure.

We regard a topological filter as a set ordered by inclusion. Its intersection property makes it directed; the direction of the order is

=. \preccurlyeq\;=\;\supseteq.

Definition: ordered and directed systems

Let (I,)(I,\preccurlyeq) be an ordered index set. A family of sets

Mi,iI, M_i,\qquad i\in I,

is called an ordered system of sets if:

  1. φii=idMi\varphi_{ii}=\operatorname{id}_{M_i} for every iIi\in I;

  2. for iji\preccurlyeq j there is a map φij:MiMj\varphi_{ij}:M_i\to M_j;

  3. for ijki\preccurlyeq j\preccurlyeq k we have

    φik=φjkφij. \varphi_{ik}=\varphi_{jk}\circ\varphi_{ij}.

Edition note. The identity-map axiom is part of the usual definition and is added explicitly; the source states only the transition maps and their composition law.

If the index set is also directed, the family is called a directed system of sets.

If all the MiM_i are groups (or rings) and all maps between them are group homomorphisms (or ring homomorphisms), we speak of an ordered or directed system of groups (or rings).

Definition: colimits

Let (Mi)iI(M_i)_{i\in I} be a directed system of sets. The set

colimiIMi=(iIMi)/ \operatorname{colim}_{i\in I}M_i =\left(\biguplus_{i\in I}M_i\right)\!\big/\!\sim

is called the colimit (also the direct limit or inductive limit) of the system. Here \sim is the equivalence relation declaring two elements mMim\in M_i and nMjn\in M_j equivalent if there is a kIk\in I with i,jki,j\preccurlyeq k and

φik(m)=φjk(n). \varphi_{ik}(m)=\varphi_{jk}(n).

In particular, siMis_i\in M_i is equivalent to its image φik(si)Mk\varphi_{ik}(s_i)\in M_k for every iki\preccurlyeq k.

Edition note: in the last sentence the source writes siMs_i\in M, although the system defines only the sets MiM_i. This edition supplies the required index, siMis_i\in M_i.

For a directed system of groups (or rings), the colimit of sets above can also be given a group (or ring) structure. Two elements of the colimit represented by siMis_i\in M_i and sjMjs_j\in M_j can be replaced by their images in some MkM_k with i,jki,j\preccurlyeq k, and the operation is then defined in MkM_k; see Exercise 15.23.

Our principal example is the directed system of rings

Γ(U,𝒪),UF, \Gamma(U,\mathcal O),\qquad U\in F,

directed by a topological filter. Its colimit has a name of its own.

Definition: the stalk at a filter

Let (V,𝒪)(V,\mathcal O) be a quasi-affine variety and let FF be a topological filter in VV. The colimit

𝒪F=colimUFΓ(U,𝒪) \mathcal O_F =\operatorname{colim}_{U\in F}\Gamma(U,\mathcal O)

is called the stalk of 𝒪\mathcal O at FF.

The stalk at the neighbourhood filter of a point PP is also called the stalk at PP and is denoted by 𝒪P\mathcal O_P.

Theorem: the stalk at a point is a localisation

Let RR be a reduced commutative algebra of finite type over an algebraically closed field KK. Let

PKSpek(R) P\in K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R)

be a point with corresponding maximal ideal 𝔪R\mathfrak m\subseteq R. There is a natural isomorphism of RR-algebras

R𝔪𝒪P. R_{\mathfrak m}\longrightarrow\mathcal O_P.

Proof

The stalk 𝒪P\mathcal O_P has a unique RR-algebra structure because the whole space belongs to the filter. If FRF\in R and F𝔪F\notin\mathfrak m, then 1/F1/F is defined on the open neighbourhood D(F)D(F) of PP. There we have F(1/F)=1F\cdot(1/F)=1, so FF becomes a unit in the colimit. By the universal property of localisation, there is an RR-algebra homomorphism

R𝔪𝒪P. R_{\mathfrak m}\longrightarrow\mathcal O_P.

We prove that this map is bijective. First take f𝒪Pf\in\mathcal O_P. This element is represented by an algebraic function

fΓ(U,𝒪),PU. f\in\Gamma(U,\mathcal O), \qquad P\in U.

In particular, ff has a rational representation at PP: on D(H)D(H) we have

f=G/H,PD(H). f=G/H, \qquad P\in D(H).

The last condition means H(P)0H(P)\ne0, or equivalently H𝔪H\notin\mathfrak m. Thus G/HR𝔪G/H\in R_{\mathfrak m} and maps to ff. This proves surjectivity.

For injectivity, take G/HG/H with H𝔪H\notin\mathfrak m and suppose its image in the stalk is zero. This means that G/HG/H is the zero function on some open neighbourhood UU of PP. We may choose

PD(H)UD(H) P\in D(H')\subseteq U\cap D(H)

and, by Corollary 14.10, write on that set, explicitly taking G=0G'=0,

G/H=G/H=0. G/H=G'/H'=0.

By Lemma 14.8,

H(H)2G=0 H(H')^2G=0

in RR. Since HH and HH' become units in R𝔪R_{\mathfrak m}, we obtain G/H=0G/H=0 in the localisation.

Lemma: sections as an intersection of local rings

Let KK be an algebraically closed field, let RR be a KK-algebra of finite type that is an integral domain, and let

UKSpek(R) U\subseteq K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R)

be a nonempty open set. Then

Γ(U,𝒪)=PU𝒪P, \Gamma(U,\mathcal O)=\bigcap_{P\in U}\mathcal O_P,

where the intersection is taken inside the fraction field Q(R)Q(R).

Edition note. The source allows U=U=\varnothing, but then the section ring is not represented by an intersection of subrings of Q(R)Q(R). The nonempty hypothesis is therefore necessary for this formulation.

Proof

For every PUP\in U there are injective ring homomorphisms

Γ(U,𝒪)𝒪PQ(R). \Gamma(U,\mathcal O)\longrightarrow\mathcal O_P \longrightarrow Q(R).

Consequently there is an injective ring homomorphism

Γ(U,𝒪)PU𝒪P. \Gamma(U,\mathcal O) \longrightarrow\bigcap_{P\in U}\mathcal O_P.

Conversely, let fQ(R)f\in Q(R) belong to the intersection on the right. For every PUP\in U there is a representation f=G/Hf=G/H with

PD(H)U. P\in D(H)\subseteq U.

This says precisely that ff is an algebraic function on UU.

Definition: function fields

Let VV be an irreducible quasi-affine variety. The stalk 𝒪V\mathcal O_V at the filter of all nonempty open sets in VV is a field, called the function field of VV.


Edition provenance. Translation and reader production: OpenAI Codex gpt-5.6-sol, Ultra. Sources, authors, and component licences are retained as stated in the metadata and the edition’s rights files.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0 for translated course text; media retain component rights in authority/RIGHTS-unit-15.csv · Rights record: RIGHTS-unit-15.csv

Worksheet 15

Practice exercises

Exercise 15.1

Let RR be a commutative ring. Show that the following statements are equivalent.

  1. RR has exactly one maximal ideal.
  2. The set of nonunits R\R×R\setminus R^\times is an ideal in RR.

Exercise 15.2

Let RR be a nonzero commutative ring. Show that RR is local if and only if, whenever a+ba+b is a unit, at least one of aa and bb is a unit.

Edition note. The source omits the nonzero-ring hypothesis. The zero ring satisfies the displayed unit-sum criterion but has no maximal ideal, so it is not local under the definition used in the lecture.

Exercise 15.3

Determine all subrings of the rational numbers \mathbb Q that are local rings.

Exercise 15.4

Let RR be a commutative local ring. Show that RR is connected.

Exercise 15.5

Let 𝔫\mathfrak n be a maximal ideal in a commutative ring RR. Let R𝔫R_{\mathfrak n} be the localisation of RR at 𝔫\mathfrak n, and let

𝔪=𝔫R𝔫 \mathfrak m=\mathfrak nR_{\mathfrak n}

be the maximal ideal of R𝔫R_{\mathfrak n}. Show that

R/𝔫=R𝔫/𝔪. R/\mathfrak n=R_{\mathfrak n}/\mathfrak m.

Exercise 15.6 ★

Let RR be a commutative ring and let 𝔭\mathfrak p be a prime ideal. The quotient ring

S=R/𝔭 S=R/\mathfrak p

is an integral domain with fraction field Q=Q(S)Q=Q(S), while R𝔭R_{\mathfrak p} is a local ring with maximal ideal 𝔭R𝔭\mathfrak pR_{\mathfrak p}. Show that there is a natural isomorphism

Q(S)R𝔭/𝔭R𝔭. Q(S)\cong R_{\mathfrak p}/\mathfrak pR_{\mathfrak p}.

This field is also called the residue field at 𝔭\mathfrak p.

Exercise 15.7

For aa\in\mathbb C, show that the substitution homomorphism

[X],Xa, \begin{aligned} \mathbb C[X]&\longrightarrow\mathbb C,\\ X&\longmapsto a, \end{aligned}

agrees with the evaluation map to the residue field at the prime ideal (Xa)(X-a), namely

[X](Xa)/(Xa)[X](Xa). \mathbb C[X]_{(X-a)}/(X-a)\mathbb C[X]_{(X-a)}.

Exercise 15.8

Let RR be a local ring with residue field KK. Show that RR and KK have the same characteristic if and only if RR contains a field.

Exercise 15.9 ★

Let RR be a local ring and let 𝔞\mathfrak a be an ideal in RR. Show that the map

R×(R/𝔞)× R^\times\longrightarrow(R/\mathfrak a)^\times

is surjective.

Exercise 15.10

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and let

R=K[X1,,Xn]. R=K[X_1,\ldots,X_n].

Show that all localisations of RR at maximal ideals are mutually isomorphic.

Exercise 15.11

Let KK be a field and consider the coordinate cross

V=KSpek(K[X,Y]/(XY)). V=K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}\bigl(K[X,Y]/(XY)\bigr).

For each point PVP\in V, determine whether the local ring at PP is an integral domain.

Exercise 15.12

Consider Neil’s parabola

C=V(X2Y3)𝔸K2 C=V(X^2-Y^3)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^2

over an algebraically closed field KK. Show that all localisations of CC at points P(0,0)P\ne(0,0) are mutually isomorphic, but are not isomorphic to the localisation at the origin.

Exercise 15.13

Let RR be the localisation at the origin of the curve

C=V(Y2X2X3)𝔸K2, C=V(Y^2-X^2-X^3)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^2,

and let SS be the localisation of the coordinate cross at the origin. Are these two local rings isomorphic?

Exercise 15.14

Let RR be a commutative ring and let 𝔭\mathfrak p be a prime ideal. Show that 𝔭\mathfrak p is a minimal prime ideal if and only if the reduction of the localisation R𝔭R_{\mathfrak p} is a field.

Exercise 15.15

Let RR be a commutative ring, let 𝔪\mathfrak m be a maximal ideal with localisation R𝔪R_{\mathfrak m}, and let 𝔞\mathfrak a be an ideal contained in the kernel of the localisation map. Show that R𝔪R_{\mathfrak m} is also a localisation of R/𝔞R/\mathfrak a.

Exercise 15.16

Let KK be a field and let RR be a finitely generated KK-algebra. Let

S=R𝔪 S=R_{\mathfrak m}

be the localisation of RR at a maximal ideal 𝔪\mathfrak m. Show that the residue field of SS is a finite extension of KK.

Exercise 15.17

Let RR be a commutative ring, let fRf\in R, and let 𝔞\mathfrak a be an ideal. Show that

f𝔞 f\in\mathfrak a

if and only if for every prime ideal 𝔭\mathfrak p we have

f𝔞R𝔭. f\in\mathfrak aR_{\mathfrak p}.

Remark. For this reason, ideal membership is called a local property.

Exercise 15.18

Let RR be a commutative ring. Prove that the following statements are equivalent.

  1. RR is reduced.
  2. For every prime ideal 𝔭\mathfrak p, the ring R𝔭R_{\mathfrak p} is reduced.
  3. For every maximal ideal 𝔪\mathfrak m, the ring R𝔪R_{\mathfrak m} is reduced.

Remark. For this reason, reducedness is called a local property. Also give an example of a commutative ring that is not an integral domain but whose localisations at prime ideals are all integral domains.

Exercise 15.19 ★

Let KK be a field and let R,SR,S be finitely generated KK-algebras that are integral domains. Let

φ:RS \varphi:R\longrightarrow S

be a KK-algebra homomorphism, and let 𝔫\mathfrak n be a maximal ideal in SS with

φ1(𝔫)=𝔪. \varphi^{-1}(\mathfrak n)=\mathfrak m.

Suppose the induced map is an isomorphism

R𝔪S𝔫. R_{\mathfrak m}\longrightarrow S_{\mathfrak n}.

Show that there is an fRf\in R with f𝔪f\notin\mathfrak m such that

RfSφ(f) R_f\longrightarrow S_{\varphi(f)}

is an isomorphism.

Exercise 15.20

Let KK be an algebraically closed field, let RR be a finitely generated commutative KK-algebra, and let F1,F2F_1,F_2 be topological filters in KSpek(R)K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R) with F1F2F_1\subseteq F_2. Show that there is a ring homomorphism

𝒪F1𝒪F2. \mathcal O_{F_1}\longrightarrow\mathcal O_{F_2}.

Exercise 15.21

Let KK be an algebraically closed field, let RR be a finitely generated commutative KK-algebra, and let

PKSpek(R). P\in K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R).

Without using Theorem 15.12, show that the stalk 𝒪P\mathcal O_P is a local ring.

Exercise 15.22 ★

Let KK be a field, let RR be a finitely generated KK-algebra that is an integral domain with fraction field Q(R)Q(R), and let qQ(R)q\in Q(R). Show that the set

{PKSpek(R)|q𝒪P} \left\{P\in K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R) \mathrel{\Big|}q\in\mathcal O_P\right\}

is open in KSpek(R)K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R), where 𝒪P\mathcal O_P denotes the local ring at PP.

Exercise 15.23

Let II be a directed index set and let (Gi)iI(G_i)_{i\in I} be a directed system of abelian groups. Show that its colimit is an abelian group.

Exercise 15.24

Let II be a directed index set and let (Mi)iI(M_i)_{i\in I} be a directed system of sets. Let NN be another set. Suppose that for every iIi\in I a map

ψi:MiN \psi_i:M_i\longrightarrow N

is given such that for every iji\preccurlyeq j we have

ψi=ψjφij, \psi_i=\psi_j\circ\varphi_{ij},

where φij\varphi_{ij} are the maps of the system. Prove the universal property of the colimit: there is exactly one map

ψ:colimiIMiN \psi:\operatorname{colim}_{i\in I}M_i\longrightarrow N

such that

ψi=ψji, \psi_i=\psi\circ j_i,

where ji:MicolimiIMij_i:M_i\to\operatorname{colim}_{i\in I}M_i are the natural maps.

Show also that if (Mi)iI(M_i)_{i\in I} is a directed system of groups, NN is a group, and all the ψi\psi_i are group homomorphisms, then ψ\psi is a group homomorphism as well.

Exercises for submission

Exercise 15.25 (4 points)

Describe the set MM of all 2×32\times3 matrices of rank at most one over a field KK as the KK-spectrum of a suitable KK-algebra. Show that there is an isomorphism between a nonempty Zariski-open subset of MM and an open set in 𝔸K4\mathbb A_K^4.

Exercise 15.26 (4 points)

Let KK be a field, let RR be a KK-algebra of finite type, and let P1,,PnP_1,\ldots,P_n be finitely many points in

X=KSpek(R). X=K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R).

Show that the neighbourhood filter of these points is generated by open sets of the form D(f)D(f). In other words, for every open set UU containing P1,,PnP_1,\ldots,P_n, show that there is an FRF\in R with

P1,,PnD(F)U. P_1,\ldots,P_n\in D(F)\subseteq U.

Exercise 15.27 (5 points: 1+2+2)

Let KK be a field, let RR be a commutative KK-algebra of finite type, and let SS be a multiplicative system in RR. Define

F(S)={UKSpek(R)|U is open and there is fS with D(f)U}. F(S)=\left\{U\subseteq K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R) \mathrel{\Big|} U\text{ is open and there is }f\in S\text{ with }D(f)\subseteq U \right\}.

  1. Show that F=F(S)F=F(S) is a topological filter in KSpek(R)K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R).

  2. Show that there is a ring homomorphism

    RS𝒪F. R_S\longrightarrow\mathcal O_F.

  3. Show that the homomorphism in part 2 is an isomorphism if KK is algebraically closed and RR is reduced.

Edition note. Although the lecture defines the pointwise structure rings over an algebraically closed field, the same local-fraction and colimit construction is used verbatim in parts 1 and 2 over an arbitrary field. The reconstruction assertion in part 3 retains its stated algebraically closed and reduced hypotheses.

Exercise 15.28 (4 points)

Let

X=KSpek(R) X=K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R)

be an affine variety, let P1,,PnXP_1,\ldots,P_n\in X be finitely many distinct points, let FF be their neighbourhood filter, and let 𝒪F\mathcal O_F be the associated stalk. Show that 𝒪F\mathcal O_F is a local ring if and only if n=1n=1.

Edition note. The source’s nn points are understood to form a finite set of distinct points; allowing repetitions would make the criterion false.

Exercise 15.29 (4 points)

Let RR be a commutative ring and let SRS\subseteq R be a multiplicative system. Consider the following partial order on SS: set fgf\preccurlyeq g if ff divides a power of gg, identifying two elements when this relation holds in both directions. Show that the commutative rings

Rf,fS, R_f,\qquad f\in S,

form a directed system and that

colimfSRf=RS. \operatorname{colim}_{f\in S}R_f=R_S.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Public Solutions to Worksheet 15

At the frozen revision boundary, the source provides public solutions only for Exercises 15.6, 15.9, 15.19, and 15.22. No additional solutions have been created for this edition.

Solution to Exercise 15.6

Consider the commutative diagram of ring homomorphisms

RR/𝔭Q(R/𝔭)φψR𝔭R𝔭/𝔭R𝔭=R𝔭/𝔭R𝔭. \begin{array}{ccccc} R&\longrightarrow&R/\mathfrak p&\longrightarrow&Q(R/\mathfrak p)\\ \downarrow&&\downarrow_{\varphi}&&\downarrow_{\psi}\\ R_{\mathfrak p}&\longrightarrow&R_{\mathfrak p}/\mathfrak pR_{\mathfrak p} &=&R_{\mathfrak p}/\mathfrak pR_{\mathfrak p}. \end{array}

The maps φ\varphi and ψ\psi are to be constructed. Under the ring homomorphism

RR𝔭/𝔭R𝔭, R\longrightarrow R_{\mathfrak p}/\mathfrak pR_{\mathfrak p},

the prime ideal 𝔭\mathfrak p maps to zero, giving an induced homomorphism φ\varphi. The map φ\varphi sends every nonzero element

[r]R/𝔭,[r]0, [r]\in R/\mathfrak p, \qquad [r]\ne0,

represented by r𝔭r\notin\mathfrak p, to a unit. By the universal property of localisation, φ\varphi therefore extends to the fraction field:

ψ:Q(R/𝔭)R𝔭/𝔭R𝔭. \psi:Q(R/\mathfrak p) \longrightarrow R_{\mathfrak p}/\mathfrak pR_{\mathfrak p}.

As a ring homomorphism between fields, ψ\psi is injective. Every element of the residue field on the right can be represented by a fraction r/sr/s in R𝔭R_{\mathfrak p} with s𝔭s\notin\mathfrak p. It is the image of

[r][s]Q(R/𝔭), \frac{[r]}{[s]}\in Q(R/\mathfrak p),

since [s]0[s]\ne0. Thus ψ\psi is also surjective, and is an isomorphism.

Back to Exercise 15.6.

Solution to Exercise 15.9

If 𝔞=R\mathfrak a=R, the quotient is the zero ring and the statement is clear. We therefore suppose that

𝔞𝔪, \mathfrak a\subseteq\mathfrak m,

where 𝔪\mathfrak m is the unique maximal ideal of RR.

Let rRr\in R represent a unit in R/𝔞R/\mathfrak a, and choose sRs\in R such that

rs=1in R/𝔞. rs=1\quad\text{in }R/\mathfrak a.

This means that

rs1𝔞𝔪. rs-1\in\mathfrak a\subseteq\mathfrak m.

If rr were not a unit, then r𝔪r\in\mathfrak m and hence rs𝔪rs\in\mathfrak m. But this would give the contradiction

1=(1rs)+rs𝔪. 1=(1-rs)+rs\in\mathfrak m.

Thus rr itself is a unit. Every unit in R/𝔞R/\mathfrak a therefore has a unit preimage in RR.

Back to Exercise 15.9.

Solution to Exercise 15.19

We first show that the map

RfSφ(f) R_f\longrightarrow S_{\varphi(f)}

is surjective for a suitable fRf\in R. Choose a set of KK-algebra generators x1,,xnx_1,\ldots,x_n for SS. By surjectivity of the local map, there are elements

yi=rigiR𝔪,gi𝔪, y_i=\frac{r_i}{g_i}\in R_{\mathfrak m}, \qquad g_i\notin\mathfrak m,

so that yigi=riy_i g_i=r_i in R𝔪R_{\mathfrak m}, and with φ(yi)=xi\varphi(y_i)=x_i in S𝔫S_{\mathfrak n}. The last equality means that for some hi𝔫h_i\notin\mathfrak n we have

hi(φ(ri)φ(gi)xi)=0 h_i\bigl(\varphi(r_i)-\varphi(g_i)x_i\bigr)=0

in SS. Since SS is an integral domain and hi0h_i\ne0, it follows that

φ(ri)=φ(gi)xi \varphi(r_i)=\varphi(g_i)x_i

in SS.

Set

f=g1gn. f=g_1\cdots g_n.

Since every gi𝔪g_i\notin\mathfrak m and 𝔪\mathfrak m is prime, we have f𝔪f\notin\mathfrak m. All the yiy_i can be written over the common denominator ff, so yiRfy_i\in R_f. Thus every generator xix_i belongs to the image of RfSφ(f)R_f\to S_{\varphi(f)}. The inverse denominator powers φ(f)k\varphi(f)^{-k} are also images of the inverse powers fkf^{-k} in RfR_f. The map is therefore surjective.

Edition note: the source immediately deduces surjectivity from the equalities in S𝔫S_{\mathfrak n} without writing out the cancellation of hih_i above. That step is valid precisely because SS is assumed to be an integral domain; this edition makes the dependence explicit without changing the argument.

We now prove injectivity. Suppose qRfq\in R_f maps to zero. Its image is then also zero in S𝔫S_{\mathfrak n}, and qq comes from an element of R𝔪R_{\mathfrak m}. Since the local map is an isomorphism, q=0q=0 in R𝔪R_{\mathfrak m}. Since RR is an integral domain, this also implies q=0q=0 in RfR_f. The map is therefore injective and, together with surjectivity, an isomorphism.

Back to Exercise 15.19.

Solution to Exercise 15.22

We show that every point PP with q𝒪Pq\in\mathcal O_P has an open neighbourhood on which the same property holds at every point. The set in the exercise is then a union of these open neighbourhoods and hence open.

The local ring at PP has the form

𝒪P=R𝔪 \mathcal O_P=R_{\mathfrak m}

for a maximal ideal 𝔪\mathfrak m in RR. Membership qR𝔪q\in R_{\mathfrak m} means that

q=rf q=\frac rf

with f𝔪f\notin\mathfrak m. Hence PD(f)P\in D(f), so D(f)D(f) is an open neighbourhood of PP. For every PD(f)P'\in D(f), the element ff is again an allowable denominator. Thus q𝒪Pq\in\mathcal O_{P'} for every PD(f)P'\in D(f), as required.

Back to Exercise 15.22.

English Markdown source · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Lecture 16: Irreducible Filters, Morphisms, and Fibres

Irreducible filters

Coffee grounds retained in a paper filter in a white ceramic holder

A filter can be identified with what it retains. Elke Wetzig (Elya), CC BY-SA 3.0. Source details are given in the Unit 16 media credits.

In the preceding lecture we saw that a point PP in the KK-spectrum

KSpek(R) K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R)

determines its neighbourhood filter, and that the stalk at this filter is the localisation of RR at the corresponding maximal ideal

𝔪PR. \mathfrak m_P\subseteq R.

We also saw that if RR is an integral domain, the stalk at the filter of all nonempty open sets gives the fraction field of RR, which in turn is the localisation at the zero ideal. The concept of an irreducible filter generalises this relationship.

Definition: irreducible filters

A topological filter FF is called irreducible if

F \varnothing\notin F

and the following condition holds: if U,VU,V are two open sets with

UVF, U\cup V\in F,

then UFU\in F or VFV\in F.

For Zariski filters, that is, topological filters in the Zariski topology, the following correspondence holds.

Theorem: prime ideals, irreducible closed sets, and irreducible filters

Let KK be an algebraically closed field, let RR be a commutative KK-algebra of finite type, and let

X=KSpek(R). X=K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R).

The following objects correspond to one another:

  1. prime ideals in RR;
  2. irreducible closed subsets of XX;
  3. irreducible filters in XX.

An irreducible closed subset YXY\subseteq X corresponds to the filter

F(Y)={UXU is open and UY}. F(Y)=\{U\subseteq X\mid U\text{ is open and }U\cap Y\ne\varnothing\}.

The stalk of the structure sheaf at this filter is the localisation R𝔭R_{\mathfrak p}, where 𝔭\mathfrak p is the corresponding prime ideal.

Edition note: for the structure sheaf of algebraic functions used here, the stalk formula presupposes that RR is reduced. For a general RR, replace it in that formula by R/(0)R/\sqrt{(0)}. Nilpotent elements vanish as functions. The prime ideal/filter correspondence itself is unchanged.

Proof

The correspondence between prime ideals and irreducible closed subsets is already known: a prime ideal 𝔭\mathfrak p corresponds to the irreducible closed subset V(𝔭)V(\mathfrak p); see Lemma 4.3 and Proposition 11.7.

The stated construction for an irreducible closed set YY does indeed give an irreducible filter. Irreducibility follows immediately from the definition; only the intersection property of a filter needs checking. Let

U,VF(Y), U,V\in F(Y),

so that YUY\cap U and YVY\cap V are nonempty. Since YY is irreducible,

(YU)(YV)=Y(UV) (Y\cap U)\cap(Y\cap V)=Y\cap(U\cap V)

is also nonempty. Thus UVF(Y)U\cap V\in F(Y).

Now let FF be an irreducible topological filter. We claim that the complement of

S={fRD(f)F} S=\{f\in R\mid D(f)\in F\}

is a prime ideal. The set SS is immediately a saturated multiplicative system. It remains to show that its complement is closed under addition. Let g,hRg,h\in R with g+hSg+h\in S. Then D(g+h)FD(g+h)\in F. Since

D(g)D(h)=D(g,h)D(g+h), D(g)\cup D(h)=D(g,h)\supseteq D(g+h),

the set D(g)D(h)D(g)\cup D(h) also belongs to FF. Irreducibility of FF gives D(g)FD(g)\in F or D(h)FD(h)\in F, hence gSg\in S or hSh\in S. Thus the complement of SS is closed under addition and is a prime ideal.

Composing the three correspondences always returns the original object. To see this, it suffices to note that an irreducible Zariski filter is generated by open sets of the form D(f)D(f); see Exercise 16.1. The assertion about the stalk is a special case of Exercise 15.27.

The filter associated with an irreducible closed set YY is also called the generic filter of YY, and its stalk the generic stalk of YY. The correspondence in Theorem 16.2 gives, as a special case, the relationship between minimal prime ideals, irreducible components, and ultrafilters. At the other extreme, maximal ideals, points, and neighbourhood filters correspond.

Morphisms between varieties

Definition: morphisms

Let XX and YY be quasi-affine varieties, and let

ψ:YX \psi:Y\longrightarrow X

be a continuous map. We call ψ\psi a morphism of quasi-affine varieties if, for every open set UXU\subseteq X and every algebraic function

fΓ(U,𝒪), f\in\Gamma(U,\mathcal O),

the composite function

fψ:ψ1(U)Uf𝔸K1 f\circ\psi:\psi^{-1}(U)\longrightarrow U \stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}\mathbb A_K^1

belongs to Γ(ψ1(U),𝒪)\Gamma(\psi^{-1}(U),\mathcal O).

Remark: pullback homomorphisms

By definition, a morphism ψ:YX\psi:Y\to X induces, for every open set UXU\subseteq X, a ring homomorphism

ψ̃:Γ(U,𝒪)Γ(ψ1(U),𝒪). \widetilde\psi: \Gamma(U,\mathcal O) \longrightarrow \Gamma(\psi^{-1}(U),\mathcal O).

In particular, there is a global ring homomorphism

ψ̃:Γ(X,𝒪)Γ(Y,𝒪). \widetilde\psi: \Gamma(X,\mathcal O) \longrightarrow \Gamma(Y,\mathcal O).

If U1U2U_1\subseteq U_2 are open sets in XX, we have a commutative diagram of continuous maps

ψ1(U1)U1ψ1(U2)U2, \begin{matrix} \psi^{-1}(U_1)&\longrightarrow&U_1\\ \downarrow&&\downarrow\\ \psi^{-1}(U_2)&\longrightarrow&U_2, \end{matrix}

whose vertical arrows are open inclusions. This gives a commutative diagram of ring homomorphisms

Γ(ψ1(U1),𝒪)Γ(U1,𝒪)Γ(ψ1(U2),𝒪)Γ(U2,𝒪). \begin{matrix} \Gamma(\psi^{-1}(U_1),\mathcal O)&\longleftarrow&\Gamma(U_1,\mathcal O)\\ \uparrow&&\uparrow\\ \Gamma(\psi^{-1}(U_2),\mathcal O)&\longleftarrow&\Gamma(U_2,\mathcal O). \end{matrix}

Edition note: the source calls U1,U2U_1,U_2 open sets in YY. However, the preceding definition, the expressions ψ1(Ui)\psi^{-1}(U_i), and both diagrams require UiXU_i\subseteq X. This edition displays the ambient space determined by that context.

We collect some elementary properties of morphisms.

Proposition: open inclusions and composition

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and let U,X,Y,ZU,X,Y,Z be quasi-affine varieties. Then:

  1. an open inclusion UXU\subseteq X is a morphism;
  2. if θ:ZY\theta:Z\to Y and ψ:YX\psi:Y\to X are morphisms, then ψθ\psi\circ\theta is also a morphism.

The following properties are more important.

Theorem: algebra homomorphisms induce morphisms

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and let R,SR,S be commutative KK-algebras of finite type, with KK-spectra

X=KSpek(R),Y=KSpek(S). X=K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R), \qquad Y=K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(S).

Every KK-algebra homomorphism

φ:RS \varphi:R\longrightarrow S

induces a map of spectra

φ*:YX \varphi^*:Y\longrightarrow X

that is a morphism.

Proof

By Theorem 12.7, the map φ*:YX\varphi^*:Y\to X is already known to be continuous. Let UXU\subseteq X be open, set

V=(φ*)1(U), V=(\varphi^*)^{-1}(U),

and take an algebraic function f:UKf:U\to K. We must show that fφ*:VKf\circ\varphi^*:V\to K is also algebraic. Take PVP\in V, set Q=φ*(P)Q=\varphi^*(P), and choose

QD(H)U,f=G/Hon D(H),G,HR. Q\in D(H)\subseteq U, \qquad f=G/H\quad\text{on }D(H), \qquad G,H\in R.

By Theorem 12.7,

P(φ*)1(D(H))=D(φ(H)). P\in(\varphi^*)^{-1}(D(H))=D(\varphi(H)).

On this open set we have

fφ*=φ(G)φ(H). f\circ\varphi^*=\frac{\varphi(G)}{\varphi(H)}.

Indeed, for P̃D(φ(H))\widetilde P\in D(\varphi(H)),

(fφ*)(P̃)=f(φ*(P̃))=G(φ*(P̃))H(φ*(P̃))=(φ(G))(P̃)(φ(H))(P̃). \begin{aligned} (f\circ\varphi^*)(\widetilde P) &=f(\varphi^*(\widetilde P))\\ &=\frac{G(\varphi^*(\widetilde P))} {H(\varphi^*(\widetilde P))}\\ &=\frac{(\varphi(G))(\widetilde P)} {(\varphi(H))(\widetilde P)}. \end{aligned}

Thus the composite is locally a rational function with nonzero denominator, as required.

Remark: pullback on principal open sets

In the situation of Theorem 16.6, the ring homomorphism associated with U=D(f)U=D(f) is the natural map

Γ(D(f),𝒪)RfΓ((φ*)1(D(f)),𝒪)=Γ(D(φ(f)),𝒪)=Sφ(f). \Gamma(D(f),\mathcal O)\cong R_f \longrightarrow \Gamma((\varphi^*)^{-1}(D(f)),\mathcal O) =\Gamma(D(\varphi(f)),\mathcal O)=S_{\varphi(f)}.

Edition note: the identifications with these localisations use reduced RR and SS; otherwise use their reductions, as in the stalk formula above.

Lemma: a global algebraic function is a morphism to the affine line

Let UU be a quasi-affine variety over an algebraically closed field KK, and let

fΓ(U,𝒪) f\in\Gamma(U,\mathcal O)

be an algebraic function. Then ff defines a morphism

f:U𝔸K1K. f:U\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^1\cong K.

Proof

By Exercise 14.4, the map is continuous. Let UKSpek(R)U\subseteq K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R), take an open set

V=D(s)𝔸K1,W=f1(V)U, V=D(s)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^1, \qquad W=f^{-1}(V)\subseteq U,

and an algebraic function on VV,

q=rsnΓ(V,𝒪)=K[T]s. q=\frac r{s^n}\in\Gamma(V,\mathcal O)=K[T]_s.

We need to show that qfq\circ f is algebraic on WW. Take PWP\in W and a local representation

f=G/H f=G/H

on a neighbourhood D(H)PD(H)\ni P. Then

(qf)(P)=q(f(P))=rsn(GH(P))=r(G(P)/H(P))(s(G(P)/H(P)))n. (q\circ f)(P) =q(f(P)) =\frac r{s^n}\!\left(\frac GH(P)\right) =\frac{r(G(P)/H(P))}{(s(G(P)/H(P)))^n}.

The denominator is nonzero because f(P)D(s)f(P)\in D(s); this is therefore the required rational representation.

Theorem: morphisms to the affine line are global sections

Let UKSpek(R)U\subseteq K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R) be a quasi-affine variety, where RR is a commutative KK-algebra of finite type over an algebraically closed field KK. There is a natural bijection

Mor(U,𝔸K1)Γ(U,𝒪),ψψ̃(T), \begin{aligned} \operatorname{Mor}(U,\mathbb A_K^1)&\longrightarrow\Gamma(U,\mathcal O),\\ \psi&\longmapsto\widetilde\psi(T), \end{aligned}

where TT is the variable in

K[T]=Γ(𝔸K1,𝒪). K[T]=\Gamma(\mathbb A_K^1,\mathcal O).

In particular, a morphism from UU to the affine line is uniquely determined by the global ring homomorphism

ψ̃:K[T]Γ(U,𝒪). \widetilde\psi:K[T]\longrightarrow\Gamma(U,\mathcal O).

Proof

The displayed map is well defined and surjective. Given a global algebraic function fΓ(U,𝒪)f\in\Gamma(U,\mathcal O), we first have a map f:UKf:U\to K. The variable TT, which corresponds to the identity map on K=𝔸K1K=\mathbb A_K^1, pulls back along ff to the element ff itself. By Lemma 16.8, ff is a morphism.

Injectivity follows because both the morphism and the algebraic function are uniquely determined by their underlying continuous map.

Theorem: morphisms to an affine variety as algebra homomorphisms

Let UKSpek(R)U\subseteq K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R) be a quasi-affine variety, where RR is a commutative KK-algebra of finite type over an algebraically closed field KK. Let SS be another commutative KK-algebra of finite type. There is a natural bijection

Mor(U,KSpek(S))HomKalg(S,Γ(U,𝒪)),ψψ̃. \begin{aligned} \operatorname{Mor}\bigl(U,K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(S)\bigr) &\longrightarrow \operatorname{Hom}^{\mathrm{alg}}_K\bigl(S,\Gamma(U,\mathcal O)\bigr),\\ \psi&\longmapsto\widetilde\psi. \end{aligned}

Here ψ̃\widetilde\psi denotes the global ring homomorphism associated with ψ\psi.

Proof

The map is well defined. Theorem 16.9 proves the assertion for S=K[T]S=K[T]. Since a morphism to affine space 𝔸Kn\mathbb A_K^n is determined by its components, and a KK-algebra homomorphism from K[T1,,Tn]K[T_1,\ldots,T_n] by the substitutions for the TiT_i, the assertion also holds for every polynomial ring K[T1,,Tn]K[T_1,\ldots,T_n].

Now write

S=K[T1,,Tn]/𝔞,KSpek(S)V(𝔞)=V𝔸Kn. S=K[T_1,\ldots,T_n]/\mathfrak a, \qquad K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(S)\cong V(\mathfrak a)=V \subseteq\mathbb A_K^n.

Composing a morphism UKSpek(S)U\to K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(S) with the closed inclusion into affine space again gives a morphism. Thus there is a commutative diagram

Mor(U,KSpek(S))HomKalg(S,Γ(U,𝒪))Mor(U,𝔸Kn)HomKalg(K[T1,,Tn],Γ(U,𝒪)). \begin{matrix} \operatorname{Mor}\bigl(U,K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(S)\bigr) &\longrightarrow& \operatorname{Hom}^{\mathrm{alg}}_K\bigl(S,\Gamma(U,\mathcal O)\bigr)\\ \downarrow&&\downarrow\\ \operatorname{Mor}(U,\mathbb A_K^n) &\longrightarrow& \operatorname{Hom}^{\mathrm{alg}}_K \bigl(K[T_1,\ldots,T_n],\Gamma(U,\mathcal O)\bigr). \end{matrix}

The lower map is already known to be bijective, and both vertical maps are injective. We need only check that the lower map identifies the two upper subsets.

A morphism U𝔸KnU\to\mathbb A_K^n that factors through VV as a map is also a morphism to VV. It suffices to check the morphism property on principal open sets D(H)D(H) with HSH\in S. If H̃K[T1,,Tn]\widetilde H\in K[T_1,\ldots,T_n] represents HH, the map

K[T1,,Tn]H̃SH K[T_1,\ldots,T_n]_{\widetilde H}\longrightarrow S_H

is surjective. Thus every element of SHS_H pulls back to an algebraic function. On the right of the diagram, an algebra homomorphism belongs to the upper subset exactly when 𝔞\mathfrak a is contained in its kernel. The assertion now follows from Exercise 16.8.

A double cone intersected by a sloping line, with x, y, and z coordinate axes

Not every function defined on the cone away from the line extends to affine space with that line removed. Pmidden, public domain. Source details are given in the Unit 16 media credits.

Example: a restriction map that is not surjective

Consider the standard cone as the closed subset

V=V(X2+Y2Z2)𝔸K3. V=V(X^2+Y^2-Z^2)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^3.

Let

U=D(X,ZY)𝔸K3. U=D(X,Z-Y)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^3.

The intersection UV=D(X,ZY)U\cap V=D(X,Z-Y), now regarded inside VV, is open in VV. The associated ring homomorphism

Γ(U,𝒪)Γ(UV,𝒪) \Gamma(U,\mathcal O)\longrightarrow\Gamma(U\cap V,\mathcal O)

is not surjective. On the left there is simply the polynomial ring in three variables; compare Exercise 14.24. On the other hand, the equation

X2=Z2Y2=(ZY)(Z+Y) X^2=Z^2-Y^2=(Z-Y)(Z+Y)

gives an algebraic function on UVU\cap V,

XZY=Z+YX. \frac{X}{Z-Y}=\frac{Z+Y}{X}.

This function does not belong to the image of the map, because it does not extend to a function on the whole cone.

Edition note: this example requires char(K)2\operatorname{char}(K)\ne2. In characteristic 22 the zero locus is the plane X+YZ=0X+Y-Z=0, and the displayed function is 11 on UVU\cap V, so it does extend. The source does not state the characteristic restriction.

Vertical fibre lines above an oval region M, with a dashed open region U inside M

The fibres of a map: MM is the codomain, the domain is the union of all fibres, and the map goes from top to bottom. 132人目’, CC BY-SA 3.0. Source details are given in the Unit 16 media credits.

Definition: fibres

Let

ψ:YX \psi:Y\longrightarrow X

be a morphism between affine varieties. For a point PXP\in X, the preimage

ψ1(P)Y \psi^{-1}(P)\subseteq Y

is called the fibre over PP. As a closed subset of YY, it is itself an affine variety.


Edition provenance. Translation and reader production: OpenAI Codex gpt-5.6-sol, Ultra. Sources, authors, and component licences are retained as stated in the metadata and the edition’s rights files.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0 for translated course text; media retain component rights in authority/RIGHTS-unit-16.csv · Rights record: RIGHTS-unit-16.csv

Worksheet 16

Practice exercises

Exercise 16.1 ★

Let

X=KSpek(R) X=K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R)

be the KK-spectrum of a finitely generated commutative KK-algebra. Show that an irreducible filter is generated by open sets of the form D(f)D(f).

Exercise 16.2

Let X=KSpek(R)X=K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R) be an affine variety and let ZXZ\subseteq X be a closed subset. Show that the neighbourhood filter 𝒰(Z)\mathcal U(Z) is generated by open sets of the form D(f)D(f).

Exercise 16.3

Let XX be a topological space. Show that every ultrafilter is irreducible.

Exercise 16.4

Show that in the correspondence of Theorem 16.2, maximal ideals, points of the KK-spectrum, and neighbourhood filters of points correspond to one another.

Exercise 16.5

Show that in the correspondence of Theorem 16.2, minimal prime ideals, irreducible components of the KK-spectrum, and ultrafilters correspond to one another.

Exercise 16.6

Let KK be an algebraically closed field. Consider the affine plane 𝔸K2\mathbb A_K^2 together with the xx-axis

V=V(y). V=V(y).

Show that the following set is a saturated multiplicative system:

S={fK[X,Y]|the homogeneous component fdeg(f) contains xdeg(f)}. S= \left\{ f\in K[X,Y] \mathrel{\Big|} \text{the homogeneous component }f_{\deg(f)} \text{ contains }x^{\deg(f)} \right\}.

Sketch the zero loci of some polynomials belonging to SS and some not belonging to SS.

Let FF be the associated topological filter. Compare FF with the neighbourhood filter of VV and the generic filter of VV.

Exercise 16.7

Let UU be a quasi-affine variety over an algebraically closed field KK. Show that the units in Γ(U,𝒪U)\Gamma(U,\mathcal O_U) correspond to morphisms from UU to

𝔸K×=𝔸K1\{0}. \mathbb A_K^\times =\mathbb A_K^1\setminus\{0\}.

Exercise 16.8

Let UU be a quasi-affine variety over an algebraically closed field KK and let

ψ:U𝔸Kn \psi:U\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^n

be a morphism. Show that ψ\psi factors through the closed subset

V(𝔞)𝔸Kn V(\mathfrak a)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n

if and only if 𝔞\mathfrak a is contained in the kernel of the global ring homomorphism

ψ̃:K[T1,,Tn]Γ(U,𝒪U). \widetilde\psi: K[T_1,\ldots,T_n]\longrightarrow\Gamma(U,\mathcal O_U).

Exercise 16.9

Let UU and VV be quasi-affine varieties over an algebraically closed field KK, and let

W=UV W=U\uplus V

be their disjoint union. Show that for every quasi-affine variety ZZ, a morphism WZW\to Z is the same as a pair of morphisms, one from UU to ZZ and one from VV to ZZ.

Exercise 16.10 ★

Give an example of two affine varieties V1,V2V_1,V_2 and a bijective morphism

ψ:V1V2 \psi:V_1\longrightarrow V_2

whose inverse map is not continuous.

Exercise 16.11 ★

Let

V=V(x2+y21)𝔸K2 V=V(x^2+y^2-1)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^2

be the unit circle over a field KK, and let P=(a,b)P=(a,b) and Q=(c,d)Q=(c,d) be points on VV. Show that there is an automorphism

φ:VV \varphi:V\longrightarrow V

with φ(P)=Q\varphi(P)=Q.

Exercise 16.12 ★

  1. In the real case, sketch the zero loci

    V=V(XY,XZ,YZ)𝔸K3 V=V(XY,XZ,YZ)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^3

    and

    W=V(ST(ST))𝔸K2. W=V(ST(S-T))\subseteq\mathbb A_K^2.

  2. Construct a bijective morphism

    φ:VW. \varphi:V\longrightarrow W.

  3. Show that if the characteristic of KK is not 22, the morphism φ\varphi is an isomorphism away from the origin.

Exercise 16.13 ★

Show that the map

φ:V(Z2+W21)V(X2+Y21),(Z,W)(Z2W2,2ZW)=(X,Y) \begin{aligned} \varphi:V(Z^2+W^2-1)&\longrightarrow V(X^2+Y^2-1),\\ (Z,W)&\longmapsto(Z^2-W^2,2ZW)=(X,Y) \end{aligned}

is a morphism from the unit circle to itself. Show that the preimage of every point

PV(X2+Y21) P\in V(X^2+Y^2-1)

consists of two points.

Edition note: the two-point assertion needs additional hypotheses, for example that KK is algebraically closed and char(K)2\operatorname{char}(K)\ne2. In characteristic 22 the map is constant; over \mathbb Q, the point (0,1)(0,1) has no preimage. The source does not state these restrictions.

Exercise 16.14

Let XX and ZZ be quasi-affine varieties over an algebraically closed field KK. For every open set UXU\subseteq X, consider

(U):={φ:UZφ is a morphism}. \mathcal F(U) :=\{\varphi:U\to Z\mid\varphi\text{ is a morphism}\}.

Show that \mathcal F is a sheaf on XX.

Exercise 16.15 ★

Describe a KK-algebra homomorphism whose induced map of KK-spectra describes addition on KK.

Exercise 16.16

Let KK be an algebraically closed field. Show that addition, multiplication, negation, inversion, and division on KK can be realised as morphisms on their respective natural domains.

Exercise 16.17

Let RR be a commutative ring, let

𝔞=(f1,,fn) \mathfrak a=(f_1,\ldots,f_n)

be a finitely generated ideal, and let fRf\in R. The RR-algebra

A=R[T1,,Tn]/(f1T1++fnTn+f) A= R[T_1,\ldots,T_n]/(f_1T_1+\cdots+f_nT_n+f)

is called the forcing algebra for f1,,fn,ff_1,\ldots,f_n,f. Show that AA has the following property: for every ring homomorphism φ:RS\varphi:R\to S to a commutative ring SS satisfying

φ(f)𝔞S, \varphi(f)\in\mathfrak aS,

there is an RR-algebra homomorphism

ϑ:AS. \vartheta:A\longrightarrow S.

Show also that this homomorphism is not uniquely determined in general.

Edition note: the source’s non-uniqueness statement is understood in this general sense. Particular data can force uniqueness, for example n=1n=1 and f1=1f_1=1.

Exercise 16.18

Let RR be a commutative KK-algebra of finite type over an algebraically closed field. For f1,,fn,fRf_1,\ldots,f_n,f\in R, let

A=R[T1,,Tn]/(f1T1++fnTn+f) A= R[T_1,\ldots,T_n]/(f_1T_1+\cdots+f_nT_n+f)

be the associated forcing algebra. Characterise the fibres of the morphism

KSpek(A)KSpek(R). K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(A) \longrightarrow K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R).

Exercises for submission

Exercise 16.19 (4 points)

Let KK be an algebraically closed field, let R,SR,S be KK-algebras of finite type that are integral domains, and let

φ:RS \varphi:R\longrightarrow S

be a KK-algebra homomorphism, with associated morphism

φ*:KSpek(S)KSpek(R). \varphi^*: K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(S) \longrightarrow K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R).

Show that the following statements are equivalent.

  1. φ\varphi is injective.
  2. The image of φ*\varphi^* is dense in KSpek(R)K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R).
  3. φ\varphi induces a ring homomorphism Q(R)Q(S)Q(R)\to Q(S).

Exercise 16.20 (4 points)

Let KK be an algebraically closed field, let R,SR,S be KK-algebras of finite type that are integral domains, and suppose a KK-algebra homomorphism

φ:Q(R)Q(S) \varphi:Q(R)\longrightarrow Q(S)

between their fraction fields is given. Show that there is an open set

UKSpek(S) U\subseteq K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(S)

and a morphism

UKSpek(R) U\longrightarrow K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R)

that induces φ\varphi.

Exercise 16.21 (5 points)

Give an example of two affine algebraic curves C1,C2C_1,C_2 over \mathbb C and a bijective morphism

ψ:C1C2 \psi:C_1\longrightarrow C_2

whose inverse map is not continuous in the metric topology.

Exercise 16.22 (6 points)

Give an example of two irreducible affine varieties V1,V2V_1,V_2 and a bijective morphism

ψ:V1V2 \psi:V_1\longrightarrow V_2

whose inverse map is not continuous in the Zariski topology and hence is not a morphism either.

Exercise 16.23 (3 points)

Let

UKSpek(R) U\subseteq K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R)

be a quasi-affine variety and let fΓ(U,𝒪)f\in\Gamma(U,\mathcal O) be an algebraic function. Let

f=gi/hi,i=1,,n, f=g_i/h_i, \qquad i=1,\ldots,n,

be local representations of ff on open sets D(hi)UD(h_i)\subseteq U covering UU. Show that its zero fibre is the closed subset

f1(0)=V(h1g1,,hngn)U. f^{-1}(0)=V(h_1g_1,\ldots,h_ng_n)\cap U.

Edition note: on the left of the local representation, the source writes q=gi/hiq=g_i/h_i, although the function defined and being represented is ff. This edition displays the variable determined by the context of the exercise.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Public Solutions to Worksheet 16

At the frozen revision boundary, the source provides public solutions only for Exercises 16.1, 16.10, 16.11, 16.12, 16.13, and 16.15. No additional solutions have been created for this edition. Solution 16.13 is retained only as far as it is actually available in the source; that boundary is explained where it occurs.

Solution to Exercise 16.1

Let FF be an irreducible filter. For every UFU\in F, write

U=D(f1)D(fk). U=D(f_1)\cup\cdots\cup D(f_k).

Since FF is irreducible, at least one D(fi)D(f_i) belongs to FF. Since

D(fi)U, D(f_i)\subseteq U,

the open sets of the form D(f)D(f) belonging to FF generate the filter.

Back to Exercise 16.1.

Solution to Exercise 16.10

Consider the affine line 𝔸K1\mathbb A_K^1 and the punctured line

Y=𝔸K1\{0}, Y=\mathbb A_K^1\setminus\{0\},

which is affine because it can be realised as a hyperbola. Consider the disjoint union

Z=Y{P} Z=Y\uplus\{P\}

with one additional point. There is a natural morphism

Z𝔸K1 Z\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^1

that is the open inclusion on YY and sends PP to the origin. This map is bijective. However, {P}\{P\} is open on the left but not on the right. Thus the inverse map is not continuous.

Back to Exercise 16.10.

Solution to Exercise 16.11

It suffices to give, for (1,0)(1,0) and P=(a,b)VP=(a,b)\in V, an automorphism of the circle taking (1,0)(1,0) to PP. The required automorphism from PP to QQ is then obtained by composing maps of this kind and, where necessary, their inverses.

Consider the bijective linear map

φ:K2K2 \varphi:K^2\longrightarrow K^2

given by the matrix

(abba). \begin{pmatrix} a&-b\\ b&a \end{pmatrix}.

It sends (1,0)(1,0) to (a,b)(a,b). A point (x,y)V(x,y)\in V maps to

(axby,bx+ay). (ax-by,bx+ay).

For the image point we have

(axby)2+(bx+ay)2=a2x22abxy+b2y2+b2x2+2abxy+a2y2=(a2+b2)x2+(a2+b2)y2=x2+y2=1. \begin{aligned} (ax-by)^2+(bx+ay)^2 &=a^2x^2-2abxy+b^2y^2+b^2x^2+2abxy+a^2y^2\\ &=(a^2+b^2)x^2+(a^2+b^2)y^2\\ &=x^2+y^2\\ &=1. \end{aligned}

Thus the image point again lies on the circle, and φ\varphi induces an algebraic map VVV\to V. The linear map with matrix

(abba) \begin{pmatrix} a&b\\ -b&a \end{pmatrix}

gives the inverse morphism. We therefore obtain an automorphism.

Edition note: in the second term on the first line of the calculation, the source writes (bx+ax)2(bx+ax)^2. Both the map just defined and the expansion on the following line require (bx+ay)2(bx+ay)^2, which is displayed here.

Back to Exercise 16.11.

Solution to Exercise 16.12

  1. We have

    V=V(XY,XZ,YZ)=V(X,Y)V(X,Z)V(Y,Z), V=V(XY,XZ,YZ) =V(X,Y)\cup V(X,Z)\cup V(Y,Z),

    the union of the three coordinate axes in three-dimensional affine space.

    Three coordinate axes meeting at the origin

    Sketch of the union of the three coordinate axes. Kalan, CC BY-SA 3.0. Source details are given in the Unit 16 media credits.

    Edition note: the source displays V(XY)V(XZ)V(YZ)V(XY)\cup V(XZ)\cup V(YZ) on the right. That union is not the common zero locus of the three polynomials and does not consist only of the three axes. This edition displays the component decomposition matching the left-hand side and the source’s following sentence.

  2. The linear map

    K3K2 K^3\longrightarrow K^2

    given, with respect to the standard bases, by the matrix

    (101011) \begin{pmatrix} 1&0&1\\ 0&1&1 \end{pmatrix}

    is the identity on the XYXY-plane and sends the ZZ-axis to the main diagonal in that plane. Thus the image of the union of the axes lies entirely in

    W=V(ST(ST)), W=V(ST(S-T)),

    giving a morphism

    φ:VW. \varphi:V\longrightarrow W.

    This morphism is bijective because each of the lines involved is mapped bijectively to one of the lines.

  3. Algebraically, there is a KK-algebra homomorphism

    K[S,T]/(ST(ST))K[X,Y,Z]/(XY,XZ,YZ), K[S,T]/(ST(S-T)) \longrightarrow K[X,Y,Z]/(XY,XZ,YZ),

    with

    SX+Z,TY+Z. S\longmapsto X+Z, \qquad T\longmapsto Y+Z.

    It induces a homomorphism of localisations

    (K[S,T]/(ST(ST)))S+T(K[X,Y,Z]/(XY,XZ,YZ))X+Y+2Z. \bigl(K[S,T]/(ST(S-T))\bigr)_{S+T} \longrightarrow \bigl(K[X,Y,Z]/(XY,XZ,YZ)\bigr)_{X+Y+2Z}.

    The intersection of V(S+T)V(S+T), respectively V(X+Y+2Z)V(X+Y+2Z), with each of the three lines consists only of the origin, using char(K)2\operatorname{char}(K)\ne2. Thus both localisations describe the complement of the origin.

    In the variables

    A=X+Z,B=Y+Z, A=X+Z, \qquad B=Y+Z,

    the ring on the right can be written as

    K[A,B,Z,(A+B)1]/((AZ)Z,(BZ)Z,(AZ)(BZ)). K[A,B,Z,(A+B)^{-1}] \big/ \bigl((A-Z)Z,(B-Z)Z,(A-Z)(B-Z)\bigr).

    In this ring,

    2AB=2Z(A+B)2Z2=2Z(A+B)AZBZ=Z(A+B), \begin{aligned} 2AB &=2Z(A+B)-2Z^2\\ &=2Z(A+B)-AZ-BZ\\ &=Z(A+B), \end{aligned}

    so

    Z=2ABA+B. Z=\frac{2AB}{A+B}.

    Thus ZZ can be eliminated. Since

    AZ=A2ABA+B=A2+AB2ABA+B=A2ABA+B, A-Z =A-\frac{2AB}{A+B} =\frac{A^2+AB-2AB}{A+B} =\frac{A^2-AB}{A+B},

    the ideal generators become

    (AZ)Z=A2ABA+B2ABA+B=2A2B(AB)(A+B)2, (A-Z)Z =\frac{A^2-AB}{A+B}\,\frac{2AB}{A+B} =\frac{2A^2B(A-B)}{(A+B)^2},

    (BZ)Z=2AB2(AB)(A+B)2, (B-Z)Z =-\frac{2AB^2(A-B)}{(A+B)^2},

    and

    (AZ)(BZ)=A2ABA+BB2ABA+B=2A2B2AB3A3B(A+B)2. \begin{aligned} (A-Z)(B-Z) &=\frac{A^2-AB}{A+B}\, \frac{B^2-AB}{A+B}\\ &=\frac{2A^2B^2-AB^3-A^3B}{(A+B)^2}. \end{aligned}

    Edition note: the source prints a positive sign before the fraction for (BZ)Z(B-Z)Z. The displayed substitution gives a negative sign. Changing the sign does not change the generated ideal, but the algebraic equality is displayed here with the correct sign.

    Since A+BA+B and 22 are units, the first two generators give

    A3B=A2B2=AB3, A^3B=A^2B^2=AB^3,

    so the third generator is redundant. Moreover,

    AB(AB)(A+B)=AB(A2B2) AB(A-B)(A+B)=AB(A^2-B^2)

    belongs to the ideal. Since A+BA+B is a unit, AB(AB)AB(A-B) also belongs to the ideal; conversely, it generates the same ideal. Thus the map given by SAS\mapsto A and TBT\mapsto B is an isomorphism on the complement of the origin.

Back to Exercise 16.12.

Solution to Exercise 16.13

There is a morphism

V(Z2+W21)𝔸K2. V(Z^2+W^2-1)\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^2.

It therefore suffices to check that its image satisfies the circle equation. Indeed,

X2+Y2=(Z2W2)2+4Z2W2=(Z2(1Z2))2+4Z2(1Z2)=(2Z21)2+4Z2(1Z2)=4Z44Z2+1+4Z24Z4=1. \begin{aligned} X^2+Y^2 &=(Z^2-W^2)^2+4Z^2W^2\\ &=(Z^2-(1-Z^2))^2+4Z^2(1-Z^2)\\ &=(2Z^2-1)^2+4Z^2(1-Z^2)\\ &=4Z^4-4Z^2+1+4Z^2-4Z^4\\ &=1. \end{aligned}

Source-solution boundary: the frozen public solution stops after proving that the image satisfies the circle equation. It does not prove the second assertion of the exercise, that every fibre consists of two points. This edition does not invent a continuation absent from the source.

Back to Exercise 16.13.

Solution to Exercise 16.15

Consider the substitution homomorphism

K[X]K[Y,Z],XY+Z. \begin{aligned} K[X]&\longrightarrow K[Y,Z],\\ X&\longmapsto Y+Z. \end{aligned}

The induced map of spectra is

𝔸K2K2𝔸K1K,(y,z)y+z. \begin{aligned} \mathbb A_K^2\cong K^2&\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^1\cong K,\\ (y,z)&\longmapsto y+z. \end{aligned}

This is exactly addition on KK.

Back to Exercise 16.15.

English Markdown source · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0; the image in Solution 16.12 remains CC BY-SA 3.0

Lecture 17: Monoid Rings and Groups of Differences

Having developed the theory sufficiently far, we now turn to a broad class of examples: monoid rings.

Monoid rings

Definition: monoid rings

Let MM be a commutative monoid written additively and let RR be a commutative ring. The monoid ring R[M]R[M] is constructed as follows. As an RR-module,

R[M]=mMRem, R[M]=\bigoplus_{m\in M}Re_m,

that is, R[M]R[M] is the free module with basis

(em)mM. (e_m)_{m\in M}.

Multiplication on basis elements is defined by

emek:=em+k e_m\cdot e_k:=e_{m+k}

and extended distributively to all of R[M]R[M]. The identity 0M0\in M determines the multiplicative identity

1=e0. 1=e_0.

Remark: the form of elements and multiplication

Every element of a monoid ring has a unique expression

f=mM̃amem, f=\sum_{m\in\widetilde M}a_me_m,

where M̃M\widetilde M\subseteq M is finite and amRa_m\in R. Addition is componentwise, while multiplication is explicitly given by

fg=(mM̃amem)(kM¯bkek)=M(m+k=mM̃,kM¯ambk)e. \begin{aligned} fg &=\left(\sum_{m\in\widetilde M}a_me_m\right) \left(\sum_{k\in\overline M}b_ke_k\right)\\ &=\sum_{\ell\in M} \left(\sum_{\substack{m+k=\ell\\m\in\widetilde M,\ k\in\overline M}} a_mb_k\right)e_\ell. \end{aligned}

Only finitely many \ell occur, and each inner sum is also finite. This is what distributive extension means in the definition above.

It is customary to write XmX^m in place of eme_m, where XX is a suggestive symbol reminiscent of a variable. The rule

XmXk=Xm+k X^mX^k=X^{m+k}

resembles the corresponding rule for polynomial rings. Indeed, polynomial rings are special cases of monoid rings, and this notation comes from that case. A full proof that the construction really gives a ring with associative and distributive multiplication also works as in the polynomial-ring case. Usually we simply write

mMamXm, \sum_{m\in M}a_mX^m,

with almost all am=0a_m=0. Elements of the form XmX^m are called monomials. The map

MR[M],mXm \begin{aligned} M&\longrightarrow R[M],\\ m&\longmapsto X^m \end{aligned}

is a monoid homomorphism, using the multiplicative monoid structure on the right.

A monoid ring is naturally an RR-algebra: an element fRf\in R, regarded in R[M]R[M], is

f=f1=fX0. f=f\cdot1=fX^0.

Thus RR is also called the base ring of the monoid ring. Monoid rings are already interesting when the base ring is a field.

Example: polynomial rings

Let nn be a natural number and let

M=n. M=\mathbb N^n.

Thus MM is the direct product of nn copies of the natural numbers.

Every knk\in\mathbb N^n is an nn-tuple k=(k1,,kn)k=(k_1,\ldots,k_n) with kik_i\in\mathbb N, and can be written as

(k1,,kn)=k1(1,0,,0)++kn(0,,0,1). (k_1,\ldots,k_n) =k_1(1,0,\ldots,0)+\cdots+k_n(0,\ldots,0,1).

Writing

Xi=Xei=X(0,,0,1,0,,0) X_i=X^{e_i}=X^{(0,\ldots,0,1,0,\ldots,0)}

for the monomial corresponding to the iith basis element, we obtain

Xk=X1k1X2k2Xnkn. X^k=X_1^{k_1}X_2^{k_2}\cdots X_n^{k_n}.

Thus the monoid ring of n\mathbb N^n over RR is precisely the polynomial ring in nn variables. In particular,

R[]=R[X]. R[\mathbb N]=R[X].

The monoid ring of the trivial monoid {0}\{0\} is the base ring itself.

Example: Laurent rings

Let nn be a natural number and let

M=n. M=\mathbb Z^n.

Thus MM is the direct product of nn copies of the integers.

The monoid MM is the free abelian group of rank nn. Every knk\in\mathbb Z^n is an nn-tuple k=(k1,,kn)k=(k_1,\ldots,k_n) with kik_i\in\mathbb Z, which can be written as

(k1,,kn)=k1(1,0,,0)++kn(0,,0,1). (k_1,\ldots,k_n) =k_1(1,0,\ldots,0)+\cdots+k_n(0,\ldots,0,1).

As in Example 17.3, the corresponding monomial can be written uniquely as

Xk=X1k1X2k2Xnkn,Xi=Xei. X^k=X_1^{k_1}X_2^{k_2}\cdots X_n^{k_n}, \qquad X_i=X^{e_i}.

Hence

R[M]=R[X1,,Xn,X11,,Xn1]. R[M] =R[X_1,\ldots,X_n,X_1^{-1},\ldots,X_n^{-1}].

This ring is isomorphic to the localisation of the polynomial ring at the product of all the variables:

R[M]=R[X1,,Xn,X11,,Xn1]=R[X1,,Xn]X1Xn. R[M] =R[X_1,\ldots,X_n,X_1^{-1},\ldots,X_n^{-1}] =R[X_1,\ldots,X_n]_{X_1\cdots X_n}.

It is called the Laurent ring in nn variables over RR.

The universal property of monoid rings

Theorem: the universal property

Let RR be a commutative ring, let MM be a commutative monoid, let BB be a commutative RR-algebra, and let

φ:M(B,,1) \varphi:M\longrightarrow(B,\cdot,1)

be a monoid homomorphism. Then there is exactly one RR-algebra homomorphism

φ̃:R[M]B \widetilde\varphi:R[M]\longrightarrow B

making the following diagram commute:

MR[M]φ̃B. \begin{matrix} M&\longrightarrow&R[M]\\ &\searrow&\downarrow\widetilde\varphi\\ &&B. \end{matrix}

Proof

An RR-module homomorphism

φ̃:R[M]B \widetilde\varphi:R[M]\longrightarrow B

is determined by the images of the basis elements (Xm)mM(X^m)_{m\in M}. The diagram commutes exactly when

φ̃(Xm)=φ(m). \widetilde\varphi(X^m)=\varphi(m).

This condition determines the map uniquely and immediately makes it an RR-module homomorphism. We need only check multiplication. First,

φ̃(1)=φ̃(X0)=φ(0)=1. \widetilde\varphi(1) =\widetilde\varphi(X^0) =\varphi(0) =1.

Moreover,

φ̃(XmXk)=φ̃(Xm+k)=φ(m+k)=φ(m)φ(k)=φ̃(Xm)φ̃(Xk). \begin{aligned} \widetilde\varphi(X^mX^k) &=\widetilde\varphi(X^{m+k})\\ &=\varphi(m+k)\\ &=\varphi(m)\varphi(k)\\ &=\widetilde\varphi(X^m)\widetilde\varphi(X^k). \end{aligned}

Thus the map respects multiplication on monomials. For

f=mMamXm,g=kMbkXk, f=\sum_{m\in M}a_mX^m, \qquad g=\sum_{k\in M}b_kX^k,

with finite support, we obtain

φ̃(fg)=φ̃(M(m+k=ambk)X)=M(m+k=ambk)φ()=m,kMambkφ(m)φ(k)=(mMamφ(m))(kMbkφ(k))=φ̃(f)φ̃(g). \begin{aligned} \widetilde\varphi(fg) &=\widetilde\varphi\!\left( \sum_{\ell\in M}\left(\sum_{m+k=\ell}a_mb_k\right)X^\ell \right)\\ &=\sum_{\ell\in M}\left(\sum_{m+k=\ell}a_mb_k\right) \varphi(\ell)\\ &=\sum_{m,k\in M}a_mb_k\varphi(m)\varphi(k)\\ &=\left(\sum_{m\in M}a_m\varphi(m)\right) \left(\sum_{k\in M}b_k\varphi(k)\right)\\ &=\widetilde\varphi(f)\widetilde\varphi(g). \end{aligned}

Consequently φ̃\widetilde\varphi is a ring homomorphism.

Corollary: functoriality in the monoid

Let RR be a commutative ring, let M,NM,N be commutative monoids, and let

φ:MN \varphi:M\longrightarrow N

be a monoid homomorphism. It induces an RR-algebra homomorphism

φ̃:R[M]R[N],XmXφ(m). \begin{aligned} \widetilde\varphi:R[M]&\longrightarrow R[N],\\ X^m&\longmapsto X^{\varphi(m)}. \end{aligned}

Proof

Apply Theorem 17.5 to the RR-algebra B=R[N]B=R[N] and the composite monoid homomorphism

MφNR[N]. M\stackrel{\varphi}{\longrightarrow}N\longrightarrow R[N].

Remark: substitution from a polynomial algebra

A family (mi)iI(m_i)_{i\in I} in a monoid MM determines a monoid homomorphism

(I)M \mathbb N^{(I)}\longrightarrow M

sending the iith basis element eie_i to mim_i. When I={1,,n}I=\{1,\ldots,n\} is finite, Corollary 17.6 gives an RR-algebra homomorphism

R[n]=R[X1,,Xn]R[M]. R[\mathbb N^n]=R[X_1,\ldots,X_n]\longrightarrow R[M].

This is the substitution homomorphism given by

XiXmi. X_i\longmapsto X^{m_i}.

Definition: ring-valued points

For a commutative monoid MM and a commutative ring RR, a monoid homomorphism

M(R,,1) M\longrightarrow(R,\cdot,1)

is called an RR-valued point of MM.

Remark: monoid points and the KK-spectrum

By Theorem 17.5, an RR-valued point of MM is equivalent to an RR-algebra homomorphism from R[M]R[M] to RR. This terminology is especially common when the base ring is a field KK. In that case,

KSpek(K[M])=HomKalg(K[M],K)=Mormon(M,K)={K-valued points of M}. \begin{aligned} K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(K[M]) &=\operatorname{Hom}^{\mathrm{alg}}_K(K[M],K)\\ &=\operatorname{Mor}_{\mathrm{mon}}(M,K)\\ &=\{K\text{-valued points of }M\}. \end{aligned}

Thus the KK-spectrum already has a simple, purely multiplicative description at the monoid level. As we shall see, this means that the KK-spectra of monoid rings generally have much clearer descriptions than spectra of rings in general. Nevertheless, the monoid ring remains indispensable for defining the Zariski topology and the sheaf of algebraic functions on KSpek(K[M])K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(K[M]).

Remark: generators and binomial relations

A commutative monoid is often described by finitely many generators e1,,ere_1,\ldots,e_r together with binomial relations of the form

n1e1++nrer=m1e1++mrer,ni,mi. n_1e_1+\cdots+n_re_r=m_1e_1+\cdots+m_re_r, \qquad n_i,m_i\in\mathbb N.

A KK-valued point

φ:MK \varphi:M\longrightarrow K

is uniquely determined by ai=φ(ei)a_i=\varphi(e_i). For every binomial relation holding in MM, these values must satisfy

a1n1arnr=a1m1armr. a_1^{n_1}\cdots a_r^{n_r} =a_1^{m_1}\cdots a_r^{m_r}.

Lemma: injectivity and surjectivity

Let RR be a nonzero commutative ring, let M,NM,N be commutative monoids, and let

φ:MN \varphi:M\longrightarrow N

be a monoid homomorphism. The map φ\varphi is injective (respectively, surjective) if and only if the associated RR-algebra homomorphism

φ̃:R[M]R[N] \widetilde\varphi:R[M]\longrightarrow R[N]

is injective (respectively, surjective).

Proof

Suppose φ\varphi is injective and

φ̃(mMamXm)=mMamXφ(m)=0. \widetilde\varphi\!\left(\sum_{m\in M}a_mX^m\right) =\sum_{m\in M}a_mX^{\varphi(m)}=0.

Since all the φ(m)\varphi(m) are distinct, every am=0a_m=0. Conversely, if φ\varphi is not injective, take mkm\ne k with φ(m)=φ(k)\varphi(m)=\varphi(k). Then

φ̃(Xm)=φ̃(Xk),XmXk, \widetilde\varphi(X^m)=\widetilde\varphi(X^k), \qquad X^m\ne X^k,

so φ̃\widetilde\varphi is not injective.

If φ\varphi is surjective, then for any element nNanXnR[N]\sum_{n\in N}a_nX^n\in R[N], choose a preimage mnMm_n\in M of nn. The element nNanXmn\sum_{n\in N}a_nX^{m_n} is a preimage of it. Conversely, if nNn\in N is not in the image of φ\varphi, the nonzero monomial XnX^n cannot be in the image of φ̃\widetilde\varphi.

Corollary: generating sets

Let RR be a nonzero commutative ring, let MM be a commutative monoid, and let (mi)iI(m_i)_{i\in I} be a family of elements of MM. The family (mi)iI(m_i)_{i\in I} generates MM as a monoid if and only if (Xmi)iI(X^{m_i})_{i\in I} generates R[M]R[M] as an RR-algebra.

Proof

The family (mi)iI(m_i)_{i\in I} generates MM exactly when the monoid homomorphism

(I)M \mathbb N^{(I)}\longrightarrow M

is surjective. By Lemma 17.11, this is equivalent to surjectivity of

R[XiiI]R[M],XiXmi, \begin{aligned} R[X_i\mid i\in I]&\longrightarrow R[M],\\ X_i&\longmapsto X^{m_i}, \end{aligned}

which says precisely that the XmiX^{m_i} generate R[M]R[M] as an RR-algebra.

Corollary: functoriality in the base ring

Let RR be a commutative ring, let SS be an RR-algebra, and let MM be a commutative monoid. There is a natural RR-algebra homomorphism

R[M]S[M],mMamXmmMamXm, \begin{aligned} R[M]&\longrightarrow S[M],\\ \sum_{m\in M}a_mX^m&\longmapsto\sum_{m\in M}a_mX^m, \end{aligned}

where coefficients from RR are viewed through the structure map RSR\to S.

Proof

Apply Theorem 17.5 to the RR-algebra S[M]S[M] and the natural monoid homomorphism MS[M]M\to S[M].

The group of differences of a monoid

We want to know when a monoid ring is an integral domain (which is possible only when the base ring is an integral domain) and how its fraction field can then be described. In the fraction field, every nonzero element must be invertible, in particular the monomials XmX^m. It is therefore natural to look for an additive group containing MM.

Edition note: after consistently using XmX^m for monomials, the source prints TmT^m in the last sentence. This edition retains the notation XmX^m established in this lecture.

Definition: the group of differences

Let MM be a commutative monoid. The set of formal differences

Γ(M)={mnm,nM} \Gamma(M)=\{m-n\mid m,n\in M\}

is equipped with addition

(m1n1)+(m2n2):=(m1+m2)(n1+n2) (m_1-n_1)+(m_2-n_2) :=(m_1+m_2)-(n_1+n_2)

and the identification

m1n1=m2n2 m_1-n_1=m_2-n_2

whenever there is a uMu\in M such that

u+m1+n2=u+m2+n1. u+m_1+n_2=u+m_2+n_1.

The resulting object Γ(M)\Gamma(M) is called the group of differences of MM.

Exercise 17.13 asks the reader to show that it really is a group. The construction is modelled on the construction of fraction fields, with multiplicative notation replaced by additive notation. The construction of the group of differences is actually more elementary. For example,

Γ()=. \Gamma(\mathbb N)=\mathbb Z.

There is a natural monoid homomorphism

MΓ(M),mm0. \begin{aligned} M&\longrightarrow\Gamma(M),\\ m&\longmapsto m-0. \end{aligned}

We usually write simply mm for m0m-0. This map need not be injective, because the extra element uu may occur in the identification above, and this cannot be avoided. We now characterise the monoids for which that extra element is unnecessary.

Definition: the cancellation law

A commutative monoid MM is said to satisfy the cancellation law (or to be a cancellative monoid) if

m+n=m+k,m,n,kM, m+n=m+k, \qquad m,n,k\in M,

always implies n=kn=k.

For such a monoid, the map MΓ(M)M\to\Gamma(M) is injective; see Exercise 17.16.


Edition provenance. Translation and reader production: OpenAI Codex gpt-5.6-sol, Ultra. Sources, authors, and component licences are retained as stated in the metadata and the edition’s rights files.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0 for translated course text; official PDF rights are recorded in authority/ASSET_CLOSURE-unit-17.json · Rights record: ASSET_CLOSURE-unit-17.json

Worksheet 17

Practice exercises

Exercise 17.1

Calculate

(4T(1,3)6T(2,5)+5T(0,2)+3T(1,1))(7T(1,0)+8T(4,5)4T(3,5)+6T(3,1)) \left(4T^{(-1,3)}-6T^{(-2,5)}+5T^{(0,-2)}+3T^{(-1,1)}\right) \left(-7T^{(1,0)}+8T^{(4,5)}-4T^{(-3,5)}+6T^{(3,-1)}\right)

in the monoid ring K[2]K[\mathbb Z^2].

Exercise 17.2

Calculate

(4T09T1+9T2+7T34T4)(4T0T1+5T2+7T3T4) \left(4T^0-9T^1+9T^2+7T^3-4T^4\right) \left(4T^0-T^1+5T^2+7T^3-T^4\right)

in the monoid ring K[/(5)]K[\mathbb Z/(5)].

Exercise 17.3 ★

Calculate

(3T02T1+5T2)(4T06T1+5T2) \left(3T^0-2T^1+5T^2\right) \left(4T^0-6T^1+5T^2\right)

in the monoid ring

/(7)[/(3)] \mathbb Z/(7)[\mathbb Z/(3)]

over the field /(7)\mathbb Z/(7).

Exercise 17.4

Show that multiplication in the monoid ring of a commutative monoid satisfies the associative and distributive laws.

Exercise 17.5

Let KK be a field. Find a commutative monoid MM such that there is an isomorphism

K[M]K[X,Y,U,V]/(UXVY). K[M]\cong K[X,Y,U,V]/(UX-VY).

Exercise 17.6

Let RR be a commutative ring. Prove the RR-algebra isomorphism

R[n]R[X1,,Xn]X1Xn R[\mathbb Z^n] \cong R[X_1,\ldots,X_n]_{X_1\cdots X_n}

using the universal properties of monoid rings and localisation.

Exercise 17.7

Show that the coordinate ring of the standard cone

V(Z2X2Y2) V(Z^2-X^2-Y^2)

over \mathbb C can be realised as a monoid ring.

Exercise 17.8

Let RR be a commutative ring and let

A=R[X1,,Xn]. A=R[X_1,\ldots,X_n].

For a family of monomials

{XννJn}, \{X^\nu\mid \nu\in J\subseteq\mathbb N^n\},

show that the RR-subalgebra of AA generated by these monomials is the monoid ring R[M]R[M], where MM is the submonoid of n\mathbb N^n generated by (ν)νJ(\nu)_{\nu\in J}.

Exercise 17.9

Let MM be a commutative monoid and let eMe\in M satisfy

2e=e. 2e=e.

For a field KK, show that TeT^e is an idempotent element of K[M]K[M].

Exercise 17.10

Let G{0}G\ne\{0\} be a finite abelian group. Show that the monoid ring [G]\mathbb C[G] is not connected, although there is no element e0e\ne0 in GG satisfying

2e=e. 2e=e.

Edition note: the source entity title and the context of commutative monoid rings specify that GG is abelian, but the sentence displayed in the source mentions only a finite group. This edition displays the commutativity hypothesis stated in the exercise entity.

Exercise 17.11

Give an example of a submonoid

M2 M\subseteq\mathbb N^2

that is not finitely generated.

Invertible elements of a monoid are also called its units. They form the group of units of the monoid.

Exercise 17.12 ★

Let MM be a commutative monoid, let KK be a field, and let mMm\in M. Show that mm is a unit in MM if and only if TmT^m is a unit in K[M]K[M].

Exercise 17.13

Show that the group of differences of a commutative monoid is indeed a group.

Exercise 17.14

Let MM be a commutative monoid. Show that its group of differences

Γ=Γ(M) \Gamma=\Gamma(M)

is an abelian group and has the following universal property: for every monoid homomorphism

φ:MG \varphi:M\longrightarrow G

to a group GG, there is exactly one group homomorphism

φ̃:ΓG \widetilde\varphi:\Gamma\longrightarrow G

extending φ\varphi.

Exercise 17.15

Let MNM\subseteq N be commutative monoids. Show that

M̃={nNthere is k+ with knM} \widetilde M =\{n\in N\mid\text{there is }k\in\mathbb N_+ \text{ with }kn\in M\}

is a submonoid of NN containing MM.

Exercise 17.16

Let MM be a commutative monoid with group of differences Γ=Γ(M)\Gamma=\Gamma(M). Show that the following statements are equivalent.

  1. MM satisfies the cancellation law.
  2. The canonical map MΓ(M)M\to\Gamma(M) is injective.
  3. MM can be realised as a submonoid of a group.

Exercise 17.17

Let MM be a commutative monoid and let RR be a commutative ring. Characterise the subsets IMI\subseteq M for which

R[I]=mIRTmR[M] R[I]=\bigoplus_{m\in I}RT^m\subseteq R[M]

is an ideal in R[M]R[M].

Edition note: the source prints mITm\bigoplus_{m\in I}T^m without the coefficient module RR. Since R[I]R[I] is intended as an RR-submodule of R[M]R[M], this edition displays mIRTm\bigoplus_{m\in I}RT^m.

Exercise 17.18

Consider the monoid homomorphism

2,e11,e21. \mathbb N^2\longrightarrow\mathbb Z, \qquad e_1\longmapsto1, \qquad e_2\longmapsto-1.

Describe the associated maps between the monoid rings (over a field KK) and between the associated KK-spectra.

Exercise 17.19

Consider the commutative monoids

M=r,N=s. M=\mathbb N^r, \qquad N=\mathbb N^s.

Show that a monoid homomorphism from MM to NN is uniquely determined by a matrix with entries in \mathbb N, with rr columns and ss rows. What does the associated map of spectra look like?

Exercise 17.20

Let MM be a square r×rr\times r matrix with entries in \mathbb N, with associated monoid map and map of spectra

φ:KSpek(K[r])KSpek(K[r]), \varphi: K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(K[\mathbb N^r]) \longrightarrow K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(K[\mathbb N^r]),

where KK is an infinite field. Show that

detM0 \det M\ne0

if and only if the image of φ\varphi contains a nonempty open subset of KSpek(K[r])K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(K[\mathbb N^r]).

Edition note: this is the intended meaning of the source’s phrase “maps surjectively onto an open set”. The stated assumption that KK is infinite is insufficient: for K=K=\mathbb R and M=(2)M=(2), the image of xx2x\mapsto x^2 contains no nonempty Zariski-open subset of the line. The assertion holds if KK is algebraically closed.

The next exercise uses the following definition. A filter FF in a commutative monoid MM is a submonoid that is also closed under taking divisors: if fFf\in F and gfg\mid f, then gFg\in F.

Exercise 17.21

Let MM be a commutative monoid. Show that MM has a smallest filter and that this filter forms a group.

Exercise 17.22

Let MM be a commutative monoid and let fMf\in M. Consider the set

Mf={mnfmM,n}/, M_f =\{m-nf\mid m\in M,\ n\in\mathbb N\}/\!\sim,

where

mnfmnf m-nf\sim m'-n'f

if and only if there is a kk\in\mathbb N such that

m+nf+kf=m+nf+kf m+n'f+kf=m'+nf+kf

in MM.

  1. Show that \sim is an equivalence relation.

  2. Define a monoid structure on MfM_f.

  3. Let RR be a commutative ring and let TfR[M]T^f\in R[M] be the monomial corresponding to ff. Show that

    R[Mf]R[M]Tf. R[M_f]\cong R[M]_{T^f}.

Exercise 17.23

Let M,NM,N be finitely generated commutative monoids, with

KSpek(K[M])=Mormon(M,K) K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(K[M]) =\operatorname{Mor}_{\mathrm{mon}}(M,K)

and

KSpek(K[N])=Mormon(N,K). K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(K[N]) =\operatorname{Mor}_{\mathrm{mon}}(N,K).

For a monoid homomorphism φ:MN\varphi:M\to N, show that the associated map of spectra can be defined in two different ways that agree in substance.

Exercise 17.24

Consider the commutative monoid MM with three generators e,f,ge,f,g and the single relation

e+f=5g. e+f=5g.

Determine the KK-spectrum of MM for various fields KK.

Exercise 17.25

Let MM be a finite commutative monoid. Show that its KK-spectrum is also finite.

Exercise 17.26

In

R=[0], R=\mathbb R[\mathbb Q_{\geq0}],

calculate the product

(X2+4X3/25X+X1/2)(2X3/2+4X7X1/2). \left(X^2+4X^{3/2}-5X+X^{1/2}\right) \left(2X^{3/2}+4X-7X^{1/2}\right).

Exercise 17.27

Let KK be a field. Show that every element

FR=K[0] F\in R=K[\mathbb Q_{\geq0}]

can be written as a polynomial in X1/bX^{1/b} for some b+b\in\mathbb N_+. In other words, there is a PK[Y]P\in K[Y] such that

F=P(X1/b). F=P(X^{1/b}).

Which polynomial can be chosen for

F=X1/2+X1/3+X1/5? F=X^{1/2}+X^{1/3}+X^{1/5}?

Exercise 17.28

Show that in R=K[0]R=K[\mathbb Q_{\geq0}], the element XX has no factorisation into irreducible elements.

Exercise 17.29

Show that in R=[0]R=\mathbb R[\mathbb Q_{\geq0}], the element X2+1X^2+1 is not irreducible.

Exercise 17.30

Show that there are no irreducible elements in R=[0]R=\mathbb C[\mathbb Q_{\geq0}].

Exercise 17.31 ★

Determine all divisors of XX in the ring

R=K[0], R=K[\mathbb Q_{\geq0}],

where KK is a field.

Exercise 17.32 ★

Determine the units in the ring

R=K[], R=K[\mathbb Q],

where KK is a field.

Exercises for submission

Exercise 17.33 (6 points)

Let MNM\subseteq N be finitely generated commutative cancellative monoids. Show that, for a field KK, the ring homomorphism

K[M]K[N] K[M]\subseteq K[N]

is finite if and only if for every nNn\in N there is a k+k\in\mathbb N_+ with knMkn\in M.

Exercise 17.34 (4 points)

Let

M=(,+) M=(\mathbb Q,+)

be the additive group of rational numbers. Determine

Spek([M]). \mathbb Q\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(\mathbb Q[M]).

What happens if \mathbb Q is replaced by \mathbb R?

Exercise 17.35 (4 points)

Let

φ:MN \varphi:M\longrightarrow N

be a homomorphism of commutative monoids. Show that the set of all points in KSpek(K[N])K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(K[N]) sent by the map of spectra to the point

1KSpek(K[M]) 1\in K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(K[M])

(the point corresponding to the constant map M1M\to1) itself has the structure of the KK-spectrum of a suitable monoid.

Exercise 17.36 (4 points)

Consider monoids of the form

M=(/(m),+). M=(\mathbb Z/(m),+).

Describe KSpek(K[M])K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(K[M]) in general and specifically for

K=,,/(5). K=\mathbb R,\ \mathbb C,\ \mathbb Z/(5).

Find the idempotent elements in

[/(3)]. \mathbb C[\mathbb Z/(3)].

Exercise 17.37 (4 points)

Let MM be a commutative monoid. Define bijections between the following objects.

  1. Filters in MM.

  2. Mormon(M,({0,1},1,))\operatorname{Mor}_{\mathrm{mon}}(M,(\{0,1\},1,\cdot)).

  3. 𝔽2Spek(M)\mathbb F_2\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(M).

  4. The set

    {φKSpek(K[M])|φ(M){0,1}}, \left\{ \varphi\in K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(K[M]) \mathrel{\Big|} \varphi(M)\subseteq\{0,1\} \right\},

    where KK is a field.

Exercise 17.38 (3 points)

Let M,NM,N be commutative monoids and let KK be a field. What is the relationship between

KSpek(K[M×N]) K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(K[M\times N])

and

KSpek(K[M]),KSpek(K[N])? K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(K[M]), \qquad K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(K[N])?

Exercise 17.39 (4 points)

Let KK be a field and let GG be a group. Consider the group ring K[G]K[G], and let MM be a K[G]K[G]-module. Show that:

  1. MM is nothing other than a KK-vector space VV together with a group homomorphism

    ρ:GAutK(V); \rho:G\longrightarrow\operatorname{Aut}_K(V);

  2. a K[G]K[G]-module homomorphism

    φ:MM \varphi:M\longrightarrow M

    is a KK-linear map also satisfying

    φρ(g)=ρ(g)φ \varphi\circ\rho(g)=\rho(g)\circ\varphi

    for every gGg\in G.

The map ρ\rho is called a representation of GG. Such representations are often easier to handle than GG itself and frequently give useful insights into GG.

Edition note: the right-hand side of the source equation prints ρφ\rho\circ\varphi without the argument gg. This edition displays ρ(g)φ\rho(g)\circ\varphi, the correctly typed endomorphism expressing the intertwining condition.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Public Solutions to Worksheet 17

At the frozen revision boundary, the source provides public solutions only for Exercises 17.3, 17.12, 17.31, and 17.32. No additional solutions have been created for this edition.

Solution to Exercise 17.3

In /(7)[/(3)]\mathbb Z/(7)[\mathbb Z/(3)], coefficients are calculated modulo 77 and exponents of TT modulo 33. Thus

(3T02T1+5T2)(4T06T1+5T2)=(3T0+5T1+5T2)(4T0+T1+5T2)=5T0+3T1+T2+6T1+5T2+4T0+6T2+5T0+4T1=6T+5T2. \begin{aligned} &(3T^0-2T^1+5T^2)(4T^0-6T^1+5T^2)\\ &=(3T^0+5T^1+5T^2)(4T^0+T^1+5T^2)\\ &=5T^0+3T^1+T^2+6T^1+5T^2+4T^0 +6T^2+5T^0+4T^1\\ &=6T+5T^2. \end{aligned}

Back to Exercise 17.3.

Solution to Exercise 17.12

If mm is a unit in MM, there is an nMn\in M with

m+n=0. m+n=0.

Then

TmTn=Tm+n=T0=1, T^mT^n=T^{m+n}=T^0=1,

so TmT^m is a unit in the monoid ring.

Conversely, suppose TmT^m is a unit in the monoid ring. There is an element

P=nEanTn P=\sum_{n\in E}a_nT^n

with finite support EME\subseteq M, all displayed coefficients anKa_n\in K nonzero, and

TmP=nEanTm+n=1. T^mP=\sum_{n\in E}a_nT^{m+n}=1.

The coefficient of T0T^0 on the left is 11, so there is at least one nEn\in E such that

m+n=0. m+n=0.

Thus mm has an inverse in MM.

Edition note: the source passes directly to the assertion that all exponents m+nm+n equal zero. The argument above first uses the coefficient of T0T^0 to obtain one such nn, which already proves that mm is a unit. Translation by mm is then bijective, so the source’s stronger assertion also follows. This ordering avoids assuming cancellation prematurely.

Back to Exercise 17.12.

Solution to Exercise 17.31

The divisors of XX are exactly the elements of the form

aXq,a0,q0,q1. aX^q, \qquad a\ne0, \qquad q\in\mathbb Q_{\geq0}, \qquad q\leq1.

Every such element is indeed a divisor, since

(aXq)(a1X1q)=XqX1q=Xq+1q=X. (aX^q)(a^{-1}X^{1-q}) =X^qX^{1-q} =X^{q+1-q} =X.

Conversely, let

P=aq1Xq1+aq2Xq2++aqnXqn,0q1<q2<<qn, P=a_{q_1}X^{q_1}+a_{q_2}X^{q_2}+\cdots+a_{q_n}X^{q_n}, \qquad 0\leq q_1<q_2<\cdots<q_n,

be a divisor of XX. There is then a

Q=br1Xr1+br2Xr2++brmXrm,0r1<r2<<rm, Q=b_{r_1}X^{r_1}+b_{r_2}X^{r_2}+\cdots+b_{r_m}X^{r_m}, \qquad 0\leq r_1<r_2<\cdots<r_m,

with all displayed coefficients nonzero and PQ=XPQ=X. The lowest- and highest-exponent terms in the product are

aq1br1Xq1+r1andaqnbrmXqn+rm; a_{q_1}b_{r_1}X^{q_1+r_1} \quad\text{and}\quad a_{q_n}b_{r_m}X^{q_n+r_m};

both are nonzero. For PQ=XPQ=X, we must have

q1+r1=qn+rm=1. q_1+r_1=q_n+r_m=1.

Since the exponents are strictly ordered, this is possible only if n=m=1n=m=1. Thus P=aXqP=aX^q with 0q10\leq q\leq1, as claimed.

Edition note: in the final extreme term, the source prints aqnbrna_{q_n}b_{r_n}, although the support of QQ has mm terms and the next line itself uses rmr_m. This edition displays the terminal index aqnbrma_{q_n}b_{r_m}.

Back to Exercise 17.31.

Solution to Exercise 17.32

The units are exactly the elements of the form

aXq,a0,q. aX^q, \qquad a\ne0, \qquad q\in\mathbb Q.

Such an element is a unit because

(aXq)(a1Xq)=XqXq=Xqq=X0=1. (aX^q)(a^{-1}X^{-q}) =X^qX^{-q} =X^{q-q} =X^0 =1.

Conversely, let

P=aq1Xq1+aq2Xq2++aqnXqn,q1<q2<<qn, P=a_{q_1}X^{q_1}+a_{q_2}X^{q_2}+\cdots+a_{q_n}X^{q_n}, \qquad q_1<q_2<\cdots<q_n,

be a unit. There is a

Q=br1Xr1+br2Xr2++brmXrm,r1<r2<<rm, Q=b_{r_1}X^{r_1}+b_{r_2}X^{r_2}+\cdots+b_{r_m}X^{r_m}, \qquad r_1<r_2<\cdots<r_m,

with all displayed coefficients nonzero and PQ=1PQ=1. The lowest- and highest-exponent terms in the product are

aq1br1Xq1+r1andaqnbrmXqn+rm, a_{q_1}b_{r_1}X^{q_1+r_1} \quad\text{and}\quad a_{q_n}b_{r_m}X^{q_n+r_m},

and both are nonzero. For the product to equal 11, we must have

q1+r1=qn+rm=0. q_1+r_1=q_n+r_m=0.

The strict ordering of the exponents forces n=m=1n=m=1. Thus P=aXqP=aX^q.

Back to Exercise 17.32.

English Markdown source · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Lecture 18: Monomial Curves and Numerical Monoids

Monomial curves

We now specialise the theory of monoid rings to the one-dimensional case, obtaining the rings that describe monomial curves.

Definition: monomial curve

A monomial curve is the image of the affine line 𝔸K1\mathbb A_K^1 under a map of the form

𝔸K1𝔸Kn,t(te1,,ten), \begin{aligned} \mathbb A_K^1&\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^n,\\ t&\longmapsto(t^{e_1},\ldots,t^{e_n}), \end{aligned}

where ei1e_i\geq1 for every ii.

We shall shortly see that the image of such a monomial map is Zariski closed. Thus a monomial curve really is an algebraic curve. A monomial curve is parametrised and hence rational, although it is not generally a plane curve. Sometimes the map itself is also called a monomial curve.

Edition note: the source’s closed-image assertion holds for relatively prime exponents over any field, and for arbitrary exponents over an algebraically closed field. Without such a hypothesis it can fail: tt2t\mapsto t^2 over \mathbb R has a non-Zariski-closed image.

We often restrict attention to exponents eie_i whose greatest common divisor is 11. This is no essential restriction. If mm is the greatest common divisor of all the eie_i, we can write

ei=mfi e_i=mf_i

with f1,,fnf_1,\ldots,f_n relatively prime, and factor the map as

𝔸K1𝔸K1𝔸Kn,ttm=s,s(sf1,,sfn). \mathbb A_K^1\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^1\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^n, \qquad t\longmapsto t^m=s, \qquad s\longmapsto(s^{f_1},\ldots,s^{f_n}).

The first map is simply exponentiation, while the second is a monomial curve map with relatively prime exponents.

Edition note: although the domain of the second map is the affine line with a single coordinate ss, the source prints the image coordinates as (s1f1,,snfn)(s_1^{f_1},\ldots,s_n^{f_n}). This edition displays powers of the defined scalar input, namely (sf1,,sfn)(s^{f_1},\ldots,s^{f_n}).

Remark: the underlying monoid map

The monomial map

t(te1,,ten) t\longmapsto(t^{e_1},\ldots,t^{e_n})

is precisely the map of KK-spectra associated with the monoid homomorphism

n \mathbb N^n\longrightarrow\mathbb N

that sends the iith basis vector to eie_i; compare Remark 17.9.

Edition note: the source prints the coordinates as (t1e1,,tnen)(t_1^{e_1},\ldots,t_n^{e_n}), although the input is a single scalar tt. This edition displays coordinates of the correct type.

This monoid homomorphism factors as

nM, \mathbb N^n\longrightarrow M\longrightarrow\mathbb N,

where MM is the submonoid of \mathbb N generated by e1,,ene_1,\ldots,e_n. Such a submonoid is called a numerical monoid. The first map is surjective. At the ring level we obtain

K[n]=K[X1,,Xn]K[M]K[]=K[T], K[\mathbb N^n]=K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] \longrightarrow K[M] \longrightarrow K[\mathbb N]=K[T],

while geometrically we obtain the spectrum maps

𝔸K1KSpek(K[M])𝔸Kn. \mathbb A_K^1 \longrightarrow K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(K[M]) \subseteq\mathbb A_K^n.

Thus the image of the affine line lies in the KK-spectrum of the monoid ring K[M]K[M]. Theorem 18.10 will show that

𝔸K1KSpek(K[M]) \mathbb A_K^1\longrightarrow K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(K[M])

is always surjective and, when the exponents are relatively prime, also injective.

Edition note: “always surjective” requires, for example, algebraic closure of KK. For a general field, Theorem 18.10 proves bijectivity under the relatively prime hypothesis. If M=2M=2\mathbb N and K=K=\mathbb R, this spectrum map is tt2t\mapsto t^2 and is not surjective.

Example: Neil’s parabola

A cuspidal curve with two smooth arcs meeting in a sharp point at the origin

Neil’s parabola with a cuspidal singularity at the origin. Georg-Johann, CC BY-SA 3.0. Source details and the discrepancy between rights labels are recorded in the Unit 18 media credits.

Neil’s parabola CC is the image of the monomial map

𝔸K1𝔸K2,t(t2,t3)=(x,y). \begin{aligned} \mathbb A_K^1&\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^2,\\ t&\longmapsto(t^2,t^3)=(x,y). \end{aligned}

The corresponding equation is

y2=x3, y^2=x^3,

so that

C=V(Y2X3). C=V(Y^2-X^3).

A monomial curve is determined solely by its tuple of exponents (e1,,en)(e_1,\ldots,e_n), or equivalently by the numerical monoid they generate. Thus very little combinatorial information is required. Nevertheless, these curves provide a rich collection of examples in the theory of algebraic curves. The same phenomenon holds more generally for monoid rings and the algebraic varieties they define.

Invariants of numerical monoids

Lemma: all sufficiently large numbers belong to the monoid

Let MM\subseteq\mathbb N be a numerical monoid generated by relatively prime natural numbers e1,,ene_1,\ldots,e_n. Every mm\in\mathbb N has a representation

m=a1e1++anen m=a_1e_1+\cdots+a_ne_n

with

0ai<ei+1,1in1. 0\leq a_i<e_{i+1}, \qquad 1\leq i\leq n-1.

If mm is sufficiently large, we can also arrange that an0a_n\geq0, so that all coefficients in the representation are nonnegative.

Proof

Since e1,,ene_1,\ldots,e_n are relatively prime, there is initially a representation

m=b1e1++bnen m=b_1e_1+\cdots+b_ne_n

with integer coefficients. We put it into the required form step by step. By division with remainder, write

b1=c1e2+a1,0a1<e2. b_1=c_1e_2+a_1, \qquad 0\leq a_1<e_2.

Substitute this into the representation of mm and combine the term c1e2e1c_1e_2e_1 with b2e2b_2e_2. Treat the new second coefficient in the same way, using the third generator. Continuing this process puts the first n1n-1 coefficients into the required form.

In this form, the sum of the first n1n-1 terms is bounded by a constant depending only on the generators. If mm exceeds this bound, the last term, and therefore its coefficient ana_n, must be nonnegative.

Thus, beyond some threshold, every natural number belongs to the monoid generated by the relatively prime exponents. The least such threshold has its own name.

Definition: conductor

Let MM\subseteq\mathbb N be a numerical monoid generated by relatively prime elements. The least number ff satisfying

fM \mathbb N_{\geq f}\subseteq M

is called the conductor of MM.

The following invariants can also be computed discretely at the level of the numerical monoid. Later we shall define them for arbitrary algebraic curves; in that generality, they are usually harder to compute.

Definition: embedding dimension

Let MM\subseteq\mathbb N be a numerical monoid with relatively prime generators. The smallest number of elements in a generating system for MM is called its embedding dimension.

Definition: multiplicity

Let MM\subseteq\mathbb N be a numerical monoid with relatively prime generators. The least positive element

eM,e1, e\in M, \qquad e\geq1,

is called the multiplicity of MM and is denoted by e(M)e(M).

Definition: degree of singularity

Let MM\subseteq\mathbb N be a numerical monoid with relatively prime generators. The number of gaps, that is, the number of elements of

\M, \mathbb N\setminus M,

is called the degree of singularity of MM and is denoted by δ(M)\delta(M).

Example: the monoid generated by 5, 8, and 11

Consider the numerical monoid MM generated by 5,8,115,8,11. Thus MM consists of all sums

5a1+8a2+11a3,a1,a2,a30. 5a_1+8a_2+11a_3, \qquad a_1,a_2,a_3\geq0.

Its elements include

0,5,8,10,11,13,15,16,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,. 0,5,8,10,11,13,15,16,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,\ldots.

Since 18,19,20,21,2218,19,20,21,22 are five consecutive numbers in MM and 5M5\in M, all subsequent numbers also belong to MM. Hence its conductor is 1818, its multiplicity is 55, its degree of singularity is 1010, and its embedding dimension is 33.

Parametrisation and canonical generators

Theorem: the monomial parametrisation is a bijection

Let MM\subseteq\mathbb N be a submonoid generated by relatively prime natural numbers e1,,ene_1,\ldots,e_n. The monomial map

𝔸K1KSpek(K[M]) \mathbb A_K^1\longrightarrow K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(K[M])

is a bijection.

Proof

By Remark 17.9, this can be viewed as the natural map

𝔸K1=Mormon(,K)Mormon(M,K) \mathbb A_K^1 =\operatorname{Mor}_{\mathrm{mon}}(\mathbb N,K) \longrightarrow \operatorname{Mor}_{\mathrm{mon}}(M,K)

induced by the inclusion MM\subseteq\mathbb N.

To prove injectivity, suppose that a,bKa,b\in K and

am=bm a^m=b^m

for every mMm\in M. If b=0b=0, then immediately a=0a=0. We may therefore assume b0b\ne0, and likewise a0a\ne0. By Lemma 18.4, all natural numbers from some ff onwards belong to MM. In particular,

af=bf,af+1=bf+1. a^f=b^f, \qquad a^{f+1}=b^{f+1}.

It follows that

a=af+1af=bf+1bf=b. a=\frac{a^{f+1}}{a^f} =\frac{b^{f+1}}{b^f} =b.

For surjectivity, take a monoid homomorphism

φ:MK. \varphi:M\longrightarrow K.

We must extend it to all of \mathbb N. Write

φ(ei)=aiK. \varphi(e_i)=a_i\in K.

These values satisfy

ajei=φ(ej)ei=φ(eiej)=φ(ei)ej=aiej. a_j^{e_i} =\varphi(e_j)^{e_i} =\varphi(e_ie_j) =\varphi(e_i)^{e_j} =a_i^{e_j}.

If one aia_i is 00, then all the aia_i are 00, and the map sending every positive number to 00 (and 00 to 11) gives an extension. Thus we may assume that all the aia_i are units.

Since the eie_i are relatively prime, there are integers m1,,mnm_1,\ldots,m_n\in\mathbb Z such that

m1e1++mnen=1. m_1e_1+\cdots+m_ne_n=1.

Set

a=a1m1anmn. a=a_1^{m_1}\cdots a_n^{m_n}.

We claim that the homomorphism K\mathbb N\to K determined by 1a1\mapsto a, namely kakk\mapsto a^k, extends φ\varphi. It suffices to check this on the eie_i. For e1e_1,

ae1=(a1m1anmn)e1=a1e1m1a2e1m2ane1mn=a11i=2nmiei(a2e1m2ane1mn)=a1(a1m2e2a2e1m2)(a1mnenane1mn)=a1(a1e2a2e1)m2(a1enane1)mn=a1, \begin{aligned} a^{e_1} &=(a_1^{m_1}\cdots a_n^{m_n})^{e_1}\\ &=a_1^{e_1m_1}a_2^{e_1m_2}\cdots a_n^{e_1m_n}\\ &=a_1^{1-\sum_{i=2}^nm_ie_i} (a_2^{e_1m_2}\cdots a_n^{e_1m_n})\\ &=a_1(a_1^{-m_2e_2}a_2^{e_1m_2}) \cdots(a_1^{-m_ne_n}a_n^{e_1m_n})\\ &=a_1(a_1^{-e_2}a_2^{e_1})^{m_2} \cdots(a_1^{-e_n}a_n^{e_1})^{m_n}\\ &=a_1, \end{aligned}

because each factor in the penultimate line equals 11 by the relations ajei=aieja_j^{e_i}=a_i^{e_j}. The same argument applies to every eie_i.

Remark: proof using the group of differences

The surjectivity in the preceding theorem can also be seen using the universal property of the group of differences. The group of differences of a numerical monoid with relatively prime generators is \mathbb Z. The case in which a generator maps to zero is handled as in the proof. If all images are nonzero, we obtain a monoid homomorphism

φ:MK×. \varphi:M\longrightarrow K^\times.

The universal property of the group of differences gives a unique extension

φ̃:K×, \widetilde\varphi:\mathbb Z\longrightarrow K^\times,

which supplies the required preimage.

Edition note: at this step the source refers to the universal property of monoid rings. The construction actually used extends from MM to its group of differences \mathbb Z, so this edition states the universal property of the group of differences.

The next two statements show that a numerical monoid has a canonical generating system. This gives the embedding dimension an interpretation that can later be transferred to arbitrary Noetherian local rings. The monoid ring itself is of course not local, but its localisation at the singularity of a numerical monoid is local.

Lemma: the canonical minimal generating system

Let MM\subseteq\mathbb N be a numerical monoid with relatively prime generators. Set

M+={mMm1} M_+=\{m\in M\mid m\geq1\}

and

M++M+={m+mm,mM+}. M_++M_+=\{m+m'\mid m,m'\in M_+\}.

Then

M+\(M++M+) M_+\setminus(M_++M_+)

is a generating system for MM, and every other generating system contains this set.

Proof

An element

mM+\(M++M+) m\in M_+\setminus(M_++M_+)

cannot be written as a sum of two other positive elements of MM. It therefore belongs to every generating system.

Conversely, this set already generates MM. Otherwise, choose the least element xMx\in M that it does not generate. Since xx does not belong to M+\(M++M+)M_+\setminus(M_++M_+), we have

x=x1+x2,x1,x2M+. x=x_1+x_2, \qquad x_1,x_2\in M_+.

Both summands are smaller than xx, so each can be written as a sum of elements of the canonical set. This immediately gives a contradiction.

Edition note: the source prints x1,x2M++M+x_1,x_2\in M_++M_+. From xM++M+x\in M_++M_+, the definition of the sumset gives only x1,x2M+x_1,x_2\in M_+; this is the membership needed for the minimal-descent argument.

Corollary: embedding dimension from the canonical generators

In the situation of the preceding lemma, the embedding dimension of MM equals the number of elements of

M+\(M++M+). M_+\setminus(M_++M_+).

Proof

This follows directly from Lemma 18.12.


Edition provenance. Translation and reader production: OpenAI Codex gpt-5.6-sol, Ultra. Sources, authors, and component licences are retained as stated in the metadata and the edition’s rights files.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0 for translated course text; the figure retains component rights in authority/RIGHTS-unit-18.csv · Rights record: RIGHTS-unit-18.csv

Worksheet 18

Practice exercises

Exercise 18.1

A counterfeiter produces 3-euro and 7-euro notes.

  1. Show that there are only finitely many amounts that he cannot pay exactly. What is the largest amount he cannot pay?
  2. What is the smallest amount he can pay in two different ways?
  3. Describe the set MM of whole-euro amounts he can pay with his notes.

Exercise 18.2

A counterfeiter produces 4-euro, 9-euro, and 11-euro notes.

  1. Show that there are only finitely many amounts that he cannot pay exactly. What is the largest amount he cannot pay?
  2. What is the smallest amount he can pay in two different ways?
  3. Describe explicitly the set MM of whole-euro amounts he can pay with his notes.

Exercise 18.3 ★

A counterfeiter produces 7-euro, 11-euro, 13-euro, and 37-euro notes. How many whole-euro amounts can he not pay with his notes, and what is the largest amount he cannot pay? Determine the multiplicity and embedding dimension of the associated numerical monoid.

Exercise 18.4 ★

For the numerical monoid

M M\subseteq\mathbb N

generated by 44, 77, and 1717, determine its embedding dimension, multiplicity, conductor, and degree of singularity.

Exercise 18.5

For the numerical monoid MM generated by 55, 77, and 99, determine its embedding dimension, multiplicity, conductor, and degree of singularity.

Exercise 18.6

Let MM\subseteq\mathbb N be a numerical monoid generated by relatively prime natural numbers. Show that its embedding dimension is at most its multiplicity.

Exercise 18.7

Let MM\subseteq\mathbb N be a numerical monoid generated by relatively prime numbers, whose embedding dimension equals its multiplicity. Show that the largest generator in a minimal generating system is greater than or equal to the conductor.

Exercise 18.8

Give an example of a numerical monoid MM with multiplicity 33 and embedding dimension 33 whose conductor is prime and does not belong to the minimal generating system.

Exercise 18.9

Let MM\subseteq\mathbb N be a numerical monoid generated by relatively prime elements. Suppose that its multiplicity equals its conductor. Determine a minimal generating system and the embedding dimension of MM.

Exercise 18.10 ★

Consider Neil’s parabola

C=V(Y2X3)𝔸2 C=V(Y^2-X^3)\subseteq\mathbb A_{\mathbb C}^2

and the point P=(1,1)CP=(1,1)\in C. Show that the maximal ideal associated with PP, namely the ideal (X1,Y1)(X-1,Y-1) in the coordinate ring

R=[X,Y]/(Y2X3), R=\mathbb C[X,Y]/(Y^2-X^3),

cannot be described as the radical of an ideal generated by a single element fRf\in R.

The preceding exercise shows that every curve DD meeting Neil’s parabola at (1,1)(1,1) also meets it at at least one other point. This also generalises Exercise 1.13.

Exercise 18.11 ★

Consider the submonoid of the natural numbers generated by 22 and 33, namely

M={0,2,3,4,5,}, M=\{0,2,3,4,5,\ldots\}\subset\mathbb N,

and the quotient ring

R=/(9). R=\mathbb Z/(9).

Also consider the sets of RR-valued points of MM and \mathbb N, namely the sets of monoid homomorphisms Mormon(M,R)\operatorname{Mor}_{\mathrm{mon}}(M,R) and Mormon(,R)\operatorname{Mor}_{\mathrm{mon}}(\mathbb N,R), and the restriction map

ψ:Mormon(,R)Mormon(M,R),ππ|M. \begin{aligned} \psi:\operatorname{Mor}_{\mathrm{mon}}(\mathbb N,R) &\longrightarrow\operatorname{Mor}_{\mathrm{mon}}(M,R),\\ \pi&\longmapsto\pi|_M. \end{aligned}

  1. Determine the units and nilpotent elements of RR.
  2. Determine the number of elements of Mormon(,R)\operatorname{Mor}_{\mathrm{mon}}(\mathbb N,R).
  3. Show that every ρMormon(M,R)\rho\in\operatorname{Mor}_{\mathrm{mon}}(M,R) for which ρ(2)\rho(2) is a unit in RR has an extension to \mathbb N.
  4. Determine all πMormon(,R)\pi\in\operatorname{Mor}_{\mathrm{mon}}(\mathbb N,R) whose restriction to M\{0}M\setminus\{0\} is the zero function.
  5. Determine all ρMormon(M,R)\rho\in\operatorname{Mor}_{\mathrm{mon}}(M,R) that have no extension to \mathbb N.
  6. Determine the number of elements of Mormon(M,R)\operatorname{Mor}_{\mathrm{mon}}(M,R).

Exercise 18.12

Let MM be a numerical monoid. Determine all filters in MM.

Exercise 18.13

Let MM be a numerical monoid and KK a field. Show that there is an fK[M]f\in K[M] such that

K[M]f=K[X]X. K[M]_f=K[X]_X.

Edition note: this equality inside K(X)K(X) requires that the generators of MM have greatest common divisor 11, a hypothesis omitted here in the source. For M=2M=2\mathbb N, every such localisation remains inside K(X2)K(X^2) and cannot contain XX.

Exercise 18.14

Let MM be a numerical monoid, KK a field, and K[M]K[M] the associated monoid ring. Show that

K[M]K[] K[M]\cong K[\mathbb N]

if and only if M=M=\mathbb N.

Edition note: assume here that the generators of MM have greatest common divisor 11. With the broader definition of numerical monoid used at the start of the lecture, the source’s assertion is false: K[2]=K[X2]K[X]K[2\mathbb N]=K[X^2]\cong K[X], although 22\mathbb N\ne\mathbb N.

Exercise 18.15 ★

Give an example of an injective monoid homomorphism

MN M\longrightarrow N

between commutative monoids for which the associated spectrum map is not surjective.

Exercise 18.16

Let MM be a commutative monoid and KK a field.

  1. Show that the diagonal map

    Δ:MM×M,m(m,m) \begin{aligned} \Delta:M&\longrightarrow M\times M,\\ m&\longmapsto(m,m) \end{aligned}

    is a monoid homomorphism.

  2. Describe the associated KK-algebra homomorphism

    K[M]K[M×M]K[M]K[M]. K[M]\longrightarrow K[M\times M] \cong K[M]\otimes K[M].

  3. Describe the associated spectrum map

    KSpek(K[M])×KSpek(K[M])KSpek(K[M]). K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(K[M])\times K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(K[M]) \longrightarrow K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(K[M]).

    In particular, show that this makes KSpek(K[M])K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(K[M]) itself a commutative monoid.

Exercise 18.17

Specialise Exercise 18.16 to the monoids

M=,,r,r. M=\mathbb N,\ \mathbb Z,\ \mathbb N^r,\ \mathbb Z^r.

Exercise 18.18

Let MM be a commutative monoid, KK a field, and

PKSpek(M) P\in K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(M)

a fixed point.

  1. Show that there is a continuous map

    ΨP:KSpek(M)KSpek(M),QQP. \begin{aligned} \Psi_P:K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(M) &\longrightarrow K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(M),\\ Q&\longmapsto Q\cdot P. \end{aligned}

  2. Describe the associated KK-algebra homomorphism K[M]K[M]K[M]\longrightarrow K[M].

  3. Characterise the points PP for which this map is bijective.

Exercise 18.19

Let M,NM,N be commutative monoids, φ:MN\varphi:M\longrightarrow N a monoid homomorphism, and KK a field. Show that the spectrum map

φ*:KSpek(N)KSpek(M) \varphi^*:K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(N) \longrightarrow K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(M)

is also a monoid homomorphism.

Exercise 18.20

Let a,b,c,d,r,s1a,b,c,d,r,s\geq1 be natural numbers. Consider the continuously differentiable curve

[0,1]2,t(tr,ts). \begin{aligned} [0,1]&\longrightarrow\mathbb R^2,\\ t&\longmapsto(t^r,t^s). \end{aligned}

Compute the line integral along this path for the vector field

F(x,y)=(xayb,xcyd). F(x,y)=(x^ay^b,x^cy^d).

Exercises to submit

Exercise 18.21 (6 points)

Let MM be a numerical monoid generated by two relatively prime elements d>ed>e. Determine its embedding dimension, multiplicity, conductor, and degree of singularity.

Exercise 18.22 (3 points)

For the numerical monoid MM generated by 33, 77, 99, and 1111, determine its embedding dimension, multiplicity, conductor, and degree of singularity.

Exercise 18.23 (4 points)

Classify all numerical monoids MM with relatively prime generators satisfying

f(M)6. f(M)\leq6.

For each monoid, give its embedding dimension, multiplicity, and degree of singularity.

Exercise 18.24 (8 points: 1+3+1+2+1)

Consider the submonoid of the natural numbers generated by 22 and 55, namely

M={0,2,4,5,6,}, M=\{0,2,4,5,6,\ldots\}\subset\mathbb N,

and the quotient ring R=/(4)R=\mathbb Z/(4). Also consider the sets of RR-valued points of MM and \mathbb N, namely Mormon(M,R)\operatorname{Mor}_{\mathrm{mon}}(M,R) and Mormon(,R)\operatorname{Mor}_{\mathrm{mon}}(\mathbb N,R), and the restriction map

ψ:Mormon(,R)Mormon(M,R),ππ|M. \begin{aligned} \psi:\operatorname{Mor}_{\mathrm{mon}}(\mathbb N,R) &\longrightarrow\operatorname{Mor}_{\mathrm{mon}}(M,R),\\ \pi&\longmapsto\pi|_M. \end{aligned}

  1. Determine the units and nilpotent elements of RR, and the number of elements of Mormon(,R)\operatorname{Mor}_{\mathrm{mon}}(\mathbb N,R).
  2. Show that every ρMormon(M,R)\rho\in\operatorname{Mor}_{\mathrm{mon}}(M,R) for which ρ(2)\rho(2) is a unit in RR has an extension to \mathbb N.
  3. Determine all πMormon(,R)\pi\in\operatorname{Mor}_{\mathrm{mon}}(\mathbb N,R) whose restriction to M\{0}M\setminus\{0\} is the zero function.
  4. Determine all ρMormon(M,R)\rho\in\operatorname{Mor}_{\mathrm{mon}}(M,R) that have no extension to \mathbb N.
  5. Determine the number of elements of Mormon(M,R)\operatorname{Mor}_{\mathrm{mon}}(M,R).

Exercise 18.25 (3 points)

Let MM\subseteq\mathbb N be a numerical monoid and KK a field. Define

M+=M+ M_+=M\cap\mathbb N_+

and

nM+={mM|there is a representation m=m1++mn with miM+}. nM_+=\left\{m\in M\mathrel{\Big|} \text{there is a representation }m=m_1+\cdots+m_n \text{ with }m_i\in M_+\right\}.

Show that the nM+nM_+ are “ideals” in MM, that M+M_+ determines a maximal ideal 𝔪\mathfrak m in K[M]K[M], and that the ideal associated with nM+nM_+ equals 𝔪n\mathfrak m^n.

Exercise 18.26 (4 points)

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and M,NM,N numerical monoids with MNM\subseteq N. Show that the associated spectrum map is surjective.

Source hint: Use Theorem 18.10.

Exercise 18.27 (3 points)

Let M,NM,N be numerical monoids. For which numerical invariants ν\nu among multiplicity, conductor, degree of singularity, and embedding dimension does the inclusion

MN M\subseteq N

imply the inequality

ν(M)ν(N)? \nu(M)\geq\nu(N)?

Give a proof or a counterexample.

Exercise 18.28 (3 points)

Let MM be a numerical monoid not isomorphic to \mathbb N, and let KK be a field. Show that the monoid ring K[M]K[M] has irreducible elements that are not prime. Give elements of K[M]K[M] with two essentially different factorisations into irreducible elements.


Edition provenance. Translation and reader production: OpenAI Codex gpt-5.6-sol, Ultra. Sources, authors, and component licences are retained as stated in the metadata and the edition’s rights files.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Public Solutions to Worksheet 18

At the frozen revision boundary, the source provides public solutions only for Exercises 18.3, 18.4, 18.10, 18.11, and 18.15. No additional solutions have been created for this edition.

Solution to Exercise 18.3

We compute the sums that can be formed from the four numbers. We do this by adding multiples of 77 to sums formed from the larger numbers. The multiples of 77 are

7,14,21,28,35,42,. 7,14,21,28,35,42,\ldots.

Starting from 1111 gives

11,18,25,32,39,46,. 11,18,25,32,39,46,\ldots.

Starting from 1313 gives

13,20,27,34,41,. 13,20,27,34,41,\ldots.

Starting from 22=11+1122=11+11 gives

22,29,36,43,, 22,29,36,43,\ldots,

and starting from 24=11+1324=11+13 gives

24,31,38,45,. 24,31,38,45,\ldots.

We also add

26=13+13,33=11+11+11,35=11+11+13,37=11+13+13. 26=13+13,\qquad 33=11+11+11,\qquad 35=11+11+13,\qquad 37=11+13+13.

The last equality also shows that the generator 3737 is redundant. We now have a gap-free sequence from 3131 to 3737, of length 77, so every larger number also belongs to the monoid. The number 3030 does not belong to it. Hence the conductor is 3131, and 3030 is the largest amount that cannot be paid.

The multiplicity is the least positive number, namely 77, and the embedding dimension is 33 because 3737 is redundant. The gaps are

1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10,12,15,16,17,19,23,30. 1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10,12,15,16,17,19,23,30.

Thus the degree of singularity is 1616; this is exactly the number of amounts that cannot be paid.

Back to Exercise 18.3.

Solution to Exercise 18.4

The monoid contains all multiples of 44, namely

4,8,12,16,20,24,. 4,8,12,16,20,24,\ldots.

It also contains all sums of 77 and a multiple of 44,

7,11,15,19,23,, 7,11,15,19,23,\ldots,

all sums of 27=142\cdot7=14 and a multiple of 44,

14,18,22,26,, 14,18,22,26,\ldots,

and all sums of 37=213\cdot7=21 and a multiple of 44,

21,25,. 21,25,\ldots.

Thus all numbers from 1818 onwards are covered, since every residue class modulo 44 has a representative in the monoid. Since the generator 1717 is also available, all numbers from 1414 onwards belong to the monoid. Hence the conductor is 1414.

The multiplicity is the least positive number in the monoid, namely 44. The embedding dimension is 33, since the generator 1717 cannot be omitted. The gaps are

1,2,3,5,6,9,10,13, 1,2,3,5,6,9,10,13,

so the degree of singularity is 88.

Back to Exercise 18.4.

Solution to Exercise 18.10

Consider the injective ring homomorphism

φ:R[T],XT2,YT3. \begin{aligned} \varphi:R&\longrightarrow\mathbb C[T],\\ X&\longmapsto T^2,\\ Y&\longmapsto T^3. \end{aligned}

The extension of the ideal (X1,Y1)(X-1,Y-1) is

(T21,T31)=((T1)(T+1),(T1)(T2+T+1)). (T^2-1,T^3-1) =((T-1)(T+1),(T-1)(T^2+T+1)).

The radical of this ideal is (T1)(T-1), since 11 is the only common root of the two polynomials. This also follows from the Nullstellensatz; in this case the corresponding ideals are in fact equal.

Suppose that (X1,Y1)=(f)(X-1,Y-1)=\sqrt{(f)} for some fRf\in R. After extending to [T]\mathbb C[T], we must have

φ(f)=c(T1)n \varphi(f)=c(T-1)^n

for some n+n\in\mathbb N_+ and c×c\in\mathbb C^\times. The coefficient of TT in this polynomial is cn(1)n10cn(-1)^{n-1}\ne0. However, every element in the image of RR has the form

φ(f)=a0+a2T2+a3T3++adTd, \varphi(f)=a_0+a_2T^2+a_3T^3+\cdots+a_dT^d,

and therefore has no linear term. This is a contradiction.

Edition note: the source writes φ(f)=(T1)n\varphi(f)=(T-1)^n directly. Equality of radicals gives only a nonzero scalar multiple c(T1)nc(T-1)^n. This edition retains the argument with the necessary factor cc; the linear coefficient remains nonzero.

Back to Exercise 18.10.

Solution to Exercise 18.11

  1. The elements

    1,2,4,5,7,8 1,2,4,5,7,8

    are units, since they are all relatively prime to 99. The elements 0,3,60,3,6 are nilpotent, since their squares are 00 in RR.

  2. For a monoid homomorphism

    π:R \pi:\mathbb N\longrightarrow R

    we must have π(0)=1\pi(0)=1. The homomorphism is uniquely determined by π(1)\pi(1), and any element of RR can be chosen as this value. Thus

    |Mormon(,R)|=9. \left|\operatorname{Mor}_{\mathrm{mon}}(\mathbb N,R)\right|=9.

  3. Suppose that ρ(2)\rho(2) is a unit. The only possible choice is

    π(1)=ρ(3)ρ(2)1, \pi(1)=\rho(3)\rho(2)^{-1},

    since we must have

    ρ(3)=π(3)=π(2)π(1)=ρ(2)π(1). \rho(3)=\pi(3)=\pi(2)\pi(1)=\rho(2)\pi(1).

    We check that this really defines a homomorphism from \mathbb N to RR. On all other numbers, π\pi is already fixed by ρ\rho. We must check π(i+j)=π(i)π(j)\pi(i+j)=\pi(i)\pi(j) for every i,ji,j\in\mathbb N. The cases in which one summand is 00, or both summands are at least 22, follow immediately because ρ\rho is a homomorphism. For i=j=1i=j=1,

    π(1)π(1)=ρ(3)ρ(2)1ρ(3)ρ(2)1=ρ(3+3)ρ(2+2)1ρ(2)1ρ(2)=ρ(6)ρ(6)1ρ(2)=ρ(2)=π(2). \begin{aligned} \pi(1)\pi(1) &=\rho(3)\rho(2)^{-1}\rho(3)\rho(2)^{-1}\\ &=\rho(3+3)\rho(2+2)^{-1}\rho(2)^{-1}\rho(2)\\ &=\rho(6)\rho(6)^{-1}\rho(2)\\ &=\rho(2)=\pi(2). \end{aligned}

    For j2j\geq2,

    π(1)π(j)=π(1)ρ(j)=ρ(3)ρ(2)1ρ(j)=ρ(3+j)ρ(2)1=ρ(1+j)ρ(2)ρ(2)1=ρ(1+j)=π(1+j). \begin{aligned} \pi(1)\pi(j) &=\pi(1)\rho(j)\\ &=\rho(3)\rho(2)^{-1}\rho(j)\\ &=\rho(3+j)\rho(2)^{-1}\\ &=\rho(1+j)\rho(2)\rho(2)^{-1}\\ &=\rho(1+j)=\pi(1+j). \end{aligned}

  4. If π(1)\pi(1) is a unit, its entire image consists of units, so the restriction to M\{0}M\setminus\{0\} is not the zero function. If

    π(1){0,3,6}, \pi(1)\in\{0,3,6\},

    then π(2)=0\pi(2)=0, and hence π(i)=0\pi(i)=0 for every i2i\geq2. Thus exactly these three choices give the required zero restriction.

  5. By part 3, only homomorphisms ρ\rho with ρ(2)\rho(2) nilpotent can fail to have an extension. In that case ρ(3)\rho(3) is also nilpotent. If ρ(3)\rho(3) were a unit, then

    ρ(3+3)=ρ(6)=ρ(2+2+2) \rho(3+3)=\rho(6)=\rho(2+2+2)

    would be a unit, and hence ρ(2)\rho(2) would also be a unit, a contradiction.

    Conversely, choose arbitrary nilpotent elements as ρ(2)\rho(2) and ρ(3)\rho(3). We must then have ρ(n)=0\rho(n)=0 for every n4n\geq4, since every such number can be written as n=2i+3jn=2i+3j with i+j2i+j\geq2. Every such choice does indeed give a monoid homomorphism MRM\to R. It has an extension to \mathbb N only when

    ρ(2)=ρ(3)=0. \rho(2)=\rho(3)=0.

    The other eight pairs of nilpotent values have no extension.

  6. The six homomorphisms with ρ(2)\rho(2) a unit, the eight nonextendible homomorphisms from part 5, and the one homomorphism that is zero on M\{0}M\setminus\{0\} give

    6+8+1=15 6+8+1=15

    elements of Mormon(M,R)\operatorname{Mor}_{\mathrm{mon}}(M,R).

Back to Exercise 18.11.

Solution to Exercise 18.15

Consider the inclusion

. \mathbb N\subset\mathbb Z.

For any field KK, the map

φ:(K,,1) \varphi:\mathbb N\longrightarrow(K,\cdot,1)

that sends 00 to 11 and every positive number to 00 is a monoid homomorphism, and hence a point of KSpek(K[])K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(K[\mathbb N]). This homomorphism cannot be extended to a monoid homomorphism on all of \mathbb Z, since 11 is invertible in \mathbb Z and must therefore map to a unit. Thus the spectrum map induced by the inclusion above is not surjective.

Back to Exercise 18.15.


Edition provenance. Translation and reader production: OpenAI Codex gpt-5.6-sol, Ultra. Sources, authors, and component licences are retained as stated in the metadata and the edition’s rights files.

English Markdown source · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Lecture 19: Quotient Ring Presentations and Integrality

Quotient ring presentations for monomial curves

Let

M M\subseteq\mathbb N

be a numerical monoid generated by natural numbers e1,,ene_1,\ldots,e_n with gcd(e1,,en)=1\gcd(e_1,\ldots,e_n)=1. The associated surjection

nM \mathbb N^n\longrightarrow M\subseteq\mathbb N

gives a surjection

K[X1,,Xn]K[M],XiTei, \begin{aligned} K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]&\longrightarrow K[M],\\ X_i&\longmapsto T^{e_i}, \end{aligned}

and a closed embedding

C=KSpek(K[M])𝔸Kn. C=K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(K[M])\hookrightarrow\mathbb A_K^n.

Which equations describe the curve CC?

Theorem: binomial equations defining the curve

Let MM\subseteq\mathbb N be a submonoid generated by e1,,ene_1,\ldots,e_n with gcd(e1,,en)=1\gcd(e_1,\ldots,e_n)=1, and let

nM \mathbb N^n\longrightarrow M

be the associated surjective map, with quotient homomorphism

φ:K[X1,,Xn]K[M]. \varphi:K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]\longrightarrow K[M].

Then the kernel ideal is described by

kerφ=(iI1XiriiI2Xisi|I1,I2{1,,n} disjoint,iI1riei=iI2siei,ri,si1). \ker\varphi= \left( \prod_{i\in I_1}X_i^{r_i}-\prod_{i\in I_2}X_i^{s_i} \mathrel{\Bigg|} \begin{array}{l} I_1,I_2\subseteq\{1,\ldots,n\}\text{ disjoint},\\ \displaystyle\sum_{i\in I_1}r_ie_i= \sum_{i\in I_2}s_ie_i,\\ r_i,s_i\geq1 \end{array} \right).

Proof

The displayed elements belong to the kernel ideal, as follows directly from

φ(iI1Xiri)=iI1(Tei)ri=TiI1riei. \begin{aligned} \varphi\left(\prod_{i\in I_1}X_i^{r_i}\right) &=\prod_{i\in I_1}\left(T^{e_i}\right)^{r_i}\\ &=T^{\sum_{i\in I_1}r_ie_i}. \end{aligned}

Edition note: in this line the source switches from the variable TT specified in the homomorphism to lowercase tt. This edition consistently uses the single variable TT; no mathematical content is changed.

Conversely, let

FK[X1,,Xn] F\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]

be a polynomial with φ(F)=0\varphi(F)=0. Write

F=νaνXν,ν=(ν1,,νn). F=\sum_\nu a_\nu X^\nu, \qquad \nu=(\nu_1,\ldots,\nu_n).

Then

φ(F)=νaνTi=1nνiei=k0(ν:i=1nνiei=kaν)Tk. \begin{aligned} \varphi(F) &=\sum_\nu a_\nu T^{\sum_{i=1}^n\nu_ie_i}\\ &=\sum_{k\geq0} \left( \sum_{\nu:\,\sum_{i=1}^n\nu_ie_i=k}a_\nu \right)T^k. \end{aligned}

Edition note: the source writes the summation bound \sum_{k=0} without an upper bound. Since FF is a polynomial and this line groups terms by nonnegative weight kk, this edition writes k0\sum_{k\geq0}; only the notation is completed.

Since this polynomial is zero, all its coefficients vanish. Hence, for every kk, the polynomial

Fk=ν:i=1nνiei=kaνXν F_k= \sum_{\nu:\,\sum_{i=1}^n\nu_ie_i=k}a_\nu X^\nu

also lies in the kernel. We may therefore assume that FF contains only monomials XνX^\nu with the same value

i=1nνiei=k. \sum_{i=1}^n\nu_ie_i=k.

Take a monomial XνX^\nu appearing in FF with aν0a_\nu\ne0. At least one other monomial, say XμX^\mu, must also appear, since a single monomial does not map to zero. Write

F=aν(XνXμ)+(FaνXν+aνXμ). F=a_\nu(X^\nu-X^\mu) +\left(F-a_\nu X^\nu+a_\nu X^\mu\right).

The monomial XνX^\nu no longer appears in the summand on the right, and no new monomial is introduced. In XνXμX^\nu-X^\mu, factor out the variables occurring on both sides as far as possible. This gives

XνXμ=X1b1Xnbn(iI1XiriiI2Xisi), X^\nu-X^\mu =X_1^{b_1}\cdots X_n^{b_n} \left( \prod_{i\in I_1}X_i^{r_i} -\prod_{i\in I_2}X_i^{s_i} \right),

with I1I_1 and I2I_2 disjoint and

iI1eiri=iI2eisi. \sum_{i\in I_1}e_ir_i=\sum_{i\in I_2}e_is_i.

Thus the first summand in the above expression for FF belongs to the ideal generated by the stated binomials. We can continue with the second summand, which contains one fewer monomial. This process terminates and proves the claim.

The equations in the preceding theorem are called binomial equations. The simplest binomial equations have the form

Xiej/gcd(ei,ej)=Xjei/gcd(ei,ej),ij. X_i^{e_j/\gcd(e_i,e_j)} =X_j^{e_i/\gcd(e_i,e_j)}, \qquad i\ne j.

For a plane monomial curve, this is also the only equation.

Corollary: the equation of a plane monomial curve

Let CC be the plane monomial curve given by

t(te1,te2)=(x,y), t\longmapsto(t^{e_1},t^{e_2})=(x,y),

with e1e_1 and e2e_2 relatively prime. Then

C=V(Xe2Ye1). C=V(X^{e_2}-Y^{e_1}).

Proof

This follows immediately from Theorem 19.1.

For monomial space curves, the defining equations can still be determined relatively easily, since one can always isolate a single variable.

Example: the twisted cubic

A green space curve twisting along two translucent surfaces inside a three-dimensional box

The twisted cubic. Claudio Rocchini, CC BY 3.0. The lecture source has an inline CC BY-SA 3.0 label, whereas the frozen Commons metadata offers the CC BY 3.0 option used for this component.

Let

C𝔸K3 C\subset\mathbb A_K^3

be the twisted cubic, that is, the image of the monomial map

t(t,t2,t3). t\longmapsto(t,t^2,t^3).

This curve is isomorphic to the affine line and is therefore smooth. By Theorem 19.1, its defining ideal is

𝔞=(YX2,ZX3,Y3Z2,ZXY)=(YX2,ZX3). \begin{aligned} \mathfrak a &=(Y-X^2,Z-X^3,Y^3-Z^2,Z-XY)\\ &=(Y-X^2,Z-X^3). \end{aligned}

The last two ideal generators are redundant, since they can be expressed in terms of the first two. Thus

C=V(YX2,ZX3). C=V(Y-X^2,Z-X^3).

The images of CC under the three different projections are

C1=V(Z2Y3),C2=V(ZX3),C3=V(YX2). C_1=V(Z^2-Y^3),\qquad C_2=V(Z-X^3),\qquad C_3=V(Y-X^2).

The curves C2C_2 and C3C_3 are isomorphic to the affine line, being graphs of maps, whereas C1C_1 is the singular Neil’s parabola.

Example: the monomial curve with exponents 3, 4, and 5

Let CC be the monomial curve given by

t(t3,t4,t5)=(x,y,z). t\longmapsto(t^3,t^4,t^5)=(x,y,z).

For each of the three variables, Theorem 19.1 requires us to determine which powers, after substituting the powers of tt, can also be expressed as monomials in the other two variables.

First, the equations involving only two variables are

Y3=X4,Z3=X5,Z4=Y5. Y^3=X^4,\qquad Z^3=X^5,\qquad Z^4=Y^5.

As in the plane case, there can be only one basic relation for each pair of variables.

In a relation involving all three variables, one variable occurs alone on one side. Start with XX. Neither XX nor X2X^2 can be expressed using the other variables, but

X3=T9=YZ. X^3=T^9=YZ.

No other combination independent of this relation is possible. In general, a double representation

Xk=YiZj=YaZb X^k=Y^iZ^j=Y^aZ^b

gives a relation between powers of YY and powers of ZZ, after cancelling the smaller powers. Since all relations involving only two variables have already been listed, each power of XX gives at most one new relation.

We have already finished with relations in which XX stands alone. Indeed, if

Xk=YiZj, X^k=Y^iZ^j,

then k3k\geq3. If i=0i=0 or j=0j=0, the relation is already listed. Thus assume i,j1i,j\geq1. Using X3=YZX^3=YZ, we can reduce the exponents in the equation: subtract 33 from the exponent of XX and 11 from each exponent of YY and ZZ.

For YY we immediately obtain

Y2=ZX, Y^2=ZX,

which again reduces all other equations. For ZZ we obtain

Z2=X2Y Z^2=X^2Y

and

Z3=XY3. Z^3=XY^3.

There are no smaller monomials in XX and YY that can be expressed as a power of ZZ. Hence every other relation can be reduced to an earlier one using one of these relations.

Altogether, the curve CC has the presentation

C=V(Y3X4,Z3X5,Z4Y5,X3YZ,Y2XZ,Z2X2Y,Z3XY3). C=V(Y^3-X^4,\ Z^3-X^5,\ Z^4-Y^5,\ X^3-YZ,\ Y^2-XZ,\ Z^2-X^2Y,\ Z^3-XY^3).

Edition note: in this final list the source invokes the unbraced fraction macro \mathdisplaybruch immediately before the relation X3YZX^3-YZ. This edition displays the relation stated and proved immediately beforehand, X3YZX^3-YZ.

Integrality

Definition: equation of integral dependence

Let RR and SS be commutative rings and

RS R\subseteq S

a ring extension. For xSx\in S, an equation of the form

xn+rn1xn1+rn2xn2++r1x+r0=0, x^n+r_{n-1}x^{n-1}+r_{n-2}x^{n-2}+\cdots+r_1x+r_0=0,

with riRr_i\in R for i=0,,n1i=0,\ldots,n-1 is called an equation of integral dependence for xx.

Definition: integral element

Let RSR\subseteq S be an extension of commutative rings. An element xSx\in S is called integral over RR if it satisfies an equation of integral dependence with coefficients in RR.

Definition: integral closure

Let RSR\subseteq S be an extension of commutative rings. The set of all elements xSx\in S integral over RR is called the integral closure of RR in SS.

Definition: integral extension

Let RSR\subseteq S be an extension of commutative rings. The ring SS is called integral over RR, and RSR\subseteq S an integral ring extension, if every xSx\in S is integral over RR.

The ring SS is integral over RR if and only if the integral closure of RR in SS equals SS.

Lemma: characterisation of integral elements

Let RSR\subseteq S be an extension of commutative rings. For an element xSx\in S, the following statements are equivalent.

  1. The element xx is integral over RR.
  2. There is an RR-subalgebra TT of SS containing xx that is finitely generated as an RR-module.
  3. There is a finitely generated RR-submodule MM of SS containing a non-zero-divisor of SS and satisfying xMMxM\subseteq M.

Proof

(1) \Rightarrow (2). Consider the RR-subalgebra of SS generated by the powers of xx,

R[x]. R[x].

This subalgebra consists of all polynomial expressions in xx with coefficients in RR. An equation of integral dependence

xn+rn1xn1+rn2xn2++r1x+r0=0 x^n+r_{n-1}x^{n-1}+r_{n-2}x^{n-2}+\cdots+r_1x+r_0=0

gives

xn=rn1xn1rn2xn2r1xr0. x^n=-r_{n-1}x^{n-1}-r_{n-2}x^{n-2}-\cdots-r_1x-r_0.

Thus xnx^n can be expressed as a polynomial expression of smaller degree. Multiplying this last equation by xix^i allows every power of xx with exponent at least nn to be replaced by a polynomial expression of smaller degree. Eventually all such powers can be expressed with degree at most n1n-1. Hence

R[x]=R+Rx+Rx2++Rxn2+Rxn1, R[x]=R+Rx+Rx^2+\cdots+Rx^{n-2}+Rx^{n-1},

and x0=1,x,x2,,xn1x^0=1,x,x^2,\ldots,x^{n-1} form a finite generating system for the RR-module T=R[x]T=R[x].

(2) \Rightarrow (3). Suppose

xTS, x\in T\subseteq S,

where TT is an RR-subalgebra finitely generated as an RR-module. Then xTTxT\subseteq T, and TT contains the non-zero-divisor 11.

(3) \Rightarrow (1). Let MSM\subseteq S be a finitely generated RR-submodule satisfying xMMxM\subseteq M, and choose generators y1,,yny_1,\ldots,y_n for MM. For every ii, the element xyixy_i is an RR-linear combination of the yjy_j, so

xyi=j=1nrijyj,rijR. xy_i=\sum_{j=1}^n r_{ij}y_j, \qquad r_{ij}\in R.

In matrix form,

x(y1y2yn)=(r1,1r1,2r1,nr2,1r2,2r2,nrn,1rn,2rn,n)(y1y2yn). x \begin{pmatrix} y_1\\y_2\\\vdots\\y_n \end{pmatrix} = \begin{pmatrix} r_{1,1}&r_{1,2}&\cdots&r_{1,n}\\ r_{2,1}&r_{2,2}&\cdots&r_{2,n}\\ \vdots&\vdots&\ddots&\vdots\\ r_{n,1}&r_{n,2}&\cdots&r_{n,n} \end{pmatrix} \begin{pmatrix} y_1\\y_2\\\vdots\\y_n \end{pmatrix}.

Thus

0=(xr1,1r1,2r1,nr2,1xr2,2r2,nrn,1rn,2xrn,n)A(y1y2yn). 0= \underbrace{ \begin{pmatrix} x-r_{1,1}&-r_{1,2}&\cdots&-r_{1,n}\\ -r_{2,1}&x-r_{2,2}&\cdots&-r_{2,n}\\ \vdots&\vdots&\ddots&\vdots\\ -r_{n,1}&-r_{n,2}&\cdots&x-r_{n,n} \end{pmatrix}}_{A} \begin{pmatrix} y_1\\y_2\\\vdots\\y_n \end{pmatrix}.

The entries of the matrix AA lie in SS. If AadjA^{\operatorname{adj}} is the adjugate (classical adjoint) matrix of AA, then

AadjAy=0, A^{\operatorname{adj}}Ay=0,

where y=(y1,,yn)𝖳y=(y_1,\ldots,y_n)^{\mathsf T}. By the adjugate identity,

AadjA=(detA)In, A^{\operatorname{adj}}A=(\det A)I_n,

so

((detA)In)y=0. ((\det A)I_n)y=0.

Thus (detA)yj=0(\det A)y_j=0 for every jj, and hence

(detA)z=0 (\det A)z=0

for every zMz\in M. By hypothesis, MM contains a non-zero-divisor of SS, so detA=0\det A=0. But this determinant is a monic polynomial expression in xx of degree nn. Thus xx satisfies an equation of integral dependence.

Corollary: integral closure is a subalgebra

Let RSR\subseteq S be an extension of commutative rings. The integral closure of RR in SS is an RR-subalgebra of SS.

Proof

The equations of integral dependence Xr=0X-r=0, for rRr\in R, show that every element of RR is integral over RR. Let x1,x2Sx_1,x_2\in S be integral over RR. By the characterisation of integrality, there are RR-subalgebras

T1,T2S T_1,T_2\subseteq S

with x1T1x_1\in T_1 and x2T2x_2\in T_2, each finitely generated as an RR-module. Let y1,,yny_1,\ldots,y_n be an RR-generating system for T1T_1 and z1,,zmz_1,\ldots,z_m an RR-generating system for T2T_2. We may assume y1=z1=1y_1=z_1=1.

Consider the finitely generated RR-module

T=T1T2=yizj|i=1,,n,j=1,,m. T=T_1T_2 =\left\langle y_iz_j\mathrel{\Big|} i=1,\ldots,n,\ j=1,\ldots,m\right\rangle.

This module plainly contains x1+x2x_1+x_2, x1x2x_1x_2, and 11. The RR-module TT is also an RR-algebra. Indeed, for two arbitrary elements,

(rijyizj)(skykz)=rijskyiykzjz, \left(\sum r_{ij}y_iz_j\right) \left(\sum s_{k\ell}y_kz_\ell\right) =\sum r_{ij}s_{k\ell}y_iy_kz_jz_\ell,

and yiykT1y_iy_k\in T_1 and zjzT2z_jz_\ell\in T_2, so this linear combination belongs to TT.

Hence the sum and product of two integral elements are again integral. Thus the integral closure is a subring of SS containing RR, that is, an RR-subalgebra.

Definition: integrally closed

Let RSR\subseteq S be an extension of commutative rings. The ring RR is called integrally closed in SS if the integral closure of RR in SS equals RR.


Edition provenance. Translation and reader production: OpenAI Codex gpt-5.6-sol, Ultra. Sources, authors, and component licences are retained as stated in the metadata and the edition’s rights files.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0 for translated course text; the figure retains CC BY 3.0 component rights in authority/RIGHTS-unit-19.csv · Rights record: RIGHTS-unit-19.csv

Worksheet 19

Practice exercises

Exercise 19.1

Determine ideal generators for the monomial curve given by

𝔸K1𝔸K3,t(t2,t3,t4). \begin{aligned} \mathbb A_K^1&\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^3,\\ t&\longmapsto(t^2,t^3,t^4). \end{aligned}

Exercise 19.2

Determine ideal generators for the monomial curve given by

𝔸K1𝔸K3,t(t4,t5,t6). \begin{aligned} \mathbb A_K^1&\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^3,\\ t&\longmapsto(t^4,t^5,t^6). \end{aligned}

Exercise 19.3

Let

RS R\subseteq S

be an integral ring extension of integral domains, and let FRF\subseteq R be a multiplicative system. Show that the localised extension

RFSF R_F\subseteq S_F

is also integral.

Exercise 19.4 ★

Let RR and SS be integral domains and

RS R\subseteq S

an integral ring extension. Let fRf\in R be an element that is a unit in SS. Show that ff is already a unit in RR.

Exercise 19.5

Let RSR\subseteq S be an integral ring extension and fRf\in R. Show that if ff, regarded as an element of SS, is a unit, then ff is a unit in RR.

Exercise 19.6

Give an example of an integral ring extension

RS R\subseteq S

having a non-zero-divisor fRf\in R that becomes a zero divisor in SS.

Exercise 19.7

Let

P=X23X+7 P=X^2-3X+7

and

Q=Y3Y2+4Y5. Q=Y^3-Y^2+4Y-5.

Explain why the ring extension

[X,Y]/(P,Q) \mathbb Z\subseteq\mathbb Z[X,Y]/(P,Q)

is integral, and find equations of integral dependence for x+yx+y and xyxy. Lowercase letters denote the residue classes of the variables.

Exercise 19.8

Let RSR\subseteq S be a ring extension between finite commutative rings RR and SS. Show that this ring extension is integral.

Exercise 19.9

Let RR be a commutative ring and

S=R[X1,,Xn]/𝔞 S=R[X_1,\ldots,X_n]/\mathfrak a

a finitely generated RR-algebra that is integral over RR. Show that SS is a finitely generated RR-module.

Exercise 19.10

Let

φ:RS \varphi:R\longrightarrow S

be an integral homomorphism of commutative rings, and let RRR\longrightarrow R' be another ring homomorphism. Show that the base-changed homomorphism

φ:RRRS,ff1 \begin{aligned} \varphi':R'&\longrightarrow R'\otimes_R S,\\ f&\longmapsto f\otimes1 \end{aligned}

is also integral.

Exercise 19.11

For every field KK of characteristic 2\ne2, show that the ring homomorphism

K[X,Y]/(X2+Y21)K[U,V]/(U2+V21),(X,Y)(U2V2,2UV) \begin{aligned} K[X,Y]/(X^2+Y^2-1)&\longrightarrow K[U,V]/(U^2+V^2-1),\\ (X,Y)&\longmapsto(U^2-V^2,2UV) \end{aligned}

is integral.

Exercise 19.12 ★

Let KK be a field and suppose a ring extension finite as a K[X]K[X]-module is given in the form

K[X]K[X][Y]/(Yn+Pn1(X)Yn1++P2(X)Y2+P1(X)Y+P0(X))=R, K[X]\subseteq K[X][Y]/\left(Y^n+P_{n-1}(X)Y^{n-1}+\cdots+P_2(X)Y^2+P_1(X)Y+P_0(X)\right) =R,

with Pi(X)K[X]P_i(X)\in K[X], where the extension ring RR is an integral domain. Choose kk such that the degree of PiP_i is at most k(ni)k(n-i) for all

i=0,1,,n1. i=0,1,\ldots,n-1.

Show that YXkYX^{-k} satisfies an equation of integral dependence of degree nn over K[X1]K[X^{-1}], and that the extension algebra

K[X1,YXk] K[X^{-1},YX^{-k}]

has the same field of fractions as RR.

Exercise 19.13

  1. Let RR be an integral domain. Show that RR is integrally closed in the polynomial ring R[X]R[X].
  2. Give an example of a commutative ring RR that is not integrally closed in its polynomial ring.

Exercises to submit

Exercise 19.14 (4 points)

Let MM\subseteq\mathbb N be the numerical submonoid generated by 3,5,73,5,7. Determine a quotient ring presentation of the associated monoid ring.

Exercise 19.15 (3 points)

Let R,S,TR,S,T be commutative rings and

φ:RS,ψ:ST \varphi:R\longrightarrow S, \qquad \psi:S\longrightarrow T

ring homomorphisms such that SS is integral over RR and TT is integral over SS. Show that TT is also integral over RR.

Source hint: Compare Exercise 10.26.


Edition provenance. Translation and reader production: OpenAI Codex gpt-5.6-sol, Ultra. Sources, authors, and component licences are retained as stated in the metadata and the edition’s rights files.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Public Solutions to Worksheet 19

At the frozen revision boundary, the source provides public solutions only for Exercises 19.4 and 19.12. No additional solutions have been created for this edition.

Solution to Exercise 19.4

Let sSs\in S be the inverse of ff, so that fs=1fs=1. Since SS is integral over RR, there is an equation of integral dependence for ss, say

sn+an1sn1++a1s+a0=0,aiR. s^n+a_{n-1}s^{n-1}+\cdots+a_1s+a_0=0, \qquad a_i\in R.

Multiplying this equation by fnf^n gives

(fs)n+an1f(fs)n1++a1fn1(fs)+a0fn=0, (fs)^n+a_{n-1}f(fs)^{n-1}+\cdots+a_1f^{n-1}(fs)+a_0f^n=0,

or, since fs=1fs=1,

1+an1f++a1fn1+a0fn=0. 1+a_{n-1}f+\cdots+a_1f^{n-1}+a_0f^n=0.

Factoring out ff gives

1+f(an1++a1fn2+a0fn1)=0, 1+f\left(a_{n-1}+\cdots+a_1f^{n-2}+a_0f^{n-1}\right)=0,

and hence

f(an1a1fn2a0fn1)=1. f\left(-a_{n-1}-\cdots-a_1f^{n-2}-a_0f^{n-1}\right)=1.

The expression in parentheses belongs to RR. Thus ff also has an inverse in RR.

Back to Exercise 19.4.

Solution to Exercise 19.12

Multiply the given equation of integral dependence by XknX^{-kn}. In the field of fractions QQ of the quotient ring defining RR, we obtain

YnXkn+i=0n1PiYiXkn=0. Y^nX^{-kn}+\sum_{i=0}^{n-1}P_iY^iX^{-kn}=0.

Here

YnXkn=(YXk)n Y^nX^{-kn}=(YX^{-k})^n

and

PiYiXkn=PiYiXkiXk(ni)=(YXk)iPiXk(ni). \begin{aligned} P_iY^iX^{-kn} &=P_iY^iX^{-ki}X^{-k(n-i)}\\ &=(YX^{-k})^iP_iX^{-k(n-i)}. \end{aligned}

The condition on kk ensures that

PiXk(ni) P_iX^{-k(n-i)}

is a polynomial in X1X^{-1}. Thus the resulting equation is a monic equation of integral dependence of degree nn for YXkYX^{-k} over K[X1]K[X^{-1}].

Since RR is an integral domain, the original defining polynomial is irreducible. After the invertible change of variable over K(X)K(X), the resulting monic polynomial is irreducible in K[X1][Z]K[X^{-1}][Z], where ZZ is a formal variable subsequently mapped to YXkYX^{-k}.

Edition note: the source calls this equation irreducible “in K[X1,YXk]K[X^{-1},YX^{-k}]”. In that quotient algebra the relation is zero; the appropriate polynomial ring in which to state irreducibility is K[X1][Z]K[X^{-1}][Z]. This edition clarifies the ambient polynomial ring and formal variable; the claim is not needed for either of the two requested conclusions.

We have

K[X1][YXk]Q. K[X^{-1}][YX^{-k}]\subseteq Q.

The field of fractions of the left-hand side contains XX as the inverse of X1X^{-1}, and then contains

Y=(YXk)Xk. Y=(YX^{-k})X^k.

Its field of fractions therefore contains K(X,Y)=QK(X,Y)=Q. The reverse inclusion is clear from the inclusion above, so the two fields of fractions are equal.

Back to Exercise 19.12.


Edition provenance. Translation and reader production: OpenAI Codex gpt-5.6-sol, Ultra. Sources, authors, and component licences are retained as stated in the metadata and the edition’s rights files.

English Markdown source · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Lecture 20: Normal Rings and Normalisation

Normal rings and normalisation

Definition: normal integral domain

An integral domain is called normal if it is integrally closed in its field of fractions.

Unique factorisation domains provide important examples of normal rings.

Theorem: unique factorisation domains are normal

Let RR be a unique factorisation domain. Then RR is normal.

Proof

Let

K=Q(R) K=Q(R)

be the field of fractions of RR, and let qKq\in K satisfy an equation of integral dependence

qn+rn1qn1+rn2qn2++r1q+r0=0,riR. q^n+r_{n-1}q^{n-1}+r_{n-2}q^{n-2}+\cdots+r_1q+r_0=0, \qquad r_i\in R.

Write

q=ab,a,bR,b0, q=\frac ab, \qquad a,b\in R, \qquad b\ne0,

in lowest terms, so that aa and bb have no common prime divisor. We must show that bb is a unit in RR, since then

q=ab1R. q=ab^{-1}\in R.

Multiplying the equation of integral dependence above by bnb^n gives, in RR,

an+(rn1b)an1+(rn2b2)an2++(r1bn1)a+r0bn=0. a^n+(r_{n-1}b)a^{n-1}+(r_{n-2}b^2)a^{n-2} +\cdots+(r_1b^{n-1})a+r_0b^n=0.

If bb is not a unit, it has a prime divisor pp. This element pp divides all the terms

(rnibi)ani,i1, (r_{n-i}b^i)a^{n-i}, \qquad i\geq1,

and hence also divides the first term ana^n. Thus pp divides aa, contradicting the assumption that aa and bb have no common prime divisor.

Lemma: localisations of normal integral domains are normal

Let RR be a normal integral domain and SRS\subseteq R a multiplicative system. Then the localisation RSR_S is also normal.

Proof

See Exercise 20.6.

Definition: normalisation of an integral domain

Let RR be an integral domain with field of fractions Q(R)Q(R). The integral closure of RR in Q(R)Q(R) is called the normalisation of RR.

By Corollary 19.10, the normalisation is a subring of the field of fractions. It is a nontrivial fact that if RR is of finite type over a field, then its normalisation is also of finite type.

Normalisation of monoid rings

We shall discuss when monoid rings are normal and how their normalisations can be described. First we need conditions ensuring that a monoid ring over an integral domain is again an integral domain.

Definition: torsion-free monoid

A commutative monoid MM is called torsion-free if, for m,nMm,n\in M and a positive integer r+r\in\mathbb N_+, the equality

rm=rn rm=rn

always implies

m=n. m=n.

Theorem: torsion-free monoid rings are integral domains

Let RR be an integral domain and MM a torsion-free commutative monoid satisfying the cancellation law. Then the monoid ring R[M]R[M] is an integral domain.

Proof

First,

MΓ(M), M\subseteq\Gamma(M),

where Γ(M)\Gamma(M) is the group of differences of MM. Hence

R[M]R[Γ(M)] R[M]\subseteq R[\Gamma(M)]

is a subring, so it suffices to prove the statement for R[Γ(M)]R[\Gamma(M)]. Since MM is torsion-free, Exercise 20.10 shows that Γ(M)\Gamma(M) is also torsion-free. Thus we may assume that MM itself is a torsion-free commutative group.

Suppose

(mMamXm)(mMbmXm)=0. \left(\sum_{m\in M}a_mX^m\right) \left(\sum_{m\in M}b_mX^m\right)=0.

All but finitely many coefficients in these two sums are zero. Hence the entire calculation takes place in a finitely generated subgroup UU of the torsion-free group MM. By the structure theorem for finitely generated torsion-free commutative groups,

Un. U\cong\mathbb Z^n.

Thus we may even assume that M=nM=\mathbb Z^n. In this case R[M]R[M] is a localisation of a polynomial ring over an integral domain, and is therefore an integral domain.

Without the cancellation law, a monoid ring over an integral domain can have zero divisors.

Example: zero divisors without cancellation

Let MM be a monoid containing two distinct elements mm and nn with

m+n=n+n. m+n=n+n.

Without cancellation, this equation does not imply m=nm=n. In the monoid ring over any integral domain RR we have

XmXn0andXn0, X^m-X^n\ne0 \qquad\text{and}\qquad X^n\ne0,

but

(XmXn)Xn=Xm+nXn+n=X2nX2n=0. (X^m-X^n)X^n =X^{m+n}-X^{n+n} =X^{2n}-X^{2n} =0.

Definition: normalisation of a monoid

Let MM be a torsion-free commutative monoid satisfying the cancellation law, with group of differences Γ(M)\Gamma(M). The submonoid

M̃={mΓ(M)there is r+ with rmM} \widetilde M =\{m\in\Gamma(M)\mid \text{there is }r\in\mathbb N_+\text{ with }rm\in M\}

is called the normalisation of MM.

Theorem: normalisation of a monoid ring

Let MM be a torsion-free commutative monoid satisfying the cancellation law, with group of differences Γ(M)\Gamma(M) and normalisation

MM̃Γ(M). M\subseteq\widetilde M\subseteq\Gamma(M).

Let RR be a normal integral domain. Then the normalisation of the monoid ring R[M]R[M] is the monoid ring

R[M̃]. R[\widetilde M].

In particular, the monoid ring of a normal monoid over a normal ring is itself normal.

Proof

First,

R[M]R[M̃]R[Γ(M)]Q(R)[Γ(M)]Q(R[M]). R[M]\subseteq R[\widetilde M] \subseteq R[\Gamma(M)] \subseteq Q(R)[\Gamma(M)] \subseteq Q(R[M]).

Take mM̃m\in\widetilde M with

m=nk,n,kM, m=n-k, \qquad n,k\in M,

and with

rm=m++mr timesM. rm=\underbrace{m+\cdots+m}_{r\text{ times}}\in M.

Then

Tm=TnTk T^m=\frac{T^n}{T^k}

is an element of the field of fractions, while

(Tm)rR[M]. (T^m)^r\in R[M].

Thus TmT^m satisfies a pure equation of integral dependence over R[M]R[M] and belongs to the normalisation of R[M]R[M]. Hence

R[M̃]R[M]norm. R[\widetilde M]\subseteq R[M]^{\operatorname{norm}}.

Edition note: in the last two formulas the source changes the base ring from RR to KK, although the theorem and the entire argument specify RR. This edition consistently retains RR. The source also prints rm=Mrm=M in the defining condition; by the definition of M̃\widetilde M, the required relation, displayed here, is rmMrm\in M.

For the reverse inclusion, we can replace MM by M̃\widetilde M and thus restrict attention to the case in which MM is normal. First one proves that, for a torsion-free commutative group GG, the group ring R[G]R[G] is normal. This follows from the fact that a polynomial ring over a normal domain is again normal. It remains to show that R[M]R[M] is integrally closed in R[Γ(M)]R[\Gamma(M)].

An element

qR[Γ(M)] q\in R[\Gamma(M)]

Edition note — brackets in the group ring. The frozen source writes R(Γ(M))R(\Gamma(M)) in this line. In keeping with the specified ambient ring, this edition uses R[Γ(M)]R[\Gamma(M)]; the argument is unchanged.

and its equation of integral dependence lie in the monoid ring of a finitely generated subgroup

UΓ(M). U\subseteq\Gamma(M).

We may therefore assume

Γ(M)=n. \Gamma(M)=\mathbb Z^n.

At this point some convex geometry enters, which we shall not develop. In any case, a normal submonoid

Mn M\subseteq\mathbb Z^n

can be expressed as the intersection of n\mathbb Z^n with a polyhedral cone in n\mathbb Q^n or n\mathbb R^n. By Gordan’s lemma, this cone is in turn a finite intersection of half-spaces HiH_i.

Edition note: the finite polyhedral-cone argument in this paragraph requires MM to be finitely generated, a hypothesis not stated in the source theorem. For the stated generality, take an integral element q=a/bq=a/b and let NMN\subseteq M be the finitely generated submonoid containing the supports of aa, bb, and of the coefficients of an integral equation for qq. The affine case gives qR[Ñ]q\in R[\widetilde N], while normality of MM gives ÑM\widetilde N\subseteq M. Thus the theorem’s conclusion is unchanged, but the displayed finite intersection is justified only after this finite reduction.

A half-space HH is specified by a linear map

p:V=n p:V=\mathbb R^n\longrightarrow\mathbb R

through

H=p1(+). H=p^{-1}(\mathbb R_+).

Thus MM is a finite intersection

M=iIMi,Mi=pi1(), M=\bigcap_{i\in I}M_i, \qquad M_i=p_i^{-1}(\mathbb N),

with

Mi×n1. M_i\cong\mathbb N\times\mathbb Z^{n-1}.

Consequently,

R[M]=iIR[Mi] R[M]=\bigcap_{i\in I}R[M_i]

is normal by Exercise 20.7, since each

R[Mi]R[×n1] R[M_i]\cong R[\mathbb N\times\mathbb Z^{n-1}]

is normal.

Example: the Whitney umbrella

A bluish-grey Whitney umbrella surface intersecting itself in three-dimensional space

The Whitney umbrella. Claudio Rocchini, CC BY 2.5. The source’s inline licence label differs from the options available in the Commons metadata; the frozen rights details are recorded in the Unit 20 media credits.

Consider the algebraic surface given by the equation

X2Z=Y2. X^2Z=Y^2.

We shall view it as the surface associated with a monoid ring. Set

M=(1,0),(1,1),(0,2)2. M=\langle(1,0),(1,1),(0,2)\rangle\subseteq\mathbb N^2.

Since

(1,1)(1,0)=(0,1), (1,1)-(1,0)=(0,1),

its group of differences is 2\mathbb Z^2. Moreover,

2(0,1)=(0,2)M, 2(0,1)=(0,2)\in M,

so 2\mathbb N^2 is the normalisation of MM. The three generators give a surjective monoid homomorphism

3M,eimi. \begin{aligned} \mathbb N^3&\longrightarrow M,\\ e_i&\longmapsto m_i. \end{aligned}

Geometrically, the monomial map

3M2 \mathbb N^3\longrightarrow M\subseteq\mathbb N^2

corresponds to the map

𝔸K2KSpek(K[M])𝔸K3,(s,t)(s,st,t2). \begin{aligned} \mathbb A_K^2&\longrightarrow K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(K[M])\hookrightarrow\mathbb A_K^3,\\ (s,t)&\longmapsto(s,st,t^2). \end{aligned}

Under this monoid homomorphism,

2e1+e3(2,2)and2e2(2,2). 2e_1+e_3\longmapsto(2,2) \qquad\text{and}\qquad 2e_2\longmapsto(2,2).

This gives the equation

X2Z=Y2, X^2Z=Y^2,

which can of course also be read directly from the parametrisation.

Edition note: the source prints that both elements map to (1,1)(1,1). With the displayed generators, both map to (2,2)(2,2). This edition transparently corrects these coordinates; the relation X2Z=Y2X^2Z=Y^2 is unchanged.

The defining equation can also be written as

Z=(YX)2. Z=\left(\frac YX\right)^2.

Thus, starting from K[X,Y]K[X,Y], we adjoin the square of Y/XY/X.

Example: the standard monomial cone

Consider the submonoid

M=(1,0),(1,2),(0,1)2. M=\langle(1,0),(-1,2),(0,1)\rangle\subseteq\mathbb Z^2.

Its associated monoid ring satisfies

K[M]K[X,Y,Z]/(Z2XY). K[M]\cong K[X,Y,Z]/(Z^2-XY).

We claim that the monoid is normal, that is, equal to its normalisation. The two generators (1,0)(1,0) and (1,2)(-1,2) each determine a line in 2\mathbb R^2, and the monoid consists of all lattice points inside the cone determined by these lines. The lattice points in this cone are given by the two conditions

{(s,t)2t0 and t2s}. \{(s,t)\in\mathbb Z^2\mid t\geq0\text{ and }t\geq-2s\}.

A point in this set with s0s\geq0 plainly belongs to MM. Now let (s,t)(s,t) be a point of the set with s<0s<0. By the second linear condition, we can write

(s,t)=s(1,2)+(t+2s)(0,1), (s,t)=-s(-1,2)+(t+2s)(0,1),

and this point belongs to MM because t+2s0t+2s\geq0.

The two lines also immediately describe MM as

M=M1M2, M=M_1\cap M_2,

with

M1={(s,t)2t0}× M_1=\{(s,t)\in\mathbb Z^2\mid t\geq0\} \cong\mathbb Z\times\mathbb N

and

M2={(s,t)2t2s}×. M_2=\{(s,t)\in\mathbb Z^2\mid t\geq-2s\} \cong\mathbb Z\times\mathbb N.

The second identification comes from the \mathbb Z-basis (1,2),(0,1)(-1,2),(0,1). This explicit description shows that the associated monoid ring is normal.

Monomial curves and normalisation

Later we shall see that an algebraic curve is normal if and only if it is nonsingular. For monomial curves, the normalisation is easy to describe.

Theorem: normalisation of a monomial curve

Let

M M\subseteq\mathbb N

be a submonoid generated by relatively prime numbers e1,,ene_1,\ldots,e_n, and let

K[M]K[T] K[M]\subseteq K[T]

be the associated extension of monoid rings. Then K[T]K[T] is the normalisation of K[M]K[M].

In other words, the monomial map

𝔸K1KSpek(K[M]) \mathbb A_K^1\longrightarrow K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(K[M])

is a normalisation.

Proof

We have

K[M]=K[Te1,,Ten]K[T]. K[M]=K[T^{e_1},\ldots,T^{e_n}]\subseteq K[T].

Since the exponents are relatively prime, they generate 11. Multiplicatively, this means that there is a monomial in these powers, allowing negative exponents, that equals TT. Thus TT is a quotient of elements of K[M]K[M], and the two fields of fractions are equal.

On the other hand, TT satisfies an equation of integral dependence over K[M]K[M], for example

Xe1Te1=0. X^{e_1}-T^{e_1}=0.

Here XX is the polynomial variable, whereas Te1T^{e_1} is a coefficient in K[M]K[M]. Since K[T]K[T] is normal—indeed, it is a unique factorisation domain because it is a principal ideal domain—it is the normalisation of K[M]K[M].

Edition note: the source uses TT both for the polynomial variable and for the element being tested, adding the qualification “read correctly”. This edition distinguishes them by naming the polynomial variable XX; the mathematical content is unchanged.

Monomial curves thus provide many examples in which normalisation is a bijection at the level of KK-spectra. The map is also a homeomorphism for the Zariski topology, which is very simple in the curve case. Nevertheless, it would be wrong to regard the two curves as identical. If ei1e_i\ne1 for every ii, normalisation is not a bijection at the ring level. In algebraic geometry, we must not look only at the set-theoretic or topological shape of the zero locus; we must not forget the underlying rings and equations. The difference is also visible in the embedded situation, where Neil’s parabola has a cusp.

Normalisation gives a new interpretation of the degree of singularity of a monomial curve.

Lemma: degree of singularity as a dimension of the normalisation quotient

Let MM\subseteq\mathbb N be a numerical monoid defined by relatively prime generators. Let

R=K[M] R=K[M]

be its associated monoid ring and

Rnorm=K[T] R^{\operatorname{norm}}=K[T]

its normalisation. Then

δ(M)=dimK(Rnorm/R). \delta(M)=\dim_K\bigl(R^{\operatorname{norm}}/R\bigr).

Proof

The normalisation has the KK-basis

{Tmm}, \{T^m\mid m\in\mathbb N\},

whereas the monoid ring K[M]K[M] has the KK-basis

{TmmM}. \{T^m\mid m\in M\}.

Thus the quotient vector space

K[T]/K[M] K[T]/K[M]

has the KK-basis

{Tmm\M}. \{T^m\mid m\in\mathbb N\setminus M\}.

The dimension of the quotient vector space is the number of elements in a basis, namely the number of gaps in MM. This is precisely the degree of singularity of MM.


Edition provenance. Translation and reader production: OpenAI Codex gpt-5.6-sol, Ultra. Sources, authors, and component licences are retained as stated in the metadata and the edition’s rights files.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0 for translated course text; the figure retains CC BY 2.5 component rights in authority/RIGHTS-unit-20.csv · Rights record: RIGHTS-unit-20.csv

Worksheet 20

Practice exercises

Prove each of the following four exercises in two ways: directly and using the normality of \mathbb Z.

Exercise 20.1 ★

Show that 2\sqrt{2} is irrational.

Exercise 20.2

Let pp be a prime number. Using unique prime factorisation of natural numbers, show that the real number p\sqrt p is irrational.

Exercise 20.3 ★

Use unique prime factorisation in \mathbb Z to prove that 91/39^{1/3} is irrational.

Exercise 20.4 ★

Let

n=p1α1prαr n=p_1^{\alpha_1}\cdots p_r^{\alpha_r}

be the canonical prime factorisation of the natural number nn. Let kk be a positive natural number, and suppose that not all exponents αi\alpha_i are multiples of kk. Show that the real number

n1/k n^{1/k}

is irrational.

Exercise 20.5 ★

Let RR be a normal integral domain and fRf\in R with f0f\ne0. Show that the localisation RfR_f is also normal.

Exercise 20.6

Let RR be a normal integral domain and SRS\subseteq R a multiplicative system. Show that the localisation RSR_S is also normal.

Exercise 20.7

Let KK be a field and (RiK)iI(R_i\subseteq K)_{i\in I} a family of normal subrings. Show that the intersection

iIRi \bigcap_{i\in I}R_i

is also normal.

Exercise 20.8

Let RR be an integral domain. Show that RR is normal if and only if it equals its normalisation.

Exercise 20.9

Let RR be an integral domain. Suppose that its normalisation equals its field of fractions Q(R)Q(R). Show that RR itself is already a field.

Exercise 20.10

Let MM be a torsion-free monoid. Show that its group of differences Γ(M)\Gamma(M) is also torsion-free.

Exercise 20.11

Let MM be a commutative group. Show that torsion-freeness of MM is equivalent to the following property: if mMm\in M and

rm=0 rm=0

for some positive natural number rr\in\mathbb N, then m=0m=0. Also show that this equivalence need not hold for a monoid.

Exercise 20.12 ★

Consider the zero locus

C=V(Y2X4)𝔸2. C=V(Y^2-X^4)\subseteq\mathbb A_{\mathbb C}^2.

  1. Is CC irreducible?

  2. Can the coordinate ring [X,Y]/(Y2X4)\mathbb C[X,Y]/(Y^2-X^4) be obtained as a monoid ring?

  3. Can the coordinate ring [X,Y]/(Y2X4)\mathbb C[X,Y]/(Y^2-X^4) be obtained as the monoid ring of a submonoid

    M×/(2)? M\subseteq\mathbb N\times\mathbb Z/(2)?

Exercise 20.13 ★

Let n+n\in\mathbb N_+ and let

M×/(n) M\subseteq\mathbb N\times\mathbb Z/(n)

be a submonoid. Show that mMm\in M is a unit if and only if it is a unit when regarded as an element of ×/(n)\mathbb N\times\mathbb Z/(n).

Exercise 20.14 ★

Let n+n\in\mathbb N_+. Show that the \mathbb C-spectrum of the commutative monoid

M=×/(n) M=\mathbb N\times\mathbb Z/(n)

consists of nn irreducible components, all isomorphic to the affine line 𝔸1\mathbb A_{\mathbb C}^1.

Exercise 20.15

Let RR be an integral domain with normalisation RnormR^{\operatorname{norm}}. Show that

𝔣={gR|gRnormR} \mathfrak f= \left\{g\in R\mathrel{\Big|}gR^{\operatorname{norm}}\subseteq R\right\}

is an ideal of RR.

Exercise 20.16

Let MM\subseteq\mathbb N be a numerical monoid generated by relatively prime natural numbers. Show that the conductor ideal of the associated monoid ring K[M]K[M] satisfies

𝔣=(Mf), \mathfrak f=(M_{\geq f}),

where ff denotes the conductor of the monoid.

Exercise 20.17 ★

Let MM\subseteq\mathbb N be a numerical monoid. Show that its degree of singularity equals each of the following three numbers.

  1. The maximum length of a chain of monoids

    M=M0M1M2Mn=. M=M_0\subset M_1\subset M_2\subset\cdots\subset M_n=\mathbb N.

  2. The maximum length of a chain of KK-algebras

    K[M]=R0R1R2Rn=K[T]. K[M]=R_0\subset R_1\subset R_2\subset\cdots\subset R_n=K[T].

  3. The maximum length of a chain—a flag—of KK-vector subspaces

    K[M]=V0V1V2Vn=K[T]. K[M]=V_0\subset V_1\subset V_2\subset\cdots\subset V_n=K[T].

Exercise 20.18

Consider Example 20.11. What are the values of the three generators under the monoid homomorphisms φ1,φ2\varphi_1,\varphi_2 to \mathbb Z mentioned there, which describe the monoid? Determine the cokernel of the group homomorphism

Γ(M)2,m(φ1(m),φ2(m)). \begin{aligned} \Gamma(M)&\longrightarrow\mathbb Z^2,\\ m&\longmapsto\bigl(\varphi_1(m),\varphi_2(m)\bigr). \end{aligned}

This cokernel is called the divisor class group of the monoid ring.

Edition note on the source: The cited example states the inequalities t0t\geq0 and t2st\geq-2s, but does not label or explicitly define φ1,φ2\varphi_1,\varphi_2. Following the order of these inequalities, the intended functionals can be inferred as φ1(s,t)=t\varphi_1(s,t)=t and φ2(s,t)=t+2s\varphi_2(s,t)=t+2s. These formulas are an explicitly disclosed editorial inference, not an unstated assertion attributed to the source.

Exercises to submit

Exercise 20.19 (3 points)

Let RR be a normal integral domain and

RS R\subseteq S

an integral ring extension. Let fRf\in R. Show that the principal ideal generated by ff satisfies

R(f)S=(f)R. R\cap(f)S=(f)R.

Exercise 20.20 (6 points)

Let RR be a normal integral domain. Show that the polynomial ring R[X]R[X] is also normal.

Exercise 20.21 (5 points)

Let RR be a normal integral domain and aRa\in R. Suppose that aa has no square root in RR. Show that the polynomial X2aX^2-a is a prime element of R[X]R[X].

Source hint: Use the field of fractions Q(R)Q(R).

Source warning: In this setting, being prime need not be equivalent to being irreducible.

Exercise 20.22 (4 points)

Let RR be an integral domain. Show that the following three properties are equivalent.

  1. RR is normal.
  2. For every prime ideal 𝔭\mathfrak p, the localisation R𝔭R_{\mathfrak p} is normal.
  3. For every maximal ideal 𝔪\mathfrak m, the localisation R𝔪R_{\mathfrak m} is normal.

Normality is therefore called a local property.

Exercise 20.23 (2 points)

Let

MΓ(M)n M\subseteq\Gamma(M)\cong\mathbb Z^n

be a monoid, and consider the set

M*={φ:Γ(M)|φ(M)}. M^*= \left\{\varphi:\Gamma(M)\longrightarrow\mathbb Z \mathrel{\Big|}\varphi(M)\subseteq\mathbb N\right\}.

Show that M*M^* is a normal submonoid of Hom(n,)\operatorname{Hom}(\mathbb Z^n,\mathbb Z).

This monoid is called the dual monoid of MM.


Edition provenance. Translation and reader production: OpenAI Codex gpt-5.6-sol, Ultra. Sources, authors, and component licences are retained as stated in the metadata and the edition’s rights files.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Public Solutions to Worksheet 20

At the frozen revision boundary, the source provides public solutions only for Exercises 20.1, 20.3, 20.4, 20.5, 20.12, 20.13, 20.14, and 20.17. The solutions to Exercises 20.1 and 20.4 are wrapper pages transcluding separate proof bodies; this edition includes those frozen proof bodies in full. No additional solutions have been created for this edition.

Solution to Exercise 20.1

We assume that there is a rational number whose square is 22 and derive a contradiction. Thus suppose that

x x\in\mathbb Q

and

x2=2. x^2=2.

Every rational number can be written as a fraction with integer numerator and denominator. We may therefore write

x=ab. x=\frac ab.

We may also assume that the fraction is in lowest terms, so that aa and bb have no nontrivial common divisor. This choice merely simplifies the representation and is not the assumption we intend to refute. In fact, we only need at least one of aa and bb to be odd: if both are even, we can divide both by 22 and continue as necessary.

The equation x2=2x^2=2 means

x2=(ab)2=a2b2=2. x^2=\left(\frac ab\right)^2=\frac{a^2}{b^2}=2.

Multiplying by b2b^2 gives an equation in \mathbb Z (indeed, in \mathbb N),

2b2=a2. 2b^2=a^2.

Thus a2a^2 is even, being a multiple of 22. Consequently aa itself is even, since the square of an odd number is odd. We can therefore write

a=2c a=2c

for some cc\in\mathbb Z. Substituting into the equation above gives

2b2=(2c)2=22c2. 2b^2=(2c)^2=2^2c^2.

Dividing by 22, we obtain

b2=2c2. b^2=2c^2.

For the same reason, b2b^2, and hence bb, is also even. This contradicts our choice that aa and bb are not both even.

Back to Exercise 20.1.

Solution to Exercise 20.3

Suppose that there is a representation

91/3=ab 9^{1/3}=\frac ab

with a,b+a,b\in\mathbb N_+. If aa and bb have a common divisor at least 22, we can cancel it. Thus we may assume that aa and bb are relatively prime. Cubing the original equation gives

9=a3b3, 9=\frac{a^3}{b^3},

or

32b3=a3. 3^2b^3=a^3.

This number has a unique prime factorisation. Since 33 occurs in it, 3a33\mid a^3; as 33 is prime, also 3a3\mid a. Hence the exponent of 33 in the prime factorisation on the right is at least 33. On the other hand, because aa and bb are relatively prime, bb is not divisible by 33, so the exponent of 33 on the left is exactly 22. This is a contradiction.

Back to Exercise 20.3.

Solution to Exercise 20.4

The number

n=p1α1prαr n=p_1^{\alpha_1}\cdots p_r^{\alpha_r}

cannot have a kkth root in \mathbb Z, since in a kkth power all prime-factor exponents are multiples of kk, whereas by hypothesis this does not hold for all the αi\alpha_i.

Since \mathbb Z is a unique factorisation domain, it is normal. Therefore there cannot be an

xQ()= x\in Q(\mathbb Z)=\mathbb Q

with

xk=n. x^k=n.

Thus the real number n1/kn^{1/k} is irrational.

Back to Exercise 20.4.

Solution to Exercise 20.5

Let

qQ(R)=Q(Rf) q\in Q(R)=Q(R_f)

be an element of the field of fractions satisfying an equation of integral dependence over RfR_f. Thus there is an equation

qn+gn1qn1++g1q+g0=0,giRf. q^n+g_{n-1}q^{n-1}+\cdots+g_1q+g_0=0, \qquad g_i\in R_f.

Each gig_i can be written as a fraction whose denominator is a power of ff. We can choose one fixed power fkf^k as a common denominator. Increasing kk if necessary, we may also assume that kk is a multiple of nn.

Multiplying the equation by fknf^{kn} gives

(fkq)n+gn1fk(fkq)n1++g1fk(n1)(fkq)+fkng0=0. (f^kq)^n +g_{n-1}f^k(f^kq)^{n-1} +\cdots +g_1f^{k(n-1)}(f^kq) +f^{kn}g_0=0.

All coefficients in this equation lie in RR. It is therefore an equation of integral dependence for fkqf^kq over RR. Since RR is normal, we obtain fkqRf^kq\in R, and hence

q=bfkRf q=\frac b{f^k}\in R_f

for some bRb\in R. Thus the localisation RfR_f is also normal.

Back to Exercise 20.5.

Solution to Exercise 20.12

  1. We have

    Y2X4=(YX2)(Y+X2), Y^2-X^4=(Y-X^2)(Y+X^2),

    so the curve is reducible.

  2. Consider the monoid MM with two generators e,fe,f and the single relation

    2f=4e. 2f=4e.

    Then

    [M][X,Y]/(Y2X4). \mathbb C[M]\cong\mathbb C[X,Y]/(Y^2-X^4).

  3. Take

    e=(1,1)×/(2) e=(1,1)\in\mathbb N\times\mathbb Z/(2)

    and

    f=(2,1)×/(2). f=(2,1)\in\mathbb N\times\mathbb Z/(2).

    We have 2f=4e2f=4e. All other relations are multiples of this one. Indeed, if

    af=be,a,b, af=be, \qquad a,b\in\mathbb N,

    then comparing the first coordinates gives b=2ab=2a, while comparing the second coordinates requires aa to be even.

Back to Exercise 20.12.

Solution to Exercise 20.13

Let

m=(r,s)M. m=(r,s)\in M.

If mm is a unit in MM, it is certainly also a unit in ×/(n)\mathbb N\times\mathbb Z/(n), since its inverse in MM belongs to that larger monoid.

Conversely, suppose that mm is a unit in ×/(n)\mathbb N\times\mathbb Z/(n). We must first have r=0r=0. For

m=(0,s),0s<n, m=(0,s), \qquad 0\leq s<n,

its inverse in ×/(n)\mathbb N\times\mathbb Z/(n) is

(0,ns)=(0,s). (0,n-s)=(0,-s).

But

(n1)(0,s)=(0,(n1)s)=(0,s). (n-1)(0,s)=(0,(n-1)s)=(0,-s).

Since (0,s)M(0,s)\in M and MM is closed under addition, this inverse also belongs to MM. Hence mm is a unit in MM.

Back to Exercise 20.13.

Solution to Exercise 20.14

We have

[M][S,T]/(Sn1)[T][S]/(Sn1)[T][S]/(ζn=1(Sζ))([S]/(ζn=1(Sζ)))[T], \begin{aligned} \mathbb C[M] &\cong \mathbb C[S,T]/(S^n-1)\\ &\cong \mathbb C[T][S]/(S^n-1)\\ &\cong \mathbb C[T][S]\Big/\left(\prod_{\zeta^n=1}(S-\zeta)\right)\\ &\cong \left(\mathbb C[S]\Big/\left(\prod_{\zeta^n=1}(S-\zeta)\right)\right)[T], \end{aligned}

where ζ\zeta runs through all nn complex roots of unity. Furthermore,

[S]/(ζn=1(Sζ))n, \mathbb C[S]\Big/\left(\prod_{\zeta^n=1}(S-\zeta)\right) \cong\mathbb C^n,

with the isomorphism given by

S(ζ0,ζ1,,ζn1). S\longmapsto(\zeta_0,\zeta_1,\ldots,\zeta_{n-1}).

Consequently,

([S]/(ζn=1(Sζ)))[T]n[T]([T])n \left(\mathbb C[S]\Big/\left(\prod_{\zeta^n=1}(S-\zeta)\right)\right)[T] \cong\mathbb C^n[T] \cong(\mathbb C[T])^n

is a product ring of nn polynomial rings [T]\mathbb C[T]. Therefore its \mathbb C-spectrum is the disjoint union of nn copies of

Spec([T])𝔸1. \operatorname{Spec}_{\mathbb C}(\mathbb C[T]) \cong\mathbb A^1_{\mathbb C}.

Each of these affine lines is irreducible.

Edition note: in the three products, the source uses the dummy index η\eta in η(Sζ)\prod_\eta(S-\zeta), whereas the factors and explanatory prose use ζ\zeta. This edition transparently makes the indexing consistent as ζn=1(Sζ)\prod_{\zeta^n=1}(S-\zeta).

Back to Exercise 20.14.

Solution to Exercise 20.17

The degree of singularity δ\delta is the number of gaps of MM in \mathbb N. This equals

dimK(Rnorm/R)=dimK(K[T]/K[M]). \dim_K(R^{\mathrm{norm}}/R) =\dim_K(K[T]/K[M]).

  1. In a chain of monoids

    M=M0M1M2Mn=, M=M_0\subsetneq M_1\subsetneq M_2\subsetneq\cdots \subsetneq M_n=\mathbb N,

    at least one element must be added at each step. Hence nδn\leq\delta. Conversely, define Mi+1M_{i+1} successively by adjoining to MiM_i the largest element not yet in MiM_i. The result is still a monoid and has exactly one more element than MiM_i. This procedure produces a chain of length δ\delta, as required.

  2. This chain of length δ\delta gives a chain of KK-algebras

    K[M]=K[M0]K[M1]K[M2]K[Mδ]=K[]. K[M]=K[M_0]\subsetneq K[M_1]\subsetneq K[M_2]\subsetneq\cdots \subsetneq K[M_\delta]=K[\mathbb N].

    All these inclusions are strict: if mMi+1\Mim\in M_{i+1}\setminus M_i, then

    TmK[Mi+1]\K[Mi]. T^m\in K[M_{i+1}]\setminus K[M_i].

    The next part gives the general reason that no longer chain exists.

  3. The algebra chain in part 2 is, in particular, a chain of vector subspaces over KK. Since

    dimK(K[]/K[M])=δ, \dim_K(K[\mathbb N]/K[M])=\delta,

    there can be no longer chain of vector subspaces: these chains correspond to chains in the quotient vector space K[]/K[M]K[\mathbb N]/K[M], and in a vector space of dimension δ\delta, the maximum length of a chain of strict inclusions is δ\delta.

Edition note: in step 2 the source writes TmMi+1\MiT^m\in M_{i+1}\setminus M_i. Since the MiM_i consist of exponents, the correctly typed relation is mMi+1\Mim\in M_{i+1}\setminus M_i, which then gives TmK[Mi+1]\K[Mi]T^m\in K[M_{i+1}]\setminus K[M_i]. This edition states that implication explicitly.

Back to Exercise 20.17.


Edition provenance. Translation and reader production: OpenAI Codex gpt-5.6-sol, Ultra. Sources, authors, and component licences are retained as stated in the metadata and the edition’s rights files.

English Markdown source · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Lecture 21: Discrete Valuation Rings and Nakayama’s Lemma

Discrete valuation rings

We now continue the local study of algebraic curves. In what follows, we shall obtain various characterisations of when a point on a curve is nonsingular—or smooth. Associated with a point PP on a curve is the local ring at PP, obtained by localising the affine coordinate ring of the curve at the maximal ideal corresponding to PP. If

P=(a,b)C=V(F)𝔸K2, P=(a,b)\in C=V(F)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^2,

this local ring can be described in two ways:

K[X,Y](Xa,Yb)/(F)(K[X,Y]/(F))𝔪, K[X,Y]_{(X-a,Y-b)}/(F) \cong (K[X,Y]/(F))_{\mathfrak m},

where 𝔪\mathfrak m is the maximal ideal now regarded in the quotient ring. This ring captures the essential algebraic properties of the point. The first important concept is that of a discrete valuation ring.

Definition: discrete valuation ring

A discrete valuation ring is a principal ideal domain RR having exactly one prime element up to associates.

A generator of the maximal ideal of a discrete valuation ring is also called a local uniformiser.

Lemma: first properties of discrete valuation rings

A discrete valuation ring is a local Noetherian principal ideal domain with exactly two prime ideals, namely

(0)𝔪, (0)\subset\mathfrak m,

where 𝔪\mathfrak m is its maximal ideal.

Proof

A discrete valuation ring is not a field. In a principal ideal domain that is not a field, every maximal ideal is generated by a prime element, and prime generators of distinct maximal ideals cannot be associates. Since a discrete valuation ring has only one prime element up to associates, it has only one maximal ideal.

Likewise, every nonzero prime ideal in a principal ideal domain is generated by a prime element. Hence its only nonzero prime ideal is 𝔪\mathfrak m; together with the zero ideal, this gives exactly two prime ideals.

Example: localisation of K[X]K[X] at (X)(X)

Let KK be a field, K[X]K[X] the polynomial ring, and

R=K[X](X) R=K[X]_{(X)}

the localisation at the maximal ideal

𝔪=(X). \mathfrak m=(X).

Then RR is a discrete valuation ring. Its two prime ideals are

(0)(X). (0)\subset(X).

The ring RR is a principal ideal domain because K[X]K[X] is a principal ideal domain. Since there is only one maximal ideal, there is only one prime element up to associates, namely XX.

Example: localisation of \mathbb Z at (p)(p)

Let pp be a prime number and

R=(p) R=\mathbb Z_{(p)}

the localisation at the maximal ideal

𝔪=(p). \mathfrak m=(p).

Then RR is a discrete valuation ring. Its two prime ideals are

(0)(p). (0)\subset(p).

The ring RR is a principal ideal domain because \mathbb Z is a principal ideal domain. Since there is only one maximal ideal, there is only one prime element up to associates, namely pp.

Definition: order in a discrete valuation ring

Let RR be a discrete valuation ring with prime element pp. For every nonzero element fRf\in R, there are an nn\in\mathbb N and a unit uR×u\in R^\times such that

f=upn. f=up^n.

The number nn is called the order of ff, written

ord(f)=n. \operatorname{ord}(f)=n.

Thus the order is simply the exponent of the unique prime element, up to associates, in the prime factorisation of ff.

Lemma: properties of the order

Let RR be a discrete valuation ring with maximal ideal

𝔪=(p). \mathfrak m=(p).

The order map

R\{0},ford(f) \begin{aligned} R\setminus\{0\}&\longrightarrow\mathbb N,\\ f&\longmapsto\operatorname{ord}(f) \end{aligned}

has the following properties. For f,gR\{0}f,g\in R\setminus\{0\},

  1. we have

    ord(fg)=ord(f)+ord(g); \operatorname{ord}(fg) =\operatorname{ord}(f)+\operatorname{ord}(g);

  2. if f+g0f+g\ne0, then

    ord(f+g)min{ord(f),ord(g)}; \operatorname{ord}(f+g) \geq \min\{\operatorname{ord}(f),\operatorname{ord}(g)\};

  3. f𝔪f\in\mathfrak m if and only if

    ord(f)1; \operatorname{ord}(f)\geq1;

  4. fR×f\in R^\times if and only if

    ord(f)=0. \operatorname{ord}(f)=0.

Proof. See Exercise 21.2.

Edition note — source correction. The source defines ord\operatorname{ord} only on R\{0}R\setminus\{0\} but prints the inequality for sums without excluding f+g=0f+g=0. This edition adds the condition f+g0f+g\ne0, so that every occurrence of ord\operatorname{ord} lies within its domain.

We shall now prove an important characterisation of discrete valuation rings. In particular, it shows that a normal Noetherian local integral domain with exactly two prime ideals is already a discrete valuation ring. First we need a lemma.

Lemma 21.7: nilpotence of the maximal ideal

Let SS be a Noetherian local commutative ring. Suppose that its maximal ideal 𝔪\mathfrak m is its only prime ideal. Then there is an nn\in\mathbb N such that

𝔪n=0. \mathfrak m^n=0.

Proof

First we claim that every element of SS is either a unit or nilpotent. Take a nonunit fSf\in S. Since SS is local,

f𝔪. f\in\mathfrak m.

Suppose that ff is not nilpotent.

Edition bridge 21.A — the prime ideal lemma. If an element ff of a commutative ring is not nilpotent, there is a prime ideal 𝔭\mathfrak p that does not contain ff. Indeed, the multiplicative set T={1,f,f2,}T=\{1,f,f^2,\ldots\} does not contain zero. By Zorn’s lemma, choose an ideal 𝔭\mathfrak p maximal among ideals disjoint from TT. If ab𝔭ab\in\mathfrak p but a,b𝔭a,b\notin\mathfrak p, then both 𝔭+(a)\mathfrak p+(a) and 𝔭+(b)\mathfrak p+(b) meet TT. Multiplying one element from each intersection gives an element of T𝔭T\cap\mathfrak p, a contradiction. Thus 𝔭\mathfrak p is prime and, since 𝔭T=\mathfrak p\cap T=\varnothing, we have f𝔭f\notin\mathfrak p. The source cites this fact using the numbering of another course; this edition supplies its statement and proof to make the argument self-contained.

This prime ideal 𝔭\mathfrak p differs from 𝔪\mathfrak m, since f𝔪f\in\mathfrak m but f𝔭f\notin\mathfrak p. This contradicts the assumption that 𝔪\mathfrak m is the only prime ideal. Thus every element of the maximal ideal is nilpotent.

Since SS is Noetherian, the ideal 𝔪\mathfrak m has a finite generating system

𝔪=(f1,,fk). \mathfrak m=(f_1,\ldots,f_k).

If 𝔪=0\mathfrak m=0, take n=1n=1. Hence we may now assume k1k\geq1.

Choose mm\in\mathbb N such that

fim=0for all i=1,,k, f_i^m=0 \qquad\text{for all }i=1,\ldots,k,

and set n=kmn=km. Every element of 𝔪n\mathfrak m^n is a linear combination of products of the form

(i=1kai1fi)(i=1kai2fi)(i=1kainfi). \left(\sum_{i=1}^k a_{i1}f_i\right) \left(\sum_{i=1}^k a_{i2}f_i\right) \cdots \left(\sum_{i=1}^k a_{in}f_i\right).

Upon expansion, each term is a monomial

f1r1fkrkwithi=1kri=n. f_1^{r_1}\cdots f_k^{r_k} \qquad\text{with}\qquad \sum_{i=1}^k r_i=n.

For at least one index ii,

rink=m. r_i\geq\frac nk=m.

Since fim=0f_i^m=0, every such monomial is zero. Hence 𝔪n=0\mathfrak m^n=0.

Theorem: characterisation of discrete valuation rings

Let RR be a Noetherian local integral domain having exactly two prime ideals

(0)𝔪. (0)\subset\mathfrak m.

The following statements are equivalent.

  1. RR is a discrete valuation ring.
  2. RR is a principal ideal domain.
  3. RR is a unique factorisation domain.
  4. RR is normal.
  5. The maximal ideal 𝔪\mathfrak m is principal.

Proof

The implication (1)(2)(1)\Rightarrow(2) follows directly from Definition 21.1.

The implication (2)(3)(2)\Rightarrow(3) follows from Theorem 9.3 in Commutative Algebra.

The implication (3)(4)(3)\Rightarrow(4) follows from Theorem 20.2.

To prove (4)(5)(4)\Rightarrow(5), take

f𝔪,f0. f\in\mathfrak m, \qquad f\ne0.

Edition bridge 21.B — application to R/(f)R/(f). Set S=R/(f)S=R/(f). The ring SS remains Noetherian and local, with maximal ideal 𝔪̃=𝔪/(f)\widetilde{\mathfrak m}=\mathfrak m/(f). Prime ideals of SS correspond to prime ideals of RR containing (f)(f). Since the only prime ideals of RR are (0)(0) and 𝔪\mathfrak m, and f0f\ne0, the only prime ideal containing (f)(f) is 𝔪\mathfrak m. Thus 𝔪̃\widetilde{\mathfrak m} is the only prime ideal of SS. Lemma 21.7 gives 𝔪̃n=0\widetilde{\mathfrak m}^{\,n}=0 for some nn, which, pulled back to RR, means exactly that 𝔪n(f)\mathfrak m^n\subseteq(f).

Choose nn minimal such that

𝔪n(f)and𝔪n1(f). \mathfrak m^n\subseteq(f) \qquad\text{and}\qquad \mathfrak m^{n-1}\nsubseteq(f).

Choose

g𝔪n1\(f) g\in\mathfrak m^{n-1}\setminus(f)

and consider

h:=fgQ(R). h:=\frac fg\in Q(R).

Here g0g\ne0. Its inverse,

h1=gf, h^{-1}=\frac gf,

does not belong to RR, since otherwise g(f)g\in(f). Because RR is normal, h1h^{-1} is not integral over RR either. By the module criterion for integrality in Lemma 19.9, applied in particular to the maximal ideal 𝔪R\mathfrak m\subset R, we have

h1𝔪𝔪. h^{-1}\mathfrak m\nsubseteq\mathfrak m.

On the other hand, by the choice of gg,

h1𝔪=gf𝔪𝔪nfR. h^{-1}\mathfrak m =\frac gf\mathfrak m \subseteq\frac{\mathfrak m^n}{f} \subseteq R.

Thus h1𝔪h^{-1}\mathfrak m is an ideal of RR not contained in the maximal ideal. Hence

h1𝔪=R. h^{-1}\mathfrak m=R.

This equality gives h𝔪h\in\mathfrak m. Moreover, for every x𝔪x\in\mathfrak m, we have h1xRh^{-1}x\in R, so

x=h(h1x)(h). x=h(h^{-1}x)\in(h).

Therefore

(h)=𝔪, (h)=\mathfrak m,

and the maximal ideal is principal.

Now prove (5)(1)(5)\Rightarrow(1). Suppose

𝔪=(π). \mathfrak m=(\pi).

The element π\pi is prime and is the only prime element up to associates. Take a nonzero nonunit fRf\in R. Then

f𝔪, f\in\mathfrak m,

so f=πg1f=\pi g_1. The element g1g_1 is either a unit or again belongs to 𝔪\mathfrak m. In the latter case,

g1=πg2andf=π2g2. g_1=\pi g_2 \qquad\text{and}\qquad f=\pi^2g_2.

We claim that this process terminates, giving

f=πku f=\pi^ku

for some kk\in\mathbb N and unit uu. Otherwise, for arbitrarily large nn, we could write

f=πngn. f=\pi^ng_n.

Applying Lemma 21.7 to R/(f)R/(f) as in Bridge 21.B, there is an mm\in\mathbb N such that

(πm)=𝔪m(f). (\pi^m)=\mathfrak m^m\subseteq(f).

If nm+1n\geq m+1, then for some a,bRa,b\in R we obtain

πm=af=aπm+1b, \pi^m=af=a\pi^{m+1}b,

and, since RR is an integral domain, cancelling πm\pi^m gives the contradiction

1=abπ. 1=ab\pi.

Thus every nonzero nonunit is a product of a power of π\pi and a unit. In particular, RR is a unique factorisation domain. Since RR is Noetherian, every ideal can be written as

𝔞=(f1,,fs). \mathfrak a=(f_1,\ldots,f_s).

The zero ideal is already principal. If 𝔞0\mathfrak a\ne0, remove zero generators and write each remaining generator as

fi=πniui f_i=\pi^{n_i}u_i

with uiu_i a unit. If

n=minini, n=\min_i n_i,

then

𝔞=(πn). \mathfrak a=(\pi^n).

Thus RR is a principal ideal domain with exactly one prime element up to associates; by definition, it is a discrete valuation ring.

Nakayama’s lemma

Within the class of Noetherian local integral domains having exactly two prime ideals (0)𝔪(0)\subset\mathfrak m—and hence not fields—the preceding theorem shows that RR is a discrete valuation ring if and only if the maximal ideal 𝔪\mathfrak m is generated by one element. It is therefore natural to ask, more generally, how many generators are needed for the maximal ideal of the local ring at a point on an algebraic curve. This leads to the embedding dimension, which we have already encountered for monomial curves. It is also the dimension of the vector space over R/𝔪R/\mathfrak m

𝔪/𝔪2. \mathfrak m/\mathfrak m^2.

To explain this connection, we need some preparation, in particular Nakayama’s lemma.

Edition note — correction to the source’s scope. The source’s transition sentence states the equivalence between “discrete valuation ring” and “principal maximal ideal” without repeating the hypotheses. This edition explicitly retains the scope of the theorem: Noetherian local integral domains with exactly two prime ideals.

The following construction is used in Nakayama’s lemma. Let VV be an RR-module, UVU\subseteq V a submodule, and IRI\subseteq R an ideal. The notation IUIU denotes the RR-submodule of VV generated by all elements

fv,fI,vU. fv, \qquad f\in I, \qquad v\in U.

This is also a submodule of UU. If UU itself is an ideal—that is, an RR-submodule of RR—the construction agrees with the product of ideals. The quotient module V/IVV/IV is naturally not only an RR-module but also an (R/I)(R/I)-module. If II is maximal, this quotient module is even a vector space over the residue field R/IR/I.

Nakayama’s lemma

Let (R,𝔪)(R,\mathfrak m) be a local ring and VV a finitely generated RR-module. If

𝔪V=V, \mathfrak mV=V,

then

V=0. V=0.

Proof

Let v1,,vnv_1,\ldots,v_n be a generating system for VV. Since vi𝔪Vv_i\in\mathfrak mV, for each viv_i there is a representation

vi=ai1v1++ainvn,aij𝔪. v_i=a_{i1}v_1+\cdots+a_{in}v_n, \qquad a_{ij}\in\mathfrak m.

Thus, for every ii,

(1aii)vi=ai1v1++ai,i1vi1+ai,i+1vi+1++ainvn. (1-a_{ii})v_i =a_{i1}v_1+\cdots+a_{i,i-1}v_{i-1} +a_{i,i+1}v_{i+1}+\cdots+a_{in}v_n.

Since aii𝔪a_{ii}\in\mathfrak m, the coefficient 1aii1-a_{ii} is a unit in the local ring RR. We can solve for viv_i, so viv_i is redundant in the generating system. Removing generators one by one eventually leaves no generators. Hence VV is the zero module.

Edition bridge 21.C — minimal generators corollary. Let (R,𝔪)(R,\mathfrak m) be a local ring, k=R/𝔪k=R/\mathfrak m its residue field, and VV a finitely generated RR-module. Elements v1,,vrv_1,\ldots,v_r generate VV if and only if their classes generate the kk-vector space V/𝔪VV/\mathfrak mV. The forward implication is immediate. Conversely, set N=Rv1++RvrN=Rv_1+\cdots+Rv_r. The hypothesis on the classes gives V=N+𝔪VV=N+\mathfrak mV, so V/N=𝔪(V/N)V/N=\mathfrak m(V/N). Nakayama’s lemma gives V/N=0V/N=0, hence V=NV=N. Consequently the minimal number of generators of VV is dimk(V/𝔪V)\dim_k(V/\mathfrak mV). If 𝔪\mathfrak m is finitely generated, in particular in the Noetherian setting above, then μR(𝔪)=dimk(𝔪/𝔪2)\mu_R(\mathfrak m)=\dim_k(\mathfrak m/\mathfrak m^2), the embedding dimension. This corollary supplies the tool needed to assess the number of ideal generators in Exercises 21.25–21.26, without providing solutions to those exercises.


Edition provenance. Translation and reader production: OpenAI Codex gpt-5.6-sol, Ultra. Sources, authors, and component licences are retained as stated in the metadata and the edition’s rights files.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0 for translated course text; Unit 21 contains no substantive reader media

Worksheet 21

Practice exercises

Exercise 21.1

Let

M M\subseteq\mathbb N

be a numerical monoid generated by relatively prime generators, and let K[M]K[M] be its monoid ring over a field KK. Write M+=M\{0}M_+=M\setminus\{0\} and let

R=K[M]𝔪 R=K[M]_{\mathfrak m}

be the localisation at the maximal ideal

𝔪=K[M+]=Tm|mM+. \mathfrak m=K[M_+] =\left\langle T^m\mathrel{\Big|}m\in M_+\right\rangle.

Show that RR is a discrete valuation ring only in the case M=M=\mathbb N.

Source correction note: In the last expression for 𝔪\mathfrak m, the source indexes the generators by all mMm\in M, which would include T0=1T^0=1 and give the entire ring. The index is corrected to mM+m\in M_+ to describe the intended ideal of positive monomials.

Exercise 21.2

Let RR be a discrete valuation ring with maximal ideal 𝔪=(p)\mathfrak m=(p). Show that the order function

ord:R\{0} \operatorname{ord}:R\setminus\{0\}\longrightarrow\mathbb N

has the following properties.

  1. For all f,gR\{0}f,g\in R\setminus\{0\},

    ord(fg)=ord(f)+ord(g). \operatorname{ord}(fg) =\operatorname{ord}(f)+\operatorname{ord}(g).

  2. For all f,gR\{0}f,g\in R\setminus\{0\} with f+g0f+g\ne0,

    ord(f+g)min{ord(f),ord(g)}. \operatorname{ord}(f+g) \geq\min\{\operatorname{ord}(f),\operatorname{ord}(g)\}.

  3. For every fR\{0}f\in R\setminus\{0\}, we have f𝔪f\in\mathfrak m if and only if ord(f)1\operatorname{ord}(f)\geq1.

  4. For every fR\{0}f\in R\setminus\{0\}, we have fR×f\in R^\times if and only if ord(f)=0\operatorname{ord}(f)=0.

Source correction note: The condition f+g0f+g\ne0 is added in part 2 because the stated domain of ord\operatorname{ord} does not contain 00.

Exercise 21.3 ★

Let RR be a discrete valuation ring with field of fractions QQ. Show that there is no proper intermediate ring between RR and QQ.

Exercise 21.4

Let RR be a discrete valuation ring with field of fractions QQ. Characterise the finitely generated RR-submodules of QQ. Into what form can a generating system be put?

Exercise 21.5

Let RR be a discrete valuation ring. For every qQ(R)\{0}q\in Q(R)\setminus\{0\}, define

ord(q) \operatorname{ord}(q)\in\mathbb Z

so that this definition agrees with the order of elements of RR and defines a group homomorphism

Q(R)\{0}. Q(R)\setminus\{0\}\longrightarrow\mathbb Z.

What is the kernel of this homomorphism?

Exercise 21.6

Let KK be a field with char(K)2\operatorname{char}(K)\ne2, and let

V=V(x2+y21)𝔸K2 V=V(x^2+y^2-1)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^2

be the unit circle over KK. Let P=(a,b)VP=(a,b)\in V be a point.

  1. Show that the local ring RR of VV at PP is a discrete valuation ring.

  2. Deduce that the coordinate ring

    K[X,Y]/(X2+Y21) K[X,Y]/(X^2+Y^2-1)

    is normal.

  3. For this part, assume in addition that 1-1 is not a square in KK. Show that

    K[X,Y]/(X2+Y21) K[X,Y]/(X^2+Y^2-1)

    is not a unique factorisation domain.

  4. Determine the orders of XX and Y1Y-1 in the local ring at (0,1)(0,1).

Source correction note: The source places no restriction on the characteristic and claims that the ring in part 3 is always nonfactorial. In characteristic 22, the curve equation is a square and the coordinate ring is nonreduced. If char(K)2\operatorname{char}(K)\ne2, the ring is factorial exactly when 1-1 is a square in KK; the statement above adds the minimal hypotheses making all four parts true. The source’s permission to assume KK algebraically closed is also removed because it conflicts with part 3.

Exercise 21.7

Let RR be a discrete valuation ring with maximal ideal 𝔪=(π)\mathfrak m=(\pi), and let K=R/(π)K=R/(\pi) be its residue field. Show that for every nn\in\mathbb N there is an RR-module isomorphism

(πn)/(πn+1)K. (\pi^n)/(\pi^{n+1})\longrightarrow K.

Exercise 21.8 ★

Let KK be a field and

ν:(K×,,1)(,+,0) \nu:(K^\times,\cdot,1)\longrightarrow(\mathbb Z,+,0)

a surjective group homomorphism satisfying

ν(f+g)min{ν(f),ν(g)} \nu(f+g)\geq\min\{\nu(f),\nu(g)\}

for all f,gK×f,g\in K^\times with f+g0f+g\ne0. Show that

R={fK×ν(f)0}{0} R=\{f\in K^\times\mid\nu(f)\geq0\}\cup\{0\}

is a discrete valuation ring.

Source correction note: The condition f+g0f+g\ne0 is added because ν\nu is defined only on K×K^\times.

Exercise 21.9

Let f[X]f\in\mathbb C[X] with f0f\ne0 and aa\in\mathbb C. Show that the following three “orders” of ff at aa coincide.

  1. The order of vanishing of ff at aa, namely the least order of a derivative satisfying

    f(k)(a)0. f^{(k)}(a)\ne0.

  2. The exponent of the linear factor XaX-a in the factorisation of ff into irreducible polynomials.

  3. The order of ff in the localisation [X](Xa)\mathbb C[X]_{(X-a)} of [X]\mathbb C[X] at the maximal ideal (Xa)(X-a).

The preceding exercise can be extended to other base fields using formal differentiation. Let KK be a field and K[X]K[X] the polynomial ring over KK. For a polynomial

F=i=0naiXiK[X], F=\sum_{i=0}^n a_iX^i\in K[X],

the polynomial

F=nanXn1+(n1)an1Xn2++3a3X2+2a2X+a1 F'=na_nX^{n-1}+(n-1)a_{n-1}X^{n-2}+\cdots +3a_3X^2+2a_2X+a_1

is called the formal derivative of FF.

Exercise 21.10

Determine the formal derivative of

2X7+X6+2X5+X4+X3+X2+2(/(3))[X]. 2X^7+X^6+2X^5+X^4+X^3+X^2+2 \in(\mathbb Z/(3))[X].

Exercise 21.11

Let KK be a field and K[X]K[X] the polynomial ring over KK. Prove the following rules for formal differentiation FFF\mapsto F'.

  1. The derivative of a constant polynomial is 00.

  2. Differentiation is KK-linear.

  3. The product rule holds:

    (FG)=FG+FG. (FG)'=FG'+F'G.

Exercise 21.12

Let KK be a field, FK[X]F\in K[X], and let aKa\in K already be a root of FF. Show that aa is a multiple root of FF if and only if

F(a)=0, F'(a)=0,

where FF' denotes the formal derivative of FF.

Source correction note: The hypothesis F(a)=0F(a)=0 is added. Without it, F(a)=0F'(a)=0 can also hold when aa is not a root of FF at all.

Exercise 21.13

Let KK be a field of positive characteristic p>0p>0. Determine the set of all polynomials FK[T]F\in K[T] whose formal derivative satisfies F=0F'=0.

Exercise 21.14

Show that over a field KK of characteristic 00, the following identity holds for ini\leq n:

1i!(Xn)(i)=(ni)Xni. \frac{1}{i!}\left(X^n\right)^{(i)} =\binom ni X^{n-i}.

Exercise 21.15

Let KK be a field of characteristic 00, fK[X]f\in K[X] with f0f\ne0, and aKa\in K. Show that the following three “orders” of ff at aa coincide.

  1. The order of vanishing of ff at aa, namely the least order of a formal derivative satisfying

    f(k)(a)0. f^{(k)}(a)\ne0.

  2. The exponent of the linear factor XaX-a in the factorisation of ff.

  3. The order of ff in the localisation K[X](Xa)K[X]_{(X-a)} of K[X]K[X] at the maximal ideal (Xa)(X-a).

Use the following definition for the next exercises. Let RR be a commutative ring, 𝔞R\mathfrak a\subseteq R an ideal, and UVU\subseteq V a submodule of an RR-module VV. By 𝔞U\mathfrak aU we mean the submodule generated by all products

fvwith f𝔞 and vU. fv\quad\text{with }f\in\mathfrak a\text{ and }v\in U.

Exercise 21.16

Let 𝔞,𝔟R\mathfrak a,\mathfrak b\subseteq R be ideals in a commutative ring. Show that the ideal product 𝔞𝔟\mathfrak a\mathfrak b agrees with the product 𝔞𝔟\mathfrak a\mathfrak b formed from the ideal 𝔞\mathfrak a and the RR-submodule 𝔟R\mathfrak b\subseteq R according to the definition above.

Exercise 21.17

Let 𝔞,𝔟R\mathfrak a,\mathfrak b\subseteq R be ideals in a commutative ring and UVU\subseteq V a submodule of an RR-module VV. Show that

(𝔞𝔟)U=𝔞(𝔟U). (\mathfrak a\cdot\mathfrak b)\cdot U =\mathfrak a\cdot(\mathfrak b\cdot U).

Exercise 21.18

Let 𝔞,𝔟R\mathfrak a,\mathfrak b\subseteq R be ideals in a commutative ring and UVU\subseteq V a submodule of an RR-module VV. Show that

(𝔞+𝔟)U=𝔞U+𝔟U. (\mathfrak a+\mathfrak b)\cdot U =\mathfrak a\cdot U+\mathfrak b\cdot U.

Exercise 21.19

Let 𝔞R\mathfrak a\subseteq R be an ideal in a commutative ring and U,WVU,W\subseteq V submodules of an RR-module VV. Show that

𝔞(U+W)=𝔞U+𝔞W. \mathfrak a\cdot(U+W)=\mathfrak a\cdot U+\mathfrak a\cdot W.

Exercise 21.20

Let (R,𝔪)(R,\mathfrak m) be a Noetherian local ring and nn\in\mathbb N. Show that

𝔪n+1=𝔪n \mathfrak m^{n+1}=\mathfrak m^n

implies

𝔪n=0. \mathfrak m^n=0.

Source correction note: The quantification nn\in\mathbb N is added explicitly; the source uses nn without introducing it.

Exercise 21.21

Let (R,𝔪)(R,\mathfrak m) be a local integral domain that is not a field, and let QQ be its field of fractions. Show that

𝔪Q=Q. \mathfrak mQ=Q.

Exercises to submit

Exercise 21.22 (4 points)

Let KK be a field and K(T)K(T) the field of rational functions over KK. Find a discrete valuation ring

RK(T) R\subseteq K(T)

satisfying

Q(R)=K(T)andRK[T]=K. Q(R)=K(T) \qquad\text{and}\qquad R\cap K[T]=K.

Exercise 21.23 (4 points)

Let KK be a field. A power series in one variable over KK is a formal expression of the form

a0+a1T+a2T2+a3T3+,aiK. a_0+a_1T+a_2T^2+a_3T^3+\cdots, \qquad a_i\in K.

Thus there may be infinitely many nonzero coefficients aia_i. Define a ring structure on the set of all power series extending the ring structure on the polynomial ring in one variable. Show that this ring is a discrete valuation ring.

Exercise 21.24 (4 points)

Let RR be an integral domain with the following property: for any two elements f,gRf,g\in R, either ff divides gg or gg divides ff. Suppose that RR is Noetherian but not a field. Show that RR is a discrete valuation ring.

Exercise 21.25 (3 points)

Show that every ideal in

K[X,Y](X,Y)/(X2Y3) K[X,Y]_{(X,Y)}/(X^2-Y^3)

can be generated by at most two elements.

Exercise 21.26 (3 points)

Give an example of a plane monomial curve and an ideal in the associated local ring at its singularity that cannot be generated by two elements.


Edition provenance. Translation and reader production: OpenAI Codex gpt-5.6-sol, Ultra. Sources, authors, and component licences are retained as stated in the metadata and the edition’s rights files.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Public Solutions to Worksheet 21

At the frozen revision boundary, the source provides public solutions only for Exercises 21.3 and 21.8. Both are complete source bodies without wrapper transclusions. No additional solutions have been created for this edition.

Solution to Exercise 21.3

Let the maximal ideal of RR be

𝔪=(π). \mathfrak m=(\pi).

The field of fractions of RR is

Q(R)=Rπ, Q(R)=R_\pi,

and every nonzero element of this field has the form

uπn,uR×,n. u\pi^n, \qquad u\in R^\times,\quad n\in\mathbb Z.

Suppose

RTQ(R). R\subsetneq T\subseteq Q(R).

Since the first inclusion is strict, there is an element

uπnT u\pi^n\in T

with n<0n<0. Since uu is a unit in RTR\subseteq T, we also have πnT\pi^n\in T. Moreover, n10-n-1\geq0, so

π1=πn1πnT. \pi^{-1}=\pi^{-n-1}\pi^n\in T.

Thus RπTR_\pi\subseteq T. Together with TQ(R)=RπT\subseteq Q(R)=R_\pi, this gives

T=Q(R). T=Q(R).

Hence there is no proper intermediate ring between RR and its field of fractions.

Back to Exercise 21.3.

Solution to Exercise 21.8

First we show that RR is a subring of the field KK. By definition, 0R0\in R. Since ν\nu is a group homomorphism,

ν(1)=0, \nu(1)=0,

so 1R1\in R. For f,gRf,g\in R, closure under multiplication is immediate if either element is zero. If ff and gg are nonzero, then

ν(fg)=ν(f)+ν(g)0, \nu(fg)=\nu(f)+\nu(g)\geq0,

so fgRfg\in R. For addition, if either ff or gg is zero, or if f+g=0f+g=0, closure is again immediate. In the remaining case, f,g,f+gf,g,f+g are all nonzero and the hypothesis gives

ν(f+g)min{ν(f),ν(g)}0. \nu(f+g)\geq\min\{\nu(f),\nu(g)\}\geq0.

Thus f+gRf+g\in R. Moreover,

ν(1)+ν(1)=ν((1)2)=ν(1)=0, \nu(-1)+\nu(-1) =\nu((-1)^2) =\nu(1) =0,

so ν(1)=0\nu(-1)=0 and 1R-1\in R. Hence RR is also closed under negation and is a commutative ring.

Next we show that RR is local. Set

𝔪:={fK×ν(f)1}{0}R. \mathfrak m := \{f\in K^\times\mid \nu(f)\geq1\}\cup\{0\} \subseteq R.

This set contains 00. For f,g𝔪f,g\in\mathfrak m, the cases involving zero or satisfying f+g=0f+g=0 are immediate. Otherwise,

ν(f+g)min{ν(f),ν(g)}1, \nu(f+g)\geq\min\{\nu(f),\nu(g)\}\geq1,

so f+g𝔪f+g\in\mathfrak m. For f𝔪f\in\mathfrak m and gRg\in R, the cases f=0f=0 or g=0g=0 are also immediate. If both are nonzero, then

ν(gf)=ν(g)+ν(f)1, \nu(gf)=\nu(g)+\nu(f)\geq1,

so gf𝔪gf\in\mathfrak m. Thus 𝔪\mathfrak m is an ideal.

The complement R\𝔪R\setminus\mathfrak m consists exactly of the elements hK×h\in K^\times with

ν(h)=0. \nu(h)=0.

For such an element,

ν(h1)=ν(h)=0, \nu(h^{-1})=-\nu(h)=0,

so h1Rh^{-1}\in R. Thus every element of R\𝔪R\setminus\mathfrak m is a unit. Consequently 𝔪\mathfrak m is the unique maximal ideal and RR is local.

It remains to show that RR is a discrete valuation ring. Since ν\nu is surjective, there is a pK×p\in K^\times with

ν(p)=1. \nu(p)=1.

In particular, pRp\in R. We show that pp is prime. For nonzero elements x,yRx,y\in R, the element yy is a multiple of xx exactly when

ν(y)ν(x), \nu(y)\geq\nu(x),

since this condition is equivalent to y/xRy/x\in R. Now suppose that pxyp\mid xy for x,yRx,y\in R. If xy=0xy=0, one factor is zero and is certainly a multiple of pp. If xy0xy\ne0, then

1=ν(p)ν(xy)=ν(x)+ν(y). 1=\nu(p)\leq\nu(xy)=\nu(x)+\nu(y).

Since ν(x)\nu(x) and ν(y)\nu(y) are nonnegative integers, either ν(x)1\nu(x)\geq1 or ν(y)1\nu(y)\geq1. By the divisibility criterion above, pp divides either xx or yy. Thus pp is prime.

By the same argument, every nonzero element xRx\in R with

n=ν(x) n=\nu(x)

is associated to pnp^n. Indeed, ν(x/pn)=0\nu(x/p^n)=0, so x/pnx/p^n is a unit in RR. Thus RR is a principal ideal domain whose ideals are exactly 00 and

(pn),n. (p^n), \qquad n\in\mathbb N.

Hence RR is a discrete valuation ring.

Edition note: the source defines ν\nu only on K×K^\times but states the inequality for ν(f+g)\nu(f+g) without the condition f+g0f+g\ne0. Since ν(0)\nu(0) is undefined, this edition uses the inequality only when f+g0f+g\ne0 and handles zero sums separately; it does not extend ν\nu to 00.

Back to Exercise 21.8.


Edition provenance. Translation and reader production: OpenAI Codex gpt-5.6-sol, Ultra. Sources, authors, and component licences are retained as stated in the metadata and the edition’s rights files.

English Markdown source · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Lecture 22: Embedding Dimension and Smooth and Singular Points

Embedding dimension

Definition: embedding dimension

Let RR be a Noetherian local commutative ring with maximal ideal 𝔪\mathfrak m. The minimum number of generators of the ideal 𝔪\mathfrak m is called the embedding dimension of RR, written

embdim(R). \operatorname{embdim}(R).

A Noetherian local integral domain of dimension one—that is, whose only prime ideals are the zero ideal and the maximal ideal—is a discrete valuation ring if and only if its embedding dimension is 11, by Theorem 21.8. The embedding dimension is always at least as large as the dimension of a local ring. Rings for which equality holds play a special role and are called regular rings. We have already encountered embedding dimension for monomial curves and must show that the definition given there (Definition 18.6) agrees with this new one.

We first prove another characterisation, which follows from Nakayama’s lemma.

Lemma: module generators and generators modulo 𝔪\mathfrak m

Let (R,𝔪,K)(R,\mathfrak m,K) be a local ring and VV a finitely generated RR-module. Then the minimum number of generators

μ(V) \mu(V)

equals the dimension of the KK-vector space

V/𝔪V. V/\mathfrak mV.

Proof

We prove the slightly more general statement that elements

v1,,vnV v_1,\ldots,v_n\in V

generate VV as an RR-module if and only if their residue classes in V/𝔪VV/\mathfrak mV generate it over R/𝔪R/\mathfrak m. One direction is immediate. Thus let v1,,vnVv_1,\ldots,v_n\in V be elements whose classes modulo 𝔪\mathfrak m form a generating set. Let

UV U\subseteq V

be the RR-submodule generated by the viv_i. The hypothesis means that

V=U+𝔪V. V=U+\mathfrak mV.

Consider the quotient module V/UV/U. In it we have

(V/U)𝔪=V/U. (V/U)\mathfrak m=V/U.

Nakayama’s lemma gives

V/U=0, V/U=0,

and hence

V=U. V=U.

Corollary: embedding dimension as the dimension of the cotangent space

Let (R,𝔪,K)(R,\mathfrak m,K) be a Noetherian local ring. Its embedding dimension equals

μ(𝔪)=dimK(𝔪/𝔪2). \mu(\mathfrak m) = \dim_K\left(\mathfrak m/\mathfrak m^2\right).

Proof

This follows immediately from Nakayama’s lemma applied to the ideal 𝔪\mathfrak m and the finitely generated RR-module 𝔪\mathfrak m.

The RR-module

𝔪/𝔪2, \mathfrak m/\mathfrak m^2,

which occurs above and is a vector space over R/𝔪R/\mathfrak m, is also called the cotangent space of the local ring.

Lemma: the cotangent space before and after localisation

Let RR be a Noetherian commutative ring and 𝔫\mathfrak n a maximal ideal. Let

S=R𝔫 S=R_{\mathfrak n}

be the localisation at 𝔫\mathfrak n, with maximal ideal

𝔪=𝔫R𝔫. \mathfrak m=\mathfrak nR_{\mathfrak n}.

Then

𝔪/𝔪2𝔫/𝔫2. \mathfrak m/\mathfrak m^2 \cong \mathfrak n/\mathfrak n^2.

In particular, the embedding dimension of the localisation equals

dimR/𝔫(𝔫/𝔫2). \dim_{R/\mathfrak n}\left(\mathfrak n/\mathfrak n^2\right).

Proof

By Exercise 15.5,

R/𝔫R𝔫/𝔪, R/\mathfrak n \cong R_{\mathfrak n}/\mathfrak m,

so the residue fields agree; denote this common residue field by KK. The natural RR-module homomorphism

𝔫𝔪 \mathfrak n\longrightarrow\mathfrak m

induces a homomorphism of KK-vector spaces

𝔫/𝔫2𝔪/𝔪2. \mathfrak n/\mathfrak n^2 \longrightarrow \mathfrak m/\mathfrak m^2.

This map is surjective, since RR-module generators of 𝔫\mathfrak n map to R𝔫R_{\mathfrak n}-module generators of 𝔪\mathfrak m, whose classes modulo 𝔪2\mathfrak m^2 generate the KK-vector space.

To prove injectivity, take

f𝔫 f\in\mathfrak n

that maps to 00 on the right. This means that

f𝔪2 f\in\mathfrak m^2

in the localisation R𝔫R_{\mathfrak n}. There are therefore elements

g1,,gn𝔫,h1,,hn𝔫, g_1,\ldots,g_n\in\mathfrak n, \qquad h_1,\ldots,h_n\in\mathfrak n,

and elements

qi=aisiR𝔫,si𝔫,aiR, q_i=\frac{a_i}{s_i}\in R_{\mathfrak n}, \qquad s_i\notin\mathfrak n, \qquad a_i\in R,

such that

f=a1s1g1h1++ansngnhn. f=\frac{a_1}{s_1}g_1h_1+\cdots+\frac{a_n}{s_n}g_nh_n.

Translated back into RR, this means that there is an element

s𝔫 s\notin\mathfrak n

with

sf=b1g1h1++bngnhn sf=b_1g_1h_1+\cdots+b_ng_nh_n

for some biRb_i\in R. Since ss does not belong to the maximal ideal 𝔫\mathfrak n, there are rRr\in R and g𝔫g\in\mathfrak n such that

g+rs=1. g+rs=1.

Multiplying the preceding equation by rr, we obtain

(1g)f=r(b1g1h1++bngnhn), (1-g)f = r\left(b_1g_1h_1+\cdots+b_ng_nh_n\right),

or, equivalently,

f=r(b1g1h1++bngnhn)+gf. f = r\left(b_1g_1h_1+\cdots+b_ng_nh_n\right)+gf.

The right-hand side plainly belongs to 𝔫2\mathfrak n^2. Thus ff represents zero in 𝔫/𝔫2\mathfrak n/\mathfrak n^2, proving injectivity.

Lemma: equality of numerical and algebraic embedding dimension

Let KK be a field and MM a numerical monoid generated by coprime natural numbers. Let

R=K[M] R=K[M]

be the corresponding monoid ring, with maximal ideal

𝔫=(M+), \mathfrak n=(M_+),

and let R𝔫R_{\mathfrak n} be its localisation. Then the numerical embedding dimension of MM—or of K[M]K[M]—equals the embedding dimension of the local ring R𝔫R_{\mathfrak n}.

Proof

We have

𝔫=(M+)=mM+KTm \mathfrak n =(M_+) =\bigoplus_{m\in M_+}K\,T^m

and

𝔫2=(2M+)=m2M+KTm. \mathfrak n^2 =(2M_+) =\bigoplus_{m\in2M_+}K\,T^m.

The quotient space is therefore

𝔫/𝔫2=mM+\2M+KTm. \mathfrak n/\mathfrak n^2 = \bigoplus_{m\in M_+\setminus2M_+}K\,T^m.

Its KK-dimension equals the number of elements of M+\2M+M_+\setminus2M_+. By Corollary 18.13, M+\2M+M_+\setminus2M_+ is the minimal monoid generating set of MM. Thus this KK-dimension equals the numerical embedding dimension.

On the other hand, by Lemma 22.4, the KK-dimension of 𝔫/𝔫2\mathfrak n/\mathfrak n^2 equals the embedding dimension of the corresponding local ring R𝔫R_{\mathfrak n}.

Smooth and singular points

A black curve with a red point and a red tangent line touching the curve at that point

A tangent line to a curve. Work by Jacj on English Wikipedia; later versions uploaded by Oleg Alexandrov. Public domain; local file: authority/assets/Tangent_to_a_curve.svg.

Edition note — media credit. The source credit names AxelBoldt and CC BY-SA 3.0. The frozen Commons metadata for this file states public domain and records the Jacj/Oleg Alexandrov history; that Commons metadata governs the component credit in this edition.

Let KK be a field and

FK[X,Y],F0, F\in K[X,Y], \qquad F\ne0,

a polynomial without repeated factors. Since we are interested only in the corresponding curve, over an algebraically closed field this is no restriction, by Hilbert’s Nullstellensatz. For every point

(a,b)𝔸K2, (a,b)\in\mathbb A_K^2,

we may pass to the variables XaX-a and YbY-b. This shifts the point to the origin. Thus, when studying a polynomial’s behaviour at a point, we may always restrict attention to the origin.

Now let

P=(0,0). P=(0,0).

Write FF in terms of its homogeneous components as

F=Fd+Fd1++F1+F0, F=F_d+F_{d-1}+\cdots+F_1+F_0,

where FiF_i is homogeneous of degree ii. What can we read off from the individual homogeneous components? First, we immediately have

PV(F)F0=0. P\in V(F) \quad\Longleftrightarrow\quad F_0=0.

Substituting the coordinates of PP, namely (0,0)(0,0), into FF makes all the higher-degree components vanish, leaving only the constant component F0F_0. Since our main interest is the behaviour of a curve at one of its points, we shall often restrict attention to the situation

F0=0. F_0=0.

Which is the first nonzero homogeneous component FiF_i? What role does this index ii play, and what role do its linear factors play?

Suppose first that

F0=0andF1=aX+bY. F_0=0 \qquad\text{and}\qquad F_1=aX+bY.

This linear form, which may be zero, can also be characterised by partial derivatives:

FX(P)=aandFY(P)=b. \frac{\partial F}{\partial X}(P)=a \qquad\text{and}\qquad \frac{\partial F}{\partial Y}(P)=b.

Here and below, polynomials are differentiated formally. Thus

F1=0FX(P)=FY(P)=0. F_1=0 \quad\Longleftrightarrow\quad \frac{\partial F}{\partial X}(P) = \frac{\partial F}{\partial Y}(P) =0.

If this does not hold, it is natural to regard the line defined by

F1(X,Y)=0 F_1(X,Y)=0

as the tangent to the curve at PP. An initial indication is that in the linear case

F=F1, F=F_1,

the line should coincide with its tangent.

Definition: smooth and singular points

Let KK be a field and FK[X,Y]F\in K[X,Y] a nonzero polynomial. Let

PC=V(F)𝔸K2 P\in C=V(F)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^2

be a point on the corresponding affine plane curve. The point PP is called a smooth point of CC if

FX(P)0orFY(P)0. \frac{\partial F}{\partial X}(P)\ne0 \qquad\text{or}\qquad \frac{\partial F}{\partial Y}(P)\ne0.

Otherwise it is called singular.

The curve is called smooth if it is smooth at every one of its points.

Edition bridge 22.A — scope of the terminology. This lecture works with plane curves presented by a polynomial FF without repeated factors, as stipulated above. In this definition, “smooth” means the formal derivative criterion just stated for that presentation. The edition does not extend this to an unconditional identification with scheme-theoretic smoothness over arbitrary fields, particularly imperfect fields.

Definition: multiplicity and tangent lines

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and FK[X,Y]F\in K[X,Y] a nonzero polynomial. Let

PC=V(F)𝔸K2 P\in C=V(F)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^2

be a point on the corresponding affine plane curve, and suppose that PP is the origin after an affine change of coordinates by translation. Let

F=Fd+Fd1++Fm F=F_d+F_{d-1}+\cdots+F_m

be the homogeneous decomposition of FF, with

Fd0,Fm0,dm. F_d\ne0, \qquad F_m\ne0, \qquad d\geq m.

The number mm is called the multiplicity of the curve at PP. Let

Fm=G1Gm F_m=G_1\cdots G_m

be its decomposition into linear factors. Each line

V(Gi),i=1,,m, V(G_i), \qquad i=1,\ldots,m,

is called a tangent line to CC at PP. The multiplicity of GiG_i in FmF_m is also called the multiplicity of that tangent line.

Edition note — source correction. The source calls moving a general point PP to the origin a “linear transformation of variables”. Translation (X,Y)(Xa,Yb)(X,Y)\mapsto(X-a,Y-b) is an affine change of coordinates, not a linear transformation unless P=(0,0)P=(0,0). The edition uses the correct term without changing the homogeneous decomposition in the new coordinates.

The point is smooth if and only if its multiplicity is 11. In that case there is exactly one tangent line through the point, and its slope can be computed from the partial derivatives.

Three straight lines, coloured red, green, and blue, meeting at the point with coordinates zero, one

Lines intersecting at (0,1)(0,1). Cronholm144, public domain; local file: authority/assets/250px-3_equations_-5.JPG.

Example: several lines through the origin

Suppose that dd distinct lines

L1,,Ld L_1,\ldots,L_d

in the affine plane are given, all passing through the origin. Let

aiX+biY=0,i=1,,d, a_iX+b_iY=0, \qquad i=1,\ldots,d,

be their equations, which are determined only up to a scalar. Their union is described by the product

F=(a1X+b1Y)(adX+bdY). F=(a_1X+b_1Y)\cdots(a_dX+b_dY).

In particular,

F=Fd F=F_d

is homogeneous of degree dd. Here each linear factor defines a tangent line through the origin. The multiplicity is dd.

Example: the folium of Descartes

Portrait of René Descartes with shoulder-length hair, a white collar, and black clothing against a dark background

René Descartes (1596–1650). Portrait after Frans Hals; uploaded to Commons by Dedden; public domain; local file: authority/assets/250px-Frans_Hals_-_Portret_van_René_Descartes.jpg.

Green graph of the folium of Descartes with a loop in the first quadrant, a node at the origin, and a dashed blue asymptote

The folium of Descartes x3+y33xy=0x^3+y^3-3xy=0, with axes, grid, and asymptote. Georg-Johann, CC BY-SA 3.0; local file: authority/assets/Kartesisches-Blatt.svg.

Edition note — characteristic. The assumption char(K)3\operatorname{char}(K)\ne3 applies throughout this example. The source states it below when discussing the other points, but it is already needed for the multiplicity-two assertion at the origin: in characteristic 33, F2=0F_2=0 and F=(X+Y)3F=(X+Y)^3, contrary to the standing squarefree premise.

The folium of Descartes is described by the equation

F=X3+Y33XY=0. F=X^3+Y^3-3XY=0.

The number 33 is not essential here and can be replaced by any other nonzero number. The homogeneous components of the curve equation are

F3=X3+Y3 F_3=X^3+Y^3

and

F2=3XY. F_2=-3XY.

Thus the origin on the folium of Descartes has multiplicity two and is singular. Both the XX-axis and the YY-axis are tangent lines, each with multiplicity one. At every other point the curve is smooth, provided the base field does not have characteristic 33. From

FX=3X23Y=0andFY=3Y23X=0 \frac{\partial F}{\partial X}=3X^2-3Y=0 \qquad\text{and}\qquad \frac{\partial F}{\partial Y}=3Y^2-3X=0

we obtain

Y=X2andX=Y2, Y=X^2 \qquad\text{and}\qquad X=Y^2,

and hence also

Y=Y4, Y=Y^4,

and similarly for XX. Thus

Y=X=0, Y=X=0,

or XX and YY are both cube roots of unity: either both are 11, or they are the other two cube roots of unity, in either order. However, at these other common zeros of the partial derivatives, FF takes the value 1-1. These are therefore not points of the curve.

Remark: the tangent-line equation at a smooth point

At a smooth point

PC=V(F) P\in C=V(F)

of a plane algebraic curve, the multiplicity is

m=1. m=1.

If P=(0,0)P=(0,0), the linear term of the curve equation is

F1=uX+vY=0, F_1=uX+vY=0,

and

FX(P)=uandFY(P)=v, \frac{\partial F}{\partial X}(P)=u \qquad\text{and}\qquad \frac{\partial F}{\partial Y}(P)=v,

since the higher-degree homogeneous components of FF contribute nothing to the partial derivatives at the origin. Thus this linear equation is the tangent-line equation.

For an arbitrary smooth point

P=(a,b)C, P=(a,b)\in C,

the tangent-line equation can likewise be read off directly from the partial derivatives of FF at PP. The tangent line is given by

FX(P)(Xa)+FY(P)(Yb)=0. \frac{\partial F}{\partial X}(P)(X-a) + \frac{\partial F}{\partial Y}(P)(Y-b) =0.

Remark: the tangent map and the direction of the tangent line

Let FK[X,Y]F\in K[X,Y] have corresponding plane algebraic curve CC, and let

PC=V(F) P\in C=V(F)

be a smooth point of the curve. The map

F:𝔸K2𝔸K1 F:\mathbb A_K^2\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^1

and the point PP determine a linear tangent map, also called the total differential, between the corresponding tangent spaces:

TPF=(FX(P),FY(P)):TP𝔸K2𝔸K2TF(P)𝔸K1=T0𝔸K1𝔸K1,(s,t)FX(P)s+FY(P)t. \begin{aligned} T_PF = \left( \frac{\partial F}{\partial X}(P), \frac{\partial F}{\partial Y}(P) \right): T_P\mathbb A_K^2\cong\mathbb A_K^2 &\longrightarrow T_{F(P)}\mathbb A_K^1 =T_0\mathbb A_K^1 \cong\mathbb A_K^1,\\ (s,t) &\longmapsto \frac{\partial F}{\partial X}(P)s + \frac{\partial F}{\partial Y}(P)t. \end{aligned}

Since PP is smooth, this linear map is not the zero map. The direction of the tangent line to CC at PP is the kernel of this tangent map. When identifying the tangent plane at PP with the surrounding affine plane, we must identify PP with the origin: the tangent line must pass through that point, whereas the kernel specifies only a linear direction.

Two black curves—a circle and a curved branch—intersecting at two points, shown against grey coordinate axes

On an algebraic curve, intersection points of irreducible components are never smooth. The lecture source credits Michael Larsen; the Commons metadata records uploader Maksim and the licence CC BY-SA 3.0; local file: authority/assets/250px-Intersect3.png.

The following statement shows that an intersection point of two irreducible components can never be smooth.

Lemma: a smooth point lies on only one component

Let

C=V(F) C=V(F)

be a plane algebraic curve and

F=F1Fn F=F_1\cdots F_n

its decomposition into distinct prime factors. Let PCP\in C be a smooth point of the curve. Then PP lies on only one component

Ci=V(Fi) C_i=V(F_i)

of the curve.

Proof. See Exercise 22.9.

Corollary: a smooth connected curve is irreducible

Let

C𝔸K2 C\subseteq\mathbb A_K^2

be a smooth plane algebraic curve, connected in the Zariski topology, over an algebraically closed field KK. Then CC is irreducible.

Proof

By Lemma 22.12, the irreducible components of the curve are disjoint. They are then also its connected components. Thus there is only one irreducible component, so the curve is irreducible.


Edition provenance. Translation and reader production: OpenAI Codex gpt-5.6-sol, Ultra. Sources, authors, and component licences are preserved as stated in the metadata and the edition’s rights files.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0 for translated course text; reader media retain component-specific rights: Tangent_to_a_curve.svg, 3 equations -5.JPG, and the René Descartes portrait are public domain; Kartesisches-Blatt.svg and Intersect3.png are CC BY-SA 3.0; see authority/RIGHTS-unit-22.csv · Rights record: RIGHTS-unit-22.csv

Worksheet 22

Practice exercises

Exercise 22.1

Let RR be the local ring at the intersection of the three coordinate axes in three-dimensional space. Determine its embedding dimension.

Exercise 22.2

Give an example of a curve

C𝔸Kn C\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n

with points P1,P2,P3CP_1,P_2,P_3\in C whose embedding dimensions are respectively 1,2,31,2,3.

Exercise 22.3

Let H(X)K[X]H(X)\in K[X], F=YHF=Y-H, and let

C=V(F)𝔸K2 C=V(F)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^2

be the graph of HH, regarded as a plane algebraic curve. Let

P=(a,b)=(a,H(a)) P=(a,b)=(a,H(a))

be a point on this graph.

  1. Show that the multiplicity of CC at PP is 11.
  2. Show that the tangent to CC at PP agrees with the usual tangent to the graph at aa.

Exercise 22.4

Let KK be a field and let

F1,,FmK[X1,,X] F_1,\ldots,F_m\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_\ell]

and

G1,,GnK[X1,,Xm] G_1,\ldots,G_n\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_m]

be polynomials giving rise to polynomial maps

𝔸KF𝔸KmG𝔸Kn. \mathbb A_K^\ell\mathrel{\mathop{\longrightarrow}^{F}} \mathbb A_K^m\mathrel{\mathop{\longrightarrow}^{G}}\mathbb A_K^n.

Let J(F)PJ(F)_P and J(G)QJ(G)_Q be the Jacobian matrices defined by formal partial differentiation. Prove the formal chain rule

J(GF)P=J(G)F(P)J(F)P. J(G\circ F)_P=J(G)_{F(P)}\circ J(F)_P.

Exercise 22.5 ★

  1. Show that formal partial differentiation with respect to one variable in the polynomial ring K[X1,,Xn]K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] commutes with dehomogenisation with respect to another variable.
  2. Show that this does not hold when both operations concern the same variable.

Exercise 22.6 ★

Let

HK[X1,,Xn] H\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]

be a homogeneous polynomial of degree ee in the standard grading. Show that

eH=X1HX1++XnHXn. eH=X_1\frac{\partial H}{\partial X_1}+\cdots+ X_n\frac{\partial H}{\partial X_n}.

Exercise 22.7

Consider the curve given by

y=2x4+3x2x+1 y=2x^4+3x^2-x+1

with the point

P=(1,5). P=(1, 5).

Find a coordinate transformation taking PP to (0,0)(0,0) and the tangent at PP to the xx-axis.

Exercise 22.8

Let KK be a field and FK[X,Y]F\in K[X,Y] a nonconstant polynomial all of whose prime factors have multiplicity one. Let

C=V(F) C=V(F)

be the corresponding plane curve. Assume in addition that FF remains squarefree after extending scalars to an algebraic closure of KK. Show that CC has only finitely many singular points.

Edition note — correction to the source hypotheses: Requiring the prime factors of FF to have multiplicity one only in K[X,Y]K[X,Y] is insufficient when KK is imperfect. For example, in characteristic p>0p>0, a reduced polynomial in K[X,Y]K[X,Y] may become a ppth power after extending scalars, so that both partial derivatives vanish and its geometric singular locus has positive dimension. This edition states the precise condition needed in the argument: FF is geometrically reduced. This is automatic, for example, if KK is perfect and FF is squarefree.

Exercise 22.9 ★

Prove Lemma 22.12.

Diagram of a circle with a radius to the point of tangency and a tangent line perpendicular to that radius

Figure: A tangent to a circle at a point is perpendicular to the radius ending at that point. Work by Christophe Dang Ngoc Chan (Cdang), derivative SVG version by Hagman; CC BY-SA 3.0.

Exercise 22.10 ★

Show that the unit circle over a field of characteristic 2\ne2 is smooth, and determine the tangent-line equation at each of its points.

Exercise 22.11

Let KK be a field.

  1. Show that the graph of a polynomial FK[X]F\in K[X] is a smooth algebraic curve.
  2. Let F,GK[X]F,G\in K[X] be polynomials with no common zero. Show that the graph of the rational function F/GF/G is also a smooth algebraic curve.

Exercise 22.12 ★

Determine the singular points of the plane algebraic curve

V(2X3+3X2YY+2313)𝔸2. V\left(-2X^3+3X^2Y-Y+\frac{2}{3}\sqrt{\frac{1}{3}}\right) \subseteq\mathbb A_{\mathbb C}^2.

Exercise 22.13

For the trajectory computed in Example 8.5, determine the coordinates of the points where the curve is singular.

Exercise 22.14 ★

Determine the prime factorisation of the polynomial

X3+XY2[X,Y], X^3+XY^2\in\mathbb C[X,Y],

and determine the singularities of the corresponding affine curve, together with their multiplicities and tangent lines.

Exercise 22.15 ★

Determine the multiplicity and tangent lines at the origin (0,0)(0,0) of the plane algebraic curve

C=V(Y4+X3+3XY2+2X2Y)𝔸2. C=V\left(Y^4+X^3+3XY^2+2X^2Y\right) \subseteq\mathbb A_{\mathbb C}^2.

Exercise 22.16 ★

For the zero locus given by the polynomial

V3+U2V2UV+2U24U2V, V^3+U^2V-2UV+2U^2-4U-2V,

use partial derivatives to determine a singular point. Perform a coordinate transformation taking this point to the origin. Determine the multiplicity and tangent lines at that point.

Edition note — correction to the source’s scope: The exercise does not specify the base field, while the source solution divides by 22 and 33 and then factors using 3\sqrt3. To follow that solution, assume char(K){2,3}\operatorname{char}(K)\notin\{2,3\} and 3K\sqrt3\in K (for example, K=K=\mathbb R or \mathbb C). Over other fields, the point found can still be checked directly, but the factorisation and tangent multiplicities must be interpreted over the relevant base field; in characteristic 22, the tangent cone has one double tangent line.

Symmetric cardioid with a cusp on the left and a rounded lobe on the right

Figure: The cardioid with polar equation r=a(1+cosθ)r=a(1+\cos\theta) for a=1a=1. Work by D.328; CC BY-SA 3.0.

Exercise 22.17

Determine the singularities, including their multiplicities and tangent lines, of the cardioid given by

V((X2+Y2)22X(X2+Y2)Y2). V\left(\left(X^2+Y^2\right)^2 -2X\left(X^2+Y^2\right)-Y^2\right).

Exercise 22.18 ★

Consider the two real curves

V(X5X3+2XY+7Y29) V\left(X^5-X^3+2XY+7Y^2-9\right)

at (1,1)(1,1) and

V(X4+Y43X2Y2+5X+7Y) V\left(X^4+Y^4-3X^2Y^2+5X+7Y\right)

at the origin. Are these curves locally diffeomorphic to one another at the specified points?

Exercises for submission

Exercise 22.19 (3 points)

Let KK be a field of characteristic p0p\geq0. Characterise the polynomials FK[X,Y]F\in K[X,Y] satisfying each of the following three conditions:

  1. the first partial derivative is 00;
  2. the second partial derivative is 00;
  3. both partial derivatives are 00.

Exercise 22.20 (4 points)

For the curve

V(X3+Y33XY+1), V\left(X^3+Y^3-3XY+1\right),

determine its singular points over \mathbb R and over \mathbb C. In each case give the multiplicities and tangent lines.

Exercise 22.21 (3 points)

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and G,HK[X,Y]G,H\in K[X,Y] polynomials satisfying

G(P)=H(P)=0 G(P)=H(P)=0

at a specified point P𝔸K2P\in\mathbb A_K^2. Let F=GHF=GH. Show that every tangent to GG at PP and every tangent to HH at PP is also a tangent to FF at PP.

Exercise 22.22 (6 points)

Let KK be an algebraically closed field. Consider the curve

C=V(x3+5x2y6xy2x2xy+4y2). C=V\left(x^3+5x^2y-6xy^2-x^2-xy+4y^2\right).

  1. Determine the tangent lines at the origin.

  2. Show that

    P=(1,2) P=(1,2)

    is a point on the curve, and compute the tangent line or lines to CC at PP using derivatives.

  3. Transform the variables so that PP is the origin in the new variables, and determine the tangent line or lines at PP from the transformed curve equation.

Exercise 22.23 (4 points)

For the algebraic curve

C=V(9y4+10x2y2+x412y312x2y+4y2), C=V\left(9y^4+10x^2y^2+x^4-12y^3-12x^2y+4y^2\right),

determine its singularities together with their multiplicities and tangent lines.

Source hint: Compare Example 8.5.


Edition provenance. Translation and reader production: OpenAI Codex gpt-5.6-sol, Ultra. Sources, authors, and component licences are preserved as stated in the metadata and the edition’s rights files.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Public Solutions to Worksheet 22

At the frozen revision boundary, the source provides public solutions only to Exercises 22.5, 22.6, 22.9, 22.10, 22.12, 22.14, 22.15, 22.16, and 22.18. No additional solutions have been created for this edition. The solution to Exercise 22.9 transcludes a proof page; the text below translates the actual proof body from the frozen recursive transclusion closure.

Solution to Exercise 22.5

  1. Since both processes are linear, it suffices to consider a monomial

    X1ν1X2ν2X3ν3Xnνn, X_1^{\nu_1}X_2^{\nu_2}X_3^{\nu_3}\cdots X_n^{\nu_n},

    differentiating with respect to X1X_1 and dehomogenising with respect to X2X_2. Its partial derivative is

    ν1X1ν11X2ν2X3ν3Xnνn, \nu_1X_1^{\nu_1-1}X_2^{\nu_2}X_3^{\nu_3}\cdots X_n^{\nu_n},

    and dehomogenisation gives

    ν1X1ν11X3ν3Xnνn. \nu_1X_1^{\nu_1-1}X_3^{\nu_3}\cdots X_n^{\nu_n}.

    If we dehomogenise first, we obtain

    X1ν1X3ν3Xnνn, X_1^{\nu_1}X_3^{\nu_3}\cdots X_n^{\nu_n},

    whose partial derivative likewise gives

    ν1X1ν11X3ν3Xnνn. \nu_1X_1^{\nu_1-1}X_3^{\nu_3}\cdots X_n^{\nu_n}.

  2. Consider X1X_1. Differentiating with respect to X1X_1 gives 11, which is unchanged by dehomogenisation. If we first dehomogenise with respect to X1X_1, we obtain 11, whose derivative is 00.

Back to Exercise 22.5.

Solution to Exercise 22.6

Since partial differentiation and multiplication by a variable are linear, it suffices to prove the statement for a monomial. Thus let

H=X1ν1X2ν2Xnνn. H=X_1^{\nu_1}\cdot X_2^{\nu_2}\cdots X_n^{\nu_n}.

Then

X1HX1++XnHXn=ν1X1X1ν11X2ν2Xnνn+ν2X2X1ν1X2ν21Xnνn++νnXnX1ν1X2ν2Xnνn1=ν1X1ν1X2ν2Xnνn+ν2X1ν1X2ν2Xnνn++νnX1ν1X2ν2Xnνn=(ν1+ν2++νn)X1ν1X2ν2Xnνn. \begin{aligned} X_1\frac{\partial H}{\partial X_1}+\cdots+ X_n\frac{\partial H}{\partial X_n} &=\nu_1X_1\cdot X_1^{\nu_1-1}\cdot X_2^{\nu_2}\cdots X_n^{\nu_n} \\ &\quad+\nu_2X_2\cdot X_1^{\nu_1}\cdot X_2^{\nu_2-1}\cdots X_n^{\nu_n} +\cdots \\ &\quad+\nu_nX_n\cdot X_1^{\nu_1}\cdot X_2^{\nu_2}\cdots X_n^{\nu_n-1} \\ &=\nu_1X_1^{\nu_1}\cdot X_2^{\nu_2}\cdots X_n^{\nu_n} +\nu_2X_1^{\nu_1}\cdot X_2^{\nu_2}\cdots X_n^{\nu_n} +\cdots \\ &\quad+\nu_nX_1^{\nu_1}\cdot X_2^{\nu_2}\cdots X_n^{\nu_n} \\ &=(\nu_1+\nu_2+\cdots+\nu_n) X_1^{\nu_1}\cdot X_2^{\nu_2}\cdots X_n^{\nu_n}. \end{aligned}

This is the required statement, since the sum of the exponents is the degree of the monomial.

Back to Exercise 22.6.

Solution to Exercise 22.9

Since PP is a smooth point of the curve, we may assume without loss of generality that

FX(P)0. \frac{\partial F}{\partial X}(P)\neq0.

By the product rule,

FX(P)=(F1Fn)X(P)=k=1nF1(P)Fk1(P)FkX(P)Fk+1(P)Fn(P). \begin{aligned} \frac{\partial F}{\partial X}(P) &=\frac{\partial(F_1\cdots F_n)}{\partial X}(P) \\ &=\sum_{k=1}^n F_1(P)\cdots F_{k-1}(P)\cdot \frac{\partial F_k}{\partial X}(P)\cdot F_{k+1}(P)\cdots F_n(P). \end{aligned}

Now suppose that

PCiCj P\in C_i\cap C_j

for iji\neq j, that is,

Fi(P)=Fj(P)=0. F_i(P)=F_j(P)=0.

Every product in the sum above would then have a zero factor, so

FX(P)=0, \frac{\partial F}{\partial X}(P)=0,

contrary to the smoothness of PP.

Back to Exercise 22.9.

Solution to Exercise 22.10

The defining polynomial is

X2+Y21, X^2+Y^2-1,

and its partial derivatives are 2X2X and 2Y2Y. Since the characteristic is assumed not to be 22 and the origin is not on the circle, the curve is smooth. By the remark on the tangent-line equation at a smooth point in Lecture 22, at a point (a,b)(a,b) on the circle the tangent-line equation is

2a(Xa)+2b(Yb)=0. 2a(X-a)+2b(Y-b)=0.

After dividing by 22, this can be written as

aX+bYa2b2=aX+bY1=0. aX+bY-a^2-b^2=aX+bY-1=0.

Edition note — source correction. The source prints only the left-hand expressions while calling them “tangent-line equations”. This edition restores the equality to zero that makes them actual equations.

Back to Exercise 22.10.

Solution to Exercise 22.12

Let FF be the defining polynomial. Its partial derivatives are

FX=6X2+6XYandFY=3X21. \frac{\partial F}{\partial X}=-6X^2+6XY \quad\text{and}\quad \frac{\partial F}{\partial Y}=3X^2-1.

Set both polynomials equal to zero. The second equation gives x2=13x^2=\frac13, hence

x=±13. x=\pm\sqrt{\frac13}.

In the first equation we can factor out the nonzero factor 6X6X, so we must have x=yx=y. Thus

y=±13. y=\pm\sqrt{\frac13}.

For x=yx=y, the curve equation becomes

x3x+2313=0. x^3-x+\frac23\sqrt{\frac13}=0.

At x=13x=\sqrt{\frac13}, the left-hand side has value

131313+2313=0, \frac13\sqrt{\frac13}-\sqrt{\frac13} +\frac23\sqrt{\frac13}=0,

so

(13,13) \left(\sqrt{\frac13},\sqrt{\frac13}\right)

is a point on the curve. By contrast, at x=y=13x=y=-\sqrt{\frac13} we obtain

1313+13+2313=43130, -\frac13\sqrt{\frac13}+\sqrt{\frac13} +\frac23\sqrt{\frac13} =\frac43\sqrt{\frac13}\neq0,

so this is not a point on the curve. The curve’s only singularity is therefore

(13,13). \left(\sqrt{\frac13},\sqrt{\frac13}\right).

Back to Exercise 22.12.

Solution to Exercise 22.14

Clearly,

X(X+iY)(XiY) X(X+\mathrm iY)(X-\mathrm iY)

is a factorisation of the polynomial into prime factors. To determine the singular points, we examine the partial derivatives:

FX=3X2+Y2andFY=2XY. \frac{\partial F}{\partial X}=3X^2+Y^2 \quad\text{and}\quad \frac{\partial F}{\partial Y}=2XY.

These both vanish precisely when (x,y)=(0,0)(x,y)=(0,0). Since this point also satisfies the curve equation, it is the singular point of the curve. The defining polynomial is already homogeneous of degree 33, so the multiplicity is 33. The tangent lines are therefore given by

V(X),V(X+iY),V(XiY). V(X),\qquad V(X+\mathrm iY),\qquad V(X-\mathrm iY).

Back to Exercise 22.14.

Solution to Exercise 22.15

The multiplicity is the degree of the lowest-degree homogeneous component, namely 33. To determine the tangent lines, we must factor X3+3XY2+2X2YX^3+3XY^2+2X^2Y into linear factors. We have

X3+3XY2+2X2Y=X(X2+3Y2+2XY). X^3+3XY^2+2X^2Y=X(X^2+3Y^2+2XY).

Furthermore,

X2+3Y2+2XY=(X+Y)2Y2+3Y2=(X+Y)2+2Y2=(X+Y+2iY)(X+Y2iY). \begin{aligned} X^2+3Y^2+2XY &=(X+Y)^2-Y^2+3Y^2 \\ &=(X+Y)^2+2Y^2 \\ &=(X+Y+\sqrt2\,\mathrm iY)(X+Y-\sqrt2\,\mathrm iY). \end{aligned}

The tangent lines are thus

X=0 X=0

(the YY-axis), and

X=(1+2i)YandX=(1+2i)Y. X=-(1+\sqrt2\,\mathrm i)Y \quad\text{and}\quad X=(-1+\sqrt2\,\mathrm i)Y.

Back to Exercise 22.15.

Solution to Exercise 22.16

The following source computation uses the edition’s hypotheses in Exercise 22.16, namely char(K){2,3}\operatorname{char}(K)\notin\{2,3\} and 3K\sqrt3\in K.

Let

F=V3+U2V2UV+2U24U2V. F=V^3+U^2V-2UV+2U^2-4U-2V.

Then

FU=2UV2V+4U4andFV=3V2+U22U2. \frac{\partial F}{\partial U}=2UV-2V+4U-4 \quad\text{and}\quad \frac{\partial F}{\partial V}=3V^2+U^2-2U-2.

The first equation gives the following condition for a singular point:

V(U1)=2U+2,orV=2U+2U1, V(U-1)=-2U+2, \qquad\text{or}\qquad V=\frac{-2U+2}{U-1},

where the latter form requires U1U\neq1. We therefore first consider the case U=1U=1. The first partial derivative is then zero regardless of VV, while the second gives the condition

3V2+122=0,V2=1,V=±1. 3V^2+1-2-2=0, \qquad V^2=1, \qquad V=\pm1.

The curve equation gives

V3+V2V2V2=V33V2=0, V^3+V-2V-2V-2=V^3-3V-2=0,

which is satisfied by V=1V=-1. Therefore

P=(1,1) P=(1,-1)

is a singular point of the curve.

In the new variables X=U1X=U-1 and Y=V+1Y=V+1, the point PP becomes the origin. Substituting U=X+1U=X+1 and V=Y1V=Y-1 transforms the curve equation into

(Y1)3+(X+1)2(Y1)2(X+1)(Y1)+2(X+1)24(X+1)2(Y1)=Y33Y2+3Y1+(X2+2X+1)(Y1)2XY+2X2Y+2+2X2+4X+24X42Y+2=Y33Y2+3Y1+X2Y+2XY+YX22X12XY+2X2Y+2+2X2+4X+24X42Y+2=Y3+X2Y3Y2+X2. \begin{aligned} &(Y-1)^3+(X+1)^2(Y-1)-2(X+1)(Y-1) \\ &\qquad+2(X+1)^2-4(X+1)-2(Y-1) \\ &=Y^3-3Y^2+3Y-1+(X^2+2X+1)(Y-1) \\ &\qquad-2XY+2X-2Y+2+2X^2+4X+2-4X-4-2Y+2 \\ &=Y^3-3Y^2+3Y-1+X^2Y+2XY+Y-X^2-2X-1 \\ &\qquad-2XY+2X-2Y+2+2X^2+4X+2-4X-4-2Y+2 \\ &=Y^3+X^2Y-3Y^2+X^2. \end{aligned}

Thus the lowest-degree homogeneous component is

X23Y2=(X3Y)(X+3Y). X^2-3Y^2=(X-\sqrt3Y)(X+\sqrt3Y).

The multiplicity is therefore two, and the two tangent lines through the singular point are described by

X=±3Y. X=\pm\sqrt3Y.

Back to Exercise 22.16.

Solution to Exercise 22.18

The partial derivative of the first polynomial with respect to XX is

5X43X2+2Y, 5X^4-3X^2+2Y,

whose value at the specified point is

40. 4\neq0.

The partial derivative of the second polynomial with respect to XX is

4X36XY2+5, 4X^3-6XY^2+5,

whose value at the specified point is

50. 5\neq0.

Both curves are therefore smooth at these points. By the implicit function theorem, each is locally diffeomorphic to an open real interval, so they are locally diffeomorphic to one another.

Back to Exercise 22.18.


Edition provenance. Translation and reader production: OpenAI Codex gpt-5.6-sol, Ultra. Sources, authors, and component licences are preserved as stated in the metadata and the edition’s rights files.

English Markdown source · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Lecture 23: Cotangent Spaces and Hilbert–Samuel Multiplicity

Interpretation as a cotangent space

We give another indication that calling 𝔪/𝔪2\mathfrak m/\mathfrak m^2 the cotangent space is well justified. From analysis, we know that for a point PMP\in M on a manifold MM and a differentiable function f:Mf:M\longrightarrow\mathbb R, the differential

df:TPM df:T_PM\longrightarrow\mathbb R

is linear (see Lemma 9.10 (Differential Geometry (Osnabrück 2023)), part (3)). Thus dfdf is an element of the cotangent space TP*MT_P^*M. The overall assignment

C1(M,)TP*M,fdf, C^1(M,\mathbb R)\longrightarrow T_P^*M, \qquad f\longmapsto df,

is a derivation: it satisfies the Leibniz rule

d(fg)=fdg+gdf. d(fg)=f\,dg+g\,df.

We now introduce the general algebraic concept.

Definition: algebraic derivation

Let RR be a commutative ring, AA a commutative RR-algebra, and MM an AA-module. An RR-linear map

δ:AM \delta:A\longrightarrow M

is called an RR-derivation with values in MM if

δ(ab)=aδ(b)+bδ(a) \delta(ab)=a\delta(b)+b\delta(a)

for all a,bAa,b\in A.

Theorem: the canonical derivation into the cotangent space

Let KK be a field, RR a KK-algebra of finite type, and

PKSpek(R) P\in K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R)

a point with corresponding maximal ideal 𝔪\mathfrak m. Then the map

d:R𝔪/𝔪2,fdf:=ff(P)¯ \begin{aligned} d:R&\longrightarrow\mathfrak m/\mathfrak m^2,\\ f&\longmapsto d f:=\overline{f-f(P)} \end{aligned}

is a KK-derivation.

Proof

There is a canonical isomorphism KR/𝔪K\longrightarrow R/\mathfrak m between the base field and the residue field. The map dd is well defined because

(ff(P))(P)=0, (f-f(P))(P)=0,

so ff(P)𝔪f-f(P)\in\mathfrak m. Its KK-linearity is immediate. For the product rule, all the following equalities are understood in 𝔪/𝔪2\mathfrak m/\mathfrak m^2:

d(fg)=fg(fg)(P)¯=fgf(P)g(P)¯=fgf(P)g(P)+(ff(P))(gg(P))¯=2fgfg(P)gf(P)¯=f(gg(P))+g(ff(P))¯=fdg+gdf. \begin{aligned} d(fg) &=\overline{fg-(fg)(P)}\\ &=\overline{fg-f(P)g(P)}\\ &=\overline{fg-f(P)g(P)+(f-f(P))(g-g(P))}\\ &=\overline{2fg-f\cdot g(P)-g\cdot f(P)}\\ &=\overline{f(g-g(P))+g(f-f(P))}\\ &=f\,dg+g\,df. \end{aligned}

In the third step we add an element of 𝔪2\mathfrak m^2, whose class in the quotient is zero. This proves the Leibniz rule. \square

Edition note – clarification of the source notation: The source writes the chain above without a residue-class bar on each term. These are equalities modulo 𝔪2\mathfrak m^2, not polynomial equalities in RR.

Smooth points and normal points

We shall show that a point on a plane algebraic curve is smooth precisely when the corresponding local ring is a discrete valuation ring. Smoothness at a point was initially defined extrinsically, with reference to the ambient plane, whereas being a discrete valuation ring depends only on the curve’s coordinate ring. The following lemma handles one direction. For the other, we must first develop an intrinsic multiplicity for a local ring.

Lemma: smooth points give discrete valuation rings

Let KK be a field, FK[X,Y]F\in K[X,Y] a nonzero polynomial without repeated factors, and

PC=V(F) P\in C=V(F)

a smooth point of the curve. If RR is the local ring of the curve at PP, then RR is a discrete valuation ring.

Proof

First, RR is a Noetherian local ring and, by Lemma 22.12, an integral domain. Its only prime ideals are therefore the zero ideal and the maximal ideal 𝔪P\mathfrak m_P. We shall show that this maximal ideal is principal.

We may assume that PP is the origin and write

F=Fd++F1,F10, F=F_d+\cdots+F_1, \qquad F_1\ne0,

where each FiF_i is homogeneous of degree ii. Since PP is smooth, this form has a nonzero linear term. A linear change of variables allows us to arrange that F1=YF_1=Y. Collect all the pure powers of XX, that is, the monomials not involving YY, and factor YY out of the remaining terms. The equation F=0F=0 can then be written as

Y(1+G)=XH(X),G(X,Y). Y(1+G)=XH(X), \qquad G\in(X,Y).

The element 1+G1+G is a unit in K[X,Y](X,Y)K[X,Y]_{(X,Y)}, and hence also in the local ring of the curve at the origin,

R=K[X,Y](X,Y)/(F). R=K[X,Y]_{(X,Y)}/(F).

In RR we have

Y=H1+GX. Y=\frac{H}{1+G}X.

Thus the maximal ideal of RR is generated by XX alone. By Theorem 21.8, RR is a discrete valuation ring. \square

Hilbert–Samuel multiplicity

Lemma: quotients by powers of the maximal ideal are finite-dimensional

Let RR be a Noetherian local ring with maximal ideal 𝔪\mathfrak m and residue field

K=R/𝔪. K=R/\mathfrak m.

Then the quotient modules 𝔪n/𝔪n+1\mathfrak m^n/\mathfrak m^{n+1} are finite-dimensional over KK. If RR contains a field KK mapping isomorphically onto the residue field, the quotient rings R/𝔪nR/\mathfrak m^n are also finite-dimensional over KK.

Proof

We write

𝔪n/𝔪n+1𝔪n/(𝔪n)𝔪. \mathfrak m^n/\mathfrak m^{n+1} \cong \mathfrak m^n/(\mathfrak m^n)\mathfrak m.

This is the situation of Lemma 22.2. Since 𝔪n\mathfrak m^n is a finitely generated ideal, the quotient module is finite-dimensional over the residue field.

For the quotient rings, consider the short exact sequence of RR-modules

0𝔪n/𝔪n+1R/𝔪n+1R/𝔪n0. 0\longrightarrow \mathfrak m^n/\mathfrak m^{n+1} \longrightarrow R/\mathfrak m^{n+1} \longrightarrow R/\mathfrak m^n \longrightarrow0.

Under the additional hypothesis, this is also a short exact sequence of KK-vector spaces, so their dimensions add. The space on the left is finite-dimensional by the part just proved. Induction on nn now gives the desired result, with initial case R/𝔪=KR/\mathfrak m=K. \square

For a plane algebraic curve

V=V(F)𝔸K2 V=V(F)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^2

and a point P=(a,b)VP=(a,b)\in V, the local ring is

K[X,Y](Xa,Yb)/(F). K[X,Y]_{(X-a,Y-b)}/(F).

Its residue field is KK itself. Thus all the hypotheses of Lemma 23.4 hold, and all the following dimensions are over the base field.

Theorem: multiplicity via the Hilbert–Samuel function

Let

PV=V(F)𝔸K2 P\in V=V(F)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^2

be a point on an affine plane curve. Let

R=𝒪V,P R=\mathcal O_{V,P}

be its local ring, with maximal ideal 𝔪\mathfrak m. Then the multiplicity mPm_P of PP satisfies

mP=dimK(𝔪n/𝔪n+1) m_P=\dim_K\left(\mathfrak m^n/\mathfrak m^{n+1}\right)

for all sufficiently large nn.

Proof

Consider the short exact sequence of KK-vector spaces

0𝔪n/𝔪n+1R/𝔪n+1R/𝔪n0. 0\longrightarrow \mathfrak m^n/\mathfrak m^{n+1} \longrightarrow R/\mathfrak m^{n+1} \longrightarrow R/\mathfrak m^n \longrightarrow0.

By Lemma 23.4, all dimensions are finite. The assertion that the dimension of 𝔪n/𝔪n+1\mathfrak m^n/\mathfrak m^{n+1} is eventually constant and equal to the multiplicity is equivalent to the assertion that the difference

dimK(R/𝔪n+1)dimK(R/𝔪n) \dim_K(R/\mathfrak m^{n+1})-\dim_K(R/\mathfrak m^n)

is eventually constant and equal to the multiplicity. By induction, this is equivalent to the existence of a constant cc such that

dimK(R/𝔪n)=mPn+c \dim_K(R/\mathfrak m^n)=m_Pn+c

for sufficiently large nn.

After a translation, we may assume that PP is the origin. Set

𝔞=(X,Y)S=K[X,Y]. \mathfrak a=(X,Y)\subseteq S=K[X,Y].

Then

K[X,Y]/(𝔞n+(F))=R/𝔪n, K[X,Y]/(\mathfrak a^n+(F))=R/\mathfrak m^n,

so it suffices to prove the statement for the quotient on the left. By hypothesis, FF has the form

F=Fm+Fm+1+,m=mP, F=F_m+F_{m+1}+\cdots, \qquad m=m_P,

and in particular F𝔞mF\in\mathfrak a^m. If G𝔞nmG\in\mathfrak a^{n-m} with nmn\ge m, then GF𝔞nGF\in\mathfrak a^n. There is therefore a short exact sequence

0S/𝔞nmFS/𝔞nS/(𝔞n,F)=R/𝔪n0. 0\longrightarrow S/\mathfrak a^{n-m} \xrightarrow{\,\cdot F\,} S/\mathfrak a^n \longrightarrow S/(\mathfrak a^n,F)=R/\mathfrak m^n \longrightarrow0.

Injectivity on the left follows from a direct degree argument; see Exercise 23.4. We know that

dimK(S/𝔞n)=n(n+1)2. \dim_K(S/\mathfrak a^n)=\frac{n(n+1)}2.

Hence, for nmn\ge m,

dimK(R/𝔪n)=n(n+1)2(nm)(nm+1)2=n2+n(nm)2n+m2=2nmm2+m2=mnm(m1)2. \begin{aligned} \dim_K(R/\mathfrak m^n) &=\frac{n(n+1)}2-\frac{(n-m)(n-m+1)}2\\ &=\frac{n^2+n-(n-m)^2-n+m}{2}\\ &=\frac{2nm-m^2+m}{2}\\ &=mn-\frac{m(m-1)}2. \end{aligned}

This is the required linear form. \square

Remark: multiplicity as an intrinsic invariant

Theorem 23.5 says in particular that the multiplicity of a point on a plane curve is an invariant of the local ring of the curve at that point. It therefore depends only on intrinsic properties of the curve, not on its realisation in an ambient plane.

Every Noetherian local ring has a Hilbert–Samuel multiplicity, defined in terms of the dimensions over R/𝔪R/\mathfrak m of the quotient modules 𝔪n/𝔪n+1\mathfrak m^n/\mathfrak m^{n+1}. In the one-dimensional case it is

limndimR/𝔪(𝔪n/𝔪n+1), \lim_{n\to\infty} \dim_{R/\mathfrak m} \left(\mathfrak m^n/\mathfrak m^{n+1}\right),

since this function eventually becomes constant—a nontrivial fact. If RR contains a field KK isomorphic to its residue field, as is the case for the local rings of curves considered here, the same number is also given by

limndimK(R/𝔪n)n. \lim_{n\to\infty} \frac{\dim_K(R/\mathfrak m^n)}{n}.

Theorem: smoothness, multiplicity, discrete valuation, and normality

Let KK be a field and FK[X,Y]F\in K[X,Y] a nonconstant polynomial without repeated factors, with corresponding algebraic curve

C=V(F). C=V(F).

Let P=(a,b)CP=(a,b)\in C, with maximal ideal

𝔪=(Xa,Yb) \mathfrak m=(X-a,Y-b)

and local ring

R=K[X,Y]𝔪/(F). R=K[X,Y]_{\mathfrak m}/(F).

The following statements are equivalent.

  1. PP is a smooth point of the curve.
  2. The multiplicity of PP is one.
  3. RR is a discrete valuation ring.
  4. RR is a normal integral domain.

Proof

The equivalence (1) \Leftrightarrow (2) follows from Definition 22.7 of multiplicity. The equivalence (3) \Leftrightarrow (4) was proved in Theorem 21.8, and the implication (1) \Rightarrow (3) in Lemma 23.3. It remains to prove (3) \Rightarrow (2); by Theorem 23.5 we may work with Hilbert–Samuel multiplicity.

It suffices to show that, for the local ring of a plane curve that is a discrete valuation ring, all the quotient modules

𝔪n/𝔪n+1𝔪n/𝔪n𝔪 \mathfrak m^n/\mathfrak m^{n+1} \cong \mathfrak m^n/\mathfrak m^n\mathfrak m

are one-dimensional over the residue field R/𝔪KR/\mathfrak m\cong K. Since 𝔪n=(πn)\mathfrak m^n=(\pi^n), this follows immediately from Nakayama’s lemma. \square

Monomial curves and multiplicity

Let MM\subseteq\mathbb N be a numerical monoid generated by coprime natural numbers

e1<e2<<er. e_1<e_2<\cdots<e_r.

The least generator e1e_1 is also called the numerical multiplicity of MM. We shall show that this does indeed give the correct ring-theoretic multiplicity. Set

M+={mMm1} M_+=\{m\in M\mid m\ge1\}

and, for n1n\ge1,

nM+={mM|m=m1++mn for some miM+}. nM_+= \left\{ m\in M\ \middle|\ m=m_1+\cdots+m_n\text{ for some }m_i\in M_+ \right\}.

Both are monoid ideals of MM. Thus the monomial spaces

K[nM+]=mnM+KTm K[nM_+]=\bigoplus_{m\in nM_+}KT^m

are ideals in the monoid ring. In particular,

𝔪=K[M+] \mathfrak m=K[M_+]

is a maximal ideal, and its powers are

𝔪n=K[nM+]. \mathfrak m^n=K[nM_+].

Lemma: bounds for monoid difference sets

Let MM\subseteq\mathbb N be a numerical monoid of numerical multiplicity e1e_1. Choose 1\ell\ge1 such that M\mathbb N_{\ge\ell}\subseteq M. Then, for each n1n\ge1,

ne1#(M\nM+)(n1)e1+. ne_1-\ell \le \#(M\setminus nM_+) \le (n-1)e_1+\ell.

Proof

The lower bound follows from the fact that the smallest number in nM+nM_+ is ne1ne_1. Thus 0,1,,ne110,1,\ldots,ne_1-1 lie outside it. All numbers at least \ell belong to MM, so at least ne1ne_1-\ell of these ne1ne_1 numbers belong to MM but not to nM+nM_+.

For the upper bound, we claim that every number at least (n1)e1+(n-1)e_1+\ell belongs to nM+nM_+. Let

x(n1)e1+. x\ge(n-1)e_1+\ell.

Write

x=(n1)e1+,. x=(n-1)e_1+\ell', \qquad \ell'\ge\ell.

Since M+\ell'\in M_+, the right-hand side is a sum of nn elements of M+M_+: n1n-1 summands equal to e1e_1 and one equal to \ell'. Thus xnM+x\in nM_+, proving the upper bound. \square

Edition note – correction to the source’s bound: The source describes \ell only as “a number” and says in the final step that the summands belong to MM. The hypothesis 1\ell\ge1, which can always be achieved by increasing the threshold, ensures that all nn summands really lie in M+M_+, as required by the definition of nM+nM_+. The source also leaves the range of nn implicit. Here n1n\ge1: the displayed definition by sums of positive elements does not give the zeroth ideal power when n=0n=0.

Corollary: numerical multiplicity equals Hilbert–Samuel multiplicity

Let MM\subseteq\mathbb N be a numerical monoid generated by coprime numbers, with numerical multiplicity e1e_1. Let

𝔪=K[M+] \mathfrak m=K[M_+]

be the maximal ideal of the monoid ring K[M]K[M] corresponding to the origin. Then

limndimK(K[M]/𝔪n)n=e1. \lim_{n\to\infty} \frac{\dim_K\left(K[M]/\mathfrak m^n\right)}{n} =e_1.

In other words, numerical multiplicity equals Hilbert–Samuel multiplicity.

Proof

Since 𝔪n=K[nM+]\mathfrak m^n=K[nM_+], the quotient ring

K[M]/𝔪n=K[M]/K[nM+] K[M]/\mathfrak m^n =K[M]/K[nM_+]

has the monomials TmT^m with mM\nM+m\in M\setminus nM_+ as a basis over KK. Its dimension therefore equals #(M\nM+)\#(M\setminus nM_+). By the bounds in Lemma 23.8,

#(M\nM+)ne1. \frac{\#(M\setminus nM_+)}{n}\longrightarrow e_1.

The same convergence holds for these dimensions. \square

Edition note – clarification of the source notation: The source notation K[M]/(nM+)K[M]/(nM_+) means the quotient by the monomial ideal K[nM+]K[nM_+]; the parentheses do not denote scalar multiplication of a set by nn.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Worksheet 23

Practice exercises

Exercise 23.1

Let KK be a field, K[X1,,Xn]K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] the polynomial ring over KK, and

X1 \frac{\partial}{\partial X_1}

formal partial differentiation with respect to X1X_1, that is, the map

K[X1,,Xn]K[X1,,Xn],ffX1. \begin{aligned} K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]&\longrightarrow K[X_1,\ldots,X_n],\\ f&\longmapsto\frac{\partial f}{\partial X_1}. \end{aligned}

Show that this map is a KK-derivation.

Exercise 23.2

Consider the maximal ideal

𝔪=(X1,,Xn)K[X1,,Xn] \mathfrak m=(X_1,\ldots,X_n) \subseteq K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]

in the polynomial ring over a field KK, together with its powers 𝔪d\mathfrak m^d. Show that the monomials

X1ν1Xnνn,i=1nνi<d, X_1^{\nu_1}\cdots X_n^{\nu_n}, \qquad \sum_{i=1}^n\nu_i<d,

form a KK-basis of the quotient ring

K[X1,,Xn]/𝔪d. K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]/\mathfrak m^d.

Exercise 23.3

Consider the union of the coordinate axes

V(xy)𝔸K2 V(xy)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^2

and the local ring RR at the origin, with maximal ideal 𝔪\mathfrak m. Describe explicitly a KK-basis of the quotient rings R/𝔪nR/\mathfrak m^n and determine their dimensions.

Exercise 23.4 ★

Let

F=Fm++FdK[X,Y] F=F_m+\cdots+F_d\in K[X,Y]

be the homogeneous decomposition of a polynomial, with mdm\le d and Fm0F_m\ne0, and let 𝔪=(X,Y)\mathfrak m=(X,Y). Show that, for every nmn\ge m, the multiplication map

K[X,Y]K[X,Y],GFG \begin{aligned} K[X,Y]&\longrightarrow K[X,Y],\\ G&\longmapsto FG \end{aligned}

induces a well-defined injective homomorphism of K[X,Y]K[X,Y]-modules

K[X,Y]/𝔪nmK[X,Y]/𝔪n. K[X,Y]/\mathfrak m^{n-m} \longrightarrow K[X,Y]/\mathfrak m^n.

Edition note – clarification of the source hypothesis: Here FmF_m is the lowest nonzero homogeneous component. The source leaves Fm0F_m\ne0 implicit, but it is required for injectivity and is used in the source argument and the corrected solution below.

Exercise 23.5 ★

Let e+e\in\mathbb N_+ and

M:={0}e. M:=\{0\}\cup\mathbb N_{\ge e}\subseteq\mathbb N.

  1. Determine nM+nM_+ for n+n\in\mathbb N_+.

  2. Determine #(M\nM+)\#(M\setminus nM_+).

  3. Let KK be a field and set

    R=K[M]𝔪,𝔪=K[M+]K[M]. R=K[M]_{\mathfrak m}, \qquad \mathfrak m=K[M_+]\subseteq K[M].

    Determine dimK(R/𝔪n)\dim_K(R/\mathfrak m^n).

Exercise 23.6

For the numerical monoid MM\subseteq\mathbb N generated by 44 and 99, compute the quantities appearing in the bounds of Lemma 23.8 for n6n\le6.

Krull dimension

Some of the following exercises use the Krull dimension of a commutative ring. Since our main interest is in curves, which correspond to one-dimensional rings, we shall not develop a systematic dimension theory.

Definition: prime ideal chains and Krull dimension

Let RR be a commutative ring. A chain of prime ideals

𝔭0𝔭1𝔭n \mathfrak p_0 \subset \mathfrak p_1 \subset \cdots \subset \mathfrak p_n

is called a prime ideal chain of length nn. Thus we count the inclusions, not the prime ideals in the chain. The dimension, or Krull dimension, of RR is the supremum of all lengths of prime ideal chains, denoted by

dim(R). \dim(R).

Exercise 23.7

Let RR be a principal ideal domain that is not a field. Show that its Krull dimension is one.

Exercises for submission

Exercise 23.8 (4 points)

For the monoid MM\subseteq\mathbb N generated by 5,8,115,8,11, compute the quantities appearing in the bounds of Lemma 23.8 for n5n\le5.

Exercise 23.9 (3 points)

Let 𝔞R\mathfrak a\subseteq R be an ideal in a commutative ring, and suppose that the only prime ideal containing 𝔞\mathfrak a is a maximal ideal 𝔪\mathfrak m. Show that

R/𝔞R𝔪/𝔞R𝔪. R/\mathfrak a \cong R_{\mathfrak m}/\mathfrak aR_{\mathfrak m}.

Deduce that, for a maximal ideal 𝔪\mathfrak m in a Noetherian commutative ring, there is an isomorphism

R/𝔪nR𝔪/𝔪nR𝔪 R/\mathfrak m^n \cong R_{\mathfrak m}/\mathfrak m^nR_{\mathfrak m}

for every nn.

Exercise 23.10 (5 points)

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and R=K[X,Y]R=K[X,Y] the polynomial ring in two variables. Show that RR has Krull dimension two.

Exercise 23.11 (5 points)

Let RR be a Noetherian commutative ring. Show that the following statements are equivalent.

  1. RR has Krull dimension 00.

  2. RR is an Artinian ring.

  3. RR has finitely many prime ideals, all of which are maximal.

  4. There is nn\in\mathbb N such that

    (𝔪R𝔪)n=0 (\mathfrak mR_{\mathfrak m})^n=0

    for every maximal ideal 𝔪\mathfrak m.

  5. The reduction Rred=R/(0)R_{\mathrm{red}}=R/\sqrt{(0)} is a finite product of fields.

Edition note – correction to the source statement: In item (4), the source writes 𝔪n=0\mathfrak m^n=0 in RR for every maximal ideal. This is not equivalent to the other four items: for example, in R=K×KR=K\times K both maximal ideals are idempotent rather than nilpotent, although RR is zero-dimensional and Artinian. The edition replaces this with the uniform local formulation above, which correctly characterises zero-dimensional Noetherian rings. The “product” in item (5) is also explicitly stated to be finite, as forced by the Noetherian/Artinian condition.

Exercise 23.12 (3 points)

Let RR be a commutative ring of finite Krull dimension dd. Show that the Krull dimension of the polynomial ring R[X]R[X] is at least d+1d+1.

Source remark: Over a Noetherian base ring, passing to the polynomial ring increases the dimension by exactly one; this stronger result is harder to prove.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Public Solutions to Worksheet 23

At the frozen revision boundary, the source provides public solutions only to Exercises 23.4 and 23.5. No additional solutions have been created for this edition.

Solution to Exercise 23.4

Write S=K[X,Y]S=K[X,Y]. Since the lowest homogeneous term of FF has degree mm, we have F𝔪mF\in\mathfrak m^m. To prove well-definedness, let G𝔪nmG\in\mathfrak m^{n-m}. Then

FG𝔪m𝔪nm=𝔪n. FG\in\mathfrak m^m\mathfrak m^{n-m}=\mathfrak m^n.

Thus the SS-module map

SFSS/𝔪n S\xrightarrow{\,\cdot F\,}S \longrightarrow S/\mathfrak m^n

vanishes on 𝔪nm\mathfrak m^{n-m}. By the universal property of quotient modules, it induces an SS-module homomorphism

S/𝔪nmFS/𝔪n. S/\mathfrak m^{n-m} \xrightarrow{\,\cdot F\,} S/\mathfrak m^n.

To prove injectivity, suppose that the class of GG maps to zero, so that FG𝔪nFG\in\mathfrak m^n. Assume G𝔪nmG\notin\mathfrak m^{n-m}. If qq is the degree of the lowest nonzero homogeneous term GqG_q of GG, then

q<nm. q<n-m.

The lowest homogeneous term of FGFG is FmGqF_mG_q. Since K[X,Y]K[X,Y] is an integral domain and Fm,Gq0F_m,G_q\ne0, we have

FmGq0,deg(FmGq)=m+q<n. F_mG_q\ne0, \qquad \deg(F_mG_q)=m+q<n.

Hence FG𝔪nFG\notin\mathfrak m^n, a contradiction. Thus G𝔪nmG\in\mathfrak m^{n-m} and its class is zero. The induced homomorphism is injective. \square

Edition note – correction to the source solution: The source says that FGFG has a monomial of degree “less than mm”; the required bound is less than nn. The argument using the lowest homogeneous term FmGqF_mG_q above also rules out cancellation. Since multiplication by FF is generally not a ring homomorphism, the factorisation uses the universal property of quotient modules.

Back to Exercise 23.4

Solution to Exercise 23.5

  1. We claim that

    nM+=ne. nM_+=\mathbb N_{\ge ne}.

    Membership knM+k\in nM_+ means that there are m1,,mnM+=em_1,\ldots,m_n\in M_+=\mathbb N_{\ge e} with

    k=m1++mn. k=m_1+\cdots+m_n.

    Since mjem_j\ge e for every jj, we obtain knek\ge ne. Conversely, if knek\ge ne, then

    k=(n1)e+m,m:=k(n1)ee. k=(n-1)e+m, \qquad m:=k-(n-1)e\ge e.

    The right-hand side is a sum of nn elements of M+M_+, so knM+k\in nM_+.

  2. We obtain

    M\nM+=M\ne={0,e,e+1,,ne1}. M\setminus nM_+ =M\setminus\mathbb N_{\ge ne} =\{0,e,e+1,\ldots,ne-1\}.

    Therefore

    #(M\nM+)=nee+1=(n1)e+1. \#(M\setminus nM_+)=ne-e+1=(n-1)e+1.

  3. The ideal 𝔪n\mathfrak m^n is the monomial ideal K[nM+]K[nM_+]. Localisation does not change this finite-dimensional quotient, and there are isomorphisms of KK-vector spaces

    R/𝔪nK[M]/K[nM+]spanK{TmmM\nM+}. \begin{aligned} R/\mathfrak m^n &\cong K[M]/K[nM_+]\\ &\cong \operatorname{span}_K \{T^m\mid m\in M\setminus nM_+\}. \end{aligned}

    Hence

    dimK(R/𝔪n)=(n1)e+1. \dim_K(R/\mathfrak m^n)=(n-1)e+1.

Edition note – correction to the source solution: In the first part, the source writes njen_j\ge e after introducing m1,,mnm_1,\ldots,m_n; the correct notation is mjem_j\ge e. In the third part, the source notation identifies the quotient with K[M\nM+]K[M\setminus nM_+], as though the complement defined a monoid ring. The edition states the correct objects: the quotient by the monomial ideal K[nM+]K[nM_+] and the vector space with monomial basis indexed by its complement.

Back to Exercise 23.5

English Markdown source · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Lecture 24: Tangent Lines and Formal Power Series Rings

Tangent lines from parametrisations

Theorem 24.1: the derivative vector of a parametrisation

Let KK be an infinite field and

φ:𝔸K1𝔸Kn \varphi\colon \mathbb A_K^1\longrightarrow \mathbb A_K^n

a map given by nn polynomials in one variable,

φ=(φ1(t),,φn(t)), \varphi=\bigl(\varphi_1(t),\ldots,\varphi_n(t)\bigr),

whose image is contained in the curve

C=V(F1,,Fm). C=V(F_1,\ldots,F_m).

Take Q𝔸K1Q\in\mathbb A_K^1 and

P=φ(Q)C. P=\varphi(Q)\in C.

Then the derivative vector

(φ1t(Q),,φnt(Q)) \left( \frac{\partial\varphi_1}{\partial t}(Q),\ldots, \frac{\partial\varphi_n}{\partial t}(Q) \right)

lies in the kernel of the linear tangent map

(TF)P:𝔸Kn𝔸Km (TF)_P\colon\mathbb A_K^n\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^m

defined by the Jacobian matrix

(FiXj(P))ij. \left( \frac{\partial F_i}{\partial X_j}(P) \right)_{ij}.

If n=2n=2, the derivatives φ1(Q)\varphi_1'(Q) and φ2(Q)\varphi_2'(Q) do not both vanish, and PP is a smooth point of CC, then

(φ1t(Q),φ2t(Q)) \left( \frac{\partial\varphi_1}{\partial t}(Q), \frac{\partial\varphi_2}{\partial t}(Q) \right)

determines the direction of the tangent line to CC at PP.

Proof

Write F=(F1,,Fm)F=(F_1,\ldots,F_m). Since

φ(𝔸K1)V(F1,,Fm), \varphi\bigl(\mathbb A_K^1\bigr)\subseteq V(F_1,\ldots,F_m),

the composite FφF\circ\varphi is the constant map to the origin. Since KK is infinite, each component polynomial representing FiφF_i\circ\varphi is the zero polynomial. The formal chain rule for polynomials therefore gives

0=(T(Fφ))Q=(TF)P(Tφ)Q. 0=(T(F\circ\varphi))_Q=(TF)_P\circ(T\varphi)_Q.

Thus the image of (Tφ)Q(T\varphi)_Q, spanned by the derivative vector above, is contained in the kernel of (TF)P(TF)_P.

In the plane case stated in the final part of the theorem, choose a reduced defining polynomial HH for CC. The same chain-rule argument with HH in place of the tuple FF puts the derivative vector in ker(dHP)\ker(dH_P). This kernel is one-dimensional because PP is smooth. The image of (Tφ)Q(T\varphi)_Q is also one-dimensional because the derivative vector is nonzero. The inclusion is therefore an equality, so that vector determines the tangent direction. \square

Edition note — defining equations. The source treats the kernel of the original Jacobian as necessarily one-dimensional in the plane case. This requires equations generating the reduced curve’s ideal near PP; arbitrary equations with the same zero locus need not do so. For example, Y2=0Y^2=0 defines the line Y=0Y=0 set-theoretically but has zero differential on that line. The argument above uses a reduced equation for the final assertion; the initial chain-rule inclusion for all FiF_i is unchanged.

Example 24.2: why the field must be infinite

Let KK be a finite field with

q=pe q=p^e

elements, where pp is prime and e1e\geq1. The map

𝔸K1𝔸K2,t(tqt,tqt) \begin{aligned} \mathbb A_K^1&\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^2,\\ t&\longmapsto(t^q-t,t^q-t) \end{aligned}

sends every KK-rational point to the single image point (0,0)(0,0), since tq=tt^q=t for every tKt\in K. However, the formal derivative vector of this polynomial parametrisation is

(1,1). (-1,-1).

Thus a map on KK-rational points can be constant in positive characteristic even though the formal derivative of its defining polynomials is nonzero. The origin is a smooth point on every line

C=V(aX+bY), C=V(aX+bY),

with (a,b)(0,0)(a,b)\ne(0,0).

Its tangent direction is the kernel of the linear form aX+bYaX+bY, but this form annihilates (1,1)(-1,-1) only when a=ba=-b. The assumption that KK is infinite in Theorem 24.1 therefore cannot be omitted.

Edition note. Constancy here refers explicitly to the function on KK-rational points. The morphism defined by the pair of polynomials (tqt,tqt)(t^q-t,t^q-t) is not constant. This distinction prevents “constant” from being mistaken for a statement about the polynomials or the morphism itself.

Example 24.3: a tangent line from a parametrisation

In this example we work over a field KK of characteristic zero. Returning to Example 6.3, consider the curve

V(y2x2x3) V(y^2-x^2-x^3)

with parametrisation

(φ(t),ψ(t))=(t21,t(t21))=(x,y). (\varphi(t),\psi(t)) =\bigl(t^2-1,t(t^2-1)\bigr) =(x,y).

For

F=y2x2x3, F=y^2-x^2-x^3,

the partial derivatives are

Fx=2x3x2andFy=2y. \frac{\partial F}{\partial x}=-2x-3x^2 \qquad\text{and}\qquad \frac{\partial F}{\partial y}=2y.

The Jacobian matrix of the parametrisation, viewed as a row vector, is

(φt,ψt)=(2t,3t21). \left( \frac{\partial\varphi}{\partial t}, \frac{\partial\psi}{\partial t} \right) =(2t,3t^2-1).

With P=(φ(t),ψ(t))P=(\varphi(t),\psi(t)), the formal polynomial chain-rule computation indeed gives

(Fx(P),Fy(P))(2t3t21)=(2(t21)3(t21)2,2(t3t))(2t3t21)=4t(t21)6t(t21)2+2(t3t)(3t21)=4t3+4t6t5+12t36t+6t52t36t3+2t=0. \begin{aligned} &\left( \frac{\partial F}{\partial x}(P), \frac{\partial F}{\partial y}(P) \right) \begin{pmatrix}2t\\3t^2-1\end{pmatrix}\\ &=\left( -2(t^2-1)-3(t^2-1)^2, 2(t^3-t) \right) \begin{pmatrix}2t\\3t^2-1\end{pmatrix}\\ &=-4t(t^2-1)-6t(t^2-1)^2 +2(t^3-t)(3t^2-1)\\ &=-4t^3+4t-6t^5+12t^3-6t +6t^5-2t^3-6t^3+2t\\ &=0. \end{aligned}

For t=2t=2, for example, the image point is

P=(3,6). P=(3,6).

The derivative vector is (4,11)(4,11), while the partial derivatives at PP give the gradient (33,12)(-33,12), which is perpendicular to the tangent direction vector. The tangent line can be written as

{(3,6)+s(4,11)sK} \bigl\{(3,6)+s(4,11)\mid s\in K\bigr\}

or as

V(11x+4y+9). V(-11x+4y+9).

Edition note. The source does not specify a characteristic restriction for this numerical example. This edition restricts it to characteristic zero because the coefficients 22, 33, and 1111, as well as the particular value t=2t=2, can change or vanish upon reduction in small positive characteristic. In positive characteristic, smoothness and the tangent direction must be checked again over the field in question.

Tangent lines to space curves

Although our discussion is mainly restricted to plane curves, derivatives can also be used to define smooth and singular points on curves in higher-dimensional spaces, and indeed on arbitrary varieties. As an illustration, suppose that a space curve is given by two polynomials with no common component,

F,GK[X,Y,Z]. F,G\in K[X,Y,Z].

Not every space curve can be described in this way. For PC=V(F,G)P\in C=V(F,G), assume also that (F,G)(F,G) generates the ideal of the reduced curve locally at PP. Consider again the map given by the Jacobian matrix

(FxFyFzGxGyGz)P:𝔸K3𝔸K2. \left( \begin{array}{ccc} \dfrac{\partial F}{\partial x}& \dfrac{\partial F}{\partial y}& \dfrac{\partial F}{\partial z}\\[4pt] \dfrac{\partial G}{\partial x}& \dfrac{\partial G}{\partial y}& \dfrac{\partial G}{\partial z} \end{array} \right)_P \colon\mathbb A_K^3\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^2.

The point PP is smooth on the curve precisely when this matrix has rank two. Its kernel is then one-dimensional and defines the tangent line.

Edition note — reduced-curve hypothesis. The source assumes only that FF and GG have no common component. For the intrinsic smoothness of the reduced curve, this alone is insufficient: F=X2F=X^2, G=YG=Y have no common component and their zero locus is the smooth ZZ-axis, but their Jacobian has rank one there. The added local ideal-generation hypothesis makes the stated rank criterion applicable to the reduced curve.

Example 24.4: the intersection of two cylinders

Assume char(K)2\operatorname{char}(K)\ne2. Returning to Example 4.6, consider the intersection CC of the two cylinders

F=x2+y21andG=y2+z21. F=x^2+y^2-1 \qquad\text{and}\qquad G=y^2+z^2-1.

Their partial derivative vectors are

F=(2x,2y,0)andG=(0,2y,2z). \partial F=(2x,2y,0) \qquad\text{and}\qquad \partial G=(0,2y,2z).

A singular point occurs when the map defined by this Jacobian matrix has rank at most one, that is, when the two partial derivative vectors are linearly dependent and the point actually lies on the corresponding variety. Linear dependence requires

xy=xz=yz=0. xy=xz=yz=0.

On the curve with both parameters equal to 11, the curve equations exclude the cases x=y=0x=y=0 and y=z=0y=z=0. Thus the remaining candidates satisfy

x=z=0, x=z=0,

and at these values the vectors are indeed linearly dependent for every yy. When x=z=0x=z=0, only

y=±1 y=\pm1

give points on the curve. These are therefore exactly the two singular points of CC. They are also the two intersection points of the two circles that form the irreducible components of CC, as in Example 4.6.

For the version with unequal radii, write r1,r2K×r_1,r_2\in K^\times for the nonzero squared radii and use

F=x2+y2r1,G=y2+z2r2. F=x^2+y^2-r_1, \qquad G=y^2+z^2-r_2.

If the given quantities are the radii ρ1\rho_1 and ρ2\rho_2 themselves, then ri=ρi2r_i=\rho_i^2. The dependence condition xy=xz=yz=0xy=xz=yz=0 must now be solved together with the two curve equations. In the case x=z=0x=z=0, these equations become

y2=r1andy2=r2. y^2=r_1 \qquad\text{and}\qquad y^2=r_2.

Thus this case forces r1=r2r_1=r_2. The case x=y=0x=y=0 forces r1=0r_1=0, while y=z=0y=z=0 forces r2=0r_2=0. All three are impossible when r1,r20r_1,r_2\ne0 and r1r2r_1\ne r_2. The intersection curve is therefore smooth when the squared radii are nonzero and distinct. For real cylinders with positive radii, nonvanishing is automatic.

Edition note. The frozen live semantic text uses G=y2+z21G=y^2+z^2-1; the historical official PDF incorrectly prints G=x2+z21G=x^2+z^2-1. This edition follows the live semantic text. The source also calls r1,r2r_1,r_2 “radii” but then uses the equations y2=riy^2=r_i; here these parameters are clarified as squared radii. Their nonvanishing is also made explicit, since if r1=0r_1=0 or r2=0r_2=0, the Jacobian rank can drop even when r1r2r_1\ne r_2. The assumption char(K)2\operatorname{char}(K)\ne2 is made visible because all the displayed derivatives vanish in characteristic 22.

Power series rings

Definition 24.5: formal power series

Let RR be a commutative ring and T1,,TnT_1,\ldots,T_n a set of variables. A formal power series is an expression of the form

F=νaνTν=νaνT1ν1Tnνn, F=\sum_\nu a_\nu T^\nu =\sum_\nu a_\nu T_1^{\nu_1}\cdots T_n^{\nu_n},

where

aνR a_\nu\in R

for every multi-index

ν=(ν1,,νn)n. \nu=(\nu_1,\ldots,\nu_n)\in\mathbb N^n.

Two power series are added coefficientwise and multiplied in the same way as polynomials. In one variable,

FG=(i=0aiTi)(j=0bjTj)=k=0ckTk, \begin{aligned} F\cdot G &=\left(\sum_{i=0}^{\infty}a_iT^i\right) \left(\sum_{j=0}^{\infty}b_jT^j\right)\\ &=\sum_{k=0}^{\infty}c_kT^k, \end{aligned}

where

ck=i=0kaibki. c_k=\sum_{i=0}^k a_i b_{k-i}.

Definition 24.6: the power series ring

Let RR be a commutative ring. The notation

R[[X1,,Xn]] R[\![X_1,\ldots,X_n]\!]

denotes the power series ring in nn variables, also called the ring of formal power series in nn variables.

We shall mainly use the one-variable power series ring K[[T]]K[\![T]\!] over a field KK. Under suitable hypotheses, power series rings allow us to find “formal parametrisations” of branches of algebraic curves at a point; this will be treated in the next lecture. First we need to understand some basic properties of power series rings.

Edition note — scope of existence. The source states this for arbitrary algebraic curves at every point over a general field. Some hypothesis, or a suitable scalar extension, is necessary. For example, over \mathbb R the curve V(X2+Y2)V(X^2+Y^2) admits no nonconstant formal parametrisation through the origin by series in [[T]]\mathbb R[\![T]\!]. Writing the two series as G=aiTiG=\sum a_iT^i and H=biTiH=\sum b_iT^i, if nn were the first degree occurring in either one, the coefficient of T2nT^{2n} would be an2+bn2=0a_n^2+b_n^2=0, forcing an=bn=0a_n=b_n=0. The next lecture proves existence for a tangent of multiplicity one and also records an obstruction in a multiple-tangent example.

Theorem 24.7: the unit criterion

Let KK be a field. A formal power series

F=n=0anTnK[[T]] F=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}a_nT^n\in K[\![T]\!]

is a unit if and only if its constant term satisfies a00a_0\ne0.

Proof

The condition is necessary because formal evaluation at T=0T=0,

ev0:K[[T]]K,FF(0)=a0, \begin{aligned} \operatorname{ev}_0\colon K[\![T]\!]&\longrightarrow K,\\ F&\longmapsto F(0)=a_0, \end{aligned}

is a ring homomorphism. A unit must therefore map to a nonzero element of KK.

Conversely, assume a00a_0\ne0. We shall construct

G=j=0bjTj G=\sum_{j=0}^{\infty}b_jT^j

such that

FG=(i=0aiTi)(j=0bjTj)=1. FG=\left(\sum_{i=0}^{\infty}a_iT^i\right) \left(\sum_{j=0}^{\infty}b_jT^j\right)=1.

For the constant coefficient we require

a0b0=1, a_0b_0=1,

which has the unique solution b0=a01b_0=a_0^{-1}. Inductively, suppose that bjb_j has been constructed for j<nj<n so that all coefficients ckc_k of FGFG with 1k<n1\leq k<n are zero. The condition for the nnth coefficient is

0=cn=a0bn+a1bn1++an1b1+anb0. 0=c_n=a_0b_n+a_1b_{n-1}+\cdots+a_{n-1}b_1+a_nb_0.

All values except bnb_n have already been determined. Since a00a_0\ne0, this equation has exactly one solution for bnb_n. This induction constructs an inverse GG for FF. \square

Edition note. The live semantic text ends its explanation of the constant-term homomorphism with an unfilled exercise placeholder. This edition does not retain that dangling reference; evaluation at T=0T=0 is stated and used directly.

Corollary 24.8: a discrete valuation ring

If KK is a field, then the one-variable power series ring

R=K[[T]] R=K[\![T]\!]

is a discrete valuation ring.

Proof

First, RR is a local ring with maximal ideal

𝔪=(T). \mathfrak m=(T).

Indeed, if a power series FF is not a unit, Theorem 24.7 says that its constant term is zero. Consequently,

F=TF̃ F=T\widetilde F

for the power series F̃\widetilde F obtained by shifting the indices.

The absence of zero divisors follows by considering initial terms. If FF and GG are nonzero power series, write

F=akTk+ak+1Tk+1+ F=a_kT^k+a_{k+1}T^{k+1}+\cdots

and

G=bT+b+1T+1+, G=b_\ell T^\ell+b_{\ell+1}T^{\ell+1}+\cdots,

where ak0a_k\ne0 and b0b_\ell\ne0. Since all earlier coefficients vanish, the coefficient of degree k+k+\ell in their product is

ck+=akb0. c_{k+\ell}=a_kb_\ell\ne0.

It remains to show that RR is Noetherian; in fact, it is a principal ideal domain. For a nonzero ideal IRI\subseteq R, let jj be the smallest index of a nonzero coefficient among all series in II. Choose HIH\in I with initial term of degree jj. Then H=TjUH=T^jU, where UU is a unit by Theorem 24.7, so TjIT^j\in I. The minimality of jj also gives I(Tj)I\subseteq(T^j), hence

I=(Tj). I=(T^j).

Thus RR is a local principal ideal domain with maximal ideal (T)(T), and is therefore a discrete valuation ring. \square

Edition note. Both the live semantic text and the historical PDF write the second term of GG as a+1T+1a_{\ell+1}T^{\ell+1}. The correct coefficient family is b+1b_{\ell+1}, as displayed above.

Power series can not only be added and multiplied. Under certain additional conditions, one power series can also be substituted into another. This operation corresponds to composition of maps.

Definition 24.9: substitution of power series

Let KK be a field and

F=i=0aiTiK[[T]]. F=\sum_{i=0}^{\infty}a_iT^i\in K[\![T]\!].

Let

G=j=0bjTj G=\sum_{j=0}^{\infty}b_jT^j

be another power series with constant term b0=0b_0=0. The series

F(G)=a0+a1(j=0bjTj)+a2(j=0bjTj)2+a3(j=0bjTj)3+=k=0ckTk \begin{aligned} F(G) &=a_0+a_1\left(\sum_{j=0}^{\infty}b_jT^j\right) +a_2\left(\sum_{j=0}^{\infty}b_jT^j\right)^2\\ &\quad +a_3\left(\sum_{j=0}^{\infty}b_jT^j\right)^3+\cdots\\ &=\sum_{k=0}^{\infty}c_kT^k \end{aligned}

is called the composite power series. Its coefficients are determined by

c0=a0 c_0=a_0

and, for k1k\geq1,

ck=s=0kas(j1++js=kbj1bjs), c_k=\sum_{s=0}^k a_s \left( \sum_{j_1+\cdots+j_s=k}b_{j_1}\cdots b_{j_s} \right),

where the inner sum runs over all ordered ss-tuples

(j1,,js)+s. (j_1,\ldots,j_s)\in\mathbb N_+^s.

Since b0=0b_0=0, only indices j1j\geq1 occur, so every sum determining a coefficient is finite. These formulas agree with ordinary polynomial substitution when FF and GG are polynomials. Substituting power series into power series produces substitution homomorphisms between power series rings.

Lemma 24.10: substitution is a homomorphism

Let KK be a field and GK[[S]]G\in K[\![S]\!] a power series with constant term zero. Substitution of GG defines a KK-algebra homomorphism

K[[T]]K[[S]],FF(G). \begin{aligned} K[\![T]\!]&\longrightarrow K[\![S]\!],\\ F&\longmapsto F(G). \end{aligned}

Proof

The map is well defined. To show that it is a ring homomorphism, we need only compare the relevant coefficients. Each depends on only finitely many coefficients of the series involved. The required identities therefore follow from the polynomial case. The map also preserves scalars in KK, so it is a KK-algebra homomorphism. \square

Lemma 24.11: a formal change of parameter

Let KK be a field and

G=j=0bjTjK[[T]] G=\sum_{j=0}^{\infty}b_jT^j\in K[\![T]\!]

with b0=0b_0=0 and b10b_1\ne0. Then the substitution homomorphism determined by

TG T\longmapsto G

is a KK-algebra automorphism of K[[T]]K[\![T]\!].

Proof

We first construct a power series

F=i=0aiTi F=\sum_{i=0}^{\infty}a_iT^i

with

F(G)=T. F(G)=T.

We must have a0=0a_0=0 and a1=b11a_1=b_1^{-1}. For k2k\geq2, suppose inductively that the coefficients of FF through ak1a_{k-1} have been constructed to give the required coefficients. By Definition 24.9, the condition on ckc_k is

0=ck=s=0kas(j1++js=kbj1bjs)=s=0k1as(j1++js=kbj1bjs)+akb1k. \begin{aligned} 0=c_k &=\sum_{s=0}^k a_s \left( \sum_{j_1+\cdots+j_s=k}b_{j_1}\cdots b_{j_s} \right)\\ &=\sum_{s=0}^{k-1}a_s \left( \sum_{j_1+\cdots+j_s=k}b_{j_1}\cdots b_{j_s} \right) +a_kb_1^k. \end{aligned}

Since b10b_1\ne0, this equation determines aka_k uniquely.

Now consider the composite

K[[T]]TFK[[T]]TGK[[T]]. K[\![T]\!] \xrightarrow{\ T\mapsto F\ } K[\![T]\!] \xrightarrow{\ T\mapsto G\ } K[\![T]\!].

The composite map is substitution TTT\mapsto T, which is the identity. Therefore the second map, determined by TGT\mapsto G, is surjective. By Corollary 24.8, K[[T]]K[\![T]\!] is a discrete valuation ring, and its ideals are known. If the kernel of the second map were nonzero, it would contain some TjT^j, but its image is Gj0G^j\ne0. Only the zero ideal can therefore be the kernel. The map is also injective, hence bijective and a KK-algebra automorphism. \square

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: Current semantic course text and this translation: CC BY-SA 4.0. The official 2012 PDF file-description surface also records the legacy CC BY-SA 2.0 Germany route. Unit 24 contains no substantive media; no blanket relicensing claim is made. · Rights record: ASSET_CLOSURE-unit-24.json · Rights record: RIGHTS-unit-24.csv

Worksheet 24

Warm-up exercises

Exercise 24.1

Give an example of a smooth curve

C𝔸K2 C\subseteq\mathbb A_K^2

with a parametrisation whose differential vanishes at at least one point.

Exercise 24.2

Consider the union of the coordinate axes

V(xy)𝔸K2 V(xy)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^2

and the local ring RR at the origin, with maximal ideal 𝔪\mathfrak m. Describe explicitly a KK-basis of the quotient rings R/𝔪nR/\mathfrak m^n and determine their dimensions.

Exercise 24.3

Let KK be a field and K[[T]]K[[T]] the formal power series ring. Determine the power series inverse of 1T1-T.

Exercise 24.4 ★

Let KK be a field and

𝔪=(T)K[T] \mathfrak m=(T)\subseteq K[T]

the maximal ideal corresponding to the origin, with localisation

R=K[T]𝔪. R=K[T]_{\mathfrak m}.

Define a KK-algebra homomorphism

φ:RK[[T]] \varphi:R\longrightarrow K[[T]]

satisfying φ(T)=T\varphi(T)=T, where K[[T]]K[[T]] denotes the formal power series ring.

Exercise 24.5

Compute the first five coefficients, up to and including c4c_4, of the composite power series F(G)F(G) in the sense of Definition 24.9.

Exercises for submission

Exercise 24.6 (5 points)

Give an example of an irreducible real polynomial

F[X,Y] F\in\mathbb R[X,Y]

whose two partial derivatives agree and are nonconstant. Show that this is impossible over \mathbb C.

Exercise 24.7 (3 points)

Consider the curve

C=V(Y2X2X3) C=V\left(Y^2-X^2-X^3\right)

with the parametrisation discussed in Example 24.3. Determine the singular points of the curve, together with their multiplicities and tangent lines. Also compute the image points and tangent lines for the parameter values

t=1,0,1. t=-1,0,1.

For the geometric conclusions about tangent lines and the parameter values above, take the base field to be \mathbb R; in particular, it has characteristic zero.

Edition note - correction to the source equation: The source displays C=V(X2Y2Y3)C=V(X^2-Y^2-Y^3), but the referenced parametrisation is

(x,y)=(t21,t(t21)). (x,y)=\left(t^2-1,t(t^2-1)\right).

Direct substitution gives

y2x2x3=(t21)2(t21(t21))=0. y^2-x^2-x^3 =(t^2-1)^2\left(t^2-1-(t^2-1)\right)=0.

The edition therefore uses C=V(Y2X2X3)C=V(Y^2-X^2-X^3), in agreement with the parametrisation and the source’s object category.

Exercise 24.8 (3 points)

Describe a formal power series over \mathbb C that converges in no neighbourhood of the origin.

Exercise 24.9 (3 points)

Let KK be a field. Compare the two rings

(K[X])[[Y]]and(K[[Y]])[X]. (K[X])[[Y]] \qquad\text{and}\qquad (K[[Y]])[X].

In particular, determine whether one is contained in the other and, if so, in which direction the inclusion holds.

Exercise 24.10 (6 points)

Let RR be a Noetherian commutative ring. Show that

R[[T1,,Tn]] R[[T_1,\ldots,T_n]]

is Noetherian.

Hint. Take inspiration from the proof of Hilbert’s basis theorem.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Public Solutions to Worksheet 24

At the frozen revision boundary, the source provides a public solution only to Exercise 24.4. No additional solutions have been created for this edition.

Solution to Exercise 24.4

We start with the KK-algebra homomorphism

K[T]K[[T]],TT. \begin{aligned} K[T]&\longrightarrow K[[T]],\\ T&\longmapsto T. \end{aligned}

Every polynomial PK[T]\(T)P\in K[T]\setminus (T) has constant term

P(0)0. P(0)\ne 0.

By the unit criterion for the formal power series ring, PP is a unit in K[[T]]K[[T]]. Since every element of the denominator set K[T]\(T)K[T]\setminus (T) maps to a unit, the universal property of localisation gives a unique KK-algebra homomorphism

K[T](T)K[[T]]. K[T]_{(T)}\longrightarrow K[[T]].

Explicitly, it is given by

fPfP1. \frac{f}{P}\longmapsto fP^{-1}.

Edition note – correction to the source solution: After stating P(T)P\notin (T), the source displays only the symbol 0\ne 0 without a left-hand side. The edition restores the required statement P(0)0P(0)\ne0; German spelling errors with no mathematical effect are also naturally corrected in translation.

Back to Exercise 24.4

English Markdown source · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0 for the frozen semantic source; official 2012 PDF witnesses retain their recorded CC BY-SA 2.0 Germany notice

Lecture 25: Power Series Solutions for Algebraic Curves

Power series solutions for algebraic curves

Let F0F\ne 0 be a polynomial describing a plane algebraic curve CC, and assume that

P=(0,0)C. P=(0,0)\in C.

This is no restriction, since it can always be achieved by a translation. How can we describe the curve near the origin using power series? In other words, when is there a ring homomorphism determined by nonconstant power series GG and HH with constant term zero,

K[X,Y]K[[T]],XG,YH, \begin{aligned} K[X,Y]&\longrightarrow K[[T]],\\ X&\longmapsto G,\\ Y&\longmapsto H, \end{aligned}

such that

F(G,H)=0? F(G,H)=0?

Equivalently, we seek a ring homomorphism

K[X,Y]/(F)K[[T]]. K[X,Y]/(F)\longrightarrow K[[T]].

Thus the problem is to find power series solutions of the equation

F(X,Y)=0 F(X,Y)=0

that describe more precisely the behaviour of the curve around the point solution (0,0)(0,0).

The basic approach is a power series ansatz, as also used in the theory of differential equations. We start with

G=k=0akTkandH==0bT, G=\sum_{k=0}^{\infty}a_kT^k \qquad\text{and}\qquad H=\sum_{\ell=0}^{\infty}b_\ell T^\ell,

where the coefficients aka_k and bb_\ell are initially unknown. Direct substitution into F=0F=0, followed by expansion of the products, produces an expression that is in principle infinite. For each power TkT^k, however, the expression for its coefficient is determined by only finitely many data: the finitely many coefficients of FF, and only the coefficients of GG and HH through degree kk, are needed.

Edition note — coefficient range. The source says only coefficients below degree kk are relevant. A degree-kk coefficient can be required: for F=XF=X, the coefficient of TkT^k in F(G,H)F(G,H) is aka_k. The finite-dependence claim is retained with the corrected bound “through degree kk”.

Since we require

F(G,H)=0, F(G,H)=0,

the coefficients of FF, GG, and HH must make the coefficient of every TkT^k vanish.

We then seek conditions for the existence of solutions, their form, and their uniqueness. The condition

a0=b0=0 a_0=b_0=0

is an initial condition expressing that the power series solution passes through the origin.

A condition on the linear terms of the power series, namely a1a_1 and b1b_1, emerges immediately. This further justifies interpreting the linear factors of the lowest-degree homogeneous component FmF_m in the homogeneous decomposition of FF as tangent-line equations.

Lemma 25.1: the linear term lies on a tangent line

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and

FK[X,Y] F\in K[X,Y]

a polynomial with homogeneous decomposition

F=Fm++Fd,dm1,Fm0. F=F_m+\cdots+F_d, \qquad d\geq m\geq1, \qquad F_m\ne0.

Let

Fm=λ=1m(uλX+vλY) F_m=\prod_{\lambda=1}^{m}(u_\lambda X+v_\lambda Y)

be the factorisation of FmF_m into linear factors. These linear factors define the tangent lines to the curve

C=V(F) C=V(F)

at P=(0,0)P=(0,0). Let

G=n=0anTnandH==0bT G=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}a_nT^n \qquad\text{and}\qquad H=\sum_{\ell=0}^{\infty}b_\ell T^\ell

be elements of K[[T]]K[[T]] giving a solution of the curve equation through the origin, that is,

a0=b0=0andF(G,H)=0. a_0=b_0=0 \qquad\text{and}\qquad F(G,H)=0.

Then, for some λ\lambda,

uλa1+vλb1=0. u_\lambda a_1+v_\lambda b_1=0.

In other words, the pair of linear terms of the two power series is constrained by one of the tangent lines.

Proof

Substitute

G=a1T+a2T2+andH=b1T+b2T2+ G=a_1T+a_2T^2+\cdots \qquad\text{and}\qquad H=b_1T+b_2T^2+\cdots

into FF. A homogeneous component FkF_k is a sum of terms cijXiYjc_{ij}X^iY^j with i+j=ki+j=k. We can immediately factor out TkT^k and obtain an expression of the form

Fk(G,H)=(i+j=kcija1ib1j)Tk+(i+j=kcij(ia1i1a2b1j+ja1ib1j1b2))Tk+1+. \begin{aligned} F_k(G,H) ={}&\left(\sum_{i+j=k}c_{ij}a_1^ib_1^j\right)T^k\\ &+\left(\sum_{i+j=k}c_{ij} \left(ia_1^{i-1}a_2b_1^j +ja_1^ib_1^{j-1}b_2\right)\right)T^{k+1} +\cdots. \end{aligned}

Thus a1a_1 and b1b_1 enter the coefficient of TkT^k directly through FkF_k; in general that coefficient also receives more complicated contributions from FF_\ell with <k\ell<k. For FmF_m, there are no lower homogeneous components. The decisive equation for a1a_1 and b1b_1 is therefore

i+j=mcija1ib1j=0, \sum_{i+j=m}c_{ij}a_1^ib_1^j=0,

or, equivalently,

Fm(a1,b1)=0. F_m(a_1,b_1)=0.

Since FmF_m is a product of linear factors, the row vector (a1,b1)(a_1,b_1) must annihilate one of them. This is the assertion. \square

Note that Lemma 25.1 does not exclude the possibility

a1=b1=0. a_1=b_1=0.

Indeed, realising a curve by power series along a prescribed tangent line is possible only under additional conditions; see Theorem 25.2 and the examples below.

The computational effort needed to determine a power series solution can be greatly reduced by restricting to “graph solutions”, where one power series is simply a linear polynomial prescribed by a tangent line and the other is a power series to be determined. This is often no essential restriction, as follows from Lemma 24.11. That lemma lets us easily reparametrise

G,HK[[T]] G,H\in K[[T]]

when their linear terms do not both vanish. Assume

G=a1T+,a10. G=a_1T+\cdots, \qquad a_1\ne0.

Choose a power series U(T)U(T) that is the compositional inverse of GG. Then

G(U(T))=TandH(U(T))=H̃(T). G(U(T))=T \qquad\text{and}\qquad H(U(T))=\widetilde H(T).

Following the original map by a power series ring automorphism gives the composite

K[X,Y]XG,YHK[[T]]TU(T)K[[T]], K[X,Y] \mathop{\longrightarrow}^{X\mapsto G,\,Y\mapsto H} K[[T]] \mathop{\longrightarrow}^{T\mapsto U(T)} K[[T]],

which has the particularly simple form

XT,YH̃. X\longmapsto T, \qquad Y\longmapsto\widetilde H.

That is, we seek to realise the curve as the graph of a formal function in one variable.

Edition note - correction to the source’s composition order. The source writes U(G(T))=TU(G(T))=T and U(H(T))=H̃(T)U(H(T))=\widetilde H(T). However, the displayed arrow substitutes TU(T)T\mapsto U(T) after the first map, so its resulting images are G(U(T))G(U(T)) and H(U(T))H(U(T)). The edition uses the composition order corresponding to that arrow.

Theorem 25.2: a tangent of multiplicity one gives a graph solution

Let KK be a field and

FK[X,Y] F\in K[X,Y]

a nonzero polynomial with

(0,0)C=V(F). (0,0)\in C=V(F).

Let

F=Fd++Fm,dm,Fm0, F=F_d+\cdots+F_m, \qquad d\geq m, \qquad F_m\ne0,

be the homogeneous decomposition of FF, and let uX+vYuX+vY be a simple linear factor of FmF_m, that is, a linear polynomial defining a tangent line of multiplicity 11. Then there are power series

G=n=0anTn,H==0bTK[[T]] G=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}a_nT^n, \qquad H=\sum_{\ell=0}^{\infty}b_\ell T^\ell \in K[[T]]

such that

F(G,H)=0,a0=b0=0,a1u+b1v=0. F(G,H)=0, \qquad a_0=b_0=0, \qquad a_1u+b_1v=0.

Moreover, one of the two power series can be chosen to be a linear polynomial.

Edition note - clarification of the initial condition. The source writes “a0,b0=0a_0,b_0=0”. The edition states the intended equality unambiguously as a0=b0=0a_0=b_0=0.

Proof

By a linear change of variables, we may assume that

uX+vY=Y. uX+vY=Y.

We shall construct a power series solution with

G=T G=T

and

H=b2T2+b3T3+. H=b_2T^2+b_3T^3+\cdots.

Since a1=1a_1=1 and b1=0b_1=0, this solution satisfies the linear condition specified by the tangent line.

Write

F=i,jcijXiYj. F=\sum_{i,j}c_{ij}X^iY^j.

We have

cm,0=0, c_{m,0}=0,

since otherwise YY could not be a linear factor of FmF_m. Moreover,

cm1,10, c_{m-1,1}\ne0,

since if this coefficient were zero, YY would be a linear factor with multiplicity at least 22.

We now show that these initial data determine a unique power series

H=b2T2+b3T3+. H=b_2T^2+b_3T^3+\cdots.

Substituting GG and HH into FF gives one condition for each kk, since the resulting coefficient of TkT^k must be zero. The kkth coefficient is a sum of expressions of the form

cijb1bj,i+ρ=1jρ=k. c_{ij}b_{\ell_1}\cdots b_{\ell_j}, \qquad i+\sum_{\rho=1}^{j}\ell_\rho=k.

These expressions may occur repeatedly, with a multinomial coefficient. Since ρ2\ell_\rho\geq2, the term bb_\ell does not yet occur when

k<m+1. k<m+\ell-1.

It first occurs in the coefficient with

k=m+1, k=m+\ell-1,

and its only occurrence there is

cm1,1b. c_{m-1,1}b_\ell.

The other terms in that coefficient involve only the cijc_{ij} and brb_r with r<r<\ell. Since cm1,10c_{m-1,1}\ne0, this determines bb_\ell uniquely. The coefficients bb_\ell can therefore be constructed inductively, each value being uniquely determined by the corresponding coefficient equation. \square

Example 25.3: the graph of a rational function

Consider the affine plane curve of degree three given by

F=X3+XY+Y=0. F=X^3+XY+Y=0.

Its partial derivatives are

FX=3X2+YandFY=X+1. \frac{\partial F}{\partial X}=3X^2+Y \qquad\text{and}\qquad \frac{\partial F}{\partial Y}=X+1.

The second partial derivative vanishes only when X=1X=-1, but on that line FF has value 1-1. Thus the curve is smooth. At the origin the partial derivatives have values (0,1)(0,1). The tangent line is therefore the XX-axis, in agreement with the fact that the linear term of the curve equation is YY.

We compute the power series

Y=H(T)==0bT Y=H(T)=\sum_{\ell=0}^{\infty}b_\ell T^\ell

that describes the curve as a graph at the origin, with X=TX=T. The initial conditions are

b0=b1=0. b_0=b_1=0.

The subsequent coefficients must satisfy

F(T,H)=T3+TH+H=0, F(T,H)=T^3+TH+H=0,

or

T3+T(b2T2+b3T3+)+(b2T2+b3T3+)=0. T^3+T(b_2T^2+b_3T^3+\cdots) +(b_2T^2+b_3T^3+\cdots)=0.

For b2b_2, the second coefficient of the equation immediately gives

b2=0. b_2=0.

For b3b_3, the third coefficient gives

1+b3=0, 1+b_3=0,

hence b3=1b_3=-1. The subsequent coefficients give the relation

b1+b=0. b_{\ell-1}+b_\ell=0.

Thus the later coefficients alternate between 11 and 1-1, giving a simple recurrence, and

H=T3+T4T5+T6T7+. H=-T^3+T^4-T^5+T^6-T^7+\cdots.

Rewriting the curve equation as

Y=X31+X Y=\frac{-X^3}{1+X}

shows that this is the graph of a rational function with a pole at X=1X=-1. The power series above describes that rational function’s graph as the graph of a formal-analytic function.

Example 25.4: the folium of Descartes as a formal graph

Consider the folium of Descartes

X3+Y33XY=0 X^3+Y^3-3XY=0

at the origin, with tangent line Y=0Y=0. We seek the power series describing as a graph the branch of the curve corresponding to this tangent line. Set

X=T X=T

and

H=b2T2+b3T3+b4T4+, H=b_2T^2+b_3T^3+b_4T^4+\cdots,

assuming that the characteristic of KK is not 33. The coefficients bb_\ell are determined by

0=T3+H33TH=T3+(b2T2+b3T3+)33T(b2T2+b3T3+). \begin{aligned} 0 &=T^3+H^3-3TH\\ &=T^3+(b_2T^2+b_3T^3+\cdots)^3 -3T(b_2T^2+b_3T^3+\cdots). \end{aligned}

This substitution and expansion first gives a condition at k=3k=3. The term X3X^3, or T3T^3, needs to be considered only once, when k=3k=3. The term Y3Y^3 contributes only from k6k\geq6 onwards, since Y=HY=H is a multiple of T2T^2. The term XYXY must be considered from k=3k=3 onwards.

For b2b_2 we obtain

13b2=0, 1-3b_2=0,

hence

b2=13. b_2=\frac13.

The coefficient b3b_3 first occurs in the condition for the fourth coefficient, where it stands alone, so

b3=0. b_3=0.

For the same reason,

b4=0. b_4=0.

For b5b_5, the sixth coefficient is decisive, and now the term Y3Y^3 must also be included. The condition is

b233b5=0, b_2^3-3b_5=0,

so

b5=181. b_5=\frac1{81}.

For b6,b7,b8b_6,b_7,b_8, note that the term

Y3=(b2T2+b5T5+)(b2T2+b5T5+)(b2T2+b5T5+) Y^3=(b_2T^2+b_5T^5+\cdots) (b_2T^2+b_5T^5+\cdots) (b_2T^2+b_5T^5+\cdots)

next contributes at the ninth coefficient, with contribution 3b22b53b_2^2b_5. Thus b6b_6 and b7b_7 stand alone and must be zero. For b8b_8 we obtain

3b22b53b8=0, 3b_2^2b_5-3b_8=0,

hence

b8=1729. b_8=\frac1{729}.

The beginning of the power series describing this branch of the curve as a graph is therefore

H=13T2+181T5+1729T8+. H=\frac13T^2+\frac1{81}T^5+\frac1{729}T^8+\cdots.

Example 25.5: Neil’s parabola without a nonzero linear term

Consider Neil’s parabola given by

X3Y2=0. X^3-Y^2=0.

The origin is singular and has only one tangent line, namely

Y=0. Y=0.

However, this tangent has multiplicity two, so Theorem 25.2 does not apply. In fact, there is no power series solution at the origin with a nonzero linear term.

To see this, suppose that

X=G=a1T+a2T2+ X=G=a_1T+a_2T^2+\cdots

and

Y=H=b1T+b2T2+ Y=H=b_1T+b_2T^2+\cdots

satisfy the curve equation. After substitution, the second coefficient gives

b12=0, -b_1^2=0,

so b1=0b_1=0. The third coefficient then gives

a13=0, a_1^3=0,

so a1=0a_1=0 as well.

Nevertheless, there are power series solutions for Neil’s parabola through the origin. We may take the monomial solution

G=T2andH=T3. G=T^2 \qquad\text{and}\qquad H=T^3.

This even gives a bijection between the affine line and Neil’s parabola, but its linear term is indeed zero.

Remark 25.6: comparison with the implicit function theorem

Let

K=orK=, K=\mathbb R \qquad\text{or}\qquad K=\mathbb C,

and FK[X,Y]F\in K[X,Y]. If

(Fx(P),Fy(P))(0,0), \left( \frac{\partial F}{\partial x}(P), \frac{\partial F}{\partial y}(P) \right)\ne(0,0),

that is, if PP is a regular point of the function FF, or equivalently a smooth point of

C=V(FF(P)), C=V(F-F(P)),

then the implicit function theorem guarantees that, in a metric neighbourhood of PP, the curve can be expressed as the graph of a differentiable function.

Edition note - correction to the source wording. The source writes “K=K=\mathbb R or ==\mathbb C”. The edition supplies the subject in the second alternative, writing K=K=\mathbb R or K=K=\mathbb C.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: Current semantic course text and this translation: CC BY-SA 4.0. The official 2012 PDF file-description surface also records the legacy CC BY-SA 2.0 Germany route. Unit 25 contains no substantive media; no blanket relicensing claim is made. · Rights record: ASSET_CLOSURE-unit-25.json · Rights record: RIGHTS-unit-25.csv

Worksheet 25

Warm-up exercises

Exercise 25.1 ★

For the plane algebraic curve

V(X3+Y2XY+X), V\left(X^3+Y^2-XY+X\right),

determine a nonconstant power series solution

X=F(Y) X=F(Y)

at the origin through degree six.

Exercise 25.2 ★

For the plane algebraic curve

V(X2Y+X2+Y25XY+Y), V\left(X^2Y+X^2+Y^2-5XY+Y\right),

determine a nonconstant power series solution

Y=F(X) Y=F(X)

at the origin through fifth order.

The following exercises concern the completion of a local ring.

Exercise 25.3

Let RR be a local ring with maximal ideal 𝔪\mathfrak m. Consider the diagram

R/𝔪4R/𝔪3R/𝔪2R/𝔪. \longrightarrow R/\mathfrak m^4 \longrightarrow R/\mathfrak m^3 \longrightarrow R/\mathfrak m^2 \longrightarrow R/\mathfrak m.

The maps are the canonical projections

φn:R/𝔪n+1R/𝔪n \varphi_n:R/\mathfrak m^{n+1}\longrightarrow R/\mathfrak m^n

induced by the ideal inclusions 𝔪n+1𝔪n\mathfrak m^{n+1}\subseteq\mathfrak m^n. A sequence of elements

anR/𝔪n a_n\in R/\mathfrak m^n

is called compatible if

φn(an+1)=an \varphi_n(a_{n+1})=a_n

for every nn. Define a ring structure on the set of all such compatible sequences. This ring is called the completion of RR. Also show that there is a canonical ring homomorphism from RR to its completion.

Exercise 25.4

Let RR be a one-dimensional Noetherian local commutative ring. Show that the canonical map from RR to its completion is injective.

Remark. This injectivity holds for every Noetherian local ring, but the proof is more difficult.

Exercise 25.5

Let RR be a commutative ring and II an ideal. Show that, for each xRx\in R, the family

{x+Inn} \left\{x+I^n\mid n\in\mathbb N\right\}

defines a neighbourhood basis at xx. These families define the II-adic topology on RR. Show also that this topology is Hausdorff if and only if

nIn={0}. \bigcap_n I^n=\{0\}.

Remark. The completion of a local ring with respect to its maximal ideal is precisely its topological completion for this topology.

Exercises for submission

Exercise 25.6 (4 points)

Consider the cardioid

V((X2+Y2)22X(X2+Y2)Y2) V\left(\left(X^2+Y^2\right)^2 -2X\left(X^2+Y^2\right)-Y^2\right)

at (2,0)(2,0). Determine a formal parametrisation of the curve at this point, through the fifth term, in terms of a tangent parameter.

Edition note - base field. The source does not specify the base field. For the geometric interpretation of the cardioid and tangent parameter in this exercise, the edition uses \mathbb R as the base field; in particular, it has characteristic zero.

Exercise 25.7 (4 points)

Let KK be a field with char(K)2\operatorname{char}(K)\ne2. Consider the unit circle

X2+Y2=1 X^2+Y^2=1

at (1,0)(1,0). Determine power series

G,HK[[T]] G,H\in K[[T]]

with initial conditions

a0=1,a1=0,b0=0,b1=1, a_0=1,\qquad a_1=0,\qquad b_0=0,\qquad b_1=1,

and satisfying

G(T)2+H(T)2=1. G(T)^2+H(T)^2=1.

Edition note - characteristic. The source places no restriction on the characteristic of KK. The condition char(K)2\operatorname{char}(K)\ne2 is added because, in characteristic 22, the coefficient of T2T^2 in the required equation would force 1=01=0, so series with these initial conditions could not exist.

Exercise 25.8 (4 points)

Consider Neil’s parabola

C=V(Y3X2) C=V\left(Y^3-X^2\right)

at (1,1)(1,1). Find a parametrisation of the curve at this point by power series through the fifth term, such that one of the series is a linear polynomial.

Exercise 25.9 (3 points)

Let KK be a field. A formal Laurent series with finite principal part is an infinite sum of the form

F=n=kanTn,anK,k. F=\sum_{n=k}^{\infty}a_nT^n, \qquad a_n\in K,\quad k\in\mathbb Z.

Show that the ring of these formal series, with suitable ring operations, is isomorphic to the field of fractions of the power series ring K[[T]]K[[T]].

Exercise 25.10 (4 points)

Let KK be a field and K[T]K[T] the polynomial ring in one variable. Let RR be the localisation of K[T]K[T] at the maximal ideal

𝔪=(T). \mathfrak m=(T).

Show that the completion of RR is isomorphic to the power series ring K[[T]]K[[T]].

Exercise 25.11 (4 points)

Let KK be a field and

R=K[[T]] R=K[[T]]

the power series ring. Show that TT has no square root in RR. Show also that, when K=/(7)K=\mathbb Z/(7), the element T+2T+2 has a square root in RR, and determine the first five coefficients of one such square root.

Exercise 25.12 (5 points)

Let

FK[X,Y] F\in K[X,Y]

be an irreducible polynomial and

R=K[X,Y]/(F) R=K[X,Y]/(F)

the integral coordinate ring of the plane curve

C=V(F). C=V(F).

Let

RS=Rnorm R\longrightarrow S=R^{\operatorname{norm}}

be the normalisation of RR, and let

RK[[T]] R\longrightarrow K[[T]]

be the ring homomorphism corresponding to a nonconstant formal power series solution of the curve. Show that there is a unique ring homomorphism

SK[[T]] S\longrightarrow K[[T]]

making the diagram

RSK[[T]] \begin{array}{ccc} R & \longrightarrow & S \\ & \searrow & \downarrow \\ & & K[[T]] \end{array}

commute.

Exercise for upload

Exercise 25.13 (4 points)

Using suitable software, plot one of the example curves from the lecture, together with the various polynomial approximations computed there.

Edition note - discrepancy in source points. The official worksheet displays 4 points for this exercise, whereas the transcluded semantic exercise page records 3 points. The edition retains the displayed value of 4 and records the exercise page’s value of 3 without silently reconciling them.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Public Solutions to Worksheet 25

At the frozen revision boundary, the source provides public solutions only to Exercises 25.1 and 25.2. The frozen authority query records the other eleven candidate solution pages as absent. No additional solutions have been created for this edition.

Solution to Exercise 25.1

We make the ansatz

X=F(Y)=i=0aiYi X=F(Y)=\sum_{i=0}^{\infty}a_iY^i

and determine the coefficients a0,,a6a_0,\ldots,a_6 from the condition

(i=0aiYi)3+Y2(i=0aiYi)Y+(i=0aiYi)=0. \left(\sum_{i=0}^{\infty}a_iY^i\right)^3 +Y^2 -\left(\sum_{i=0}^{\infty}a_iY^i\right)Y +\left(\sum_{i=0}^{\infty}a_iY^i\right) =0.

Since the power series must approximate the curve at the origin, we must have

a0=0. a_0=0.

For Y1Y^1, the coefficient condition is

a1=0, a_1=0,

since the first three summands in the equation contribute nothing. For Y2Y^2, we obtain

1+a2=0,hencea2=1. 1+a_2=0, \qquad\text{hence}\qquad a_2=-1.

This deals with the second summand Y2Y^2. For Y3Y^3, we obtain

a2+a3=0,hencea3=a2=1. -a_2+a_3=0, \qquad\text{hence}\qquad a_3=a_2=-1.

For Y4Y^4, we obtain

a3+a4=0,hencea4=a3=1, -a_3+a_4=0, \qquad\text{hence}\qquad a_4=a_3=-1,

and for Y5Y^5,

a4+a5=0,hencea5=a4=1. -a_4+a_5=0, \qquad\text{hence}\qquad a_5=a_4=-1.

At Y6Y^6, the first summand must be included for the first time. We obtain

a23a5+a6=0,hencea6=a5a23=1(1)3=0. a_2^3-a_5+a_6=0, \qquad\text{hence}\qquad a_6=a_5-a_2^3=-1-(-1)^3=0.

Back to Exercise 25.1

Solution to Exercise 25.2

We make the ansatz

Y=F(X)=n=0anXn Y=F(X)=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}a_nX^n

(and X=XX=X), and determine the coefficients successively by comparing coefficients of powers of XX. Since the solution must pass through the origin, we require a0=0a_0=0.

X1:a1=0. X^1:\qquad a_1=0.

X2:1+a2=0,hencea2=1. X^2:\qquad 1+a_2=0, \qquad\text{hence}\qquad a_2=-1.

X3:5a2+a3=0,hencea3=5. X^3:\qquad -5a_2+a_3=0, \qquad\text{hence}\qquad a_3=-5.

X4:a2+a225a3+a4=0,hencea4=5a3=25. X^4:\qquad a_2+a_2^2-5a_3+a_4=0, \qquad\text{hence}\qquad a_4=5a_3=-25.

X5:a3+2a2a35a4+a5=0,a5=a32a2a3+5a4=510125=130. \begin{aligned} X^5:\qquad a_3+2a_2a_3-5a_4+a_5&=0,\\ a_5&=-a_3-2a_2a_3+5a_4\\ &=5-10-125\\ &=-130. \end{aligned}

The initial terms of the power series are therefore

F=X25X325X4130X5+. F=-X^2-5X^3-25X^4-130X^5+\ldots.

Back to Exercise 25.2

English Markdown source · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0 for the frozen semantic source; official 2012 PDF witnesses retain their recorded CC BY-SA 2.0 Germany notice

Lecture 26: Intersection Multiplicity

Intersection multiplicity

Let two plane algebraic curves

C,D𝔸K2 C,D\subseteq\mathbb A_K^2

be given, with no common component. By Theorem 4.8, the intersection CDC\cap D consists of only finitely many points. We want to describe quantitatively how the two curves intersect at a point

PCD. P\in C\cap D.

For this purpose, it is useful to consider a slightly more general situation. We write

C=V(F)andD=V(G), C=V(F) \qquad\text{and}\qquad D=V(G),

and allow prime factors to occur repeatedly in both FF and GG. In other words, from now on we distinguish V(F)V(F) from V(Fn)V(F^n), although they are the same geometric object.

Lemma 26.1: finite dimension of the quotient

Let KK be a field and let

F,GK[X,Y] F,G\in K[X,Y]

be two polynomials with no common prime divisor. Let

PV(F,G) P\in V(F,G)

and let

R=K[X,Y]𝔪P R=K[X,Y]_{\mathfrak m_P}

be the corresponding localisation. Then the quotient ring

R/(F,G) R/(F,G)

is finite-dimensional as a vector space over KK.

Proof

Let 𝔪\mathfrak m be the maximal ideal of RR. Since FF and GG have no common divisor, there is no other prime ideal between (F,G)(F,G) and 𝔪\mathfrak m in RR. Consequently, every nonunit in R/(F,G)R/(F,G) is nilpotent. Thus, for some ss,

𝔪s(F,G)𝔪. \mathfrak m^s\subseteq(F,G)\subseteq\mathfrak m.

Hence there is a surjection

R/𝔪sR/(F,G). R/\mathfrak m^s\longrightarrow R/(F,G).

By Lemma 23.3 in the source numbering, the ring on the left is finite-dimensional over KK. The ring on the right is therefore also finite-dimensional over KK. \square

This lemma makes the following definition meaningful.

Definition 26.2: intersection multiplicity

Let KK be a field and let

F,GK[X,Y] F,G\in K[X,Y]

be two nonconstant polynomials with no common component, and let

PV(F)V(G)=V(F,G). P\in V(F)\cap V(G)=V(F,G).

The dimension

dimK(K[X,Y]𝔪P/(F,G)) \dim_K\left(K[X,Y]_{\mathfrak m_P}/(F,G)\right)

is called the intersection multiplicity of the curves V(F)V(F) and V(G)V(G) at PP. It is denoted by

multP(F,G)ormultP(V(F),V(G)). \operatorname{mult}_P(F,G) \qquad\text{or}\qquad \operatorname{mult}_P\bigl(V(F),V(G)\bigr).

Example 26.3: intersection of a curve with a line

Let

C=V(F) C=V(F)

and a line

L=V(cX+dY) L=V(cX+dY)

in the affine plane 𝔸K2\mathbb A_K^2 be given, where LL is not a component of CC. Let

P=(a,b)CL. P=(a,b)\in C\cap L.

The quotient ring

K[X,Y]𝔪P/(F,cX+dY) K[X,Y]_{\mathfrak m_P}/(F,cX+dY)

can be computed by solving the linear equation for one of the variables. If d0d\ne0, substitute

Y=cdX Y=-\frac cdX

into FF to obtain the one-variable polynomial

F̃(X)=F(X,cdX). \widetilde F(X)=F\left(X,-\frac cdX\right).

Thus

K[X,Y]𝔪P/(F,cX+dY)K[X](Xa)/(F̃). K[X,Y]_{\mathfrak m_P}/(F,cX+dY) \cong K[X]_{(X-a)}/(\widetilde F).

If d=0d=0, then c0c\ne0, so we solve for XX and obtain the analogous statement in YY, localised at (Yb)(Y-b). Equivalently, we may first form the one-variable quotient ring and then localise at the corresponding point.

Now suppose that KK is algebraically closed. In the case d0d\ne0, we have a factorisation

F̃=u(Xλ1)ν1(Xλk)νk,uK×. \widetilde F=u(X-\lambda_1)^{\nu_1}\cdots (X-\lambda_k)^{\nu_k},\qquad u\in K^\times.

Since PP is a zero, we must have a=λia=\lambda_i for some ii. On localising at (Xa)(X-a), all the other linear factors become units. The remaining factor gives a ring isomorphic to

K[X]/(Xλi)νi, K[X]/(X-\lambda_i)^{\nu_i},

which has dimension νi\nu_i over KK.

Editorial note - elimination cases and localisation. The source immediately replaces YY by (c/d)X-(c/d)X without stating the condition d0d\ne0, and then writes K[X]PK[X]_P. This edition separates the cases d0d\ne0 and c0c\ne0 and specifies the correct one-variable localisation ideal, namely (Xa)(X-a) or (Yb)(Y-b). The source also suppresses the nonzero leading coefficient in the factorisation of F̃\widetilde F; the scalar uu is displayed here and, being a unit, does not affect the quotient or its dimension.

Lemma 26.4: intersection with a line

Let KK be an algebraically closed field, let

F=Fm++FdK[X,Y],md, F=F_m+\cdots+F_d\in K[X,Y], \qquad m\leq d,

be the homogeneous decomposition of a polynomial, and let

L=V(aX+bY) L=V(aX+bY)

be a line through the origin PP which is not a component of V(F)V(F). Then

multP(L,V(F))mP(F)=m. \operatorname{mult}_P\bigl(L,V(F)\bigr) \geq m_P(F)=m.

In other words, the intersection multiplicity of a curve with a line is at least the multiplicity of the curve at the intersection point. If LL is not a tangent to the curve, equality holds.

Proof

Set

R=K[X,Y](X,Y)andH=aX+bY. R=K[X,Y]_{(X,Y)} \qquad\text{and}\qquad H=aX+bY.

Without loss of generality, suppose b0b\ne0, so that H=0H=0 can be written as Y=cXY=cX for some cKc\in K. If b=0b=0, then a0a\ne0, and the same argument applies after interchanging XX and YY.

First suppose that LL is not a tangent to V(F)V(F) at PP, and hence LL is not a component of V(Fm)V(F_m). Then

R/(F,H)K[X](X)/(Fm(X,cX)++Fd(X,cX)). R/(F,H) \cong K[X]_{(X)}/\bigl(F_m(X,cX)+\cdots+F_d(X,cX)\bigr).

Since Fm(X,cX)0F_m(X,cX)\ne0, the polynomial generating the ideal can be written as XmuX^m u with uu a unit. The quotient ring therefore has dimension mm over KK.

In the general case there is a least index ii, with midm\leq i\leq d, such that

Fi(X,cX)0. F_i(X,cX)\ne0.

Such an index must exist, since otherwise LL would be a component of V(F)V(F). By the same argument, the dimension of the quotient ring is imi\geq m. \square

Editorial note - choice of coordinates in the proof. The source assumes b0b\ne0 without explaining the other case. This edition states that the choice is without loss of generality, since for b=0b=0 the variables XX and YY can be interchanged.

Lemma 26.5: basic properties

Let KK be an algebraically closed field, let

F,GK[X,Y] F,G\in K[X,Y]

be two polynomials with no common component, and let P𝔸K2P\in\mathbb A_K^2. Then the following hold:

  1. multP(F,G)=0\operatorname{mult}_P(F,G)=0 if and only if PV(F,G)P\notin V(F,G).
  2. multP(F,G)=multP(G,F)\operatorname{mult}_P(F,G)=\operatorname{mult}_P(G,F).
  3. Intersection multiplicity is unchanged by an affine change of variables.
  4. If F=F1F2F=F_1F_2 and F2(P)0F_2(P)\ne0, then multP(F,G)=multP(F1,G). \operatorname{mult}_P(F,G)=\operatorname{mult}_P(F_1,G).
  5. For every HK[X,Y]H\in K[X,Y], multP(F,G)=multP(F,G+HF). \operatorname{mult}_P(F,G) =\operatorname{mult}_P(F,G+HF).

Proof. This is immediate.

The fourth assertion can also be phrased as follows: intersection multiplicity depends only on those components of FF and GG that pass through PP.

A circle and a curve tangent on the left and crossing transversely on the right

One transverse and one nontransverse intersection. Image created by Michael Larsen and uploaded to Commons by Maksim; CC BY-SA 3.0; local file: authority/assets/250px-Intersect3.png.

Definition 26.6: transverse intersection

Let

F,GK[X,Y]andPV(F,G). F,G\in K[X,Y] \qquad\text{and}\qquad P\in V(F,G).

The curves V(F)V(F) and V(G)V(G) are said to intersect transversely at PP if PP is a smooth point of both curves and their tangent lines at PP are distinct.

Lemma 26.7: characterisation of transverse intersection

Let KK be a field and let

F,GK[X,Y] F,G\in K[X,Y]

be two polynomials with no common component. Let

PV(F,G)𝔸K2 P\in V(F,G)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^2

be an intersection point. Then V(F)V(F) and V(G)V(G) intersect transversely at PP if and only if

multP(V(F),V(G))=1. \operatorname{mult}_P\bigl(V(F),V(G)\bigr)=1.

Proof

Let

R=K[X,Y]𝔪P R=K[X,Y]_{\mathfrak m_P}

be the local ring of the plane at PP. First suppose that the intersection is transverse. Both curves are smooth at PP, and by Lemma 23.2 in the source numbering,

B=R/(F) B=R/(F)

is a discrete valuation ring. Since the tangent lines are distinct, after a change of coordinates we may assume that the tangent to V(F)V(F) is V(Y)V(Y) and the tangent to V(G)V(G) is V(X)V(X). In BB, the element XX is a local uniformiser. Since

G=X+H,H𝔪P2, G=X+H, \qquad H\in\mathfrak m_P^2,

the element GG is also a local uniformiser in BB. Hence

B/(G)=K, B/(G)=K,

and the intersection multiplicity is one.

Conversely, suppose that

dimKR/(F,G)=1. \dim_K R/(F,G)=1.

Since PP is a KK-rational point, this quotient is the residue field KK. Its maximal ideal therefore vanishes, or equivalently,

(F,G)=𝔪P (F,G)=\mathfrak m_P

in RR. Passing to the quotient modulo 𝔪P2\mathfrak m_P^2, the linear terms of FF and GG generate the two-dimensional cotangent space 𝔪P/𝔪P2\mathfrak m_P/\mathfrak m_P^2. Both linear terms are therefore nonzero and linearly independent. Thus both curves are smooth at PP, and the kernels of the two linear forms, namely their tangent lines, are distinct. The intersection is therefore transverse. \square

Editorial note - correction to the converse proof. The source deduces smoothness of both curves by citing Lemma 26.4. However, that lemma concerns only the intersection of a curve with a line, and so does not justify the asserted conclusion for two arbitrary polynomials. Moreover, Lemma 26.4 is stated over an algebraically closed field, whereas Lemma 26.7 is stated over an arbitrary field. This edition replaces that step with a direct argument in 𝔪P/𝔪P2\mathfrak m_P/\mathfrak m_P^2, valid for the KK-rational point in the statement.

Theorem 26.8: additivity formula

Let

F,GK[X,Y] F,G\in K[X,Y]

be two polynomials with no common prime divisor, with factorisations

F=i=1mFiνiandG=j=1nGjμj. F=\prod_{i=1}^{m}F_i^{\nu_i} \qquad\text{and}\qquad G=\prod_{j=1}^{n}G_j^{\mu_j}.

Then, for every P𝔸K2P\in\mathbb A_K^2,

multP(F,G)=i,jνiμjmultP(Fi,Gj). \operatorname{mult}_P(F,G) =\sum_{i,j}\nu_i\mu_j\operatorname{mult}_P(F_i,G_j).

Away from intersection points, the multiplicities on both sides are understood to be zero, as in Lemma 26.5.

Editorial note - quantification of the point. The source displays PP in the formula without introducing or quantifying it. This edition states that the identity holds for every P𝔸K2P\in\mathbb A_K^2, with the zero convention outside the intersection.

Proof

By induction, it suffices to prove the special case F=F1F2F=F_1F_2. Set

R=K[X,Y]𝔪P. R=K[X,Y]_{\mathfrak m_P}.

Since

(F1F2,G)(F2,G), (F_1F_2,G)\subseteq(F_2,G),

there is a surjective map

R/(F1F2,G)R/(F2,G). R/(F_1F_2,G)\longrightarrow R/(F_2,G).

On the other hand, multiplication by F2F_2 induces an RR-module homomorphism

R/(F1,G)R/(F1F2,G). R/(F_1,G)\longrightarrow R/(F_1F_2,G).

We claim that there is a short exact sequence

0R/(F1,G)F2R/(F1F2,G)R/(F2,G)0. 0\longrightarrow R/(F_1,G) \mathop{\longrightarrow}^{\cdot F_2} R/(F_1F_2,G) \longrightarrow R/(F_2,G) \longrightarrow0.

Surjectivity of the right-hand map is clear, as is the fact that the composition of the two maps is zero. Suppose a class zR/(F1F2,G)z\in R/(F_1F_2,G) maps to zero on the right. In RR we can write

z=AF2+BG. z=AF_2+BG.

Thus AF2AF_2 represents the same class in R/(F1F2,G)R/(F_1F_2,G), and that class comes from the left.

Now suppose a class wR/(F1,G)w\in R/(F_1,G) maps to zero under multiplication by F2F_2. In RR this means

wF2=CF1F2+DG, wF_2=CF_1F_2+DG,

or

(wCF1)F2=DG. (w-CF_1)F_2=DG.

Since FF and GG have no common prime divisor, neither do F2F_2 and GG. Hence F2F_2 divides DD, giving

wCF1=D̃G. w-CF_1=\widetilde D G.

Thus w=0w=0 in R/(F1,G)R/(F_1,G), and the left-hand map is injective.

Additivity of dimension in short exact sequences now gives

multP(F1F2,G)=dimKR/(F1F2,G)=dimKR/(F1,G)+dimKR/(F2,G)=multP(F1,G)+multP(F2,G). \begin{aligned} \operatorname{mult}_P(F_1F_2,G) &=\dim_K R/(F_1F_2,G)\\ &=\dim_K R/(F_1,G)+\dim_K R/(F_2,G)\\ &=\operatorname{mult}_P(F_1,G)+\operatorname{mult}_P(F_2,G). \end{aligned}

Induction over all factors of FF and GG proves the formula. \square

Theorem 26.9: product decomposition of a zero-dimensional Noetherian ring

Let RR be a commutative Noetherian ring with only finitely many prime ideals

𝔪1,,𝔪n, \mathfrak m_1,\ldots,\mathfrak m_n,

all of which are maximal. Then there is a canonical isomorphism

RR𝔪1××R𝔪n. R\cong R_{\mathfrak m_1}\times\cdots\times R_{\mathfrak m_n}.

Proof

These maximal ideals are also the minimal prime ideals. Their intersection,

𝔞=i𝔪i, \mathfrak a=\bigcap_i\mathfrak m_i,

therefore consists entirely of nilpotent elements. Since RR is Noetherian, there is an ss such that

𝔞s=0. \mathfrak a^s=0.

For each ii, consider the localisation

RR𝔪i. R\longrightarrow R_{\mathfrak m_i}.

We claim that this localisation is isomorphic to

R/𝔞i,𝔞i:=𝔪is. R/\mathfrak a_i, \qquad \mathfrak a_i:=\mathfrak m_i^s.

Since

i𝔪ii𝔪i, \prod_i\mathfrak m_i\subseteq\bigcap_i\mathfrak m_i,

we obtain

(i𝔪i)s(i𝔪i)s, \left(\prod_i\mathfrak m_i\right)^s \subseteq \left(\bigcap_i\mathfrak m_i\right)^s,

and hence

𝔞1𝔞n=0. \mathfrak a_1\cdots\mathfrak a_n=0.

Take i=1i=1. For every j1j\ne1, there is an element

gj𝔪jwithgj𝔪1. g_j\in\mathfrak m_j \qquad\text{with}\qquad g_j\notin\mathfrak m_1.

For every f𝔞1f\in\mathfrak a_1, we have

fg2sgns=0. fg_2^s\cdots g_n^s=0.

Since g2sgns𝔪1g_2^s\cdots g_n^s\notin\mathfrak m_1, this element becomes a unit after localisation. Thus ff maps to zero, and we obtain a ring homomorphism

R/𝔞1R𝔪1. R/\mathfrak a_1\longrightarrow R_{\mathfrak m_1}.

The right-hand side is also a localisation of the quotient ring on the left. Distinct maximal ideals are pairwise comaximal, and this remains true of their powers. Hence 𝔞1\mathfrak a_1 is contained only in 𝔪1\mathfrak m_1. Thus R/𝔞1R/\mathfrak a_1 is itself a zero-dimensional local ring, so the map above is an isomorphism. The same argument applies for every ii.

The original map can therefore be written as

Ri=1nR/𝔞i. R\longrightarrow\prod_{i=1}^{n}R/\mathfrak a_i.

Since the ideals 𝔞i\mathfrak a_i are pairwise comaximal, the Chinese Remainder Theorem says that this map is an isomorphism. \square

Corollary 26.10: the global quotient as a product of local rings

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and let

F,GK[X,Y] F,G\in K[X,Y]

be two polynomials with no common prime divisor. Let

P1,,Pn𝔸K2 P_1,\ldots,P_n\in\mathbb A_K^2

be all the points of V(F,G)V(F,G), with corresponding maximal ideals 𝔪1,,𝔪n\mathfrak m_1,\ldots,\mathfrak m_n in K[X,Y]K[X,Y]. Then there is a canonical isomorphism

K[X,Y]/(F,G)i=1n(K[X,Y]𝔪i/(F,G)). K[X,Y]/(F,G) \cong \prod_{i=1}^{n}\left(K[X,Y]_{\mathfrak m_i}/(F,G)\right).

Proof

Since FF and GG have no common prime divisor, the ideal (F,G)(F,G) is contained in only finitely many prime ideals, all of them maximal. Consequently the quotient ring

K[X,Y]/(F,G) K[X,Y]/(F,G)

satisfies the hypotheses of Theorem 26.9. Since KK is algebraically closed, these maximal ideals correspond bijectively to the intersection points of V(F)V(F) and V(G)V(G). This gives the asserted isomorphism. \square

Editorial note - ring symbol in the proof. The source writes R/(F,G)R/(F,G) in this proof without defining RR. From the corollary’s statement and the application of Theorem 26.9, the intended ring is K[X,Y]/(F,G)K[X,Y]/(F,G); this edition writes it explicitly.

Theorem 26.11: sum of intersection multiplicities

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and let

F,GK[X,Y] F,G\in K[X,Y]

be two polynomials with no common prime divisor. Then

dimK(K[X,Y]/(F,G))=PmultP(F,G), \dim_K\bigl(K[X,Y]/(F,G)\bigr) =\sum_P\operatorname{mult}_P(F,G),

where the sum runs over all points PV(F,G)P\in V(F,G).

Proof

This follows directly from the isomorphism proved in Corollary 26.10, since the dimension of a finite product of vector spaces is the sum of the dimensions of its factors. \square

Finally, we record without proof the following theorem, which gives a bound relating intersection multiplicity to the multiplicities of the two curves.

Theorem 26.12: lower bound for intersection multiplicity

Let

F,GK[X,Y] F,G\in K[X,Y]

be two polynomials with no common component and let

PV(F,G). P\in V(F,G).

Then

multP(F,G)mP(F)mP(G). \operatorname{mult}_P(F,G) \geq m_P(F)\,m_P(G).

Editorial note - finiteness hypothesis. The source does not state that FF and GG must have no common component. Without this condition, the local quotient in the definition of intersection multiplicity can be infinite-dimensional. This edition adds the hypothesis already governing the entire discussion in this lecture.

Proof reference

See Fulton, Algebraic Curves, Chapter III.3.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: Current semantic course text and this translation: CC BY-SA 4.0. Intersect3.png: CC BY-SA 3.0. The official 2012 PDF file-description surface also records the legacy CC BY-SA 2.0 Germany route. No blanket relicensing claim is made. · Rights record: ASSET_CLOSURE-unit-26.json · Rights record: RIGHTS-unit-26.csv

Worksheet 26

Warm-up exercises

Exercise 26.1

For each nn, give an example of two plane algebraic curves familiar from school which intersect at exactly one point with intersection multiplicity nn.

Exercise 26.2

Consider the curve given by

y=2x4+3x2x+1 y=2x^4+3x^2-x+1

with the point

P=(1,5). P=(1,5).

Find a change of coordinates that takes PP to (0,0)(0,0) and the tangent line at PP to the xx-axis.

Exercise 26.3 (3 points)

Let the monomial plane curve

C=V(XdYe), C=V\left(X^d-Y^e\right),

be given, with dd and ee coprime. Compute the intersection multiplicity of this curve with every line GG through the origin which is not a component of CC.

Editorial note - the common-component case. The source asks for every line through the origin. If d=e=1d=e=1, the curve C=V(XY)C=V(X-Y) itself is one of these lines, and the finite intersection multiplicity defined in the lecture is not available for a curve intersecting itself. This edition excludes lines which are components of CC.

Exercise 26.4 ★

Determine the intersection multiplicity at the origin of the folium of Descartes

C=V(X3+Y33XY) C=V\left(X^3+Y^3-3XY\right)

with every affine line in the affine plane. Assume that the characteristic of the field is not 33.

Exercises to submit

Exercise 26.5 (4 points)

Compute the intersection multiplicity of the two monomial curves

C=V(X5Y2)andD=V(X7Y3) C=V\left(X^5-Y^2\right) \qquad\text{and}\qquad D=V\left(X^7-Y^3\right)

at the origin.

Exercise 26.6 (4 points)

Let KK be a field, and let

C=V(F)andD=V(G) C=V(F) \qquad\text{and}\qquad D=V(G)

be two plane algebraic curves with no common component. Let

PC P\in C

be a smooth point, so that the local ring

R=K[X,Y]𝔪P/(F) R=K[X,Y]_{\mathfrak m_P}/(F)

is a discrete valuation ring. Show that

multP(F,G)=ord(G), \operatorname{mult}_P(F,G)=\operatorname{ord}(G),

where ord\operatorname{ord} denotes the order of the nonzero image of GG in the valuation ring RR.

Editorial note - finiteness condition. The source does not state that the two curves must have no common component. This condition, or locally the condition that the image of GG in RR is nonzero, is necessary for both sides to be finite numbers. This edition states it explicitly.

Exercise 26.7 (4 points)

In the real plane, let r>0r>0. Consider the parabola

C=V(YX2) C=V\left(Y-X^2\right)

and the circle DD with centre (0,r)(0,r) and radius rr, namely

D=V(X2+(Yr)2r2). D=V\left(X^2+(Y-r)^2-r^2\right).

Determine the intersection points of CC and DD and their respective intersection multiplicities.

Editorial note - geometric scope. The source specifies a centre and radius without fixing a base field or a condition on rr. To give “a circle of radius rr” its usual geometric meaning and prevent degeneration to a point, this edition interprets the exercise over \mathbb R with r>0r>0 and writes out the circle’s equation.

Exercise 26.8 (4 points)

For each aa\in\mathbb C, describe the quotient ring

[X,Y]/(XY1,X2+Y2a) \mathbb C[X,Y]/\left(XY-1,X^2+Y^2-a\right)

as a product of local rings. Also give the dimension of each factor ring as a vector space over \mathbb C.

Exercise 26.9 (4 points)

For the curve

V(X3+Y33XY+1), V\left(X^3+Y^3-3XY+1\right),

determine its singular points over \mathbb R and over \mathbb C. For each point, give its multiplicity and tangent lines.

Exercise 26.10 (3 points)

Consider the curve

y=2x4+3x2x+1 y=2x^4+3x^2-x+1

at the point

P=(1,5), P=(1,5),

in the coordinates found in Exercise 26.2. Determine the power series for the curve at PP along the tangent line.

The following exercise is probably more difficult.

Exercise 26.11 (8 points)

Let two distinct monomial plane curves

C=V(XdYe)andD=V(XrYs), C=V\left(X^d-Y^e\right) \qquad\text{and}\qquad D=V\left(X^r-Y^s\right),

be given, with d,ed,e coprime and r,sr,s coprime. Compute the intersection multiplicity of the two curves at the origin.

Editorial note - zero-locus symbol. In the second equation, the source writes D=(XrYs)D=(X^r-Y^s) and omits the symbol VV, although the text calls DD a curve. This edition restores the intended expression, D=V(XrYs)D=V(X^r-Y^s).

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Public Solutions to Worksheet 26

At the frozen revision boundary, the source provides a public solution only for Exercise 26.4. The frozen authority query reports the other ten candidate solution pages as absent. No additional solutions have been created for this edition.

Solution to Exercise 26.4

If a line does not pass through the origin, its intersection multiplicity with the folium at the origin is zero. Thus it suffices to consider lines through the origin. These can all be written as

V(YaX),aK, V(Y-aX),\qquad a\in K,

or as the vertical line V(X)V(X).

For a=0a=0, that is, the line V(Y)V(Y), the quotient ring is

K[X,Y](X,Y)/(Y,X3+Y33XY)K[X](X)/(X3). \begin{aligned} K[X,Y]_{(X,Y)}/(Y,X^3+Y^3-3XY) &\cong K[X]_{(X)}/(X^3). \end{aligned}

This ring has dimension 33 over KK, so the intersection multiplicity is 33. Since the equation of the folium is symmetric in XX and YY, the same result holds for the line V(X)V(X).

Now take a line V(YaX)V(Y-aX) with a0a\ne0. Then

K[X,Y](X,Y)/(YaX,X3+Y33XY)K[X](X)/(X3+a3X33aX2)=K[X](X)/(X2(3a+(1+a3)X)). \begin{aligned} K[X,Y]_{(X,Y)}/(Y-aX,X^3+Y^3-3XY) &\cong K[X]_{(X)}/(X^3+a^3X^3-3aX^2)\\ &=K[X]_{(X)}/\left(X^2\bigl(-3a+(1+a^3)X\bigr)\right). \end{aligned}

Since char(K)3\operatorname{char}(K)\ne3 and a0a\ne0, the factor

3a+(1+a3)X -3a+(1+a^3)X

is a unit in K[X](X)K[X]_{(X)}. Hence the quotient ring is isomorphic to

K[X](X)/(X2), K[X]_{(X)}/(X^2),

which has dimension 22. Thus the lines V(X)V(X) and V(Y)V(Y) have intersection multiplicity 33 at the origin, whereas every other line through the origin has intersection multiplicity 22.

Editorial note - list of lines through the origin. The source states that these lines have the form V(YaX)V(Y-aX) or V(Y)V(Y), thereby listing V(Y)V(Y) twice and omitting the vertical line V(X)V(X). The source’s next step itself treats V(X)V(X) by symmetry. This edition restores the intended list: V(YaX)V(Y-aX) for aKa\in K, together with V(X)V(X). The source also leaves the number after “KK-dimension” blank in the V(Y)V(Y) case; the displayed quotient has basis 1,X,X21,X,X^2, so the dimension 33 supplied here agrees with the source’s stated multiplicity.

Back to Exercise 26.4

English Markdown source · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0 for the frozen semantic source; official 2012 PDF witnesses retain their recorded CC BY-SA 2.0 Germany notice

Lecture 27: Projective Space

Projective space

A dandelion with many lines and stalks radiating from a single centre

Lines through a point. Waugsberg; historical course label: CC BY-SA 2.5; frozen Commons description: CC BY-SA 3.0. Both notices are retained; local file: authority/assets/Loewenzahn_20.jpg.

Definition 27.1: projective space

Let KK be a field. The nn-dimensional projective space

Kn \mathbb P_K^n

consists of all lines through the origin in the affine space 𝔸Kn+1\mathbb A_K^{n+1}, each such line being regarded as a point. Such a projective point is represented by homogeneous coordinates

(a0,a1,,an), (a_0,a_1,\ldots,a_n),

where the aia_i are not all zero. Two such coordinate tuples represent the same point precisely when one is obtained from the other by multiplication by a scalar

λK×. \lambda\in K^\times.

We shall gradually equip projective space with additional structures.

Theorem 27.2: the standard open cover by affine spaces

Let KK be a field, let Kn\mathbb P_K^n be a projective space, and let

i{0,1,,n}. i\in\{0,1,\ldots,n\}.

Indexing the source coordinates by all jij\ne i, there is a natural map

φi:𝔸KnKn,(u0,,uî,,un)[u0::ui1:1:ui+1::un]. \begin{aligned} \varphi_i:\mathbb A_K^n&\longrightarrow\mathbb P_K^n,\\ (u_0,\ldots,\widehat{u_i},\ldots,u_n) &\longmapsto [u_0:\cdots:u_{i-1}:1:u_{i+1}:\cdots:u_n]. \end{aligned}

This map is injective and induces a bijection onto the set of projective points whose iith homogeneous coordinate is nonzero, namely

D+(Xi):={[x0::xn]Knxi0}. D_+(X_i) := \{[x_0:\cdots:x_n]\in\mathbb P_K^n\mid x_i\ne0\}.

Its inverse is given by

[x0::xn](x0xi,,xi1xi,xi+1xi,,xnxi). [x_0:\cdots:x_n] \longmapsto \left( \frac{x_0}{x_i},\ldots, \frac{x_{i-1}}{x_i}, \frac{x_{i+1}}{x_i},\ldots, \frac{x_n}{x_i} \right).

Projective space is covered by these n+1n+1 affine spaces. The complement of the affine chart

𝔸KnD+(Xi)Kn \mathbb A_K^n\cong D_+(X_i)\subseteq\mathbb P_K^n

is a projective space of dimension n1n-1.

Editorial note - chart insertion indices. The source writes the source coordinates as (u1,,un)(u_1,\ldots,u_n) and then inserts 11 “in position ii” for i{0,,n}i\in\{0,\ldots,n\}. This notation is ambiguous at the endpoints and does not display a coordinate u0u_0. This edition indexes coordinates by {0,,n}\{i}\{0,\ldots,n\}\setminus\{i\} and uses a hat to mark the omitted coordinate.

Proof

The map is well defined because the coordinate 11 ensures that at least one homogeneous coordinate is nonzero. If

[u0::ui1:1:ui+1::un]=[v0::vi1:1:vi+1::vn], [u_0:\cdots:u_{i-1}:1:u_{i+1}:\cdots:u_n] = [v_0:\cdots:v_{i-1}:1:v_{i+1}:\cdots:v_n],

then some λK×\lambda\in K^\times multiplies every coordinate on the right. Comparing the iith coordinates gives 1=λ1=\lambda, so all the other coordinates agree and the map is injective.

On D+(Xi)D_+(X_i), every point has exactly one representative with iith coordinate equal to 11, obtained by dividing all coordinates by xix_i. This proves the formula for the inverse. Every projective point has at least one nonzero coordinate, so the charts D+(Xi)D_+(X_i) cover Kn\mathbb P_K^n.

The complement of D+(Xi)D_+(X_i) is

V+(Xi)={[x0::xi1:0:xi+1::xn]at least one xj0}. V_+(X_i) = \{[x_0:\cdots:x_{i-1}:0:x_{i+1}:\cdots:x_n] \mid \text{at least one }x_j\ne0\}.

Retaining the identification of tuples that differ by a scalar factor, this set is Kn1\mathbb P_K^{n-1}. \square

First of three diagrams of affine charts on the projective line

Illustration of the projective line, part 1. Darapti, CC BY-SA 3.0; local file: authority/assets/Projektiveline1bb.jpg.

Second of three diagrams of affine charts on the projective line

Illustration of the projective line, part 2. Darapti, CC BY-SA 3.0; local file: authority/assets/Projektiveline2bb.jpg.

Third of three diagrams of affine charts on the projective line

Illustration of the projective line, part 3. Darapti, CC BY-SA 3.0; local file: authority/assets/Projektiveline3bb.jpg.

Example 27.3: the projective line

The projective line K1\mathbb P_K^1 is the set of lines through the origin in the affine plane 𝔸K2\mathbb A_K^2. Such a line is either the xx-axis or intersects the line

V(y1) V(y-1)

at exactly one point. The line V(y1)V(y-1) is parallel to the xx-axis and passes through (0,1)(0,1). Conversely, every point

PV(y1)𝔸K1 P\in V(y-1)\cong\mathbb A_K^1

uniquely determines a line through the origin. Thus the projective line consists of an affine line and one additional point, called the point “at infinity”.

This point is not intrinsically different from the other projective points. Take any line GG through the origin and a parallel line LGL\ne G. The line LL can play the role of the affine line, while GG represents the point at infinity as seen from that affine chart.

First of four diagrams of affine charts and points at infinity in the projective plane

Illustration of the projective plane, part 1. Darapti, CC BY-SA 3.0; local file: authority/assets/Projektiveplane1bb.jpg.

Second of four diagrams of affine charts and points at infinity in the projective plane

Illustration of the projective plane, part 2. Darapti, CC BY-SA 3.0; local file: authority/assets/Projektiveplane2bb.jpg.

Third of four diagrams of affine charts and points at infinity in the projective plane

Illustration of the projective plane, part 3. Darapti, CC BY-SA 3.0; local file: authority/assets/Projektiveplane3bb.jpg.

Fourth of four diagrams of affine charts and points at infinity in the projective plane

Illustration of the projective plane, part 4. Darapti, CC BY-SA 3.0; local file: authority/assets/Projektiveplane4bb.jpg.

Example 27.4: the projective plane

Points in the projective plane K2\mathbb P_K^2 correspond to lines through the origin in the affine space 𝔸K3\mathbb A_K^3. Each point of the projective plane is represented by a tuple

(x,y,z), (x,y,z),

where x,y,zx,y,z are not all zero. Two tuples are identified if one is obtained from the other by multiplication by a nonzero scalar. The projective plane is covered by three affine planes

D+(X),D+(Y),D+(Z). D_+(X),\qquad D_+(Y),\qquad D_+(Z).

The chart D+(Z)D_+(Z) consists of all points with nonzero third coordinate. Multiplying the coordinates by z1z^{-1} gives the representative

(xz,yz,zz)=(u,v,1), \left(\frac{x}{z},\frac{y}{z},\frac{z}{z}\right) =(u,v,1),

so this chart is indeed an affine plane. Its complement is V+(Z)V_+(Z), the set of points with third coordinate zero. Retaining scalar identification makes V+(Z)V_+(Z) a projective line.

A point (x,y,0)(x,y,0) on this line, together with the origin (0,0,1)(0,0,1) of D+(Z)D_+(Z), determines the direction (x,y)(x,y) of a line through the origin in the affine plane. The homogeneous equation of this line is

yXxY=0, yX-xY=0,

or V+(yXxY)V_+(yX-xY). Thus we can picture the projective plane as an affine plane with one additional point at infinity for every direction of a line through the origin.

Perspective diagram with projection rays joining an object, a projection centre, and an image plane

Principle of perspective projection. Historical course credit: Fantagu; the frozen Commons description credits the drawing to Joachim Baecker and identifies Fantagu as the uploader. CC BY-SA 3.0; local file: authority/assets/Perspective_Projection_Principle.jpg.

Zeros of homogeneous polynomials

For an arbitrary polynomial

FK[X0,,Xn], F\in K[X_0,\ldots,X_n],

the assertion that a point PKnP\in\mathbb P_K^n is a zero of FF is generally not well defined. The value can change when a coordinate representative of PP is multiplied by a scalar. The situation is different for homogeneous polynomials.

Lemma 27.5: vanishing of a homogeneous polynomial is well defined

Let KK be a field and let

FK[X0,,Xn] F\in K[X_0,\ldots,X_n]

be a homogeneous polynomial of degree dd. For every (x0,,xn)Kn+1(x_0,\ldots,x_n)\in K^{n+1} and λK\lambda\in K,

F(λx0,,λxn)=λdF(x0,,xn). F(\lambda x_0,\ldots,\lambda x_n) = \lambda^d F(x_0,\ldots,x_n).

In particular, FF vanishes at (x0,,xn)(x_0,\ldots,x_n) if and only if it vanishes at λ(x0,,xn)\lambda(x_0,\ldots,x_n) for every λ0\lambda\ne0.

Proof

It suffices to check each homogeneous monomial. For

X0d0Xndn,i=0ndi=d, X_0^{d_0}\cdots X_n^{d_n}, \qquad \sum_{i=0}^{n}d_i=d,

we obtain

(λX0)d0(λXn)dn=(λd0X0d0)(λdnXndn)=λdX0d0Xndn. \begin{aligned} (\lambda X_0)^{d_0}\cdots(\lambda X_n)^{d_n} &=(\lambda^{d_0}X_0^{d_0})\cdots (\lambda^{d_n}X_n^{d_n})\\ &=\lambda^d X_0^{d_0}\cdots X_n^{d_n}. \end{aligned}

Linearity then gives the assertion for FF. \square

The lemma makes the property “vanishes or does not vanish” well defined at a projective point. However, the numerical value of a homogeneous polynomial at a projective point need not be intrinsically defined. In general, a homogeneous polynomial does not define a function on projective space by evaluation of representatives.

Editorial note - scope of the evaluation claim. The source makes the last assertion without qualification. Constant polynomials, for example, do give well-defined values, so this edition states it as a general warning rather than an assertion about every homogeneous polynomial.

Definition 27.6: projective zero locus

Let KK be a field and let

FK[X0,,Xn] F\in K[X_0,\ldots,X_n]

be a homogeneous polynomial. The set

V+(F)={P=[x0::xn]KnF(x0,,xn)=0} V_+(F) = \{P=[x_0:\cdots:x_n]\in\mathbb P_K^n \mid F(x_0,\ldots,x_n)=0\}

is called the projective zero locus of FF.

To determine V+(F)V_+(F), we can use the disjoint decomposition

Kn=D+(X0)V+(X0), \mathbb P_K^n=D_+(X_0)\mathbin{\uplus}V_+(X_0),

and likewise for any other variable. In the chart D+(X0)𝔸KnD_+(X_0)\cong\mathbb A_K^n, we set X0=1X_0=1 and solve

F(1,X1,,Xn)=0. F(1,X_1,\ldots,X_n)=0.

The polynomial may become inhomogeneous, one variable is eliminated, and the ambient dimension stays the same, but the problem becomes affine. On V+(X0)Kn1V_+(X_0)\cong\mathbb P_K^{n-1}, we set X0=0X_0=0 and solve

F(0,X1,,Xn)=0. F(0,X_1,\ldots,X_n)=0.

Here one variable is again eliminated, the polynomial remains homogeneous, and the dimension of the projective space decreases by one.

Editorial note - dehomogenisation. The source displays the malformed expressions F{1/X0}F\{1/X_0\} and F{0/X0}F\{0/X_0\}. The immediately preceding prose specifies the substitutions X0=1X_0=1 and X0=0X_0=0. This edition writes the intended polynomials explicitly as F(1,X1,,Xn)F(1,X_1,\ldots,X_n) and F(0,X1,,Xn)F(0,X_1,\ldots,X_n).

Example 27.7: homogeneous linear polynomials

The simplest homogeneous polynomials in K[X0,,Xn]K[X_0,\ldots,X_n] are those of degree one,

F=a0X0+a1X1++anXn, F=a_0X_0+a_1X_1+\cdots+a_nX_n,

with coefficients not all zero. The affine zero locus V(F)V(F) in 𝔸Kn+1\mathbb A_K^{n+1} is an nn-dimensional affine space through the origin. The projective zero locus V+(F)V_+(F) in Kn\mathbb P_K^n is isomorphic to a projective space of dimension n1n-1.

Editorial note - index of the linear term. The source writes a0X0+a1X0++anXna_0X_0+a_1X_0+\cdots+a_nX_n. The second term must use X1X_1 for the expression to be a general linear form in the variables X0,,XnX_0,\ldots,X_n.

Definition 27.8: homogeneous ideal

Let KK be a field and let

𝔞K[X1,,Xn] \mathfrak a\subseteq K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]

be an ideal. The ideal 𝔞\mathfrak a is called homogeneous if, for every H𝔞H\in\mathfrak a with homogeneous decomposition

H=iHi, H=\sum_i H_i,

every homogeneous component HiH_i also belongs to 𝔞\mathfrak a.

Definition 27.9: projective variety

For a homogeneous ideal

𝔞K[X0,,Xn], \mathfrak a\subseteq K[X_0,\ldots,X_n],

the set

V+(𝔞)={PKnF(P)=0 for every homogeneous F𝔞} V_+(\mathfrak a) = \{P\in\mathbb P_K^n \mid F(P)=0\text{ for every homogeneous }F\in\mathfrak a\}

is called the projective zero locus or projective variety of 𝔞\mathfrak a.

Definition 27.10: the Zariski topology on projective space

Projective space Kn\mathbb P_K^n is equipped with the Zariski topology by declaring the sets

V+(𝔞)Kn, V_+(\mathfrak a)\subseteq\mathbb P_K^n,

for every homogeneous ideal

𝔞K[X0,,Xn], \mathfrak a\subseteq K[X_0,\ldots,X_n],

to be the closed sets.

Thus the open sets of projective space have the form

D+(𝔞):=Kn\V+(𝔞). D_+(\mathfrak a) := \mathbb P_K^n\setminus V_+(\mathfrak a).

In particular, each standard open set D+(Xi)D_+(X_i) is isomorphic to an affine space of dimension nn.

Remark 27.11: projective points are closed

Let

P=[a0::an]Kn. P=[a_0:\cdots:a_n]\in\mathbb P_K^n.

The point PP is closed. More precisely,

P=V+(𝔞P),𝔞P=(aiXjajXi0i,jn). P=V_+(\mathfrak a_P), \qquad \mathfrak a_P = (a_iX_j-a_jX_i\mid 0\leq i,j\leq n).

If a00a_0\ne0, this ideal can also be written as

𝔞P=(Xjaja0X0|j0); \mathfrak a_P = \left(X_j-\frac{a_j}{a_0}X_0\ \middle|\ j\ne0\right);

the generators aiXjajXia_iX_j-a_jX_i with i0i\ne0 are then redundant. This ideal is clearly homogeneous, and PV+(𝔞P)P\in V_+(\mathfrak a_P). If

Q=[b0::bn]V+(𝔞P), Q=[b_0:\cdots:b_n]\in V_+(\mathfrak a_P),

then, since a00a_0\ne0,

bjaja0b0=0 b_j-\frac{a_j}{a_0}b_0=0

for every jj. Hence

(b0,,bn)=b0a0(a0,,an), (b_0,\ldots,b_n) = \frac{b_0}{a_0}(a_0,\ldots,a_n),

so Q=PQ=P as projective points.

The ideal 𝔞P\mathfrak a_P is not a maximal ideal in the polynomial ring. It is a homogeneous prime ideal: the quotient by it is isomorphic to a polynomial ring in one variable. In 𝔸Kn+1\mathbb A_K^{n+1}, this ideal defines the line through the origin corresponding to the projective point PP.

Editorial note - maximality claim. The source states that 𝔞P\mathfrak a_P is maximal among all homogeneous ideals other than the irrelevant ideal (X0,,Xn)(X_0,\ldots,X_n). This claim is false without further conditions. For example, after choosing a00a_0\ne0, the homogeneous ideal 𝔞P+(X02)\mathfrak a_P+(X_0^2) lies strictly between 𝔞P\mathfrak a_P and the irrelevant ideal. This edition retains the correct and necessary statement: 𝔞P\mathfrak a_P is a homogeneous prime ideal and defines exactly the projective point PP.

There is no natural map from all of 𝔸Kn+1\mathbb A_K^{n+1} to Kn\mathbb P_K^n, since the origin does not determine a line. There is, however, a natural map

𝔸Kn+1\{0}Kn,(x0,,xn)[x0::xn]. \begin{aligned} \mathbb A_K^{n+1}\setminus\{0\}&\longrightarrow\mathbb P_K^n,\\ (x_0,\ldots,x_n)&\longmapsto[x_0:\cdots:x_n]. \end{aligned}

This map sends a nonzero point to the line through that point and the origin. It is called the canonical map or cone map. The inverse image of D+(Xi)D_+(X_i) under this map is D(Xi)D(X_i).

Projective space over \mathbb R and \mathbb C

We now develop a topological picture of projective space for 𝕂=\mathbb K=\mathbb R and 𝕂=\mathbb K=\mathbb C. The real nn-dimensional sphere is

Sn={xn+1x=1}, S^n = \{x\in\mathbb R^{n+1}\mid\lVert x\rVert=1\},

where

x=x02++xn2 \lVert x\rVert=\sqrt{x_0^2+\cdots+x_n^2}

is the Euclidean norm.

Theorem 27.12: representation by spheres

Real projective space n\mathbb P_{\mathbb R}^n can be represented by the sphere Snn+1S^n\subseteq\mathbb R^{n+1} modulo the equivalence relation identifying each pair of antipodal points.

Complex projective space n\mathbb P_{\mathbb C}^n can be represented by the sphere

S2n+12n+2n+1 S^{2n+1}\subseteq\mathbb R^{2n+2}\cong\mathbb C^{n+1}

modulo the equivalence relation identifying z,wS2n+1z,w\in S^{2n+1} if

z=λw z=\lambda w

for some λS1\lambda\in S^1\subseteq\mathbb C.

Proof

We treat the real and complex cases together. Each point of the sphere SS determines a real or complex line through the origin in the ambient space, and hence a projective point. Two points z,wSz,w\in S determine the same line precisely when

z=λw z=\lambda w

for some λ𝕂\lambda\in\mathbb K. Multiplicativity of the norm gives

z=|λ|w. \lVert z\rVert=|\lambda|\lVert w\rVert.

Since both norms equal one, |λ|=1|\lambda|=1. In the real case this means λ=±1\lambda=\pm1, so the identified points form antipodal pairs. In the complex case it means λS1\lambda\in S^1\subseteq\mathbb C. \square

Altogether, we have surjective maps

Snn+1\{0}n S^n\subseteq\mathbb R^{n+1}\setminus\{0\} \longrightarrow\mathbb P_{\mathbb R}^n

in the real case, and

S2n+12n+2\{0}n+1\{0}n S^{2n+1}\subseteq\mathbb R^{2n+2}\setminus\{0\} \cong\mathbb C^{n+1}\setminus\{0\} \longrightarrow\mathbb P_{\mathbb C}^n

in the complex case. Real and complex projective spaces are equipped with the quotient topology of the metric topology of the real vector space. Thus U𝕂nU\subseteq\mathbb P_{\mathbb K}^n is declared open if its inverse image in 𝔸𝕂n+1\{0}\mathbb A_{\mathbb K}^{n+1}\setminus\{0\} is open. Equivalently, its inverse image on the corresponding sphere is open. With this metric or natural topology, the maps above are continuous.

Lemma 27.13: open charts and manifold structure

For real and complex projective spaces, the sets D+(Xi)D_+(X_i) are open in the natural topology and homeomorphic to n\mathbb R^n and n\mathbb C^n, respectively. In particular, real and complex projective spaces are topological manifolds.

Proof

The inverse image of D+(Xi)D_+(X_i) under the canonical map

𝔸𝕂n+1\{0}𝕂n \mathbb A_{\mathbb K}^{n+1}\setminus\{0\} \longrightarrow\mathbb P_{\mathbb K}^n

is D(Xi)D(X_i), the complement of an nn-dimensional vector subspace, and is therefore open in the natural topology. Consider the continuous map

𝕂nV(Xi1)D(Xi)D+(Xi). \mathbb K^n \cong V(X_i-1) \subset D(X_i) \longrightarrow D_+(X_i).

This map is bijective. To show that it is a homeomorphism, it suffices to show that it is open. Let

UV(Xi1)𝕂n U\subseteq V(X_i-1)\cong\mathbb K^n

be open and let UU' be its image in D+(Xi)D_+(X_i). The inverse image of UU' in D(Xi)D(X_i) is the cone

U={λPλ𝕂×,PU}. U''=\{\lambda P\mid \lambda\in\mathbb K^\times, P\in U\}.

The map

𝕂××V(Xi1)D(Xi),(λ,P)λP \begin{aligned} \mathbb K^\times\times V(X_i-1)&\longrightarrow D(X_i),\\ (\lambda,P)&\longmapsto\lambda P \end{aligned}

is a homeomorphism, with inverse

Q(Qi,QQi). Q\longmapsto\left(Q_i,\frac{Q}{Q_i}\right).

Consequently,

U𝕂××U U''\cong\mathbb K^\times\times U

is open in D(Xi)D(X_i). By the definition of the quotient topology, UU' is open. Thus the bijection is a homeomorphism. \square

Editorial note - neighbourhood in the cone. The source chooses an open ball BB around PP and then asserts without qualification that its cone lies in UU''. For this conclusion to hold, the ball must be chosen with PBUP\in B\subseteq U. This edition gives an equivalent global argument using the homeomorphism 𝕂××V(Xi1)D(Xi)\mathbb K^\times\times V(X_i-1)\cong D(X_i), which also closes this gap.

A blue sphere shown in three dimensions, representing the complex projective line

The projective line over \mathbb C is a sphere. Historical course credit: Kieff; the frozen Commons description credits Lucas Vieira (LucasVB). Public domain; local file: authority/assets/Blue-sphere.png.

Corollary 27.14: compactness and the Hausdorff property

Real and complex projective spaces are compact and Hausdorff in their natural topology.

Proof

For each such projective space, there is a continuous surjective map from the corresponding sphere. The sphere is closed and bounded in a finite-dimensional real vector space, and is therefore compact by the Heine–Borel Theorem. A continuous image of a compact space is compact. Hence real and complex projective spaces are compact.

Now take two distinct points

P,Q𝕂n,𝕂{,}. P,Q\in\mathbb P_{\mathbb K}^n, \qquad \mathbb K\in\{\mathbb R,\mathbb C\}.

Since 𝕂\mathbb K is infinite, there is a homogeneous linear form LL vanishing at neither PP nor QQ. Indeed, in the dual space the forms vanishing at PP and those vanishing at QQ each form a proper hyperplane, and the union of these two hyperplanes does not fill the entire dual space.

By a linear change of coordinates, LL can be made one of the homogeneous coordinates. Then

P,QD+(L)𝕂n. P,Q\in D_+(L)\cong\mathbb K^n.

By Lemma 27.13, this chart is homeomorphic to a real or complex Euclidean space and is therefore Hausdorff. Hence PP and QQ have disjoint open neighbourhoods. Thus the whole projective space is Hausdorff. \square

Editorial note - two points in one chart. The source assumes that any two projective points lie together in one of the standard charts D+(Xi)D_+(X_i). This is false, for example for [1:0][1:0] and [0:1][0:1] in 1\mathbb P^1. This edition chooses a linear form LL vanishing at neither point and uses a change of coordinates to obtain an affine chart D+(L)D_+(L) containing both.

Editorial note - broken reference. In the compactness argument, the source refers to “Fakt *****”. This edition replaces the broken placeholder with the standard result actually used: a continuous image of a compact space is compact.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: Current semantic course text and this translation: CC BY-SA 4.0. Unit 27 reader media retain their component-specific licenses and public-domain status as recorded in authority/RIGHTS-unit-27.csv. No blanket relicensing claim is made. · Rights record: ASSET_CLOSURE-unit-27.json · Rights record: RIGHTS-unit-27.csv

Worksheet 27

Warm-up exercises

Exercise 27.1

Define an equivalence relation on the set

𝔸Kn+1\{0} \mathbb A_K^{n+1}\setminus\{0\}

such that its quotient by this equivalence relation is nn-dimensional projective space.

Exercise 27.2

Define the notion of a projective linear subspace of a projective space Kn\mathbb P_K^n.

Exercise 27.3

Let

𝔞K[X1,,Xn] \mathfrak a\subseteq K[X_1,\ldots,X_n]

be an ideal. Show that 𝔞\mathfrak a is homogeneous if and only if 𝔞\mathfrak a is generated by homogeneous elements.

Exercise 27.4

Let

K=𝔽q K=\mathbb F_q

be a finite field with qq elements. Compute the number of elements of projective space Kn\mathbb P_K^n in two different ways.

The following three exercises concern the Zariski topology on projective spaces.

Exercise 27.5

Show that the Zariski topology on projective space is indeed a topology.

Exercise 27.6

Let KK be an infinite field and let Kn\mathbb P_K^n be projective space. Characterise the homogeneous ideals 𝔞\mathfrak a satisfying

D+(𝔞)=. D_+(\mathfrak a)=\varnothing.

Exercise 27.7

Let KK be an infinite field. Show that projective space Kn\mathbb P_K^n is irreducible.

Exercises to submit

Exercise 27.8 (3 points)

Show that two distinct points PP and QQ in the projective plane uniquely determine a projective line containing both. How is the equation of this line computed from the coordinates of the two points?

Determine the homogeneous equation of the line through the points

(2,3,7)and(1,5,2). (2,3,7) \qquad\text{and}\qquad (1,5,-2).

Exercise 27.9 (3 points)

Let Kn\mathbb P_K^n be a projective space of dimension nn, and let

X,YKn X,Y\subseteq\mathbb P_K^n

be projective linear subspaces of dimensions rr and ss, respectively. Suppose that

r+sn. r+s\geq n.

Show that

XY. X\cap Y\ne\varnothing.

Exercise 27.10 (3 points)

Let KK be an infinite field and let

P1,,Pm P_1,\ldots,P_m

be a finite collection of points in projective space Kn\mathbb P_K^n. Show that there is a homogeneous linear form

LK[X0,,Xn] L\in K[X_0,\ldots,X_n]

such that all these points belong to the open set D+(L)D_+(L).

The next exercise requires an additional definition.

For a homogeneous ideal II in

R=A[X0,,Xn] R=A[X_0,\ldots,X_n]

with the standard grading, the saturation of II is defined as

{rR|there exists k such that r(R+)kI}. \left\{r\in R\ \middle|\ \text{there exists }k\text{ such that } r(R_+)^k\subseteq I\right\}.

Here R+R_+ is the irrelevant ideal

d1Rd=(X0,,Xn). \bigoplus_{d\geq1}R_d=(X_0,\ldots,X_n).

Exercise 27.11 (3 points)

Let AA be a commutative ring and let

R=A[X0,,Xn] R=A[X_0,\ldots,X_n]

be the polynomial ring with the standard grading. Show that the saturation of a homogeneous ideal II is again a homogeneous ideal.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0

Public Solutions to Worksheet 27

At the frozen revision boundary, the source provides no public solutions for any of the eleven exercises in Worksheet 27. The frozen authority query checked all eleven exact candidate solution-page titles and reported all of them absent. No additional solutions have been created for this edition.

The complete negative evidence is bound in authority/wikiversity/unit-27/ORDERED_EXERCISE_MAP.json and the API witness authority/wikiversity/unit-27/worksheet-solution-candidates-api.json.

English Markdown source · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0 for the frozen semantic source; official 2012 PDF witnesses retain their component notices recorded in the Unit 27 rights ledger

Lecture 28: Projective Varieties and Projective Plane Curves

Projective varieties

Definition 28.1: projective variety

A projective variety is a Zariski-closed subset

V+(𝔞)Kn, V_+(\mathfrak a)\subseteq\mathbb P_K^n,

where 𝔞\mathfrak a is a homogeneous ideal in K[X0,X1,,Xn]K[X_0,X_1,\ldots,X_n]. Thus a projective variety YY is the zero locus in projective space of a finite collection of homogeneous polynomials.

With the induced topology, a projective variety again carries a Zariski topology. Its open sets have the form D+(𝔟)D_+(\mathfrak b) for a homogeneous ideal 𝔟\mathfrak b, either in K[X0,,Xn]K[X_0,\ldots,X_n] or in the quotient ring

K[X0,,Xn]/𝔞, K[X_0,\ldots,X_n]/\mathfrak a,

which is also called the homogeneous coordinate ring of V+(𝔞)V_+(\mathfrak a). In particular, every homogeneous element FK[X0,,Xn]F\in K[X_0,\ldots,X_n] defines an open set

D+(F)Y. D_+(F)\subseteq Y.

Lemma 28.2: covering by affine varieties

Let YKnY\subseteq\mathbb P_K^n be a projective variety. The affine spaces

D+(Xi)𝔸KnKn D_+(X_i)\cong\mathbb A_K^n\subset\mathbb P_K^n

give affine varieties

D+(Xi)Y D_+(X_i)\cap Y

which cover YY. In particular, for every point PYP\in Y and every open neighbourhood PUP\in U, there is an affine open neighbourhood of PP contained in UU.

Proof

Within YY, we have

D+Y(Xi):=YD+Kn(Xi)Y𝔸Kn, D_+^Y(X_i):=Y\cap D_+^{\mathbb P_K^n}(X_i) \cong Y\cap\mathbb A_K^n,

where D+Y(Xi)D_+^Y(X_i) denotes the relative open set in YY, whereas D+Kn(Xi)D_+^{\mathbb P_K^n}(X_i) is the standard chart in the ambient projective space. Thus D+Y(Xi)D_+^Y(X_i) is a closed subset (see Exercise 28.2) of the affine space D+Kn(Xi)𝔸KnD_+^{\mathbb P_K^n}(X_i)\cong\mathbb A_K^n, and is therefore an affine variety. Since the sets D+Kn(Xi)D_+^{\mathbb P_K^n}(X_i) cover projective space, the sets D+Y(Xi)D_+^Y(X_i) cover YY.

Editorial bridge. To obtain the claim about an arbitrary open neighbourhood UU, choose one of the affine charts above containing PP, then shrink the intersection to a principal open set containing PP and contained in UU. That principal open set is affine, giving the required affine neighbourhood. \square

Editorial note - relative and ambient notation. The source uses D+(Xi)D_+(X_i) both for the relative open set in YY and for the standard chart in Kn\mathbb P_K^n. This edition displays the intersection with YY to distinguish the two meanings.

An immediate consequence is that local concepts developed for affine varieties also apply to projective varieties. To check a property at a point, we can pass straight to an affine open neighbourhood of that point. This applies, for example, to smoothness, normality, and regular functions.

Algebraic functions and morphisms

Using the result just proved, we can again define what is meant by a regular or algebraic function on a projective variety.

Definition 28.3: regular function

Let KK be an algebraically closed field, let YKnY\subseteq\mathbb P_K^n be a projective variety, let UYU\subseteq Y be an open set, and let PUP\in U. A function

f:U𝔸K1=K f:U\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^1=K

is called algebraic, regular, or polynomial at PP if there is an affine open neighbourhood

PVU P\in V\subseteq U

such that f|Vf|_V is algebraic at PP. The function ff is called algebraic on UU if it is algebraic at every point of UU.

For an open set UU, the set of all regular functions on UU again forms a commutative KK-algebra, denoted Γ(U,𝒪)\Gamma(U,\mathcal O). From now on, a projective variety means a projective zero locus equipped with the induced Zariski topology and the structure sheaf 𝒪\mathcal O of regular functions.

These concepts extend immediately to open subsets, leading to the notion of a quasiprojective variety.

Definition 28.4: quasiprojective variety

An open subset of a projective variety, equipped with the induced Zariski topology and the structure sheaf of algebraic functions, is called a quasiprojective variety.

In particular, both projective varieties and affine varieties are quasiprojective. For the latter, an affine variety Y𝔸KnY\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n can be extended to a projective variety ỸKn\widetilde Y\subseteq\mathbb P_K^n containing YY as an open subset.

The definition of a morphism also applies word for word in this more general situation.

Definition 28.5: morphism of quasiprojective varieties

Let XX and YY be quasiprojective varieties over an algebraically closed field, and let

ψ:YX \psi:Y\longrightarrow X

be a continuous map. The map ψ\psi is called a morphism if, for every open set UXU\subseteq X and every algebraic function fΓ(U,𝒪X)f\in\Gamma(U,\mathcal O_X), the composition

fψ:ψ1(U)Uf𝔸K1 f\circ\psi: \psi^{-1}(U)\longrightarrow U\stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}\mathbb A_K^1

belongs to Γ(ψ1(U),𝒪Y)\Gamma(\psi^{-1}(U),\mathcal O_Y).

Homogenisation and projective closure

Let KK be algebraically closed, and consider the hyperbola

V(XY1)𝔸K2K2. V(XY-1)\subset\mathbb A_K^2\subset\mathbb P_K^2.

The hyperbola is closed in the affine plane but not in the projective plane. Embed the affine plane as V(Z1)V(Z-1) in three-dimensional space, and consider the lines through the origin and the points of the hyperbola. Geometrically these lines tilt increasingly and, in the real or complex picture, approach the xx-axis and the yy-axis. The following algebraic computation gives a statement valid over this base field.

Source-condition note REVIEW-AK-26-30-C08 - base field. The source does not state a field hypothesis in this introductory paragraph. This edition uses the algebraically closed-field setting of Definition 28.3 and Theorem 28.8; over a finite field, the stated non-closedness fails for the Zariski topology on KK-points. The source’s expression “approach” remains Euclidean intuition for \mathbb R or \mathbb C.

Definition 28.6: homogenisation of an ideal

For an ideal

𝔞K[X1,,Xn], \mathfrak a\subseteq K[X_1,\ldots,X_n],

the ideal in K[X1,,Xn,Z]K[X_1,\ldots,X_n,Z] generated by the homogenisations of all elements of 𝔞\mathfrak a is called the homogenisation 𝔞h\mathfrak a^h of 𝔞\mathfrak a.

In general, homogenising only a generating set of the ideal 𝔞\mathfrak a is not enough.

Definition 28.7: projective closure

For an affine variety

V(𝔞)𝔸KnKn, V(\mathfrak a)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n\subseteq\mathbb P_K^n,

the Zariski closure of V(𝔞)V(\mathfrak a) in Kn\mathbb P_K^n is called the projective closure of V(𝔞)V(\mathfrak a).

Theorem 28.8: projective closure by homogenisation

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and let

V=V(𝔞)𝔸KnD+(X0) V=V(\mathfrak a)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^n\cong D_+(X_0)

be an affine variety. The projective closure of V(𝔞)V(\mathfrak a) in Kn\mathbb P_K^n is V+(𝔟)V_+(\mathfrak b), where 𝔟\mathfrak b is the homogenisation of 𝔞\mathfrak a in K[X0,X1,,Xn]K[X_0,X_1,\ldots,X_n].

Proof

A point P=(x1,,xn)P=(x_1,\ldots,x_n) in 𝔸Kn\mathbb A_K^n determines the point P̂=(1,x1,,xn)\widehat P=(1,x_1,\ldots,x_n) in Kn\mathbb P_K^n. For FK[X1,,Xn]F\in K[X_1,\ldots,X_n] and its homogenisation F̂\widehat F, we have

F(P)=F̂(P̂). F(P)=\widehat F(\widehat P).

Consequently, all homogeneous polynomials in 𝔟\mathfrak b vanish on V(𝔞)V(\mathfrak a), so

V(𝔞)V+(𝔟). V(\mathfrak a)\subseteq V_+(\mathfrak b).

We obtain a commutative diagram in which every arrow is injective,

V(𝔞)V+(𝔟)𝔸KnKn. \begin{matrix} V(\mathfrak a)&\longrightarrow&V_+(\mathfrak b)\\ \downarrow&&\downarrow\\ \mathbb A_K^n&\longrightarrow&\mathbb P_K^n. \end{matrix}

Write the projective closure of V(𝔞)V(\mathfrak a) as V+(𝔠)V_+(\mathfrak c) for a homogeneous ideal 𝔠\mathfrak c. Minimality of the closure gives V+(𝔠)V+(𝔟)V_+(\mathfrak c)\subseteq V_+(\mathfrak b). To prove the reverse inclusion, it suffices to show

𝔠rad(𝔟). \mathfrak c\subseteq\operatorname{rad}(\mathfrak b).

Take a nonzero homogeneous polynomial F𝔠F\in\mathfrak c and write

F=X0rG, F=X_0^rG,

where GG is not a multiple of X0X_0. Since FF vanishes on V(𝔞)V(\mathfrak a) and X0X_0 does not vanish on V(𝔞)D+(X0)V(\mathfrak a)\subseteq D_+(X_0), the polynomial GG also vanishes there. Its dehomogenisation

g=G(1,X1,,Xn) g=G(1,X_1,\ldots,X_n)

therefore vanishes on V(𝔞)V(\mathfrak a). Hilbert’s Nullstellensatz gives an integer N1N\geq1 such that gN𝔞g^N\in\mathfrak a. Because X0X_0 does not divide GG, the degree of gg equals the degree of GG, so homogenising gNg^N gives GNG^N. Hence GN𝔟G^N\in\mathfrak b, and consequently

FN=X0rNGN𝔟. F^N=X_0^{rN}G^N\in\mathfrak b.

Thus Frad(𝔟)F\in\operatorname{rad}(\mathfrak b). This proves the required inclusion and shows that the closure is exactly V+(𝔟)V_+(\mathfrak b). \square

Source correction REVIEW-AK-26-30-C06 - the radical step. The source replaces 𝔞\mathfrak a by its radical and then concludes membership in the original homogenised ideal 𝔟\mathfrak b, although replacing 𝔞\mathfrak a can change that ideal. The argument above keeps 𝔞\mathfrak a and 𝔟\mathfrak b fixed and proves the required power-membership FN𝔟F^N\in\mathfrak b.

Projective plane curves

Definition 28.9: projective plane curve

A projective plane curve is the zero locus

C=V+(F)K2 C=V_+(F)\subset\mathbb P_K^2

of a nonconstant homogeneous polynomial FK[X,Y,Z]F\in K[X,Y,Z].

For an affine plane curve V=V(G)𝔸K2K2V=V(G)\subset\mathbb A_K^2\subset\mathbb P_K^2, the Zariski closure of VV in K2\mathbb P_K^2 is called the projective closure of the curve.

Corollary 28.10: an equation for the projective closure of a curve

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and let

V=V(G)𝔸K2K2,GK[X,Y]. V=V(G)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^2\subseteq\mathbb P_K^2, \qquad G\in K[X,Y].

The Zariski closure of VV in K2\mathbb P_K^2 is

C=V+(H), C=V_+(H),

where HH is the homogenisation of GG in K[X,Y,Z]K[X,Y,Z].

Proof

This follows directly from Theorem 28.8 and the fact that the homogenisation of a principal ideal is generated by the homogenisation of its generator. \square

Editorial note - two unresolved source references. In the preceding step, the source prints nach Aufgabe ***** while linking to the exercise on homogenising a principal ideal. After the corollary, it also prints siehe Aufgabe ***** while linking to the exercise on a homogeneous equation for the projective closure over a field that is not algebraically closed. Neither exercise number is supplied; this edition preserves the exact linked identities without guessing their numbers.

Without the assumption that the field is algebraically closed, the assertion need not hold.

Remark 28.11: affine charts and points at infinity

Let GK[X,Y]G\in K[X,Y] and let FK[X,Y,Z]F\in K[X,Y,Z] be its homogenisation. We recover GG from FF by setting Z=1Z=1. The polynomial GG describes the intersection D+(Z)V+(F)D_+(Z)\cap V_+(F). The other two affine pieces,

D+(X)V+(F)andD+(Y)V+(F), D_+(X)\cap V_+(F) \quad\text{and}\quad D_+(Y)\cap V_+(F),

play equal roles and give affine neighbourhoods of the points of C=V+(F)C=V_+(F) not lying in D+(Z)D_+(Z).

To check smoothness at PCP\in C, choose an affine open neighbourhood, preferably one of D+(L)CD_+(L)\cap C with L=X,Y,ZL=X,Y,Z, and apply the derivative criterion to the affine equation in that chart. The result does not depend on the chart chosen, although one chart may be computationally more convenient.

From the viewpoint of the affine curve V(G)V(G), the points at infinity are

V+(F)V+(Z). V_+(F)\cap V_+(Z).

This is the intersection of the projective curve with a projective line.

The intersection is finite unless the line V+(Z)V_+(Z) is a component of the curve. This cannot occur when we start with an affine curve, since ZZ does not divide the homogenisation FF. Write the homogeneous decomposition

G=Gd++Gm,md, G=G_d+\cdots+G_m,\qquad m\leq d,

so that

F=Gd+Gd1Z++GmZdm. F=G_d+G_{d-1}Z+\cdots+G_mZ^{d-m}.

Setting Z=0Z=0 shows that the points at infinity are given by the projective zeros of the homogeneous polynomial Gd(X,Y)G_d(X,Y). Thus the degree dd immediately bounds the number of points at infinity on the curve.

Example 28.12: conic sections as affine charts

Assume char(K)2\operatorname{char}(K)\ne2, and consider the standard cone

V(X2+Y2Z2)𝔸K3. V(X^2+Y^2-Z^2)\subset\mathbb A_K^3.

Since its equation is homogeneous, the cone can also be regarded as the projective plane curve of degree two

V+(X2+Y2Z2)K2. V_+(X^2+Y^2-Z^2)\subset\mathbb P_K^2.

Intersections of the cone with arbitrary planes E𝔸K3E\subset\mathbb A_K^3 are called conic sections. If EE does not pass through the origin, it can naturally be identified with an open affine plane D+(L)K2D_+(L)\subseteq\mathbb P_K^2, where LL is a homogeneous linear form describing the vector subspace parallel to EE. The intersections of the cone with EE are different affine pieces of the same projective curve. In particular, circles, hyperbolas, and parabolas are such affine pieces.

By contrast, intersections with planes through the origin, viewed projectively, are the finite sets

V+(X2+Y2Z2)V+(L). V_+(X^2+Y^2-Z^2)\cap V_+(L).

Editorial note - characteristic two. The source imposes no restriction on the characteristic. In characteristic 22, the polynomial above becomes (X+Y+Z)2(X+Y+Z)^2; if L=X+Y+ZL=X+Y+Z, the projective intersection is the whole line, not a finite set. The characteristic restriction above ensures that the conic is nonsingular and has no line as a component.

Definition 28.13: Fermat curve

Let KK be a field and let d1d\geq1. The projective plane curve

V+(Xd+Yd+Zd)K2 V_+(X^d+Y^d+Z^d)\subseteq\mathbb P_K^2

is called the Fermat curve of degree dd. For d=1d=1, it is simply a projective line.

Editorial note - projective zero-locus operator. In this definition the source writes V(Xd+Yd+Zd)V(X^d+Y^d+Z^d) although the object lies in K2\mathbb P_K^2; the next lemma correctly writes V+V_+. This edition consistently uses V+V_+.

Lemma 28.14: smoothness of Fermat curves

Let KK be an algebraically closed field of characteristic p0p\geq0, and let

C=V+(Xd+Yd+Zd)K2 C=V_+(X^d+Y^d+Z^d)\subset\mathbb P_K^2

be the Fermat curve of degree dd. If the characteristic of KK does not divide dd, then CC is smooth.

Proof

Smoothness is a local property, so it suffices to work on any affine piece. By symmetry, consider

V(Xd+Yd+1)𝔸K2. V(X^d+Y^d+1)\subset\mathbb A_K^2.

The partial derivatives are dXd1dX^{d-1} and dYd1dY^{d-1}. The characteristic hypothesis gives d0d\ne0. If d=1d=1, both derivatives are nonzero constants and never vanish. If d>1d>1, both vanish simultaneously only at x=y=0x=y=0, which does not lie on the curve. \square

Editorial note - degree-one case. The source immediately states that both derivatives vanish simultaneously only at (0,0)(0,0); this does not hold for d=1d=1, when both derivatives are nonzero constants. The case distinction above preserves the smoothness conclusion for all permitted dd.

Football pattern illustrating a surface of genus zero

Sphere, or surface of genus zero. OpenClipart file, currently uploaded to Commons by MapGrid, CC0 1.0; the historical course label records Ranveig/PD.

A torus as a surface with one handle

Torus, a surface of genus one. Oleg Alexandrov, public domain.

A double torus as a surface with two handles

Double torus, a surface of genus two. Oleg Alexandrov, public domain.

A sphere with three handles

Sphere with three handles, a surface of genus three. Oleg Alexandrov, public domain.

Remark 28.15: topological shape and genus

Over the base field \mathbb C, a smooth connected projective curve can be viewed as a compact oriented real two-dimensional manifold. Topologically, such a manifold is homeomorphic to a sphere with gg handles attached. The number gg is called the genus of the real surface, and also the genus of the curve.

Source-condition note REVIEW-AK-26-30-C10 - connectedness. The source says “a smooth projective curve” here, but the description by one sphere with gg handles and one genus presupposes that the curve is connected. This edition states that convention explicitly.

The complex projective line is a two-dimensional sphere with no handles, so its genus is 00. A surface of genus 11 is a torus (like a car tyre), homeomorphic to S1×S1S^1\times S^1. In the source’s exposition, projective curves whose underlying topological manifolds have genus one are called elliptic curves.

Editorial note - convention for elliptic curves. In modern terminology, an elliptic curve usually means a smooth projective curve of genus one together with a base point. The source’s statement describes a genus-one curve without a chosen base point; this edition retains the exposition and notes the difference in convention.

Genus also has algebraic definitions and is therefore defined for smooth connected projective curves over every algebraically closed field. It equals the KK-dimension of the first cohomology group of the structure sheaf, and also the KK-dimension of the space of global differential forms on the curve.

For every gg, there is a projective curve of genus gg. In particular, every compact oriented real two-dimensional surface can be realised as a complex projective curve. Such objects are also called Riemann surfaces.

For a smooth plane curve

C=V+(F)K2 C=V_+(F)\subset\mathbb P_K^2

of degree d=deg(F)d=\deg(F), the genus is

g=(d1)(d2)2. g=\frac{(d-1)(d-2)}{2}.

Smooth projective plane curves of degree one or two, namely lines and conics, have genus 00 and are isomorphic to the projective line. For d=3d=3 we obtain genus 11, giving elliptic curves in the source’s convention, whereas d=4d=4 gives genus 33. Thus not every genus can be realised by a smooth plane curve. For example, giving explicit equations for a curve of genus 22 is by no means easy.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: Current semantic course text and this translation: CC BY-SA 4.0. Unit 28 reader media retain their component-specific CC0 or public-domain status as recorded in authority/RIGHTS-unit-28.csv. No blanket relicensing claim is made. · Rights record: ASSET_CLOSURE-unit-28.json · Rights record: RIGHTS-unit-28.csv

Worksheet 28

Warm-up exercises

Exercise 28.1

Let

P=(a0,,an)Kn P=(a_0,\ldots,a_n)\in\mathbb P_K^n

be a point in projective space. Show that there is an affine open neighbourhood

U𝔸KnKn U\cong\mathbb A_K^n\subset\mathbb P_K^n

such that PP corresponds to the origin in this affine space.

Exercise 28.2

Let

D+(L)𝔸KnKn, D_+(L)\cong\mathbb A_K^n\subseteq\mathbb P_K^n,

where LL is a homogeneous linear form in K[X0,,Xn]K[X_0,\ldots,X_n]. Show that the Zariski topology on projective space induces the Zariski topology on this affine space.

Exercise 28.3

For each nn\in\mathbb Z, define the power map

xxn x\longmapsto x^n

as a morphism from the projective line to itself. What are the fibres of this morphism?

Editorial note - all integer exponents. The source quantifier nn\in\mathbb Z is retained. The cases n=0n=0, n<0n<0, and characteristic dividing |n||n| must be distinguished; this edition does not silently substitute an assumption of n>0n>0 or characteristic zero.

Exercise 28.4

Determine the projective closure of the complex cardioid

V((X2+Y2)22X(X2+Y2)Y2), V\!\left((X^2+Y^2)^2-2X(X^2+Y^2)-Y^2\right),

and in particular its points at infinity.

Exercise 28.5

Show that the cone map

𝔸Kn+1\{0}Kn \mathbb A_K^{n+1}\setminus\{0\}\longrightarrow\mathbb P_K^n

is a morphism of quasiprojective varieties.

Exercise 28.6

Give an example showing that the cone map

𝔸Kn+1\{0}Kn \mathbb A_K^{n+1}\setminus\{0\}\longrightarrow\mathbb P_K^n

need not be a closed map.

Exercise 28.7

Let XX and YY be quasiprojective varieties and let φ:XY\varphi:X\to Y be a continuous map. Let

Y=iIUi Y=\bigcup_{i\in I}U_i

be an open cover. Show that φ\varphi is a morphism if and only if, for every ii, the restriction

φi:φ1(Ui)Ui \varphi_i:\varphi^{-1}(U_i)\longrightarrow U_i

is a morphism.

Exercise 28.8

Let KK be an algebraically closed field. Determine the ring of global sections

Γ(K1,𝒪K1). \Gamma\!\left(\mathbb P_K^1,\mathcal O_{\mathbb P_K^1}\right).

What does this imply for a morphism

K1𝔸K1? \mathbb P_K^1\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^1?

Source-condition note REVIEW-AK-26-30-C08 - classical base-field convention. The source says only “field” in Exercises 28.8, 28.10 and 28.14. The structure sheaf used in this chapter was defined in Definition 28.3 over an algebraically closed field; with the source’s topology on KK-points, the asserted closure and global-function conclusions can fail over other fields. This edition keeps all three exercises in that defined setting.

Exercise 28.9

Define and characterise when an irreducible quasiprojective variety is normal.

Exercise 28.10 *

Let KK be an algebraically closed field. Consider the affine plane curve

C=V(YX3+X+2). C=V(Y-X^3+X+2).

Define an isomorphism between CC and the affine line 𝔸K1\mathbb A_K^1. Can such an isomorphism be extended to an isomorphism between K1\mathbb P_K^1 and the projective closure

C¯K2? \overline C\subset\mathbb P_K^2?

Exercises to submit

Exercise 28.11 (3 points)

Let 𝕂=\mathbb K=\mathbb R or 𝕂=\mathbb K=\mathbb C. Let H𝕂n+1H\subset\mathbb K^{n+1} be an nn-dimensional affine subspace not containing the origin, and let H̃\widetilde H be the subspace parallel to HH through the origin. Let UHU\subseteq H be open in the metric topology on H𝕂nH\cong\mathbb K^n, and let VV be the union of all lines through the origin and a point of UU. Show that

V(𝕂n+1\H̃) V\cap(\mathbb K^{n+1}\setminus\widetilde H)

is open.

Exercise 28.12 (4 points)

For the cone map

𝔸Kn+1\{0}Kn, \mathbb A_K^{n+1}\setminus\{0\}\longrightarrow\mathbb P_K^n,

determine the Zariski closure in Kn\mathbb P_K^n of the image of the closed set

V(𝔞)(𝔸Kn+1\{0}). V(\mathfrak a)\cap(\mathbb A_K^{n+1}\setminus\{0\}).

Exercise 28.13 (3 points)

Let XX be an irreducible quasiprojective variety with function field L=K(X)L=K(X). Let UU be a nonempty open set, and let (Ui)iI(U_i)_{i\in I} be a cover of UU by nonempty open sets:

U=iIUi. U=\bigcup_{i\in I}U_i.

Show that

Γ(U,𝒪)=iIΓ(Ui,𝒪), \Gamma(U,\mathcal O) = \bigcap_{i\in I}\Gamma(U_i,\mathcal O),

where the intersection is taken inside LL.

Source-condition note REVIEW-AK-26-30-C09 - nonempty opens. The source allows arbitrary open sets. Identifying a section ring with a subring of the function field requires the open set to be nonempty; empty members of a cover must therefore be omitted before taking this intersection.

Exercise 28.14 (3 points)

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and let Kn\mathbb P_K^n be projective space over KK. Show that the only global algebraic functions are constants, that is,

Γ(Kn,𝒪Kn)=K. \Gamma\!\left(\mathbb P_K^n,\mathcal O_{\mathbb P_K^n}\right)=K.

Source remark. This statement holds for every connected projective variety over an algebraically closed field.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: Current semantic course text and this translation: CC BY-SA 4.0. Official PDF and media components retain their recorded component routes.

Public Solutions to Worksheet 28

At the frozen revision boundary, the source provides a public solution only for Exercise 28.10. The frozen authority query reports the other thirteen candidate solution pages as absent. No additional solutions have been created for this edition.

Solution to Exercise 28.10

Under the algebraically closed-field hypothesis stated in the reviewed exercise, an isomorphism is given by

x(x,x3x2)=(x,y). x\longmapsto(x,x^3-x-2)=(x,y).

At the ring level, this map corresponds to the substitution homomorphism

K[X,Y]/(YX3+X+2)K[X],XX,YX3X2. \begin{aligned} K[X,Y]/(Y-X^3+X+2)&\longrightarrow K[X],\\ X&\longmapsto X,\\ Y&\longmapsto X^3-X-2. \end{aligned}

This homomorphism is well defined and surjective. Since YY can be eliminated directly on the left, the source ring is isomorphic to K[X]K[X]. Thus the map is indeed an isomorphism of affine curves.

This isomorphism cannot be extended to an isomorphism with the projective line. The projective closure of the curve is

C¯=V+(YZ2X3+XZ2+2Z3). \overline C = V_+(YZ^2-X^3+XZ^2+2Z^3).

Exactly one point at infinity is added, namely (0,1,0)(0,1,0). In the affine neighbourhood D+(Y)D_+(Y), this point becomes the origin on the affine curve

V(Z2X3+XZ2+2Z3). V(Z^2-X^3+XZ^2+2Z^3).

The origin has multiplicity two and is therefore not smooth.

Editorial bridge. The lowest-degree term Z2Z^2 explains this multiplicity two. Since the projective line is smooth, C¯\overline C is not isomorphic to K1\mathbb P_K^1.

Editorial note - singular/plural agreement. The source uses a grammatical form referring to “points” but then gives exactly one point, (0,1,0)(0,1,0). The homogeneous equation also gives only that point. This edition translates the consistent mathematical meaning: exactly one point at infinity.

English Markdown source · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0 for the frozen semantic source; official 2012 PDF witnesses retain their recorded CC BY-SA 2.0 Germany notice

Lecture 29: Projections and Parametrised Projective Curves

Projection away from a point

Definition 29.1: projection away from a point

The map

Kn\{(1,0,,0)}Kn1,(x0,x1,,xn)(x1,,xn) \begin{aligned} \mathbb P_K^n\setminus\{(1,0,\ldots,0)\} &\longrightarrow \mathbb P_K^{n-1},\\ (x_0,x_1,\ldots,x_n)&\longmapsto(x_1,\ldots,x_n) \end{aligned}

is called the projection away from the point (1,0,,0)(1,0,\ldots,0).

This map is a well-defined morphism outside the centre of projection (1,0,,0)(1,0,\ldots,0). Each other point is sent to the point of Kn1\mathbb P_K^{n-1} corresponding to the line through that point and the centre. Hence the map is surjective, and each fibre is a projective line with the centre removed, and thus an affine line. In other words, we have a so-called line bundle over Kn1\mathbb P_K^{n-1}.

This map extends the cone map

𝔸Kn\{0}Kn1 \mathbb A_K^n\setminus\{0\}\longrightarrow\mathbb P_K^{n-1}

to punctured projective space. The corresponding map can be defined for any centre; see Exercise 29.7.

Maps to K1\mathbb P_K^1

The following theorem gives a new version of Noether normalisation.

Theorem 29.2: projecting a plane curve to K1\mathbb P_K^1

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and let

CK2 C\subseteq\mathbb P_K^2

be a projective plane curve of degree dd. Then there is a surjective morphism

CK1 C\longrightarrow\mathbb P_K^1

such that each fibre consists of at most dd points.

Proof

Choose a point

PK2 P\in\mathbb P_K^2

not lying on the curve. Such a point exists because, in particular, KK is infinite. Consider projection away from PP; its restriction induces a morphism

CK2\{P}K1. C\hookrightarrow\mathbb P_K^2\setminus\{P\} \longrightarrow\mathbb P_K^1.

The fibre of this morphism over a point

QK1, Q\in\mathbb P_K^1,

representing a direction at PK2P\in\mathbb P_K^2 consists exactly of those points of the curve lying on the line determined by QQ,

G=V+(aX+bY+cZ)K1K2. G=V_+(aX+bY+cZ)\cong\mathbb P_K^1\subseteq\mathbb P_K^2.

Thus the fibre over QQ can be described on GG by eliminating a variable from the curve equation

C=V+(F) C=V_+(F)

using the line equation. The result is a nonzero homogeneous polynomial F¯\overline F in two variables of degree dd; it cannot be zero, since then PP would lie on the curve. As we work over an algebraically closed field, F¯\overline F has at least one and at most dd zeros, all distinct from PP. This proves surjectivity and the bound on the number of points in each fibre. \square

Theorem 29.3: a rational function as a morphism to K1\mathbb P_K^1

Let KK be a field and let

CK2 C\subseteq\mathbb P_K^2

be a smooth irreducible projective plane curve. Let

D=CD+(Z)KSpek(R) D=C\cap D_+(Z)\cong K\!-\!\operatorname{Spek}(R)

be an affine piece of this curve, and let

q=ghQ(R) q=\frac gh\in Q(R)

be a rational function, with g,hRg,h\in R and h0h\ne0. Then there is exactly one morphism

φ:CK1 \varphi:C\longrightarrow\mathbb P_K^1

such that the diagram

D(h)g/h𝔸K1D+(s)CφK1 \begin{matrix} D(h)&\stackrel{g/h}{\longrightarrow}&\mathbb A_K^1\cong D_+(s)\\ \downarrow&&\downarrow\\ C&\stackrel{\varphi}{\longrightarrow}&\mathbb P_K^1 \end{matrix}

commutes.

Moreover, every genuine pole PDP\in D, meaning a point with h(P)=0h(P)=0 and g(P)0g(P)\ne0, is mapped to the point at infinity K1\infty\in\mathbb P_K^1.

Proof

First we define on DD an extension

φ:DK1 \varphi:D\longrightarrow\mathbb P_K^1

of the rational function g/hg/h. If q=0q=0, the constant map with value 00 is the required extension, so assume from now on that q0q\ne0. Take a point PDP\in D on the curve. If PD(h)P\in D(h), there is nothing to do. Thus suppose h(P)=0h(P)=0.

Source correction REVIEW-AK-26-30-C12 - the zero rational function. The source immediately writes g/h=uπng/h=u\pi^n with uu a unit, which is possible only for a nonzero element of the function field. The theorem also permits q=0q=0; the separate constant-map case above closes that gap without changing the nonzero case.

Since the curve is smooth, Theorem 23.6 shows that its local ring BB at PP is a discrete valuation ring. The quotient g/hg/h can therefore be written there as

gh=uπn, \frac gh=u\pi^n,

with uB×u\in B^\times, nn\in\mathbb Z, and π\pi a uniformiser (a generator of the maximal ideal). There is an open neighbourhood

PD(ψ)D P\in D(\psi)\subseteq D

such that π\pi and uu are defined on D(ψ)D(\psi) and uu is a unit there. If n0n\geq0, then

ghRψ, \frac gh\in R_\psi,

so the point of indeterminacy is removable even for a map to 𝔸K1\mathbb A_K^1. If n0n\leq0, the reciprocal quotient

hg=u1πn \frac hg=u^{-1}\pi^{-n}

is defined on D(ψ)D(\psi) as a map to 𝔸K1\mathbb A_K^1. Using the “embedding with coordinates interchanged”

𝔸K1D+(t)K1, \mathbb A_K^1\cong D_+(t)\hookrightarrow\mathbb P_K^1,

we obtain a map to K1\mathbb P_K^1.

We must show that these two morphisms to the projective line agree wherever both are defined. These are the points PP where g/hg/h has neither a zero nor a pole. Compatibility follows because on an open neighbourhood

PU P\in U

there is a map

gh:U(𝔸K1)×=𝔸K1\{0}, \frac gh:U\longrightarrow (\mathbb A_K^1)^\times=\mathbb A_K^1\setminus\{0\},

and the diagram

(𝔸K1)×i1𝔸K1D+(t)𝔸K1D+(s)K1 \begin{matrix} (\mathbb A_K^1)^\times&\stackrel{i^{-1}}{\longrightarrow}& \mathbb A_K^1\cong D_+(t)\\ \downarrow&&\downarrow\\ \mathbb A_K^1\cong D_+(s)&\longrightarrow&\mathbb P_K^1 \end{matrix}

commutes. This gives a well-defined morphism on the affine piece DD.

Source correction AGC-CORR-0127 - the object with zeros and poles. The source refers to φ\varphi in this sentence, although zeros and poles are properties of the rational function g/hg/h. This edition displays the correct object without changing the overlap condition or the gluing diagram.

For an arbitrary point on the projective curve CC and an affine neighbourhood

PDC, P\in D'\subseteq C,

we are in the same situation, because

D+(h)D, D_+(h)\cap D'\ne\varnothing,

so the rational function is defined on a nonempty open set, possibly with different numerator and denominator. The preceding argument therefore applies in the same way.

Uniqueness follows because, on every affine open set

PU P\in U

the intersection UD+(h)U\cap D_+(h) is nonempty. A morphism from an integral variety to the affine line 𝔸K1\mathbb A_K^1 is uniquely determined by its rational function. \square

Example 29.4: inversion on the projective line

The inversion map

𝔸K1D(z)𝔸K1,zz1 \begin{aligned} \mathbb A_K^1\supset D(z)&\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^1,\\ z&\longmapsto z^{-1} \end{aligned}

extends to a bijective morphism

K1K1,(x,y)(y,x). \begin{aligned} \mathbb P_K^1&\longrightarrow\mathbb P_K^1,\\ (x,y)&\longmapsto(y,x). \end{aligned}

This follows directly from Theorem 29.3. Every point z0z\ne0 is sent to 1/z1/z, while zero is sent to the point at infinity \infty.

Parametrised projective plane curves

Suppose a curve with rational parametrisation

s(φ1(s)ψ(s),φ2(s)ψ(s)). s\longmapsto \left(\frac{\varphi_1(s)}{\psi(s)}, \frac{\varphi_2(s)}{\psi(s)}\right).

is given. In Theorem 6.11 we saw that its image satisfies an algebraic equation. In that theorem’s proof we already used the homogenised parametrisation; it now reappears as a projective extension.

Theorem 29.5: projective extension of a rational parametrisation

Let KK be an infinite field, and let

𝔸K1D(ψ)𝔸K2,s(φ1(s)ψ(s),φ2(s)ψ(s)) \begin{aligned} \mathbb A_K^1\supseteq D(\psi)&\longrightarrow\mathbb A_K^2,\\ s&\longmapsto \left(\frac{\varphi_1(s)}{\psi(s)}, \frac{\varphi_2(s)}{\psi(s)}\right) \end{aligned}

be a rational parametrisation in reduced form, meaning that φ1,φ2,ψ\varphi_1,\varphi_2,\psi have no common divisor. Let dd be the largest degree of the polynomials involved, and let

φ1̂,φ2̂,ψ̂ \widehat{\varphi_1},\quad\widehat{\varphi_2},\quad\widehat\psi

be their homogenisations with respect to the new variable tt. Each of H1,H2,H3H_1,H_2,H_3 is obtained from the corresponding homogenisation by multiplication by a suitable power of tt, so that all three have degree dd.

Then H1,H2,H3H_1,H_2,H_3 define a morphism

H:K1K2,(s,t)(H1(s,t),H2(s,t),H3(s,t)), \begin{aligned} H:\mathbb P_K^1&\longrightarrow\mathbb P_K^2,\\ (s,t)&\longmapsto\bigl(H_1(s,t),H_2(s,t),H_3(s,t)\bigr), \end{aligned}

such that the diagram

𝔸K1D(ψ)𝔸K2D+(Z)K1HK2 \begin{matrix} \mathbb A_K^1\supseteq D(\psi)&\longrightarrow& \mathbb A_K^2\cong D_+(Z)\\ \downarrow&&\downarrow\\ \mathbb P_K^1&\stackrel{H}{\longrightarrow}&\mathbb P_K^2 \end{matrix}

commutes. Moreover, the image of HH lies on the projective closure of the affine image curve.

Source-condition note REVIEW-AK-26-30-C13 - infinitude of the base field. The source does not state this hypothesis, but its proof uses the assertion that a finite open subset of K1\mathbb P_K^1 is empty. For the source’s topology on KK-points this requires KK to be infinite; it fails over a finite field, where every subset of K1\mathbb P_K^1 is finite.

Proof

By Exercise 29.6, the map HH is well defined on all of K1\mathbb P_K^1, since φ1,φ2,ψ\varphi_1,\varphi_2,\psi have no common divisor. For commutativity, it suffices to note that a point

sD(ψ)𝔸K1 s\in D(\psi)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^1

is sent, on the one hand, through (s,1)(s,1) to

(H1(s,1),H2(s,1),H3(s,1))=(φ1(s),φ2(s),ψ(s)), \bigl(H_1(s,1),H_2(s,1),H_3(s,1)\bigr) =\bigl(\varphi_1(s),\varphi_2(s),\psi(s)\bigr),

and, on the other hand, to

(φ1(s)ψ(s),φ2(s)ψ(s),1)=(φ1(s),φ2(s),ψ(s)) \left(\frac{\varphi_1(s)}{\psi(s)}, \frac{\varphi_2(s)}{\psi(s)},1\right) =\bigl(\varphi_1(s),\varphi_2(s),\psi(s)\bigr)

as a projective point.

For the additional assertion, let CC be the affine closure of the image and let

C¯K2 \overline C\subseteq\mathbb P_K^2

be its projective closure. Consider the open complement

U=K2\C¯. U=\mathbb P_K^2\setminus\overline C.

Since the map is continuous, the inverse image H1(U)H^{-1}(U) is open in K1\mathbb P_K^1 and can contain only points of K1\D(ψ)\mathbb P_K^1\setminus D(\psi). But a finite open subset of the projective line must be empty. \square

Theorem 29.6: projective closure of the graph of a polynomial

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and let

FK[X] F\in K[X]

be a polynomial in one variable of degree d1d\geq1. The projective closure CC of the graph

V(YF(X)) V(Y-F(X))

is described by

V+(YZd1F̂(X,Z)), V_+\bigl(YZ^{d-1}-\widehat F(X,Z)\bigr),

where F̂(X,Z)\widehat F(X,Z) is the homogenisation of FF. If d=1d=1 and F=aX+bF=aX+b, then CC has one additional point, the smooth point (1,a,0)(1,a,0). If d2d\geq2, the additional point is (0,1,0)(0,1,0), which is singular when d3d\geq3. For d2d\geq2, this point at infinity has multiplicity d1d-1.

Source correction AGC-CORR-0128 - projective zero-locus operator. The source prints VV for a homogeneous equation in K2\mathbb P_K^2. This edition uses V+V_+, in keeping with the projective ambient space and the notation of the subsequent proof.

Proof

The equation of the projective closure follows directly from Corollary 28.10. To determine the intersection of CC with the projective line V+(Z)V_+(Z) at infinity, set Z=0Z=0 in the equation.

If d=1d=1, the curve equation is the line equation

V+(YaXbZ), V_+(Y-aX-bZ),

and its intersection with V+(Z)V_+(Z) gives the unique point (1,a,0)(1,a,0). If d2d\geq2, the curve equation is

V+(YZd1sdXdsd1Xd1Zs0Zd), V_+\bigl( YZ^{d-1}-s_dX^d-s_{d-1}X^{d-1}Z-\cdots-s_0Z^d \bigr),

with sd0s_d\ne0. Setting Z=0Z=0 leaves

V+(sdXd), V_+(-s_dX^d),

so X=0X=0. This gives the unique point at infinity (0,1,0)(0,1,0).

To compute the multiplicity, consider the affine equation of the curve on D+(Y)D_+(Y). Setting Y=1Y=1 gives the affine equation

V(Zd1sdXdsd1Xd1Zs0Zd), V\bigl( Z^{d-1}-s_dX^d-s_{d-1}X^{d-1}Z-\cdots-s_0Z^d \bigr),

and in these coordinates (0,1,0)(0,1,0) becomes the origin. Hence its multiplicity is d1d-1, with the unique tangent line given by Z=0Z=0. If d3d\geq3, the multiplicity is at least 22, so the point is singular. \square

Source correction AGC-U29-SRC-001 / AGC-CORR-0126 - undefined symbol in the singularity bound. In the last sentence of the proof, the source prints g3g\geq3, although no quantity gg is defined in this theorem. The degree defined and used throughout the calculation is dd; this edition therefore displays the intended bound as d3d\geq3 and explicitly retains the multiplicity argument d12d-1\geq2.

The theorem can be understood as follows. If d2d\geq2, the point (0,1,0)(0,1,0) is the unique point at infinity and represents the direction of the yy-axis. The line at infinity V+(Z)V_+(Z) is the unique tangent line at this point.

Source correction REVIEW-AK-26-30-C14 - direction versus asymptote. The source calls the yy-axis the graph’s only asymptote. The projective point (0,1,0)(0,1,0) records the direction of that axis, not an affine asymptotic line; in the usual affine sense a polynomial graph of degree at least two has no linear asymptote. The source’s valid tangent-line statement is retained.

The normalisation of CC is K1\mathbb P_K^1. By Theorem 29.5, applied to the affine parametrisation of the graph

𝔸K1𝔸K1×𝔸K1=𝔸K2D+(Z)K2,x(x,F(x))=(x,F(x),1), \begin{aligned} \mathbb A_K^1&\longrightarrow \mathbb A_K^1\times\mathbb A_K^1 =\mathbb A_K^2\cong D_+(Z)\subset\mathbb P_K^2,\\ x&\longmapsto(x,F(x))=(x,F(x),1), \end{aligned}

the normalisation map is given by

K1CK2,(x,t)(xtd1,F̂(x,t),td). \begin{aligned} \mathbb P_K^1&\longrightarrow C\subset\mathbb P_K^2,\\ (x,t)&\longmapsto\bigl(xt^{d-1},\widehat F(x,t),t^d\bigr). \end{aligned}

The point at infinity (1,0)(1,0) is sent to

(0,sd,0)=(0,1,0). (0,s_d,0)=(0,1,0).

Theorem 29.7: projective closure of the graph of a rational function

Let KK be an algebraically closed field, and let

G,HK[X] G,H\in K[X]

be polynomials in one variable of degrees d,e1d,e\geq1, respectively, with no common root. Let H0H\ne0 and let

F(X)=G(X)H(X) F(X)=\frac{G(X)}{H(X)}

be the corresponding rational function. Let Ĝ(X,Z)\widehat G(X,Z) and Ĥ(X,Z)\widehat H(X,Z) be their respective homogenisations. If d>ed>e, the projective closure CC of the graph of F(X)F(X) is described by

V+(Ĥ(X,Z)YZde1Ĝ(X,Z)), V_+\bigl(\widehat H(X,Z)YZ^{d-e-1}-\widehat G(X,Z)\bigr),

whereas if ded\leq e, it is described by

V+(Ĥ(X,Z)YĜ(X,Z)Zed+1). V_+\bigl(\widehat H(X,Z)Y-\widehat G(X,Z)Z^{e-d+1}\bigr).

Proof

The affine description of the curve is

V(YHG). V(YH-G).

By Corollary 28.10, the projective closure is described by the homogenisation of YHGYH-G. This is determined by the larger of the degrees of YHYH and GG; the summand of smaller degree must be “filled out” with a suitable power of ZZ. This yields the two equations above. \square

Monomial projective curves

For the monomial plane curve

s(se,sd)=(x,y) s\longmapsto(s^e,s^d)=(x,y)

with coprime exponents e>de>d, Theorem 29.5 gives the monomial projective curve

(s,t)(se,sdted,te). (s,t)\longmapsto(s^e,s^dt^{e-d},t^e).

On the open set D+(t)D_+(t) this is the original map, whereas on D+(s)D_+(s) it becomes the affine map

t(ted,te). t\longmapsto(t^{e-d},t^e).

Theorem 29.8: singularities of monomial projective curves

Let e>de>d be coprime. For the monomial projective plane curve of degree ee

C:(s,t)(se,sdted,te), C:\quad(s,t)\longmapsto\bigl(s^e,s^dt^{e-d},t^e\bigr),

the following statements hold.

  1. The curve is described by the homogeneous equation of degree ee

    Ye=XdZed. Y^e=X^dZ^{e-d}.

  2. The curve is smooth at all points other than (0,0,1)(0,0,1) and (1,0,0)(1,0,0).

  3. The curve has multiplicity dd at (0,0,1)(0,0,1) and multiplicity ede-d at (1,0,0)(1,0,0).

  4. If e3e\geq3, the curve is not smooth.

Proof

  1. The affine equation is XdYeX^d-Y^e. By Corollary 28.10, the projective closure is described by its homogenisation, namely

    V+(XdZedYe). V_+\bigl(X^dZ^{e-d}-Y^e\bigr).

    Source correction AGC-CORR-0129 - projective zero-locus operator. The source prints VV for the homogenisation defining the closure in K2\mathbb P_K^2; this edition uses V+V_+. The affine loci below retain VV.

  2. On the affine curve

    V(XdYe)𝔸K2K2, V(X^d-Y^e)\subseteq\mathbb A_K^2\subseteq\mathbb P_K^2,

    by the current source’s normalisation result for affine monomial curves, only the origin—corresponding to the projective point (0,0,1)(0,0,1)—can fail to be smooth. Points of the curve outside D+(Z)D_+(Z) are obtained by setting Z=0Z=0 in the equation. This forces Y=0Y=0, leaving only the point (1,0,0)(1,0,0).

    Semantic-source note REVIEW-AK-26-30-C15. The expanded 2012 witness cites Theorem 20.12 here; the frozen current proof instead links to the named normalisation result above. This edition preserves the current source target and the unchanged smoothness conclusion.

  3. Multiplicity at a point is a local property. The point (0,0,1)(0,0,1) corresponds to the origin on the affine monomial curve

    V(XdYe), V(X^d-Y^e),

    which, by Corollary 23.8, has multiplicity equal to the smaller exponent, namely dd. The point (1,0,0)(1,0,0) lies in D+(X)D_+(X), where the affine equation is

    V(YeZed). V(Y^e-Z^{e-d}).

    Its multiplicity is again the smaller exponent, namely ede-d.

  4. This follows from item 3. \square

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: Current semantic course text and this translation: CC BY-SA 4.0. Unit 29 reader media retain their component-specific public-domain status as recorded in authority/RIGHTS-unit-29.csv. No blanket relicensing claim is made. · Rights record: ASSET_CLOSURE-unit-29.json · Rights record: RIGHTS-unit-29.csv

Worksheet 29

Warm-up exercises

Exercise 29.1

Let KK be an algebraically closed field. Show that every projective plane curve has nonempty intersection with every projective line in the projective plane.

Exercise 29.2 *

Let

K=/(5), K=\mathbb Z/(5),

and consider the two affine plane algebraic curves

C=V(X2+Y21)andD=V(X32Y2+3). C=V(X^2+Y^2-1) \qquad\text{and}\qquad D=V(X^3-2Y^2+3).

  1. Determine the intersection CDC\cap D.

  2. Determine the points in

V+(X2+Y2Z2)\V(X2+Y21). V_+(X^2+Y^2-Z^2)\setminus V(X^2+Y^2-1).

  1. Determine the points in

V+(X32Y2Z+3Z3)\V(X32Y2+3). V_+(X^3-2Y^2Z+3Z^3)\setminus V(X^3-2Y^2+3).

  1. Is V+(X2+Y2Z2)V_+(X^2+Y^2-Z^2) the projective closure of V(X2+Y21)V(X^2+Y^2-1)?

Exercise 29.3 *

Let KK be a field. Show that the local rings of the projective line K1\mathbb P_K^1 at all its KK-rational points are isomorphic to one another. Give the simplest possible description of this ring.

Source-convention note REVIEW-AK-26-30-C17 - KK-rational points. The frozen source-page identity explicitly says “KK-points”, although the exercise body says only “all local rings”. The restriction is essential: scheme-theoretic points of K1\mathbb P_K^1 include the generic point, whose local ring is not isomorphic to the local ring at a KK-rational closed point.

Bernoulli’s lemniscate. By Zorgit, public domain.

Exercise 29.4

For Bernoulli’s lemniscate given by

V((X2+Y2)2X2+Y2), V\!\left((X^2+Y^2)^2-X^2+Y^2\right),

determine its singularities and its points at infinity in 2\mathbb P_{\mathbb C}^2. Compute the multiplicity and tangent lines at all these points.

Exercise 29.5

Consider the projective curve

CK2 C\subset\mathbb P_K^2

over a field KK of characteristic 00, given by the homogeneous equation

ZX2=Y3. ZX^2=Y^3.

  1. Determine the singular points of the curve.

  2. Show that the assignment

φ:(S,T)(T3,ST2,S3)=(X,Y,Z) \varphi:(S,T)\longmapsto(T^3,ST^2,S^3)=(X,Y,Z)

gives a well-defined map

φ:12. \varphi:\mathbb P^1\longrightarrow\mathbb P^2.

  1. Show that the image points of φ\varphi lie on the curve CC.

  2. Which points in 1\mathbb P^1 correspond to the singular points of CC?

Exercises to submit

Exercise 29.6 (3 points)

Let m+1m+1 homogeneous polynomials

F0,,Fm F_0,\ldots,F_m

in n+1n+1 variables be given, all of the same degree dd. Show that there is an open set

UKn U\subseteq\mathbb P_K^n

on which these polynomials define a morphism

KnUKm. \mathbb P_K^n\supseteq U\longrightarrow\mathbb P_K^m.

Exercise 29.7 (3 points)

Let

P=(a0,,an)Kn P=(a_0,\ldots,a_n)\in\mathbb P_K^n

be a point in projective space. Show that projection from Kn\mathbb P_K^n to Kn1\mathbb P_K^{n-1} with centre PP is given by a matrix. The source does not supply that matrix. It then displays the map

(x0x1xn)(x0x1xn). \begin{pmatrix} x_0\\ x_1\\ \vdots\\ x_n \end{pmatrix} \longmapsto \begin{pmatrix} x_0\\ x_1\\ \vdots\\ x_n \end{pmatrix}.

Source discrepancy AGC-U29-SRC-002. The matrix block in the source is blank, and the subsequent vector is repeated unchanged, so it does not describe a projection to Kn1\mathbb P_K^{n-1}. This edition preserves both facts and does not guess the intended matrix or map.

“Tschirnhausen cubic” according to the course’s inline caption. By Oleg Alexandrov, public domain.

Media component note. The Commons description page for this file warns that, despite its filename, the curve in the image is not a Tschirnhausen cubic because the angle of intersection at its double point differs. The image actually used by the source is retained.

Exercise 29.8 (3 points)

For the Tschirnhausen cubic given by

V(X3+3X2Y2), V(X^3+3X^2-Y^2),

determine its singularities, including points at infinity. Determine the tangent lines at the singularities and at the points at infinity.

Exercise 29.9 (3 points)

For the folium of Descartes defined by

V(X3+Y33XY), V(X^3+Y^3-3XY),

determine its points at infinity in 2\mathbb P_{\mathbb C}^2, and compute the multiplicity and tangent lines at those points.

Exercise 29.10 (5 points)

Let KK be an algebraically closed field of characteristic different from 22. For the projective Bernoulli lemniscate

V+((X2+Y2)2Z2X2+Z2Y2)K2, V_+\!\left((X^2+Y^2)^2-Z^2X^2+Z^2Y^2\right) \subset\mathbb P_K^2,

give a surjective morphism to a projective conic. How many points of the lemniscate map to a single point of the conic?

Source-condition note REVIEW-AK-26-30-C18 - base field. The source supplies no restriction on KK. Algebraic closure is needed for the intended pointwise surjectivity, while in characteristic 22 the conic obtained from the standard squared-coordinate construction degenerates and its fibre count changes. The stated hypotheses preserve the intended smooth-conic problem.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: Current semantic course text and this translation: CC BY-SA 4.0. Official PDF and media components retain their recorded component routes.

Public Solutions to Worksheet 29

At the frozen revision boundary, the source provides public solutions only for Exercises 29.2 and 29.3. The frozen authority query reports the other eight candidate solution pages as absent. No additional solutions have been created for this edition.

Solution to Exercise 29.2

  1. We add the two equations

2X2+2Y22=0andX32Y2+3=0 2X^2+2Y^2-2=0 \qquad\text{and}\qquad X^3-2Y^2+3=0

and obtain the condition

X3+2X2+1=0. X^3+2X^2+1=0.

For the possible values x=0,1,2,3,4x=0,1,2,3,4, substitution gives 1,4,2,1,21,4,2,1,2, respectively. Thus this condition cannot be satisfied, so the intersection of the two curves in 𝔸K2\mathbb A_K^2 is empty.

  1. We seek the points in K2\mathbb P_K^2 satisfying simultaneously

X2+Y2Z2=0andZ=0. X^2+Y^2-Z^2=0 \qquad\text{and}\qquad Z=0.

This gives the condition

X2+Y2=0. X^2+Y^2=0.

The squares in /(5)\mathbb Z/(5) are 0,1,40,1,4. The solution (0,0,0)(0,0,0) is not allowed, since it does not represent a projective point, and we obtain the solutions (±1,±2)(\pm1,\pm2) and (±2,±1)(\pm2,\pm1). Since we seek projective points, the first coordinate can be normalised to 11, and the second must then be 22 or 2=3-2=3. Hence there are two points at infinity,

(1,2,0)and(1,3,0). (1,2,0) \qquad\text{and}\qquad (1,3,0).

  1. The two equations

X32Y2Z+3Z3=0andZ=0 X^3-2Y^2Z+3Z^3=0 \qquad\text{and}\qquad Z=0

immediately give X3=0X^3=0, and hence X=0X=0. Thus the unique point at infinity is (0,1,0)(0,1,0).

  1. Here, as throughout this exercise, VV and V+V_+ denote sets of KK-rational zeros with their point-set Zariski topology. By definition, the projective closure is the Zariski closure. Since V(X2+Y21)V(X^2+Y^2-1) is a finite set of KK-rational points, it is already closed and equals its closure. However, by part b, V+(X2+Y2Z2)V_+(X^2+Y^2-Z^2) contains additional points. The latter set is therefore not its projective closure.

Source-convention note REVIEW-AK-26-30-C16 - finite-field point sets. The source’s conclusion uses its classical KK-point convention. It is not a claim that the scheme-theoretic projective closure of the affine conic is merely the finite set of its KK-rational points.

Solution to Exercise 29.3

Every KK-rational point PK1P\in\mathbb P_K^1 lies on an affine line

P𝔸K1=D+(L)K1, P\in\mathbb A_K^1=D_+(L)\subset\mathbb P_K^1,

where LL is a homogeneous linear form. By translating on this affine line, we may further assume that the point in question is the origin. This can be done for every KK-rational point and does not change its local ring. Therefore all these local rings are isomorphic to one another. The local ring at the origin of the affine line is the localisation

K[X](X). K[X]_{(X)}.

English Markdown source · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0 for the frozen semantic source; official 2012 PDF witnesses retain their component notices recorded in the Unit 29 rights ledger

Lecture 30: Bézout’s Theorem

In this lecture we prove Bézout’s Theorem for the projective plane. It states that, for two projective curves in the projective plane with no common component and of degrees mm and nn, respectively, the sum of all their intersection multiplicities equals mnmn. Our presentation largely follows Fulton’s treatment.

Homogeneous components of a fixed degree

For a polynomial ring PP and a natural number \ell, we shall write PP_\ell for the homogeneous component of degree \ell, the space of all homogeneous polynomials of degree \ell. We use the same notation for graded quotients of a polynomial ring, that is, quotients by homogeneous ideals. As a vector space over the base field KK, this component is generated by all monomials of degree \ell. In particular, PP_\ell is a finite-dimensional KK-vector space.

Lemma 30.1: dimension of a homogeneous component of the quotient ring

Let KK be a field, let

F,GK[X,Y,Z]=P F,G\in K[X,Y,Z]=P

be homogeneous polynomials of degrees mm and nn, and suppose that FF and GG have no nonconstant common divisor. Then

dimK(P/(F,G))=mn \dim_K\bigl(P/(F,G)\bigr)_\ell=mn

for sufficiently large \ell.

Proof

Consider the exact sequence

0P(GF)P×P(F,G)PP/(F,G)0. 0\longrightarrow P \stackrel{\begin{pmatrix}G\\-F\end{pmatrix}}{\longrightarrow}P\times P \stackrel{(F,G)}{\longrightarrow}P \longrightarrow P/(F,G)\longrightarrow0.

The first map is

H(GH,FH), H\longmapsto(GH,-FH),

the next map is

(A,B)AF+BG, (A,B)\longmapsto AF+BG,

and the last map takes residue classes. All these maps are PP-module homomorphisms. Injectivity at the first term is clear because PP is an integral domain. The sequence is clearly exact at the last two terms; only exactness at the second term remains to be proved.

The composition of the first two maps is zero. Conversely, suppose

AF+BG=0 AF+BG=0

in PP. Since PP is a unique factorisation domain and F,GF,G are coprime, AA must be a multiple of GG. Write A=QGA=QG. The equation above becomes

G(QF+B)=0, G(QF+B)=0,

so B=QFB=-QF. Thus

(A,B)=Q(G,F) (A,B)=Q(G,-F)

comes from the map on the left.

Source correction AGC-CORR-0130 - sign in the relation. The source says that BB is a multiple of FF “with the same factor”, but the sign imposed by AF+BG=0AF+BG=0 gives B=QFB=-QF. This edition displays the minus sign explicitly, in agreement with the map H(GH,FH)H\mapsto(GH,-FH) already printed in the source.

Since FF and GG are homogeneous of fixed degrees, the sequence restricts to homogeneous components. This gives the exact sequence

0Pmn(GF)Pm×Pn(F,G)P(P/(F,G))0, 0\longrightarrow P_{\ell-m-n} \stackrel{\begin{pmatrix}G\\-F\end{pmatrix}}{\longrightarrow} P_{\ell-m}\times P_{\ell-n} \stackrel{(F,G)}{\longrightarrow}P_\ell \longrightarrow\bigl(P/(F,G)\bigr)_\ell\longrightarrow0,

where components with negative indices are defined to be 00. The restricted sequence remains exact because the homogeneous components of a homogeneous homomorphism do not mix. All the components involved are now finite-dimensional vector spaces.

If m+n\ell\geq m+n, all indices are nonnegative, and

dimK(P)=(+1)(+2)2. \dim_K(P_\ell)=\frac{(\ell+1)(\ell+2)}2.

By additivity of vector-space dimension in exact complexes (see Exercise 14.7), we obtain

dimK((P/(F,G)))=(+1)(+2)2(m+1)(m+2)2(n+1)(n+2)2+(mn+1)(mn+2)2=2(m+1)(m+2)(n+1)(n+2)+(mn+1)(mn+2)2=2mn2=mn. \begin{aligned} \dim_K\bigl((P/(F,G))_\ell\bigr) &=\frac{(\ell+1)(\ell+2)}2 -\frac{(\ell-m+1)(\ell-m+2)}2\\ &\quad-\frac{(\ell-n+1)(\ell-n+2)}2 +\frac{(\ell-m-n+1)(\ell-m-n+2)}2\\ &=\frac{2-(-m+1)(-m+2)-(-n+1)(-n+2) +(-m-n+1)(-m-n+2)}2\\ &=\frac{2mn}{2}\\ &=mn. \end{aligned}

\square

Injectivity of multiplication by ZZ

Lemma 30.2: multiplication by ZZ in the quotient ring

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and let

F,GK[X,Y,Z] F,G\in K[X,Y,Z]

be homogeneous polynomials with no common projective zero on

V+(Z)K2. V_+(Z)\subseteq\mathbb P_K^2.

Write the corresponding quotient ring as

R=K[X,Y,Z]/(F,G). R=K[X,Y,Z]/(F,G).

Then the map

RR,HZH \begin{aligned} R&\longrightarrow R,\\ H&\longmapsto ZH \end{aligned}

is injective.

Proof

Take HK[X,Y,Z]H\in K[X,Y,Z] and suppose its class maps to 00. This means there are L,MK[X,Y,Z]L,M\in K[X,Y,Z] such that

ZH=LF+MG. ZH=LF+MG.

Substitute Z=0Z=0 in this equation. In K[X,Y]K[X,Y], we obtain

0=L(X,Y,0)F(X,Y,0)+M(X,Y,0)G(X,Y,0). 0=L(X,Y,0)F(X,Y,0)+M(X,Y,0)G(X,Y,0).

Since FF and GG have no common projective zero on V+(Z)V_+(Z), the polynomials F(X,Y,0)F(X,Y,0) and G(X,Y,0)G(X,Y,0) have only (0,0)(0,0) as a common zero in 𝔸K2\mathbb A_K^2. They are therefore coprime in K[X,Y]K[X,Y]. Hence there is a QK[X,Y]Q\in K[X,Y] with

L(X,Y,0)=QG(X,Y,0),M(X,Y,0)=QF(X,Y,0). L(X,Y,0)=QG(X,Y,0), \qquad M(X,Y,0)=-QF(X,Y,0).

Lifting back to K[X,Y,Z]K[X,Y,Z], this means

L=QG(X,Y,0)+ZL¯,M=QF(X,Y,0)+ZM¯ L=QG(X,Y,0)+Z\overline L, \qquad M=-QF(X,Y,0)+Z\overline M

for some L¯,M¯K[X,Y,Z]\overline L,\overline M\in K[X,Y,Z]. Writing

F=F(X,Y,0)+ZF¯,G=G(X,Y,0)+ZG¯, F=F(X,Y,0)+Z\overline F, \qquad G=G(X,Y,0)+Z\overline G,

the original equation gives

ZH=LF+MG=(QG(X,Y,0)+ZL¯)F+(QF(X,Y,0)+ZM¯)G=Q(GZG¯)FQ(FZF¯)G+ZL¯F+ZM¯G=QZG¯F+QZF¯G+ZL¯F+ZM¯G=Z(QG¯F+QF¯G+L¯F+M¯G). \begin{aligned} ZH &=LF+MG\\ &=\bigl(QG(X,Y,0)+Z\overline L\bigr)F +\bigl(-QF(X,Y,0)+Z\overline M\bigr)G\\ &=Q\bigl(G-Z\overline G\bigr)F -Q\bigl(F-Z\overline F\bigr)G +Z\overline L F+Z\overline M G\\ &=-QZ\overline G F+QZ\overline F G +Z\overline L F+Z\overline M G\\ &=Z\bigl(-Q\overline G F+Q\overline F G +\overline L F+\overline M G\bigr). \end{aligned}

We can cancel ZZ from this equation in the polynomial ring, obtaining an expression for HH as a linear combination of FF and GG. Thus the class of HH in RR is also 00. \square

Two cubic curves. By Hack, created with Mathematica 6, public domain.

Bézout’s Theorem

We now come to Bézout’s Theorem.

Theorem 30.3: Bézout’s Theorem

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and let

F,GK[X,Y,Z] F,G\in K[X,Y,Z]

be homogeneous polynomials of degrees mm and nn with no common component, with corresponding curves

C=V+(F),D=V+(G)K2. C=V_+(F),\qquad D=V_+(G)\subseteq\mathbb P_K^2.

Then

PmultP(C,D)=mn. \sum_P\operatorname{mult}_P(C,D)=mn.

Proof

The intersection CDC\cap D consists of only finitely many points. By Exercise 27.10, after a projective change of coordinates we may assume that all intersection points lie in

𝔸K2=D+(Z)K2. \mathbb A_K^2=D_+(Z)\subseteq\mathbb P_K^2.

Let F̃,G̃K[X,Y]\widetilde F,\widetilde G\in K[X,Y] be the dehomogenisations describing the affine curves C𝔸K2C\cap\mathbb A_K^2 and D𝔸K2D\cap\mathbb A_K^2. Then

PK2multP(F,G)=P𝔸K2multP(F̃,G̃)=P𝔸K2dimK(K[X,Y]𝔪P/(F̃,G̃))=dimK(K[X,Y]/(F̃,G̃)). \begin{aligned} \sum_{P\in\mathbb P_K^2}\operatorname{mult}_P(F,G) &=\sum_{P\in\mathbb A_K^2} \operatorname{mult}_P(\widetilde F,\widetilde G)\\ &=\sum_{P\in\mathbb A_K^2} \dim_K\!\left( K[X,Y]_{\mathfrak m_P}/(\widetilde F,\widetilde G) \right)\\ &=\dim_K\!\left(K[X,Y]/(\widetilde F,\widetilde G)\right). \end{aligned}

The last equality follows from Theorem 26.11. We shall relate the KK-dimension of this inhomogeneous quotient ring to the dimension of a homogeneous component of the quotient ring

(K[X,Y,Z]/(F,G)). \bigl(K[X,Y,Z]/(F,G)\bigr)_\ell.

By Lemma 30.1, for sufficiently large \ell the latter component has dimension mnmn.

Choose a basis

V1,,Vmn V_1,\ldots,V_{mn}

of (K[X,Y,Z]/(F,G))\bigl(K[X,Y,Z]/(F,G)\bigr)_\ell, with \ell sufficiently large and fixed. We claim that the dehomogenisations

vi=Vi(X,Y,1),i=1,,mn, v_i=V_i(X,Y,1),\qquad i=1,\ldots,mn,

form a basis of

K[X,Y]/(F̃,G̃). K[X,Y]/(\widetilde F,\widetilde G).

First we prove that these elements generate. Take any qK[X,Y]q\in K[X,Y] and let its homogenisation

QK[X,Y,Z] Q\in K[X,Y,Z]

have degree dd. Choose an integer e0e\geq0 such that d+ed+e\geq\ell. By Lemma 30.2, for every λ1\lambda\geq1 the map

(K[X,Y,Z]/(F,G))(K[X,Y,Z]/(F,G))+λ,HZλH \begin{aligned} \bigl(K[X,Y,Z]/(F,G)\bigr)_\ell &\longrightarrow \bigl(K[X,Y,Z]/(F,G)\bigr)_{\ell+\lambda},\\ H&\longmapsto Z^\lambda H \end{aligned}

is injective. Since both spaces have dimension mnmn, it is also bijective. With λ=d+e\lambda=d+e-\ell, the elements

ZλVi,i=1,,mn, Z^\lambda V_i,\qquad i=1,\ldots,mn,

form a basis of the component of degree +λ=d+e\ell+\lambda=d+e.

Source correction AGC-CORR-0131 - the boundary case λ=0\lambda=0. The source chooses d+ed+e\geq\ell, but states the assertion about multiplication by ZλZ^\lambda only for λ1\lambda\geq1. If d+e=d+e=\ell, then λ=0\lambda=0 and the required map is the identity; if d+e>d+e>\ell, the source’s argument applies with λ1\lambda\geq1. Distinguishing these cases makes the basis conclusion above valid for every choice with d+ed+e\geq\ell.

Consequently there are a1,,amnKa_1,\ldots,a_{mn}\in K such that

ZeQ=i=1mnaiZd+eVi. Z^eQ=\sum_{i=1}^{mn}a_iZ^{d+e-\ell}V_i.

Dehomogenising this equation immediately expresses qq as a linear combination of v1,,vmnv_1,\ldots,v_{mn}.

To prove linear independence, suppose

i=1mnaivi=0 \sum_{i=1}^{mn}a_iv_i=0

in the quotient ring. Then in K[X,Y]K[X,Y] there is an equation

i=1mnaivi=ÃF̃+B̃G̃. \sum_{i=1}^{mn}a_iv_i =\widetilde A\widetilde F+\widetilde B\widetilde G.

Take homogeneous polynomials A,BK[X,Y,Z]A,B\in K[X,Y,Z] with dehomogenisations Ã,B̃\widetilde A,\widetilde B, respectively. Thus we have two expressions with the same dehomogenisation: iaiVi\sum_i a_iV_i, homogeneous of degree \ell, and AF+BGAF+BG, a sum of two homogeneous polynomials whose degrees may differ.

By choosing suitable nonnegative integers r,s,tr,s,t, we can make

i=1mnaiZrViandZsAF+ZtBG \sum_{i=1}^{mn}a_iZ^rV_i \qquad\text{and}\qquad Z^sAF+Z^tBG

homogeneous of the same degree. By Exercise 6.9, equality of their dehomogenisations then implies

i=1mnaiZrVi=ZsAF+ZtBG. \sum_{i=1}^{mn}a_iZ^rV_i=Z^sAF+Z^tBG.

In K[X,Y,Z]/(F,G)K[X,Y,Z]/(F,G), this equation means

i=1mnaiZrVi=0. \sum_{i=1}^{mn}a_iZ^rV_i=0.

Multiplication by ZrZ^r is injective: for r=0r=0 it is the identity, whereas for r>0r>0 this follows by repeated application of Lemma 30.2. Since V1,,VmnV_1,\ldots,V_{mn} form a basis, all ai=0a_i=0. Thus v1,,vmnv_1,\ldots,v_{mn} do indeed form a basis, so

dimK(K[X,Y]/(F̃,G̃))=mn. \dim_K\!\left(K[X,Y]/(\widetilde F,\widetilde G)\right)=mn.

This proves the formula in Bézout’s Theorem. \square

Corollary 30.4: existence of an intersection point

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and let

C,DK2 C,D\subseteq\mathbb P_K^2

be projective plane curves. Then

CD. C\cap D\ne\varnothing.

Proof

The assertion is clearly true if CC and DD have a common component. Otherwise, it follows from Theorem 30.3. \square

Corollary 30.5: at most mnmn intersection points

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and let

F,GK[X,Y,Z] F,G\in K[X,Y,Z]

be homogeneous polynomials of degrees mm and nn with no common component, with corresponding curves

C=V+(F),D=V+(G)K2. C=V_+(F),\qquad D=V_+(G)\subseteq\mathbb P_K^2.

Then CC and DD have at most mnmn intersection points.

Proof

This follows directly from Theorem 30.3, since each intersection point contributes at least 11 to the sum of intersection multiplicities. \square

Example: the semicubical parabola and a circle

Example 30.6: five points with total multiplicity six

In this example we work over \mathbb C. Consider the semicubical parabola

C=V+(ZY2X3) C=V_+(ZY^2-X^3)

and the circle with centre (1,0,1)(1,0,1),

D=V+((XZ)2+Y2Z2). D=V_+\bigl((X-Z)^2+Y^2-Z^2\bigr).

Source correction AGC-CORR-0132 - base field of the example. The source does not specify a base field, but its calculation uses 2i\sqrt2\,\mathrm i, and the displayed distinct-point description requires the absence of exceptional-characteristic issues. This edition sets K=K=\mathbb C, so the entire calculation, the five distinct points, and the application of Bézout’s Theorem lie within a valid scope. The source equations are unchanged.

By Bézout’s Theorem, we expect a total intersection multiplicity of 66. Let us compute the intersection points. If Z=0Z=0, the first equation gives X=0X=0, and the second then gives Y=0Y=0. This does not define a projective point, so there is no intersection point on the projective line V+(Z)V_+(Z).

We therefore consider the affine equations

Y2X3=0,(X1)2+Y21=0. Y^2-X^3=0, \qquad (X-1)^2+Y^2-1=0.

Substituting

Y2=1(X1)2 Y^2=1-(X-1)^2

into the first equation gives

1(X1)2X3=X3X2+2X=X(X2X+2)=X(X1)(X+2). \begin{aligned} 1-(X-1)^2-X^3 &=-X^3-X^2+2X\\ &=X(-X^2-X+2)\\ &=-X(X-1)(X+2). \end{aligned}

Thus the intersection points are

(0,0),(1,1),(1,1),(2,22i),(2,22i). (0,0),\quad(1,1),\quad(1,-1),\quad (-2,2\sqrt2\,\mathrm i),\quad (-2,-2\sqrt2\,\mathrm i).

The last two points also show why the algebraically closed field hypothesis is necessary: they would be absent if we worked only over \mathbb R. Hence there are five distinct intersection points. The semicubical parabola is singular at the origin, which is also an intersection point, so the intersection multiplicity there must exceed 11. To confirm this, consider

K[X,Y](X,Y)/(Y2X3,Y21+(X1)2)=K[X,Y](X,Y)/(Y2X3,X(X1)(X+2))=K[X,Y](X,Y)/(Y2X3,X)=K[X,Y](X,Y)/(Y2,X)=K[Y]/(Y2). \begin{aligned} &K[X,Y]_{(X,Y)}/\bigl(Y^2-X^3,Y^2-1+(X-1)^2\bigr)\\ &\quad=K[X,Y]_{(X,Y)}/\bigl(Y^2-X^3,X(X-1)(X+2)\bigr)\\ &\quad=K[X,Y]_{(X,Y)}/\bigl(Y^2-X^3,X\bigr)\\ &\quad=K[X,Y]_{(X,Y)}/\bigl(Y^2,X\bigr)\\ &\quad=K[Y]/(Y^2). \end{aligned}

Here we repeat the elimination above and then use the fact that X1X-1 and X+2X+2 are units in the local ring K[X,Y](X,Y)K[X,Y]_{(X,Y)}. The dimension is 22. Thus the intersection multiplicity at the origin is 22, while it is 11 at each of the other four points, as can also be checked directly. The sum is

2+1+1+1+1=6=32, 2+1+1+1+1=6=3\cdot2,

exactly as asserted by Bézout’s Theorem.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: Current semantic course text and this translation: CC BY-SA 4.0. Unit 30 reader media retain their component-specific public-domain status as recorded in authority/RIGHTS-unit-30.csv. No blanket relicensing claim is made. · Rights record: ASSET_CLOSURE-unit-30.json · Rights record: RIGHTS-unit-30.csv

Worksheet 30: Bézout’s Theorem

Warm-up exercises

Exercise 30.1

Give an example showing that Lemma 30.2 fails if the assumption that the base field is algebraically closed is omitted.

Exercise 30.2

Show that the two curves in Example 30.6 intersect transversely at every computed intersection point other than (0,0)(0,0).

Exercise 30.3 *

Let K=K=\mathbb C. For the two affine curves

V(YX3)andV(Y2X3), V(Y-X^3) \qquad\text{and}\qquad V(Y^2-X^3),

determine all their intersection points and the intersection multiplicity at each point. Also examine intersection points in 2\mathbb P_{\mathbb C}^2 and verify Bézout’s Theorem in this example.

Exercise 30.4 *

Let K=K=\mathbb C. Consider the two plane algebraic curves

C=V(XY2)andD=V(Y2X5). C=V(X-Y^2) \qquad\text{and}\qquad D=V(Y^2-X^5).

Determine all intersection points of the two curves in the affine plane and compute the intersection multiplicity at each. Also determine the points at infinity of both curves, namely the additional points on the projective closures C¯\overline C and D¯\overline D, and check for intersections at infinity. Finally, verify Bézout’s Theorem in this example.

Source discrepancy AGC-U30-SRC-001. The semantic source-page title names the first curve as “Y=X2Y=X^2”, whereas the formula displayed in both the exercise and the source solution is X=Y2X=Y^2. This edition follows the formula actually displayed and does not alter the frozen source-page identity.

Exercises to submit

Exercise 30.5 (6 points)

Let

CK2 C\subseteq\mathbb P_K^2

be a smooth conic, that is, a curve of degree two, over an algebraically closed field. Show that CC is isomorphic to the projective line K1\mathbb P_K^1.

Exercise 30.6 (5 points)

Let KK be an algebraically closed field and let

CK2 C\subset\mathbb P_K^2

be a smooth curve of degree d2d\geq2. Show that there is a morphism

CK1 C\longrightarrow\mathbb P_K^1

such that each fibre consists of at most d1d-1 points.

Exercise 30.7 (5 points)

Let

C=V+(X3+Y3+Z3)K2 C=V_+(X^3+Y^3+Z^3)\subseteq\mathbb P_K^2

be the Fermat cubic over an algebraically closed field of characteristic different from 33. Describe explicitly a morphism

CK1 C\longrightarrow\mathbb P_K^1

whose fibres each contain at most two points.

Exercise 30.8 (4 points)

Let

C2 C\subseteq\mathbb P_{\mathbb C}^2

be the complex projective closure of the unit circle. Determine an explicit bijective parametrisation

1C. \mathbb P_{\mathbb C}^1\longrightarrow C.

Exercise 30.9 (4 points)

Over \mathbb C, verify Bézout’s Theorem for the two projective plane curves

C=V+(ZY2X3) C=V_+(ZY^2-X^3)

and

D=V+(X2+(YZ)2Z2). D=V_+\!\left(X^2+(Y-Z)^2-Z^2\right).

Sketch the situation.

Exercise 30.10 (4 points)

Over \mathbb C, verify Bézout’s Theorem for the two projective plane curves

C=V+(ZYX2) C=V_+(ZY-X^2)

and

D=V+(X2+(YZ)2Z2). D=V_+\!\left(X^2+(Y-Z)^2-Z^2\right).

Sketch the situation.

Scope note AGC-CORR-0133. The source of Exercises 30.9 and 30.10 does not specify a base field. This edition explicitly states \mathbb C, in keeping with the geometric interpretation and the instruction to sketch; in characteristic 22, the second quadratic form degenerates to the square of a line, so the intended calculation is no longer the same.

Exercise 30.11 (4 points)

Over an algebraically closed field KK, verify Bézout’s Theorem for the two monomial curves given in affine form by

C=V(X2Y3) C=V(X^2-Y^3)

and

D=V(X5Y4). D=V(X^5-Y^4).

Source-condition note REVIEW-AK-26-30-C19 - base field. The source does not specify the base field, while Bézout’s Theorem 30.3 is stated over an algebraically closed field. This edition makes that ambient hypothesis explicit without imposing an unnecessary characteristic restriction.

Exercise 30.12 (5 points)

Let RR be a commutative ring and let M,NM,N be RR-modules. If

f:MN f:M\longrightarrow N

is an RR-module homomorphism, then the map

f*:Hom(N,R)Hom(M,R),φφf \begin{aligned} f^*:\operatorname{Hom}(N,R)&\longrightarrow\operatorname{Hom}(M,R),\\ \varphi&\longmapsto\varphi\circ f \end{aligned}

is also an RR-module homomorphism.

Now let

0MNP0 0\longrightarrow M\longrightarrow N\longrightarrow P\longrightarrow0

be a short exact sequence of RR-modules. Show that the induced sequence

0Hom(P,R)Hom(N,R)Hom(M,R) 0\longrightarrow\operatorname{Hom}(P,R) \longrightarrow\operatorname{Hom}(N,R) \longrightarrow\operatorname{Hom}(M,R)

is exact. Also give an example with R=R=\mathbb Z showing that the last arrow is not surjective in general.

English Markdown source · Frozen source revision · Licence: Current semantic course text and this translation: CC BY-SA 4.0. Official PDF components retain their recorded component routes.

Public Solutions to Worksheet 30

At the frozen revision boundary, the source provides public solutions only for Exercises 30.3 and 30.4. The frozen authority query reports the other ten candidate solution pages as absent. No additional solutions have been created for this edition.

Solution to Exercise 30.3

The intersection points of the two curves in the complex affine plane are given by

V(YX3,Y2X3). V(Y-X^3,\,Y^2-X^3).

Thus an intersection point (x,y)(x,y) must satisfy

y=x3andy2=x3. y=x^3 \qquad\text{and}\qquad y^2=x^3.

Substituting the first equation into the second gives

y(y1)=0. y(y-1)=0.

Hence y=0y=0 or y=1y=1. The intersection points are therefore

{(0,0),(1,1),(ζ,1),(ζ2,1)}, \{(0,0),(1,1),(\zeta,1),(\zeta^2,1)\},

where ζ\zeta is a primitive cube root of unity. At the origin, the quotient ring is

[X,Y](X,Y)/(YX3,Y2X3)[X](X)/(X3,X6X3)[X]/(X3). \begin{aligned} \mathbb C[X,Y]_{(X,Y)}/(Y-X^3,Y^2-X^3) &\cong \mathbb C[X]_{(X)}/(X^3,X^6-X^3)\\ &\cong \mathbb C[X]/(X^3). \end{aligned}

Its dimension as a complex vector space is 33, so the intersection multiplicity at the origin is 33.

To determine the multiplicities at the other three points, compute the gradients in the conventional coordinate order (X,Y)(X,Y). For

F=YX3,G=Y2X3, F=Y-X^3, \qquad G=Y^2-X^3,

we obtain

F=(3x2,1)andG=(3x2,2y)=(3x2,2). \nabla F=(-3x^2,1) \qquad\text{and}\qquad \nabla G=(-3x^2,2y)=(-3x^2,2).

Since x0x\ne0, these two directions are linearly independent. Thus both curves are smooth and intersect transversely at the three points; each has intersection multiplicity 11.

Source correction AGC-CORR-0134 - order of gradient components. The source writes derivative components in the implicit order (Y,X)(Y,X) in one part of the solution, unlike the convention (X,Y)(X,Y) used elsewhere. This edition writes both gradients consistently in the order (X,Y)(X,Y); the transversality test and its result are unchanged.

In projective space, we homogenise the two ideals. Thus we consider

V+(YZ2X3)andV+(Y2ZX3). V_+(YZ^2-X^3) \qquad\text{and}\qquad V_+(Y^2Z-X^3).

Setting Z=0Z=0 gives X=0X=0, so the intersection point at infinity is (0,1,0)(0,1,0). The affine neighbourhood D+(Y)D_+(Y) gives the equations

Z2X3andZX3. Z^2-X^3 \qquad\text{and}\qquad Z-X^3.

At the origin of this chart, eliminating ZZ again gives a local quotient of dimension 33. Hence the intersection multiplicity at this point at infinity is also 33. The sum of all intersection multiplicities is

3+31+3=9, 3+3\cdot1+3=9,

in agreement with the product of the two curve degrees, 33=93\cdot3=9.

Solution to Exercise 30.4

Adding the two equations immediately gives the condition

0=XX5=X(1X4). 0=X-X^5=X(1-X^4).

Thus the xx-coordinate of an intersection point is 00 or a fourth root of unity,

x{0,1,1,i,i}. x\in\{0,1,-1,i,-i\}.

If x=0x=0, we immediately obtain y=0y=0. The local quotient ring can be written as

[X,Y](X,Y)/(XY2,Y2X5)[Y](Y)/(Y2Y10)=[Y](Y)/(Y2(1Y8))[Y](Y)/(Y2). \begin{aligned} \mathbb C[X,Y]_{(X,Y)}/(X-Y^2,Y^2-X^5) &\cong \mathbb C[Y]_{(Y)}/(Y^2-Y^{10})\\ &=\mathbb C[Y]_{(Y)}/\bigl(Y^2(1-Y^8)\bigr)\\ &\cong \mathbb C[Y]_{(Y)}/(Y^2). \end{aligned}

Since 1Y81-Y^8 is a unit in this local ring, the intersection multiplicity at (0,0)(0,0) is 22.

Source correction AGC-CORR-0135 - localisation subscript. In the middle line, the source prints [Y]Y\mathbb C[Y]_Y, which usually means inverting powers of YY and cannot be the local ring at the origin. This edition retains the localisation specified in the preceding line, [Y](Y)\mathbb C[Y]_{(Y)}, making the unit and local-length argument valid.

Now suppose xx is a fourth root of unity. Since y2=xy^2=x, the number yy is an eighth root of unity. If ζ\zeta is the first primitive eighth root of unity, the other eight intersection points are

(1,1),(1,1),(i,ζ),(i,ζ),(1,i),(1,i),(i,ζ3),(i,ζ3). \begin{gathered} (1,1),(1,-1),(i,\zeta),(i,-\zeta),\\ (-1,i),(-1,-i),(-i,\zeta^3),(-i,-\zeta^3). \end{gathered}

We show that the intersection is transverse at all eight points, so each intersection multiplicity is 11. For

F=XY2,G=Y2X5, F=X-Y^2, \qquad G=Y^2-X^5,

the gradients are

F=(1,2Y)andG=(5X4,2Y). \nabla F=(1,-2Y) \qquad\text{and}\qquad \nabla G=(-5X^4,2Y).

At each point (x,y)(x,y) above, x0x\ne0, so both curves are smooth. Since x4=1x^4=1, the second gradient has the form (5,2y)(-5,2y). The two directions can be linearly dependent only if 2y=10y-2y=-10y, which is impossible because y0y\ne0 over \mathbb C. Thus all eight intersections are transverse.

Finally, consider the points at infinity. The homogenisation of the first equation is

F̃=XZY2, \widetilde F=XZ-Y^2,

so the unique point at infinity on C¯=V+(F̃)\overline C=V_+(\widetilde F) is (1,0,0)(1,0,0). The homogenisation of the second equation is

G̃=Y2Z3X5, \widetilde G=Y^2Z^3-X^5,

so the unique point at infinity on D¯=V+(G̃)\overline D=V_+(\widetilde G) is (0,1,0)(0,1,0). These points differ, so there is no additional intersection at infinity.

The total intersection multiplicity is therefore

2+81=10. 2+8\cdot1=10.

Since the curves have degrees 22 and 55, this sum equals the product of their degrees, 25=102\cdot5=10, as asserted by Bézout’s Theorem.

English Markdown source · Licence: CC BY-SA 4.0 for the frozen semantic source; official 2012 PDF witnesses retain the component notices recorded in the Unit 30 rights ledger

Media credits

The following credits follow the order in which images appear in Lecture 1. Each component retains its own source licence; the licence for the lecture text does not replace the licences of the media components.

  1. Graph of a linear functionFile:Linear function.svg; creator/attribution: No machine-readable author provided. Luks assumed (based on copyright claims).; licence: Public domain.

  2. Graph of a polynomial of degree fourFile:Polynomialdeg4.png; creator/attribution: Phreneticc; licence: CC BY-SA 3.0.

  3. Graph of a rational functionFile:RationalDegree2byXedi.gif; creator/attribution: Sam Derbyshire; licence: CC BY-SA 3.0.

  4. Unit circleFile:Disk 1.svg; creator/attribution: Paris 16; licence: Public domain.

  5. EllipseFile:Ellipse.svg; creator/attribution: Zorgit; licence: CC BY-SA 3.0.

  6. Curve with a cuspFile:Cusp.png; creator/attribution: Satipatthana; licence: Public domain.

  7. Example of an elliptic curveFile:Elliptic curve simple.svg; creator/attribution: derivative work: Pbroks13 ( talk ) Elliptic_curve_simple.png : Created by Sean κ . + 23:33, 27 May 2005 (UTC); licence: CC BY-SA 3.0.

  8. Tschirnhausen cubicFile:Tschirnhausen cubic.svg; creator/attribution: Original: Oleg Alexandrov Vector: Krishnavedala; licence: GPL.

  9. Kampyle of EudoxusFile:Eudoxus.png; creator/attribution: Donald Hosek; licence: Public domain.

  10. Conchoid of PascalFile:Conchoid of Pascal.png; creator/attribution: Luke33; licence: Public domain.

  11. BifoliumFile:Bifolium.png; creator/attribution: Oleg Alexandrov; licence: Public domain.

  12. LimaçonFile:Limacon.png; creator/attribution: Berto; licence: Public domain.

  13. QuadrifoliumFile:Quadrifolium.svg; creator/attribution: Mktyscn; licence: Public domain.

  14. Lemniscate of BernoulliFile:Lemniscate of Bernoulli.svg; creator/attribution: Zorgit; licence: Public domain.

  15. CycloidFile:Cicloide.svg; creator/attribution: Elborgo; licence: CC BY 2.5.

  16. Logarithmic spiralFile:Logarithmic spiral.png; creator/attribution: Anarkman~commonswiki; licence: CC BY-SA 3.0.

  17. Sine graphFile:Sin.svg; creator/attribution: Self: Commons user Keytotime; licence: Public domain.

  18. Quadratic Koch curveFile:Quadratic Koch.png; creator/attribution: Alexis Monnerot-Dumaine; licence: CC BY-SA 3.0.

  19. Rectangular hyperbolaFile:Rectangular hyperbola.svg; creator/attribution: Qef; licence: Public domain.

  20. Cubic curves studied by NewtonFile:Newtonbig.gif; creator/attribution: Pokipsy76; licence: CC BY-SA 3.0.

  21. Isaac NewtonFile:GodfreyKneller-IsaacNewton-1689.jpg; creator/attribution: James Thronill after Sir Godfrey Kneller; licence: Public domain.

  22. Examples of real elliptic curvesFile:ECexamples01.png; creator/attribution: Dake~commonswiki; licence: CC BY-SA 3.0.

  23. Carl Friedrich GaussFile:Carl Friedrich Gauss.jpg; creator/attribution: Gottlieb Biermann / After Christian Albrecht Jensen; licence: Public domain.

English Markdown source

Media credits for Unit 2

The credits follow the order of the images in Lecture 2. Each component retains its own source licence.

  1. Conic sectionsFile:Conic_sections_2n.png; creator/attribution: No machine-readable creator name is available; Nk is assumed on the basis of copyright claims.; licence: CC BY-SA 3.0.
  2. Examples of algebraic setsFile:Conjuntos_algebraicos_2.svg; creator/attribution: drini; licence: CC BY-SA 4.0.

English Markdown source

Media credits for Unit 3

The credits follow the order of the images in Lecture 3. Each component retains its own source licence.

  1. Oscar Zariski (1899-1986)File:Oscar Zariski.jpg; creator/attribution: George Bergman; licence: GFDL 1.2.
  2. A line in the planeFile:Lineline.jpg; creator/attribution: Astur1; licence: Public domain.
  3. Intersection of two planesFile:IntersectingPlanes.png; creator/attribution: The original uploader was Stib at English Wikipedia .; licence: CC BY-SA 3.0.
  4. Intersection of three planesFile:Secretsharing-3-point.png; creator/attribution: stib; licence: CC BY-SA 3.0.

English Markdown source

Media credits for Unit 4

The credits follow the order of the images in Lecture 4 and Worksheet 4. Each component retains its own source licence.

  1. Points for a Delaunay triangulationFile:Delaunay_points.png; creator/attribution: Nü es; licence: CC BY-SA 3.0.
  2. A lineFile:Gerade.svg; creator/attribution: Adrian Neumann; licence: CC BY-SA 3.0.
  3. Several straight linesFile:Straight_lines.svg; creator/attribution: Lokilech; licence: CC BY-SA 3.0.
  4. A linear spaceFile:Linear_space2.png; creator/attribution: kmhkmh; licence: CC BY 3.0.
  5. Hydrant on the island of Krk, CroatiaFile:Hydrant_Insel_Krk_Kroatien.jpg; creator/attribution: Usien; licence: CC BY-SA 3.0.
  6. Principal directions on a cylinderFile:Cylinder_principal_directions.svg; creator/attribution: Luca Antonelli ( Luke Antony ); licence: CC BY-SA 3.0.
  7. Two cubic curvesFile:Two_cubic_curves.png; creator/attribution: Hack; licence: Public domain.
  8. A surface and a vertical lineFile:Non_cohen_macaulay_scheme_thumb.png; creator/attribution: The original uploader was Jakob.scholbach at English Wikipedia .; licence: CC BY-SA 3.0.
  9. Rectangular hyperbolaFile:Rectangular_hyperbola.svg; creator/attribution: Qef; licence: Public domain.

English Markdown source

Media credits for Unit 5

The credits follow the order of the images in Lecture 5 and Worksheet 5. Each component retains the rights status of its source.

  1. A cone (the zero locus of a homogeneous polynomial) - File:Kuzel_obecny.svg; creator/attribution: Pajs at Czech Wikipedia; rights status/licence: public domain.
  2. Emmy Noether (1882-1935) - File:Noether.jpg; creator/attribution: unknown creator (photograph taken before 1910); source/publisher recorded on the Commons page; rights status/licence: public domain.
  3. Triaxial ellipsoid with semiaxes in the ratio 3:2:1 - File:Elipsoid_trojosy321.png; creator/attribution: Pajs at Czech Wikipedia; rights status/licence: public domain.

English Markdown source

Media credits for Unit 6

The credits follow the order of the images in Lecture 6 and Worksheet 6. Each component retains the rights status of its source.

  1. A parametrised curve can be pictured as the path of a moving point - File:Krivka parametricky.png; creator/attribution: Beny at Czech Wikipedia; rights status/licence: public domain.
  2. Cubic curve with a double point - File:Cubic with double point.svg; creator/attribution: Gunther at German Wikipedia; rights status/licence: public domain.
  3. The cissoid of Diocles (shown in black) admits a rational parametrisation - File:Dioklova kisoida.png; creator/attribution: Pajs at Czech Wikipedia; rights status/licence: public domain.

English Markdown source

Media credits for Unit 7

The credits follow the nine image positions in Lecture 7. Each component retains the rights status or licence of its source. The three orbit GIFs remain animated in the HTML reader; the PDF uses their locally derived first frames.

  1. Standard cone - File:DoubleCone.png; creator/attribution: Lars H. Rohwedder ( User:RokerHRO ); rights status/licence: Public domain.
  2. Sections of the standard cone by affine planes - File:Conic sections.svg; creator/attribution: Anuskafm; rights status/licence: CC BY-SA 3.0.
  3. First stage of the principal-axis transformation of a quadric - File:Hauptachsentransformation1.png; creator/attribution: rdb; rights status/licence: Public domain.
  4. Second stage of the principal-axis transformation of a quadric - File:Hauptachsentransformation2.png; creator/attribution: rdb; rights status/licence: Public domain.
  5. Third stage of the principal-axis transformation of a quadric - File:Hauptachsentransformation3.png; creator/attribution: rdb; rights status/licence: Public domain.
  6. Portrait of an unknown man, formerly misidentified as Johannes Kepler - File:Portrait Confused With Johannes Kepler 1610.jpg; creator/attribution: Unidentified painter; rights status/licence: Public domain.
  7. Elliptic orbit - File:Elliptic orbit.gif; creator/attribution: Brandir; rights status/licence: CC BY-SA 3.0.
  8. Parabolic orbit - File:Parabolic orbit.gif; creator/attribution: Brandir; rights status/licence: CC BY-SA 3.0.
  9. Hyperbolic orbit - File:Hyperbolic orbit.gif; creator/attribution: Brandir; rights status/licence: CC BY-SA 3.0.

English Markdown source

Media credits for Unit 8

The six media positions in Lecture 8 retain their respective component attributions and licences. Two GIFs remain animated in the HTML reader; the PDF uses deterministically selected first frames.

  1. File:Lemniscate Building.gif - File:Lemniscate Building.gif; creator/attribution: Zorgit; licence: CC BY-SA 3.0.
  2. File:Parallelle lijnen.png - File:Parallelle lijnen.png; creator/attribution: Ellywa at Dutch Wikipedia; licence: CC BY-SA 3.0.
  3. File:Ellipse tri.png - File:Ellipse tri.png; creator/attribution: Original uploader was דוד שי at he.wikipedia; licence: CC BY-SA 3.0.
  4. File:Steam engine in action.gif - File:Steam engine in action.gif; creator/attribution: Panther; licence: CC BY-SA 3.0.
  5. File:Intersection of cylinders.jpg - File:Intersection of cylinders.jpg; creator/attribution: Jan Schoenke; licence: CC BY-SA 3.0.
  6. File:Alg Kurven OS2008 Lsg8.10 v2.png - Datei:Alg Kurven OS2008 Lsg8.10 v2.png; creator/attribution: Christian Boberg; licence: CC BY-SA 3.0.

English Markdown source

Media credits for Unit 9

The single substantive media position in Lecture 9 retains its Commons identity and source rights status. The two PDFs referenced by the page are official build witnesses recorded in the authority manifest, not separate reader media.

  1. David Hilbert (1886) - File:David Hilbert 1886.jpg; creator: unknown; Commons uploader: Jacek Halicki; rights status/licence: Public domain.

English Markdown source

Media credits for Unit 11

The single substantive media position in Lecture 11 retains its Commons identity and source rights status. The two PDFs referenced by the page are official build witnesses recorded in the authority manifest, not separate reader media.

  1. Disjoint ellipses - File:Disjoint ellipses.png; creator: Pmidden; source credit: own work, created with Mathematica; rights status/licence: public domain. The reader file is the 250-pixel Commons rendering at the source’s original dimensions, not a claim of byte identity with the original file; the original file’s identity is preserved in authority/RIGHTS-unit-11.csv.

English Markdown source · Rights record: RIGHTS-unit-11.csv

Media credits for Unit 12

The four substantive media positions in Lecture 12 retain their respective Commons identities, attributions, local forms, and component licences. The two PDFs referenced by the page are official build witnesses in the authority manifest, not separate reader media.

  1. Alexander GrothendieckFile:Alexander Grothendieck.jpg; photograph: Konrad Jacobs; credit: Copyright by MFO / Oberwolfach Photo Collection; licence: CC BY-SA 2.0 de; reader form: original file, 268 × 326.
  2. Horizontal lineFile:Lineline.jpg; creator: Astur1; rights status: public domain; reader form: original file, 290 × 138.
  3. Cartesian graph of a linear functionFile:Lineair-cartesiaans.png; creator/attribution: MADe at Dutch Wikipedia; licence: CC BY-SA 3.0; reader form: official 250-pixel Commons derivative, with the original file’s identity and metadata retained in the rights ledger.
  4. Graph of a polynomial of degree fiveFile:Polynomialdeg5.png; creator/attribution: Derbeth (on the basis of copyright claims in the source); licence: CC BY-SA 3.0; reader form: official 120-pixel Commons derivative, with the original file’s identity and metadata retained in the rights ledger.

English Markdown source

Media credits for Unit 13

The credits follow the order of the images in Lecture 13. Each component retains its own source licence.

  1. Graph of the hyperbola y = 1/x - File:Hyperbola one over x.svg; creator/attribution: No machine-readable author provided. Ktims assumed (based on copyright claims).; licence/rights status: CC BY-SA 3.0.

  2. Connected topological space (red) and disconnected space (green) - File:Connected and disconnected spaces2.svg; creator/attribution: Dbc334; licence/rights status: Public domain.

English Markdown source

Media credits for Unit 14

The credits cover the single image in Lecture 14. The component retains its own source licence.

  1. Graph of a global function on two-dimensional affine space - File:Monkey Saddle Surface (Shaded).png; creator/attribution: Inductiveload; licence/rights status: Public domain.

English Markdown source

Media credits for Unit 15

The credits cover the single image in Lecture 15. The component retains its own source licence.

  1. Schematic representation of a neighbourhood filter - File:Concentric Circles.svg; creator/attribution: Andreas Pietzowski; licence/rights status: CC BY-SA 4.0.

English Markdown source

Media credits for Unit 16

The credits follow the order of the images in Lecture 16 and Public Solution 16.12. Each component retains its own source licence.

  1. A filter can be identified by what it retains - File:Kaffeefilter.jpg; creator/attribution: Elke Wetzig ( Elya ); licence/rights status: CC BY-SA 3.0.

  2. Not every function on the cone outside a line extends to the whole affine space with that line removed - File:Cone intersects line.png; creator/attribution: Pmidden; licence/rights status: Public domain.

  3. Fibres of a map; M is the codomain, and the domain is the union of all fibres - File:FiberBundle 2.png; creator/attribution: ja:user:132人目; licence/rights status: CC BY-SA 3.0.

  4. Sketch of the union of the three coordinate axes in Solution 16.12 - File:Draft0.svg; creator/attribution: Kalan; licence/rights status: CC BY-SA 3.0.

English Markdown source

Media credits for Unit 17

Lecture 17, Worksheet 17, and the four frozen public solutions contain no reader media positions. The two official upstream PDFs are retained solely as authority witnesses and retain their own component rights and attributions, as recorded in authority/ASSET_CLOSURE-unit-17.json. The translated text remains under CC BY-SA 4.0; no blanket licence is claimed for the mixed collection.

English Markdown source · Rights record: ASSET_CLOSURE-unit-17.json

Media credits for Unit 18

The single substantive media position in Lecture 18 retains its Commons identity and source licence. The two official PDFs are authority witnesses, not additional reader media positions.

  1. Neil’s parabola with a cuspidal singularity at the origin - File:Cusp.svg; creator/attribution: Georg-Johann; licence/rights status: CC BY-SA 3.0.

Rights note: the inline label on the lecture page is PD, whereas the frozen Commons description contains {{self|cc-by-sa-3.0|GFDL}} and the Commons metadata offers CC BY-SA 3.0. The edition uses that Commons option, not the differing inline label.

English Markdown source

Media credits for Unit 19

The single substantive media position in Lecture 19 retains its Commons identity and source licence. The two official PDFs are authority witnesses, not additional reader media positions.

  1. Twisted cubic curve - File:Twisted cubic curve.png; creator/attribution: Claudio Rocchini; licence/rights status: CC BY 3.0.

Rights note: the inline label on the lecture page is CC-BY-SA-3.0, whereas the frozen Commons description contains {{self|GFDL|cc-by-3.0}} and the Commons metadata offers CC BY 3.0. The edition uses that Commons option, not the differing inline label.

English Markdown source

Media credits for Unit 20

The single substantive media position in Lecture 20 retains its Commons identity and source licence. The two official PDFs are authority witnesses, not additional reader media positions.

  1. Whitney umbrella - File:Whitney unbrella.png; creator/attribution: Claudio Rocchini; licence/rights status: CC BY 2.5.

Rights note: the inline Wikiversity label and the credits appendix in the lecture PDF state CC-BY-SA-2.5, but the frozen Commons description does not offer that combination. Commons offers GFDL 1.2+, CC BY-SA 3.0, and CC BY 2.5. The edition uses the Commons CC BY 2.5 option and retains the differing source label solely as provenance.

English Markdown source

Media credits for Unit 21

Lecture 21, Worksheet 21, and the two frozen public solutions contain no substantive reader media positions. The two official upstream PDFs are retained solely as visual/build authority witnesses and retain their own component rights and attributions, as recorded in authority/ASSET_CLOSURE-unit-21.json.

Rights note: the internal boilerplate in both PDFs states CC BY-SA 3.0, whereas the frozen current course records and Commons records identify both as CC BY-SA 4.0 components. The edition follows those current component records, retains the internal PDF statements as provenance, and does not treat the PDFs as current semantic copies. The translated text remains under CC BY-SA 4.0; no blanket licence is claimed for the mixed collection. Translation, checking, and production of the edition were assisted by OpenAI Codex gpt-5.6-sol, Ultra.

English Markdown source · Rights record: ASSET_CLOSURE-unit-21.json

Media credits for Unit 22

The seven substantive media positions in Lecture 22 and Worksheet 22 retain the identities, attributions, and licensing routes of their source components. The two official PDFs are authority/build witnesses, not additional reader media positions.

  1. Tangent to a curveFile:Tangent to a curve.svg; creator according to the current Commons record: Jacj, with later versions by Oleg Alexandrov; rights status: public domain.
  2. Three lines meeting at one pointFile:3 equations -5.JPG; creator: Cronholm144; rights status: public domain.
  3. Portrait of René DescartesFile:Frans Hals - Portret van René Descartes.jpg; work after Frans Hals, reproduction source as recorded by Commons; rights status: public domain.
  4. Folium of DescartesFile:Kartesisches-Blatt.svg; creator: Georg-Johann; licensing route used: CC BY-SA 3.0.
  5. Two curve components intersecting at a triple pointFile:Intersect3.png; creator: Michael Larsen; licensing route used through GFDL migration on Commons: CC BY-SA 3.0.
  6. A tangent to a circle is perpendicular to the radiusFile:Cercle tangente rayon.svg; original work: Christophe Dang Ngoc Chan (Cdang), SVG conversion/derivative: Hagman; licensing route used: CC BY-SA 3.0.
  7. CardioidFile:Cardioid.svg; creator: D.328; reuse route displayed by Commons: CC BY-SA 3.0, with the raw GFDL/CC BY-SA 2.1 JP and migration records retained in the rights ledger.

Reconciliation note: the inline Wikiversity credit for the tangent image names AxelBoldt, whereas the frozen Commons description names Jacj and Oleg Alexandrov. Commons component metadata governs attribution in this edition; the differing Wikiversity label is retained as provenance in the freeze, not republished as an authorship fact. Raw dual-licensing and migration records for the four licensed components are retained in authority/RIGHTS-unit-22.csv; the edition makes no blanket-licence claim for the mixed collection.

Both official PDFs contain internal CC BY-SA 3.0 boilerplate, whereas the frozen current course and Commons records identify both as CC BY-SA 4.0 components. The edition retains this difference as provenance. The translated text remains under CC BY-SA 4.0. Translation, checking, and production of the edition were assisted by OpenAI Codex gpt-5.6-sol, Ultra.

English Markdown source · Rights record: RIGHTS-unit-22.csv

Media credits for Unit 23

Lecture 23, Worksheet 23, and both frozen public solutions contain no substantive reader media positions. The two official upstream PDFs are retained solely as visual/build authority witnesses and retain their own component rights and attributions, as recorded in authority/ASSET_CLOSURE-unit-23.json.

Rights and accessibility note: the internal boilerplate in both PDFs states CC BY-SA 3.0, whereas the frozen course statements and Commons records identify both as CC BY-SA 4.0 components. The lecture PDF has seven pages; the worksheet PDF has five pages, of which the fourth is blank. Both are untagged and lack PDF document structure. The edition retains all these differences as provenance, does not treat the PDFs as current semantic copies, and does not count them as reader media positions.

The translated text remains under CC BY-SA 4.0; no blanket licence is claimed for the mixed collection. Translation, checking, and production of the edition were assisted by OpenAI Codex gpt-5.6-sol, Ultra.

English Markdown source · Rights record: ASSET_CLOSURE-unit-23.json

Media credits for Unit 24

Lecture 24, Worksheet 24, and the sole frozen public solution contain no substantive reader media positions. The two official upstream PDFs are retained solely as visual/build authority witnesses and retain their own component rights and attributions, as recorded in authority/ASSET_CLOSURE-unit-24.json and authority/RIGHTS-unit-24.csv.

Rights note: the file-description pages for both 2012 PDFs retain the older CC BY-SA 2.0 Germany statement alongside the current print/course version statement, CC BY-SA 4.0. The edition records both routes and does not grant a new blanket licence over the PDF files. The lecture PDF has six pages and the worksheet PDF has two pages. Both have extractable text, but are untagged, have no structure tree, and specify no document language.

The lecture PDF also contains the historical form G=x2+z21G=x^2+z^2-1, whereas the frozen live semantic source contains the consistent form G=y2+z21G=y^2+z^2-1. Both the PDF and the live semantic source write the coefficient a+1a_{\ell+1} in a proof step that mathematically requires b+1b_{\ell+1}. The reader follows the semantic source for the cylinder example and openly marks the coefficient correction; the PDF is not treated as a current semantic copy or as a reader media position.

The translated text remains under CC BY-SA 4.0 through the semantic-source route; other components retain their respective rights. Translation, checking, and production of the edition were assisted by OpenAI Codex gpt-5.6-sol, Ultra.

English Markdown source · Rights record: ASSET_CLOSURE-unit-24.json · Rights record: RIGHTS-unit-24.csv

Media credits for Unit 25

Lecture 25, Worksheet 25, and both frozen public solutions contain no substantive reader media positions. Exercise 25.13 asks the reader to draw an image using suitable software, but the source supplies no image file for that exercise. The two official upstream PDFs are retained solely as visual/build authority witnesses and retain their own component rights and attributions, as recorded in authority/ASSET_CLOSURE-unit-25.json and authority/RIGHTS-unit-25.csv.

Rights note: the file-description pages for both 2012 PDFs retain the older CC BY-SA 2.0 Germany statement alongside the current print/course version statement, CC BY-SA 4.0. The edition records both routes and does not grant a new blanket licence over the PDF files. The lecture PDF has seven pages and the worksheet PDF has three pages. Both have extractable text, but are untagged, have no structure tree, specify no document language, and have no document outline.

Holger Brenner’s upstream semantic text and its derivative translation follow the CC BY-SA 4.0 route; other components retain their respective rights. This English edition is an independent derivative and implies no endorsement by, or official affiliation with, the author or Wikiversity. Translation, checking, and production of the edition were assisted by OpenAI Codex gpt-5.6-sol, Ultra.

The contributor to the frozen revisions of the Lecture 25 and Worksheet 25 root pages is recorded as Arbota. The contributor to the frozen revision of the solution to Exercise 25.1 is Bocardodarapti, whereas the contributor to the frozen revision of the solution to Exercise 25.2 is Arbota. Course authorship credit to Holger Brenner and these revision credits are distinct relationships; the oldid links and frozen XML preserve a verifiable attribution history.

English Markdown source · Rights record: ASSET_CLOSURE-unit-25.json · Rights record: RIGHTS-unit-25.csv

Media credits for Unit 26

Lecture 26 contains one substantive reader media position. Worksheet 26 and its public solution contain no additional reader media positions. The two official upstream PDFs are retained as visual/build authority witnesses, not as reader media positions.

  1. Transverse and non-transverse intersections - File:Intersect3.png, image created by Michael Larsen and uploaded to Commons by Maksim. The reader uses the official Commons thumbnail, 250 x 249 pixels, stored as authority/assets/250px-Intersect3.png, 5,922 bytes, SHA-256 b29c15edf6619632fe033e0b6064c1826226abce0be6219262ca028a2a157818. The licensing route used is CC BY-SA 3.0.

The Commons metadata freezes the File:Intersect3.png description page at revision 475878038. The original file is 400 x 399 pixels, 5,018 bytes, and has SHA-1 26fef135fcc9d950958068778e5805830ffa8b8e. The inline source credits name Michael Larsen and Maksim separately; the rights ledger preserves those creator and uploader relationships without conflating them.

PDF rights note: the file-description pages for both 2012 PDFs retain the older CC BY-SA 2.0 Germany statement alongside the current print/course version statement, CC BY-SA 4.0. The edition records both routes and does not grant a new blanket licence over the PDFs. The lecture PDF has seven pages and the worksheet PDF has two pages. Both have extractable text, but are untagged, have no structure tree, specify no document language, and have no document outline.

Holger Brenner’s upstream semantic text and its derivative translation follow the CC BY-SA 4.0 route; the image component retains CC BY-SA 3.0. This English edition is an independent derivative and implies no endorsement by, or official affiliation with, the author or Wikiversity. Translation, checking, and production of the edition were assisted by OpenAI Codex gpt-5.6-sol, Ultra.

The contributor to the frozen revisions of the Lecture 26 and Worksheet 26 root pages is recorded as Arbota. The contributor to the frozen revision of the solution to Exercise 26.4 is Bocardodarapti. Course authorship credit to Holger Brenner and these revision credits are distinct relationships; the oldid links and frozen XML preserve a verifiable attribution history.

English Markdown source

Media credits for Unit 27

Lecture 27 contains ten substantive reader media positions. Worksheet 27 and its solution-closure note contain no additional media. All reader files below are byte-identical copies of the frozen Commons originals; a second witness copy is stored in authority/wikiversity/unit-27/assets/. The two official upstream PDFs are visual/build authority witnesses, not reader media positions.

  1. Dandelion flower - File:Loewenzahn_20.jpg, created and uploaded by Waugsberg. The inline course credit records CC-BY-SA-2.5; the frozen Commons page at revision 1247205786 offers CC BY-SA 3.0. Local file: 840,757 bytes, SHA-256 8b906e3ef135ef3b07c93cdc053ea45155bf6de0d7c6a209d1b7a0746c03f7d7.
  2. Projective line, illustration 1 - File:Projektiveline1bb.jpg, created and uploaded by Darapti, CC BY-SA 3.0. Local file: 723,518 bytes, SHA-256 f6feb42ac3b37d3d1ed8b7826f901b88fac64c0a2fdd8245a178b18e068b61b6.
  3. Projective line, illustration 2 - File:Projektiveline2bb.jpg, created and uploaded by Darapti, CC BY-SA 3.0. Local file: 777,323 bytes, SHA-256 40664e9c2f5f63fa03947df2bb120bc5427380cc7db8c14d39f4cc415c6beaea.
  4. Projective line, illustration 3 - File:Projektiveline3bb.jpg, created and uploaded by Darapti, CC BY-SA 3.0. Local file: 808,222 bytes, SHA-256 ef5b0c0b0e34a7b947a946bda22d04d5ed11ecb2b88d5e0256f22dcd28e594b2.
  5. Projective plane, illustration 1 - File:Projektiveplane1bb.jpg, created and uploaded by Darapti, CC BY-SA 3.0. Local file: 737,889 bytes, SHA-256 5845a36699676293242090f7499daf7f033aed559590b2e61cdab0f4c635f23c.
  6. Projective plane, illustration 2 - File:Projektiveplane2bb.jpg, created and uploaded by Darapti, CC BY-SA 3.0. Local file: 789,468 bytes, SHA-256 784560087dcdcae0ef62505c865bd86db3ebf72a71fb674615ed6e55e2ca782d.
  7. Projective plane, illustration 3 - File:Projektiveplane3bb.jpg, created and uploaded by Darapti, CC BY-SA 3.0. Local file: 801,410 bytes, SHA-256 7a5642c90b40cae72a66b4f2cfc1804e1a0abf4a64f9d41769b1e5694b824afb.
  8. Projective plane, illustration 4 - File:Projektiveplane4bb.jpg, created and uploaded by Darapti, CC BY-SA 3.0. Local file: 839,639 bytes, SHA-256 92ad7dfff6cdf2ba0fb6b361444cfd4ed9663a5ae59b1d555604533025fdafd9.
  9. Principle of perspective projection - File:Perspective Projection Principle.jpg, image by Joachim Baecker and upload by Fantagu, CC BY-SA 3.0. Local file: 53,956 bytes, SHA-256 38ced602230489102e8cd69886e3dfd609539606ac4c702d7c930b384d119a6c.
  10. Blue sphere - File:Blue-sphere.png, created by Lucas Vieira, uploaded as LucasVB, public domain. The historical course credit names user Kieff; both sides of that relationship are preserved. Local file: 123,336 bytes, SHA-256 5024f8120e040b6f5d40141cc3109c703eda56cb8cdf133d0ef0d11ee7dbb733.

Full metadata, original URLs, description-page revisions, dimensions, original-file SHA-1 hashes, course credits, Commons credits, and component licensing routes are recorded in authority/RIGHTS-unit-27.csv and authority/ASSET_CLOSURE-unit-27.json. Differences between historical inline credits and current Commons metadata are preserved, not conflated.

The official Lecture 27 PDF has nine pages, 171,996 bytes, SHA-256 0d4402bfae46abd09cb4719110a006287b03de31b0e620e0157a4ef9a07817f2. The official Worksheet 27 PDF has two pages, 41,952 bytes, SHA-256 e1fa608c2b54c988f16d0c0b2119f1d21440b37debbf87d89b7bbf228c6bdf9d. Neither is encrypted, and their text is extractable, but they are untagged, have no structure tree or document language, and have no bookmarks. The file-description pages retain the older CC BY-SA 2.0 Germany route and the current CC BY-SA 4.0 print/course route; this edition makes no blanket licensing claim.

Holger Brenner’s upstream semantic text and its derivative translation follow the CC BY-SA 4.0 route. This English edition is an independent derivative and implies no endorsement or official affiliation. The contributor to the frozen revisions of the lecture and worksheet root pages is recorded as Arbota; this is revision provenance, not a replacement for Holger Brenner’s authorship credit. Translation, checking, and production of the edition were assisted by OpenAI Codex gpt-5.6-sol, Ultra.

English Markdown source · Rights record: ASSET_CLOSURE-unit-27.json · Rights record: RIGHTS-unit-27.csv

Media credits for Unit 28

Lecture 28 contains four substantive reader media positions. Worksheet 28 and its public solution contain no additional media. All reader files below are byte-identical copies of the frozen Commons originals; an additional witness copy of each file is stored in authority/wikiversity/unit-28/assets/. The two official upstream PDFs are visual/build authority witnesses, not reader media positions.

  1. Football pattern or sphere of genus zero - File:Soccerball.svg, originating from OpenClipart; the frozen Commons page does not name a creator and records the current uploader as MapGrid. This file is under CC0 1.0. The older inline course credit names user Ranveig and the label PD; both records are preserved without recasting Ranveig as the creator. Local file: 1,311 bytes, SHA-256 0405cfe3c75353882ffeecdbd4c8514bba49954482109c5f06f760d6a93b70e7.
  2. Torus, genus one - File:Torus illustration.png, created and uploaded by Oleg Alexandrov, public domain. Local file: 150,645 bytes, SHA-256 f5c22545e3dbdf4e056c4439d63bdd41f029589893e178502d460576c44d78b7.
  3. Double torus, genus two - File:Double torus illustration.png, created and uploaded by Oleg Alexandrov, public domain. Local file: 266,030 bytes, SHA-256 1a7664a61899dd83245760b2842c6f1b8c2f18887bb507fdbc5405acd1d8a038.
  4. Sphere with three handles, genus three - File:Sphere with three handles.png, work by Oleg Alexandrov created using MATLAB, public domain. Local file: 398,740 bytes, SHA-256 49398059697841332186226bccf87e46032289c1a8a02063fc2600070c51a311.

Full metadata, original URLs, description-page revisions, dimensions, original-file SHA-1 hashes, course credits, Commons credits, and component licensing routes are recorded in authority/RIGHTS-unit-28.csv and authority/ASSET_CLOSURE-unit-28.json. The difference between the historical Ranveig/PD label and current Commons metadata for Soccerball.svg is preserved, not conflated or used to guess a creator.

The official Lecture 28 PDF has nine pages, 106,537 bytes, SHA-256 0d040f9a5663e6d0d7451f4de864a0712e35e08e961afc66d6742dfbee065609. The official Worksheet 28 PDF has three pages, 45,643 bytes, SHA-256 579b29f1250b346549522aadc465f7afa0c67b012b5d7ba76b4c6eb0c94a5d12. Neither is encrypted, and their text is extractable, but they are untagged, have no structure tree or document language, and have no bookmarks. The eighth page of the lecture PDF has no extractable text; this accessibility fact is recorded as a property of the official witness, not as a model for the new reader.

The file-description pages retain the older CC BY-SA 2.0 Germany route and the current CC BY-SA 4.0 print/course route. This edition makes no blanket licensing claim over that mixed collection.

Holger Brenner’s upstream semantic text and its derivative translation follow the CC BY-SA 4.0 route. This English edition is an independent derivative and implies no endorsement or official affiliation. The contributor to the frozen revisions of the lecture and worksheet root pages is recorded as Arbota; this is revision provenance, not a replacement for Holger Brenner’s authorship credit. The contributor to the frozen revision of the public solution to Exercise 28.10 is recorded as Bocardodarapti. Translation, checking, and production of the edition were assisted by OpenAI Codex gpt-5.6-sol, Ultra.

English Markdown source · Rights record: ASSET_CLOSURE-unit-28.json · Rights record: RIGHTS-unit-28.csv

Media credits for Unit 29

Worksheet 29 contains two substantive reader media positions. Full metadata, description-page revisions, original-file SHA-1 hashes, component licensing routes, and witness copies are recorded in the Unit 29 asset closure. The two official upstream PDFs are visual/build authority witnesses, not reader media positions.

  1. Lemniscate of Bernoulli - File:Lemniscate of Bernoulli.svg, created by Zorgit, public domain. The original source file was uploaded in its current file revision by Georg-Johann. The inline course credit also names Zorgit. Local file: 1,087 bytes, SHA-256 3e1753bdbf9a9e0068892d1c10c445c104033e2a100d2d0b68f349fc8e1324f4.
  2. Illustration of a plane cubic curve - File:Tschirnhausen cubic.png, created and uploaded by Oleg Alexandrov, public domain. The inline course credit names Oleg Alexandrov. The frozen Commons description page warns that, although the filename names the Tschirnhausen cubic, the image is not that curve because the angle of intersection at its double point differs. The edition preserves the file actually used by the source and discloses this discrepancy to the reader. The Commons original-file endpoint (metadata: 64,767 bytes, SHA-1 44a9bbaa597b2fce69ca491335199890546cfb3d) returned HTTP 429 during bounded retrieval, so the original file was not archived locally. The reader uses the official Commons thumbnail, 500 x 745, 83,502 bytes, SHA-256 f3dda9da65db9e431f25ea77eb83f51aed2eff1c191dc1206e0759561ee613c7, at authority/assets/Tschirnhausen_cubic-500.png.

The official Lecture 29 PDF has six pages, 84,904 bytes, SHA-256 9f7082c66d493cd02a6e4f0579493ad1ba74ddec4b3777517c9ab6daa9610c6d. The official Worksheet 29 PDF has three pages, 81,522 bytes, SHA-256 83986d2a9928c6e61ad7afa6d5a890e2b296c15a8706931c8c6da485b05079d2. The file-description pages retain the older CC BY-SA 2.0 Germany route, whereas the semantic/course text and its translation follow CC BY-SA 4.0. This edition makes no blanket licensing claim over that mixed collection.

Holger Brenner’s upstream semantic text and its derivative translation follow the CC BY-SA 4.0 route. This English edition is an independent derivative and implies no endorsement or official affiliation. The contributor to the frozen revisions of the worksheet root page and both public solutions is recorded as Arbota; this is revision provenance, not a replacement for Holger Brenner’s authorship credit. Translation, checking, and production of the edition were assisted by OpenAI Codex gpt-5.6-sol, Ultra.

English Markdown source

Media credits for Unit 30

Lecture 30 contains one substantive reader media position. Full metadata, description-page revisions, original-file SHA-1 hashes, component licensing routes, and witness copies are recorded in the Unit 30 asset closure. The two official upstream PDFs are visual/build authority witnesses, not reader media positions.

  1. Two cubic curves with nine points of intersection - File:Two cubic curves.png, created and uploaded by Hack (the earlier upload is recorded as Hack~commonswiki), own work made with Mathematica 6.0, public domain. The inline course credit also names Hack and PD. The local file is 250 x 251 pixels, 7,957 bytes, SHA-256 489afccf2128371df697f6121da75c376f4910a2404dfe572c7ae7adbdac663a, at authority/assets/Two_cubic_curves.png.

The official Lecture 30 PDF is a seven-page A4 file from 2012, recorded as 90,813 bytes with SHA-1 693ce1c8eba815282b96746054049bf12a46119f. The official Worksheet 30 PDF is a two-page A4 file from 2012, recorded as 38,514 bytes with SHA-1 ffc2e642d73d802b9c1f520607a8e00f440dffee. Neither binary is available locally: one bounded retrieval on 1 September 2026 made exactly one request to each canonical endpoint, and both again returned HTTP 429 with text/html. No local SHA-256 is therefore claimed. The retrieval evidence and status are bound in the Unit 30 authority freeze; this metadata is not used to claim that the 2012 PDFs are identical to the 2026 semantic pages that govern the edition’s text.

The PDF file-description pages retain the older print route and the licence statements recorded in the Unit 30 rights ledger, whereas the semantic/course text and its translation follow CC BY-SA 4.0. This edition makes no blanket licensing claim over that mixed collection.

Holger Brenner’s upstream semantic text and its derivative translation follow the CC BY-SA 4.0 route. This English edition is an independent derivative and implies no endorsement or official affiliation. The contributors to the frozen revisions of the Lecture 30 and Worksheet 30 root pages and the public solution are recorded as revision provenance, not as a replacement for Holger Brenner’s authorship credit. Translation, checking, and production of the edition were assisted by OpenAI Codex gpt-5.6-sol, Ultra.

English Markdown source